C 2 UG

CAESAR II
User's Guide
Version 2018 (10.0)
July 2017
Copyright
Copyright © 1985-2017 CADWorx® and Analysis Solutions, a division of Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part
of Hexagon.
Including software, documentation, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license
agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph
Corporation.
Contains RealDWG™ by Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1998-2017 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions of the user interface copyright © 2012-2017 Telerik AD.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed
at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through
(d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and
its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department
of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are
as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as
guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the Software License Agreement ("SLA") delivered with the software
product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has a
valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and
govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license
agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as
defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial use.
The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a SLA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for
any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a
modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication
date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
CAESAR II User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users
should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE
OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH
CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT
WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER
THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS LIABILITY
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s commercial-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any
technical data related thereto (“Technical Data”), obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, is subject to the
export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent
prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized software, Technical Data,
and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not be
exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any national of these countries or territories.
b. To any person or entity listed on any United States government denial list, including, but not limited to, the United States
Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially
Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List
(https://build.export.gov/main/ecr/eg_main_023148).
c. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the software product, customized software, Technical
Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation software product, customized software, Technical Data
and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PPM’s Export
Compliance Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at exportcompliance@intergraph.com. Customer
shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses and/or
damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.
Trademarks
Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo ®, Intergraph Smart®, SmartPlant® , SmartMarine, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud® , PDS®,
FrameWorks® , I-Route, I-Export, ISOGEN®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager®, SupportModeler ®, SAPPHIRE®, TANK, PV Elite®,
® ® ® ®
CADWorx , CADWorx DraftPro , GTSTRUDL , and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or
its affiliates, parents, subsidiaries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their
respective owners.

Contents
What's New in CAESAR II .................................................................................................................... 19
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 23
About the CAESAR II Documentation .............................................................................................. 24
Software Support/User Assistance................................................................................................... 24
Software Revision Procedures ......................................................................................................... 25
Updates and License Types ............................................................................................................. 27
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................................... 28

Starting CAESAR II.......................................................................................................................... 29
Understanding Jobs ......................................................................................................................... 29
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................... 30
Create a new job ....................................................................................................................... 30
Basic Operation - Generate piping input .................................................................................... 31
Basic Operation - Check for errors in the model ......................................................................... 33
Basic Operation - Build load cases ............................................................................................ 34
Run a static analysis.................................................................................................................. 35
Basic Operation - Review static output....................................................................................... 35
Main Window ................................................................................................................................... 36
File Menu .................................................................................................................................. 37
Input Menu ................................................................................................................................ 39
Analysis Menu ........................................................................................................................... 39
Output Menu ............................................................................................................................. 42
Language Menu ........................................................................................................................ 44
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................... 44
Diagnostics Menu ...................................................................................................................... 46
ESL Menu ................................................................................................................................. 48
View Menu ................................................................................................................................ 49
FEA Tools Menu........................................................................................................................ 49
Help Menu................................................................................................................................. 50
Quick Access Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 53
Configuration Editor ............................................................................................................................ 55

Computational Control ..................................................................................................................... 57
Convergence Tolerances ........................................................................................................... 57
Input Spreadsheet Defaults ....................................................................................................... 59
Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................... 61
Database Definitions ........................................................................................................................ 64
Databases ................................................................................................................................. 64
ODBC Settings .......................................................................................................................... 69
FRP Pipe Properties ........................................................................................................................ 69
Material Properties .................................................................................................................... 70
Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 72
Geometry Directives ........................................................................................................................ 73

Contents
Bends........................................................................................................................................ 73
Input Items ................................................................................................................................ 74
Graphic Settings .............................................................................................................................. 76
Advanced Options ..................................................................................................................... 77
Background Colors .................................................................................................................... 78
CADWorx Options ..................................................................................................................... 78
Component Colors .................................................................................................................... 80
Marker Options .......................................................................................................................... 82
Miscellaneous Options............................................................................................................... 82
Output Colors ............................................................................................................................ 87
Text Options .............................................................................................................................. 88
Visual Options ........................................................................................................................... 89
Miscellaneous Options ..................................................................................................................... 92
Input Items ................................................................................................................................ 92
Output Items.............................................................................................................................. 94
System Level Items ................................................................................................................... 95
SIFs and Stresses ........................................................................................................................... 97
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................................... 97
Code-Specific Settings .............................................................................................................. 99
General Settings...................................................................................................................... 102
Legacy Settings....................................................................................................................... 107
Set/Change Password ................................................................................................................... 109
New Password ........................................................................................................................ 110
Access Protected Data ............................................................................................................ 110
Change Password ................................................................................................................... 110
Remove Password .................................................................................................................. 110
Piping Input Reference ...................................................................................................................... 111

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 112
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the Function Keys .................................. 113
Help Screens and Units ........................................................................................................... 113
Node Numbers ........................................................................................................................ 113
Deltas...................................................................................................................................... 115
Pipe Sizes ............................................................................................................................... 118
Operating Conditions ............................................................................................................... 121
Component Information ........................................................................................................... 125
Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................... 158
Loading Conditions.................................................................................................................. 204
Materials ................................................................................................................................. 209
Material Elastic Properties ....................................................................................................... 234
Densities ................................................................................................................................. 236
Line Number............................................................................................................................ 239
Element Name ........................................................................................................................ 240
Available Commands ..................................................................................................................... 240
File Menu ................................................................................................................................ 240
Edit Menu ................................................................................................................................ 248
Model Menu ............................................................................................................................ 257
Environment Menu .................................................................................................................. 304
Global Menu ............................................................................................................................ 345
Options Menu .......................................................................................................................... 352

Contents
View Menu .............................................................................................................................. 365

Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................. 385
3D Modeler .................................................................................................................................... 392
Building Models Quickly........................................................................................................... 395
Configuring 3D Graphics ......................................................................................................... 400
Changing the Model Display .................................................................................................... 402
Highlighting Graphics .............................................................................................................. 403
Manipulating the Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 405
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads .............................. 405
Saving an Image for Later Presentation ................................................................................... 406
Walking Through the Model ..................................................................................................... 408
Moving Elements ..................................................................................................................... 408
S3D/SPR Model View .................................................................................................................... 410
Load an S3D/SPR Model......................................................................................................... 410
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model .................................................................................................... 414
Dim S3D/SPR Model ............................................................................................................... 414
S3D/SPR Visibility Options ...................................................................................................... 414
Structural Steel Modeler .................................................................................................................... 416

Structural Steel Model Basics ........................................................................................................ 416
Structural Steel Graphics ............................................................................................................... 422
CAESAR II Structural Input ............................................................................................................ 423
Create a model using the Structural Steel Wizard .................................................................... 424
Structural Steel Input Examples ..................................................................................................... 426
Structural Steel Example #1 .................................................................................................... 426
Insert Menu ................................................................................................................................... 452
Before Current Element ........................................................................................................... 452
After the Current Element ........................................................................................................ 452
At End of Model ....................................................................................................................... 452
Commands Menu .......................................................................................................................... 452
Node ....................................................................................................................................... 452
NFill ........................................................................................................................................ 453
NGen ...................................................................................................................................... 454
Fix ........................................................................................................................................... 455
Elem........................................................................................................................................ 458
EFill......................................................................................................................................... 459
EGen....................................................................................................................................... 461
EDim ....................................................................................................................................... 464
Angle....................................................................................................................................... 465
Unif ......................................................................................................................................... 467
Orient ...................................................................................................................................... 468
Load ........................................................................................................................................ 470
Wind........................................................................................................................................ 471
GLoads ................................................................................................................................... 473
MatId ....................................................................................................................................... 473
SecId....................................................................................................................................... 475
Free End Connections - FREE................................................................................................. 477
Beams..................................................................................................................................... 479

Contents
Braces ..................................................................................................................................... 482

Columns.................................................................................................................................. 484
Default .................................................................................................................................... 487
Comment ................................................................................................................................ 487
Vertical .................................................................................................................................... 488
Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 489
List Options ............................................................................................................................. 489
Structural Databases ..................................................................................................................... 490
AISC 1977 Database ............................................................................................................... 490
AISC 1989 Database ............................................................................................................... 497
Australian 1990 Database ....................................................................................................... 503
German 1991 Database .......................................................................................................... 504
South African 1992 Database .................................................................................................. 506
Korean 1990 Database............................................................................................................ 507
UK 1993 Database .................................................................................................................. 508
Underground Pipe Modeler ............................................................................................................... 509

Buried Pipe Modeler Window ......................................................................................................... 511
From Node .............................................................................................................................. 512
To Node .................................................................................................................................. 512
Soil Model No. ......................................................................................................................... 513
From/To End Mesh.................................................................................................................. 513
User-Defined Lateral "K" .......................................................................................................... 514
Ultimate Lateral Load .............................................................................................................. 514
User-Defined Axial Stif............................................................................................................. 514
Ultimate Axial Load.................................................................................................................. 514
User-Defined Upward Stif ........................................................................................................ 515
Ultimate Upward Load ............................................................................................................. 515
User-Defined Downward Stif.................................................................................................... 515
Ultimate Downward Load ......................................................................................................... 515
Soil Models .................................................................................................................................... 516
CAESAR II Basic Model .......................................................................................................... 516
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ..................................................................................... 518
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 522
Model an underground piping system............................................................................................. 529
Buried Pipe Example ..................................................................................................................... 530
Static Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 536

Static Analysis Overview................................................................................................................ 536
Error Checking ........................................................................................................................ 536
What is a Load Case? ............................................................................................................. 538
Working with Load Cases .............................................................................................................. 542
Editing Multiple Load Cases .................................................................................................... 543
Building Static Load Cases ...................................................................................................... 543
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC) Load Cases ........................ 553
Providing Wind Data ................................................................................................................ 554
Providing Wave Data ............................................................................................................... 555
Running the Static Analysis ..................................................................................................... 556
Controlling Results .................................................................................................................. 558

Contents
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box ............................................................................... 558

Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................ 559
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................. 572
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................ 591
Static Output Processor .................................................................................................................... 595

Work with Reports ......................................................................................................................... 596
Filter Reports........................................................................................................................... 597
Filters Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 599
Print or Save Reports to File Notes .......................................................................................... 603
Standard Reports .......................................................................................................................... 604
Displacements Report ............................................................................................................. 605
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates...................................................................... 606
Restraint Summary .................................................................................................................. 608
Nozzle Check Report ............................................................................................................... 609
Flange Reports ........................................................................................................................ 609
Global Element Forces ............................................................................................................ 611
Global Element Forces Extended ............................................................................................ 612
Local Element Forces .............................................................................................................. 613
Stresses .................................................................................................................................. 614
Stresses Extended .................................................................................................................. 615
Stress Summary ...................................................................................................................... 616
Code Compliance Report ........................................................................................................ 617
Cumulative Usage Report ........................................................................................................ 618
Bend KHK2 Evaluation Report ................................................................................................. 619
General Computed Results ............................................................................................................ 619
Load Case Report ................................................................................................................... 620
Hanger Table with Text............................................................................................................ 620
Input Echo ............................................................................................................................... 621
Miscellaneous Data ................................................................................................................. 622
Warnings ................................................................................................................................. 623
Output Viewer Wizard .................................................................................................................... 623
Report Template Editor .................................................................................................................. 624
Available Commands ..................................................................................................................... 627
View Menu .............................................................................................................................. 627
Options Menu .......................................................................................................................... 632
Plot Options Menu ................................................................................................................... 640
Plot View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 654
Element Viewer Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 657
Dynamic Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 658

Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems ................................................................................................. 658
Random .................................................................................................................................. 660
Harmonic................................................................................................................................. 660
Impulse ................................................................................................................................... 662
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ...................................................................................... 664
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ........................................................................................................... 665
The Dynamic Analysis Window ...................................................................................................... 666
Modal Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 667

Contents
Harmonic Analysis ................................................................................................................... 668

Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis ............................................................................... 668
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis .................................................. 668
Time History Analysis .............................................................................................................. 669
Excitation Frequencies Tab............................................................................................................ 669
Starting Frequency .................................................................................................................. 670
Ending Frequency ................................................................................................................... 670
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 670
Load Cycles ............................................................................................................................ 671
Harmonic Forces Tab .................................................................................................................... 671
Force....................................................................................................................................... 673
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 673
Phase...................................................................................................................................... 673
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 673
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 673
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 673
Harmonic Displacements Tab ........................................................................................................ 674
Displacement .......................................................................................................................... 676
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 676
Phase...................................................................................................................................... 676
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 676
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 676
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 677
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab .......................................................................................... 677
Name ...................................................................................................................................... 679
Range Type............................................................................................................................. 680
Ordinate Type ......................................................................................................................... 680
Range Interpol......................................................................................................................... 680
Ordinate Interpol...................................................................................................................... 680
Examples ................................................................................................................................ 681
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ........................................................................................ 682
Spectrum/Time History Profile ................................................................................................. 685
Factor...................................................................................................................................... 685
Dir. .......................................................................................................................................... 685
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 686
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 686
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 687
Anchor Movement ................................................................................................................... 687
Force Set # ............................................................................................................................. 687
Force Sets Tab ........................................................................................................................ 687
Examples ................................................................................................................................ 693
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ................................................................................................. 697
Load Case............................................................................................................................... 700
Factor...................................................................................................................................... 700
Examples ................................................................................................................................ 700
Lumped Masses Tab ..................................................................................................................... 704
Mass ....................................................................................................................................... 704
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 704
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 704
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 705
Increments .............................................................................................................................. 705

Contents
Snubbers Tab ................................................................................................................................ 705

Stiffness .................................................................................................................................. 706
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 706
Node ....................................................................................................................................... 706
CNode..................................................................................................................................... 706
Control Parameters Tab ................................................................................................................. 707
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist)................................................... 710
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status ...................................................................... 720
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated ........................................................................................ 721
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ............................................................................................................. 723
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) .................................................... 724
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec).................................................................................................. 725
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical).......................................................................................... 725
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases ....................................... 726
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ................................................... 730
Spatial or Modal Combination First .......................................................................................... 730
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ............................................................................... 731
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) ................................................. 731
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) .................................................. 734
Include Missing Mass Components.......................................................................................... 735
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS)................................................ 737
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)..................................................................... 737
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ......................................................................... 737
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT).................................................................................... 738
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues ................................................................. 738
Advanced Tab ............................................................................................................................... 739
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues .......................................................... 739
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ......................................................................................................... 739
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ....................................................................................... 740
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ................................................................................................... 740
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) ............................................................... 740
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ......................................................................... 741
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization.................................................................... 741
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ................................................................... 741
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) .......................................................................................... 742
Frequency Array Spaces ......................................................................................................... 742
Directive Builder ............................................................................................................................ 742
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .............................................................................................................. 743
Range ..................................................................................................................................... 744
Ordinate .................................................................................................................................. 744
DLF/Spectrum Generator ............................................................................................................... 744
Spectrum Name ...................................................................................................................... 745
Spectrum Type ........................................................................................................................ 745
Generate Spectrum ................................................................................................................. 754
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................................................................... 754
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig ............................................................ 755
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids ............................................................................................. 758
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis........................................................................... 760
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis........................................................................ 763
Analysis Results ............................................................................................................................ 765
Modal ...................................................................................................................................... 765

Contents
Harmonic................................................................................................................................. 766
Spectrum................................................................................................................................. 767
Time History ............................................................................................................................ 767
Dynamic Output Processing ............................................................................................................. 768

Dynamic Output Window ............................................................................................................... 768
Open a Job ............................................................................................................................. 770
Enter a Report Title ................................................................................................................. 771
View Load Cases .................................................................................................................... 772
Send Reports to Microsoft Word .............................................................................................. 772
View Reports ........................................................................................................................... 772
Dynamic Output Animation Window ............................................................................................... 785
Save Animation to File............................................................................................................. 786
Animation of Static Results -Displacements ............................................................................. 787
Animation of Dynamic Results –Modal/Spectrum ..................................................................... 787
Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic .............................................................................. 787
Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History .......................................................................... 788
Relief Load Synthesis Results........................................................................................................ 789
Generate Stress Isometrics ............................................................................................................... 790

Add input feature information ......................................................................................................... 791
Add output feature information ....................................................................................................... 791
Add custom annotations for nodal features .................................................................................... 792
Add custom annotations for elemental features .............................................................................. 792
Set project information ................................................................................................................... 793
Configure annotation preferences .................................................................................................. 793
Configure isometric drawing split points ......................................................................................... 794
Create a drawing using the default style ......................................................................................... 796
Create a drawing using an existing style ........................................................................................ 797
Create a drawing using a new style ................................................................................................ 798
Create and save an annotation template ........................................................................................ 799
Apply a template ............................................................................................................................ 799
Stress Isometric Tutorials............................................................................................................... 800
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style .......................... 801
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features ....................................................... 803
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences ............................ 807
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template................................................................. 810
Equipment Component and Compliance .......................................................................................... 813

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ...................................................................................... 815
Intersection Type ..................................................................................................................... 817
Piping Code ID ........................................................................................................................ 817
Header Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................................................ 818
Header Pipe Wall Thickness .................................................................................................... 818
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter................................................................................................. 818
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness .................................................................................................... 818
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection .................................................................................. 819
Pad Thickness......................................................................................................................... 819
Intersection Crotch Radius....................................................................................................... 819

Contents
Intersection Crotch Thickness.................................................................................................. 819

Extrusion Crotch Radius .......................................................................................................... 819
Weld Type ............................................................................................................................... 820
Ferritic Material........................................................................................................................ 820
Use Notes 6, 9, 10................................................................................................................... 820
Meets 3673.2b Notes 10, 11 .................................................................................................... 820
Design Temperature ................................................................................................................ 820
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ................................................................................................ 820
Bend Tab ................................................................................................................................ 821
Trunnion Tab ........................................................................................................................... 825
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses .................................................................... 827
WRC Bulletin 107(537) ............................................................................................................ 829
WRC Bulletin 297 .................................................................................................................... 848
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations .............................................................................................. 857
Flange Tab .............................................................................................................................. 859
Bolts and Gasket Tab .............................................................................................................. 862
Material Data Tab .................................................................................................................... 871
Loads Tab ............................................................................................................................... 873
Flange Rating .......................................................................................................................... 874
Flange Dimension Lookup ....................................................................................................... 876
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G).......................................................................... 877
Data Tab ................................................................................................................................. 879
Measurements Tab.................................................................................................................. 880
Expansion Joint Rating .................................................................................................................. 881
Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 884
Displacements and Rotations .................................................................................................. 885
Allowables ............................................................................................................................... 885
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ...................................................................................................... 886
Global Input............................................................................................................................. 888
Local Member Data Tab .......................................................................................................... 891
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ...................................................................................................... 894
NEMA Turbine Example .......................................................................................................... 895
NEMA Input Data Tab ............................................................................................................. 898
Errors/Warnings Tab ............................................................................................................... 900
Equipment Report Tab............................................................................................................. 900
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ......................................................................................................... 900
Analyze custom piping load cases on a centrifugal pump ......................................................... 901
Analyze load cases imported from a model on a centrifugal pump ........................................... 902
API-610 Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 903
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)................................................................................................ 911
API 617 Input Tab ................................................................................................................... 912
Suction Nozzle Tab ................................................................................................................. 913
Discharge Nozzle Tab ............................................................................................................. 915
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab ......................................................................................................... 916
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab ......................................................................................................... 917
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) .......................................................................................... 918
Input Data Tab ........................................................................................................................ 920
Inlet Nozzle Tab ...................................................................................................................... 921
Outlet Nozzle Tab .................................................................................................................... 922
HEI Standard ................................................................................................................................. 923
HEI Nozzle .............................................................................................................................. 924

Contents
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)................................................................... 925

API 560 Input Data Tab ........................................................................................................... 926
Technical Discussions....................................................................................................................... 929

Rigid Element Application .............................................................................................................. 929
Rigid Weight ............................................................................................................................ 929
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements ................................................................................................ 930
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements........................................................................................ 930
In-Line Flange Evaluation .............................................................................................................. 931
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method ....................................................................................... 931
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged Joints with High Strength
Bolting ..................................................................................................................................... 931
Cold Spring.................................................................................................................................... 933
Expansion Joints ........................................................................................................................... 935
Effective ID.............................................................................................................................. 937
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ................................................................................................................ 938
Spring Design Requirements ................................................................................................... 938
Restrained Weight Case .......................................................................................................... 938
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 – Setting Hanger Deflection through the Operating
Case ....................................................................................................................................... 939
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) – Setting the Actual Installed (Cold) Load ....................... 939
Create Spring Load Cases....................................................................................................... 940
Constant Effort Support ........................................................................................................... 940
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design Algorithm ................................................. 940
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing ................................................................................................. 941
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ............................................................................................................ 941
Modeling Friction Effects ................................................................................................................ 944
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................................................................... 945
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints................................................................................. 945
Notes on Occasional Load Cases ............................................................................................ 948
Static Seismic Inertial Loads .......................................................................................................... 949
Wind Loads ................................................................................................................................... 950
Elevation ................................................................................................................................. 951
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading................................................................................... 952
Ocean Wave Particulars .......................................................................................................... 953
Applicable Wave Theory Determination ................................................................................... 954
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading ..................................................................................... 955
Airy Wave Theory Implementation ........................................................................................... 956
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation ................................................................... 956
Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation........................................................................ 957
Ocean Currents ....................................................................................................................... 957
Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading ........................................................... 958
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II ...................................................... 961
Current Data............................................................................................................................ 962
Wave Data .............................................................................................................................. 962
Seawater Data ........................................................................................................................ 964
Piping Element Data................................................................................................................ 964
References .............................................................................................................................. 965
Creep Loading ............................................................................................................................... 965
Evaluating Vessel Stresses............................................................................................................ 967

Contents
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007).................... 968
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107 ......................................................... 969
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle
Analysis pre-2007.................................................................................................................... 970
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified Analysis pre-2007 ............................... 971
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................................................................. 972
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads ................................................................................ 975
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ................................................................................................ 976
Fatigue Basics......................................................................................................................... 976
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems ......................................................................................... 977
Static Analysis Fatigue Example .............................................................................................. 978
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................. 985
Creating the .FAT Files ............................................................................................................ 986
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses ............................................................................................... 987
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping................................................................................................ 989
Underlying Theory ................................................................................................................... 989
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II............................................................................................. 1003
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions ................................................................................... 1009
Code Compliance Considerations ................................................................................................ 1013
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on Piping Code Calculations ................ 1013
Code-Specific Notes .............................................................................................................. 1018
Local Coordinates ........................................................................................................................ 1052
Other Global Coordinate Systems.......................................................................................... 1054
The Right Hand Rule ............................................................................................................. 1054
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems.............................................................................. 1056
Defining a Model ................................................................................................................... 1058
Using Local Coordinates........................................................................................................ 1060
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions ................................................................................ 1060
Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates .................................................................. 1064
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates ......................................................................... 1069
Transforming from Global to Local ......................................................................................... 1069
Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................................................. 1070
Miscellaneous Processors .............................................................................................................. 1072

Material Database........................................................................................................................ 1072
Add a new material to the database ....................................................................................... 1074
Delete a material from the database ...................................................................................... 1075
Edit a material in the database............................................................................................... 1075
Material Number.................................................................................................................... 1075
Material Name ....................................................................................................................... 1075
Applicable Piping Code.......................................................................................................... 1076
Composition/Type ................................................................................................................. 1076
Material Density..................................................................................................................... 1076
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) ....................................................................................... 1076
Eff, Cf, z ................................................................................................................................ 1077
Cold Elastic Modulus ............................................................................................................. 1077
Poisson's Ratio...................................................................................................................... 1077
FAC ...................................................................................................................................... 1077
Laminate Type ...................................................................................................................... 1078
Eh / Ea .................................................................................................................................. 1078

Contents
Temperature.......................................................................................................................... 1078
Exp. Coeff. ............................................................................................................................ 1078
Allowable Stress .................................................................................................................... 1078
Elastic Modulus ..................................................................................................................... 1079
Yield Stress ........................................................................................................................... 1079
Ult Tensile Stress .................................................................................................................. 1079
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) ..................................................................................... 1079
Temperature Dependent Stress Value ................................................................................... 1080
Material Selection Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 1080
Database Status (Consistency Check) Dialog Box ................................................................. 1080
Accounting................................................................................................................................... 1081
Activating the Accounting System .......................................................................................... 1082
Units File Operations ................................................................................................................... 1087
Create/Review Units .............................................................................................................. 1087
Change Model Units .............................................................................................................. 1090
Batch Stream Processing............................................................................................................. 1090
Define Jobs to Run ................................................................................................................ 1091
Analyze Specified Jobs.......................................................................................................... 1091
CAESAR II Error Processing........................................................................................................ 1092
External Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 1093

CAESAR II Neutral File ................................................................................................................ 1093
Basic Element Data ............................................................................................................... 1094
Auxiliary Element Data .......................................................................................................... 1097
Miscellaneous Data Group #1................................................................................................ 1106
Units Conversion Data ........................................................................................................... 1112
Nodal Coordinate Data .......................................................................................................... 1115
Version and Job Title Information .......................................................................................... 1115
Control Information ................................................................................................................ 1115
Neutral File Generator ........................................................................................................... 1116
CAESAR II Data Matrix ................................................................................................................ 1117
Data Export Wizard...................................................................................................................... 1118
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog Box ....................................................................... 1120
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box .......................................................................... 1120
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog Box ....................................................................... 1145
AFT IMPULSE ............................................................................................................................. 1155
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface................................................................................ 1155
Filename ............................................................................................................................... 1156
Component List ..................................................................................................................... 1156
Maximum Points on Each DLF Curve .................................................................................... 1156
Frequency Cut-Off ................................................................................................................. 1156
PIPENET ..................................................................................................................................... 1157
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface ..................................................................... 1157
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface ................................................................... 1157
Filename ............................................................................................................................... 1158
Component List ..................................................................................................................... 1158
LIQT ............................................................................................................................................ 1159
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface .................................................................................. 1159

Contents
How to Use the LIQT Interface............................................................................................... 1160

Example 1 ............................................................................................................................. 1160
Example 2 ............................................................................................................................. 1162
Filename ............................................................................................................................... 1164
Component List ..................................................................................................................... 1164
Pipeplus ...................................................................................................................................... 1165
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface ......................................................................................... 1165
FlowMaster .................................................................................................................................. 1168
How to Use the Flowmaster Interface .................................................................................... 1168
Filename ............................................................................................................................... 1169
Component List ..................................................................................................................... 1169
Intergraph CADWorx Plant........................................................................................................... 1170
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF ............................................................................................................ 1170
Intergraph PDS ............................................................................................................................ 1170
File Name.............................................................................................................................. 1171
Browse .................................................................................................................................. 1171
Minimum Anchor Node .......................................................................................................... 1172
Maximum Anchor Node ......................................................................................................... 1172
Start Node ............................................................................................................................. 1172
Increment .............................................................................................................................. 1172
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than ................................................................ 1172
Remove HA Elements ........................................................................................................... 1172
Force Consistent Bend Materials ........................................................................................... 1172
Include Additional Bend Nodes .............................................................................................. 1172
Enable Advanced Element Sort ............................................................................................. 1173
Model TEES as 3 Elements ................................................................................................... 1173
Initialize Global Coordinates .................................................................................................. 1173
Condenses Flanges/Valves ................................................................................................... 1173
Model Rotation ...................................................................................................................... 1173
Neutral File Weight Units ....................................................................................................... 1173
Neutral File Insulation Units ................................................................................................... 1173
Data Modification and Details ................................................................................................ 1174
Example Neutral File from PDS ............................................................................................. 1174
Intergraph Data After Element Sort ........................................................................................ 1182
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications ...................................................................... 1183
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications .............................................................................. 1184
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications ............................................................................... 1187
CADPIPE .................................................................................................................................... 1193
CADPIPE Example Transfer .................................................................................................. 1195
General Notes ....................................................................................................................... 1199
Error Code Statements .......................................................................................................... 1199
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion.............................................................................................. 1200
Section 1 - Entity Information ................................................................................................. 1201
Section 2-Segment Information.............................................................................................. 1202
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data ............................................................................................ 1203
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer ................................................................. 1204
Import PCF .................................................................................................................................. 1205

Contents
PCF Interface Custom Attributes ........................................................................................... 1205

How to Use the PCF Interface ............................................................................................... 1219
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases ................................................................................ 1226
DSN Setup ............................................................................................................................ 1226
Controlling the Data Export .................................................................................................... 1229
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data .................................................................................................. 1230
Update History ................................................................................................................................. 1233

CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84)........................................................................................... 1234
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ..................................................................................... 1234
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) ................................................................................... 1235
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87)..................................................................................... 1236
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ..................................................................................... 1236
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ....................................................................................... 1237
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ..................................................................................... 1238
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations ............................................................................... 1239
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations ...................................................................................... 1239
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad ................................................................................ 1239
Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................... 1239
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) ................................................................................... 1240
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) ................................................................................... 1243
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ...................................................... 1244
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95).......................................................... 1246
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ..................................................................................... 1247
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97).......................................................... 1248
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) .................................................... 1253
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07) ..................................................... 1254

Contents
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................... 1267
Index ................................................................................................................................................. 1271

What's New in CAESAR II
The latest CAESAR II release delivers a number of significant new and extended capabilities in
response to current market requirements, as well as direct feedback from the growing CAESAR II
user community. The following changes have been made to CAESAR II:
CAESAR II 2018, Version 10.00
Piping and Equipment Codes
 Added support for KHK Level II seismic analysis, including the following features:
 Redesigned and improved the Seismic Wizard with an easy-to-use interface. You can
select the KHK design code, choose seismic level 1 or 2, and calculate a seismic load (g).
 Added new load case Stress Types to support level 2 analysis (K2P, K2SA, K2SR, K2L).
 Added a new KHK Level 2 Bend Evaluation Report, which reports on bend behavior in
the system.
 Added a new Seismic Analysis section to the Miscellaneous Data Options report. The
section summarizes seismic input and calculated g factors (magnifiers of gravitational
loading).
 Updated the calculations for longitudinal pressure stress in the B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8
Chapter VIII, Canadian Z662 Chapter 11, and Det Norske Veritas (DNV) offshore codes.
 Added support for B31.3 Chapter IX (high pressure).
 Updated the following codes: B31.3 -2016, B31.8 -2016, B31.8 Ch VIII -2016, and EN-13480
-2014 (Issued 2016).
 Updated to the latest code standards for JPI-7S-77-10 (2010) and HPGSL/KHK (2012).
Material and Content

 Updated to support the latest edition of the JPI and HPGSL codes. The updates include the
following improvements:
 Updated materials applicable to the JPI and HPGSL codes in the Material Database
Editor. Also, updated Japanese custom material databases (UMAT_HP&JPI.UMD and
UMAT_MHI.UMD) with new materials.
 Added an Unspecified option to the Type field in the Material Database Editor for the
HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
 Updated EN-13480 materials and fixed miscellaneous issues:
 Added new materials from EN 10216-2:2013, EN 10216-5:2013, and EN 10217-7:2014.
 Updated the content of existing EN 10216-5:2013 materials.
 Corrected the density for 429 (304L) stainless steel.
 Added yield stress data and corrected the density for numerous EN materials.
 Corrected the thermal expansion coefficient and elastic modulus for 1.4462S and
1.4462W.
 EN 10216-2:2013 (200,000 hr) materials are now available for CODETI.

 Russian materials are available for the B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, and B31.8 codes. The software
references these materials from the User Material Database (UMD) file. For more information,
see User Material Database Filename (on page 67) in the CAESAR II User’s Guide or Online
Help.
 B31.4 Chapter XI, formerly B31.11, uses the same materials as B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter IX.
 Improved display of Maximum (FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ) values in the Static Output
Processor graphics. Values display on the applicable From Node or To Node, in centerline
mode, and at the correct structural node (for steel elements).
Configuration
 New DirectX 9, DirectX 11, OpenGL2, and CAESAR II Determines video driver options
were added to the Graphics Settings tab in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor. The
Video Driver configuration setting now defaults to CAESAR II Determines, which means the
software intelligently selects the appropriate video driver to use based on your system
settings. In addition, the active video driver now displays on the status bar at the bottom of the
CAESAR II main window.
Support and Element Identification

Enhanced identification for restraints, hangers, and elements throughout the software:
 Expanded the Restraints auxiliary panel with two additional restraint definitions to support six
degrees of freedom.
 Added a new Tag field for each restraint definition.
 Added new Tag and GUID columns to the Restraints list input. These fields reflect the new
capability of the software to read and import support ID and display-only support GUID data
from PCF files.
 Added Tag field to the Hangers auxiliary panel and to in the Piping Input.
 Update the Hangers list input to include the hanger Tag and the display-only hanger GUID
columns. These fields reflect the new capability of the software to read and import hanger ID
and display-only hanger GUID data from PCF files.
 Added the Element Name field to the Piping Input window and to the Elements list input.
Element names also display in force reports, stress output reports, and stress isometric
drawings.
 The software now allows you to customize the mapping options for attributes in the PCF file.
For example, you can map the attribute definitions from the NAME or TAG attributes to the
Tag field. You can also display tag and GUID data in annotations in stress isometric drawings.
 Added the Show Tags option to Options > Node Numbers to allow the display of support
tags, hanger tags, and element names in the graphic view.
 Added Tag/GUID fields (for supports/restraints, hangers, and element names) in applicable
output reports and in the MDB output tables.
Piping Input
 When you delete pipe elements, the software retains the original nodal coordinates for all
disconnected segments, instead of resetting the starting coordinates of those segments to the
global setting (0,0,0).

 Implemented find and replace functionality within the List dialog. You can use the
Find/Replace option on the right-click menu in the List dialog to search and replace data in a
selected column.
 Set North Direction replaces Model Rotation in the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) and
Special Execution Parameters dialog boxes. Model Orientation replaces Model Rotation
in the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box. You can specify the orientation of the Smart 3D or
SmartPlant Review model to be imported. This is useful when you do not use the default
CAESAR II mapping.
 Added Previous and Invert options to the Line Numbers dialog box in Classic Piping Input
and Static Output Processor. Previous allows you to save the current view and return to the
previous view. Invert allows you to toggle line number selections.
Load Case Editor

 Improved the clarity and functionality of the Delete option in the Static Analysis - Load Case
Editor. When you delete load cases in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor, the Load
Case Delete Confirmation window displays the load cases (and their dependents) that are
deleted or revised. Remaining load cases are renumbered.
3D Model/Graphics
 Enhanced Options > Axis (formerly Compass ) and Configuration Manager (Tools
> Configure/Setup ) to allow display of a North arrow in Classic Piping Input and Static
Output Processor. The North arrow indicates the North orientation of the plant.
 Rotational restraints, such as RX, RY, and RZ, display graphically with rotational arrows.
 Updated the software to ensure consistent functionality when using the Delete and
Backspace keys on the 3D model. Now, if you press Delete when you have selected one
more model components, the software deletes the selected elements. The software no longer
performs an action when pressing the Backspace key when you have a model component
selected. (The Backspace key works within the annotation or the move geometry functions.)
 Added a Mill Tolerance icon to the Legends toolbar. In addition, the Mill Tolerance options
was added to the Options menu on the Classic Piping Input and the PlotOptions menu on
the Static Output Processor.
 Symbols for restraints display on the outside of the pipe and remain visible when you use
Options > Restraints.
 Enhanced the 3D mode so that multiple hangers display separately with leaders at the location
of the hanger when you use Options > Hangers . Previously, the software only displayed
one hanger symbol on a model when you had multiple hangers at the same location.
 Added the Show Fixed option to Options > Displacements to allow the display of fixed
displacement vectors on the 3D model.
Analysis
 Updated the ISO 14692 code stress calculations for load cases using the combination
methods (scalar, max, min, etc.). Previously, the software did not use the effective hoop and
axial stress values when calculating the code stress using the combination methods for
SIGNMAX and SIGNMIN.

 Redesigned the user interface for the API 610 equipment module to improve functionality
and usability. New features include:
 Quick input and viewing of API 610 pumps.
 The Load Case Sets tab lets you quickly define load cases and load case sets with
suction and discharge nozzles.
 Analysis of multiple load cases and multiple pumps.
 Ability to update loads when the results of an imported and linked pipe stress analysis
change.
 Comprehensive, easy-to-read output results on the Output tab.
User Interface
 The Add to Quick Access Toolbar right-click command allows you to add any ribbon
command to the Quick Access toolbar in the main CAESAR II window.
Integration
 Updated the CAESAR II installation wizard to include steps to install the B31J Essentials
product from Paulin Research Group (PRG). B31J Essentials provides a set of calculations for
revised SIFs and flexibility factors, as defined in the upcoming revision to ASME B31J, Stress
Intensification Factors (i-Factors), Flexibility Factors (k-Factors) and their Determination for
Metallic Piping Components. The B31J Essentials product is included with the latest version of
CAESAR II and provides users with the ability to use PRG's FEATools application to perform
the empirical B31J calculations. (CR-TX-20363)
 Added a new Length for Nodal Increment field to the Advanced PCF dialog boxes. This field
sets the nodal increment for imported PCF files based on pipe length, which allows you to add
more node increments for longer lengths of pipe.
Documentation/Help
 Added more explanation and an example for using the Alternate SUS/OCC option of the
Load Case Editor in the Static Analysis section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.
 Revised, reorganized, and added graphics to Tutorial A in the CAESAR II Application Guide.
 To provide better clarity, revised the overview and workflow topics for Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) in the Piping Input Reference section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.

SECTION 1
Introduction
®
CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software package that is developed, marketed
and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design
and analysis of piping systems. Use CAESAR II to create a model of the piping system
represented by simple 3D beam elements and to define the loading conditions imposed on the
system.
With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards.
What are the applications of CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Loads,
displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached
equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31
committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of
piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA).
Hot piping systems present a unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular
structures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the piping, supports, and
attached equipment. These structures must be stiff enough to support their own weight but flexible
enough to accept thermal growth.
CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the capability
of modeling and analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads which can be imposed on the
system. Because of this, CAESAR II is not only a tool for new design. It is also valuable in
troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. You can determine the cause of failure or
evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as fluid to piping interaction or
mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.
Why is CAESAR II from other pipe stress software?

Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in day-to-day software development,
software support, and training. This approach has produced software that most closely fits the
requirements of today’s pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and straight-forward through
dialog boxes. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities without
becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. You can tailor your CAESAR II installation
through default settings and customized databases. Comprehensive input graphics confirm the
model construction before the analysis is made. The software's interactive output processor
presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or printer.
CAESAR II uses standard analysis guidelines and provides the latest recognized opinions for
these analyses.
® ®
CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with Intergraph CADWorx Plant, which is an
®
AutoCAD -based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping
drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts or
creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.

Introduction
CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis application. It is a widely recognized product

with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.
In This Section
About the CAESAR II Documentation ......................................... 24
Software Support/User Assistance .............................................. 24
Software Revision Procedures .................................................... 25
Updates and License Types ........................................................ 26
About the CAESAR II Documentation

The supporting software documentation is organized in the following manuals:
CAESAR II User's Guide - Describes the basic operation and flow of the commands found in
CAESAR II. This manual gives an overview of the software capabilities and introduces model
creation, analysis, and output review. It explains the function of, input for, and output from each
module of the software. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II
calculations. It is intended as a general road map for the software.
CAESAR II Application Guide - Provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples
illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems.
This document contains tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The CAESAR II Application
Guide is a reference providing quick "how to" information on specific subjects.
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide - Provides version and technical change details in addition
to installation and commonly used information. This document also lists the currently implemented
piping codes (with publication and revision dates) and related stress and allowable equations.
You can view and print any of the manuals by clicking Help > Online Documentation on the
CAESAR II Main menu.
Software Support/User Assistance

Intergraph CAS understands that CAESAR II is a complex analysis tool. While the documentation
is intended to explain piping analysis, system modeling, and results interpretation, you may have
additional questions.
We understand the engineer’s need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs. To
that end, we have a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II and piping
issues raised by you. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, e-mail, fax, and the Internet.
We provide this service at no additional charge to you for questions focused on the current version
of the software.
Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS. We
schedule regular training classes in Houston and provide in-house and open attendance training
around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available for modeling, analysis, and
design.
To aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option that
generates an e-mail template with the basic computer and CAESAR II version details. This
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option, click
Help > Email CAESAR II Support.
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default information.

Introduction
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Type the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
 ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General
Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
 Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com
 Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
 Fax: 281-890-3301
 Sales E-mail: sales.cas.ppm@hexagon.com
 Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com)
Software Revision Procedures

CAESAR II is updated continually to reflect engineering code addenda, operational
enhancements, your requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New versions are
planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections necessary to
the current version before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a correction to the
current version is made. This correction is referred to as a service pack update.
How do I find out about software updates?

When a service pack update to the software becomes available, all users who have registered the
software are sent an email announcement. Therefore, it is imperative that you register the
software following installation.
Can software updates be applied to any version?

A software update is intended for a specific version of the software. As the CAESAR II team
releases new versions of the software, new features require additional inputs and options and the
software includes additional information in the software data files. In addition, file formats change,
databases grow, and so on. Applying a software update on a different version of the software,
without specific consent from Intergraph CAS support, puts your software integrity at risk.
How do I download a software update?

You can download software updates from our customer support website, Intergraph Smart
Support. Navigate to find updates in subfolders by the program name. Each update file includes a
description, the file size, and the creation date.
How do I know what is in a software update?

Each service pack update of the software includes a file named BUILD.TXT, which is an ASCII
text file that you can view with any text editor or send to a printer. This file contains a description of
all corrections and enhancements made to the software because the original release of this
specific version. When necessary, additional usage instructions are included in this file.

Introduction
How do I install a service pack update?

Service packs distributed for Windows-based applications use a Windows installation procedure
with a standard SETUP.EXE to actually install the update. This procedure ensures that you
register the necessary files with the system and that the uninstall utility works.
How do I know if there is a new update?

When a service pack update is ready to be released, Help > About CAESAR II is revised to
reflect the service pack number. To see which software modules have been modified, you can run
an Intergraph CAS Program Scanner utility from Diagnostics > Build Version. This utility
scans each of the .EXE modules in the program folder and lists the size, memory requirements,
and build number for each file.
The following shows example results from running the utility.
How do I archive and reinstall an older, patched version?

When the CAESAR II team releases a new version of the software, save any previous distribution
disks sent from Intergraph CAS. Additionally, archive any previous service pack updates. This
allows you full usage of the older version at a later time, if it becomes necessary.
To reinstall an older version of the software, first install the software from Intergraph CAS. Then,
install the latest service pack update. Each update includes the modifications made in all prior
service pack updates.

Introduction
Updates and License Types

You can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is Version
2018 (10.0). Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates periodically, depending on
their scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license that you have determines whether you
receive these updates. There are three types of CAESAR II licenses:
Full Run - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II. Updates, maintenance, and support are
available on an annual basis.
Lease - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support
provided as long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run - Provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an unlimited
period of time, but does not include software updates. Your license is upgraded, if necessary,
whenever you purchase a new set of 50 runs.
Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license you
purchase. Updates will be delivered on request to lease users and to full run users who have a
current support/maintenance contract.

SECTION 2
Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static piping
analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 28)
2. Create a new job (on page 30)
3. Basic Operation - Generate piping input (on page 31)
4. Basic Operation - Check for errors in the model (on page 33)
5. Basic Operation - Build load cases (on page 34)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 35)
7. Basic Operation - Review static output (on page 35)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
In This Section
Starting CAESAR II..................................................................... 28
Understanding Jobs .................................................................... 29
Basic Operation .......................................................................... 30
Main Window .............................................................................. 35

Getting Started
Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II. You may also
have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.
The main CAESAR II window displays.
This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.
2. Click File > Set Default Data Directory.
The Default Data Directory Specification dialog box displays.
3. Define the folder to save your jobs and other CAESAR II data files. The default folder is
C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\Examples.
4. From the Language menu, select your language for the interface.
5. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\System.
6. Using a text editor, open Company.txt and specify your company name on the first line. This
will place your company name is the header of CAESAR II calculations.
Understanding Jobs
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. All subsequent input,
analysis, or output reviews reference the job specified. You create a new job by selecting File >
New or by clicking New on the main toolbar. You open an existing job by selecting File > Open
or by clicking Open on the main toolbar.
After you have created or opened a job, the job name displays in the title bar of the main CAESAR
II window. Use the commands on the Input, Analysis, and Output menus to define, analyze, and
review your data.

Getting Started
Basic Operation
To help you get familiar with CAESAR II, we will step through a basic piping analysis.
Topics
Create a new job......................................................................... 30
Basic Operation - Generate piping input ...................................... 31
Basic Operation - Check for errors in the model .......................... 33
Basic Operation - Build load cases .............................................. 34
Run a static analysis ................................................................... 35
Basic Operation - Review static output ........................................ 35
Create a new job

1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph ICAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II .
The CAESAR II main window displays.
2. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box displays.
3. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type MyFirstPipingModel.
4. Select the Piping Input option.
5. In the Enter the data directory box, type C:\temp\CAESAR II.
You can put your job file in another folder if you want, just remember where and
substitute that folder for C:\temp\CAESAR II when needed.
6. Click OK.
The job is created and the job name displays in the main window title bar.
Next, the Review Current Units dialog box displays.

7. Review the units listed in the dialog box, and then click OK.
The Piping Input window displays.

Getting Started
You can use Input > Piping to activate the Piping Input window.
Basic Operation - Generate piping input

Model input generation consists of describing the piping elements and any external influences
(boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Two node numbers identify each pipe
element end. Every pipe element also requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional, and
material data. One method of data entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.
You define a piping element on its own spreadsheet. Some data, when defined on a piping
element, is automatically duplicated by CAESAR II to subsequent piping spreadsheets. This
means that for many elements you only have to confirm the node numbers and type the
delta-dimensions, and then CAESAR II automatically duplicates from the previous element the
other data such as pipe diameter, operating temperatures, material type, and so forth. You can
always type specific data to override the duplicated data in the piping spreadsheet for an element.
The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands to type auxiliary
processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions
of the piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Piping Input Reference (on page 111).
1. In the DX box, type 10-0 (which is 10 ft).
2. In the Diameter box, type 8 (8-in. nominal).
CAESAR II automatically converts this value to the actual diameter.
3. In the Wt/Sch box, type S (standard schedule pipe wall).
CAESAR II automatically converts this to wall thickness.
4. In the Temp 1 box, type 600 (degrees Fahrenheit).
5. In the Pressure 1 box, type 150 (psig).
6. Double-click the Bend check box.
The Bends tab displays. This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and adds
intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid-points of the bend, respectively (node
20 physically represents the far weld point of the bend).

Getting Started
7. Double-click the Restraint check box.

The Restraint tab displays.
8. In the first Node box, type 10, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
9. Select A106 B from the Material drop list.

This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus elasticity.
10. Double-click the Allowable Stress check box.
The Allowable Stresses tab displays.
11. Select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
12. In the Fluid Den 1 box, type 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity).
The software automatically converts this value to density.
13. After you finish defining the first element, you need to move to the next element. You can do
this by pressing Alt-C, by clicking Continue , or by selecting Edit > Continue from the
menu.
Node numbers are automatically generated in the From and To boxes and data is carried
forward from the previous element.
14. In the DY box, type 10-0 (10 feet).
15. Double-click the Restraint check box.

Getting Started
16. In the first Node box, type 30, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (a well-defined configuration anchored at each end) is complete.
The piping input preprocessor has an interactive graphics and a list view function to make model
editing and verification easier. You can verify your model using the Graphics or List utilities,
although a combination of both modes is recommended. By default, the graphics screen displays
to the right of the input spreadsheet. You can click the small pin in the upper-left corner to collapse
the input spreadsheet to provide maximum graphic space.
Basic Operation - Check for errors in the model

When you are finished modeling, you must run File > Error Check before you can run an
analysis.
The two main functions of this error check are to verify your input data by checking each individual
piping element for consistency and to build the execution data files used by the analysis and
review processes.
Errors that will prevent the analysis from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than the
wall thickness) are flagged as fatal errors and display in red text. Unusual items (such as a change
of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings and display in green text.
Other informational messages that may show intermediate calculations or general notes display in
blue text. All messages display in the Errors and Warnings tab next to the model graphics.

Getting Started
When you double-click an error or warning message, CAESAR II displays the spreadsheet of the
associated element and highlights the element in the graphic display. You can sort error
messages by clicking the column titles. Use File > Print to print the entire error report or
selected sections. Use the options arrow on the Error Check icon to display only fatal errors or all
errors.
If there is a fatal error, you must return to the input module to make corrections. Click the Classic
Piping Input tab or double-click the row number for the error message.
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report displays, the
analysis data files are generated, and the solution phase can commence. If fatal errors do exist,
the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until successful before analysis is permitted.
Basic Operation - Build load cases

After the analysis data files have been created by the error checker, you can run a static analysis.
The first step of a static analysis is to define the load cases. For new jobs (there are no previous
solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to you based on the
load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are usually sufficient to
satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load cases. If the
recommended load cases are not satisfactory, you should modify them.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases .
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box displays.
2. You can build loads two ways:
 Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements, temperatures,
and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or
 Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination cases
by selecting one or more load components and dragging and dropping the basic load cases
from either the Load Defined in Input primitives or from the other previous load cases (by
dragging the load case number) to combine cases (or create new load cases) later in the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static Analysis
- Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 558).

Getting Started
Run a static analysis

After the load cases are defined, you can run the analysis.
1. Select File > Batch Run to run the actual finite element solution.
The analysis creates the element stiffness matrices and load vectors and solves for
displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. The analysis also performs the
design and selection of spring hangers and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for
nonlinear restraints. Finally, the Static Output Processor window displays.
Basic Operation - Review static output

When the analysis is finished, you can review the results using the Static Output Processor
window.
1. On the main CAESAR II window, select Output > Static.
The Static Output Processor window displays.
2. In the Load Case Analyzed list, select one or more load cases for which to review results.
3. In the Standard Reports list, select one or more reports to review.
4. Click --> Add.
5. Select where you want to view the results: the screen, Microsoft Word or Excel, the printer, or
an ASCII file.
6. Click Finish to view the reports.
7. Click Options > Graphical Output to review the analytic results in graphics mode, which can
produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case and the reason for the
analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables, restraint
loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing (such as
equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) might be required depending on the model and
type of analysis.
After you finish reviewing the output, return to the main window by exiting the output review
module.

Getting Started
Main Window
After starting CAESAR II, the software opens the main window consisting of:
1. Quick Access toolbar
2. Ribbon
3. Menu
4. News channel, containing release, event, and training information
5. Status bar
You can keep this window as small as possible to conserve screen space.
Topics
File Menu.................................................................................... 37
Input Menu ................................................................................. 39
Analysis Menu ............................................................................ 39
Output Menu............................................................................... 42
Language Menu.......................................................................... 44
Tools Menu ................................................................................. 44
Diagnostics Menu ....................................................................... 46
ESL Menu................................................................................... 48
View Menu .................................................................................. 49
FEA Tools Menu ......................................................................... 49
Help Menu .................................................................................. 50
Quick Access Toolbar ................................................................. 53

Getting Started
File Menu
Provides commands to create and save piping and structural jobs.
Topics
Set Default Data Directory .......................................................... 37
New ............................................................................................ 37
Open .......................................................................................... 38
Set Default Data Directory

Main window ribbon: File > Specify the default data directory for future work
Main window menu: File > Set Default Data Directory
Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II
options do not require that a job be selected but must know in which directory to work. All
CAESAR II generated data files are written to this directory. The command displays the Default
Data Directory Specification dialog box.
Click Examples to set the default data directory to the examples directory delivered with CAESAR
II.
The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
New
Main window ribbon: Home > New

Main window ribbon: File > New
Main window menu: File > New
Starts a new piping or structural job.
New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the new job file
Specifies the job name.

Getting Started
Piping Input
Indicates that the job is a piping job. The software only displays this radio button option when
you create a new file from the CAESAR II main menu.
Structural Input
Indicates that the job is a structural job. The software only displays this radio button option
when you create a new file from the CAESAR II main menu.
Enter the data directory
Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into the field, or click the
browse button to browse to the directory.
Open
Main window ribbon: Home > Open
Main window ribbon: File > Open
Main window menu: File > Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select the job
file to open. Click System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to jump to the
CAESAR II delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions, deleting the oldest revision when necessary.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select the
revision to rollback to.

Getting Started
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.
Input Menu
The Input menu is used to select the modules to define the job input parameters. Piping and
Underground are available for piping jobs. Structural Steel is available for structural jobs.
Piping
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input

Main window menu: Input > Piping
Defines piping job parameters. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page
111).
Underground
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window menu: Input > Underground
Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see Underground
Pipe Modeler (on page 509).
Structural Steel
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Structural Input

Main window menu: Input > Structural Steel
Defines structural steel for the job. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on
page 416).
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu displays the available calculations in CAESAR II.
Statics
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Static Analysis

Main window menu: Analysis > Statics
Performs static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error checking
the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on
page 558).

Getting Started
Dynamics
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Dynamic Analysis

Main window menu: Analysis > Dynamics
Performs dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis (on page 658).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Intersections

Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Intersections
Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at tee intersections. For
more information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 815)
Bend SIF Scratchpad
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Bends

Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Bends
Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at bends. For more
information, see Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 820).
WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500

Main window menu: Analysis > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see WRC
Bulletin 107(537) (on page 829).
Flanges
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Flanges

Main window menu: Analysis > Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 857).

Getting Started
B31.G
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > B31.G

Main window menu: Analysis > B31.G
Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining Strength
Calculations (B31G) (on page 877).
Expansion Joint Rating
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Expansion Joint Rating
Main window menu: Analysis > Expansion Joint Rating
Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more information, see Expansion Joint
Rating (on page 881).
AISC
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > AISC

Main window menu: Analysis > AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see Structural
Steel Checks - AISC (on page 886).
NEMA SM23
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > NEMA SM23

Main window menu: Analysis > 1 - NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, see NEMA SM23
(Steam Turbines) (on page 893).
API 610
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > API 610

Main window menu: Analysis > 2 - API 610
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610 (Centrifugal
Pumps) (on page 900).

Getting Started
API 617

Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617 (Centrifugal
Compressors) (on page 911).
API 661

Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API 661 (Air
Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 918).
HEI Standard
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > HEI Standard

Main window menu: Analysis > 5 - HEI Standard
Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see HEI Standard (on
page 923).
API 560

Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Fired Heaters for
General Refinery Services) (on page 925).
Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be selected
for review.
Static
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static

Main window menu: Analysis > Static
Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor
(on page 595).

Getting Started
Harmonic
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Harmonic
Displays harmonic loading results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Window (on
page 768).
Spectrum/Modal
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Spectrum/Modal

Main window menu: Analysis > Spectrum/Modal
Displays natural frequency/mode shape calculations or uniform/force spectrum loading
results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Window (on page 768).
Time History
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Time History
Displays time history load simulation results. For more information, see Dynamic Output
Window (on page 768).
Animation - Mode Shape
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Mode Shapes

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Mode Shapes
Displays animated graphic simulations of natural frequency/mode shape calculations or
uniform/force spectrum loading results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Animation
Window (on page 785).
Animation - Harmonic
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Harmonic
Displays animated graphic simulations of harmonic loading results. For more information, see
Dynamic Output Animation Window (on page 785).
Animation - Time History
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Time History
Displays animated graphic simulations of time history load simulation results. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Animation Window (on page 785).

Getting Started
Animation - Static
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Static

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Static
Displays animated graphic simulations of static analysis results. For more information, see
Animation of Static Results -Displacements (on page 787).
Language Menu
CAESAR II supports multiple languages.
English (United States)

Main window menu: Language > English (United States)
Identifies that the current language is English, which is the default language.
Japanese
Main window menu: Language > Japanese
Changes portions of the CAESAR II user interface text and the user documentation to
Japanese.
Many of the CAESAR II modules are available in English and Japanese, such as the
Main Menu, the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Static Load Case Editor, and the Static
Output Processor. Additionally, significant portions of the documentation, including the various
guides and F1 Help information, are translated.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Configure/Setup
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configure
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configure

Main window menu: Tools > Configure/Setup
The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains directives that dictate how CAESAR II will
operate on a particular computer and how it will perform a particular analysis. Each time that
you open the software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data folder. If the
configuration file is not found in the current data folder, the software then searches the
CAESAR II system folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error is
generated and CAESAR II exits. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Material Database
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials

Getting Started
Main window menu: Tools > Materials

Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information, see Material
Database (on page 1072).
Accounting
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Accounting

Main window menu: Tools > Accounting
Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more
information, see Accounting (on page 1081).
Change Model Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
Main window menu: Tools > Change Model Units

Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more information, see Change Model
Units (on page 1090).
Calculator
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Calculator
Main window menu: Tools > Calculator

Launches an on-screen calculator.
Create/Review Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Create/Review Units

Main window menu: Tools > Create/Review Units
Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration. For more information,
see Create/Review Units (on page 1087).
Multi-job Analysis
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Multi-job Analysis

Main window menu: Tools > Multi-job Analysis
Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For more information,
see Batch Stream Processing (on page 1090).
Open System Folder
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Open System Folder

Getting Started
Main window menu: Tools > Open System Folder

Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
External Interfaces
Main window menu: Tools > External Interfaces
Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). For more
information, see External Interfaces (on page 1093).
ISOGEN Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window menu: Tools > ISOGEN Isometrics
Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics (on page
790).
I-Configure
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > I-Configure

Main window menu: Tools > I-Configure
Starts Alias I-Configure.
Reset Layouts to Default

Main window menu: Tools > Reset Layouts to Default
Restores all CAESAR II window layouts to the default positions. In addition, all toolbar
customizations are reset to the default state and your video driver is to OpenGL.
Diagnostics Menu
Activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
CRC Check
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > CRC Check

Main window menu: Diagnostics > CRC Check
Verifies that software files are not corrupted. For more information, see CRC Check (on page
47).
Build Version
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Build Version

Getting Started
Main window menu: Diagnostics > Build Version

Determines the build version of CAESAR II files. For more information, see Build Version (on
page 47).
Error Review
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Error Review

Main window menu: Diagnostics > Error Review
Allows you to look up errors for more information. For more information, see Error Review (on
page 48).
QA Test
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > QA Test
Main window menu: Diagnostics > QA Test

Runs the QATEST software, which compares output file information between a new version
of the software and the previously verified version. For more information, see QA Test (on
page 48).
CRC Check
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > CRC Check

Main window menu: Diagnostics > CRC Check
Assesses whether the version of CAESAR II you are running matches the originally installed files.
Run the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to identify if any files are corrupted. When you click
CRC Check in Utilities > Diagnostics, the software opens the CRCCHK File Verification dialog
box and begins scanning all CAESAR II files. When the scan completes, the CRC Status column
indicates if there were any files that did not match the originally installed software files, and the
File Name column shows the file path. In addition, the scan results show how many files were
read and how many errors the software detected.
The following issues can contribute to a CRC Check failure.
 The distribution DVD is corrupted. Contact CAESAR II support for a new DVD.
 The wrong files were installed (for example a service pack was installed for the wrong version
of the software).
 A virus has infected the file. Use virus-detecting software to correct this issue.
 You received a new file from Intergraph CAS. The CRC value is expected to be different in this
circumstance, and it is not a problem.
Build Version
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Build Version

Getting Started
Main window menu: Diagnostics > Build Version

Scans all EXE, DLL, and COM files for the ID Version information. Intergraph CAS defines ID
Version information for all of the previously mentioned files to indicate version and build details for
the file. The software displays additional information about the file, such as the name, file size,
build number, operating system, and date and time of the file. For more specifics on the ID Version
file information, click Details at the bottom of the dialog box.
Error Review
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Error Review

Main window menu: Diagnostics > Error Review
Provides a search dialog for error codes. When you select Error Review, the software opens the
Additional Error Information dialog box. Type the error number returned by the software during
analysis, and click OK. The software displays additional details about the error message and any
resolution steps. For general information on error handling in the CAESAR II software, see
CAESAR II Error Processing (on page 1091).
QA Test
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > QA Test

Main window menu: Diagnostics > QA Test
Compares output file information between a new version of the software and the previously
verified version. You can use the QATEST software to verify the output generated by a specific
version of CAESAR II. For more information on the fields compared, click QA Test and then click
the CAESAR II icon in the upper-left corner of the dialog box, and select QATEST Information.
ESL Menu
The ESL menu accesses utilities that interact with the External Software Lock (ESL).
These commands are not available if you are using SmartPlant License Manager.
View ESL
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > View ESL
Main window menu: ESL > View ESL
Displays data stored on the ESL.
Access Codes
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Access Codes
Main window menu: ESL > Access Codes
Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in

Getting Started
conjunction with option below).
Authorization Codes
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Authorization Codes
Main window menu: ESL > Authorization Codes
See the Access Codes option.
Check ESL
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Check ESL
Main window menu: ESL >Check ESL
Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Install ESL Driver
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Install ESL Driver
Main window menu: ESL >Install ESL Driver
Installs the ESL drivers.
Admin Control Center
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Admin Control Center
Main window menu: ESL >Admin Control Center
Opens the ESL administrator control center.
View Menu
The View menu is used to enable and customize the status bar and all toolbars.
Status Bar
Main window menu: View > Status Bar
Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.
FEA Tools Menu

The FEA Tools menu lets you access and use third-party tools from Paulin Research Group
(PRG) for better modeling and evaluation.
If you have not purchased and installed FEATools or NozzlePRO, the software opens
the ICAS website with information about these products.

Getting Started
FEA Translator
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > FEA Translation
Main window menu: FEA Tools > Translator
Opens the CAESAR II job in the CAESAR II FEA Translator. The translator in this tool lets you
incorporate finite element analysis into your pipe stress analysis. Calculate and apply more
relevant FEA-based SIFs and flexibilities (k factors) for branch connections.
Results Comparison
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Results Comparisons
Main window menu: FEA Tools > Comparison
Opens the CAESAR II job in the CAESAR II Comparison Tool. This utility compares output
results from multiple jobs, including values for displacements, forces and moments, restraint
forces, and restraint moments. Use the comparison tool to compare results CAESAR II jobs.
Criticality Evaluation
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Criticality Evaluation
Main window menu: FEA Tools > Criticality Index
Opens the CAESAR II job in the Piping System Criticality Evaluator, which analyzes system
data, such as number of pressure cycles, system D/T ratio, operating temperatures or
pressures, thermal conditions, and so forth, and alerts you to areas of risk on the model.
NozzlePRO
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > NozzlePRO

Main window menu: FEA Tools > NozzlePRO
Opens the CAESAR II job in NozzlePRO, which is a single-component analysis tool for piping
and pressure vessels. Analyze individual nozzles, clips, lugs, saddles or other branch
connections.
For more information on using FEATools or NozzlePRO software to perform finite element
analysis, see the FEATools User Manual.
Help Menu
The Help menu displays the available CAESAR II documentation.
CAESAR II is context-sensitive, which means you can access on-screen help by
clicking ? or pressing F1 when the cursor is in any input field. The help displays a definition for the
field and the required units, if applicable.

Getting Started
Tip of the Day
Main window ribbon: Help > Tip of the Day

Main window menu: Help > Tip of the Day
Displays the Tip of the Day window.
What's New
Main window ribbon: Help > What's New

Main window menu: Help > What's New
Displays the What's New in CAESAR II file. The file lists changes to the software release.
Online Documentation
Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation
Displays CAESAR II documentation. For more information, see Online Documentation (on
page 52).
Online Help
Main window ribbon: Help > Online Help

Main window menu: Help > Online Help
Opens Intergraph CAS live technical support, including the option for desktop streaming to
Intergraph CAS support.
Online Registration
Main window ribbon: Help > Online Registration
Main window menu: Help > Online Registration

Allows you to register with Intergraph CAS by using the Intergraph CAS web site.

Getting Started
Email Support
Main window ribbon: Help > Email support

Main window menu: Help > Email support
Opens an email to Intergraph CAS technical support in your default email client.
Check for Updates
Main window ribbon: Help > Check for Updates

Main window menu: Help > Check for Updates
Enables you to verify whether the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
Information
Main window menu: Help > Information
Provides phone, email, and address contacts for Intergraph CAS technical support, and
provides internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information.
About CAESAR II
Main window ribbon: Help > About

Main window menu: Help > About
Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.
Online Documentation
The following documentation is available.
User's Guide
Main window ribbon: Help > User's Guide

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > User's Guide
Displays the CAESAR II User's Guide in .pdf format.
Quick Reference Guide
Main window ribbon: Help > Quick Reference Guide

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Quick Reference Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide in .pdf format.

Getting Started
Applications Guide
Main window ribbon: Help > Applications Guide

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Applications Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Applications Guide in .pdf format.
Isogen Help
Main window ribbon: Help > Isogen Help

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Isogen Help
Displays the CAESAR II Applications Guide in .chm format.
Combined Document Search
Main window ribbon: Help > Combined Document Search

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Combined Document Search
Displays the Search dialog box, allowing you to search across multiple documents.
Build.txt File
Main window ribbon: Help > Build.txt File

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Build.txt File
Displays build information for the software.
QA Certificate
Main window ribbon: Help > QA Certificate

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > QA Certificate
Displays the quality assurance certificate for the software.
Quick Access Toolbar

Provides access to frequently-used commands on the main window. You can customize the
toolbar by right-clicking a command icon on the ribbon or the toolbar.
Add to Quick Access Toolbar
Adds a command on the ribbon to the Quick Access toolbar. This option is only available
when you right-click a command icon on the ribbon.
Remove from Quick Access Toolbar
Removes a command on the Quick Access toolbar. This option is only available when you
right-click a command icon on the toolbar.

Getting Started
Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon

Moves the Quick Access toolbar from above the ribbon to below the ribbon.
Show Quick Access Toolbar Above the Ribbon
Moves the Quick Access toolbar from below the ribbon to above the ribbon.
Minimize the Ribbon
Hides the ribbon. The Quick Access toolbar still displays.

SECTION 3
Configuration Editor
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configure
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configure

Main window menu: Tools > Configure/Setup
Specifies configuration options for CAESAR II and saves the options to the CAESAR.cfg file.
Displays the Configuration Editor dialog box.
The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains instructions that dictate how the software operates on
your computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the software, it
searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to perform the analysis.
If the configuration file is not found in the current data directory, the software then
searches the installation folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error is
generated and CAESAR II exits.
The CAESAR.cfg file may vary from computer to computer, and many of the
configuration spreadsheet values modify the analysis. To produce identical results between
computers, use the same configuration file. Make a copy of the setup file to be archived with input
and output data so that identical reruns can be made. The units file, if it is modified, must also be
identical if the same results are to be produced.
View the current CAESAR.cfg file

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup .
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
 In the left-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheets categories display.
 In the right-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheet values for that category display.
 The Data Directory displays the path where the current configuration file is stored.
2. Click the title in the Categories pane to navigate to the appropriate configuration
spreadsheets.
3. Click the X in the right-hand corner to exit.
Create a new CAESAR.cfg file

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Control display.
2. Click Save and Exit located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.

Change the current CAESAR.cfg file for this computer

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup .
Control display.
2. Click the description to change a value for a configuration attribute,
A drop-down menu which contains the possible values for the attribute displays.
3. Select a new value.
The new value displays in bold text.
4. Continue changing values until you are finished.
5. Click Save and Exit located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.
Reset the current CAESAR.cfg file to the default settings
 Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default value.
 Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration file
to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text from
bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following sections explain each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.
In This Section
Computational Control ................................................................ 57
Database Definitions ................................................................... 63
FRP Pipe Properties ................................................................... 69
Geometry Directives ................................................................... 73
Graphic Settings ......................................................................... 76
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................ 92
SIFs and Stresses ...................................................................... 96
Set/Change Password ................................................................ 109

Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
 Convergence Tolerances (on page 57)
 Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 59)
 Miscellaneous (on page 61)
Figure 1: Computation Control Configuration Settings
Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ........................................... 58
Friction Angle Variation ............................................................... 58
Friction Normal Force Variation ................................................... 58
Friction Slide Multiplier ................................................................ 58
Friction Stiffness .......................................................................... 59
Rod Increment (Degrees) ............................................................ 59
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) ............................................................ 59

Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Defines the value used by the software to check the ratio of off-diagonal to on-diagonal
coefficients in the row. The default value is 1.0 e+10. If this ratio is greater than the decomposition
singularity tolerance, then a numerical error may occur. This problem does not have to be
associated with a system singularity. This condition can exist when very small, and/or long pipes
are connected to very short, and/or large pipes. These solutions have several general
characteristics:
 When computer precision errors of this type occur, they are very local in nature. They typically
affect only a single element or very small part of the model and are readily noticeable upon
inspection.
 The 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E11 or 1E12 and still provide a reasonable check on
solution accuracy. Any solution computed after increasing the limit should always be checked
closely for reasonableness. At 1E11 or 1E12, the number of significant figures in the local
solution is reduced to two or three.
 Although the 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E20 or 1E30 to get the job to run, it is important
to remember that the possibility for a locally errant solution exists when stiffness ratios are
allowed to get this high. Solutions should be carefully checked.
Friction Angle Variation

Specifies the friction sliding angle variation. The default value is 15-degrees.
This parameter had more significance in software versions prior to 2.1. It is currently
only used in the first iteration when a restraint goes from the non-sliding to sliding state. All
subsequent iterations compensate for the angle variation automatically.
Friction Normal Force Variation

Defines the amount of variation in the normal force that is permitted before an adjustment is made
in the sliding friction force. The default value is 0.15, or 15 percent. Normally, you should not
adjust this value.
Friction Slide Multiplier

Specifies the internal friction sliding force multiplier.
You should never adjust this value unless you are instructed to do so by
Intergraph CAS Support.

Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.
The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support – this restraint node is "non-sliding." To
model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower
stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.
Rod Increment (Degrees)

Specifies the maximum amount of angular change that any one support can experience between
iterations. For difficult-to-converge problems, values of 0.1 have proven effective. When small
values are used, you should be prepared for a large number of iterations. The total number of
iterations can be estimated from the following:
Estimate number of Iterations = 1.5(x)/(r)/(Rod Increment)
Where:
x = maximum horizontal displacement at any one rod
r = rod length at that support
Rod Tolerance (Degrees)

Specifies the angular plus-or-minus permitted convergence error. Unless the change from
iteration n to iteration n+1 is less than this value, the rod will not converge. The default value is 1.0
degree.
For systems subject to large horizontal displacements, values of 5.0 degrees for
convergence tolerances have been used successfully.
Input Spreadsheet Defaults

Topics
Alpha Tolerance .......................................................................... 60
Coefficient of Friction (Mu)........................................................... 60
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness........................................... 60
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness ...................................... 60
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness ............................................... 60
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)................................................. 60
New Job Ambient Temperature ................................................... 61
New Job Bourdon Pressure ......................................................... 61

Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the input
spreadsheet is a thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default value is 0.05. Any
entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a thermal
expansion coefficient in terms of inches per inch (dimensionless).
Coefficient of Friction (Mu)

Specifies the value that the software applies by default as the coefficient of friction to all
translational restraints. If you type 0, which is the default value, the software does not apply any
friction.
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses. By default, this value is
assumed to be (1.0E12 in-lb/deg).
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses. By default, this value is
assumed to be (1.0E12 lb./in).
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for computing the hanger restrained weight loads. Where hangers are
adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close, such as where there are two hangers on
either side of a trunnion support, the CAESAR II hanger design algorithm may generate poorly
distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more flexible support for
computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design algorithm to more
effectively distribute the system’s weight. A typical entry is 50,000 lbs/in.; the default value is
(1.0E12 lb/in).
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)

Specifies the default percentage of wall thickness allowed for mill and other mechanical
tolerances.
For most piping codes, this value is only used during the minimum wall thickness
computation. Mill tolerance is usually not considered in the flexibility analysis.
The default value is 12.5, corresponding to a 12.5% tolerance. To eliminate mill tolerance
consideration, set Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) to 0.0.

New Job Ambient Temperature

Represents the installed, or zero expansion, strain state. The default ambient temperature for all
elements in the system is 70ºF/21ºC.
This value is only used to initialize the ambient temperature input field for new jobs.
Changing this configuration value will not affect existing jobs. To change the ambient temperature
for an existing job, use the Ambient Temperature (on page 318) field in the Piping Input Special
Execution Parameters dialog box.
New Job Bourdon Pressure

Specifies the type of Bourdon pressure effect used. The Bourdon effect causes straight pipe to
elongate and bends to open up translationally along a line connecting the curvature end points. If
the Bourdon effect is disabled, there will be no global displacements due to pressure.
 None - Disables the Bourdon effect. There will be no global displacements due to pressure.
 Trans Only - Includes only translation effects (Bourdon Pressure Option #1).
 Trans + Rot - Includes translational and rotational effects on bends. This option may apply for
bends that are formed or rolled from straight pipe, where the bend-cross section will be slightly
oval due to the bending process. (Bourdon Pressure Option #2)
 For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where the
bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
 The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless of
the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.
Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape ....................................................................... 62
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness ................................................... 62
Include Insulation in Hydrotest .................................................... 62
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases................. 62
Incore Numerical Check .............................................................. 62
Missing Mass ZPA ...................................................................... 62
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends............................................... 63
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ................................................... 63
WRC-107(537) Version ............................................................... 63

Bend Axial Shape

Controls whether the displacement mode is ignored. For bends 45-degrees or smaller, a major
contributor to deformation can be the axial displacement of the short-arched pipe. With the axial
shape function disabled, this displacement mode is ignored and the bend will be stiffer.
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness

Indicates whether the software uses the stiffness of spring hangers in the analysis. The default
setting is False, meaning that the software does not ignore the stiffness of spring hangers. Setting
this option to True is consistent with hand computation methods of spring hanger design, which
ignores the effects of the springs.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you never change this value.
Include Insulation in Hydrotest

Controls whether the weight of any insulation and cladding will be considered in the hydrotest
case. To ignore the insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select False (the default
setting). To include the weight of insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select True.
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases

Controls how the software handles spring hangers. If you select True, the software places the
designed spring stiffness into the Hanger Operating Travel Case and iterates until the system
balances. This iteration scheme therefore considers the effect of the spring hanger stiffness on the
thermal growth of the system (vertical travel of the spring). If this option is used, it is very important
that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the reported
hanger cold load.
If you select False, spring hangers are designed the traditional way.
Incore Numerical Check

Enables the incore solution module to test the solution stability for the current model and loadings.
This option, if selected, adds the solution of an extra load case to the analysis.
Missing Mass ZPA

Indicates which spectrum value CAESAR II uses. If you select Extracted (the default setting), the
software will use the spectrum value at the last "extracted" mode. Changing this value to
Spectrum instructs CAESAR II to use the last spectrum value as the ZPA for the missing mass
computations.

Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends

Controls whether CAESAR II includes pressure stiffening effects in those codes that do not
explicitly require its use. In these cases, pressure stiffening effects will apply to all bends, elbows,
and both miter types. In all cases, the pressure used is the maximum of all pressures defined for
the element.
Pressure stiffening effects are defined in Appendix D of B31.1 and B31.3.
When set to Default, the software considers the pressure stiffening of bends according to the
active piping code.
WRC-107 Interpolation Method

Specifies the interpolation method used by the software. The curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover
typical applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation
parameters, such as U, Beta, and so forth, fall outside the limits of the available curves, then
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
 Aug'65 - August 1965
 Mar'79 - March 1979
 March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the default
setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.

Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
 Databases (on page 64)
 ODBC Settings (on page 69)
Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path ................................. 64
Default Spring Hanger Table ....................................................... 65
Expansion Joints ......................................................................... 66
Load Case Template ................................................................... 66
Piping Size Specification ............................................................. 66
Structural Database..................................................................... 67
Units File Name........................................................................... 67
User Material Database Filename................................................ 67
Valve/Flange Files Location ......................................................... 68
Valves and Flanges ..................................................................... 68
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path

Specifies which system folder CAESAR II users to run the software. Select a folder in the list.
Because the software writes the configuration file (CAESAR.cfg) to the local data folder, you can
configure different data folders to reference different system folders. All of the system folders
contain formatting files, units files, text files, and other user-configurable data files. Some of these
formatting files are language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch between system
folders depending on the current job.

Use Multiple System Folders in the Same Location

You can create multiple system folders in the same location to provide different options for
different projects. System folder names must use the following naming convention: SYSTEM.xxx,
where .xxx, is a three-character suffix identifying the folder. You can create as many system
folders as needed below the CAESAR II installation program folder, as long as you follow the
required naming convention. CAESAR II uses the system folder you indicate in the configuration
settings.
For example, you could set up system folders specified for each of the piping codes configurations
you need, such as:
System.STM (Stoomwezen code system configuration)
System.ANC (ASME NC code system configuration)
System.313 (ASME B31.3 code system configuration)
You could also set up system folders that are customized specific projects.
Browse and locate any system folders named using the SYSTEM.xxx format from the Alternate
CAESAR II Distributed Data Path configuration setting. Then, you can select one and save the
configuration.
Use System Folders in Varying Locations

You can create system folders that reside in other locations, such as somewhere on your network.
This allows you to share the settings from the System folder with others. However, you must copy
the System folder and other necessary program folders to the secondary location.
You must also copy the LIB_I, LIB_M, and Spec folders (found in the Program folder
along with the System folder) to each new system folder location. You can leave the Backup,
Examples, and Temp folders in the original program folder location, as shown in the example
below.
The file name requirements mentioned in the previous section apply for system folders on a
network or in a secondary location as well. In addition, you can set up network system files that
apply at a project level.
There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system, as
follows:
Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
The x.xx in each of the above sample path represents the CAESAR II version number.
Default Spring Hanger Table

Defines the value of the default spring hanger table, which is referenced during the spring hanger
design stage of the solution. The software includes tables from more than 35 different vendors.

Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.
Load Case Template

Specifies which load case template is active. The software uses the active template file to
recommend load cases.
 Because the software writes the CAESAR.cfg file to the local data folder, you can configure
different data directories to reference different template files.
 Different piping codes have different requirements for load cases. If you use multiple piping
codes in your job, CAESAR II refers to the piping code defined on the last element in the
model to determine which load cases to recommend as per the code standards.
 The load case template file name is limited to 15 characters (including the extension).
LOAD.TPL (default)
Select this option, applicable only to B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX, to include alternate
Sustained (SUS) load cases to consider all support configurations for each corresponding
Operating (OPE) condition as required by the codes. This option also includes the additional
Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating conditions.
LOAD_BASIC.TPL
Select this option if you do not need additional EXP stress range load cases and do not use
the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX.
LOAD_EXP.TPL
Select this option to include additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions and do not use the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3 and
B31.3 Chapter IX.
LOAD_ALT.TPL
Select this option to include alternate SUS load cases to consider all support configurations
for each corresponding OPE condition as required by B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX. This
option is applicable to all piping codes (except for IGE/TD/12), and not limited to B31.3 piping
code. This option also includes the additional EXP stress range load cases for better
coverage of multiple operating conditions.
Piping Size Specification

Specifies the piping specification standard. Select one of the following standards: ANSI (American
National Standard), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), or DIN (German Standard).
By default, the software uses the ANSI pipe size and schedule tables in the input processor.

Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross section
properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South African
1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.
Units File Name

Specifies which of the available units files is active. The active units file is used for new job
creation and all output generation.
 Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure different
data directories to reference different units files.
 The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.
User Material Database Filename

Specifies which user material database (UMD) file the software will access. By default, when you
add to or modify the supplied material database, the changes are saved to a file named
umat1.umd, which is located in the \System folder.
Versions of CAESAR II prior to 5.30 used the name umat1.bin. This file can be copied,
then renamed, if necessary, to umat1.umd.
In some cases, it may be necessary to manipulate several UMD files. This can occur if UMD files
are acquired from different sources. Because a specific file name can only be used once, it will be
necessary to rename any additional UMD files. As long as the file suffix is UMD, and the file
resides in the \System folder, the various CAESAR II modules will be able to access them.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
 The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses the updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
The Material Database Editor
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
 The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses updated materials in
the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
 CAESAR II saves any changes or additions to the specified user material database (UMD).

Create a New UMD File

1. Open the Configuration Editor and click Database Definitions.
2. In User Material Database Filename, type in a new name.
 The UMD suffix should not be changed.

 The file name plus the period plus the UMD suffix should not exceed 15 characters.
 Do not use spaces (blanks) in the file name.
3. Before exiting the Configuration Editor, click Save and Exit to save the modified
configuration.
4. When you open the Piping Input or the Material Database Editor, the software creates the
new UMD file.
Valve/Flange Files Location

Defines where CAESAR II looks for the valve/flange data file. The possible settings for this
configuration setting include:
CAESARII Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%.
Specs in CII, Data in CW
Directs the software to look for the specification files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%, but to look for the actual data files in the CADWorx folders.
CADWorx Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CADWorx folders.
Valves and Flanges

Specifies which valve/flange database CAESAR II references during subsequent input sessions.
The available databases include:
CADWORX.VHD
Reference the CADWorx Plant database.
CRANE.VHD
Reference the Crane database.
GENERIC.VHD
Reference a generic database.
NOFLANGE.VHD
Reference a database (generic) without attached flanges.

ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data .................................................. 69
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 69
ODBC Compliant Database Name............................................... 69
Append Reruns to Existing Data

Controls how the software handles data from multiple runs.
False
Overwrite data from previous runs in the ODBC database. This is the default setting.
True
Add new data to the database, thus storing multiple runs of the same job in the database.
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases

Turns on or off the capability to create ODBC-compliant databases for static output.
ODBC Compliant Database Name

Type the name of the ODBC project database. All jobs run in this data folder will write their output
to the database specified here.
FRP Pipe Properties

The FRP Properties category provides access to the following groups of configuration settings:
 Material Properties (on page 70)
 Settings (on page 72)

Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ........................................................... 70
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ....................................... 70
FRP Alpha (xe-06)....................................................................... 70
FRP Density ................................................................................ 70
FRP Laminate Type .................................................................... 70
FRP Property Data File ............................................................... 71
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus......................................... 71
Axial Modulus of Elasticity

Displays the axial elastic modulus of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. This is the default value
used to set the data in the input processor. When necessary, you may override this value.
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a)

Displays the product of the ratio of the axial to the hoop elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio, which
relates the strain in the axial direction to a stress in the hoop direction.
Ea
Elastic modulus in the axial direction.
Eh
Elastic modulus in the hoop direction.
Vh/a
Poisson's ratio relating the strain in the axial direction due to a stress in the hoop direction.
FRP Alpha (xe-06)

Type the thermal expansion coefficient for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used (multiplied by
1,000,000). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6 in/in/deg, you will type 8.5. The exponent (E-6) is
implied.
If a single expansion coefficient is too limiting for your application, the actual thermal
expansion may always be calculated at temperature in inches per inch (or mm per mm) and
entered directly into the Temperature field on the Pipe spreadsheet.
FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.
FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:

CSM and Woven Roving

Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
FRP Property Data File

Select the file from which the software will read the standard FRP material properties. After the file
is selected, the software will give you the option of reading in from that file.
You may create FRP material files as text files with the .frp extension; these files should be stored
in the CAESAR\System sub-folder. The format of the files must adhere to the format shown in the
following sample FRP data file:
The data lines must exactly follow the order shown in the above sample FRP data file.
The four data lines defining the UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be omitted.
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus

Type the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity (in the axial direction) of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used. For example, if the material modulus of elasticity (axial) is
3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, the ratio of these two, 0.25, should be entered.

Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening ........................................................ 72
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress .................................... 72
Use FRP Flexibilities ................................................................... 72
Use FRP SIF ............................................................................... 73
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening

Displays the method used to calculate the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs. The BS
7159 code explicitly requires that the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs be calculated
using the design strain (this is based upon the assumption that the FRP piping is fully pressurized
to its design limit). This is the default method for CAESAR II.
When the piping is pressurized to a value much lower than its design pressure, it may be more
accurate to calculate pressure stiffening based on the actual pressure stress, rather than its
design strain.
This alternative method is a deviation from the explicit instructions of the BS 7159 code.
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress

Modifies the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress. Some sources, such as Shell's DEP
31.40.10.19-Gen. (December 1998) and ISO/DIS 14692 suggest that, when using the UKOOA
code, the axial bending stress should not be multiplied by the Part Factor f2 (the System Factor of
Safety) prior to combination with the longitudinal pressure stress.
True
Modify the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress.
False
Use the UKOOA exactly as written.
Use FRP Flexibilities

Controls the fitting flexibility factor used by the software.
True
Set the fitting flexibility factor to 1.0 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the
default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" flexibility factor equations to all FRP fittings.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software uses code flexibility factors,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.

Use FRP SIF

Controls the SIF used by the software.
True
Set the fitting SIF to 2.3 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" SIF equations to all FRP fittings. Optionally, you can manually type
an alternative value.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software always uses code SIFs,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
 Bends (on page 73)
 Input Items (on page 74)
Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent ................................................ 74
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle.................................................. 74
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................. 74
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend ................................................ 74

Bend Length Attachment Percent

Controls the amount of accuracy included in the system dimensions around bends. The default
attachment is 1.0 percent.
Whenever the element leaving the tangent intersection of a bend is within (n)% of the bend radius
on either side of the weldline, CAESAR II inserts an element from the bend weldline to the To
node of the element leaving the bend. The inserted element has a length equal to exactly (n)% of
the bend radius. You can use Bend Length Attachment Percent to adjust this percentage to
reduce the error due to the inserted element; however, the length tolerance for elements leaving
the bend will also be reduced.
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the maximum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend. The default value is 95-degrees.
Very large angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a large angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the large angle
bend plots well when compared to the surrounding elements, then the bend can probably be used
without difficulty. Well-proportioned bends up to 135-degrees have been tested without a problem.
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the minimum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend angle. The default value is 5.0
degrees.
Very small angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a small angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the small angle
bend is grossly small compared to the surrounding elements, then a different modeling approach
is recommended so that the bend is not used.
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend

Controls the CAESAR II error checking tolerance for the "closeness" of points on the bend
curvature. The default value is 5.0-degrees.
Nodes on a bend curvature that are too close together can cause numerical problems during
solution. Where the radius of the bend is large, such as in a cross-country pipeline, it is not
uncommon to find nodes on a bend curvature closer than 5-degrees.
Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ..................................................... 75
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ........................................... 75
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance ......................................... 75
Loop Closure Tolerance .............................................................. 75
New Job Z-Axis Vertical .............................................................. 75

Auto Node Number Increment

Sets the value for the Automatic Node Numbering routine. The software uses any non-zero,
positive value that you type to automatically assume the To node value on the piping input
spreadsheets. The new To node number is determined as:
"To Node" = "From Node" + Auto Node Number Increment
If this value is set to 0.0, automatic node numbering is disabled.
Connect Geometry Through CNodes

Controls whether each restraint, nozzle, or hanger exists at the same point in space as its
connecting node.
Restraints, flexible nozzles, and spring hangers may be defined with connecting nodes. By
default, CAESAR II ignores the position of the restraint node and the connecting node. They may
be at the same point, or they may be hundreds of feet apart. In many cases, enabling this option
will cause "plot-wise" disconnected parts of the system to be re-connected and to appear
as-expected in both input and output plots.
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance

Specifies the maximum slope of a straight pipe element for which thermal bowing effects will be
considered.
Thermal bowing is usually associated with fluid carrying horizontal pipes in which the fluid does
not fill the cross section. In these cases, there is a temperature differential across the cross
section. You can use Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance to define the interpretation of
"horizontal." By default, the software uses a value of 0.0001 as the horizontal threshold value. If a
pipe element’s pitch is less than this tolerance, the element is considered to be horizontal, and
thermal bowing loads can be applied to it. An element’s pitch is computed using the following
formula:
2 2 2 1/2
PITCH = | DY | / ( DX + DY + DZ )
Loop Closure Tolerance

Sets the loop closure tolerance that CAESAR II uses for error checking. You can set this value
interactively for each job analyzed, or you can type the loop closure tolerance using this option
and override the software default value of 1.0 in without distraction.
New Job Z-Axis Vertical

Controls in which plane the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical with
the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane.
False
Place the Z-axis in the horizontal plane. This is the default setting.
True
Make the Z-axis vertical. The X- and Y-axes will be in the horizontal plane.

This setting applies only to jobs created after this setting is changed.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options
Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For more information, see
Advanced Options (on page 77).
Background Colors
Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more information, see
Background Colors (on page 78).
CADWorx Options
Contains options that define the color and behavior for CADWorx drawings imported into
CAESAR II models. For more information, see CADWorx Options (on page 78).
Component Colors
Contains options that define the color for various components in the plot. For more
information, see Component Colors (on page 79).
Marker Options
Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more information, see Marker
Options (on page 82).
Miscellaneous Options
Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed either by default or when using
the Reset Plot option. For more information, see Miscellaneous Options (on page 82).
Output Colors
Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in output. For more
information, see Output Colors (on page 87).
Text Options
Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are supported. For
more information, see Text Options (on page 88).
Visual Options
Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more information, see Visual
Options (on page 89).

To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the
right. Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings,
click Save and Exit before closing the Configuration Editor.
Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling........................................................................ 77
Culling Maximum Extent .............................................................. 77
Use Culling Frustrum................................................................... 77
Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with your
graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
Culling Maximum Extent

Use Culling Frustrum


Background Colors
Topics
Bottom ........................................................................................ 78
Top ............................................................................................. 78
Use Uniform Background Color ................................................... 78
Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.
Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.
Use Uniform Background Color

Controls the background color. Set this option to True if you want the plot background to be one
uniform color instead of blending between the top and bottom colors.
CADWorx Options
Topics
Color - Ambient ........................................................................... 78
Color - Face ................................................................................ 78
Color - Line ................................................................................. 78
Color - Specular .......................................................................... 79
Color - Transmission ................................................................... 79
Gloss Value................................................................................. 79
Show Lines ................................................................................. 79
Show Model ................................................................................ 79
Use AutoCAD Colors ................................................................... 79
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough .................................................... 79
Color - Ambient
Sets the color of the ambient properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Face
Sets the color of the face of the CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Line
Sets the color of the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.

Color - Specular
Sets the color of the specular properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Transmission
Sets the color of the transmission lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Gloss Value
Sets the level of the gloss value on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Show Lines
Indicates to show or hide the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Show Model
Indicates to show or hide the CADWorx drawing (model) that was imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Use AutoCAD Colors

Indicates to use the color settings from AutoCAD on a CADWorx drawing imported into a
CAESAR II model.
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough

Indicates to use the keyboard, not the mouse, to perform a walkthrough on a CADWorx drawing
imported into a CAESAR II model.

Component Colors
You can also change component colors on the Plot Settings dialog box. For more
information, see Display Options Toolbar (on page 369).
Topics
Anchor CNode ............................................................................ 80
Anchors ...................................................................................... 80
Displacements (Component Color).............................................. 80
Expansion Joints......................................................................... 80
Flange ........................................................................................ 80
Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color)........................................ 81
Forces/Moments 2 (Component Color)........................................ 81
Hanger CNode............................................................................ 81
Hangers ...................................................................................... 81
Nozzles ...................................................................................... 81
Nozzle Limit Color 1 .................................................................... 81
Nozzle Limit Color 2 .................................................................... 81
Pipes .......................................................................................... 81
Restraint CNode ......................................................................... 82
Restraints ................................................................................... 82
Rigids ......................................................................................... 82
Selection..................................................................................... 82
SIFs/Tees ................................................................................... 82
Steel ........................................................................................... 82
Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Displacements (Component Color)

Sets the color of all displacement arrows displayed in the graphics.
For more information about displacement arrows, see Displacements (on page 353).
Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.
Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.

Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color)

Sets the first color of the stripe pattern of force and moment vector arrows displayed in the
graphics. The arrows show the force and moment direction.
Set the second color of the force and moment arrows in the Forces/Moments 2 (Component
Color) (on page 81) configuration setting.
For more information about force and moment arrows, see Forces (on page 358).
Forces/Moments 2 (Component Color)

Sets the second color of the stripe pattern of force and moment vector arrows displayed in the
graphics. The arrows show the force and moment direction.
Set the first color of the force and moment arrows in the Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color)
(on page 81) configuration setting.
For more information about force and moment arrows, see Forces (on page 358).
Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.
Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzle Limit Color 1

Sets the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics. This
arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an equipment
check. Set the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle Limit Color 2
(on page 81) configuration setting.
Nozzle Limit Color 2

Sets the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle Limit
Color 1 (on page 81) configuration setting.
Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.

Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.
Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.
Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.
Selection
Sets the color of the selected element when displayed in the graphics.
SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.
Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.
Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color ............................................................................... 82
Marker Size ................................................................................. 82
Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.

Topics
Default Operator ......................................................................... 83
Default Projection Mode .............................................................. 83
Default Render Mode .................................................................. 83
Default View ............................................................................... 83
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ................................................... 84
Force Black and White Printing ................................................... 84
Idle Processing Count ................................................................. 84
Optimal Frame Rate.................................................................... 84
Restore Previous Anchor Size..................................................... 84
Restore Previous Hanger Size .................................................... 85
Restore Previous Operator.......................................................... 85
Restore Previous Projection Mode .............................................. 85
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................. 85
Restore Previous Restraint Size.................................................. 86
Restore Previous View................................................................ 86
Video Driver ................................................................................ 86
Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate, Orbit,
Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.
Default Projection Mode

Specifies the projection of graphics in the software. You can select Orthographic, Perspective,
or Stretched. The default projection setting is Orthographic.
Default Render Mode

Specifies the render mode. Available options are Phong Shading, Centerline, Flat, Gouraud
Shading, Silhouette, Triangulated, and Wireframe, either with or without hidden lines. The
default render mode setting is Phong Shading.
Centerline and Silhouette are the fastest render modes and less memory intensive for
your computer graphics card.
Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default view
setting is SE Isometric.

Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble

Enables or disables the tooltip bubble that displays information about the element that you mouse
over in the graphics view.
True
Tooltip bubble does not display.
False
Tooltip bubble displays.
Force Black and White Printing

Controls printing output of graphics. If set to True, graphics are printed using only black and white.
Idle Processing Count

Controls the number of objects the software is allowed to draw during a single idle cycle. CAESAR
II draws the model whenever your machine becomes idle, that is, whenever any interaction
between you and the computer ceases. For example, there may three or four idle messages
between keystrokes. On slower machines, it may increase performance to lower this value, and
vice versa.
Optimal Frame Rate

Determines how many times per second the software will re-draw the piping display when it is
being manipulated, such as when you are zooming, panning, or rotating the display. If you
experience graphics problems such as sluggishness during operations or large boxes being
drawn instead of the piping system display, lower this number.

Restore Previous Anchor Size

Returns the anchor size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the anchor size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.
Restore Previous Hanger Size

Returns the hanger size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the hanger size to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Operator

Returns the operator to its previous setting.
True
Restore the operator to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Projection Mode

Returns the projection mode to its previous state. Projection mode is either isometric or
orthographic.
True
Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False

Restore Previous Render Mode

Returns the render mode to its previous state.
Four render modes are available in CAESAR II: solids, wireframes, silhouette, and
centerline.
True
Restore the render mode to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Restraint Size

Returns the restraint size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the restraint size to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous View

Returns the standard view to its previous setting.
The standard views are Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric, NW Isometric and NE Isometric.
True
Restore the standard view to its previous setting.
False
Video Driver
Determines the video driver the software uses for graphics display. Select a specific video
driver or leave the default option, CAESAR II Determines, which means the software
intelligently selects the optimal 3D driver supported by your operating environment.
In Windows operating systems, the software gives preference to DirectX options,
followed by OpenGL options.

Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings ................................................................. 87
Displaced Shape ......................................................................... 87
Percent Stress Settings ............................................................... 87
Actual Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of actual stress. The levels are currently set as follows:
Level Actual Stress
Level 1 <10,000 psi
Level 2 10,000 to 15,000 psi
Level 3 15,000 to 20,000 psi
Level 4 20,000 to 25,000 psi
Level 5 25,000 to 30,000 psi
Level 6 > 30,000 psi
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 87).
Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.
Percent Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of the percent of code allowable. The levels are currently set as
follows:
Percent (of Code Allowable)

Level
Stress
Level 1 < 20%
Level 2 20 to 40%
Level 3 40 to 60%

Percent (of Code Allowable)

Level
Stress
Level 4 60 to 80%
Level 5 80 to 100%
Level 6 >100%
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 87).
Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts are
supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.
Topics
Annotation Text .......................................................................... 88
Legend Text................................................................................ 88
Node Text ................................................................................... 88
Output Text ................................................................................. 89
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ........................................... 89
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ........................................... 89
Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.
Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures, and
so forth, when displayed in the graphics.
Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed in
the graphics.

Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of rendered text. By default, the software will not draw text that is occluded by
anything else, including other text. For example, if a pipe is in front of text, the text will not be
drawn. If some text overlaps other text, the text that is further back will be hidden. To override this
behavior so that all text is shown, set RenderedModeTextAlwaysVisible to True.
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of silhouette text.
Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.
Topics
Always Use System Colors ......................................................... 89
Always Use System Fonts .......................................................... 89
Axis Mode................................................................................... 89
Fixed Size Restraint Size ............................................................ 90
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................ 90
North Direction ............................................................................ 90
Restraint Helix is a Line .............................................................. 91
Shadow Mode............................................................................. 91
Show Bounding Box.................................................................... 91
Smooth Transitions ..................................................................... 91
Use Fixed Size Restraints ........................................................... 91
Visibility % .................................................................................. 91
Always Use System Colors

Stores the colors the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Always Use System Fonts

Stores the fonts that the software uses to display the model in the registry.

Axis Mode
Specifies display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes display in the lower left corner of the
plot. Select one of the following:
On
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes. This option specifies Options > Axis >
Axis Planes as the default in the software.
Simple
Displays the coordinate system axes. This option specifies Options > Axis > Axis as the
default in the software.
Off
Turns off axis display. This option specifies Options > Axis > Off as the default in the
software.
For more information, see Axis (on page 359).
Fixed Size Restraint Size

Controls the restraint size. By default, the software draws restraints relative to the size of the pipe
to which they are attached. For example, the symbol is larger on a 12-inch pipe than on a 2-inch
pipe. You can override this behavior so that the software uses the same size restraint everywhere
by setting Use Fixed Size Restraints (on page 91) to True and defining a Fixed Size Restraint
Size value.
Hide Overlapping Text

Hides node text that is overwritten by other text. This makes reading the plot easier, but eliminates
some node text.
North Direction
Specifies display of a north arrow with the axes. Select True or False. The North arrow indicates
the North orientation of the plant.
The north arrow does not display when you set Axis Mode (on page 89) to Off.

Restraint Helix is a Line

Controls how the software draws a restraint helix.
By default, a restraint with a variable retention is drawn with a small spring to indicate that it is not
fixed. If this property is set to True (the default setting), the software draws the spring as a line;
otherwise, the software draws the spring as a coiled cylinder.
If drawing the restraint helix as a line degrades plot performance, set Restraint Helix
is a Line to False.
Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.
Show Bounding Box

Controls whether a bounding box appears around the model when it is being manipulated--for
example, rotated or panned-- with the mouse.
True
Display a bounding box.
False
Suppress the display of a bounding box.
Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True
Enable smooth transition.
False
Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory requirements.
Use Fixed Size Restraints

Controls the size of the restraint. When it is set to True, this property draws restraints based on the
value defined by the property Fixed Size Restraint Size (on page 90).
Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.

The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
 Input Items (on page 92)
 Output Items (on page 94)
 System Level Items (on page 95)
Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval ................................................................ 92
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ....................................... 92
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ........................................................... 93
Dynamic Example Input Text ....................................................... 93
Enable Autosave ......................................................................... 93
Prompted Autosave ..................................................................... 94
Autosave Time Interval

Sets the time interval used to perform the auto-save function. Type a value in minutes.

Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail

Controls whether the graphic thumbnail plot in the Open dialog box (accessed by clicking File >
Open in the software) is displayed. The graphics thumbnail plots a small image of the model as a
single line drawing. On some slower, memory limited processors, or when scanning very large
models, this thumbnail graphic may take a few seconds to plot the model.
True
Turn on the display of thumbnail graphics.
False
Turn off the display of thumbnail graphics.
Disable Undo/Redo Ability

Controls the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. On some installations, it may be useful to
disable the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. With Undo/Redo enabled, CAESAR II can
process a job approximately one-half the size of that which can be processed when Undo/Redo is
disabled (for similar memory settings). Likewise, with Undo/Redo enabled, the input module
speed may be reduced.
Dynamic Example Input Text

Controls how much example text is placed in new dynamic input files. By default, the software
places example text and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files. After
you are familiar with the input, this example text may be unnecessary. Select from the following
options to vary how much of this example text is incorporated in the input:
Max
Place all of the examples and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input
files.
None
Eliminate all the example text and all the built-in spectrum definitions. This setting is intended
for experienced users.
Spec
Eliminate all of the example text, but leaves the predefined spectrum definition. This means
that the built-in spectrum definitions (El Centro, and so forth) will still be defined and available
for use.
Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True
Turn on Autosave.
False
Turn off Autosave.

Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True
Prompt before performing the autosave
False
Perform the autosave without prompting.
Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ...................................... 94
Output Reports by Load Case ..................................................... 94
Output Table of Contents............................................................. 94
Time History Animation ............................................................... 94
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes

Turns on and off nodal sort. By default, the software sorts the nodes in ascending order during the
force/stress computations. This produces a displacement output report in which the nodes are
ordered in increasing magnitude. Select False to turn off this nodal sort. The resulting
displacement reports will be produced in the order the nodes were entered during model building.
Output Reports by Load Case

Controls how output reports are sorted. By default, the software generates output reports sorted
by load case. Select False to turn off this option, which causes output reports to be sorted by type.
For reports by type, all displacement reports will be generated, then all restraint reports, then all
force reports, and so on.
Output Table of Contents

Controls the generation of a table of contents, which is normally produced after a static or a
dynamic output session.
True
Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of a table of contents.

Time History Animation

Controls the creation of the file used to animate the time history displacement of the piping
system. By default, this setting is turned on, which instructs CAESAR II to generate a file of
displacements, <jobname>.XYT, for every time step. This file is used in subsequent interactive
animation sessions by the user. The size of this file is dependent on the size of the model and the
number of time steps analyzed. Consequently, it may be advantageous from a disk usage point of
view not to create this file.
True
Generate the displacement file. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of the displacement file.
System Level Items

Topics
Compress CAESAR II Files ......................................................... 95
Memory Allocated (Mb) ............................................................... 96
User ID........................................................................................ 96
Compress CAESAR II Files

Controls the compression of CAESAR II files.
True
Compress all of the CAESAR II job files into an archive named <jobname>.c2, when the job
is not active. After the software creates the archive, it deletes the component files (_a, _j, _p,
_7, _s, and so forth).
False
Leave the component files in the data directory and do not create the c2 archive.
The advantages and disadvantages to using the compressed c2 archive are outlined
follows:
Advantages
 Only one job file exists in the data directory.
 The job and all related data are easily archived.
 The job and all related data can be transmitted in its entirety.
Disadvantages
 The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.
 The archive is big, because it contains all component files. Therefore, saving or
transmitting takes more resources than manipulating a single component file.
 For larger jobs, the compression/decompression activity slows down file access.

Memory Allocated (Mb)

Modifies the Windows registry to increase the amount of RAM available to CAESAR II. Setting
this option to a number greater than the available RAM will cause Windows to use Virtual Memory
(hard disk space to be used as RAM). Because doing this may slow the software, it is usually
recommended only for very large piping models.
User ID
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Type a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent user
running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate control
file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data within the same
folder.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and not
to the user.

SIFs and Stresses

The SIFs and Stresses category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
 Advanced Settings (on page 97)
 Code-Specific Settings (on page 99)
 General Settings (on page 102)
 Legacy Settings (on page 107)
Advanced Settings
Topics
Class 1 Branch Flexibility............................................................. 97
Use Schneider............................................................................. 98
Use WRC 329 ............................................................................. 98

Class 1 Branch Flexibility

Activates the Class 1 flexibility calculations. By default, this setting is False.
The appearance of this parameter in the configuration file will completely change the modeling of
intersections in the analysis. For intersections not satisfying the reduced branch rules that d/D ≤
0.5 and that D/T ≤100, the branch will start at the surface of the header pipe. A perfectly rigid
junction between the center\-line of the header and surface will be formed automatically by
CAESAR II using the element offset calculations. SIFs act at the surface point for the branch.
When the reduced branch rules are satisfied, the local flexibility of the header is also inserted at
this surface point. Intersections not satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be stiffer and
carry more loads, while intersections satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be more flexible
and will carry less load. All changes to the model are completely transparent to the user. In
systems where the intersection flexibility is a major component of the overall system stiffness, you
are urged to run the analysis both with and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to
determine the effect of this modeling on the analysis.
Use Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection
was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in error by a factor as
high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a multiplication of the out of plane
branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D ratio for the inter\-section
is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate between in and
out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for the single stress intensification given.
Use WRC 329

Activates the WRC329 guidelines for all intersections, not just for reduced intersections. By
default, this setting is False.
The recommendations made by Rodabaugh in section 5.0 of WRC329 will be followed exactly in
making the stress calculations for intersections. Every attempt has been made to improve the
stress calculations for all codes, not just the four discussed in Rodabaugh’s paper. Throughout
this document, WRC330 and WRC329 are used synonymously (330 was the draft version of 329).
When finally published, the official WRC designation was 329.

Code-Specific Settings
Topics
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix................................................................... 99
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees ......................... 99
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF.......................... 99
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor..................................................... 100
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs .......................................... 100
Occasional Load Factor............................................................... 100
Pressure Variation in EXP Case .................................................. 100
Reduced Intersection................................................................... 101
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix

Makes the correction to the reduced branch stress calculation that existed in the 1980 through
1989 versions of B31.1. This error was corrected in the 1989 version of B31.1.
True
Turn on the correction. This is the default setting.
False
Turn off the correction.
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees

Controls the assumption that the geometry of B31.3 welding and contour insert tees (sweepolets)
meets the dimensional requirements of the code and can be classified as B16.9 tees.
True
Assume that the fitting geometry meets the requirements of Note 11, introduced in the A01
addendum, and a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r will be used.
False
Use a flexibility characteristic of 3.1*T/r, as per the A01 addendum. This is the default setting.
In order to match runs made with CAESAR II prior to Version 4.40, set this option to
True. Prior to Version 4.40, CAESAR II always used a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r.
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF

Controls the use of in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs. The EN-13480 piping code (and other
European piping codes) defaults to the use of a single SIF, applied to the SRSS of all three
bending moments. Optionally, you can utilize distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIF values for
in-plane and out-of-plane moments.
To use distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs, select True.

Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor

Controls the application of the circumferential weld strength reduction factor, which is now an
option in B31.1 and B31.3.
True
Suppress the application of a weld strength reduction factor.
False
Apply the weld strength reduction factor at all bends, tees, and reducers for temperatures
greater than the starting creep temperature, as defined in the code.
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs

Controls whether welding tees and reinforced tees are included in the SIFs for reduced fittings.
Part of the discussion centers around just what should be considered a reduced fitting. The
CAESAR II default (False) is to assume that welding tees and reinforced fabricated tees are
covered by the reduced fitting expressions, even though the reduced fitting expressions do not
explicitly cover these intersection types. If you want to leave welding tees and rein\-forced tees out
of this definition, set this option to True.
Occasional Load Factor

Specifies the occasional load factor. The default value of 0.0 tells CAESAR II to use the value that
the active piping code recommends. B31.1 states that the calculated stress may exceed the
maximum allowable stress from Appendix A, (Sh), by 15% if the event duration occurs less than
10% of any 24-hour operating period, and by 20% if the event duration occurs less than 1% of any
24 hour operating period. The default for B31.1 applications is 15%. If 20% is more suitable for the
system being analyzed, then this option can be used to enter the 20%.
B31.3 states, "The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight, and other sustained
loadings (S1) and of the stresses produced by occasional loads such as wind or earthquake may
be as much as 1.33 times the allowable stress given in Appendix A. Where the allowable stress
value exceeds 2/3 of yield strength at temperature, the allowable stress value must be reduced as
specified in Note 3 in 302.3.2." The default for B31.3 applications is 33%. If this is too high for the
material and temperature specified, then a smaller occasional load factor could be input.
This configuration option is used to send new job files. After the static load cases have
been defined, changing this directive will have no effect for static analysis. For existing static load
case definitions, change the occasional load multiplier on the Load Cases tab in the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor. Dynamic analyses will always reference this configuration option.
Pressure Variation in EXP Case

Controls whether any pressure variation between the referenced load cases will be considered in
the resulting expansion case. When set to Default, the software considers the pressure variation
according to the active piping code.
If you select Default or Yes, then pressure variation is considered for B31.1 and CAN Z662
codes.

If you select Yes, then pressure variation is considered for B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.5, B31.9,
ASME NC & ND, B31.1 (1967), Stoomwezen, RCC MC & MD, CODETI, Norwegian TBK-6, EN
13480, GPTC, HPGSL, and JPI codes.
Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980)
Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These rules did not define a
separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress intensification factor will
be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of the branch-to-header
diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980)
Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The reduced intersection SIF
equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated unnecessarily high SIFs because of a
mistake made in the implementation. (This is according to WRC329.) For this reason, many
analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF calculation. CAESAR II corrects this mistake by
automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to True (the default setting). You can vary the
status of this flag in the CAESAR II configuration file to generate any interpretation of B31.1
that you want. The default for a new job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1 Reduced Z Fix
to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (on page 100) option also affects the
SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329
Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection is
any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations result
in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative stress
calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more accurate and more
in-line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III
Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider
Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has the
same effect as Use Schneider (on page 98).

General Settings
Topics
Add F/A in Stresses..................................................................... 102
Add Torsion in SL Stress ............................................................. 102
All Cases Corroded ..................................................................... 102
Allow User's SIF at Bend ............................................................. 103
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé).................................. 103
Default Piping Code .................................................................... 104
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable............................... 104
Use PD/4t ................................................................................... 104
Yield Stress Criterion ................................................................... 104
Add F/A in Stresses

Specifies whether the axial stress term is included in the code stress computation.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently active
piping code recommends. Only the process piping codes (except for B31.3), or codes where the
sustained stress equation is not explicitly given, have the F/A stresses included in the sustained
and occasional stress equations. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) do not include the F/A
stresses because the equations given explicitly in the code do not include them. To force
CAESAR II to include the axial stress term in those codes that do not include it already by default,
select Yes.
The F/A stresses discussed here are not due to longitudinal pressure. These are the F/A stresses
due to structural loads in the piping system itself.
Add Torsion in SL Stress

Controls how the software handles the torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by
default.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently active
piping code recommends. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) include torsion in the
sustained and occasional stresses by explicitly including it in the stress equation (B31.1). The
process piping codes (except for B31.3) do not include torsion in the sustained and occasional
stresses by implicitly calling for longitudinal stresses only. To force CAESAR II to include the
torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by default, select Yes.
In a sustained stress analysis of a very hot piping system subject to creep, it is
recommended that you include torsion in the sustained stress calculation using this parameter in
the setup file.
For more information, see Code Compliance Considerations (on page 1013).

All Cases Corroded

Controls whether CAESAR II uses corroded section modulus in stress calculations.
The B31.3 piping code reduces the section modulus for sustained or occasional stress
calculations by the reduction in wall thickness due to corrosion. Using All Cases Corroded
causes the software to use the corroded section modulus for the calculation of all stress types.
This method is conservative, and probably more realistic because corrosion can significantly
affect fatigue life or expansion.
When you clear All Cases Corroded, the software follows the piping code recommendations.
That is, depending on the active piping code, some load cases consider corrosion and some do
not.
For more information, see Code Compliance Considerations (on page 1013).
Allow User's SIF at Bend

Controls the stress intensification factor for bends. Previously this was not permitted, and the
code-defined SIF was always used. To override the code’s calculated SIF for bends, select True.
The user-defined SIF acts over the entire bend curvature and must be specified at the To end of
the bend element. The default setting is False.
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé)

Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated. The default is to use the ID of the
pipe. Most piping codes consider the effects of pressure in the longitudinal component of the
CODE stress. Usually, the value of the hoop stress has no bearing on the CODE stress, so
changing this directive does not affect the acceptability of the piping system.
If necessary, you may change the way CAESAR II computes the hoop stress value. Available
options are:
ID
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter of the
pipe.
Lamé
Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lamé's solution: s = P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).
When the piping code specifies hoop stress evaluation, the software uses the code's
hoop stress calculation and ignores Base Hoop Stress On. For example, offshore or
transportation piping codes, such as B31.4, B31.8, and DNV, specify hoop stress evaluation.

Default Piping Code

Specifies the piping code that you design to most often. This code will be used as the default if no
code is specified in the problem input. The default piping code is B31.3, the chemical plant and
petroleum refinery code. Valid entries are:
 B31.1  ASME-NC (Class 2)  Stoomwezen  DNV
 B31.3  ASME-ND (Class 3)  RCC-M C  EN 13480
 B31.3 Chapter IX  Navy 505  RCC-M D  GPTC/Z380
 B31.4  CAN Z662  CODETI  PD 8010-1
 B31.4 Chapter IX  CAN Z662 Chapter 11  Norwegian TBK-6  PD 8010-2
 B31.4 Chapter XI  BS 806  FDBR  ISO 14692
 B31.5  Swedish 1  BS 7159  HPGSL
 B31.8  Swedish 2  UKOOA  JPI
 B31.8 Chapter VIII  B31.1-1967  IGE/TD/12
 B31.9
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable

Instructs the software to default new jobs to use the liberal expansion stress allowable. This
allowable adds the difference between the hot allowable stress and the sustained stress to the
allowable expansion stress range if it is allowed by the particular code in use. To instruct the
software to default new jobs to not use this allowable, select False.
Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form with thin-walled pipe thicknesses.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
software results. In most cases, you should use the more comprehensive default calculation.
The software ignores Use PD/4t for the offshore codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8
Chapter VIII, Canadian Z662 Chapter 11, and Det Norske Veritas (DNV).
Yield Stress Criterion

Specifies the method the software uses to calculate maximum stress. CAESAR II can calculate
this maximum stress (which is not a code stress) according to either the von Mises Theory or the
Maximum Shear Theory.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For
more information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.

The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative of
the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated yield
criteria theory.
Configuration
Failure Theory Calculated Stress
Setting
Max3D Shear Maximum Shear Stress Maximum Stress Intensity
von Mises Maximum Energy of Distortion Octahedral Shearing Stress
CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum value
in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below. If von
Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which differs from
the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and
DNV, this setting controls which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress. For
these codes, the software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the yield
stress criterion in the Stresses Extended output report.
Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross section,
as show in the following figure.
The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the pipe
(shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is zero.
Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on the
inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated at
each position using the appropriate formulas.

Radial
Shear
Stress
Position Longitudinal Stress (Sl) Hoop Stress (Sh) Stress (St)
(Sr)
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lamé hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows a
graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.
Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
shear stress (St)—which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the red
circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress (Sr) (which
has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1 and the smallest
is S3.

Equivalent Stress, Octahedral Shearing Stress, von Mises Stress:
Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing stress
at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (S.I.):

S.I. = S1-S3
When you configure CAESAR II to report 3D maximum shear stress intensity, the software reports
the largest intensity (S1-S3).
Legacy Settings
Topics
B31.3 Implement Appendix P ...................................................... 107
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)................................. 107
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress ...................................... 108
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index ..................................... 108
B31.3 Implement Appendix P

Controls the implementation of the alternate rules in B31.3 Appendix P. This option produces a
code compliance operating load case, with allowable stress values.
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)

Controls what formula CAESAR II uses for computing longitudinal stress for sustained loads (SL)
for the B31.3 code. The 2010 Edition of B31.3 code introduced a specific formula for computing
SL. This code formula was previously optional and referred to as B31.3 Code Case 178.
The software defaults to automatically computing sustained loads using this formula. You can
change the B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) configuration setting in the
Configuration Editor > SIFs and Stresses to False if you do not want CAESAR II to use this
formula, for example in the case of pre-2010 Edition jobs.
CAESAR II sets this configuration setting to True by default, which means the software overrides
the directives for F/A and torsion and uses this formula to calculate sustained case stresses.

Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress

Enables the software to include calculated axial force in the expansion stress (SE). Choose one of
the following settings:
No
Exclude axial forces from the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range value. (This is Se in
Eq. (17) of B31.3.)
|Sa| + Se
Include the absolute value of the axial force to the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range,
and report the sum as the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range, Se. This selection is
more conservative than (|Sa| + Sb)2.
(|Sa| + Sb)2
Include the absolute value for the axial force to the bending term in the (Expansion)
Displacement Stress Range equation (Se, Eq (17) in B31.3). This selection is less
conservative than |Sa| + Se. This option more closely follows theory.
Default
Follow the recommended setting for the axial force in expansion stress based on the piping
code you specified for the job. (For example, the B31.3 piping code recommends to use the
2
(|Sa| + Sb) equation for axial force. So, when you set this configuration setting to Default, if
2
the job uses the B31.3 piping code, the software uses the (|Sa| + Sb) option for calculating
axial force in the expansion stress.)
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index

Modifies the stress index for sustained loads and occasional loads. The default setting is 0.0000,
which indicates that the software uses whatever the currently active piping code recommends for
the SIF/Index multiplier. For example, if this configuration setting is set to 0.000 and you select
B31.3 or B31.3 Chapter IX, the code defines the SIF multiplier as 0.7500.
With the release of CAESAR II 2014 and the implementation of B31.3 2012, the internal
interpretation of this existing configuration setting was changed. B31.3 2012 defines the SIF
multiplier value as 0.75. Other codes similar to B31.3 do not address this value. The default value
of this configuration setting was changed to 0.0000. This change enables CAESAR II to internally
set the multiplier to 0.7500 for B31.3 and to 1.0000 for other similar codes. The following table
summarizes these settings.

Option Configuration Sustained Moment Multiplier (I)

SIF Multiplier Setting
B31.3, B31.3 Ch IX, Codes similar to B31.3

B31.4, (such as: JPI, B31.5)
& B31.4 Ch XI Codes
Option 1 0.0000 I = 0.75i I = i (similar to Option 4)

(default)
Option 2 0.0001 I = 1.0 I = 1.0
Option 3 0.7500 I = 0.75i I = 0.75i
Option 4 1.0000 I=i I=i
This change does not affect all piping codes.

The following interpretations apply to B31.3 code prior to the 2010 Edition, so they are only
applicable if you need to analyze older jobs to the older code addenda:
 B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 (February 23, 1981) File: 1470-1 states that for sustained and
occasional loads, you can use an SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), type 0.7500.
 B31.3 Interpretation 6-03 (December 14, 1987) File B31-87-022 permits you to ignore the
stress intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this interpretation
(6-03), type 0.0001.
Set/Change Password
You can set password protection for the configuration file using the Security command. By setting
a password on the primary configuration file, a corporate standard can be enforced throughout the
network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will allow only
modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated results.
To set security on your configuration file:

1. Set up your configuration file and click Save and Exit in the top-left corner of the
Configuration Editor window to save the configuration settings.
2. From the Home tab, select File > Set Default Data Directory.
3. Browse and select the CAESAR II System subfolder in the Default Data Directory
Specification dialog box
Locate the System subfolder in the root folder based on your platform.
Windows 7/8/8.1: \Program Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\Version Number\System

Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR

II\Version Number\System
Click Configure or Tools > Configure/Setup to open the Configuration Editor dialog box, and
then click on the Security drop-down arrow.
1. Select one of the following options, depending upon your current configuration:
 New Password (on page 110)
 Access Protected Data (on page 110)
 Change Password (on page 110)
 Remove Password (on page 110)
New Password
Type a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration settings
from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.
 Initially, New Password is the only option available.

 When typing a new password, you are prompted for the new password a second time to
ensure the password was typed as expected the first time.
Access Protected Data

Allows you to modify protected options. This option is accessible only after a password exists.
The use of this option is not necessary if there is no previously specified password. If no
password has been set, you can modify all configuration settings.
Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first type the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, the software disables all computation controls, stress options, and
any other configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations.
Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options that
appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have read/write
access rights.

SECTION 4
Piping Input Reference
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input

Main window menu: Input > Piping
Specifies piping parameters in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain information
about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays automatically. This
model updates as you add new elements.
In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box................................................... 112
Available Commands .................................................................. 240
3D Modeler ................................................................................. 392
S3D/SPR Model View ................................................................. 410

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Piping data is grouped into blocks of related data on the left side of the Classic Piping Input.
Double click >> in the upper right corner of any group to display additional input boxes in a dialog
box. You can arrange these dialog boxes to meet your needs.
The right side of the piping input includes an auxiliary panel with tabs that relate to items selected
through the check boxes. You can also access these tabs by selecting the auxiliary area in the
Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 376).

Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Keys
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various input
boxes. By default, when you place the cursor inside a box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box,
pressing a function key on the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a block of input data
according to the list below.
Function Key Destination
F2 From Node
F3 DX
F4 Diameter
F5 Temp 1
F6 Material
F7 Elastic Modulus (c)
F8 Refractory Thickness
F9 Line number
Help Screens and Units

Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input data
cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a tool tip
indicating the current units.
Node Numbers
Indicates the node numbers for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a piping
element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To node. The
software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract information. You must
specify a From and To node for all elements.
You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu and CAESAR II generates the From and To node values
automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.

Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
For information on controlling the display of node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 360).
From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be
numeric, ranging from 1 to 32000. Typically, the From node number is automatically
generated by CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers, but
be careful not to use the same node number more than once in a model.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the
same node number more than once in a model.
Name
Assigns non-numeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display the
Node Names tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel where you can assign names of up to 10
characters to the From and To nodes. These names display with (or instead) of the node
numbers in graphic plots and reports. In Piping Input, click the down arrow on Node Numbers
(in the Plot Tools toolbar) and select Names Only to display only the node names on the
model, and not node numbers.

Deltas
Indicates the node numbers for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length. The
vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all elements
except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries
include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.
DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction
or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms
of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this
field.

DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
field.
DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
field.
Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its actual
dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box to
select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From end
of the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of the
element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is “0” for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage
for the offset element.

Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
field.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0

Pipe Sizes
Indicates the pipe dimensions for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type the dimensions for the element.
Mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. Seam weld is used only for the
IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from one element to the next during the
design session so you only need to type values for those elements at which a change occurs. You
can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules. CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside
diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping size
specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.

Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR II
converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
 Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
 Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units
the tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available
nominal diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the
configuration software. The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
½ ¾ 1 1 ½ 2 2 ½ 3 3 ½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness is
entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined by
the active piping specification, set by the configuration software.
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation:
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S 80S
JIS Pipe Schedules
1990 Steel Schedules:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S

DIN Pipe Schedules

None
Only the s (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.
Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded
B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate
the Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight pipes
are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication.
WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.
+Mill Tol %; Wl
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It is
used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to
Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the
nominal wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor (W l),
to be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used in
minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the Base
Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill
Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall
thickness, decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more information,
see All Cases Corroded (on page 102).

Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when
you provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software
then duplicates the value through the rest of the input.
Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is known,
you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG. Specific
gravities are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type specific
gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software automatically
converts this value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
Indicates the temperatures and pressures for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can directly
specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 60). Thermal
strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are typed as
gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you typed
creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure data carries
forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro pressure box
causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70°F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 61).

Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
Temperatures
Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine
different operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to ensure that they
are within the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion
coefficient in the temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21
(user-defined material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box
are taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For
example; if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and then
thermally shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an
individual thermal case rather than as a concentrated force.

Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating

Conditions dialog box, accessible by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the
frame surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can keep this
dialog box open or closed for your convenience.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 – Maximum Temperature
T2 – Minimum Temperature
T3 – Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 – Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 – Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 – Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 – Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 – Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 – Compressor Operation
P4 – Demand Pressure
HP – Hydrotest Pressure

Thermal Expansion
Displays thermal expansion coefficients. CAESAR II displays the corresponding thermal
expansion coefficients in the fields when you type operating temperatures in the temperature
fields. When the thermal expansion coefficients are not in the material database, you can type
thermal expansion coefficients in the temperature field if the absolute values are less than the
Alpha Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more
information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 60). You can type up to nine thermal expansion
coefficients in units of length/length in the temperature field on the Extended Operating
Conditions dialogue box. CAESAR II displays these values in the Thermal Expansion
boxes.
Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are 10 pressure boxes, which allow up to nine operating
and one hydrotest pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful with the
setup of the analysis load cases. Review the recommended load cases provided by the
software carefully before proceeding.
Specify operating pressures 4 through 9 through the Extended Operating Conditions dialog
box, accessed by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the standard Temperature
and Pressure input boxes. You can work with this dialog box open and move the box around
for your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a hydrotest load
case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
 The software disables the Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) by default because it
assumes the job to be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you
can do so by using the Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job
Bourdon Pressure (on page 61).
 The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic
pipe (Material ID=20).
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You must
use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 – Maximum Temperature
T2 – Minimum Temperature
T3 – Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 – Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 – Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 – Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 – Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 – Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 – Compressor Operation

P4 – Demand Pressure
HP – Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Specifies details for special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and
tees), which require additional information. Select or clear these options by double-clicking the
applicable component check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays
the auxiliary panel on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a
bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information, see Bend (on
page 126).
Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary panel to collect the component weight. For more
information, see Rigid (on page 130).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
 When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.
 The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same
weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of
insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe multiplied by 1.75.
 If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the element
is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In this case,
the software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that element.
 The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make sure
that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary panel used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 131).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point) or
as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the
lateral or angular stiffness.

SIF & Tees

Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors (SIFs).
CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more information,
see SIFs & Tees (on page 134).
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information,
see Rigid (on page 130) and Expansion Joints (on page 131).
Bend
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).
Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
 Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
 Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
 3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.

Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and
can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend
should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the
bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
 All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any
point on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each
other. You can change the 5º node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more
information, see Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 74).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in
this box) as well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.
Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node
numbers must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If
numbering by fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for
the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat the
added nodes on the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend
curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or for
the location of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent
intersection point for the bend.
Number of Miter Cuts

Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR II
checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be
widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken
down into “n” single cut widely spaced miters, where “n” is the total number of cuts in the bend.
The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and

flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter
spacing are related by the following equations:
 Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan θ )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
 Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
θ = Bend Angle / 2.0
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the matching
pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside diameter of
the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe. CAESAR II calculates section
modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the matching pipe as defined by the
codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe

B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend stress
calculations.
K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.

Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl box
for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the minimum
wall thickness of the bend element.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Wl for Bends
B31.1 / B31.3 - Defines the weld strength reduction factor (Wl) for bend elements. This value
is used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692 - Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively, Tp and Tb are the average wall thickness of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a
default value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.
Rigid
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid or
insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should be

observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the thickness
of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 929).
Type the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve (on page 260) for automatic input for these types of components.
Expansion Joints
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective
diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or the
bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
Zero Length Expansion Joints

Specifies zeroes in the DX, DY, and DZ fields (or leave the fields blank) for hinged and gimbal
joints. Use 1.0 to define completely flexible stiffness and 1.0E12 to define completely rigid
stiffness. You must type all stiffnesses.
Finite Length Expansion Joints

Specifies the expansion joint vector in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes. Because the transverse
stiffness is directly related to the bending stiffness for finite length expansion joints, type only
one of these stiffnesses. CAESAR II calculates the other stiffness automatically based on
flexible length, effective ID, and the other stiffness. In general, type the transverse stiffness
and leave the bending stiffness blank.
Bellows Stiffness Properties

Specifies the expansion joint parameters.
If the element length is zero, then you should define all of the stiffnesses. If the element length
is not zero, then you should leave blank either the Bending Stif or the Trans Stif box.
CAESAR II automatically calculates the stiffness that you did not type. You can type all
stiffnesses for rubber expansion joints
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II uses a default value of
0.10000E+06.
Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
used in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by four before being used in
any piping software. Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint
manufacturers) that are used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used without
modification.

Use 1.0 for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.

Use 1.0E12 for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero length expansion joints can be used in many modeling applications, such as defining
struts or hinged ends. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the
element that precedes the expansion joint if the To node of the preceding element is equal to
the From node on the expansion joint element. If the preceding element does not go into the
expansion joint, then the orientation is taken from the element that follows the expansion joint
if it properly leaves the joint.
Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog. For
all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force tending to
blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to pressure is
calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint: Aeff. The
Effective ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / π)1/2
Reducer
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.
CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code Compliance
Considerations (on page 1013)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress Calculations.
These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other code-specific
considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this value based on the

change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness
2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not
specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the
following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value in
the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Diameter 2
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as
Diameter 2.
Thickness 2
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries forward
as the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values
if that feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the thickness from the
following element as Thickness 2.
Alpha
Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes the
slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).

TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.
Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an
assumption that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer
length. If you leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the
change in diameters) / (0.60 x element length).
R1
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table
8 of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
R2
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table
8 of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
SIFs & Tees
Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

This auxiliary panel tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting types, for
up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II automatically
calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this behavior.
Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate for the
selected fitting.
There are two basic component types:

 Three element intersection components
 Two element joint components
A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node and
that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions where you
have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not recommended.
Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two elements framing into
the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going to
the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing into
the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking.
These messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.

Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
1 REINFORCED FABRICATED TEE PAD THK FTG RO CROTC

H
2 UNREINFORCED FABRICATED FTG RO CROTC

TEE H
3 WELDING TEE FTG RO CROTC

H
4 SWEEPOLET CROTC
H
5 WELDOLET CROTC
H
6 EXTRUDED WELDING TEE FTG RO CROTC

H
7 GIRTH BUTT WELD WELD D OR ID
8 SOCKET WELD (NO UNDERCUT) FILLET
9 SOCKET WELD (AS WELDED) FILLET
10 TAPERED TRANSITION WELD D
11 THREADED JOINT
12 DOUBLE WELDED SLIP-ON
13 LAP JOINT FLANGE (B16.9)
14 BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLET
15 BONNEY FORGE LATROLET WELD ID
16 BONNEY FORGE INSERT

WELDOLET
17 FULL ENCIRCLEMENT TEE FTG RO WELD ID
*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 143).

Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most
often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply
to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment >
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools
toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe the
effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad can be
automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
 You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option
exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on
page 103). If you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for
bend To nodes. The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
 CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend
curvature regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used
to intensify injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of
supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
 For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)* (on page 136) table.
 For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
 For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of tee
type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 153).
 For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and
Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692
code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations

specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to
use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for tees (including the
pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
 ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of
Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee
types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
In-Plane SIF (ii)

Indicates the in-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or an intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies.
Then, specify the In-Plane SIF (ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.
In-Plane Index (Ii)

Indicates the in-plane sustained stress index (Ii) value.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress index
applies. Then, specify the In-Plane (Ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane Index (Ii) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
Out-Plane SIF (io)

Indicates the out-of-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies.
Then, specify the Out-Plane SIF (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
Out-Plane Index (Io)

Indicates the out-of-plane sustained stress index (Io) value.
applies. Then, specify the Out-Plane Index (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Out-Plane Index (Io) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF value (io) or 1.0.

Torsion SIF (it)

Indicates the torsional SIF (it) value for a bend or an intersection.
applies. Then, specify the Torsion SIF (it) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion SIF (it) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
Torsion Index (It)

Indicates the sustained torsional moment index (It). You can use this index value (along with
the torsional moment due to sustained loads) to determine the amount of stress that is due to
sustained torsional moment.
applies. Then, specify the Torsion Index (It) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion Index (It) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
Axial SIF (ia)

Indicates the longitudinal (axial) SIF (ia) value on a bend or at an intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the SIF applies.
Then, specify the Axial SIF (ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
The B31.3 code indicates that, in the absence of more applicable data, the Axial
SIF (ia) value is 1 for elbows, pipe bends, and miter bends. The ia value is the same as the
Out-Plane SIF (io) value for all other components.
Axial Index (Ia)

Indicates the sustained longitudinal (axial) force index (Ia). You can use this index value (along
with the longitudinal force due to sustained loads and the dimensions of a cross-sectional
area of the pipe) to determine the amount of stress that is due to sustained longitudinal force.
applies. Then, specify the Axial Index (Ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Axial Index (Ia) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.

Pressure SIF (ip)

Indicates the pressure SIF (ip) value for a bend or an intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress pressure
applies. Then, specify the Pressure SIF (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure SIF (ip) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
Pressure Index (Ip)

Indicates the sustained pressure index (Ip).
applies. Then, specify the Pressure Index (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure Index (Ip) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement tees
(intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC
329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value
can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you
attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a
smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the
resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.

WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied
for your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet leg
is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31 piping
codes for further clarification.
Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:
 0 or BLANK - As Welded
 1 - Finished/Ground Flush
This box is only applicable for:
 IGE/TD/12
 Bonney Forge Sweepolets
 Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
 Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld to
be ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 141).
B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3
Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe: B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0
Curved Pipe: B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2
Intersections: B1 = 0.5

Butt Welded Tees: B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
Branch Connections: (r < 0.5R)

B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS 7159
Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is only
applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe: B1=0.5 B2=1.0
Curved Pipe: B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2=1.30/h2/3; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm2
Intersections: B1=0.5
Butt-Welded Tees: B2b=0.4(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

B2r=0.5(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

Branch Connections: (r<0.5R)

B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0
B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
C2b=3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not <1.5
1/4
C2r=1.15(r/t) but not <1.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values for
any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are defined.
SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8)

B31.1
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 10a,
10c, 10d, 10e, and 10f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when
determining the SIF value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the
Configuration Options Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting
SIFs.
B31.8
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when
determining the SIF value for the tee.
ASME NC and ND
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure 3673.2(b)-2 as well as
Notes 10 and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining
the SIF value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration
Options Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3

Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the software to compute the Y
value based on the highest temperature value specified.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692

When you select SIF & Tees on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Auxiliary panel for
SIFs/Tees becomes active. The Type box indicates what type of tee or joint to use for the
piping code specified. The software uses this input in the same way for most piping codes.
However, there are only a few tee and joint types for ISO 14692.
1 Tee
2 Joint
3 Qualified Tee

Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.
 Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.
 Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings.
 Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified
service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping System

SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only
acts at the node on the current element.
Stress Intensification Factors and Stress Indices Details

CAESAR II calculates SIFs automatically for bends and defined intersections as specified by
the applicable piping code. You can type a user-defined SIF for any point in the piping system
by activating the SIFs & Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the
node number where the stress is to be intensified in the first available Node box. Type the
in-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and the Out-Plane
SIF (io) boxes. Specify any axial and torsion index values on the elements on the Axial Index
(Ia) and Torsion Index (It) boxes.
You cannot specify SIFs for bend elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend
option is set to True in the configuration file. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 103). Code defined SIFs always apply.
CAESAR II does not allow user-defined stress intensification factors to be less than 1.0.
The node to be intensified must be the To or the From node on the current element.
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if
two pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a stress
intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then the 10 end
of the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of the element
from 10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an unreinforced
fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40 and from 40 to
45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The code-calculated
values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress

intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, which is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly
override the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe
elements must be modified:
35 to 40 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
40 to 15 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so part
of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40 NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):
If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated
values exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is
2.0, then a part of that element data might appear:
110 to 115 Node 110

Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Node: 115
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the
in-plane stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these
user-input values.
If you do not specify Torsion SIF (it), Axial SIF (ia), and Pressure SIF (ip), CAESAR II
calculates the values as 1.

The ASME B31.3 code update also introduced using the stress indices in sustained stress
equations.
If you do not specify the In-Plane Index (Ii), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of either
0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
If you do not specify the Out-Plane Index (Io), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either of 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF (io) or 1.
If you do not specify the Torsion Index (It), Axial Index (Ia), and Pressure Index (Ip),
CAESAR II sets these values to 1.
Currently, the software does not use the Pressure SIF (ip) or Pressure Index (Ip)
in the calculation.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersede any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply
code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing
the normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on
the bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three
pipes framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the
larger pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more than
three pipes framing into it (for example, a cross, and for non-90-degree branches, such as
lateral intersections).

SIF Scratchpad
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the Classic
Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or
Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
View the stress intensification factors at bends from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by
clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bends or Bend SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar.
The SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted. The
node must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.
You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to see
the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual
model.

IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.
Node
SIFs.
SIFs.

supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Weldolet
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
Weldoflange
153).
T/Th/Tb
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Weldolet
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 153).

Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
Weldoflange
page 153).
Te/Tb
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
Full Encirclement Tee
153).
Long Weldneck Flange
153).
Weldoflange
153).
rp/do
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Weldolet
153).

Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
153).
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Sweepolet
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).
r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
153).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).

Sweepolet
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).

IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.
Forged Tee
Weldolet

Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange


Sweepolet
Fabricated Tee

Weld ID
 IGE/TD/12
Stress Concentration Factors

Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been
specified except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.
Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any
values selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except
when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.

Boundary Conditions
Indicates you are supplying information on items which restrain (or impose movement on) the
pipe, such as restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles, or displacements. Select or clear these options
by double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Though not required, it is recommended that you define such information on the dialog box which
has that point as the From node or To node. This is of benefit if the data must be located for
modification. The auxiliary panel tabs allow you to specify up to four restraints (devices which in
some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal
displacements per element. If needed, you can define additional conditions for any node on other
elements.
Restraints
Aux Tools toolbar: Restraints

Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint
Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint
Indicates that you are specifying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input.
The Restraints tab of the auxiliary panel controls data for up to six restraints for each element.
Node number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, the software defaults the support to a rigid component. Enter a support tag name in the
Tag field. You can also import support tag and a Support GUID using keywords in the PCF
restraint mapping file. CAESAR II adds the support tag after you import the PCF file.
You can specify as many as six restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than six
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
 Specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1) for a
restraint running at 45 degrees in the X-Z plane.
 Do not use restraints in the following situations:
 Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacements
auxiliary panel in Piping Input.
 Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles auxiliary panel
to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to
calculate local nozzle flexibilities. You can also specify custom nozzle flexibilities using
the Custom Nozzle Type option. After the software calculates the nozzle stiffnesses,

CAESAR II automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping
model.
 Hangers program-designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger auxiliary panel in Piping Input.
 For information on controlling the display of restraints, see Restraints (on page 353).
Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to be
on the current element.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes) can be used to tie one
node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank, then the software ties the
restraint node by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the CNode is specified, then the
software ties the restraint node by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, you can use CNodes to
geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. CAESAR II controls this option
through the Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 75) configuration setting.
Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraints auxiliary
panel in Piping Input. For more information, see the Restraints section of the CAESAR II
Applications Guide.
Restraint Type Description Example
ANC Anchor
Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 Gap
 Mu
The anchor is at the center

of the pipe for a rigid stanchion.
Otherwise, the anchor is at the base of
the stanchion.

X, Y, or Z Translational Double Acting X support

Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 Gap
 Mu
+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z Translational Directional +Y support with slide plates
Modifiers: Allows movement in the positive Y
direction and restrains movement in the
 Stiffness negative Y direction.
 Gap
 Mu
The plus or minus
sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.
RX, RY, or RZ Rotational Double Acting 1) RZ, X, and Y

Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 Gap
2) RX, RY, X, and Y. Hinged-end rod

free to rotate about the Z-axis.
Restrains all except RZ.

+RX, -RX, +RY, -RY, Rotational Directional +RZ, X, and Y

+RZ, -RZ
Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 Gap
The plus or minus
sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.
GUIDE Guide, Double Acting Guide (or X) and Y

Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 Gap
 Mu
GUIDE only restricts
the pipe’s lateral movement in
the horizontal plane and does
not contain a vertical This can also be X instead of
component or a pipe axial GUIDE.
component.
LIM Double Acting Limit Stop LIM with gap (or X with gap) and +Y
Modifiers: Gap between support and each limit
stop
 Stiffness
 Gap
 Mu
A limit stop is axial to
the pipe, but may not align with
a global axis when elements
are non-orthogonal.
For more information, see Gap (on

page 166).
This can also be X with gap
instead of LIM with gap.

+LIM, -LIM Directional Limit Stop +LIM with gap in the direction of the
From node to the To node
Modifiers:
(also +Y)
 Stiffness Gap between support and the limit stop
 Gap
 Mu
A limit stop is axial to
the pipe, but may not align with
a global axis when elements
are non-orthogonal.
For more information, see Gap (on

page 166).
This can also be +X with gap
instead of +LIM with gap.
XROD, YROD, ZROD Large Rotation Rod YROD or +YROD

Modifiers:
+XROD, +YROD,
+ZROD,  Stiffness
 Length
 Fi
All rods are
directional. If there is no sign it
is assumed to be positive.
This can also be +YROD

instead of YROD.
-XROD, -YROD, Large Directional Rotation Rod -YROD

-ZROD
Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 Length
 Fi

X2, Y2, Z2 Translational Double Acting X2 soil stiffness with a load limit
Bilinear
Modifiers:
 K1
 K2
 Fy
For more information, see Stif (on page

167), K2 (on page 166), and Mu (on
page 167).
+X2, -X2, +Y2, -Y2, Translational Directional The directional restraint allows
+Z2, -Z2 Bilinear movement in the specified direction.
Modifiers:
 K1
 K2
 Fy
RX2, RY2, RZ2 Rotational Double Acting RX2, RY2

Bilinear
Modifiers:
 K1
 K2
 Fy
+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, Rotational Directional Bilinear The directional restraint allows rotation
-RY2, +RZ2, -RZ2 in the specified direction about the
Modifiers:
specified axis.
 K1
 K2
 Fy

XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR Bottom Out Spring YSPR

Modifiers:
 Stiffness
 x
 F
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB Translational Double Acting YSNB

Snubber
Modifier:
 Stiffness
+XSNB, -XSNB, Directional Snubber The directional restraint allows

+YSNB, -YSNB, movement in the specified direction.
+ZSNB, -ZSNB
ANC
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at the
node.
X, Y, or Z
Specifies restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines the
direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom. For example, a
+Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is free to move in the
plus Y direction.
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction vector
into the corresponding cosines.

RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.
LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type
a sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element longitudinal
axis.
XROD, YROD, ZROD

Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above the
pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)

Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.
X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses
associated with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear
restraints can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies rotational skewed restraints.
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded, the
spring bottoms-out.
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB

Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the
input.

3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are on
the far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called OCC,
which activates the snubber stiffness.
So:
 When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node displaces
as before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not OCC.
 When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the snubber
node displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two
displacements due to the WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case is
now set as OCC.
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds Fy,
the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as
rigid. Type a value of 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
Gap
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM RX RY RZ
GAP - Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can
travel before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is
given in degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a sign,
then the restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative
displacements along the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y
restraint, then the restrained node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before
restraint occurs. The gap specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that
can occur along the positive Y direction in this example.
You can type two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the same
node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form the
window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of length in
CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len - Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the
restraint line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about
the pivot point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a
required entry.

TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2

K2 - Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to model
shallow trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as rigid.
Type 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x" - Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the
case of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring
bottoms out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered
rigid. The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid, then
you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor, the
stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.
Mu
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM
MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along
the direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal
to MU * Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a
friction coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient
of Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu) (on
page 60).
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD to
model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold load
on the hanger.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial stiffness
K1 is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness K2 is used.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.

Tag (Restraint Tag)

Specifies the restraint identifier or name. Type to manually create a new name. You can import
and export tags through a .pcf file (see "PCF Restraint Mapping" on page 328) or a neutral file.
The tag:
 Displays in piping input, model graphics, and Isogen.
 Exports to applicable output reports and MDB files.
 Duplicates with the restraint or hanger when you duplicate the element.
GUID (Unique Component Identifier)

Displays the software-assigned GUID for the restraint.
GUID is a display-only value in the Restraints list input. For more information, see List
(on page 252).
Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger data,
or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run and the
results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified catalog.
CAESAR II provides catalogs for more than 35 spring hanger vendors.
The Hangers tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel lets you specify details on a hanger-by-hanger
basis in the piping input. To specify values for all hangers in a model, see Hanger Design Control
Data (on page 273).
 Any changes you type in the Hangers tab override the global values you specify in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
 For information on controlling the display of hangers, see Hangers (on page 356).
Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.

Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil 2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping 4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology 8. Capitol
9. Piping Services 10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex 12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec 14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider) 16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd. 18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi 20. Myricks
21. China Power 22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA
25. Binder 26. Gradior
27. NHK 28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa 30. Mitsubishi
31. Yamashita 32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry 34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co. 36. Senior
37. Unison 38. Wookwang

Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
 Extended Range
 Cold Load
 Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data (on
page 273), accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping input. Specify the
default hanger table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger
Table configuration setting in Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples
of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the
CAESAR II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the
selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when
the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load
ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build
double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel
limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can
supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often
eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
 Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
 Hanger stops are easier to remove.
 There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or
when the stops are removed.
 Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
 Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
 Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A
hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection
is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is
at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference
between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical
thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
 In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
 Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides as
much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the system
is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping systems,

when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated by hand.
Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of the spring
table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II
design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the
larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is effective, can
only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot load to the next
higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new
spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Tag (Hanger Tag)

Specifies the hanger identifier or name. Type to manually create a new name. You can import and
export tags through a .pcf file (see "PCF Restraint Mapping" on page 328) or a neutral file.
The tag:
 Duplicates with the restraint or hanger when you duplicate the element.
Available Space (neg. for can)

Specifies the amount of room above or below the pipe where you can install the hanger or
can. If the value is negative, then CAESAR II assumes that a can is to be installed. If the value
is positive, then CAESAR II assumes that a hanger is to be in installed. Hangers or cans are
selected for a particular location only if they can be installed in the space allotted. The precise
definition of available space varies with the manufacturer. Drawings and tables for each
manufacturer are shown at the end of this section.

This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or can:
Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs
are typically chosen in place of one large spring.
Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this value
is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This is
approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the hot
load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the operating
displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:

The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is
selected instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases, these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod
has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support
from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a particular location.
No. Hangers at Location

Specifies the number of hangers at a location.
Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II place as many hangers as necessary to make the
installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as five
springs if necessary, type -5.
Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the

selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances
and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this
check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring,
assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than their
short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Operating Load (Total at Loc.)

Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.
This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a
proportionately larger part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the hanger
is designed to support after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of the piping.
CAESAR II's calculated hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger table printed in
the output processor. The column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also appears in this table.
Type the total operating load that you want to use at the location. For example, if there are two
hangers specified at the location and each should carry 500 lb., then the operating load
specified should be 1,000 lb.
Hanger Hardware Weight

Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between the
hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this weight
is great enough.
Multiple Load Case Design Option

Specifies the load case for hanger design. You can base the spring selection algorithm on one
or more operating conditions. A two-pump installation where only one pump operates at a
time is a good application for multiple load case hanger design.
There are currently thirteen different multiple load case design algorithms available:
 Design spring per operating case #1.
 Design spring per operating case #2.
 Design spring per operating case #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, and #9.
 Design spring for maximum operating load.
 Design spring for maximum travel.
 Design spring for average load and average travel.
 Design spring for maximum load and maximum travel.
You can specify the Multiple Load Case Design option at the global level on the Hanger
Design Control Data dialog box. The globally specified option applies for all hanger design
locations unless overridden on a specific hanger design dialog box.
Type the number of operating thermal cases to consider when sizing springs for this system
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box. This value defaults to 1.0. Also type the

Multiple Load Case Design option to be the default value unless the design option is to be
specified individually for each hanger to be designed in the system.
Example Problem: Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger Design

This example illustrates the different hanger designs that can result from the use of different
multiple load case design options.

Multiple Load Case Design Option for Hanger Design
Hanger A
Multiple Load Case Design Hanger Travel Design Hanger Load

Design Option
1 0.752 in 730.0 lb
2 0.029 in 560.0 lb
10 0.752 in 730.0 lb
11 0.752 in 730.0 lb
12 0.3905 in 645.0 lb
13 0.752 in 730.0 lb
Hanger B

Design Option
1 0.032 in 592.0 lb
2 0.733 in 587.0 lb


Design Option
10 0.032 in 592.0 lb
11 0.733 in 587.0 lb
12 0.3825 in 589.5 lb
13 0.733 in 592.0 lb
Free Restraint at Node

Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also
specify the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor
directions to free. For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y
direction should be freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in
the immediate vicinity of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained
weight run so that loads normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as it
thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take almost
the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed when
making the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just like a
free end, but only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free
Code is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is completely
free for the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It is
run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.
Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the directions
to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The available free codes
are as follows:

 Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.

 Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
 Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
 Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
 Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,
Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about 4
pipe diameters.
Predefined Hanger Data

Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on the
hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of Hangers
at Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers. Then, type the
spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to try to compute
the equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:
 Specify all information for the hanger.
 Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.
If you specify all of the information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:
 Spring rate and theoretical cold load
 Constant effort support load
Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.
Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load

Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level
design for the hanger.
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers

If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more than
a single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is
distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and travel
for all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The stiffness

of the reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs, it makes
a comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within 5% of your
existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the output report. If
the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's data is listed. In
either case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following analyses. It is up to
you to confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.
Constant Effort Support Load

Specifies the support load for the constant effort hanger.
GUID
Displays the software-assigned GUID for the hanger.
GUID is a display-only value in the Hangers list input. For more information, see List
(on page 252).
Nozzle Flex
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking Nozzle
Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Nozzles tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel controls options for flexible nozzle
connections. When you type values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the
flexibilities and adds them to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to
your specified criteria. You can select WRC 297, API 650, PD 5500, or Custom in the Nozzle
Type box.
WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
After error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and Warnings
dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC 297 bulletin. It is
sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the several asymptotic
limits, or to a curve boundary.

You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel
shell. If you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very short)
nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the
local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the
true centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each
other).
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node
and fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall Thickness
boxes.

A valid nozzle node has the following properties:

 Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
 The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to the nozzle
stiffnesses.
Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then the
nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel nodes
when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.
A vessel can be any type of vessel, tank, heat exchanger, vessel head (not just the
shell), or any other equipment.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosines VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel. For
example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
 Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
 Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
 Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>

 For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, if the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear,
the software flags this as an error. Only nozzles that are perpendicular to the shell are allowed.
 PD 5500 allows nozzles on cylinders or spheres.
Fax - Axial (Nozzle) (radial stiffness)

Mi - In-plane Bending (longitudinal stiffness)
Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential stiffness)
Mt - Torsional (Nozzle) (torsional stiffness)
D - Direction cosine of shell

D - Direction cosine of head
Represents a nozzle on any type of

head.
 For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each other).
Hence for the custom option you are not limited to radial nozzles.
Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle.
CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe diameter. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the diameter of the pipe used to
model the nozzle.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and
provides a way to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.

Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle.
CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe
element used to model the nozzle.
Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the vessel's
cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from the
previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.
Vessel Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel.
Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, this thickness is added to the vessel wall thickness
before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.

Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, you must also type a valid vessel material number in
the corresponding field. The software uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot
modulus-of-elasticity.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and provides a
way to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.
Vessel Material (Optional)

Specifies the vessel material number.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, this is an optional field. You must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can be
any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are
left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software and is for information only.
API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
Nozzle Node
acting on the node.
other).
boxes.
degrees of freedom.
input.

nodes.
stiffnesses.
Tank Node (optional)

Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
tank shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses
to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection to
the foundation.





head.

model the nozzle.

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.
Distance to Tank Base

Specifies the height of the nozzle from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
Reinforcing
Specifies the location of the reinforcing. Select Shell or Nozzle.
Tank Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not
recommend these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.
Tank Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Tank Modulus of Elasticity

Specifies the hot modulus-of-elasticity for the tank. If this value is left blank, the software

assumes a value of 0.2950E+08.
Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are
listed in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this value
is left blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 – 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
Set Displacement Vector

Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select one
among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the current
job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already specified
displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the calculated
displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None, CAESAR II does not
use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.
PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
Nozzle Node
acting on the node.
other).

boxes.
degrees of freedom.
input.
nodes.
stiffnesses.

foundation.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.

model the nozzle.

Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the vessel's
cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from the
previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Type
Specifies the type of vessel. Select Cylinder or Sphere.



Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, you must also type a valid vessel material number in
the corresponding field. The software uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot
modulus-of-elasticity.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and provides a
way to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.


Custom
Allows you to define flexibility values that you calculate using another method. You can also define
informational properties that are included in reports.
Nozzle Node
acting on the node.
other).
boxes.
degrees of freedom.
input.
nodes.
stiffnesses.


foundation.





head.
Axial (Nozzle)
Specifies the radial stiffness in the direction axial to the nozzle, as calculated using another
method.



head.

If you do not define a stiffness value, the software uses the default rigid stiffness.
In-Plane Bending
Specifies the longitudinal stiffness at the nozzle and along the run of the pipe, as calculated using
another method.


 For a nozzle in the center of the head, in-plane

and out-of-plane stiffness are the same due to
symmetry.
Represents a nozzle on any type of head.  For a hillside (off-center) nozzle, you should
apply stiffness in the proper direction.

Out-of-Plane Bending
Specifies the circumferential stiffness at the nozzle and across the pipe cross-section, as
calculated using another method.
Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential

stiffness)
Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential

stiffness)
 For a nozzle in the center of the head, in-plane

and out-of-plane stiffness are the same due to
symmetry.
Represents a nozzle on any type of head.
 For a hillside (off-center) nozzle, you should
apply stiffness in the proper direction.

Torsional (Nozzle)
Specifies the torsional stiffness on the nozzle, as calculated using another method.


Represents a nozzle on any type of head.

model the nozzle.

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle.
CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe
element used to model the nozzle.





Displacements
Defines displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking Displacements on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Displacements tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each element.
Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully restrain the
node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a direction.

Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for the
same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
 Specifying no value for directions for all nine vectors models the node as free to move in all
directions.
 Specifying 0.00 for all directions is the same as defining an ANC (on page 164) anchor
restraint.
Example
1. Define directions on one vector. 2. Click Fix DOFs.

For information on controlling the display of displacements, see Displacements (on

page 353).
Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at this
node.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies displacements for up to nine vectors, each corresponding to an operating temperature.
For each vector, you can define the six degrees of freedom in the global X, Y and Z directions.
Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully restrain the
node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a direction.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for the
same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
 If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, then that

degree-of-freedom is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they contain that
displacement set.
 You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more information, see
Import/Export Displacements from File (on page 385).
Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this option
by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file if
you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are located
in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.

 Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the flanges in the
Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.
 Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 566).
From, To, Both

Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Peq/NC-3658.3 Selection
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method or
the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/(π)G + 4F/(π)G + PD ≤ Pressure Rating
3 2
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) ≤ Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) ≤ 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange, developed
during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange, developed
during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi, shall
not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross-sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure

Read from File

Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read
Temperature-Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with
CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME – 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.
Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure
class and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange
Temperature-Pressure Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically
builds a flange name made up of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material
Class.
Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle

Displays the gasket diameter. Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME – 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory. This box
does double duty depending on which analysis technique is active.
Peq Method:
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):
 when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket contact
face
 when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact face,
less 2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code RToD).
The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method:
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through the
bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.

Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade. You
can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in ascending
temperature order.
Bolt Area (Ab)

Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of least
diameter under stress.
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9

Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the
operating temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
Nozzle Lmt Check
Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system. The
various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be less
than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time-consuming task,
which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.

Example
To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a simple
check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for the more
rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.
Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node
should have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node
represents an equipment nozzle.

Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits. Available
choices are:
 Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| ≤ |Fal|
|Fb| ≤ |Fbl|
|Fc| ≤ |Fcl|
|Ma| ≤ |Mal|
|Mb| ≤ |Mbl|
|Mc| ≤ |Mcl|
 SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
 Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by their
respective allowables is compared to 1.0.
and
Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system ABC
for this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 204) fields. The
vector must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
 ( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
 ( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction

 ( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z
plane.
For the Equipment Limits Check, the angle between the pipe element and the
equipment reference vector should be 90. If you are trying to model an API-610 end nozzle on
a horizontal pump, set the reference vector to the CAESAR II global vertical axis.
Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box. Select an equipment file (some files are shipped with CAESAR
II) from which to read force and moment data. If the file contains multiple nozzle types, select
a nozzle type in the Select a Nozzle Type dialog box to complete the data import into the
Forces - Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter the data directly into the fields.
Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for the
load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A is
defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right-hand rule). For more information
on the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page
202).
 A - Pipe/nozzle axis
 B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft
direction.)
 C - Other perpendicular direction.
Loading Conditions
Indicates that you are defining loads acting on the pipe. Select or clear these options by
double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
These loads may be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform
loads (which can be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind
loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factor—the loads themselves are
specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes
are unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed
from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).

Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per element.
You can use up to nine force vectors.
For information on controlling the display of forces and moments, see Forces (on page
358).
Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can type as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the moment
are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.

The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
Y -8/12
or may be specified:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
Y -.6667
Assuming uniform load in g’s, your entries of X = 1.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0 represent a 1.0g load on the
piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0 represent a
1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in Y-up coordinate
system.
Uniform load in g’s is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
You can activate uniform loads in g’s by selecting the Uniform load in G’s check box
using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.

Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3

Specifies the three components of the uniform load for a vector. You can type as many as
three vectors. The components of the uniform load are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.
The uniform load is either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of
gravitational loading (G).
in G's, in F/L
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.
Wind / Wave
Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave
loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The software
automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary panel tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data. Wind load data is distributive and applies to
the current and all following elements until you change it.

Wind Shape Factor

Specifies the coefficient as defined in ASCE 7 in Figure 6-21 for chimneys, tanks, and similar
structure. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical sections. Activating the wind
option activates the Wind Load Input tab, which is accessed from the Load Case Editor
during static analysis.
Refer to the respective wind code standard for the applicable wind shape factor,
specific to that code.
Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.
Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6
to 1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca

Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The software
increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Marine Growth Density

Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe
weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.

Off
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe material’s elastic modulus, Poisson’s ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during error
checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session so
you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because this list is
quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from matching
materials.
 Materials 1-17 define generic materials without code allowable stresses.
 Material 18 defines the cold spring element for cut short.
 Material 19 defines the cold spring element for cut long.
 Material 20 defines Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.
 Material 21 represents user-defined material.

 Materials 101 and greater define materials specific to the active piping code associated with a
pipe element.
When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the allowable
stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, type the corresponding properties.
Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required for the
code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and code if
available in the Material Database.
The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates piping
codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that you
correctly interpret each new input data cell.
Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements
until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves (on page 228) to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material Fatigue
Curve dialog box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.

Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default setting
in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their current
publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1 JPI
B31.3 Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)
B31.3, Chapter IX Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)
B31.4 B31.1 - 1967
B31.4, Chapter IX Stoomwezen
B31.4, Chapter XI RCC-M C
B31.5 RCC-M D
B31.8 CODETI
B31.8, Chapter VIII GPTC/Z380
B31.9 FDBR
Norwegian TBK-6 BS 7159
ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) UKOOA
ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) IGE/TD/12
Navy 505 DNV
CAN/CSA Z662 ISO 14692
CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11 PD 8010-1
BS 806 PD 8010-2
EN-13480
HPGSL
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 929).
Sc
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific material
taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically after you
select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the longitudinal weld
efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1
Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where
applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint efficiency
(Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency before
using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX

Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value should be
zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code, then you should
type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI
Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken from Table 1 in the appendix.
For more information, see Sy (on page 221).
B31.5
Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff should be
zero, blank, or one.
B31.8
Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII
Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from Appendix D. For more
information, see Sy (on page 221).
B31.9
SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in the
minimum wall thickness check.
ASME NC and ND
SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Navy 505
There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied in
Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662
Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the standards or
specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see Sy (on page
221).
BS 806
0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in BS 806. If
you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1
Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at temperature (SHn and Fn
respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the circumferential weld joint efficiency and
has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2
SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is not used. If you define
a value for Eff, the software ignores it.

B31.1 (1967)
SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A. These tables
include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies
for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then CAESAR II divides the SC
by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989)
SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to as Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D
SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
CODETI
This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores
it.
Norwegian
This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159
Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO
Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1
Not used.
DN
Not used.
EN-13480
SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380
Not used.
PD 8010-1
Not used.
PD 8010-2
Not used.
ISO 14692
SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.

JPI
Not used.
SH1, SH2, ... SH9

Specifies the hot stresses. Typically, these are the hot allowable stress for the specific material
taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills the boxes automatically after you
select the material and piping code. There are nine boxes corresponding to the nine operating
temperatures. You must type a value for each defined temperature case. The value of SH is
usually divided by the longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the
recommendations that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1
Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 211).
B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI
Not used.
B31.5
B31.8
Temperature derating factor, T, according to Table 841.116A.
B31.8, Chapter VIII
Temperature derating factor, T (according to Table 841.116A).
B31.9
Allowable stress from Table I-1. For more information, see SC (on page 211).
ASME NC and ND
Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505
Allowable stress from Table XIIA. For more information, see SC (on page 211).
CAN Z662
Not used.
BS 806
0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. Eff is not used.
Swedish Method 1
Yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2
Allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.

B31.1 (1967)
Stoomwezen
Yield stress at design temperature. This value is referred to as Re (vm) in the code.
RCC-M C, D
Taken from the Appendix.
CODETI
f from the code.
Norwegian
f2 from the code.
FDBR
Hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159
Design stress sd in the longitudinal direction as defined in Section 4.3 of the code (σd =Σd *
Elamx). Specify design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction by typing the ratio of the
circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff box. Because design strain
should be the same for both directions, the value in the Eff box is also the ratio of Elamf(hoop)
to Elamx (longitudinal).
UKOOA
Allowable design stress in the hoop direction defined in the code as f1 * LTHS. The three hot
allowable stress boxes correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
DNV
Yield stress is used here instead of hot allowable stress.
IGE/TD/12
Yield stress is used here instead of a hot allowable stress.
EN-13480
Allowable stress at maximum metal temperature.
GPTC/Z380
Temperature reduction factor T according to Par. 192.115.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2)
Not used.
ISO 14692
SH is used in a different way. See the reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.

JPI
Not used.
SY1, SY2, ... SY9

Specifies the yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at the design temperature. This option
only displays when you select JPL or HPGSL in the Codes list.
This is Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at maximum
temperature.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database
if that value is available and applicable.
UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9

Specifies the ultimate tensile strength at the design temperature.
F1, F2, ... F9

Specifies the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
B31.1
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c. Consult the applicable piping code
for methods of combining cycle life data where several thermal states exist and where the
number of thermal cycles is high. The software assumes a value of one if you do not type a
value.
B31.3
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c corresponding to Fig 302.3.5. If
certain criteria are met, then the stress range reduction factor is allowed to exceed 1.0. The
number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.3. This allows CAESAR II to compute the
cyclic reduction factor according to equation 1c.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 403.3.2. The
number of cycles can also be specified in this box for B31.4 which allows CAESAR II to
compute the cyclic reduction factor according to the equation. The fatigue factor cannot
exceed 1.2.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Not used.
B31.8
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 833.8(b). The
number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR II to compute
the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII
Not used.

B31.9
References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph
919.4.1.b.
CODETI
Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN
Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV
Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662
F1 = L - The location factor from Table 4.2
F2 - T - The temperature derating factor from Table 4.4
For F1 = L:
Application CLASS 1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4
Gas (non-sour)
General & Cased crossings 1.000 0.900 0.700 0.550
Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
Gas (sour service)
Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
HVP
Roads 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800

Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
Stations 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
Other 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
LVP
Uncased railway crossings 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
All others 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy OR
 Buildings with more than 20 persons
 Outside areas with more than 20 persons
 Industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy OR
institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
For F2 = T:
Temperature Derating Factor T
up to 120 (C) 1.00
150 0.97
180 0.93
200 0.91
230 0.87
F3 through F9 are not used.

CAN Z662 Chapter 11
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - FA design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1, column A
F4 = - FB design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1, column B
F5 through F9 are not used.
BS 806
Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This value

corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.

FDBR
Identical to B31.1, unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures.
In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in the FAC
box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1
Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value corresponds to the nine possible
thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN
Creep related material properties as follows:
 F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
 F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
 F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
BS 7159
Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that its value is
greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
σn = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA
Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio is defined as
sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for each of the
operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12
UTS value.
EN-13480
Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the B31.1 table
above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of cycles in this box
for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to
equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380
Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2)
Not used.

ISO 14692
F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI
Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current
piping code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by Eff before they
are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS
806 (e), CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not
include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is
multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for both flexibility and
minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor z
and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software
uses a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically
0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2. The
value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the
minimum wall thickness.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See Section
6.4.3.1 for details.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 – Eff is used in different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.

Sy
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material and
piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally used for the
transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI - Specified minimum yield stress. Used for the
allowable stress determination.
B31.5 - Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph addresses
ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed here should be the
quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is defined, the OPE case is
considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in the output report. The computed
operating stress includes all longitudinal components and ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII - Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.9 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 - Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use in Eqn.
9 for consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits must be
satisfied in separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the CAESAR II
configuration file. If the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the minimum of 1.2 x
1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If the
factor is 2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 SH or 2.0 SY. To satisfy the code, replace SH
with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505 - Not used.
CAN Z662 - Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which the
pipe was purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806 - Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep rupture
design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating condition. See
17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn boxes
for the up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2 - Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989) - Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm in
the code.
RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Norwegian - Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not type a
value, then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
BS 7159 - Not used.
UKOOA - Not used.

IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).

DnV - Not used. This value is calculated as Sy = min(Sy1, ..., Sy9).
EN-13480 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
GPTC/Z380 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Minimum yield stress.
ISO-14692 - Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
 Carbon Steel: 1.8
 Austenitic Steel: 2.0
UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.
UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.

DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its value
must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is
generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Not used.
B31.3 - Not used
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI - Not used.
B31.4 Chapter IX - Used only when you select Custom for Design Factor (on page 227). Define
a Hoop Stress Factor value in the range of 0.5 and 0.72.
B31.5 - Not used.
B31.8 - Construction design factor from Table 841.114B.
Construction Type: (Descriptions are approx.) Factor
A (CLASS 1) Wasteland, Deserts, Mountains, Grazing Land, Farmland,

0.72
Sparsely Populated Areas.
B (CLASS 2) Fringe Areas Around Cities, Industrial Areas, Ranch, or

0.60
Country Estates.
C (CLASS 3) Suburban Housing Developments, Shopping Centers,

0.50
Residential Areas.
D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and 0.40 (0.4 defaults if
where there may be numerous other utilities underground. left blank)
B31.8 Chapter VIII - F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9 - Not used.
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3 - Not used.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Navy 505 - Not used
CAN Z662 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ Eα(T2-T1) + (1-ν) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)

Where:
E = elastic modulus
α = thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
ν = Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial restraint.
This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long distance. The
default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that the pipe is buried
but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress component, rather
than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial stress is
compressive.
BS806 - Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1 - Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value
should be 1.35 for prestressed (cold sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2 - Not used.
Stoomwezen - Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see
Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
RCC-M C, D - Not used.
CODETI - Not used.
Norwegian - Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not
specified, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Overrides the ratio of Ehot/Ecold which is automatically determined by CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the material
and temperature. Normally, you can leave this box blank. However, if necessary, you can type a
value greater than zero and less than one to override the ratio calculated by the software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus in the Elastic Modulus box of the dialog box. CAESAR II
looks up the cold modulus and computes this necessary ratio. Using the hot modulus in the
flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code in CAESAR II.
If you type expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures, then the software cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in this cell and use the cyclic reduction factor
boxes to specify the product of (f * Ehot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159 - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code. This
should be 0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If left blank,
this value defaults to 1.0.
UKOOA - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank, this
value defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12 - Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical
values are 1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel.
HPGSL - Not used.

JPI - Not used.

DNV - Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between 0.64
and 0.84.
EN-13480 - Not used.
GPTC/Z380 - Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Same usage as CAN Z662.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D - Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used as
the component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the peak
pressure for Pvar. Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak
pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2 - Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this value
defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0. Values
specified outside of this range are automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the allowed
range. The definition for beta, as given in the Swedish piping code in section 5.6.2.1, is the
"maximum allowable minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall thickness".
Stoomwezen - Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian - Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure
Pmaks (in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping code
(V) or not required (N).
DNV - Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between
0.77 and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value are
0.3 and 0.72, depending on categories and class locations. This design factor determines the
allowable hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd for
the hoop stress evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72
(seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress
from Table 2. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable, unless
you type a value.
ISO 14692 - Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.

"f" Allowed Maximum of 1.2

Indicates whether to allow a maximum cyclic reduction factor. The 2004 edition of B31.3 permits
the cyclic reduction factor (f) to exceed 1.0 under certain conditions. To allow "f" to exceed 1.0, up
to the limit of 1.2, click On. To prohibit "f" from exceeding 1.0, click Off.
 This option is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change it.
 This option is not used for B31.3 Chapter IX.
Appendix P - OPE Allowable Reduction

Indicates whether the software reduces the Operating Range Allowable value by 15%. Appendix
P in the 2010 Edition of B31.3 requires a reduction of the Operating Range Allowable value by
15% for materials with ratio of Sy/St > 0.8. The software selects this check box by default for the
B31.3 code. When selected, CAESAR II performs this reduction, when applicable.
 You must set the Implement Appendix P configuration setting to True for CAESAR II to
display this check box on the Allowable Stresses tab of the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can find this configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses > B31.3 Code-Specific
Settings section of the Configuration Editor.
 This option is not used for B31.3 Chapter IX.
Allowable Stress Indicator

The B31.4 code recognizes restrained and unrestrained conditions.
For B31.4, select an indicator to define the stress equations and allowable values used by the
software:
Restrained Pipeline
Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is fully restrained beyond
the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees). Axial stress is defined
without the use of bending moment.
Unrestrained Pipeline
Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is free to displace laterally
and to strain axially. Stress calculation is dominated by bending moment.
CAESAR II Determines
Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in
the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial
pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, or applies the unrestrained stress calculations
when the axial load is different from the limiting load by more than 2.5%. The limiting load is
calculated as the linear superposition of thermal expansion and Bourdon pressure effect.
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler (on page 509).
Inland Riser/Platform

Specifies riser and platform piping on inland navigable waters and instructs the software to
select different sets of allowable values as defined in the Table 403.3.1-1.
For B31.4 Ch XI, select one of the following indicators:
Restrained Pipeline
Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is fully restrained beyond
the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees). Axial stress is defined
without the use of bending moment.
Unrestrained Pipeline
Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is free to displace laterally
and to strain axially. Stress calculation is dominated by bending moment.
CAESAR II Determines
Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in
the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial
pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, or applies the unrestrained stress calculations
when the axial load is different from the limiting load by more than 2.5%. The limiting load is
calculated as the linear superposition of thermal expansion and Bourdon pressure effect.
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler (on page 509).
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List (on page 252).
Design Factor
Specifies the design factor and hoop stress value for B31.4 Ch IX, Table A402.3.5-1. Select one
of the following options:
Design Factor Hoop Stress

Factor (F1)
Offshore Pipeline 0.72
Offshore Riser/Platform 0.6
Custom Defines a custom

value in the Hoop
Stress Factor
box.
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List (on page 252).

Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.
Cycle Stress Table

Specifies cycle and stress values. Use the material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue load
cases and cumulative use scenarios. You can type up to eight cycle-stress pairs. These
values must be entered in ascending cycle order.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to type up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12.
CAESAR II offers them as extensions to other codes.
You must type cycle/stress pairs in ascending order (ascending by cycles). Type stress
values as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude. The software
considers fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while
dynamic fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated
against half of the range of the fatigue curve.
Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box so that you can select a file (some files are shipped with
CAESAR II) and read cycles and stress data into the Cycles and Stress boxes.

Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
 Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures
lower than room temperature.
 Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
 Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
 Unspecified - This is the default option.
TD/12 Modulus Correction

IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus-of-elasticity divided by 209×103
N/mm2. This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus
Correction box.
Allowable Stress (ISO 14692)

Activates allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Allowable
Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When you select material 20 for FRP
(Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) and piping code ISO 14692, the Allowable Stress tab in the
Piping Input auxiliary panel changes.
al(0:1)
Specifies the long-term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress
is 0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress at
this point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5 and
0.75 for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.
al(1:1)
Specifies the long-term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a
generalized failure profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.
hl(1:1)
Specifies the long-term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1).

However, CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to
al(1:1), and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see
al(1:1) (on page 229).
al(2:1)
Specifies the long-term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress
is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is σhl(2:1) = 2 * σal(2:1). This is a natural condition when
a pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you to type different
values for σhl(2:1) ≠ 2 * σal(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the
Error Checker.
hl(2:1)
Specifies the long-term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, σhl(2:1)= 2*σal(2:1). However, CAESAR II
allows σhl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of σal(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a
warning message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see
al(2:1) (on page 230).
Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by
the manufacturer is defined as:
Pq is the qualified pressure;

D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.
The qualified stress, σqs, for fittings is calculated as:
 CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1),
and hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
 You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are
not in the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r, for
example) to pass the Error Checker.

r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined as:
where:
σsh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
σsa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Short-term
Fitting Component Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*
 Filament-wound unidirectional 90° and

 0.45
± Θ°
Bends  1.0
 Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
 1.9
 100% hand-lay
Tees  Filament-wound and hand-lay 1  1.0
Other Hand
laminated
 CSM/WR 1, 9  1.9
 Spigot/Socket Adhesive or Mechanical

Connection
 1.0
 0.45
Joints  Threaded
 1.0
 Flange
 2.0
 Laminated
You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not
be required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.
Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this box
blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.

Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature (A1)

Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an A1
factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined in a
model. If you leave the boxes blank, CAESAR II uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by the
partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.
The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature is
less than or equal to 65°C, then A1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0°C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition
within the temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant
abrupt change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at
temperatures lower than –35°C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to
reduce the safe operating envelope of the piping system.
Chemical Resistance (A2)

Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II
uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and
temperature ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric
seals/locking rings, if used, as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.
The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A2 for chemical
resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the normal
service fluid is water, then A2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if available.
 In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO

14692-2:2002 are among the more aggressive environments likely to be
encountered. However, strong acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and
alcohol can also reduce the properties of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping
components; the effect depends on the chemical concentration, temperature and
resin type.
 The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and
laboratory tests at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material

suppliers' data, and so on. Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement

type and resin have not always been taken into account. Therefore, the tables only
give an indication of the suitability of the piping components to transport the listed
chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals may cause severe situations.
Cyclic Service (A3)

Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses the
default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic
Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads
shall therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design
life, the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe
system components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design life,
then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, Rc, of the piping system. Rc is
defined as:
where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or stress)
cycle.
The partial factor, A3, for cyclic service is given by:
where N is the total number of cycles during service life.

This equation is intended for cyclic internal pressure loading only, but may be applied with
caution to axial loads provided they remain tensile, that is, it is not applicable for reversible
loading.
System Design Factor

Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k) to
generate the value of the part factor for loading (f2). If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II
uses the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety between
the strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases. These load
cases are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained excluding thermal
loads. The following table shows the relationship between the system design factor, the
occasional load factor, and f2, along with their default values.

Load System Design Occasional Part Factor For

Loading Type Duration Factor (SDF) Load Factor Loading (f2)
Occasional Short-term 0.67 1.33 0.89
Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67 1.24 0.83
Thermal Loads
Sustained
Excluding Thermal Long-term 0.67 1.00 0.67
Loads
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.
Thermal Factor (k)

Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In
the absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids and
0.8 for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.
Material Elastic Properties
Specifies the elastic modulus and Poisson’s ratio of the material for the selected element on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box. These values must be typed for Material type 21 (user
specified).
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR II
Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 1072).

Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.
Material Properties
Displays the properties associated with the material. CAESAR II automatically fills in the
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, and other material properties. If you want to change
any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be
defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus-of-elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus-of-elasticity
νh/a - Poisson's ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop
direction.
G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson's ratio in the
conventional manner.)

FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and FRP
properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "Ea/Eh*νh/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (Ea*ηh/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to ηa/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the
axial direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to
axial modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for
each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used for
these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe are
likely to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR II
uses these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the defaults.
You can override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations to adhere
to the requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration parameter.
Note that if the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and flexibility factors
are calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration parameter settings.
Densities
Specifies the densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents in this block from the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material
Database. You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following
the input immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between
the number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.

Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside of
the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.
Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric
value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead
to under sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
MATERIAL DENSITY (lb./cu.in. )
A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94 0.09433
A.P. GREEN KRUZITE 0.08391

CASTABLE
A.P. GREEN MC-30 0.08391
A.P. GREEN MC-22 0.07234
A.P. GREEN KAST-SET 0.06655
A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25 0.05208
A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94 0.02257
B & W KAOCRETE B 0.05787
B & W KAOCRETE 32-C 0.08333
B & W KAO-TAB 95 0.09549
B & W KAOLITE 2200 0.03241
B & W KAOLITE 2200-HS 0.04745
B & W KAOLITE 2500-LI. 0.03472

Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe area
used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness
values are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected
pipe area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from the
list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM
SILICATE having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density
values for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL DENSITY
AMOSITE ASBESTOS .009259
CALCIUM SILICATE .006655
CAREYTEMP .005787
FIBERGLASS (OWEN/CORNING) .004051
FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR GLASS .004630
HIGH TEMP .01389
KAYLO 10 (TM) .007234
MINERAL WOOL .004919
PERLITE / CELO-TEMP 1500 .007523
POLY URETHANE .001273
STYRO FOAM .001042

SUPER X .01447
Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the outside
of the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also included in
the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
Insul/Cladding Unit Weight

Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This is
an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding
thickness to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.
Line Number
Specifies the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe elements.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number or name, do one of the following:
 Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number <x>, where <x> is a sequential number.
 Type to manually create a new name.
 Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
example, if you have a line named “8”-300-123” and you want to assign 8”-150-124, Type ‘8’
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.
You can also select elements on the graphics model and click Create from Selection
in the Line Numbers dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbers (on page 302).

Element Name
Specifies the name or identifier of the selected element. Type to manually create a new name.
You can use Element Name to provide a name more descriptive than from/to node names.
The name:
 Duplicates when you duplicate the element.
Available Commands
The following commands are available in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Topics
File Menu.................................................................................... 240
Edit Menu ................................................................................... 248
Model Menu ................................................................................ 257
Environment Menu...................................................................... 304
Global Menu ............................................................................... 345
Options Menu ............................................................................. 352
View Menu .................................................................................. 365
Tools Menu ................................................................................. 385
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
New
Piping Input menu: File > New
Standard toolbar: New
Creates a new CAESAR II job.


Piping Input
Structural Input

Piping Input
Structural Input
Open
Piping Input menu: File > Open
Standard toolbar: Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
Open Dialog Box

Controls options for opening existing files.
Look in
Specifies the folder in which the file exists.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.

File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in the
Name list.
Files of type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
Open Dialog Box

Controls options for opening existing files.
Look in
Specifies the folder in which the file exists.
Name
File Name
Name list.
Files of type
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
Open CADWorx Model

Piping Input menu: File > Open CADWorx Model
Reference CAD Models toolbar: CADWorx Model
Opens an existing CADWorx model.
Save <filename>
Piping Input menu: File > Save
Standard toolbar: Save
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.

Save As
Piping Input menu: File > Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
File Name
Name list.
Save as type
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.
Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
File Name
Name list.
Save as type
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.
Save as Graphics Image

Piping Input menu: File > Save as Graphics Image
Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.

Error Check
Piping Input menu: File > Error Check
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Start Run
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When the
error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking (on page 536).
Archive
Piping Input menu: File > Archive
Input Tools toolbar: Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this password;
however, they can be opened and reviewed.
Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Batch Run
Piping Input menu: File > Batch Run
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Batch Run
Error checks the model without any involvement required by you. This process stops only for
errors, which must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run,
the software uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Print Setup
Piping Input menu: File > Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.

Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Preview
Piping Input menu: File > Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.

Print <filename>
Piping Input menu: File > Print
Standard toolbar: Print
Prints the current job. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to printing.
You can change the report contents by modifying the input options.
Input Listing Options Dialog Box (on page 247)

Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create
reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length in the
report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as Notepad) can be
used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may receive fatal errors during
report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are requested.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three
additional formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change folders to the CAESAR II\System folder. Then, copy
the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to the
screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output report.

Input Listing Options Dialog Box

Controls the options to include in the print job. All basic element data (geometry), operating
conditions, material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:
 Elements  Allowables  Units

 Material ID  Coordinates
 Node Names  Setup File
 Offsets  Title
 Forces  Control Parameters
 Uniform Loads
 Wind/Wave
 SIF's and TEE's
 Bends
 Rigids
 Expansion Joints
 Reducers
 Flanges
 Equipment Check
 Restraints
 Displacements
 Hanger
 Flexible Nozzles
Select what you want to print, and then click OK.
Recent Piping Files

Piping Input menu: File > Recent Piping Files
Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.
Recent Structural Files

Piping Input menu: File > Recent Structural Files
Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.

Exit
Piping Input menu: File > Exit
Closes the session and the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box. The software prompts
you to save any unsaved changes.
Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Cut
Piping Input menu: Edit > Cut
Standard toolbar: Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Copy
Piping Input menu: Edit > Copy
Standard toolbar: Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the previous
contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Paste
Piping Input menu: Edit > Paste
Standard toolbar: Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.
Continue
Piping Input menu: Edit > Continue
Navigation Tools toolbar: Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if there
is no next element.

Duplicate Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Duplicate Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model. Select
the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating groups of
elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 346).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the selected
element.
Insert Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Insert Element
Input Tools toolbar: Insert Element

Inserts an element.
Insert Element Dialog Box

Controls options for inserting an element.
Before
Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is then
equal to the From node of the current element.
After
Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element is
then equal to the To node of the current element.
Delete Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Delete Element
Input Tools toolbar: Delete Element
Deletes the current element.
Find
Piping Input menu: Edit > Find
Plot Tools toolbar: Find Node
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you to
specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node numbers in
either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the software
searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter only the To
node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number. When the

software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to
better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Find Element Dialog Box

Controls parameters for finding elements.
Node Numbers
Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find the next element
containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node numbers to find
the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found
Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active view.
Global
Piping Input menu: Edit > Global
Input Tools toolbar: Global coordinates
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment.
This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.
Global Coordinates Dialog Box

Controls parameters for defining the absolute coordinates for the start node of an element.
X
Specifies the X coordinate.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate.
Close Loop
Piping Input menu: Edit > Close Loop
Input Tools toolbar: Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.

Increment
Piping Input menu: Edit > Increment
Input Tools toolbar: Increment node
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 75).
Set Node Increment Dialog Box

Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.
Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Distance
Piping Input menu: Edit > Distance
Input Tools toolbar: Distance
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on the
model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Distance Dialog Box

Allows measurements for finding distances between nodes or specified points on a model.
Choose a measuring method, and then view results for the measurements in the Distance dialog,
at the bottom of the dialog box, and on the model.
 Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the distance
between two nodes.
 Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to the
cursor location.
 Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Measure Method
Snap to Nearest Node
Specifies for the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. The software defaults to having this check box selected. Clear this check
box for the software to measure without using the snapping functionality.

 Clear the Snap to Nearest Node check box when measuring distance in imported
graphics models, such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to
nodes on models created outside of CAESAR II.
 Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by selecting Properties >
Display Options from the right-click context menu. Make changes to the Graphic
Edit Options>Symbol Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot
Settings dialog box.
Origin and Selected Element
Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
To and From Nodes
Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and click
Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The
distance calculated displays in the Results area of the dialog box.
Calculate
Calculates the To and From Nodes measurement specified in the Measure Method.
Free Measure
Calculates the distance between two points anywhere on the model (regardless of the node).
Free measure lets you measure randomly on a model.
Results
Shows the results of the previous distance calculation.
The software also displays the result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The
results indicate the start and end point and the length measured in the unit of measure
specified for the current model.
The software displays the difference of change along the three axes in the delta (DX, DY, DZ)
boxes.
Measure between two nodes

1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Click Nodes to measure distance between two specified nodes.
5. Type the starting and ending node numbers and click Calculate.

The software displays the measured distance in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of the
Distance dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
 After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance dialog
box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure distances,
the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
 Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the dialog
box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
Measure between two points on a model

1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and selected node.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use the Origin and
selected node option.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to the
origin (first) node in the model.
The distance measurement, including the location of the start and end points, displays in the
Results section of the dialog box and at the bottom of the main CAESAR II window. The delta
DX, DY, DZ boxes at the bottom of the Distance dialog box show the differences of change
along the three axes.
 After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance dialog
box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the model and
also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
 Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the dialog
box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
List
Piping Input menu: Edit > List
List Operations toolbar: List input
List input right-click menu: Choose List
Related commands:
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Show All Lists
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Close All Lists

Displays the selected input data, such as for Allowables, Bends, and Elements, in a grid. You can
edit, delete, or modify data in the lists. The list dialog boxes display as a row of tabs at the bottom
of the piping input. These tabs specify the list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, a grid of input data displays. You can access all input data through the
various list dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a list dialog box, the Elements dialog box.
If you edit input data on a list dialog box, the software also updates values in the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. In the example
shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the element From
Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with the new value in
red. Elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1 automatically. The value of PIPE OD does
not change until you enter a new value for element 4. All elements below element 4 inherit that
value unless a new value is entered.
Right-Click Context Menu

The following commands are available when you right-click an editable cell in a list.
Choose List
Opens and closes a list.
Block Operation > Rotate, Delete, Duplicate, Renumber, Invert, and Change Sequence
Performs global editing operations on the block of selected elements of the piping system. For
more information on the block operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 376).
Block Operation > Status
Displays the Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the current job and in
the block.
Block Operation > Hide Duplicate Data
On the Elements list only, hides duplicated (grey) fields and displays only black and red
fields, so that you can more easily review changes.

Find/Replace
Displays the Find/Replace dialog box, where you can search and replace data in the selected
column.
Find what - Defines the value to find in the column.
Replace with - Defines the replacement value.
Match whole word only - Limits the search to cells that exactly match the complete value in
Find what.
Find Next - Proceeds to the next matching cell.
Replace - Replaces the value in a matching cell with the value in Replace with.
Replace All - Replaces all matching cells with the value in Replace with.
Close - Closes the Find/Replace dialog box.
 Find/Replace is only available for user-defined data.

 Find/Replace is not available for row and column headers and columns containing check
boxes.
 When you change a cell value, the value carries forward to all subsequent cells in the
column until you define a new cell value.
 After selecting a cell, you can also access Find/Replace by using CTRL+F or Edit >
Find.
Change Properties
Specifies display properties for the current list on the Display Settings dialog box, including
title, grid line, color, and current cell properties. You can specify different properties for each
list.
Reset Default Properties
Resets display properties for the current list to the default software values.
Zoom In
Increases the text, column, and rows sizes of the grid for the current list.
Zoom Out
Decreases the text, column, and rows sizes of the grid for the current list.
Restore 100%
Restores the text, columns, and rows of the grid to the default sizes.
Next Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Next Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Next Element
Skips to the next element.

Previous Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Prev Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.
First Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > First Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: First Element
Skips to the first element.
Last Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Last Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Last Element
Skips to the last element.
Undo
Piping Input menu: Edit > Undo
Input Tools toolbar: Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z. You
can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.
Redo
Piping Input menu: Edit > Redo
Input Tools toolbar: Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by the
amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.
Edit Static Load Cases

Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Edit Static Load Cases
Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box. For more information, see Static
Analysis (on page 536).

Edit Dynamic Load Cases

Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Dynamic Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Dynamic Analysis
Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems (on page 658).
Review Units
Piping Input menu: Edit > Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Break
Piping Input menu: Model > Break
Input Tools toolbar: Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements. This command displays the Break at
element <node> - <node> dialog box.
Break at Element <node> - <node> Dialog Box

Controls options for breaking an element.
 A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or some
other change in properties.
 A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack piping,
or a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.
For the Insert Single Node option, the software provides default values for New Node Number
and Distance at the halfway point between the two existing nodes. You can change these values.
In the example below, nodes 10 and 20 are 12 feet apart. The software sets the default New Node
Number to 15, and the default Distance to 6 feet.

If there was some other node in the model with a restraint (or imposed displacements), like the
one to be put on the newly generated node 15, then the node identifying that restraint location
could be filled in at the line Get Support From Node and the restraint would be automatically
placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node 10 is copied to node 15.
For the Insert Multiple Nodes option, the software defines the Length of each element value
based on the values you specify for Total Number of Break Elements and Node Step.

If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
 Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed directly
when requested at the prompts.
 Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of the
individual elements in the run are known.
 To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions in
the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.
Single Node Information

New Node Number
Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number>
Specifies the distance from the selected node.
Multiple Node Information

Total Number of Break Elements
Specifies the number of elements to insert.
Node Step
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element
Displays the length of each element to insert.
Allow Duplicate Node Numbers
Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node
Specifies the node from which to copy support information.
Insert Restraints
Piping Input menu: Model > Insert Restraints
Right-click menu: Restraint > Insert Restraint
Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint

Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint

Divides the selected element into two elements and places a restraint at the break. This command
displays the Insert Restraint dialog box.
Insert Restraint Dialog Box

Controls options for inserting a restraint.
Selected Element Length
Displays the length of the selected element.
Break and Insert at New Node
Breaks the selected element by the defined parameter, creates a new node, and inserts the
restraint at the node. Type a value for the new node number.
Element Midpoint - Breaks the element at it's midpoint.
Distance in from Node <node number> - Breaks the element at a distance from the
selected node. Select the node and type a value.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
Insert at Existing
Inserts a restraint at one or both nodes for the element.
From Node - Select to insert the restraint at the starting node.
To Node - Select to insert the restraint at the end node.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
Copy Restraint from Node
Copies the properties from the restraint at the specified node when creating the new restraint.
Properties display in on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
OK
Creates the new restraint.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without creating a new restraint.
Valve
Piping Input menu: Model > Valve
Input Tools toolbar: Valve flange database

Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command displays the Valve and
Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.

Valve and Flange Database: <database name> Dialog Box

There are currently four databases provided:
 CRANE steel valves and total flange length
 GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
 Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
 CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)
CAESAR II automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve
-flange combinations when you select the Flange-Valve-Flange check box.
The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog.
The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases, such as
weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In
these cases, the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases,
only the length of the fitting was available.
The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided with
CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database offers nine
different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves, flange pair, and
single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded, or socket).
Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides for gaskets.

Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.
Activate Flange Check
Turns on the flange check.

Add an Element from the Valve Flange Database

1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate three
RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from the
Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of the
element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
 The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights than
those typically available in the GENERIC database.
 Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes the
efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
 You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as follows:
 The first line must read CADWORX.DAT. It must not be changed.

 The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.

 The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name must
consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names designate files
with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR II or the CADWorx Plant
specification folder (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).
 The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or Metric
nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal, while seven
blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.
 The last five lines are not editable.
The specification files are located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR installation folder. They
are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size and component
with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library subfolder to the LIB_I or
LIB_M folder, depending on whether English or Metric units are in effect), file name (with an
extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for which the specified data file
applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is the component type number,
and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to CADWorx Plant and are not
significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of components
hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with significance to
CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The following is a
typical component data file for weld neck flanges:

You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.
Expansion Joint
Piping Input menu: Model > Expansion Joint
Input Tools toolbar: Expansion Joint Modeler

Creates expansion joints and displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and
Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes.
The software displays expansion joints in blue.
Expansion Joint Dialog Box

CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data. The catalog used
may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where in the model the
expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler assembles the
completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled, Untied-Universal,
and Tied Universal expansion joints.
An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:
 You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the bellows
stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in higher
stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the catalog
may be based on a higher design temperature.
 You can select any combination of end types.
 Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the stored
database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.
 For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.
 The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the CAESAR
II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before settling on
one.
 Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases exceed
the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to these actual
allowed maximums.
 Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.
 Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.
 In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars. Restraints
with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the ends of the
expansion joint parallel.



Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes

Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the To
end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis

Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0
Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane

Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie rod
to the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting rotation
about the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when crossed with
the axis of the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length

Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the joint
length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable
depending upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint Database

Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints (on page 66).
Torsional Spring Rates

Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and
non-conservative with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows
allowed torsion by the amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses
result in small, seemingly satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are
communicated back to the expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the
rotation and the stiffness used to produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion
Joints (on page 935).
Expansion Joint Design Notes

It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:

 The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure and
pressure thrust.
 Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and
therefore not significant.
 The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.
The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting from
the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections. Better
evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the
manufacturer make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results

Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping
system model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box)
shows the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog.
Note the allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes

Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an expansion
joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are inserting the
expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:
 Untied single bellows
 Tied single bellows
 Hinged single bellows
 Gimbaled single bellows
 Untied universal bellows
 Tied universal bellows
The four possible joint end types are:
 Welded-end
 Slip-on flange
 Weld neck flange
 Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least long
enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum spool
piece size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal

expansion joint model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the element
to receive the universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the maximum
possible space available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the length. If the
element to receive any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be inserted, you
are prompted for the end of the element where the joint should be inserted. Overall universal
lengths should be limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the center spool piece
weight begins to become a problem.
If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion
joint, then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the element
From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used elsewhere in
the model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the Proposed-model dialog
box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational
stiffness label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the
rotational stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report
from the LIST option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed
over the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model
that are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not
use them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with your
intentions.
Expansion Joint Styles

The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each
type is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment
protection.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in all
directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for, external
to the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the expansion joint
novice needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions limiting
displacements into the joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the support
hardware away from the bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this type of
bellows difficult.
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
 You do not have to design for pressure thrust.

 Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field
easier.
 There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly to
the rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively
complicated geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
 They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility
to sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
 The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility that
is unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows
displacement becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as
predicted.
Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one axis.
Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often used in
pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very little load
to any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that displacement
into the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be experienced by
the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism are high,
considerable friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing of the joint.
This transmits larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These
joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions, while
transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single
unrestrained expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a
much higher capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied
universal expansion joint subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be
designed for external to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints
can often be difficult to use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement
protects the joint against unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the
tied universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust
loads are restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where
vertical pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a
single mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths
result in smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of
the center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten
times the pipe diameter. Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.

These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to
the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Available Expansion Joint End-Types

The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for his particular geometry and line size.
Bellows Application Notes

The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for a
particular application:
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement and
then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After an
analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made using the
expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.
Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a
confined area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.

Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated joints.
The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the bellows in the
database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against the allowed
pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic T.I.G.
butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the specific
media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to system
operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to make
specific recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four most
common bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
 304SS—A240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
 316SS—A240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
 600Inc—Inco 600 High Nickel
 625Inc—Inco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces pressure
drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers
catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or
turbulent flow systems. Also, heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is insulated.
Title Page
Piping Input menu: Model > Title
Input Tools toolbar: Title

Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with the
problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so on. These
lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.

Hanger Design Control Data

Piping Input menu: Model > Hangar Design Control Data
Input Tools toolbar: Hangar design criteria

Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model.
Hanger Design Control Data Dialog Box

Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by typing data into the Hanger Design Control
Data dialog box.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains five items that also appear on each
individual hanger design in your model. The software populates values you specify in this dialog
box on the individual Hangers tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel. However, you can override
those values on a hanger-by-hanger basis.
The hanger values you can set globally include:
 Short-range springs
 Rigid support displacement criteria
 Maximum-allowed travel limit
 Hanger table
 Multiple load-case design option
You can specify the number of temperature cases the software uses in the hanger design in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box, and these values are used in the hanger design
algorithm. In addition, you can specify if the software calculates the actual cold loads. For
examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the CAESAR II Application
Guide.

No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load Cases

Specifies the number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This
value may be between 1 and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be
used in hanger design. If more than one operating case is to be considered in the hanger
design then you must also select the Multiple Load Case Design Option to use.
Calculate Actual Cold Loads

Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed
and the hangers are installed, to determine the actual installed loads that should be used
when the hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This calculation
tends to be important in the following situations:
 The stiffness of the piping system is small.
 The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.
 The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping
systems that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be
adjusted in the cold position.
Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances
and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this
check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring,
assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than their
short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short-range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this value
is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This is
approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the hot
load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the operating
displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:

or as may be more familiar:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is
selected instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases, these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod
has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support
from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a particular location.

Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil 2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping 4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology 8. Capitol
9. Piping Services 10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex 12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec 14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider) 16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd. 18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi 20. Myricks
21. China Power 22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA
25. Binder 26. Gradior
27. NHK 28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa 30. Mitsubishi
31. Yamashita 32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry 34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co. 36. Senior
37. Unison 38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
 Extended Range
 Cold Load
 Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data (on

page 273), accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping input. Specify the
default hanger table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger
Table configuration setting in Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples
of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the
CAESAR II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the
selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when
the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load
ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build
double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel
limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can
supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often
eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
 Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
 Hanger stops are easier to remove.
 There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or
when the stops are removed.
 Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
 Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
 Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A
hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection
is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is
at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference
between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical
thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
 In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
 Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides as
much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the system
is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping systems,
when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated by hand.
Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of the spring
table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II
design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the
larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is effective, can
only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot load to the next
higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new

spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Multiple Load Case Design Options

Specifies the multiple load case design option. Whenever more than one thermal load case is
used in the hanger sizing algorithm, CAESAR II must know how you want to weigh the results
from the different cases. There are currently 13 different methods that you can use for multiple
load case hanger design selection. These 13 methods are described in greater detail under
the hanger auxiliary data section.
1. Design per Load Case #1
10. Design for the maximum operating load
11. Design for the maximum travel
12. Design for the average load and the average travel
13. Design for the maximum load and the maximum travel
Seismic Wizard
Piping Input menu: Model > Seismic Wizard
Wizards toolbar: Static Seismic Wizard
Selects a seismic code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells. X-component is
set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set into Vector 3; all other
load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.

Seismic Design Code

Specifies the design code and edition for the current job. You can select ASCE 7-05/IBC 2006,
ASCE 7-10/IBC 2012, CFE Sismo, KHK 1997, NBC 2005, or NBC 2010.
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard (on page 280)
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard (on page 281)
KHK Static Seismic Wizard (on page 283)
NBC Static Seismic Wizard (on page 291)
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g-factor based on the ASCE 7 (or IBC) methodology. Select your Seismic
Design Code edition.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
Importance Factor I (ASCE)

Specifies the component importance factor from ASCE #7 Section 11.5.1. Type 1.5 for
life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or components that are
required for continuous operation. Type 1.0 for all others.
Response Factor R (ASCE)

Specifies the component response modification factor, from ASCE #7 Table 13.6-1. Type
12.0 for piping according to ASME B31 with joints made by welding or brazing. Type a value
range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE)

Specifies the maximum mapped MCE spectral response acceleration at short periods
according to Section 11.4.1, Chapter 22 – Seismic Ground Motion and Long-period Transition
Maps – provide values for Ss.
Site Class (ASCE)

Specifies the site class code. Based on the soil properties, the site is classified as Site Class
A, B, C, D, E, or F according to Chapter 20, Site Classification Procedure for Seismic Design.
If you do not know the soil properties in sufficient detail to determine the site class, use Site
Class D.
Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE)

Specifies the ratio of height in structure at the point of attachment over the average height of
the supporting structure.
Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)

Specifies the component amplification factor from Table 13.6-1. Type 2.5 for distribution
system, such as piping. This term reflects the relationship of the piping response to the
structure response.

Long-Period Transition Period TL

Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7
Spectrum Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from new maps, which are similar to
zone maps, for all 50 states. The ASCE standard provides these maps in Figures 22-12
through 22-16 (ASCE 7-2010). In addition, Section 11.4.5 of ASCE 7-2010, discussions the
constant-displacement branch of the code.
ASCE Example
For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IP = 1
Component Response Modification Factor RP = 12.0, from Table 13.6-1, "Piping in accordance
with ASME B31,"
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Ss = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral Response
Acceleration at short periods according to Section 11.4.1.
Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE SMS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(12.0/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)
= 0.17245
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.31041
aH = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694,
Section 13.1.7 states, "The earthquake loads determined in accordance with Section 13.3.1 shall
be multiplied by a factor of 0.7."
aH = 0.7 * 0.31041 = 0.2173
av = 0.7 * 0.20694 = 0.1149

CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g-factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design Manual)
1993 methodology.
Seismic Zone (CFE)

Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the least
active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.
Structure Group (CFE)

Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A High Degree of Safety
Group B Intermediate Degree of Safety
Group C Low Degree of Safety
Soil Type (CFE)

Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity bo = 700

I Hard Soil
m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

II Med. Soil
propagation which meets the condition: β cΤ5 + β 5Τc > β cΤc
Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation which

III Soft Soil
meets the conditions: βcΤ5 + β 5Τc < β cΤc
First Mode Period (CFE)

Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.
Increase Factor (CFE)

Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect
on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This
value is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.
CFE Sismo Example

For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.
For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
0
a = 0.50
C = 0.50

Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.0
r=½
If T> Tb , then
a = c ( Ta / Tb)r = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612
For a structure group of A – High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5
a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417
KHK Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g-factor based on the High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan (KHK)
1997 methodology.
Seismic Level (KHK)

Specifies the earthquake level factor. Select 1 for a level 1 earthquake or 2 for a level 2
earthquake.

Seismic Zone (KHK)

Specifies the seismic zone, as defined in the following graphic. Select SA, A, B, or C.
Source: Seismic Design Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, HIgh Pressure Gas Safety
Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 3. MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended Notice No.
143 dated Mar 25, 1997.

The zone determines the zoning factor (β2.).
Zone Level 1 Earthquake β2 Level 2 Earthquake β2
SA 1.0 1.0
(special A)
A 0.8 0.8
B 0.65 0.7
C 0.4 0.7
Soil Profile (KHK)

Specifies the type of soil. Select 1, 2, 3, or 4.
The soil type determines the soil factor (β3. ).
Soil
Profile Type of Soil Soil Factor
Value β3
1 Before tertiary deposit ground 1.4
2 Diluvial deposit ground 2.0
3 All types other than 1, 2, and 4 2.0
4 The thickness of soil fill or 2.0

alluvial deposit is 25m or more
Importance Class (KHK)

Specifies the importance class as designated by the type of gas, storage capacity (W), and
distance of the transmission pipe layout (X). Select Ia, I, II, or III.
The importance class determines the importance factor (β1.).
Importance
Importance Factor
Class β1
Ia 1.00
I 0.80
II 0.65
III 0.5
 When β1x β1 is less than 0.33, the value of β1 shall be 0.33.

 The importance class is defined by Article 3, Tables (a), (b), and (c) of Seismic Design
Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan
(KHK). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended Notice No. 143 dated Mar 25,
1997.
Damping Factor (KHK)

Specifies the damping factor used to determine the modification (or response compensation)
factor.
Source: Seismic Design Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, High Pressure Gas Safety
Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 6, Fig. (c). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended
Notice No. 143 dated Mar 25, 1997.
Natural Period (KHK)

Specifies the natural period of the seismic structure in seconds.
Vertical Response Magnification Factor (KHK)

Specifies the vertical response magnification factor (β6), typically 1.5 for a skirt-supported tower
and 2.0 for other structures.
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor (KHK)

Specifies the horizontal response magnification factor (β5), the product of the standard response
magnification factor and the response compensation factor.
The standard response magnification factor is defined in the following graphics.

For SA and A seismic zones:
Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 6, Fig. (a). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended

For B and C seismic zones:
Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 6, Fig. (b). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended

For Seismic Level 2:
Institute of Japan (KHK). Fig 7.3-1. MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended Notice No.
143 dated Mar 25, 1997.
When a plastic response is expected for a strong earthquake, the natural period of the
structure may move to a longer period. As a result, the response in a shorter period takes the
maximum (peak) value for each response spectrum.
Height of Supporting Structure (KHK)

The height of the supporting frame (Ht).
Height at Support Point (KHK)

Height at the supporting point of the pipe-supporting structure.
This value is optional if you define the seismic coefficient distribution factor (μ).
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (mu) (KHK)

Specifies the seismic coefficient distribution factor (μ). The minimum value is 1.0.
KHK Example
The seismic wizard computes the g-factors for the three global directions and defines the uniform
load vector on the selected element. The wizard uses the specified height of the associated
support elevation of the element to compute the seismic coefficient distribution factor (µ). The
computed uniform load vector is applied (that is, carried forward) to all subsequent elements until

changed. If the support elevation changes or if the support is a vessel, you may need to use the
wizard multiple times.
KHK Input Data

Seismic Level = 2
Seismic Zone = SA
Soil Profile = 1
Importance Class = Ia
Damping Factor = 0.030000
Natural Period = 0.200000
Vertical Response Magnification Factor (β6) = 2.000000
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor (β8) = 2.000000
Height of Supporting Structure (Ht) = 10.000000
Height at Support Point (H) = 10.000000
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (µ) = 1.200000
Elevation unit label = meters
KHK Output
Earthquake Level Factor = 2.000000
Seismic Importance Factor(β1) = 1.000000
Seismic Zoning Factor (β2) = 1.000000
β1 * β2 = 1.000000
Seismic Soil Factor (β3) = 1.400000
Vertical Response Magnification Factor (β9) = 2.000000
Horizontal Seismic Coefficient (Kh) = 0.420000
Vertical Seismic Coefficient (Kv) = 0.210000
Standard Response Magnification Factor = 3.000000
(Damping) Compensation Modification Factor = 1.180000
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor (β5) = 3.540000
Design Modified Horizontal Seismic Coeff (Kmh) = 1.486800
Design Modified Vertical Seismic Coeff (Kmv) = 0.420000
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (µ) = 1.200000
Design Modified Horizontal g-factor = 3.568320
Design Modified Vertical g-factor = 0.840000

NBC Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g-factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.
Importance Factor IE (NBC)

Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article 4.1.8.5 as defined in the following table:
Importance Category Importance Factor (IE)
Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Site Class (NBC)

Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table 4.1.8.4.A.
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)

Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the base
to level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal
earthquake motions are imparted to the structure.
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)

Specifies the force amplification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC)

Specifies the component factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC)

Specifies the component response modification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:

Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence

4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155
Optimization Wizard
Piping Input menu: Model > Optimization Wizard
Wizards toolbar: Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.
This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the loop
type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to which the item
should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times to arrive at an
acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target element is at the
specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a
selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to select
the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution
based on your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard
prompts you and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always revise
your target input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.
To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such as
an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the example
LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion overstress
of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the expansion of the

long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The questions are where,
and how big should it be?

Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorx Model
command. In this case, import the ...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG
model. This model shows that there is a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.

Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard start the Loop
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.
Using the Loop Optimization Wizard:

1. Loop 60-70 is already indicated as the element upon which the loop is installed. You can
change this value by selecting a different value from the list, or by selecting other elements in
the model.
2. Click Stress as the optimization type. Optionally, you can optimize restraint load components
as well.
3. Select EXP from the Load Case list. This fills in the element list showing stresses on the left
side of the dialog box.
4. Type 36,000 in the Stress box to define a target maximum stress. This value refines the
element list, so that it displays only those elements with stress levels higher than the target.
5. Select the Max Stress box to limit the maximum stress in the system to the target value.
6. Select the Loop Type from the available icons. For this example, select the first loop type.

7. Select <none> from the Height to Width Ratio list to allow the loop height to vary to any size
while keeping the width constant. In this case, the terminal run of pipe is set to one bend
radius with the loop width fixed to the remaining length of element 60-70.
At this point, there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.

8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You can
adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1 or Pt2)
to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to adjust the
minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking adjacent to
element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the –X direction.
9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.

10. Click Undo to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.

11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is not
long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.
Loop Optimization Wizard Overview

The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.
Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design
Wizard to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a model.
Load Case (for Design)

Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a
force-driven load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load output
values for review and selection.
Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be optimized
(along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill in
these entries.
On Element
For Stress Optimization:
Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is
located. Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill in
this entry.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the Load
Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Component

Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating
the item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be
optimized.
Create Loop on Element

Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list
or from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in
place of single elements.
Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
 Type #1 - Places the loop at the From end of the original element in the plane
of the Major Direction.
 Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From end
of the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.

 Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane of
the Major Direction.
 Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the
Minor Direction.
 Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane of
the Major Direction.
 Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the
Minor Direction.
 Type # 7 - Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.
 Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size
as the original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor Direction.
 Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.
Bend Cost Factor

Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when CAESAR
II is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend (including
hardware, fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same length of
straight pipe, then the appropriate value would be 100.0.
Width to Height Ratio

Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none.
Select none if the segments of the selected loop configurations still coincide with the original
element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2,
segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and #7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1 of
Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the length of a long radius bend.
This entry does not apply in the event that Loop Types #7 or #8 were selected. In this case,
the height to width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary and the width is held
constant to the length necessary to make up the original element length. This last option is
often preferable in areas where there is limited room for wide loops.

Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard
tries to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.
Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Major Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.
Minor Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.
Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Line Numbers
Piping Input menu: Model > Line Numbers
Organization Tools toolbar: Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.
Line Numbers Dialog Box

Controls options of the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe
elements. You can set options for line numbers on the Classic Piping Input and the Static
Output Processor.
Create (Create from Selection)

Creates a pipe run from the selected elements. You can select elements from the 3D model or
the Line Numbers dialog box. The line number is given the default name Line Number <x>,
where <x> is a sequential number. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
Remove (Remove Line Number)

Deletes the selected pipe run line numbers. Elements in the pipeline move to the next line
number up in the sequence. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number.
Reset (Reset Settings)

Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or
Reset All to only reset the selected line number.
Line Number Views

Line number and element rows display in a tree view. Elements are named by their beginning and
ending node numbers. You can create a view using the following methods:
 Select a row to change the visibility to 100%. Clear a row to change the visibility to 0%.
 When you select or clear a line number, the software also selects or clears all of line number's
elements. You can then select or clear individual elements.
 Select or clear Main to change the selection of all line numbers and elements. You can then
select or clear individual line numbers and elements.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers or multiple elements.
Previous (Previous View)

Saves the current view and returns to the previous view. If no view is saved, all rows are
selected.
This option is not available in the Static Output Processor.
Invert (Invert Selection)

Reverses the line number selection to clear the selection of previously-selected rows and to
select the rows not previously selected.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those pipe run line
numbers or elements that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all line numbers
and elements in the tree view. You can search for a name or a node number.
Show/Hide

Turns the display of line numbers and elements on or off. Clear a line number to reduce
visibility to 0% for the line number and its elements. Clear an element to reduce visibility to 0%
for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, node numbers do not display when the element
opacity is 0%. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 360).
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of line numbers and elements. 100% indicates that the element is
opaque. 0% indicates that the element is invisible. Specify the value of a line number to
change opacity for the line number and its elements. Specify the value of an element to
change opacity for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, the node number opacity matches the element
opacity. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on page
360).
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
See Also
Line Number (on page 239)
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes

Piping Input menu: Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes
Input Tools toolbar: Intersection SIF scratchpad
Displays the Node Selection dialog box.
Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the number of the node where
you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.
Review Intersection SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.
The boxes that display in this dialog box depend upon the piping code you select for the
job. The following list details all possible boxes that the software can display in this dialog box. The
first section shows the most common dialog boxes, but other code-specific inputs below that.

Node
SIFs.
SIFs.
supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
 For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the table Input Items Optionally Affecting
SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)* (on page 136).
 For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
 For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of tee
type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 153).
 For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and
Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692
code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations
specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to

use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for tees (including the
pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of
Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types,
CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement tees
(intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC
329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe. Specifies the following terms for each
component type:
153).
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).
Crotch R

Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value
can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you
attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a
smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the
resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID
 IGE/TD/12
Weld(d)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied
for your particular code.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet leg
is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31 piping
codes for further clarification.
Header OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Branch OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.

Header SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the flexibility characteristic. For more information on how wall thickness is used in the
flexibility characteristic (h) equation, see Wall Thickness of Bend (on page 823).
Branch Section Modulus
Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data, CAESAR
II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
Other Code-Specific Inputs

The following inputs appear only when you select certain piping codes.
Do/r3
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
Weldoflange
153).

T/Th/Tb
153).
Weldolet
page 153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
Weldoflange
page 153).
Te/Tb
153).
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).

rp/do
Fabricated Tee
153).
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
153).
153).
Sweepolet
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
153).
153).

Weldoflange
153).
r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
153).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
Sweepolet
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
153).
Weldoflange
153).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
153).
Weldolet
153).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
153).
153).

Weldoflange
153).
Ferric Material for Note 3673.2b-1.3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME
NC and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Piping Input menu: Environment > Review SIFs at Bend Nodes
Input Tools toolbar: Bend SIF scratchpad
Displays the Node Selection dialog box.
Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter bend Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the node number where you want to
evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Bend SIF's dialog box.
Review Bend SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing bend SIFs.
Node
Displays the node number.
Bend Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
 Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
 Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
Bend Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and
can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend
should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the
bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are:

 All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Bend Angle
Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the matching
pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside diameter of
the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe. CAESAR II calculates section
modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the matching pipe as defined by the
codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting

B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend stress
calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR II
checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be
widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken
down into “n” single cut widely spaced miters, where “n” is the total number of cuts in the bend.
The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and
flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter

spacing are related by the following equations:

 Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan θ )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
 Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
θ = Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl box
for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the minimum
wall thickness of the bend element.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD
Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in the average
cross-sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk
Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in the mean radius (r2)
calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus
Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used for the pressure
stiffening calculations.
Pressure
Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value is used for the
pressure stiffening calculations.

Bend In-Plane SIF

Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF
Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor
Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Factor
Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data, CAESAR
II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
Special Execution Parameters

Piping Input menu: Environment > Special Execution Parameters
Input Tools toolbar: Special execution options

Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. These parameters remain set for that
particular job.
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints

Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and moments
are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these elements can
usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements. Select this option to
cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid elements and expansion joints
in the system.
Print Alphas and Pipe Properties

Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the thermal
expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in the error
checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify possible problems in
the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and expansion joints are treated
the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding factors are not reflected in this
table.
Activate Bourdon Effects

Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate the
Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate, or
displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line that
connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are no global

displacements due to pressure. The Bourdon effect is always considered when plastic pipe is
used, regardless of the setting of the Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping systems.
That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be appreciable in
long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems. For
this reason, the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs and
bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:
 Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or welded fittings
and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.
 Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are fabricated by
the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases, the slight residual ovalization of the
bend cross section, after bending, causes the bend to try to straighten out when pressurized.
Fixed end moments are associated with this opening. These fixed end moments do not exist
when the original shape of the bend cross-section is circular.
Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts

Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two pieces of
information:
 The loop closure tolerance.
 The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following piece of the
piping system that is not connected to the first.
This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:
 Before preprocessor plots are generated.
 Before global coordinate reports are built.
 Before error checking is performed.
Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.
There are several major uses for this flag:
 Set the loop closure tolerance.
 Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.
 Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.
 Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.
Whenever you create a physical loop in the piping system, there are at least two different sets of
dimensions between the same points. If the two dimensions are not within a certain tolerance of
each other, a fatal error occurs. You can set this tolerance interactively or in the configuration file.
Select Both for the Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts option to cause CAESAR II to
interactively prompt for this tolerance.

Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature

Specifies the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the bottom of
the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load. It is added to each temperature
case for horizontal pipes.
This entry is computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees hotter
than the temperature on the bottom. The proper value to type in this box is 20, not -20.
Liberal Stress Allowable

Indicates whether or not to use liberal stress allowable. Conservative formulation of the allowable
expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is calculated from:
f ( 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh )
When select this option, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided Sh > Sl, is added to the term
inside the parenthesis. That is:
SA(Liberal) = f[ 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh + ( Sh - Sl) ]
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the load set.
If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the largest of Sl,
considering all of the sustained cases, for any single element end is chosen to subtract from Sh.
Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the allowable expansion stress also
varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file in its
computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are created using this configuration
setting. If you do not want to use this default setting for calculating the expansion, clear this check
box.
Uniform Load in G's

Specifies whether to use a magnifier of gravitational loading for the uniform load. Uniform load can
be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of gravitational loading.
Uniform load in G's is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
 Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed by the
CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own combination cases at the
output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of the stresses due to sustained and
occasional loads. For more information, see Occasional Load Factor (on page 100).
 When you select this option, the in G’s radio button is activated on the first Uniform Load tab
in the Piping Input auxiliary panel. You can override this option by selecting the in F/L option.
Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in the
system is 70°F/21°C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion strain
state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is used in conjunction with

the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion coefficient to calculate the thermal
expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when going from the ambient
temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information, see
New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 61). The software uses this configuration file value to set
the ambient temperature when you create a new model.
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x 1,000,000)

Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient. The default thermal expansion coefficient for
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe is 12.0E-6 in./in./deg.F. If you have a more suitable value for the
particular composite, type that value in this box. For example, if the improved value was: 8.5E-6
in./in./deg. F., then type 8.5 in this box. The exponent (E-6) is implied. This expansion coefficient is
used in conjunction with the temperatures on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for each plastic
pipe element to calculate the thermal expansion for the element.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a function of
temperature. This could prove limiting should there be parts of the system at different non-ambient
temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal expansion at temperature in
inches per inch and input this value directly into the Temperature box on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod Axial

Specifies the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. For example, if the material modulus-of-elasticity (axial) is 3.2E6
psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, type 0.25 as the ratio of these two.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.

Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system where
the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the Z-axis
represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being defined
according to the right-hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using either
coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see New Job
Z-Axis Vertical (on page 75).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the Configure/Setup
module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under which it was last saved.
You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical by clicking the check box on the
Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the model;
only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system into the
other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the Static
Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is dictated by
the orientation of the model input file.
Set North Direction

®
Specifies the plant north direction mapping so that the Intergraph Smart 3D PCF model north
direction aligns with the CAESAR II global axis. You can import a model via PCF, and then set the
north direction to map from a model N-S, E-W system used in isometrics to the XYZ coordinate
system used in CAESAR II. The mapping updates the orientation as the model rotates, and
exports the mapping to CAESAR II Access format.
®
Software such as SmartPlant Interop Publisher (SPIOP) and CAESAR II ISOGEN can import the
Access data and properly orient the model.
Set North Direction is useful when you do not use the default CAESAR II mapping.
You can map the north arrow to a CAESAR II global axis: -X (the default value for no rotation),
+X, -Z, or +Z.
Bandwidth Optimizer Options

Orders the set of equations that represent the piping system for both static and dynamic analyses.
The optimizer may be run with a variety of different switch settings. The default settings were
chosen for their combination of ordering efficiency and speed. These settings should suffice for
the majority of piping systems analyzed. For systems having greater than 100 nodes, or that are
highly interconnected, the following optimum parameters should be used.

 Optimizer Method = Both

 Next Node Selection = Decreasing
 Final Ordering = Reversed
 Collins Ordering = Band
 Degree Determination = Connections
 User Control = None
If the User Control is set to Allow User Re-looping, CAESAR II lets you interactively try as many
different combinations of switch settings as needed. When the most efficient ordering is obtained,
you can continue on with the analysis. This interactive prompting for optimization parameters is
done in the analysis level processing.
Include Piping Input Files

Piping Input menu: Environment > Include Piping Input Files
Import Model toolbar: Include piping files

Includes other piping models in the current piping model. Piping models added may have a node
offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the Y-axis before being added.
Include Piping Files Dialog Box

File Name
Displays the file to include. Click Browse to browse for the file name. The file need not reside
in the current data directory.
Read Now
Specifies whether or not the file is read immediately. Select Y if the file is to be read
immediately and stored as part of the current input. The file read may be edited as part of the
current job. Select N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during error
checking. The file read may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY
Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current job.
The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
You can also rotate the model from the List utility. For more information, see
Rotate (on page 345).
Inc
Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in the
current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Including Structural Input Files

Piping Input menu: Environment > Include Structural Input Files
Import Model toolbar: Include structural files

Includes existing structural model into the current job. The structural model must have been built
and successfully error checked in the structural steel preprocessor accessed from the CAESAR II
menu. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 416).
After a structural model has been built, you can include it into any piping input. You can include the
names of up to 20 different structural models. After this is done, you can plot and analyze the
structural model with the piping model. The structural models need not reside in the current folder.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by the use of restraints with connecting
nodes. Make absolutely sure there are no node number conflicts between structure and pipe
models. After you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and structure,
CAESAR II knows where to put the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no connection
between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the origin of the
piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.
Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

Piping Input menu: Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF)
Import Model toolbar: APCF

Displays the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box and imports piping component files
(PCF) into the CAESAR II piping environment. A PCF is a flat text file with the .pcf extension
containing detailed information about the piping system components. The information is extracted
from a CAD system.
The PCF format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. You
can obtain details on the format and its capabilities from Alias.
APCF contains all functionality of the Import PCF (on page 1205) external interface with a
more customizable interface that allows you to:

 Create a new model or add elements to an existing model.

 Control element sequencing.
 Define and control node numbering.
 Incrementally build and verify the model by creating as many .pcf files as needed.
 Selectively update an existing CAESAR II model.
 Use the block operations modeling tools to assist modeling changes. For more information,
see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 376).
A CAESAR II model constructed from PCFs uses the units of the current model and automatically
attaches/intersects the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping, if appropriate.
Selecting Files
You can select all PCFs to convert at the same time or select them in smaller groupings to convert
incrementally. The software only processes selected files. You can drag files to arrange them in
the needed order.
Conversion Options
Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
 Condense options
 Miscellaneous options
 CAESAR II element properties
Options apply to all files selected when you click Begin Processing. If you select groups of files to
convert incrementally, you can set different conversion options for each group.
Supports, restraints, and boundary conditions (such as equipment connections) transfer from the
PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. You can change the thermal displacements.
For information on mapping parameters used during the conversion, see PCF Interface Custom
Attributes (on page 326).

Node Numbering and Element Sequencing

Define the Start Node as 0 when you want numbering for a file to start with the next available
number defined by the value of Increment.
You can also use a Start Node other than 0 or change the value of the node number Increment
for specific files. In the following example, the selected files represent vent branches with starting
nodes defined for each branch.
Before (first group processed):

After (vent branches in second group processed):
Define the default start node and increment values in the Configuration Editor dialog
box. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Rounding of Converted Values

After you perform multiple conversions, some values, such as delta coordinates, temperatures,
and pressures, may contain values calculated to many decimal places.
The software automatically rounds these entries to the nearest integer when you close the
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box.
Do not close the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box until all PCFs have been
imported. The software determines connectivity between piping based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates are rounded, then nodal global coordinates may change
enough to fall outside of the connection tolerances.
Warnings in Log File

During the conversion process, status messages display in the message area in the lower right of
the dialog box. Messages are also written to a log file <CAESAR II file name>.LOG.RTF.

Click Save Warnings to save the messages to a different file.
PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive unit
label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can be
specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not one of
the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units on the
CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in the
CAESAR II System folder.
 The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute.
It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
 One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping files
that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Topics
PCF Unit Mapping ...................................................................... 327
PCF Material Mapping ................................................................ 328
PCF Restraint Mapping............................................................... 328
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping .................................. 338

PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
 CAESAR II Unit - Displays the internal unit used by the software
 PCF Unit - Displays the user-supplied unit label
 Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF - Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by spaces
and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any unit
specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit as
defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs to
be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C° to F° will also add the 32 °).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.

PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II material
number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number. The match
in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches the CAESAR
II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an intelligent
match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard CAESAR
II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit… menu must be
mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping

The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
CAESAR II uses the SUPPORT mapping component to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. If the software is unable to match a SUPPORT with a <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file, only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute is interpreted by the

software. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST,
NORTH, or SOUTH.
Support configurations can vary from project-to-project. In order to fine-tune the configuration
CAESAR II uses with an imported model for a given SUPPORT component, you need to map an
attribute to the <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The following example displays a typical SUPPORT component. The attribute definition (VG100)
for the NAME attribute is highlighted and should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
Remember that, as your support configuration changes, you can customize this mapping file to
ensure proper import into the software.
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the attribute customization options or restraint definitions.
Defining PCF Keywords

In the Keyword Mapping Section, define an attribute from your PCF file to associate with the
following CAESAR II keywords:
 <SUPPORT_NAME>
 <SUPPORT_TAG>
 <SUPPORT_GUID>
The CAESAR II keywords located within "<>" are used in the PCF import process. The
<SUPPORT_NAME> keyword is used by CAESAR II to map the supports. The
<SUPPORT_TAG> and <SUPPORT_GUID> keywords are support properties that are imported
into CAESAR II.
Defining Support Mapping

In the Support Mapping Section, define the support mapping.
In the following example file, VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
 +Vertical support (weight support)

 Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3

This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
The syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name> <N>
<Restraint Function> <MU=> <GAP=>
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
<Support Name>
CAESAR II attempts to match the <Support Name> with the attribute definition from your PCF
mapping file. Any attribute definition in the PCF file that contains the <Support Name> is
considered a match (it does not have to be an exact match). For example, if the <Support
Name> is VG1, an attribute definition such as VG100 would be considered a match.
For optimal results, list the <Support Names> in the order from longest name to
shortest name. Otherwise, if you have both VG1 and VG100 as <Support Names>, the
software reads VG1 as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N>
Specifies the number of CAESAR II restraints to be placed in the corresponding Restraint
auxiliary panel in the Piping Input. CAESAR II allows up to six restraints on any element.
<Restraint Function>
Specifies the purpose/type of restraint (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and so forth.), Global Axes (VERT,
NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (a, b, c, and so forth):
 ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR
Creates a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Variable Hanger, or Constant
Hanger, respectively. The variable and constant attributes create to-be-designed

hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.

 VERT, EW, NS
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the compass points of the global axes
(Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up setting). See the
figure below. Create one-way restraints by prefixing the attribute with "+" or "-".
 A, B, C
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the "direction"
attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and B axes. As with
the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with + or -. See the figure
below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint. (This
keyword is not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR.)
<GAP=>
Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (This

The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the

END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement.
In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the vertical axis is set).

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports is
eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If the
restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards the
pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3

If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above), then
the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint may
be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of the
attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the direction
lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
 +VERTical
 GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
 up/down restraint
 side-to-side restraint

If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible that
the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the second
definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral to the
support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
 +VERT support
 An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds to
restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).

ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM

In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is to
the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model the
restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE
or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress Intensification Factor settings of
imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
 SKEYS - PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within the
general component group.
 CAESAR II SIF TYPE - Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown in
the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
 PAD=X.X UNITS - (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the applicable
unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
 Ii=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component. This is a multiplier,
and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)
 Io=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component. This is
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34

Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component identifier
listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 328) (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are
typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The PCF menu
command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in this
file, you should add it.
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.
1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

Import a piping model from a PCF using APCF

1. Click APCF on the Import Model toolbar or click Environment > Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) on the Piping Input menu.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
2. Click Choose Files.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select one or more PCFs and click Open.
The selected file(s) display in the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box.

Multiple files typically represent different sections of a model or individual pipe

runs.
To remove a PCF, select the file and press Delete.

4. Type the Start Node and Increment value for each of the files.
5. For each file, change any of the conversion options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.
 Condense Rigids (on page 342)
 Condense Tees (on page 342)
 Condense Elbows (on page 342)
 Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 342)
 Combine PCF Files (on page 343)
 Set North Direction (on page 343)
 Diameter Limit (on page 343)
 Length for Nodal Increment (on page 343)
 Material Number (on page 345)
 Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 345)
6. If you opened more than one file and only want to import part of the model, select the files to
import.

You can import the other files after reviewing the first import.
7. To initiate the import, click Begin Processing.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the lower right-hand pane.
After processing completes, the imported model displays in the Classic Piping Input dialog
box and the graphic view.
The software saves status messages to a log file with the name <CAESAR II file
name>.LOG.rtf. The log file is saved in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
8. View your new CAESAR II input model in the Classic Piping Input graphic view. If needed,
resize the view to see the model.
For example, the software imports the below model from the sample file 1001-P-Input.pcf:
Click Undo on the Input Tools toolbar to remove the imported elements.
9. If you have additional PCFs to import, select the files, change any conversion options as
needed, clear the selection of the previously imported files, and click Begin Processing.
10. Save the model.
11. Close the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box after importing all files.

Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire model
is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must set this
option and Increment (on page 342) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering of
the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 341) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change of
cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the three
elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE, this
directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it is
condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
Use Pipe Materials Only

Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the available
data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material substitution is
made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the diameter, a match is
made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the Pipe Spec, the
component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied but A234 Grade
WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.

Combine PCF Files

Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are prompted
for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Set North Direction

Specifies the plant north direction mapping so that the Intergraph Smart 3D® PCF model north
direction aligns with the CAESAR II global axis. You can import a model via PCF, and then set the
north direction to map from a model N-S, E-W system used in isometrics to the XYZ coordinate
system used in CAESAR II. The mapping updates the orientation as the model rotates, and
exports the mapping to CAESAR II Access format.
®
Software such as SmartPlant Interop Publisher (SPIOP) and CAESAR II ISOGEN can import the
Access data and properly orient the model.
Set North Direction is useful when you do not use the default CAESAR II mapping.
You can map the north arrow to a CAESAR II global axis: -X (the default value for no rotation), +X,
-Z, or +Z.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the size
(nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to include all
pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Length for Nodal Increment

Increases node increments for pipe lengths greater than the specified value. This option allows
you to set the nodal increment for imported PCF files based on pipe length, which means you can
specify a larger buffer of node numbers for longer pipe lengths. This feature is helpful when
creating intermediate nodes and elements to place supports.
Enter a value to activate this option. The software divides the length of each piping element by the
value entered in Length for Nodal Increment (The answer is rounded to the next whole number).
The software multiplies that quotient by the value in the Increment field for the specified PCF file.
The result is the node increment for that element.

For example, if you do not enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment the software numbers all
the nodes according to the value in the Increment column.
If you enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment, the software performs the procedure listed
above to determine the nodal increment for each element. In the following example, if you enter 15
in Length for Nodal Increment and a piping element is 7.875 feet (94.5 inches), the software
divides 94.5 by 15 and gets 6.3. Because the software rounds the quotient to the next whole
number, 6.3 is rounded to 7. So, if the value in the Increment column is 10, the software multiplies
10 by 7, which results in a nodal increment of 70, as shown below.

Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot be
determined from the PCF.
Show Informational Messages

Piping Input menu: Environment > Show Informational Messages
Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters, schedule to
wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show Informational
Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.
Reset View on Refresh

Piping Input menu: Environment > Reset View on Refresh
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset View

Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is turned
on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
CAESAR II Configuration
Piping Input menu: Environment > CAESAR II Configuration
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration Editor
(on page 55).
Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as the
block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).
Rotate
Piping Input menu: Global > Rotate
Block Operations toolbar: Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle about
the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 396).

Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
Duplicate
Piping Input menu: Global >Duplicate
Block Operations toolbar: Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes. Mirror
imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not mirror
imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.

Setup
Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and element
characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the current
block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe elements.
Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 396).
Delete
Piping Input menu: Global > Delete
Block Operations toolbar: Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
Nodes
Piping Input menu: Global > Nodes
Block Operations toolbar: Renumber
Rearranges the node numbers in the block.
You can use this command to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put the
entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all of the nodes.
To renumber the node numbers in a block
Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful
when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes.
1. Select the block of nodes you want to renumber from the 3D Graphics pane or in the
Elements dialog box.
2. Click Renumber in the Block Operations toolbar.
The Block Renumber dialog box displays.
3. Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
 Select Increment to change all node numbers in the block. The change (+ or -) is
specified as the Node Increment. For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25
and 670 in a block, and you select Increment and specify a Node Increment of 100,
the software changes the node numbering in the block to 110, 130, 700, 125 and 770,
respectively.

 Select Renumber to enable the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of
nodes from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For
example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select
Renumber and specify a Start Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the
software changes the node block numbering to 100, 110, 120, 130, and 140,
respectively.
Be aware that the Start Node and Node Increment values may introduce
node numbers used elsewhere in the model.
4. Select Renumber Matching Nodes Outside to renumber the same nodes outside of the
selected block.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected
block, and the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the renumber.
The boundary nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the
selected block, plus the nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the
selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear Renumber Matching Nodes Outside, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch connections in the
selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is
connected to a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if they
do not connect to a node in the block and on the piping system.
To avoid any confusion when renumbering nodes, start the renumbering at a node greater
than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes renumber successfully (that is, there are not
any dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative increment to shift
the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However, CAESAR II can only
perform the renumber operation for the first block, with respect to the element list. In this case,
CAESAR II displays a message box with information about the block that is to be renumbered.
You can then continue to renumber the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered.

Invert
Piping Input menu: Global > Invert
Block Operations toolbar: Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node numbering
while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
Why use the Invert command?

The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model from
an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign node
numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the tee
to the termination.
To invert a block of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.
 If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D Graphics
panel.
 If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.
2. Click the Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The delta dimensions (DX, DY, DZ) of the elements are reversed. In most cases, the node
sequence (From and To nodes) remains the same, but the order and direction of the elements
are reversed.
 Notice that only the node numbers are changed in the 3D Graphics pane.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new delta dimension assignments.

For example:
Change Sequence
Piping Input menu: Global > Change Sequence
Block Operations toolbar: Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.

Why use the Change Sequence command?

Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input values
for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it UNTIL the
value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design software
such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence. However, that
sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high-pressure elements
to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to verify and can help you to
logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way so that those with similar
carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.
To change the sequence of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from the
Elements dialog box, from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence in the Block Operations tool bar.

Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box, and then click Block Operations
> Change Sequence.
The Change Sequence dialog box displays.
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
 To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
 To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the
Elements dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the
capability of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use the
Undo button.

Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Range
Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Plot Tools toolbar: Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need to
locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays the
Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
 Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics highlighting
options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range
command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are visible. Also, if
using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined displacements, the
Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight correctly.
 Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Range Dialog Box

Controls options for manipulating ranges.
Show only
Specifies the items to show.
From
Specifies the node number for the start of the range.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the range.
At These Elements
All elements that exist in the model are displayed. This list indicates which elements are
included in the range. Clear the check box for elements that you do not want to include.
Add
Adds an item to the At These Elements list.
Reverse Selection
Clears all check boxes that were selected in the At These Elements list and selects all check
boxes that were cleared.
Select All
Selects all the check boxes in the At These Elements list.

Clear All
Clears all of the check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Restraints
Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints
Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the restraints and whether
or not the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Restraints is turned on the software displays:
 A directional arrow for a restraint.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for rotational restraints,
such as RX, RY, or RZ.
Anchors
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors
Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model, as
well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
Displacements
Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements

Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements

Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of displacements
on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:
 A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant rotational
displacement vector.
 A pair of shorter directional arrows for Fixed linear displacement. (Disp. Value = 0)

 A pair of shorter directional arrows with curved arrows for Fixed rotational displacement.
 A directional arrow with a sphere at the top for non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden
fixed vectors.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) with a sphere at the top for
the resultant rotational non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden fixed vectors.
On the toolbar, you can also specify:

 The arrow size - Largest, Larger, Medium, Smaller, or Smallest.
 Whether to hide or show fixed displacements - Show Fixed.
 The vector to display - Vector1, Vector2, and so on.

Hover the cursor over displacement arrows to see the displacement values for the displayed
vector:
Where a restraint has a CNode with displacement, the displacements are displayed with values
displayed with the Node number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the Configuration
Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements (Component
Color) (on page 80) and Display Options Toolbar (on page 369).
Hangers
Piping Input menu: Options > Hangers
Plot Tools toolbar: Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the hangers and whether
or not the software displays hangers with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Hangers is turned on, the software displays:

 A single hanger at the location of the hanger.
 Multiple hangers at a single location as separate symbols with leaders to the location.
This is a graphical representation of the number of hangers at the location, not of

the hanger installation.
Nozzle Flexibility
Piping Input menu: Options > NozzleFlexibility
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Displays the nozzles for which you want to specify stiffnesses.
Flange Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Displays the flange nodes that the software evaluates.
Nozzle Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Displays the nozzles in which you want to set a check.

Forces
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces
Legends toolbar: Forces
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:
 A directional arrow for a force.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
You can also specify:

You can change the default arrow colors in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color) (on
page 81) and Forces/Moments 2 (Component Color) (on page 81).
Uniform Loads
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads
Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.

The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave
Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see the
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined display
in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Axis
Piping Input menu: Options > Axis
Plot Tools toolbar: Axis

Turns the display of the coordinate system on or off. You can select the following options (in
Classic Piping Input and Static Output Processor):
Axis Planes
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes.
Axis
Displays the coordinate system axes.
Off
Turns off axis display.
The software sets the default value from the value of Axis Mode (on page 89) in
the Configuration Editor.

North Arrow
Displays a north arrow with the coordinate system. The North arrow indicates the North
orientation of the plant.
The software sets the default value from the value of North Direction (on page 90)
in the Configuration Editor.
Node Numbers
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers
Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N.
When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the pipe:
You can also control the node number display using the following options:
All
Displays all node numbers or names.
Anchors
Displays anchor node numbers or names.
Hangers
Displays hanger node numbers or names.
Restraints
Displays restraint node numbers or names.
Names Only
Displays node names if they are assigned. Node numbers do not display. You must select
Names Only in combination with All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints.

Show Tags
Displays support tags, hanger tags, and element names. You must select Show Tags in
combination with All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints.
You can customize node number, node name, and tag display by combining options, such as:
 All + Show Tags displays all node numbers, names, and tags.
 Anchors + Show Tags displays anchor node numbers, names, and tags.
 All + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not display.
 Hangers + Names Only displays hanger node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
 All + Show Tags + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
In cases where a node contains multiple values, a tag overrides a node name, and a
node name overrides a node number.
Length
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Plot Tools toolbar: Lengths

Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Piping Input menu: Options > Tees
Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Displays where you have specified tees or SIFs on the model.

Expansion Joints & Rigids

Piping Input menu: Options > Expansion Joints & Rigids
Plot Tools toolbar: Expansion Joints & Rigids
Emphasizes the display of elements such as restraints, anchors, displacements, and expansion
joints by changing pipe element display to lines.
Diameters
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Legends toolbar: Diameters

Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the diameter
variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.
Wall Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Legends toolbar: Wall Thicknesses
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the wall
thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Corrosion
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Legends toolbar: Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to see
the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes
Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the piping
code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Piping Input menu: Options > Material
Legends toolbar: Materials
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the material
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Pipe Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density
Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your
needs.
Fluid Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Legends toolbar: Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the fluid
displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your
needs.

-Mill Tolerance (%)

Piping Input menu: Options > -Mill Tolerance (%)
Legends toolbar: -Mill Tolerance (%)
Updates the model to show each mill tolerance percentage in a different color. Use this option to
see the mill tolerance variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
A color key displays the mill tolerances defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.
The Mill Tolerance legend does not display the positive mill tolerance used with the
IGE/TD/12 code.
Refractory Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Refractory Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness
Legends toolbar: Insulation
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change
Insulation Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Legends toolbar: Insulation Density

Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see the
insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned

Cladding Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
meet your needs.
Cladding Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Temperatures
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures
Legends toolbar: Show Temps

Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
Legends toolbar: Show Pressures

Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Toolbars
Piping Input menu: View > Toolbars
Displays or hides the toolbars

You can also drag a toolbar to change the location of each toolbar.
To customize toolbar contents, right-click a toolbar, and then select Customize . You can also
customize toolbars by pressing Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Customize Dialog Box (on page 379)

The Classic Piping Input and the 3D Model include the following toolbars.
 Standard Toolbar (on page 366)
 Standard Operators Toolbar (on page 367)
 Standard Views Toolbar (on page 368)
 Display Options Toolbar (on page 369)
 Cutting Planes Toolbar (on page 370)
 Markups Toolbar (on page 369)
 Plot Tools Toolbar (on page 370)
 Legends Toolbar (on page 371)
 Edit Mode Toolbar (on page 373)
 CAESAR II Tools Toolbar (on page 373)
 Navigation Tools Toolbar (on page 374)
 List Operations Toolbar (on page 374)
 Input Tools Toolbar (on page 374)
 Block Operations Toolbar (on page 376)
 Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 376)
 Edit Tools Toolbar (on page 377)
 Reference CAD Models Toolbar (on page 378)
 Wizards Toolbar (on page 378)
 Import Model Toolbar (on page 379)
 Organization Tools Toolbar (on page 379)
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. You can also click File > New on the main menu. CAESAR II
opens the New Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job. You are prompted for the file name.

Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location
Print - Prints the selected piping input job.
Standard Operators Toolbar

The Standard Operators toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box diagonally
to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 400). During rotation,
the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may disappear or become
distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual conversion depends on the size
and complexity of the model. After the rotation is complete, the model returns to its original
state.
Orbit Vertical- Rotates the model on the vertical axis only.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down the
left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by holding the
center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse. This provides the panning
effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either side.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model (on page 408).

Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model to
display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around them.
You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window. Remove
elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can select Translucent Objects with any of the other
display options (Shaded View, Hidden Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette, Center
Line View). Select a different type of operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among the
views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line
View.
Standard Views Toolbar

The Standard Views toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.

Display Options Toolbar

The Display Options toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings dialog box where you can adjust properties for the
current model.
You can also open the Plot Settings dialog box by right-clicking in the graphic
view and selecting Properties > Display Options .
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
Markups Toolbar
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful in
the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and saved
to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a leader
line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single line. The
annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use any of the
highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to
HTML.
 The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
 Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
 The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved with
the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom, rotate,
pan, or reset all.
 The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on
page 400).
 When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator. (For
example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)

Cutting Planes Toolbar

The Cutting Planes toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when trying
to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are not
defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at a
certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Plot Tools Toolbar

The Plot Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more information,
see Anchors (on page 353).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more information,
see Hangers (on page 356).
Displacements - Turns the display of displacements on or off on the current model.
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Flanges - Turns the display of flanges on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or off
on the current model.
Tees - Turns the display of Tees on or off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.

Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You can
display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors by
selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar in piping
input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the model, and
not the node numbers.
Lengths - Turns the display of element lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively, press L.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when
you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This
command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U. For more information, see
Range (on page 352).
Find Node - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that
allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the
node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you define only the From node number,
the software searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you
enter only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node
number. When the software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view.
You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Legends Toolbar
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. Review the model
specifications for the legend function and make any changes, if necessary. You can access the
toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Materials- Opens the Materials legend, where you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes legend, where you can view and make changes to
the color display settings for piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend, where you can view and make changes to the color
display settings for insulation on the model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend, where you can view pipe diameter dimensions
and make changes to the color display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for wall thicknesses on the model.
-Mill Tolerance (%) - Opens the -Mill Tolerance (%) legend where you can view mill tolerance
percentages and make changes to the color display settings for the mill tolerance on the
model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend, where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for forces and moments
on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
forces and moments.

Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for uniform loads on the
model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various uniform
loads.
Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads legend, where you can view the wind or wave
loads applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for loads on the
model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various wind or
wave loads.
Show Temps- Opens the Temperatures legend, where you can view the temperatures of
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures- Opens the Pressures legend, where you can view the pressures on model
elements and make changes to the color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend, where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density- Opens the Pipe Density legend, where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing pipe density.
Fluid Density- Opens the Fluid Density legend, where you can view the elements with fluid
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing fluid density.
Insulation Density- Opens the Insulation Density legend, where you can view the elements
with insulation density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing
insulation density.
Using Legends to Check Your Model

Legends allow you to easily review model specifications for a specific legend function and make
changes to your model, if necessary. You can access the Legends toolbar from the Classic
Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. Select a legend icon in the Legends toolbar to display
the legend for that function.
Perform the following tasks on a legend using the procedures below.
Editing a legend value
1. Double-click the cell containing the value you wish to edit.
A new Edit row displays containing the value.
2. Select the cell containing the value in the Edit row and edit the field to contain the new value.
3. Press Enter.
The new value is saved and the Edit row disappears.
Changing the legend color
1. Select the row for the value for whose color you wish to change.
2. Select to display the Colors window.

3. Use the Standard tab to select a predefined color. Select the Custom tab to define a color
using the RGB color model.
4. Select OK.
Edit Mode Toolbar

The Edit Mode toolbar lets you move selected elements on the model. You can access this
toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Move Geometry - Moves selected elements to a new location in the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the x-axis on the model.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the z-axis on the model.
For more information, see Moving Elements (on page 408).
CAESAR II Tools Toolbar

The CAESAR II Tools toolbar contains common functions to the CAESAR II software. You can
access this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar
contains the following functions.
CAESAR II Configuration - Contains instructions specifying how CAESAR II operates on a

particular computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to
perform the analysis. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box
displays the results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 536).
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for fatal
errors. It uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 558).
View Static Results - Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a static
analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor (on page 595).
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis Workflow
(on page 665).

Navigation Tools Toolbar

The Navigation Tools toolbar contains functions that help you move about the Classic Piping
Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the following functions.
First Element - Skips to the first element.
Previous Element - Skips to the previous element.
Next Element - Skips to the next element.
Last Element - Skips to the last element.
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new
element if there is no next element.
Duplicate Element - Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue
building the model. Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more
information on duplicating groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 346).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
List Operations Toolbar

The List Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
List Input - Displays the model in a spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. From this view, you can quickly review and enter input data. Additionally,
you can rotate the 3D model along the various axes and duplicate input values from the List
Input view. For more information, see List (on page 252).
Input Tools Toolbar

The Input Toolbars toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to
type the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without
this password; however, they can be opened and reviewed. For more information, see
Archive Dialog Box (on page 244).
Insert - Inserts an element. For more information, see Insert Element Dialog Box.
Delete - Deletes the current element.
Break - Divides an element into two or more individual elements. For more information, see
Break (on page 257).

Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each
discontiguous system segment. For more information, see Global (on page 250).
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number Increment (on page 75).
Distance - Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you
select on the model.
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command
displays the Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box. For more
information, see Valve (on page 260).
Expansion Joint Modeler - Creates expansion joints and displays the Expansion Joint
Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes. For more information,
see Expansion Joint (on page 265).
Title - Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with
the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so on.
These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model. For more
information, see Hanger Design Control Data (on page 273).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification

factors (SIFs) for various intersection configurations under different codes. For more
information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 815).
Bend SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can access this scratchpad
by selecting Analysis > SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad option on the
Classic Piping input or on the 3D model.
Special Execution Options - Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
These parameters remain set for that particular job.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing
Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of
available memory.
Redo - Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.

Block Operations Toolbar

The Block Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions. For more information, see Performing Block
Operations (on page 396).
Rotate- Rotates elements defined in the block. For more information, see Rotate (on page
345).
Duplicate- Duplicates elements in a block. For more information, see Duplicate (on page
346).
Delete - Deletes the selected block of elements.
Renumber - Rearranges the node numbers in the block. For more information, see Nodes
(on page 347).
Invert - Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert (on page 348).
Change Sequence - Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while

preserving the geometry. For more information, see Change Sequence (on page 350).
Aux Tools Toolbar

The Aux Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains auxiliary data functions most often used in piping input. Use this toolbar to quickly
access the Auxiliary Data dialog box found in the piping input. This toolbar includes the following
functions.
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every element that you have selected on the
model. Select an element(s) on the model and click Bend to view the Bends tab on
the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow
to change the icon function to delete all bends or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you selected with a rigid. Select an
element(s) on the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow to change the
icon function to delete all rigid elements or toggle between the select and delete
functions.

Expansion Joint - Replaces the currently selected element with an expansion

joint. Select an element(s) on the model and click Expansion Joint to view the
Expansion Joints tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input
job. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all expansion joints
or toggle between the select and delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model and click Reducer to view the
Reducers tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click
the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all reducers or toggle between
the select and delete functions (Toggle).
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of the selected elements on the model.
Restraints - Adds a new restraint or deletes an existing restraint to the selected

element on the model. For more information, see Restraints (on page 158).
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the selected elements on the model. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to delete all hangers or toggle between the
select and delete functions.
Nozzles - Adds a nozzle to each of the selected elements on the model.
Displacements - Adds a displacement at each of the selected elements on the

model.
Forces/Moments - Adds a forces and moments at each of the selected elements

on the model.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Allowables - Adds an allowable stress at each of the selected elements on the

model.
Node Names - Adds a node name to each of the selected elements on the model.
Offsets - Adds an offset to each of the selected elements on the model.
Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both ends of the selected elements on the
model. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all flanges or
toggle between the select and delete functions.
Edit Tools Toolbar

The Edit Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used editing windows in piping
input. This toolbar includes the following functions.

Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers (on page 113).
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box. For more information, see Deltas (on
page 115).
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes (on page 118).
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box. For
more information, see Temperatures (on page 122).
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box. For more information, see
Materials (on page 209).
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Material Elastic Properties (on page 234).
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box. For more information, see
Densities (on page 236).
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more information, see
Auxiliary Element Data (on page 1097).
Reference CAD Models Toolbar

The Reference CAD Models toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains icons that let you import CAD-based models into the piping input.
This toolbar includes the following functions.
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model. For
more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 242).
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load an S3D/SPR Model (on page 410) dialog box. If you
have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down arrow on the icon to select other
options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR
Visibility Options. These options only display when you have a S3D/SPR model already
open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Model View (on page 410) and S3D/SPR
Visibility Options (on page 414).
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.

Static Seismic Wizard - Opens the Seismic Wizard, which selects a

particular Seismic Code and its associated data. For more information,
see Seismic Wizard (on page 279).
Optimization Wizard - Opens the Optimization Wizard, which assists

with expansion loop design. For more information, see Optimization
Wizard (on page 292).
Import Model Toolbar

The Import Model toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains functions that let you access various import dialog boxes used in piping input.
This toolbar includes the following functions.
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 321).
Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including Structural
Input Files (on page 321).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page 322).
Organization Tools Toolbar

The Organization Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains functions let you organize or move the elements on a model. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Move Geometry - Selects or moves nodes or node groups on the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.
Customize Dialog Box

Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.
Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 380)
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 380)
Options Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 380)
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 381)
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 382)

Toolbars tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Controls options for customizing toolbars.
Toolbars
Displays the toolbars. Select the checkbox to display the toolbar. Clear the checkbox to hide
the toolbar. For a description of the available toolbars, see Toolbars (on page 365).
New
Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, where you create a new custom toolbar and specify the
name for the toolbar.
Rename
Displays the Rename Toolbar dialog box, where you change the name for an existing custom
toolbar.
Delete
Deletes the selected toolbar. You can only delete custom toolbars.
Reset
Returns the toolbars to their original configuration.
Commands tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for adding commands to toolbars.
Categories
Controls the category of commands available to drag.
Commands
Lists the commands in the selected category. Select a command and drag it to a toolbar.
Options tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for toolbars.

Always show full menus

Specifies whether menus show all commands, or only the most commonly used commands.
Show full menus after a short delay
Indicates whether or not menus expand to show all commands. This option is only available if
Always show full menus is cleared.
Reset menu and toolbar usage data
Returns the Always show full menus and Show full menus after a short delay check
boxes to their default settings.
Large icons
Displays large icons on the toolbars and menus.
Show ScreenTips on toolbars
Displays tooltips when you hover the cursor above toolbar buttons.
Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips
Displays the keyboard shortcut keys as tooltips when you hover the cursor above toolbar
buttons. This option is only available if Show ScreenTips on toolbars is selected.
Menu animations
Specifies how menu animations are applied.
Keyboard tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for assigning keyboard shortcuts to commands.
Category
Specifies the category of commands to modify.
Commands
Lists the commands in the category.
Key assignments
Lists the keyboard shortcuts assigned to the selected command.
Press new shortcut key
Displays the shortcut key.
Description
Displays a description of the selected command.
Assign
Adds the shortcut key from the Press new shortcut key field to the Key assignments list for
the command.
Remove
Deletes the selected entry from the Key assignments list.
Reset All
Returns all keyboard shortcuts to their default settings.

Menus tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for customizing menus.
Show Menu
Specifies the active menu.
Reset
Returns the selected menu to the default settings.
Select context menu
Specifies the active context menu.
Reset
Returns the selected context menu to the default settings.
Reset
Piping Input menu: View > Reset
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Resets the view to the default settings.
Toggle Graphics Update

Piping Input menu: View > Toggle Graphics Update
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Lock Graphics

Turns graphics updating on or off.
Front View
Piping Input menu: View > Front View
Standard Views toolbar: Front
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Piping Input menu: View > Back View
Standard Views toolbar: Back
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.

Top View
Piping Input menu: View > Top View
Standard Views toolbar: Top
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View
Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Left
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Right
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
Southeast ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Southeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southeast Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Southwest ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Southwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southwest Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.

Northeast ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Northeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northeast Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Northwest ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Northwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northwest Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
4 View
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View
Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by moving
the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Review Error Report

Piping Input menu: View > Review Error Report
Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check (on page 244).
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Review Static Results

Piping Input menu: View > Review Static Results
Standard Views toolbar: Review Static Results
Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run the Edit
> Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load Cases.

Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.
Reset Toolbar Layout

Piping Input menu: Tools > Reset Toolbar Layout
Sets toolbars to the default layout.
Mini-windows
Piping Input menu: Tools > Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to provide
specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions

dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog

box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box.
Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Import/Export Displacements from File

Piping Input menu: Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File
Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
CAESAR II Versions 5.10 and later enables you to import and export displacements to and from a
text file. This feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several displacements in
a CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a CAESAR II model with a few mouse
clicks instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic Piping Input. A
displacements file in the specified format must exist.
This feature works only on From and To nodes using a fixed file (.disp) format for
versions 5.10 and 5.20.

In CAESAR II Version 2018 (10.0), this feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes, and
Bend middle nodes in either the fixed file format (.disp), or the comma separated value (.csv)
format. You can easily generate and maintain a displacement file in .csv format using Microsoft
Excel™.
Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box

Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.
Export Displacements To a File
Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button to
browse to the file.
Export
Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File
Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button to
browse to the file.
Import
Imports the specified nodal displacement file.
Displacement File Formats

A displacement file is a flat text file in versions 5.10 and 5.20, which can be created and edited by
any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 2018 (10.0), a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or
comma separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type anything
on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.
Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate System
that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.

d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697 (1+58x12)
characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12-character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12-character blank field must be reserved for it.
Comma Separated Value Format

A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate System
that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the node (6
degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify all 54
values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f. Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model, respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement value,
you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a comma,
or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel™. The fixed format of a displacement file is more difficult
to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2018 (10.0) because the formats are different.

Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending node
in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations. The
reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a CAESAR II
Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same node
number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.

4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as a
replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.
Exporting Displacements to a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File box, or
click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a
displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
Importing Displacements from a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.
Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:
• Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
• Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking Displacement
Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.
3. Select the displacement file.

4. Click Open.
5. Click Import.
During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third and
fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 386).
Notepad Example (*.disp) format

Notepad Example (*.csv) format
Excel Example (*.csv) format

If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a
displacement template file as shown below.

Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays according to
the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
 A rendered view - restraints shown
 XYZ compass - isometric view
 Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.

The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available
option to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the
form of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete, the status message
changes to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among the
views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line
View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.

Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. Click
the down arrow to display node numbers for a specific element, such as for only restraints or
only anchors. Select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not the
node numbers.
Length - Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model
to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around them.
You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window. Remove
elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
You can turn off the display of node numbers (for restraints, hangers, and anchors) for
a clearer view. The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and hangers)
is relative to the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols clicking the
black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.

You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so on
by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on
page 400).
Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 400). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may disappear
or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual conversion depends
on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is complete, the model returns to
its original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model (on page 408).
Load CADWorx Model - Displays the model in CADWorx.
Building Models Quickly

CAESAR II has several features that help you build models more quickly from the 3D model.
 Select one or groups of elements and right-click the model to access context menus so you
can quickly perform some of your most common tasks. See Performing Single-Element
Operations (on page 396) and Performing Block Operations (on page 396) for more
information.
 Limit the items you display on the model to simplify the functions you need to use. See Limiting
the Display (on page 398) for more information.

 Use legends to update properties across the current model. See Updating Properties from the
3D Model (on page 399) for more information.
Performing Single-Element Operations

Access the most frequently used commands through a right-click Element context menu, all
without ever leaving your 3D model. These commands include:
 Insert, break, or delete elements
 Insert, delete, and edit restraints
 Look up valve and flange data from the Valve and Flange Database
 Insert or delete rigid elements (such as valves and flanges)
To quickly access single element commands from the 3D model
1. Select any element on the model and right-click the element to see the commands available
from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
2. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the piping
input.
Performing Block Operations

Perform block (global) operations to elements in the model using one of the following methods:
To access Block Operations commands from the 3D model

1. Access the Block Operations commands from one of the following options:
a. Click the Block Operations toolbar, or

b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block operations
available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context menu.
2. Select one of the following options:
 Rotate
 Duplicate
 Delete
 Renumber
 Invert
 Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
To access Block Operations commands from the Elements dialog box

1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.
2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.
 Rotate
 Delete
 Duplicate
 Nodes
 Invert
 Change Sequence
 Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
To define a block of elements in the 3D model

1. Click Select Element on the Standard Operators toolbar and select a single element on
the 3D model.
The selected element highlights.

To select more than one element, press the Shift key while clicking the additional
elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block can
contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements from the Elements dialog box

1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the row
number for that item on the far left of the dialog box.
The software highlights the row for the element highlights in the Element dialog box and in the
3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift and
click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can Select Group in the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements by selecting by Line Number

1. Display the Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Select the element or block of elements for which you want to perform a block operation.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may be
useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that
allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can
enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the
From node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with
that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software searches for an
element ending with that node number. When the software locates the element, it
highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the
location of the highlighted element within the model. For more information, see Find (on
page 249).

3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model.
This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 352).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of line
numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
 Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
 Remove an existing line number.
 Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
 Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
For more information, see Line Numbers (on page 302).
Updating Properties from the 3D Model

You can update many of the piping input properties globally from within the Legends dialog box in
the 3D model.
To update a piping input property from the 3D model
1. Select the property you want to update using the Legends toolbar in 3D model.
You can also update many of these properties by right-clicking, selecting Highlights from the
context menu, and then specifying the property that you want to edit.
The Legend dialog box opens with the selected property displayed.

2. Double-click on the property value in the left column to open the Edit box.
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the following
piping input properties:
 Materials
 Piping Codes
 Forces
 Uniform Loads
 Wind/Wave Data
 Displacements
 Pipe Density
Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions. When
you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.

These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the graphics
according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an XML
data file (jobname.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session, CAESAR
II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes the rotation
and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics operator.
Option Description
Colors Select any color item in the list, then click to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration.
Fonts Selecting any font item in the list, then click to display the standard Windows font
selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.

Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly, the
graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.
Option Description
Show Bounding Box Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box
surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Text
Restore Previous Determines whether the software remembers your last command
Operator (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified command.
Restore Previous Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed
View view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.
Default Projection Determines the initial projection style of the model.

Mode

Visibility Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe is activated.

Increasing this value makes it easier to see through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model
in rendered mode.
Markers Displays a symbol denoting the element’s end points.
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall thickness,
temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 399).
Command Description
Diameters Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.
Wall Thickness Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use
this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press W. A color
key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the
Insulation Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different

Thickness color. Use this option to see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the
model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Thickness Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color.
Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory
Refractory Thickness Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can

change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
Material Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
Piping Codes Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or to
verify that changes have been made.
Corrosion Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different

color. Use this option to see the corrosion variations throughout the
the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
Pipe Density Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or to
verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or to
verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Insulation Density Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.
Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Density Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.
Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.
Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.
 The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
 You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
 Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
 If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper left
corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.
Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.
 Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.
 Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.
To remove buttons from the toolbar, click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and
then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar. Clear
the check box to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the button to a
different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars (on page 365).
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and

Wind/Wave Loads
You can display applied or predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind and wave
loads in a table. You can scroll the display windows vertically and/or horizontally to view all node
points where data has been defined. To move through the defined displacement or force vectors 1
through 9, click Next >> and Previous <<. The color key assists you in locating the node points on
the model when the model geometry is complex.

The displacements window shows user-specified values as well as free or fixed degrees of
freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use
this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
 The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.

 You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
 Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
 If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper left
corner of the page. This is true even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from
the view.
 You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display forces/moment
vectors by pressing F5.
 Select Element displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the cursor
over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data.
Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on the dialog box.
Click in the empty space of the graphics view to unhighlight the element. The dialog box still
contains the information from the last element that you selected.
Saving an Image for Later Presentation

Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II Stress
reports. The graphics view can be saved as a graphic by clicking File > Save As Graphics
Image. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, Plot Settings legend, as well as restraints and

most of the other options are transferred to the graphic. The default graphic file name is the job
name with an extension .TIF. This is a standard Windows-supported image file extension that can
be opened for viewing. The image resolution can also be changed in the Save Image dialog box.
This is a static graphic file.
You also have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II
creates two files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF.
Opening the .HTML file displays the corresponding .HSF file.
This is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II-created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, you receive a
message asking you to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the
download, and the image displays. After the model displays, right-clicking the model shows the
available viewing options such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, and so on. The image
can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly.
Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
You can use the Markups toolbar functions to add additional lines or annotations to the image.
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful in
the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and saved
to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a leader
line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single line. The
annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use any of the
highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to
HTML.
 The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
 Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
 The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved with
the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom, rotate,
pan, or reset all.
 The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on
page 400).

 When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator. (For
example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Walking Through the Model

CAESAR II lets you explore the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality game.
It produces the effect of walking towards the model. After you are close to or inside the model, you
can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down. Walk Through
is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model.
Click Walk Through to display the cursor as a pair of feet.
Walking Around
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving the
mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
You can also pan the view by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the
mouse. This provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either side.
Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of providing
the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.
Moving Elements
The Move Geometry commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis. Select the node or element, and then press Tab or click
to select the x-, y-, or z-axis option (located next to the Move Geometry option in the toolbar). The
software defaults to the X-Axis.
For example, to move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry
and specify the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop,
select Move Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified
axis.
After you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)

To move elements on the 3D model

1. Click Move Geometry to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points. On
bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.

S3D/SPR Model View
CAESAR II provides functionality to load Smart 3D (S3D) or SmartPlant Review (SPR) reference
models either partially or in full. You can then rotate and/or filter the loaded S3D/SPR graphic
models to adjust the visibility or isolate specific component classes. This functionality allows you
to interpret the design environment surrounding the piping system and use this knowledge to
readily identify optimal support point and expansion loop locations, judge available clearances,
and so forth. Generally, this functionality provides a more seamless means of communication
across all disciplines involved in the design process when Smart 3D is used as the overall design
platform.
Click S3D/SPR Model in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
 Load S3D/SPR Model
 Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
 Dim S3D/SPR Model
 S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Load an S3D/SPR Model

To Load a Full Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model from a VUE or HSF file
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .
The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and click
Open.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
3. Select Full Load.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Click Load File to display the graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.
You can return to the dialog box and select another angle from the Model
Rotation. The software displays the rotation immediately on the 3D graphics pane so that you
can review the rotation before you click Load File.
To Load a Partial Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model using the Bounding Box
The bounding box functionality allows you to specify which portion of the graphic model to import
into your CAESAR II model.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select Group option on the Standard
Operators toolbar. Then, click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box, and adjust as needed.

1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .

The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and click
Open.
3. Select Partial Load.
Select Re-Import if you need to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Select the Use Model Bounding-Box option.
Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection window

around them using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators toolbar. Then,
select Bounding Box from Selection in the Bounding Box Coordinates.
6. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then resize or pan the cube in all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the graphic model you want to load into a CAESAR II
model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has six markers:
 Anchor Marker - Indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red). You
cannot resize the model using this marker.
The three faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved via
any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.

 Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular to
top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
 Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of three
markers and dragging the mouse.
 Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.
 Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.
 Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.
 Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the whole
bounding box from one position to another.
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes, depending
on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics markers. The
Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational purposes only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of the
bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.
Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar of piping input, click S3D/SPR Model . The Load
S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.
You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also specify a
bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into CAESAR II.
Select a File
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.
Full Load
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Partial Load
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE
file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the
graphic model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

Re-Import
Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.
Model Orientation
Specifies the north direction of the Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model. CAESAR II uses this
value in combination with the Set North Direction option in Special Execution Parameters (on
page 316) and Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page 322) to properly orient the imported
model. Select -X, +X, -Y, +Y, -Z, or +Z.
Use Model Bounding Box

Select to use the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model for the graphic model you are
loading.
Bounding Box from Selection

Select to define a bounding box for a selected part of the graphic model in which you are
loading.
Starting Point X
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
Starting Point Y
Starting Point Z
Bounding Volume - Width

Specifies the width of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Height

Specifies the height of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Depth

Specifies the depth of the bounding box volume.

Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Show 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
Dim S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Dim 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
S3D/SPR Visibility Options

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select S3D/SPR
Visibility Options from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the graphics
to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.
S3D/SPR Visibility Options Dialog Box

Allows you to hide details of the S3D/SPR graphic model that are not needed or could be
distracting while you are working with the model in CAESAR II. For example, if you import a Smart
3D model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF import functions and want to reference the
S3D/SPR graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the
S3D/SPR graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the display
of piping elements from the S3D/SPR Visibility Options, which enables you to compare the
changes more easily.
To Edit S3D/SPR Visibility Options for a loaded VUE file or HSF model:
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model drop-down list in the
piping input.
The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.

2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of components
in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the object.
For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check boxes to display the elements for a given category or select
the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.
5. Click the refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display the
revised visibility settings.

SECTION 5
Structural Steel Modeler
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Structural Input

Main window menu: Input > Structural Steel
Adds structural elements to a model. Using the modeler, you can perform the following functions:
 Open and view structural files.
 Enter command and parameter data to build structural models.
In This Section
Structural Steel Model Basics...................................................... 416
Structural Steel Graphics ............................................................ 421
CAESAR II Structural Input ......................................................... 423
Structural Steel Input Examples .................................................. 426
Insert Menu................................................................................. 451
Commands Menu........................................................................ 452
Structural Databases................................................................... 490
Structural Steel Model Basics

Start the Structural Steel Modeler from the CAESAR II main menu by opening a structural file, and
then choosing Input > Structural Steel. The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Input
dialog box.
Define the structural steel model

The Structural Steel Modeler features an interactive interface, the CAESAR II Structural Input
dialog box, where you use keywords to define parameters. If you are not familiar with the keyword
input, refer to Structural Steel Input Examples (on page 426), and use F1 to launch help.
The following example shows a structural steel model with two sections and multiple elements
defined.
FIX 5 ALL - Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom.
SECID=1,W10X49 - Defines properties for section #1 (a 20-inch wide flange of 49 pounds per
foot).

EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0 - Defines a vertical element from 5 to 10.
Because many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms,
options, and deviations for these commands to help you generate large structural models. The
method of single element generation is well suited to the needs of most pipers.
Create new lines by selecting a keyword command from the Edit menu or from the toolbar. The
most typically used commands are as follows:
EDim (on page 464)
Defines structural elements.
Fix (on page 455)
Defines structural anchors (ALL) or restraints.
Load (on page 470)
Defines concentrated forces.
Unif (on page 467)
Defines uniform loads.
Secid (on page 475)
Defines cross-section properties.
From the Edit menu, you can complete other frequently used functions, including:
Edit > Undo
Reverse the last action.
Edit > Copy Card
Copies an existing command. You must first select the command to copy.
Edit > Paste Card
Pastes a command in the model at the location specified from the Insert menu.

Edit > Delete Card

Deletes an existing command. You must first select the command to delete.
Certain commands set parameters that the software uses for all future element generations:
Default (on page 487)
Sets the default Section ID and Material ID.
Angle (on page 465)
Sets the default element orientation.
Beams (on page 479), Braces (on page 482), and Columns (on page 484)
Sets the default end connection type.
Before you start working with structural models in CAESAR II, you must specify the database for
upon which the software bases the model.
Select the database for a structural steel model

The full AISC database with more than 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a
“per-member-name” basis. Additionally, you can define any arbitrary cross-sectional shapes.
1. Open the CAESAR II Configuration Editor to select the proper database before starting the
construction of a structural model.
2. Click Database Definitions in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor, and then click
Structural Database. Refer to Structural Databases (on page 490) for information on the
structural databases available in the software.
Click Save to save the configuration settings.

AISC database names should be typed exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the exception
that fractions should be represented as decimals to four decimal places. Input is case-sensitive.
For example, the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered L6X3.5X0.5000.
Member-end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural
analysis that has no real parallel in piping work. Several of the structural examples contain
free-end connection specifications (such as Column, Beam, and Brace), so you should study
these examples for details.
Structural models may be run alone (singularly), or may be included in piping jobs.
Run the structural model without piping (singularly)

1. Open the structural file.
2. Click Input > Structural Steel.
3. Enter the structural steel model.
4. Click File > Save to exit the model.
5. Click Yes.
The software saves, error checks, and builds the CAESAR II modules automatically, and then
opens the Model Generation Status dialog box.
6. Click OK, and close the CAESAR II Structural Steel dialog box to return to the main menu.
7. Click Analysis > Statics to start CAESAR II at the analysis level.
8. Select the load cases you want to analyze.
CAESAR II recommends the weight only (W) load case. If needed, create additional load
cases to address other input loads or concentrated forces.
9. Click Run Analysis to begin the analysis, and then click OK.
When the analysis finishes, the software opens the Static Output Processor. You can also
click Static Output to view or print output reports.
10. Close the Static Output Processor.
If needed, click Analysis > AISC to open and independently run a Unity Check (stress
evaluation) for the most heavily loaded elements, as defined by the American Institute of Steel
Construction (AISC). Displacements, forces, and moments are available for each structural
element.
Include the structural model in a piping job

Use caution when establishing steel node numbers. Common nodes with piping
have the steel anchored to the corresponding pipe node. Usually, piping is connected to steel
through restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes).
1. Complete steps 1 through 6 from the previous section for running a structural model without
piping.
2. Click File>Open and select to open a piping input file.
3. Edit the piping file to meet your requirements.
4. Click Environment > Include Structural Input Files from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box.

The Include Structural Files dialog box displays.

5. Click Browse to select the structural files to include in the piping job, and then click Open.
You can browse and select up to 10 structural input files.
6. Click OK.
The selected structural models display on the piping input model.
7. Click Batch Run to begin error checking the model. After you resolve and eliminate any
warnings and errors, you can run the entire model successfully.
The software includes the structural elements in the model for the flexibility calculations.
These elements appear as any other piping element, except that CAESAR II does not
calculate stresses for structural elements.
You can use stand-alone AISC Code Check software to verify that forces and
moments on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowable stress limits as
defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction.

Structural Steel Graphics

The graphical view of the model in the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box lets you verify the
model geometry for completeness and accuracy. As you enter and update the element data on the
interactive Card Stack pane on the left, the graphical view on the right instantly displays any
changes.
The Structural Steel Modeler 3D graphics engine shares the same general capabilities as the
graphics model in the Classic Piping Input. The software displays many of the same toolbars as
in the piping input, which let you zoom, orbit, pan, and perform several other actions on the model.
You also have the ability to switch between orthographic and perspective views as well as
alternate between volume to a single line mode.
From the model, you can show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node
numbers, and element lengths. In addition, you can change the size of restraints relative to the
structural elements.
The graphics view displays in the right pane when you define enough information in the
Card Stack pane. For example, if you specify the method as Method 2 - Node/Element
Specifications in the Structural Steel Wizard, and you have only specified the Nodes in the list
of commands, the software does not display anything in the graphical view because there is not
yet a model to show. However, after you define a single element (Elem) between two points in
space, the software displays the corresponding element in the graphical view. When using
Method 1 - Element Definitions (EDIM), which is similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II
Classic Piping Input, the corresponding graphic element displays after you specify the EDim
command parameters.
You can resize or disable the Card Stack pane to allow the graphical view to fill the entire screen.
Additionally, you can dock the Card Stack pane on or off of the main window. After you dock the

pane, you can remove it completely from the view or close it. To show or hide the Card Stack
pane, click .
The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has a Change Display Option that lets you change
the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information, see Configuring 3D
Graphics (on page 400).
Loads, such as uniform or wind, are not available in graphics mode in the Structural
Steel Modeler.
You can also flip the coordinate system automatically between displaying the Y-axis up (or Y-up)
to the Z-axis up (or Z-up) in the Structural Steel Modeler. The software modifies all relevant data
match with the new coordinate system. Click Vertical to insert the VERTICAL command into
the command list, and then select Y or Z-from the axis parameter options.
CAESAR II Structural Input

Click Structural Input on the CAESAR II main menu to enter information to build your
structural model. The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has two sections. The Card Stack
pane displays model parameters and commands on the left, and the graphical view of the model
displays on the right.
The Card Stack pane is sub-divided into two columns. The first column displays commands and
parameters. Click the arrow to the left of any command to view the parameter data in the second
column of the pane.
To add a command to the model, select the command from either the Commands menu or the
Commands toolbar. For more information, see Commands Menu (on page 452).
Click + to expand command and view the parameters available. Type or select the values in the
second column. Add all the commands to the structural model, and then click Save to
generate the structural model.
Card Stack, List Options, and Errors tabs at the bottom of the Card Stack pane display mode,
keyword and error information for the model. Click Auto Hide to collapse the tabs to the left
side of the window and expand the graphical view. Click Close X to hide the tabs.
The Errors tab does not display when there are no errors in the model.

Use the Input Card Toolbar functions to copy, paste, or delete commands from the structural
model.
Create a model using the Structural Steel Wizard

Define job parameters for a new model using the Structural Steel Wizard.
Create a new job file

1. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box appears.
2. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type the name of the structural steel file you
want to create.
You must give files a different name than any piping files, even if you plan to
combine the files for analysis.
3. Select Structural Input.
4. In the Enter the data directory box, type the directory name or browse for a directory.
5. Click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Select a units file

Use the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to view the units file the software
uses with your new model. For more information, see Unit (on page 489).
The software automatically selects the units based on the units you specified in the
CAESAR II Configuration Editor.
Select Accept defaults and finish to use all structural options previously selected in Tools >
Configure/Setup.
1. Click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Select a vertical axis

Use the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify which is the
vertical axis for your model.
1. In the Select which axis is vertical for this box, select Y or Z.
2. Click Next.
The software displays the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.

Select material properties

Use the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify material properties for
the structural steel models.
1. Type values for Density, Yield Strength, Young's (Young's Modulus), Poisson's Ratio, and
Shear Modulus.
2. Optionally, type one or more thermal expansion coefficient values for Expansion
Coefficients.
You can have up to nine Expansion Coefficient values and use a separate Material
ID for each coefficient.
3. Click Add Another Material if you need to define additional material properties.
The software automatically increases the value of the Material ID by one.
4. Click Next.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Material to scroll through all
materials.
Define a cross-section
Use the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify the
cross-sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
The software defaults the Section ID to 1, but you can type a new ID.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the NAME box. For more information, see
Structural Databases (on page 490) for cross section names in the CAESAR II databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom cross section. Type values for Area, Ixx
(moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis), J
(torsion) (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
4. Click Add Another Section if you need to define additional cross-sections.
The value for the Section ID increases by one.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Section to scroll through all
sections.
5. Click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard.

Select the model definition method

Use the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to select the
method you need to build your model.
1. Review the method options and select Method 1 - Element Definitions or Method 2 - Node
/ Element Specifications.
2. Click Finish.
The Structural Steel Wizard closes and the new job file opens in the Structural Steel
Modeler window.
For more information on actions you can perform from the wizard, see Insert Menu (on page 451)
and Commands Menu (on page 452).
Structural Steel Input Examples

This section contains structural steel examples. Follow the input steps in these examples to learn
how to use the Structural Steel Modeler.
Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated rigid
support piping loads from the piping analysis to back-calculate each stiffness.

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe
stress program are:
Fx= -39.0 lbs.
Fy= -1975.0 lbs.
Fz= 1350.0 lbs.
Complete the initial specifications for Example #1

1. Click File > New from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Enter a job name (for example, SUPP), click the Structural Input option, and browse to select
the data directory. Then, click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page.

3. Specify the units to use with this job, then click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
4. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the Y-axis, and then click Next. Selecting the Y-axis
means that the gravity works in the Y--axis direction on this model.
Be sure this coordinate system matches the piping model.
The software displays the Material Selection page.

5. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.
6. Specify the cross section by typing in the name exactly as it appears (including exact
capitalization and trailing zeros) or by clicking Select Section ID and selecting the name from
the list.
For this example, enter the Section ID 1 name as W16X26.
7. Click Add Another Section to create other cross sections. Enter Section ID 2 as MC8X22.8
and Section ID 3 as L6X4X0.5000. Repeat this until you have three sections specified in this
example, then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
8. Select Method 1 - Element Definitions Method Selection (the default setting) to use the
Element Dimension (EDim) option to define individual elements that span between two node
points. Then, click Finish. This input works similarly to piping input, where elements are
defined by their end points and delta X, Y, Z distances between those end points.
The Method 2 - Node/Element Specifications option uses commands to define an array of
nodes in space and commands to add elements bounded by these nodes.

The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense the
information.
Specify the structural steel model input for Example #1

1. Click on the Commands toolbar to enter commands and parameters that define the model
input.

2. Click EDim to add the first element to the end of the list, then click the arrow to the left to
expand the data for that group, and enter the column data.
Notice that the first element is at node 5 to node 10 and runs 12 feet in the Y direction and has
a section number of 1 (the default section).
Press TAB to move quickly from one Card Stack box to the next.

3. When you complete the first element, click EDim and repeat the entry process to add the
next four elements.
Use the Input Card Toolbar functions to copy, paste, or delete a card from the
Structural Modeler. Alternatively, you can copy or delete a card element by selecting Edit >
Copy Card or Edit > Delete Card.

After you complete the element entry, the software displays the current model.
Select Reset View to return the model to a default view each time the model
refreshes. When activated, this function appears highlighted. You can use Reset View to
zoom in and out on the model to make changes, and then quickly return to your default view.

4. Click Fix to add the restraint at the base of the column.
5. Click Loads to enter the loads on this support. You can use a previous CAESAR II
analysis for these loads.
6. Enter the loads at Node 20 [(FX, FY, FZ) = (-39, -1975, 1350)].

The software displays the completed model.
7. Add comments to the model by first setting where CAESAR II inserts comments from the
Insert menu option. You can specify for comments to appear before or after the currently
selected element, or at the end of the model elements list. Click Comment to add
comments to the model.

After you insert a comment, you must click the down arrow to expand the comment
element and add the comment text. The following example shows the completed model with
new comments inserted.
8. Click File > Save to check and save the model. Then, click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model by itself.
9. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
10. With the SUPP file still open as the current model, click Analysis > Statics on the toolbar.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied
loads).
11. Click Run the Analysis.
CAESAR II performs the structural steel analysis, just as a piping analysis.

The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.
These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39 lb. / 10.125 in. = 3.85 lb./in
Ky = 1975 lb. / 0.4228 in. = 4671 lb./in.
Kz = 1350 lb. / 0.8444 in. = 1599 lb./in.

Design a support to limit the loads on the waste heat boiler’s flue gas nozzle connection. The
maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are as follows:
Faxial = 1500 lb.
Fshear = 500 lb.
Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.
Mbending = 5000 ft. lb.
In this example, create the structural steel input file, SUPP2.str, from a text file. The structural
steel preprocessor converts this file to the CAESAR II model.

Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:


Create the structural input file using a text editor

1. Using a text editor, enter the following input parameters for the model:
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
;DEFINE SECTIONS
SECID 1 W24X104
SECID 2 W18X50
;DEFINE MATERIALS
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
;COLUMN STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=90
;VERTICAL COLUMNS
EDIM 230 235 DY=10-
EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10
EDIM 200 205 DY=10-
EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10
;SLOPED COLUMNS
EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10-
EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10-
EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION
DEFAULT SECID=2;
EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5-
EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-

;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS

;ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A
;STANDARD STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=0
EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608-
EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608-
;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES
FIX 200 TO=260 BY=30 ALL
FIX 245 ALL
After the data is processed, this file does not display the line breaks in Microsoft's
Notepad text editor, but the data remains valid. Use a more robust editor to display the
individual lines.
2. Name and save the file as SUPP2.str.
Import the structural input file into the Structural Steel Modeler
1. Click File > Open from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Structural (*.str) and navigate to the file you created, SUPP2.str.
Then, click Open.
3. Click Input > Structural Steel from the CAESAR II main menu.
The software opens the structural model for SUPP2.str.
4. After you have confirmed that the model is correct, click File > Save, and click Yes to save the
model.

5. Select all the check boxes in the Model Generation Status dialog box, and click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model with a
piping model.
6. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
Input piping data for Example #2

Next, enter the input for the piping system to be analyzed in a new piping job.
2. Change File of type to Piping Input (*.c2) , enter the file name as PIPE2 (for the purposes
of this example).
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software opens the Review Current Units dialog box.
4. Verify the current units are English, then click OK.
The software opens the piping input for PIPE2.c2.
5. Click the Classic Piping Input tab on the left of the graphical display.
Enter the piping input data using the Input Echo report data shown below. For more information on
how to quickly enter piping input data, see Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using
the Function Keys (on page 113).
PIPE DATA
From 5 to 10 DX= 6.417 ft.
PIPE
Dia = 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
GENERAL
T1= 850 F Mat= (186)A335 P5
Insul Thk= .000 in.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
RESTRAINTS
Node 5 ANC
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
B31.3 (2008)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 10 to 15 DY= -8.000 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 15 to 20 DY= -13.833 ft
----------------------------------------------------------
From 20 to 25 DY= -8.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
----------------------------------------------------------
From 25 to 30 DX= 10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS

Node 30 +Y
----------------------------------------------------------
From 30 To 35 DX= 30.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 35 +Y
----------------------------------------------------------
From 35 To 40 DX= 10.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
----------------------------------------------------------
From 40 To 45 DZ= -3.750 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 45 To 50 DZ= -4.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
REDUCER
Diam2= 36.000 in. Wall2= .375 in.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 50 To 55 DZ= -20.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 36.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 55 To 60 DZ= -20.000 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 60 To 65 DZ= -10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 65 ANC
----------------------------------------------------------
From 15 To 115 DX= -2.500 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 115 X Cnode 215
Node 115 Z Cnode 215
----------------------------------------------------------
From 20 To 120 DX= -2.500 ft.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 120 X Cnode 240
In this piping input example, there are two weightless, rigid elements at nodes 15 to 115 and 20 to
120 that run out from the pipe centerline to the connecting points of the structure.

The two restraint sets at the end of the data—115 and 120—are pipe nodes and their
CNodes—215 and 240—are structural steel nodes in SUPP2.
Connect the pipe to the structure

1. From the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click Environment > Include Structural Input
Files.
The software opens the Include Structural Files dialog box.
2. Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (in this example, SUPP2).
You can type the name and click Add, or click Browse to search for the file (which
has the .str or the compressed .c2s extension), select the file, and click OK.
3. If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another, then one of the following
situations may have occurred:
a. The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.
b. The Connect Geometry Through CNodes option was not set to True in the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Connect Geometry Through CNodes
(on page 75) in the Configuration Options.

Refer to the Pipe2 plotted pipe and structure shown below:
4. After the software plots the pipe and structure relative to one another, exit the Basic
Operation - Generate piping input (on page 31) dialog box and run the error check.
The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution
files that the software writes also include the structural data.
5. Run the analysis using the default load cases.
The following shows the restraint report for Load Case 1, W+T1 (OPE):

The loads on the anchor at 5 are excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support structure
as shown are not satisfactory.
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe. The
pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler
nozzle.
The pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the
structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements result in higher
loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied more
closely.
You could add vertical springs at 30 and 35, which might help, along with a repositioning of the
structural supports vertically. For example, the support at node 120 should be moved down so that
its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe between
nodes 25 and 40.


Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. In general, the stiffness of a
three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be
represented by a 6×6 stiffness matrix. Initially, you can estimate only the on-diagonal, translational
stiffnesses.
Specify the structural input data for Structural Steel Example #3

2. Select Structural Input as the file type, and enter the file name as SUPP3 (for the purposes
of this example).
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page.
4. Click Next to accept ENGLISH,FIL, the default value for current units.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
5. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the y-axis, and then click Next.
The software displays the Material Selection page.
6. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.

7. Specify the two cross sections, Section ID 1 as W12X65 and Section ID 2 as W10X22, and
then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
Select Method 1 - Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the element dimension
(Edim) method of input. Then, click Finish.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box, where you can interactively
input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense the information.
8. Use the interactive input processor to input the following commands.
You can also import these commands by inputting them in a text editor and then
importing the .str file into the model. For more information, see Structural Steel Example #2
(on page 436).
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
VERTICAL=Y
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
SECID 1 W12X65
SECID 2 W10X22
; Preceding entries completed by opening dialog
; Columns have strong axis in Z (Default is X)
ANGLE=90
; Generate all columns
EDIM FROM=5 TO=10 BY=5 LAST=20 DY=12-
EDIM 25 30 BY=5 LAST=40 DY=12-
; Beam orientation is standard
ANGLE=0
; Set the default Section ID to 2
DEF SECID=2
; Beams are pinned, both ends are free to rotate
BEAM FIX
; Define most beams
EDIM 10 30 5 LAST=35 DZ=-14-
EDIM 30 50 5 LAST=60 DX=-10-
EDIM 50 70 5 LAST=80 DZ=14-
EDIM 70 10 5 LAST=20 DX=10-
; Node 1000 will be fixed in rotation
BEAM FIX FAXIAL FSHRSTR FSHRWEAK TAXIAL TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK TTORS
; Add midpoint 1000 on top beam
EDIM 20 1000 DZ=-7-
EDIM 40 1000 DZ=7-
; Define anchors at the bottom of each column
FIX 5 65 BY=20 ALL
; Set representative loads
LOAD 1000 FX=0000 FY=10000 FZ=10000

9. After you enter all of the model data, the SUPP3 structural model appears as follows:
10. When you are satisfied that the model has been entered properly, click File > Save to check
and save the model.
CAESAR II checks the input. If no fatal errors are found, the software writes the CAESAR II
Execution files. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. For the
purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.
11. Click OK, and then close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler Input dialog box.
12. Return to the CAESAR II Main menu.
Analyze the structural model for Structural Steel Example #3

The structural input processor generates a number of lists you can use for documentation and
checking.
1. With the SUPP3 job still open in the CAESAR II Main menu, click Analysis > Statics.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
2. Replace the Weight (W) load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied loads).
You can type FI directly in the Load Cases box.

From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from a
structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
3. Click Run the Analysis , and then click OK.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
4. Select the F1 load case in the Load Cases Analyzed box and Displacements and Global
Element Forces in the Standard Reports.
5. Click Add and then Finish to generate the reports.
The Displacements and Global Element Forces reports for the F1 load case displays as
follows.


Notice that the structure is stiffer in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater, due to
the orientation of the columns. The Global Element Forces (which displays forces and moments)
report is particularly interesting because all of the beams have pinned ends. Most of the beams
carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to rotations
at the column ends, and not translations.
By adding cross-braces you can eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of
the load. The 1000 end node of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment
because it is not a pinned end connection. The 1000 end node is just a point at midspan for the
application of the load.
Kx = 10,000 lb. / 7.0909 in. = 1410 lb./in
Ky = 10,000 lb. / 0.2828 in. = 35360 lb./in.
Kz = 10,000 lb. / 25.7434 in. = 388 lb./in.

Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the Card
Stock pane.
Before Current Element

Places a new card above the selected card in the Card Stack.
After the Current Element

Places a new card below the selected command in the Card Stack.
At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).
Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.
Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Define the coordinates

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NODE command in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 451).
3. Click Node .
The NODE card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NODE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NODE properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

node number
Specifies the node number.
x, y, z
Specifies the global coordinates of the node.
NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and places
the following card in the Card Stack:
Add a node between defined end points

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NFILL card in the needed
3. Click Nfill .
The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NFILL properties.
6. Click Save if you are finished.
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.

NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other nodes
not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.
Duplicate node
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
3. Click NGen .
The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NGEN properties.
from
Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
to
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
inc
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the from
node and the to node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

last
Specifies the last node in the last nodal pattern to be generated. If you do not enter a value, single
pattern duplication occurs.
nodeInc
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in the
first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
Example
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern is
offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.
Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define restraint boundary conditions

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FIX card in the needed position.
For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 451).
3. Click Fix .
The FIX card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the FIX card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FIX properties.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically begins to check the model for errors.
If needed you can enter the stiffness in the field following the fixity indicator. If you omit the
stiffness value, the fixity is considered to be rigid.
from
Specifies the first node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
to
Specifies the last node number in the range.
by
all
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.
all stiffness
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).
x
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.

x stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.
y
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.
y stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.
z
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.
z stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.
rx
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.
rx stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.
ry
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.
ry stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.
rz
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.
rz stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.

Example
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000
lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.
Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.
Define an element between two elements

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ELEM card in the needed
3. Click ELEM .
The ELEM command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the ELEM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ELEM properties.
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.

secId
Specifies the Section ID for the element.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the element.
EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:
You can use the EFill command at any time. None of the elements generated need to
exist prior to adding the EFill command.
Add consecutive elements

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EFILL card in the needed
3. Click EFill .
The EFILL card is added to the card stack.
4. Click to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EFILL properties.
6. Click Save to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.
The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors
from
Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.
to
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
insecid
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID for
the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the
Example
Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node 1100
in place of node 1200 in the from field.

EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
Existing elements in the base pattern are redefined during generation.
Duplicate elements
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
3. Click EGen .
The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EGEN properties.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.
inc
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern to
the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.
genInc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern to the
from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.
genIncTo
Specifies the increment to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to the to
node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the value of
genInc is used.
genLast
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base pattern.
secId
Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 487).
matId
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 487).
inSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID. If
you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.

Example
Building on the Example (on page 460). The base element pattern from 1100 to 2000 is
reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000. Each element has
nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the Next Element is
1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are created using the base
pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100 until node 4000 is
reached.

EDim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.
Define elements using element dimensions

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EDIM card in the needed
3. Click EDim .
The EDIM card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the EDIM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EDIM properties.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.
to
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
inc

incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in the
first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
secID
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
matID
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
incSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.
incmatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the Material
ID of the second element.
Example
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.
2. EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.
Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and places
the following card in in the Card Stack pane:

Define the element strong axis

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ANGLE card in the needed
3. Click Angle .
The ANGLE card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the ANGLE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ANGLE properties.
Define structural columns when the strong axis is not parallel to the global X-axis
Use Angle with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset the
default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.
Define the angle of rotation

Orient and Angle both define the angle of rotation in degrees about the element center
line from the standard orientation to the element strong axis. Use Orient to define this angle
for a single element or for a group of elements, and Angle to define the default orientation to
its original value, such as, ANGLE=0.0.
The default orientation angle is 0º.
Find the positive angular rotation

Use the right-hand rule to find positive angular rotation. Extend the thumb along the element in the
direction of the to node. The fingers of the right hand circle in the direction of a positive orientation
angle.
Determine the default element orientation

 If the member is vertical, then the default strong axis is along the global-X axis.
 If the member is non-vertical then the default strong axis is perpendicular to the center line of
the member and in the horizontal plane of the member.
The strong axis for the WF shape is:

angle
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent defined
elements.
Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of the
member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values
for inc, incTo, and last.
Define a uniform load

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the UNIF command in the needed
3. Click Unif .
The UNIF card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the UNIF card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the UNIF properties.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.

inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.
ux, uy, uz
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in a
piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member. When
used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational acceleration,
for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight load.
Examples
1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3 lbs.
per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like you
have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of -2.3
pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.
Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the

Define the element strong axis orientation

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ORIENT card in the needed
position in the Card Stack. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 451).
3. Click Orient .
The ORIENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the ORIENT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ORIENT properties.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.
angle
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.
Examples
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90º away from the
default position.

2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90º away from the default position. Their new
strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited to take
X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their strong
axes 90º away from the default position.
Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at structural
member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Define concentrated forces and moments

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the LOAD card in the needed
3. Click Load .
The LOAD command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the LOAD card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the LOAD properties.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.

by
fx, fy, fz
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
mx, my, mz
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Examples
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting at
each of the nodes 10, 11,...,17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15th through
the 25th nodes in the Node list.
Wind
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the structural
elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:
Define wind shape factor

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the WIND card in the needed
3. Click Wind .
The Wind card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the WIND card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the WIND properties.


from
Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.
shape
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members, this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.
Examples
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of 2.0
applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.

GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
 You cannot use this command with any other parameters.

 If structural and piping models are mixed, the GLOADS cards must match. For example,
uniform loads in the piping model must be designed as G loads in the special execution
parameters.
Specify GLoads
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information, see
Material Properties (on page 235).

Add material properties

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the MATID card in the needed
3. Click MatId .
The MATID card is added to the Card Stack.
You can use one Matid for a group of elements that has many Section IDs
(Secid).
4. Click to expand the Matid card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the Matid properties.
Use Matid 1 for default A-36 structural steel properties.
matId
Specifies a Material ID number. The default value is 1 (for A-36 steel), and numbered sequentially
for additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.
ym
Specifies a value for Young’s Modulus of Elasticity. The default value is 30,000,000 (30x106) psi
for A-36 structural steel.
pois
Specifies a value for Poisson’s Ratio. The default value is 0.3 for A-36 structural steel.
g
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.
ys
Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36 structural
steel. This property is currently not used.
dens
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.

Alpha [x]
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.
SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Add cross-section properties

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the SECID card in the needed
3. Click SecId .
The SECID card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the SECID card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the SECID properties.
section Id
Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.
name
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with
the exceptions:
 Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5
 Omit all leading or trailing zeros.

You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.
User-Defined
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.
area
2
Specifies the cross-section area (in length units).
lxx
4
Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length units).
lyy
4
Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length units).
torsion
Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length4 units).
boxH
Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
boxW
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.

Free End Connections - FREE

Free or Commands > Free defines the free element end connection types and places the
For example, use Free to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
 You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns to set the free end connection
defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page 479),
Braces (on page 482), and Columns (on page 484).
 After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a card to
the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.
Define Free End connection types

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FREE card in the needed
3. Click Free .
The Free command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the FREE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FREE properties.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You can
omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.
Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at the element end that is free.
Any combination can be used.
At the from node

FAXIAL Axial translational DOF
FSHRSTR Strong axis shear translational DOF
FSHRWEAK Weak axis shear translational DOF
FTORS Torsional DOF
FBNDSTR Strong axis bending DOF
FBNDWEAK Weak axis bending DOF
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
TSHRSTR Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK Weak axis shear translational DOF
TTORS Torsional DOF
TBNDSTR Strong axis bending DOF
TBNDWEAK Weak axis bending DOF
Examples
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes: 610-710,
620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end is pinned.
The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak
Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z axis.
After you use Beams to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Braces (on page 482), and Columns (on page 484).

Add beam element connections

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BEAMS card in the needed
3. Click Beams .
The BEAMS card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the BEAMS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BEAMS properties.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.
mode
Defines the beams end connection type:
 Free - Releases end connections.
 Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.
At the from node

FTORS Torsional DOF
At the to node

TTORS Torsional DOF
Examples
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE
 ftors
 fbndstr
 fbndweak
 tbndstr
 tbndweak
2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX
 ftors
 fbndstr
 fbndweak
 tbndstr
 tbndweak

Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 479) and Columns (on page 484).
Add Braces
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
3. Click Braces .
The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BRACES properties.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

mode
Defines the braces end connection type:
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

At the from node

FTORS Torsional DOF
At the to node
TTORS Torsional DOF

Examples
1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE
 ftors
 fbndstr
 fbndweak
 tbndstr
 tbndweak
2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card for
this group has the following format:
Braces FIX
 ftors
 fbndstr
 fbndweak
 tbndstr
 tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are
fixed.
Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:

A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns to
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.
to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 479) and Braces (on page 482).
Add columns
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.
mode
Defines the columns end connection type:
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.

At the from node

FTORS Torsional DOF

At the to node
TTORS Torsional DOF
Examples
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command. The
COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE
 ftors
 fbndstr
 fbndweak
 tbndstr
 tbndweak
2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS card
for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX
 ftors
 fbndstr
 fbndweak
 tbndstr
 tbndweak
If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for
the column are fixed.
As a general rule, an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally, beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.

Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.
Set the default Section ID or Material ID

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the DEFAULT card in the needed
3. Click Default .
The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.
Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:
Add a comment
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the needed
3. Click Comment .
The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COMMENT card.
5. Type the information to add.

Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
 The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave loads),
the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output
Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information, see
Select a Vertical Axis (on page 424).
 Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command does
not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.
 When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.
Specify the axis orientation

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane and use the needed command from the
Insert menu to place the VERTICAL card in the needed position. For more information, see
the Insert Menu (on page 451).
2. Click Vertical .
The Vertical command is added to the Card Stack.
3. Select Y or Z as the vertical axis.
Find the axis orientation of a new model

In the main CAESAR II window, click Tools > Configure/Setup to determine the axis orientation
of a new structural model based on the selected setting.
Find the axis orientation of an existing model

Open an existing model and check the last saved axis orientation to visually determine the axis
orientation.

Unit
Unit displays the units file you specified in the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot change the units from the Card Stack pane. The structural file uses the units file
specified in the wizard as the unit of measure.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 424).
List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.
View reports
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.

Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each cross- section.
For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
 Area
 Strong axis moment of inertia
 Weak axis moment of inertia
 Torsional resistivity constant
 Member section height
 Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II
 AISC 1977
 AISC 1989
 German 1991
 Australian 1990
 South African 1992
 Korean 1990
 UK 1993
AISC 1977 Database
AISC 1977 - W Shapes
W36X300 W36X280 W36X260 W36X245 W36X230 W36X210
W36X194 W36X182 W36X170 W36X160 W36X150 W36X135
W33X241 W33X221 W33X201 W33X152 W33X141 W33X130
W33X118 W30X211 W30X191 W30X173 W30X132 W30X124
W30X116 W30X108 W30X99 W27X178 W27X161 W27X146
W27X114 W27X102 W27X94 W27X84 W24X162 W24X146
W24X131 W24X117 W24X104 W24X94 W24X84 W24X76
W24X68 W24X62 W24X55 W21X147 W21X132 W21X122
W21X111 W21X101 W21X93 W21X83 W21X73 W21X68

AISC 1977 - W Shapes
W21X62 W21X57 W21X50 W21X44 W18X119 W18X106
W18X97 W18X86 W18X76 W18X71 W18X65 W18X60
W18X55 W18X50 W18X46 W18X40 W18X35 W16X100
W16X89 W16X77 W16X67 W16X57 W16X50 W16X45
W16X40 W16X36 W16X31 W16X26 W14X730 W14X665
W14X605 W14X550 W14X500 W14X455 W14X426 W14X398
W14X370 W14X342 W14X311 W14X283 W14X257 W14X233
W14X211 W14X193 W14X176 W14X159 W14X145 W14X132
W14X120 W14X109 W14X99 W14X90 W14X82 W14X74
W14X68 W14X61 W14X53 W14X48 W14X43 W14X38
W14X34 W14X30 W14X26 W14X22 W12X336 W12X305
W12X279 W12X252 W12X230 W12X210 W12X190 W12X170
W12X152 W12X136 W12X120 W12X106 W12X96 W12X87
W12X79 W12X72 W12X65 W12X58 W12X53 W12X50
W12X45 W12X40 W12X35 W12X30 W12X26 W12X22
W12X19 W12X16 W12X14 W10X112 W10X100 W10X88
W10X77 W10X68 W10X60 W10X54 W10X49 W10X45
W10X39 W10X33 W10X30 W10X26 W10X22 W10X19
W10X17 W10X15 W10X12 W8X67 W8X58 W8X48
W8X40 W8X35 W8X31 W8X28 W8X24 W8X21
W8X18 W8X15 W8X13 W8X10 W6X25 W6X20
W6X16 W6X15 W6X12 W6X9 W5X19 W5X16
W4X13

AISC 1977 - M Shapes
M14X18 M12X11.8 M10X9 M8X6.5 M6X20 M6X4.4
M5X18.9 M4X13
AISC 1977 - S Shapes
S24X121 S24X106 S24X100 S24X90 S24X80 S20X96
S20X86 S20X75 S20X66 S18X70 S18X54.7 S15X50
S15X42. S12X50 S12X40.8 S12X35 S12X31.8 S10X35

9
S10X25. S8X23 S8X18.4 S7X20 S7X15.3 S6X17.2

4
S6X12.5 S5X14.7 S5X10 S4X9.5 S4X7.7 S3X7.5
S3X5.7
AISC 1977 - Channels
C15X50 C15X40 C15X33.9 C12X30 C12X25 C12X20.7
C10X30 C10X25 C10X20 C10X15.3 C9X20 C9X15
C9X13.4 C8X18.7 C8X13.7 C8X11.5 C7X14.7 C7X12.2
C7X9.8 C6X13 C6X10.5 C6X8.2 C5X9 C5X6.7
C4X7.25 C4X5.4 C3X6 C3X5 C3X4.1
AISC 1977 - Miscellaneous Channels
MC18X58 MC18X51.9 MC18X45.8 MC18X42.7 MC13X50
MC13X40 MC13X35 MC13X31.8 MC12X50 MC12X45
MC12X40 MC12X35 MC12X37 MC12X32.9 MC12X30.9
MC12X10.6 MC10X41.1 MC10X33.6 MC10X28.5 MC10X28.3

AISC 1977 - Miscellaneous Channels
MC9X25.4 MC9X23.9 MC8X22.8 MC8X21.4 MC8X20
MC6X18 MC6X15.3 MC6X16.3 MC6X15.1 MC6X12
AISC 1977 - WT Shapes
WT18X150
WT18x140 WT18x130 WT18x122.5 WT18X115 WT18X105
WT18X97 WT18X91 WT18x85 WT18x80 WT18x75
WT18X67.5 WT16.5X120.5 WT16.6X110.5 WT16.5x100.5 WT16.5x76
WT16.5x100.5 WT16.5x76 WT16.5X70.5 WT16.5X65 WT16.5X59
WT15X105.5 WT15x95.5 WT15x86.5 WT15x66 WT15x62
WT15X58 WT15X54 WT15X49.5 WT13.5X89 WT13.5X80.5
WT13.5x73 WT13.5x57 WT13.5x51 WT13.5X47 WT13.5X42
WT12X81 WT12X73 WT12x65.5 WT12x58.5 WT12x52
WT12X47 WT12X42 WT12X38 WT12X34 WT12X31
WT12x27.5 WT10.5x73.5 WT10.5x66 WT10.5x61 WT10.5X55.5
WT10.5x50.5 WT10.5x46.5 WT10.5x41.5 WT10.5x36.5 WT10.5X34
WT10.5x31 WT10.5x28.5 WT10.5x25 WT10.5x22 WT9X59.5
WT9x53 WT9x48.5 WT9x43 WT9x38 WT9X35.5
WT9x32.5 WT9x30 WT9x27.5 WT9x25 WT9X23
WT9x20 WT9x17.5 WT8x50 WT8x44.5 WT8X38.5
WT8x33.5 WT8x28.5 WT8x25 WT8x22.5 WT8X20

AISC 1977 - WT Shapes
WT7x302.5 WT7x275 WT7x250 WT7x227.5 WT7X213
WT7x199 WT7x185 WT7x171 WT7x155.5 WT7X141.5
WT7x128.5 WT7x116.5 WT7x105.5 WT7x96.5 WT7X88
WT7x79.5 WT7x72.5 WT7x66 WT7x60 WT7X54.5
WT7x49.5 WT7x45 WT7x41 WT7x37 WT7X34
WT7x30.5 WT7x26.5 WT7x24 WT7x21.5 WT7X19
WT7x17 WT7x15 WT7x13 WT7x11 WT6X168
WT6x152.5 WT6x139.5 WT6x126 WT6x115 WT6X105
WT6x95 WT6x85 WT6x76 WT6x68 WT6X60
WT6x53 WT6x48 WT6x43.5 WT6x39.5 WT6X36
WT6x32.5 WT6x29 WT6x26.5 WT6x25 WT6X22.5
WT6x20 WT6x17.5 WT6x15 WT6x13 WT6X11
WT6x9.5 WT6x8 WT6x7 WT5x56 WT5X50
WT5x24.5 WT5x22.5 WT5x19.5 WT5x16.5 WT5X15
WT5x13 WT5x11 WT5x9.5 WT5x8.5 WT5X7.5
WT4x17.5 WT4x15.5 WT4x14 WT4x12 WT4X10.5
WT4x9 WT4x7.5 WT4x6.5 WT4x5 WT4X12.5
WT2.5x9.5 WT2.5x8 WT2x6.5

AISC 1977 - MT and ST Shapes
MT7X9 MT6X5.9 MT5X4.5 MT4X3.25
MT3X10 MT3X2.2 MT2.5X9.45 MT2X6.5
ST12X60.5 ST12X53 ST12X50 ST12X45
ST12X40 ST10X48 ST10X43 ST10X37.5
ST10X33 ST9X35 ST9X27.35 ST7.5X25
ST7.5X21.45 ST6X25 ST6X20.4 ST6X17.5
ST6X15.9 ST5X17.5 ST5X12.7 ST4X11.5
ST4X9.2 ST3.5X10 ST3.5X7.65 ST3X8.625
ST3X6.25 ST2.5X7.375 ST2.5X5 ST2X4.75
ST2X3.85 ST1.5X3.75 ST1.5X2.85
AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Long Legs Back-to-Back
d8x8x1.1250 d8x8x1.0000 d8x8x0.8750
d8x8x0.7500 d8x8x0.6250 d8x8x0.5000
d6x6x1.0000 d6x6x0.8750 d6x6x0.7500
d6x6x0.6250 d6x6x0.5000 d6x6x0.3750
d5x5x0.8750 d5x5x0.7500 d5x5x0.5000
d5x5x0.3750 d5x5x0.3125 d4x4x0.7500
d4x4x0.6250 d4x4x0.5000 d4x4x0.3750
d4x4x0.3125 d4x4x0.2500 d3.5x3.5x0.3750
d3.5x3.5x0.3125 d3.5x3.5x0.2500 d3x3x0.5000
d3x3x0.3750 d3x3x0.3125 d3x3x0.2500
d3x3x0.1875 d2.5x2.5x0.3750 d2.5x2.5x0.3125
d2.5x2.5x0.2500 d2.5x2.5x0.1875 d2x2x0.3750

AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Long Legs Back-to-Back
d2x2x0.3125 d2x2x0.2500 d2x2x0.1875
d2x2x0.1250 d8x6x1.0000 d8x6x0.7500
d8x6x0.5000 d8x4x1.0000 d8x4x0.7500
d8x4x0.5000 d7x4x0.7500 d7x4x0.5000
d7x4x0.3750 d6x4x0.7500 d6x4x0.6250
d6x4x0.5000 d6x4x0.3750 d6x3.5x0.3750
d6x3.5x0.3125 d5x3.5x0.7500 d5x3.5x0.5000
d5x3.5x0.3750 d5x3.5x0.3125 d5x3x0.5000
d5x3x0.3750 d5x3x0.3125 d5x3x0.2500
d4x3.5x0.5000 d4x3.5x0.3750 d4x3.5x0.3125
d4x3.5x0.2500 d4x3x0.5000 d4x3x0.3750
d4x3x0.3125 d4x3x0.2500 d3.5x3x0.3750
d3.5x3x0.3125 d3.5x3x0.2500 d3.5x2.5x0.3750
d3.5x2.5x0.3125 d3.5x2.5x0.2500 d3x2.5x0.3750
d3x2.5x0.2500 d3x2.5x0.1875 d3x2x0.3750
d3x2x0.3125 d3x2x0.2500 d3x2x0.1875
d2.5x2x0.3750 d2.5x2x0.3750 d2.5x2x0.2500
d2.5x2x0.1875
AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Short Legs Back-to-Back
B8X6X1.0000 B8X6X0.7500
B8X6X0.2500 B8X4X1.0000 B8X4X0.7500
B8X4X0.5000 B7X4X0.7500 B7X4X0.5000
B7X4X0.3750 B6X4X0.7500 B6X4X0.6250

AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Short Legs Back-to-Back
B6X4X0.5000 B6X4X0.3750 B6X3.5X0.3750
B6X3.5X0.3125 B5X3.5X0.7500 B5X3.5X0.5000
B5X3.5X0.3750 B5X3.5X0.3125 B5X3X0.5000
B5X3X0.3750 B5X3XO.3125 B5X3X0.2500
B4X3.5X0.5000 B4X3.5X0.3750 B4X3.5X0.3125
B4X3.5X0.2500 B4X3X0.5000 B4X3X0.3750
B4X3X0.3125 B4X3X0.2500 B3.5X3X0.3750
B3.5X3X0.3125 B3.5X3X0.2500 B3.5X2.5X0.3750
B3.5X2.5X0.3125 B3.5X2.5X0.2500 B3X2.5X0.3750
B3X2.5X0.2500 B3X2.5X0.1875 B3X2X0.3750
B3X2X0.3125 B3X2X0.2500 B3X2X0.1875
B2.5X2X0.3750 B2.5X2X0.3125 B2.5X2X0.2500
B2.5X2X0.1875
AISC 1989 Database

W44X285 W44X248 W44X224 W44X198 W40X328 W40X298
W40X268 W40X244 W40X221 W40X192 W40X655 W40X593
W40X531 W40X480 W40X436 W40X397 W40X362 W40X324
W40X297 W40X277 W40X249 W40X215 W40X199 W40X183
W40X167 W40X149 W36X848 W36X798 W36X720 W36X650
W36X588 W36X527 W36X485 W36X439 W36X393 W36X359
W36X328 W36X300 W36X280 W36X260 W36X245 W36X230
W36X256 W36X232 W36X210 W36X194 W36X182 W36X170
W36X160 W36X150 W36X135 W33X619 W33X567 W33X515

W33X468 W33X424 W33X387 W33X354 W33X318 W33X291
W33X263 W33X241 W33X221 W33X201 W33X169 W33X152
W33X141 W33X130 W33X118 W30X581 W30X526 W30X477
W30X433 W30X391 W30X357 W30X326 W30X292 W30X261
W30X235 W30X211 W30X191 W30X173 W30X148 W30X132
W30X124 W30X116 W30X108 W30X99 W30X90 W27X539
W27X494 W27X448 W27X407 W27X368 W27X336 W27X307
W27X281 W27X258 W27X235 W27X217 W27X194 W27X178
W27X161 W27X146 W27X114 W27X102 W27X94 W27X84
W24X492 W24X450 W24X408 W24X370 W24X335 W24X306
W24X279 W24X250 W24X229 W24X207 W24X192 W24X176
W24X162 W24X146 W24X131 W24X117 W24X104 W24X103
W24X94 W24X84 W24X76 W24X68 W24X62 W24X55
W21X402 W21X364 W21X333 W21X300 W21X275 W21X248
W21X223 W21X201 W21X182 W21X166 W21X147 W21X132
W21X122 W21X111 W21X101 W21X93 W21X83 W21X73
W21X68 W21X62 W21X57 W21X50 W21X44 W18X311
W18X283 W18X258 W18X234 W18X211 W18X192 W18X175
W18X158 W18X143 W18X130 W18X119 W18X106 W18X97
W18X86 W18X76 W18X71 W18X65 W18X60 W18X55
W18X50 W18X46 W18X40 W18X35 W16X100 W16X89
WT18X115 WT18X128 WT18X116
WT18X105 WT18X97 WT18X91
WT18X85 WT18X80 WT18X75

WT18X67.5 WT16.5X177 WT16.5X159
WT16.5X145.5 WT16.5X131.5 WT16.5X120.5
WT16.5X110.5 WT16.5X100.5 WT16.5X84.5
WT16.5X76 WT16.5X70.5 WT16.5X65
WT16.5X59 WT15X117.5 WT15X105.5
WT15X95.5 WT15X86.5 WT15X74
WT15X66 WT15X62 WT15X58
WT15X54 WT15X49.5 WT13.5X108.5
WT13.5X97 WT13.5X89 WT13.5X80.5
WT13.5X73 WT13.5X64.5 WT13.5X57
WT13.5X51 WT13.5X47 WT13.5X42
WT12X88 WT12X81 WT12X73
WT12X65.5 WT12X58.5 WT12X52
WT12X51.5 WT12X47 WT12X42
WT12X38 WT12X34 WT12X31
WT12X27.5 WT10.5X83 WT10.5X73.5
WT10.5X66 WT10.5X61 WT10.5X55.5
WT10.5X50.5 WT10.5X46.5 WT10.5X41.5
WT10.5X36.5 WT10.5X34 WT10.5X31
WT10.5X28.5 WT10.5X25 WT10.5X22
WT9X71.5 WT9X65 WT9X59.5
WT9X53 WT9X48.5 WT9X43
WT9X38 WT9X35.5 WT9X32.5
WT9X30 WT9X27.5 WT9X25
WT9X23 WT9X20 WT9X17.5

WT8X50 WT8X44.5 WT8X38.5
WT8X33.5 WT8X28.5 WT8X25
WT8X22.5 WT8X20 WT8X18
WT8X15.5 WT8X13 WT7X365
WT7X332.5 WT7X302.5 WT7X275
WT7X250 WT7X227.5 WT7X213
WT7X199 WT7X185 WT7X171
WT7X155.
MT7X9 MT6X5.9 MT5X4.5 MT4X3.25 MT3X2.2 MT2.5X9.45
ST12X60.5 ST12X53 ST12X50 ST12X45 ST12X40 ST10X48
ST10X43 ST10X37.5 ST10X33 ST9X35 ST9X27.35 ST7.5X25
ST7.5X21.45 ST6X25 ST6X20.4 ST6X17.5 ST6X15.9 ST5X17.5
ST5X12.7 ST4X11.5 ST4X9.2 ST3.5X10 ST3.5X7.65 ST3X8.625
ST3X6.25 ST2.5X7.375 ST2.5X5 ST2X4.75 ST2X3.85 ST1.5X3.75
ST1.5X2.85



Australian 1990 Database

UB760X244 UB760X220 UB760X197 UB760X173 UB760X148 UB690X140
UC310X283 UC310X240 UC310X198 UC310X158 UC310X137 UC310X118
UC310X97 UC250X89 UC250X73 UC200X60 UC200X52 UC200X46
UC150X37 UC150X30 UC150X23 UC100X15
UBP310X79 UBP250X85 UBP250X63
TFB125X65 TFB100X45
TFC125X65 TFC100X50 TFC75X40
PFC380X100 PFC300X90 PFC250X90 PFC230X75 PFC200X75 PFC180X75
PFC150X75
EL200X200X26 EL200X200X20 EL200X200X18
EL200X200X16 EL200X200X13 EL150X150X19
EL150X150X16 EL150X150X12 EL150X150X10
EL125X125X16 EL125X125X12 EL125X125X10
EL125X125X8 EL100X100X12 EL100X100X10

EL100X100X8 EL100X100X6 EL90X90X10
EL90X90X8 EL90X90X6 EL75X75X10
EL25X25X3
UL150X100X12 UL150X100X10 UL150X90X16
UL150X90X12 UL150X90X10 UL150X90X8
UL125X75X12 UL125X75X10 UL125X75X8
UL125X75X6 UL100X75X10 UL100X75X8
UL100X75X6 UL75X50X8 UL75X50X6
UL75X50X5 UL65X50X8 UL65X50X6
UL65X50X5
German 1991 Database
I80 I100 I120 I140 I160 I180
I200 I220 I240 I260 I280 I300
I320 I340 I360 I380 I400 I425

I450 I475 I500 I550 I600
IPE80 IPE100 IPE120 IPE140 IPE160 IPE180
IPEO180 IPEO200 IPEO220 IPEO240 IPEO270 IPEO300
IPEO330 IPEO360 IPEO400 IPEO450 IPEO500 IPEO550
IPEO600
IPEV400 IPEV450 IPEV500 IPEV550 IPEV600
IPBI-100 IPBI-120 IPBI-140 IPBI-160 IPBI-180 IPBI-200

0
IPB-100 IPB-120 IPB-140 IPB-160 IPB-180 IPB-200
U30X15 U30 U40X20 U40 U50X25 U50
U60 U65 U80 U100 U120 U140

U160 U180 U200 U220 U240 U260
U280 U300 U320 U350 U380 U400
T20 T25 T30 T35 T40 T45
T50 T60 T70 T80 T90 T100
T120 T140
South African 1992 Database

Korean 1990 Database
W594X302 W588X300 W582X300 W612X202 W606X201
W600X200 W596X199 W488X300 W482X300 W506X201
W500X200 W496X199 W440X300 W434X299 W450X200
W446X199 W390X300 W386X299 W404X201 W400X200
W396X199 W350X350 W344X354 W344X348 W340X250
W336X249 W354X176 W350X175 W346X174 W310X310
W310X305 W304X301 W300X305 W300X300 W298X299
W294X302 W298X201 W294X200 W300X150 W298X149
W250X255 W250X250 W248X249 W244X252 W244X175
W250X125 W248X124 W208X202 W200X204 W200X200
W194X150 W200X100 W150X150 W148X100 W150X75
W125X125 W100X100
l250x250x35 l250x250x25 l200x200x25 l200x200x20 l200x200x15

l50x50x4 l45x45x5 l45x45x4 l40x40x5
C300X90 C300X91 C300X92 C300X93 C300X94
C125X65 C100X50 C75X40
m300x150 m250x125 m200x100 m150x75 m125x75
UK 1993 Database

SECTION 6
Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window menu: Input > Underground
Takes an unburied layout and buries it. The modeler performs the following functions:
 Allows the direct input of soil properties. The modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses. These equations are used to calculate the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis
and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.
 Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints using a zone concept.
Where transverse bearing is a concern near bends, tees, and entry/exit points, soil restraints
are located in close proximity.
 Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are
spaced far apart.
 Allows the direct entry of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a pipe-length basis. Input parameters
include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate loads. You
can specify stiffnesses separately or in conjunction with CAESAR II’s automatically generated
soil stiffnesses.
The Buried Pipe Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II input data file that describes
the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this input, the software creates a
second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input file typically contains
a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first file that serves as the
pattern is called the original job. The second file that contains the element mesh refinement and
the buried pipe restraints is called the buried job. CAESAR II names the buried file by appending
the letter B to the name of the original job.
The original job must already exist. During the process of creating the buried model, the
modeler removes any restraints in the buried section. Any additional restraints in the buried
section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by
the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to
compute displacements and stresses.
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above-ground
displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in
directions, such as those found in bends and tees. In areas far removed from bends and tees, the
deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element, that is, the distance between a
single FROM and a TO node, is dependent upon which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Because there is no continuous support model, the software must locate additional point
supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. These additional point supports can also
be user-defined. For a given stiffness per unit length, one of the following must be added:
 Several closely spaced, low stiffness supports
 A limited number of distant and high stiffness supports

Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces
from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is called the "lateral
bearing length" and can be calculated using the following equation:
Lb = 0.75(π) [4EI/Ktr]
0.25
Where:
E = Pipe modulus of elasticity
l = Pipe moment of inertia
Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone 3
element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length of
a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is 50 x
Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or mesh
distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried so that
deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing
into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone 1or
lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:

 On either side of a change in direction.

 For all pipes framing into an intersection.
 At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
 Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.
Data Conversion
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy the
Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these zones.
All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius elbows are
broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the immediately
adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding “1” to the element’s FROM
node number. The software checks a node number to make sure that is unique in the model. All
densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous support of the pipe
weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.
See also
Buried Pipe Modeler Window (on page 511)
Soil Models (on page 516)
Buried Pipe Modeler Window

To start the Buried Pipe Modeler, click Underground Pipe Modeler . The following window
displays:
Alternatively, you can click Input > Underground.

The Buried Pipe Modeler window is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job and
allows you to define:
 Which part of the piping system is buried
 Mesh spacing at specific element ends
 Soil stiffnesses

The first two columns of the data input grid contain element node numbers for each piping element
included in the original system. The next three columns allow you to describe the sections of the
piping system that are buried and to define any required fine mesh areas.
A finer mesh area is necessary for buried areas that will need to undergo lateral
displacements.
The remaining eight columns are used to define soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads.
Buried Pipe Modeler Toolbar

The Buried Pipe Molder toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Open
Opens an input data file that will serve as the original job.
Save
Creates an input data file that contains the buried pipe model. By default, the software
appends the filename of the original job with the letter B to create the second input data file
(the buried job).
Print
Prints the data input from the Buried Pipe Modeler window.
Soil Models
Opens the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box in which you specify soil properties for the
CAESAR II buried pipe equations used by the software to generate one or more soil restraint
systems. For more information, see Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 522).
Convert
Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and adding soil
restraints.
Find
Activates the search feature.
Change the Name of a Buried Pipe Job

1. Click File > Change Buried Pipe Job Name.
2. In the Change Job Name dialog box, type a new name for the buried pipe job and click OK.
The software updates the name of the job.
From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element
To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.

Soil Model No.

Defines which of the elements in the model are buried.
 If you enter 0, the element is not buried.
 If you enter 1, then specify the buried soil stiffnesses per length basis in columns 6 through 13.
 If you enter a number greater than 1, the software points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model
generated using the equations outlined in Soil Models (on page 516).
You can specify soil properties, such as buried depth, friction factor, undrained
shear strength, using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 522). The software uses
these properties to calculate the buried soil stiffnesses on a stiffness per length basis.
Because the soil properties can change from point-to-point along the pipeline, several
different soil models can be entered for a single job. Each different soil model is given a
unique soil model number starting with 2. Consider the following example:
From Node To Node Soil Model No.
5 10 0
10 15 0
15 20 1
20 25 1
25 30 1
30 35 2
35 40 2
The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will specify
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values indicated in the corresponding soil model
number to generate stiffnesses.
From/To End Mesh

Indicates a fine mesh is needed at the From or To element end.
Long, single elements that you enter need to be broken down into smaller elements to properly
distribute the soil forces. The software performs this breakdown automatically. If the particular end
of an element will undergo lateral displacement, it must have a finer mesh than an element end
that only undergoes axial displacements.
Axial displacement ends are at the end of a virtual anchor length.
Element ends undergo lateral displacements wherever there is a bend at the end of the element.
In this case, the software automatically places a fine mesh along the element entering the bend
and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where the
fine meshes must go. These locations include:

 1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.

 2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.
 3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.
Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too
few may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:
CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5,
where there are probably some displacements. The software automatically places fine meshes at
element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END MESH boxes
is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element end that frames
into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points 35 and 30.
User-Defined Lateral "K"

Specifies the soil stiffness perpendicular to the pipe axis on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions perpendicular to the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.
Ultimate Lateral Load

Specifies the ultimate lateral load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is required
if Soil Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
User-Defined Axial Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness along the axis of the pipe on a stiffness per length basis. This stiffness
value acts in both directions along the axis of the pipe. This option is required if Soil Model No.
(on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
To simulate a rigid, perfectly plastic soil for axial pipeline deformation, enter 1.0E12.
Ultimate Axial Load

Specifies the ultimate axial load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at this
point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is required if
Soil Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.

User-Defined Upward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the upward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value that
you enter is the stiffness that will resist upward displacement of the pipeline. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this option blank.
 If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one--the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.
 If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 515) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
Ultimate Upward Load

Specifies the ultimate upward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. The
value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to an upward displacement of the pipeline. It
is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
 If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
 If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 515) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
User-Defined Downward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the downward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value that
you enter is the stiffness that will resist downward (-Y) displacement of the pipeline. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this option blank.
 If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.
 If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 515) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
Ultimate Downward Load

Specifies the ultimate downward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. The
value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to a downward (-Y) displacement of the
pipeline. It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This
option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 513) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.

 If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
 If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 515) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and
ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:
 CAESAR II Basic Model
“Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines,” L.C. Peng, published in 1978 in
Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model (on page 516).
 American Lifelines Alliance
"Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried
Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). For more information,
see American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model (on page 518).
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil is
reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the variance
in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.
After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 522)
CAESAR II Basic Model

The following recommendations apply when you select CAESAR II Basic Model as
the Soil Model Type in the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box. For more information about the dialog
box and the available soil properties, see Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 522).

Either FRICTION COEFFICIENT or UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH may be left blank. With
clays, the friction coefficient is typically left blank and is automatically estimated by CAESAR II as
Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils can be defined here.
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
strain is used to compute and print the theoretical “virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = μD[ (2ρsH) + (πρpt) + (πρf)(D/4) ]
Where:
μD = Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
ρs = Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
ρp = Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
ρf = Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Ftr = 0.5ρs(H+D)2[tan(45 + φ/2)]2OCM
If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Where:
φ = Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt

0 for clay
 OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER (OCM) is an artificial CAESAR II term that

allows you to take a conservative approach when modeling uncertain soil response. Because
a higher stiffness generally produces conservative results, you may wish to increase the
transverse soil stiffness. CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose.
 You can reduce the OCM from its default of 8 to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on the
degree of compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM cannot
equal 1.0.
 For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May 78
issue of Pipeline Industry), use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:
Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation"
in the American Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). This document provides
bilinear stiffness of soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component
associated with sandy soils (subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted
c). Data can be entered for pure granular soils and pure clays.
Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined
through the following user-defined parameters:
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
H = soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA calculations)
γ = effective unit weight of soil
γ = total dry unit weight of fill
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of soil)
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at the
soil-pipe interface
φ = internal friction angle of soil

Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Yield Displacement Entry Limited by

Factor
Δt (dT) – Axial Length units ―
Δp (dP) – Lateral Multiple of D 0.04(H+D/2)
Δqu (dQu) – Upward Multiple of H Minimum
Δqu (dQu) – Upward Multiple of D
Δqd (dQd) – Downward Multiple of D ―

Axial
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
D = pipe OD
α = adhesion factor (for clays only)
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)

H = depth of cover to pipe centerline
= effective unit weight of soil

Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical
effective stress in the soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this calculation.
δ = interface angle of friction for pipe and soil, δ = fφ
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface
Pipe Coating f
Concrete 1.0
Coal Tar 0.9
Rough Steel 0.8
Smooth Steel 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy 0.6
Polyethylene 0.6
φ = internal friction angle of soil

Δt = axial displacement to develop
Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand, 0.2 inch for loose sand, 0.3 inch for stiff clay, and 0.4 inch for soft
clay

Lateral
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that can
be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for ϕ=0°)
Factor j x a b c d e
Nch 0° H/D 6.752 0.065 -11.063 7.119 --
Nqh 20° H/D 2.399 0.439 -0.03 1.059E-3 -1.754E-5
Nqh 25° H/D 3.332 0.839 -0.090 5.606E-3 -1.319E-4
Nqh 30° H/D 4.565 1.234 -0.089 4.275E-3 -9.159E-5
Nqh 35° H/D 6.816 2.019 -0.146 7.651E-3 -1.683E-4
Nqh 40° H/D* 10.959 1.783 0.045 -5.425E-3 1.153E-4*

*
Nqh 45° H/D* 17.658 3.309 0.048 -6.443E-3 1.299E-4*

*
*CAESAR II limits the height/diameter (H/D) ratio to a maximum of 20 for angles at 40 to 45 degrees. The software
calculates any values specified that result in a ratio that is greater than 20 as equal to 20.
**The American Lifelines Alliance standard lists the horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (Nqh) as a negative
value for both 40 and 45 degree angles. This results in negative yield load values. CAESAR II calculates these values as a
positive value, as shown in the previous table.
Nqh can be interpolated for φ between 20°and 45°.

Vertical Uplift
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Nqv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand
= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D

= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D
Vertical Bearing
Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, Nγ = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors
γ = total dry unit weight of fill

∆qd = vertical displacement to develop Qd
= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box

Soil Models specifies options for the soil model method to use and defines basic soil
properties, such as undrained sheer strength, friction angles, and so forth. The modeler uses the
values that you define to compute axial, lateral, upward, and downward stiffnesses, along with
ultimate loads. Each set of soil properties is identified by a unique soil model number, starting with

the number 2. The soil model number is used in the buried element descriptions to tell CAESAR II
in what type of soil the pipe is buried. You can enter up to 15 different soil model numbers in any
one buried pipe job.
 Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined values.

 The soil models you enter do not have to be used in the current job. This provides a
convenient mechanism for soil property range studies.
Soil Model Type and Classification

Select the soil model method on which the software will base its calculations. Three different soil
model methods are available, each with its own set of soil properties.
 American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel)
This is the default model is that is presented for granular soils in "Appendix B" of the
America Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe. This
model was developed jointly by the American Society of Civil Engineers and the Federal
Emergency Management Agency in July 2001 (addenda through February 2005.
 American Lifelines Alliance (Clay)
This model is for clay soils and from the same document as American Lifelines Alliance
(Sand/Gravel).
 CAESAR II Basic Model
A modified implementation of the method described by L.C. Peng in his two-part article
"Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipe Lines", published in Pipe Line Industry
(April/May 1978).
For more information, see Soil Models (on page 516).
ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR

Specifies the soil adhesion factor. This option displays only when you select American Lifelines
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil Classification.
If no value is defined, the soil adhesion factor is calculated using C - SOIL COHESION OF
BACKFILL based upon the following equation:
Alpha = 0.608-0.123C-0.274/(C**2+1)+0.695/(C**3+1)
Where C is in kips/sq.ft.
Possible values are listed in Figure B.2, "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from
the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL

Specifies the soil cohesion representative of the backfill. This option displays only when you select
American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for cohesive soils are between 2.5 and 20 psi (18 and 140kPa).

dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate lateral restraint load is
developed. This is calculated using as the following equation:
dP = 0.4 (H + D/2)
However, the calculated value must be limited to a maximum multiple for the pipe outer diameter
(D). Typical values are between 0.1 and 0.15.
dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN, MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate downward restraint load is
development. This value is calculated as a multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D). Typical values
are as follows:
 Granular soils - 0.1
 Cohesive soils - 0.2
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu = MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D)
The maximum multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D), must be entered here. Typical values are as
follows:
 Sand - 0.1
 Clay - 0.2
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD, MULTIPLE of H

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu - MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D
The maximum multiple of the pipe buried depth (H) must be entered here. Typical values are as
follows:
 Dense Sand - 0.01
 Loose Sand - 0.02
 Stiff Clay - 0.1
 Soft Clay - 0.2

dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate axial restraint load is developed.
This option displays only when you select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type
list.
Typical values are as follows:
 Dense Sand - 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.)
 Loose Sand - 0.2 in (5.0 mm.)
 Stiff Clay - 0.3 in. (7.5 mm.)
 Soft Clay - 0.4 in. (10 mm.)
GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the dry density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only if you
select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil
Classification.
Typical soil densities are listed below:
Soil Dry Density
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the effective density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only
when you select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The effective density of the soil may differ from the dry density if the soil is wet, and thus less
buoyant. The effective density of the soil is less than the dry density of the soil. If the water table
may engulf the pipe even for a short time, then it is probably appropriate to enter a wet effective

density. If the soil is expected to remain dry, then enter the dry soil density. The following tables list
some typical soil densities:
Soil Dry Density
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
Soil Wet (Buoyant) Density
2.73E-2 7.572E-4
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.62E-2 1.005E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.80E-2 1.055E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.05E-2 1.123E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.17E-2 1.155E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.35E-2 1.206E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
F - COATING FACTOR
Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.

Typical values for external pipe coatings are:

 Concrete - 1.0
 Coal Tar - 0.9
 Rough Steel - 0.8
 Smooth Steel - 0.7
 Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6
 Polyethylene - 0.6
FRICT. ANGLE
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:
 Clay - 0
 Silt - 26-25
 Sand - 27-45
 For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and
45-degrees.
 For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.
FRICTION COEFFICIENT
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on page
528) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is calculated using
the following equation:
Friction Coefficient = Su/0.4167E + 1
Typical friction coefficient values are:
 Silt - 0.4
 Sand - 0.5
 Gravel - 0.6
 Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1
This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF PIPE

Specifies the buried pipe depth to the top of the pipe. This option displays only when you select
American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The American Lifetime Alliance method actually defines H as "depth to pipe centerline". CAESAR
II automatically converts this based upon the individual pipe sizes.

Upward soil stiffness calculations are considered to be applicable for H/D ratios of 10
and below.
KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT REST

Specifies the coefficient of earth pressure. This option displays only if you select American
Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values are on the order of 1.0. If left blank, K0 defaults to the following:
K0 - 1.0 - sin(internal friction angle of the soil)
The internal friction angle of the soil is defined by FRICT. ANGLE (on page 527).
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER

Specifies the factor by which the transverse ultimate load is multiplied. This option displays only
when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
This value is used in the soil restraint equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. The default value is 8. This number can be reduced depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated using the proctor number,
defined in most soils text books. Standard practice is to multiple the proctor number by 8 and use
the result as the compaction multiplier.
SOIL DENSITY
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when you
select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
TEMPERATURE CHANGE
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENT

Specifies the pipe thermal expansion coefficient multiplied by 1E06.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH

Specifies the undrained shear strength. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II
Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
You can leave this option blank if Friction Coefficient is defined.

YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR

Specifies the value used to calculate the soil restraint stiffness. This value must be greater than
0.0. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type
list.
The yield displacement factor is inversely proportional to the soil restraint stiffness. By default, the
yield displacement depth of 1.5% of the buried depth is used, which translates to a yield
displacement factor of 0.015.
Model an underground piping system

The recommended workflow for using the Buried Pipe Modeler is outlined in the steps below.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design. For
more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 530).
1. Click Underground Pipe Modeler on the CAESAR II toolbar or click Input >
Underground to open the modeler.
2. Click File > Open on the Buried Pipe Modeler main menu and select the original unburied
job.
The original job serves as the basis for the buried pipe model. It must already exist
and need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove any
existing restraints in the buried portion.
3. Click Soil Models on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar.
4. In the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box, select a Soil Model Type.
The software populates the dialog box with soil data properties specific to the soil model you
select.
5. Enter the necessary soil data and click OK to exit the dialog box.
To enter additional soil models, click Add New Soil Model.
The software saves the soil data in a file with the extension SOI.
6. In columns 1-5 of the buried element data input area, describe the sections of the piping
system that are buried and define any required fine mesh areas and click Save .
User-defined soil data can be entered in columns 6-13.
7. On the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar, click Convert to convert the original model into the
buried model. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.
By default, the software appends the name of the job with the letter B. For example, if the
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Job Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.

 A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design. For
more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 530).
Buried Pipe Example

The following buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the
modeler. This example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping
design.
Consider the following example:
The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.

Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs) mark
the soil entry and exit points.
Using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 522), Soil Model Number 2 properties for a
sandy soil is defined.
Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing is
indicated at the entry and exit points.

Clicking Convert on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried
model.

The screen listing can also be printed.

The original unburied model is shown along with the buried model below. Restraints have been
added around the elbows and along the straight runs.
Bi-linear restraints have been added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the
distance between nodes.

The first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.
You can now analyze the buried job.

SECTION 7
Static Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Static Analysis

Main window menu: Analysis > Statics
In the Classic Piping Input dialog box:
Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Edit Static Load Cases
Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
In This Section
Static Analysis Overview ............................................................. 536
Working with Load Cases ........................................................... 542
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box............................. 558
Static Analysis Overview

During static analysis, CAESAR II assesses all of the piping data and processes the information
for meaningful reporting later. The software creates element stiffness matrices and load vectors,
as well as solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. In addition, you
can design specific load cases for analysis, select and design spring hangers, and evaluate
environmental loads.
You must run error checking prior to performing static analysis. If CAESAR II does not find any
errors, the software displays a center of gravity report and generates the analysis data files, and
can then commence the solution and reporting phase.
If the software finds errors with the piping data, it does not continue analysis. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until no errors exist before the software can complete
analysis.
After error checking, you can specify the load cases to analyze. CAESAR II recommends an initial
set of load cases that you can accept or modify.
Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping input before you can
perform static analysis. When error checking completes, the software creates the required
analysis data files. Any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. If the piping input has changed, CAESAR II does not allow an
analysis to take place until you successfully run the error checker.

Static Analysis
Error Check
Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. When the error check completes, the
Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. You can access this command only
from the Classic Piping Input or CAESAR II Structural Input dialog boxes. You can also
control the displayed errors and warnings:
 Show All
 Show Fatal Errors Only - Limits display to fatal errors without displaying warnings and
notes.
 Limit Repeating Messages - Stops displaying duplicate messages when the quantity
exceeds the value of Set Message Repeat Limit.
 Set Message Repeat Limit - Displays the Set Display Limit dialog box, where you set
the number of duplicate messages to repeat.
Batch Run
Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without any additional
actions from you.
The software assumes that the load cases associated with the current job do
not need to change, and that the default account number (if accounting is active) is correct. These
criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis.
During error checking, the software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible
errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings, or
notes.
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Displays the total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes for the current job. You must resolve all
errors for the software to run the analysis. Warnings and notes are for reference and do not
prevent analysis.
Double-click the row number of the message, and the software takes you to the element in the
piping input that pertains to the error, warning, or note. Click the tabs at the bottom of the window
to alternate between the Classic Piping Input and the Errors and Warnings dialog boxes.
Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by Message Type, Message Number, or
Element/Node Number. Click File > Print to print the messages.

Static Analysis
Error Message Type

The software reports an error when the analysis cannot continue. Errors can be caused by a
problem in the model, such as a piping element with no defined length. You must correct all
errors before the software allows you to continue the analysis.
Warning Message Type
The software reports a warning when there is a problem that can be overcome using some
assumptions. An example of this is the wall thickness of an element that is insufficient to meet
the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). You do not have to correct
warnings to get a successful analysis, but you should carefully review them.
Note Message Type
The software reports a note to inform you of a fact related to the model. An example of a note
is the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II or the Center of Gravity report
generated after analysis. Note messages are just informational, and there is no action
required.
What is a Load Case?

In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together and occur
at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the thermal,
deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another example is an as-installed analysis of
deadweight loads alone.
A load case can also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases. For
example, a load case can be the difference in displacements between the operating and installed
cases.
No matter what the contents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports, which list
restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of
piping code definitions for calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, CAESAR II also tags
load cases with a stress type. For example, the combination mentioned previously might be
tagged as an expansion stress case (EXP).
Piping System Loads

The piping system loads that compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various input
items found on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. The following tables list the individual load
set designations, their names and the input items, which make them available for analysis.
Designation Name Input items which activate this

load case
W Deadweight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight
WNC Weight No fluid Contents Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Weight, Rigid Weight

Static Analysis
WW Water Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid
Weight (usually used for Hydro Test)
T1 Thermal Set 1 Temperature #1
P1 Pressure Set 1 Pressure #1
HP Hydrostatic Test Pressure Hydro Pressure
D1 Displacements Set 1 Displacements (1st Vector)
D2 Displacements Set 2 Displacements (2nd Vector)
D3 Displacements Set 3 Displacements (3rd Vector)
D9 Displacement Set 9 Displacements (9th Vector)
F1 Force Set 1 Forces/Moments (1st Vector)
F2 Force Set 2 Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)
F3 Force Set 3 Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)
F9 Force Set 9 Forces/Moments (9th Vector)
WIN1 Wind Load 1 Wind Shape Factor
WAV1 Wave Load 1 Wave Load On

Static Analysis
U1 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (1st Vector)
U2 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)
U3 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)
CS Cold Spring Material # 18 or 19
H Hanger Initial Loads Hanger Design or Prespecified

Hangers
Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog box.
Basic Load Cases

Load cases are comprised of one or more major load types as defined in the input. Major load
cases are load cases that require a solution to the matrix equation [K]{x} = {f}.
For example:
 W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE) is a major load case
 W+P1+F1 (SUS) is a major load case
Basic load cases can consist of a single load, such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis. A
basic load can also include several loads added together, such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an
operating analysis. The stress type categories sustained (SUS), expansion (EXP), occasional
(OCC), operating (OPE), and fatigue (FAT) are specified at the end of the load case definition. The
definition of the two examples is: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Enter each basic load
case in this manner.
Load components, such as W, T1, D1, WIN1, can be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0, -0.5,
and so forth. Likewise, you can precede references to previous load cases by scale factors when
you build combination cases.
This provides you with several benefits.
 If one loading is a multiple of the other (such as Safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times
Operating Basis Earthquake) you only have to type one loading in the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can use this loading in a scaled or unscaled form in the Static Analysis -
Load Case Editor dialog box.
 If a loading can be directionally reversible, such as wind or earthquake, you only have to type
one loading in the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can use this loading preceded by a +
or a - to switch the direction.
 Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods can be implemented by scaling individual load
components by their risk-dependent factors. For example:
1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIN1

Static Analysis
You can select the stress type from the list on each line.
Combination Load Cases

You can combine the results of the basic load cases by using combination load cases. Always
type these combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate combinations of basic
load cases by using the prefix L1, L2, and so on.
Algebraic combination load cases are combinations of previously-solved major load cases. For
example:
 L1-L2 (EXP) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and stresses
using a combination method that you select.
 L4+L6+L8 (OCC) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and
stresses using a combination method that you select.
The + and - signs are unary operators/sign of multiplier. If no value precedes the load
for major load cases or the load case for combination cases, then the multiplier is +1.0 or -1.0. If a
value precedes the load or the load case, then the multiplier is +value or -value.
You must specify the expected number of load cycles for all load cases with stress type
fatigue (FAT).
The following family of load cases provides an example of algebraic combinations.
Load
Case Designation Comments
1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for
(OPE) 2/3 of the cold spring.
2 W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) Cold operating with cold spring included.
3 W1+P1+H(SUS) Traditional sustained case.
4 WIN1(OCC) Wind case. This will be manipulated later to represent

average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X (in the positive and
negative directions).
5 L1-L2(EXP) Traditional cold to hot expansion case. Use L for load,

rather than DS.
6 L1-L2(FAT) Same case evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.
7 L1+L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction).
8 L1-L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction).
9 L1+2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
10 L1-2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
11 L2+L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction).

Static Analysis
Load
Case Designation Comments
12 L2-L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction).
13 L2+2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
14 L2-2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
15 L3+L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind.
16 L3+2L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind.
17 L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE) Maximum restraint load case. The combination option

should be MAX.
18
CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the
model to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.
Working with Load Cases

From the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, you can create and edit load cases for
analysis. A load case is a group of piping system load primitives that are analyzed together.
The dialog box features two views that you select from the upper right corner of the dialog box.
List View
The default view for editing load cases, shows all load cases associated with the job. From
this view, you can edit individual load cases, create new load cases by typing in the primitives,
and drag and drop from the Loads Defined in Input or the load case identifier to build load
cases or create combination load cases.
Other List view functionality includes:
 Group By functionality
Click a column heading and drag it to the top to sort the list of load cases by that column.
 Filter functionality on columns
Select the column head filter control and choose the filter options for the selected
column.
 Static columns
See the load case identifier, definition and name even when you scroll to set additional
load case options.

Static Analysis
 Column re-ordering
Click and drag to change the order of the List view columns.
 Load Case Editor context menu
Right-click any load case and insert a blank new load case above or below it, or delete the
selected load case without having to click outside of the list.
CAESAR II saves the grouping, filtering, and column re-ordering settings for the current
session only.
Group Edit View
A group (or bulk) editing view lets you select multiple load cases and make changes to options
all at once. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page 543).
Editing Multiple Load Cases

Use the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to update values on multiple
load cases at one time. This view saves you valuable time as you can make global changes to
load cases, rather than having to edit each load case individually.
To perform a group edit of multiple load cases
1. Open a CAESAR II job.
2. Run error checking or the analysis, and then select Static Analysis.
3. Click Group Edit in the upper-right corner of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
From the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor, you can see the
Loads Defined in Input list, the existing load cases already defined for the job, and the
available options that you can globally change.
4. CTRL+click to select random load cases or SHIFT+click to select a group of load cases for
which you want to set options.
CAESAR II deactivates any boxes for options that already have differing values in the load
cases. The software immediately applies all changes made to the active boxes to the selected
load cases.
Building Static Load Cases

The CAESAR II load case editor combines native and combination loads as needed by the various
piping codes that CAESAR II supports.
This section describes which load cases to use in a variety of situations. If you need assistance in
load case definition for a situation not covered here, or if you need further clarification of the load
cases described, please contact ICAS Technical Support by e-mail at caesarii@intergraph.com.
Standard load cases for B31.1, B31.3,B31.3 Chapter IX, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505,
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.5, B31.8, B31.9, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen,
CODETI, Norwegian, FDBR, BS 806 piping codes are as follows:

Static Analysis
Standard load cases for situations where you have weight, temperature, and pressure:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L3 L1-L2 (EXP)*
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Cases tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some
do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used
by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Standard load cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.
Recommended Load Cases

When you initially open the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, the software
recommends three types of load cases, based on the loads defined in the model: Operating,
Sustained, and Expansion. The software does not recommend Occasional load cases.
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation. These load
cases include primary loadings (weight pressure, and force), secondary loadings (displacements
and thermal expansions). Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference
checking, and to find hot restraint and equipment loads. CAESAR II combines weight, pressure
case, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases when recommending operating load
cases. For example, the software combines the first displacement set with the first thermal set, the
second displacement set with the second thermal set, and so on. Then, the software combines
any cold spring loads.
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe. This case is
weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case. Sustained
load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to calculate

Static Analysis
as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by combining
weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between
the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress
requirements. Generally, when you specify only one temperature and one pressure, the
recommended cases look similar to the following:
Case 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) Operating
Case 2 W+P1+H (SUS) Sustained load case
Case 3 L1-L2 (EXP) Expansion load case
Review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is your
responsibility.
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or modify
them. Conversely, you can reset the load cases at any time to the software recommended set.
If you have an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you should
add another expansion load case as follows:
Case 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) Operating
Case 2 W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) Operating
Static Seismic Load Cases

In the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click the Uniform Loads auxiliary panel and select the in
G's option. On the first element, type the seismic load in Gs. Enter the X-direction acceleration in
the Vector 1 box, the Y-direction acceleration in the Vector 2 box, and the Z-direction
acceleration in the Vector 3 box. This makes load case generation easier.
Because a seismic event is likely to occur while the piping system is in operation, an operating
case should have all operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used with the
standard operating case to segregate the effect of the seismic load. The seismic load is then
combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance considerations.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)

Static Analysis
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC)
L11 L3-L1 (OCC)
L12 L4-L1 (OCC)
L13 L5-L1 (OCC)
L14 L6-L1 (OCC)
L15 L7-L1 (OCC)
L16 L8+L10 (OCC)
L17 L8+L11 (OCC)
L18 L8+L12 (OCC)
L19 L8+L13 (OCC)
L20 L8+L14 (OCC)
L21 L8+L15 (OCC)
Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case results
for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15 signify the
segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not need a code
stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code compliance. Because
of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status. Also, these combination load
cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load Cases tab. Load cases 16
through 21 are all used for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional results to the
sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value Combination Method.
Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although the displacements,
forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results except the stresses
for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you use.

Static Analysis
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor is
often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the previous
example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L10 W+P1 (SUS)
L11 L1-L10 (EXP)
L12 L2-L1 (OCC)
L13 L3-L1 (OCC)
L14 L4-L1 (OCC)
L15 L5-L1 (OCC)
L16 L6-L1 (OCC)
L17 L7-L1 (OCC)
L18 L8-L1 (OCC)
L19 L9-L1 (OCC)
L20 L10+L12 (OCC)
L21 L10+L13 (OCC)
L22 L10+L14 (OCC)

Static Analysis
L23 L10+L15 (OCC)
L24 L10+L16 (OCC)
L25 L10+L17 (OCC)
L26 L10+L18 (OCC)
L27 L10+L19 (OCC)
Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases as
shown in the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases
together using the SRSS Combination Method. Add these results to the sustained case.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC) *
L11 L3-L1 (OCC) *
L12 L4-L1 (OCC) *
L13 L5-L1 (OCC) *
L14 L6-L1 (OCC) *
L15 L7-L1 (OCC) *
L16 L10+L12 (OCC) **
L17 L10+L13 (OCC) **

Static Analysis
L18 L11+L12 (OCC) **
L19 L11+L13 (OCC) **
L20 L14+L12 (OCC) **
L21 L14+L13 (OCC) **
L22 L15+L12 (OCC) **
L23 L15+L13 (OCC) **
L24 L8+L16 (OCC) ***
L25 L8+L17 (OCC) ***
L26 L8+L18 (OCC) ***
L27 L8+L19 (OCC) ***
L28 L8+L20 (OCC) ***
L29 L8+L21 (OCC) ***
L30 L8+L22 (OCC) ***
L31 L8+L23 (OCC) ***
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the SRSS combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes
that do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

CAESAR II must analyze two additional load cases to get the data required to select a variable
support, if you want to let the software design spring hangers. The two basic requirements for
sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger, which is hanger hot load, and the range
of vertical travel to be accommodated.
The first load case, traditionally called restrained weight, consists of only deadweight (W). For this
analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where a
hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must be
carried by the support in the hot condition.
For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated hot
load, and an operating load case is run. This load case, traditionally called free thermal, includes
the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any displacements,

Static Analysis
W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with the previously
calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. After the hangers are
sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with their
pre-loads cold loads designated by load component, H. Load component H can appear in the load
cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it would represent the
pre-defined operating loads.
CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set of
recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design is as follows:
Case 1 W Weight for hanger loads
Case 2 W+D1+T1+P1 Operating for hanger travel
Case 3 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) Operating, hangers included
These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case.
Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the actual cold loads
for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load case, WNC+H, would appear before
Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system are set so that the proposed springs must
accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases must appear before Case 3
above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each additional
operating load case used to design springs. See Load Cases with Hanger Design (on page 550)
for more information on these options.
Load Cases with Hanger Design

When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required. The letter H
designates the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a spring hanger.
L1 W (HGR) *HS = Rigid
L2 W+T1+P1 (HGR) *HS = Ignore
L3 W+T1+P1+H (OPE) *HS = As Designed
L4 W+P1+H (SUS) *HS = As Designed
L5 L3-L4 (EXP) **
*HS is the hanger stiffness specified in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.

Static Analysis
** Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger load
cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let CAESAR II
recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load cases as
necessary.
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll

There is often platform movement, or relative movement, between two platforms with
inter-connected piping, in an offshore piping system. This also applies to FSPO and other
shipboard piping systems. Apply the pitch and roll displacements to CNodes on each affected
restraint. Use displacement vectors not already in use to describe thermal displacement boundary
conditions. There is usually a + displacement and a - displacement to describe the peak pitch and
roll conditions. Look at the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the worst two conditions
for relative displacement between piping separated by the largest distance along the line of wave
travel. D3 and D4 describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is a thermal displacement.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) *
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) *
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example. Enter the number of cycles for each pitch
condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
L6 L1-L3 (FAT) 21000000
L7 L2-L3 (FAT) 21000000
The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply this
number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.

Static Analysis
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements

Thermal displacements are generally associated with specific operating conditions. D1 is applied
with T1, D2 to T2, and so on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is above ambient,
you can determine the full expansion stress range.
L1 W+T1+D1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2
L6 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress

range
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes
with no expansion stress computation.
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement

Use a CNode for settlement on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number that is
not used elsewhere in the model. Place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement vector
that is not already used for thermal displacements. This example uses D3 to describe restraint
settlement.
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 W+P2 (SUS)
L5 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1 and settlement
L6 L2-L4 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2 and settlement
L7 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range

between OPE1 and OPE2
Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain related with a half-cycle.

* Include the thermal and settlement displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping
codes with no expansion stress computation.

Static Analysis
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional

(OCC) Load Cases
CAESAR II includes a designation for static load cases called an alternate load case. The B31.3
2014 code edition merged the requirements of the previous Appendix P into the main body of the
standard. This appendix related to stresses due to sustained loads. Because of this change,
CAESAR II was modified to address these additional sustained conditions using the alternate
support condition.
You can also associate a related alternate Sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case that uses the restraint status from the previous Operating (OPE) load case by selecting
Alternate SUS/OCC in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. CAESAR II uses the stiffness
values from the OPE case to create the alternate SUS or OCC load case. In addition, the software
disables all load case options that are not applicable on the alternate SUS or OCC load case.
B31.3 does not reference an alternate SUS or an alternate OCC load case. However, CAESAR II
provides both alternate SUS and alternate OCC because SUS and OCC stresses are both
force-based and you may find a need for a similar approach for OCC.
Use this functionality in systems where supports are active in some conditions and inactive in
others (such as pipes lifting off supports). In these situations, the changing distribution of
sustained loads may influence the difference in strains. The software bases the displacement
strain range on the algebraic difference between the calculated positions of the pipe that define
the range. In addition to the displacement strain, each calculated position includes the sustained
loads present in the condition under evaluation.
The load case generates primary stress corresponding to the restraint configuration for the
previous operating (OPE) load case. However, the alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate
occasional (OCC) load case is not a valid structural representation of the system. When using the
alternate SUS or alternate OCC cases, keep the following in mind:
 These alternate cases determine the stress and the consideration of this stress state in
determining the expansion stress range.
 Do not use the restraint loads from an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case as it is not a
true structural representation of the system. CAESAR II does not generate restraint reports for
alternate SUS and alternate OCC load cases.
 Do not use an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case when performing dynamic analysis.
Instead, use the corresponding operating case to get the support configuration.
 Use one of the two new load case templates (.tpl files) when recommending load cases.
These templates include support for alternate SUS and alternate OCC load cases. for more
information, see Load Case Template (on page 66).
 Alternate SUS provides a simple method to meet the requirements of equation (1b) for the
liberal allowable expansion stress range. If you use equation (1a), sustained stress does not
affect the allowable expansion stress range.
Example
While alternate SUS properly sets the expansion stress allowable limit in equation (1b), alternate
OCC only affects the SUS+OCC load case. You may want to use the following load case stress
types:
 L1: OPE (Operating case)

Static Analysis
 L2: Alternate SUS (Using the L1 operating support configuration)

 L3: SUS (Standard sustained case with supports set by sustained loads alone)
 L4: OPE (Operating case, or consider including OCC occasional loads)
 L5: Alternate OCC (Using the L4 operating support configuration)
 L6: EXP (Expansion case, defined as L1-L3)
 L7: SUS (Maximum of L2 and L3, to sum with OCC using the Max combination method)
 L8: OCC (L7+L5, using the Scalar combination method)
For more information, see Stress Type (on page 563) and Combination Method (on page 566).
For more information on loading conditions and support scenarios that result in the greatest
sustained load (SL) for each operating condition, see Appendix S, Example S302, in the B31.3
code standard.
Providing Wind Data

If you specify the wind shape factor in the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists WIN1,
WIN2, WIN3 and WIN4 as available loads in Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates
the Wind Loads tab so that you can define the required wind load data.
You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads Tab
(Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 572).

Static Analysis
Select Wind Code or Profile

You can use the following wind codes to generate wind loads on piping systems. Refer to the
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for details on which versions of each code that CAESAR II
supports.
ASCE 7 IS 875
AS/NZS 1170.0 Mexico
Brazil NBR 6123 NBC
BS 6399-2 UBC
China GB 50009 Wind Pressure vs Elevation (user defined)
EN 1991-1-4 Wind Velocity vs Elevation (user defined)
IBC
Providing Wave Data

If you specify the hydrodynamic coefficients in Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WAV1, WAV2, WAV3 and WAV4 as available loads in Static Analysis (Load Case Editor).
Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates
the Wave Loads tab so that you can define the extra wave load data.
You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.

Static Analysis
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see Wave
Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 591).
Running the Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine.
The software combines element stiffnesses to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic
load case defines a set of loads for the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are
combined into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiffness times
displacement (F=KX), the software can calculate unknown system deflections and rotations. The
known deflections however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear supports,
and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors.
CAESAR II uses the root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations,
with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X, Y, Z) forces and moments at the end of
each element. The software translates these forces and moments into a local coordinate system
for the element from which it calculates the code-defined stresses. Forces and moments on
anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and
moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process
where appropriate—at the displacement, force and moment, or stress level.
After the software completes the setup for the solution, it repeats the calculation of the
displacements and rotations for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the software
displays the Incore Solver dialog box.
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. The upper-left portion of the dialog box
reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the matrix

Static Analysis
that holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a relative
indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case and the total number of basic
load cases the software has to analyze and solve. The iteration count, as well as the current case
number, shows how much work the software has completed. Load cases with nonlinear restraints
can require several solutions or iterations before the software confirms the changing assumptions
about the restraint configuration, such as resting or lifting off, active or inactive, and so on.
In the lower-left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs that indicate where the
program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By
checking the data in this first box, you have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the Incore Solver dialog box also provides information regarding the status of
nonlinear restraints and hangers in the job. For example, the software displays messages noting
the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load
here. You can step through nonlinear restraint status on an individual basis by pressing the F2
through F4 keys.
After the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, the software post-processes the results
to calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the
algebraic combinations (for example L1-L2). CAESAR II stores the total system results in a file
with the suffix _P (for example, TUTOR._P).
The _A (or input file), the _P (or output file), and the OTL (Output Time Link file) are all
that are required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files can be deleted without
any impact on the completed work.
During this post-processing, the Status frame lists the element for which the forces and stresses
are being calculated. After the software calculates the last stresses of an element, the output
processor dialog box displays. Use this dialog box to review the graphic and tabular results of the
analysis. For more information on interactive processing of output results, see Dynamic Input and
Analysis.

Static Analysis
Controlling Results
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether the software retains any or all of the load case results for
review in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor through two options: Output Status (on page
565) and Output Type (on page 565). This helps ensure that the results you find most meaningful
are the ones the software displays.
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box

Controls options for static analysis.
After error-checking your model, specify your static load cases using the Edit Static Load Cases
command, which is only available after you have successfully error checked the piping input
file.
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box lists many details about the input, including
the following:
 Available loads that are defined in the input.
 Available stress types.
 Current load cases offered for analysis.
CAESAR II lists recommended load cases if the job is entering static analysis for the first time. The
list displays loads saved during the last session if the job has been run previously.
Options (on all tabs)

Save
Saves the load case and environmental data file. For more information, see Save <filename>
(on page 242).

Static Analysis
Analyze load cases

Runs the static analysis.
Tabs
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 559)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 572)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 591)
See Also
Working with Load Cases (on page 542)
Building Static Load Cases (on page 543)
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for editing load cases. You can define up to 999 load cases. Click a line in the list
to edit the load case properties. You must specify all basic (non-combination) load sets before you
can declare any algebraic combinations. This is true for both user-defined and edited load cases.
Select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load case in the grid.
Drag a basic load in the Loads Defined in Input pane to a load definition in the grid to create an
algebraic combination case. CAESAR II prompts you for the combination type when necessary.
You can change the Stress Type value by clicking in the box and then selecting a different value
from the list. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use.
Options
Add a load case

Inserts a blank line following the selected load case line in the list. If you do not select a row,
the software adds the load case at the end of the list.
You can also:
 Right-click > Insert Before to insert a blank line before the selected load case line in the
list.
 Right-click > Insert After to insert a blank line following the selected load case line in the
list.
Delete a load case

Deletes one or more selected load cases from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
SHIFT-click to select multiple adjacent rows. CTRL-click to select multiple non-adjacent rows.
When you delete a load case, any dependent load cases (combination load cases affected by
its removal) are either deleted or revised. The software deletes the entire dependent load
case if it only contains two primitives. However, for combination load cases with three or more
primitives, the software modifies the load case to remove only the applicable primitive.
When you delete an operating (OPE) load case, an alternate sustained or occasional load
case based on the operating case (SUS or OCC, with Alternate SUS/OCC selected) is also

Static Analysis
deleted.
Review and confirm the load cases that will be deleted or revised in the Load Case Delete
Confirmation window. The Revision column displays the action to be performed for each
load case. After reviewing the load cases, press Delete to complete the process.
You can also right-click > Delete.
Recommend load cases

Replaces the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases.
Import load cases
Copies the load cases from a file. The units and load types of the copied file must match those
of the current file.
Group Edit
Edits groups of load cases. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page
543).
To return to the load case grid, click List.
Filter
Provides options to filter load cases. Click for the required column and select the filter
options.
Copy and Paste Options

You can copy and paste one or more rows in the grid to create new load cases. Click the line
number in the left-most column of the grid (such as L1) to select a row. SHIFT-click to select
multiple continuous rows. CTRL-click to select multiple non-continuous rows.

Static Analysis
Copy
Copies one or more selected rows to the clipboard.
You can also right-click > Copy or press CTRL-C.
Paste > Paste Copied

Pastes one or more copied rows at the selected row, also overwriting the selected and
following rows.
You can also right-click > Paste > Paste Copied or press CTRL-V.
Paste > Insert Copied

Pastes one or more copied rows at the selected row, inserting the copied rows above the
selected rows. When you select multiple rows, the software inserts the copied rows above the
first selected row.
You can also right-click > Paste > Insert Copied or press CTRL-I.
 You can reorder the columns in the list, but you cannot copy, change the column order, and
then try to paste in the new order. If you reorder columns, you must copy again in the new
column order, and then paste.
 You can copy non-continuous rows. The software pastes the rows as continuous rows.
 If you filter the load cases, you can copy one or more rows, but you cannot paste until you
clear the filter.
 When you define a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case, you must enter the number of
anticipated Load Cycles for that load case or the software prompts you before analysis.
 When you delete load cases, the software automatically renumbers all subsequent load
cases.
Recommend Load Cases

Displays the Recommended Load Cases dialog box. CAESAR II suggests the load cases that
you should run to satisfy the basic requirements of the piping codes. You can then choose to run
the load cases as recommended, or you can modify them to meet your requirements. Click Yes to
accept the recommended load cases (which you can later edit), or No to return to the Static
Analysis dialog box.
Recommended Load Cases Dialog Box

Displays a list of load cases that CAESAR II recommends to satisfy the expansion and sustained
code compliance requirements. You can choose to run the load cases as presented, or you can
modify the cases to meet your requirements.

Static Analysis
Import Load Cases

Imports load cases from a CAESAR II file.
Make sure the units match between the two jobs files prior to importing. When you
import load cases from another job, you must verify the load case values, wind data, and wave
data to ensure data integrity.
Loads Defined in Input

Displays the load types available in the model input. For example, if T2 displays on the list then the
model has defined Operating Temperature 2. If T2 does not display then the model does not
include a second operating temperature.
The load types that can be defined are:
W - Weight including pipe, fluid, and insulation.
WW - Weight including pipe, water filled, and insulation.
WNC - Weight with no contents. Includes pipe and insulation.
T1 - Operating temperature 1.
T2 - T9 - Additional operating temperatures 2 through 9.
P1 - Operating pressure 1.
P2 - P9 - Additional operating pressures 2 through 9.
HP - Hydrostatic pressure.
F1 - Concentrated force vector 1.
F2 - F9 - Additional force vectors 2 through 9.
D1 - Displacement vector 1.
D2 - D9 - Additional displacement vectors 2 through 9.
U1 - Uniform load vector 1.
U2 - U3 - Additional uniform load vectors 2 through 3.
WIN1 - Wind load vector 1
WIN2 - WIN4 - Additional wind load vectors 2 through 4.
WAV1 - Wave load vector 1.
WAV2 - WAV4 - Additional wave load vectors 2 through 4.
CS - cold spring, material 18 or 19.
H - Hanger initial loads.
Definition
Shows the current load cases offered for analysis. You can build load cases by dragging
components from the Loads Defined in Input list and dropping them on the Definition box or by
typing in the values.

Static Analysis
Click the Definition box to edit the load case definition. You can only enter the load components
as they are listed in the Loads Defined in Input list. The options you select in the piping input
determine what load case values appear in this list.
For more information, see Building Static Load Cases (on page 543).
Load Case Name

Describes the CAESAR II load case. Specify your own names or labels for CAESAR II load case
definitions, which you can use for identification purposes when you review the output. Clear the
box to display the CAESAR II load case definition name.
Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters.
These user-defined load case names appear in the Load Case Report. For more information, see
Controlling Results (on page 558). You can use these names in place of the default load case
definition name anywhere in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Stress Type
Displays the stress types. The stress type applies to the load cases. It defines how the element
stresses and allowables are computed. The available stress types are:
OPE
Operating case. For B31.1 and B31.3 (and similar codes) this case is not a code compliance
case. The software does not report allowable stresses.
SUS
Sustained case.
EXP
Expansion case.
OCC
Occasional case.
FAT
Fatigue case.
You must also specify the number of Load Cycles (on page 565) for load cases
with a FAT stress type.
HGR
Spring hanger design case. These are load cases that CAESAR II uses internally to design
and select spring hangers. Results are not available for these cases.
HYD
Hydro test case. Select hanger status. For a hydrotest case, the default hanger status is rigid
or locked.
CRP
Creep case. Code standards such as EN-13480 define a creep stress range for operating
conditions, which is defined by the life of the material. In CAESAR II, CRP is a scalar

Static Analysis
combination of one SUS case and one EXP case. The software sets Output Type (on page
565) to Stress.
CAESAR II calculates CRP stresses according to EN-13480. If you specify additional load
multipliers, the software applies these as additional scale factors. Other codes also use the
EN-13480 method. For more information, see Creep Loading (on page 965).
 You must manually add a CRP case.

 The default combination method is Scalar. You can also set Combination Method (on
page 566) to MAX.
K1P
KHK Level 1 (seismic code) primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
The longitudinal stress is due to pressure, weight, and design seismic force.
The software treats this stress type as OCC for other piping codes.
K1SR
KHK Level 1 (seismic code) secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to design force and support movement.
The software treats this stress type as EXP for other piping codes.
K2P
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
The longitudinal stress is due to internal pressure, weight, seismic force, and response
displacement.
The software treats this stress type as OCC for other piping codes.
K2SA
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) secondary cyclic stress amplitude for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress amplitude is due to seismic force and response displacement.
K2SR
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to seismic force and response displacement.
K2L
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) liquefaction for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes. Liquefaction is
the angular displacement corresponding to a maximum equivalent plastic strain of 5% (in
degrees).
Alternate SUS/OCC
Indicates that the load case is an alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case. An alternate SUS/OCC load case is associated with the preceding operating (OPE) load
case.

Static Analysis
Due to changes in the B31.3 code for the 2014 edition, the primary stress in each position of the
piping system must be evaluated. An alternate SUS/OCC load case uses the restraint status from
the previous OPE load case to evaluate the stresses induced by primary loads.
When you create a load case that follows an OPE load case and select a Stress Type of SUS or
OCC, the software displays the Alternate SUS/OCC check box, which you can select to indicate
that the case is an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case.
CAESAR II displays the number of the related OPE load case when you select Alternate
SUS/OCC.
For more information, see Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC) Load
Cases (on page 553).
Load Cycles
Indicates the anticipated number of applications of this load on the system for load cases using the
Expansion (EXP) or Fatigue (FAT) stress types. The software uses this value to determine the
allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material or the cyclic reduction factor for an
Expansion case. For static cases, the software calculates stresses at full range. For dynamic
cases, the software calculates stresses at half range, which is the amplitude of the full stress
range.
For load cases with an Expansion (EXP) stress type, you can enter a value of 1 in the Load
Cycles field (for B31.1 jobs) to indicate that the stress range is caused by noncyclic movements.
In this situation, the software replaces the allowable stress range value (Sa) with a special
noncyclic allowable calculation, as per the B31.1 code standard. The software continues to
calculate the displacement stress range (Se) as defined by the applicable piping code.
Output Status
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.
 Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for all
new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.
 Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as Suppress.
For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only to
be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.
Output Type
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress
Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a good
choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which does a code check on
operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for interference checking

Static Analysis
(displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).

Disp/Force
Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good choice for OPE
cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE
stresses.
Disp/Stress
Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress
Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a good choice for the
Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one
operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR combination loads cases
developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this force/stress type.
Disp
Provides displacements only.
Force
Provides restraint loads, global, and local forces only.
Stress
Provides stresses only. This is a good choice for a sustained plus occasional load case (with
Abs combination method), because this is an artificial construct used for code stress checking
purposes. ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are
converted with this stress type.
Combination Method
Specifies the combination method to use for combination cases only. Load cases to combine are
designated as L1, L2, and so on. Select the combination method from the list.
Load case results are multiplied by any associated scale factors before performing the
combination and comparison.
The available methods are:
Algebraic
Indicates a signed algebraic combination of displacement and force level. This method
combines the displacement vectors and the force vectors algebraically and then calculates
the stresses from the combined forces. Displacements are the algebraic combination of the
displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the force vectors. Stresses are
not combined. Stresses are calculated from the algebraically combined forces. The Algebraic
method would typically be used to calculate EXP code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination
method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR
methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically
default to this method, unless you change them.
Algebraic combinations can be built only from basic load cases. Basic load cases are
non-combination load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination
method.

Static Analysis

Static Analysis
Scalar
Indicates a signed combination of displacement, force, and stress level. This method
combines the displacement vectors, force vectors, and stress scalars. Displacements are the
algebraic combination of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of
the force vectors. Stresses are the scalar combination of the stress scalars.
The combination of displacements and forces are the same for ALG and Scalar methods. The
combinations of stress levels are different between ALG and Scalar methods because the
stresses are calculated from the combined forces in the ALG method and summed in the
Scalar method.
For example:
Load Case 1: bending stress = 100 psi, due to X-moment
Load Case 2: bending stress - 100 psi, due to Z-moment
Algebraic (vectorial) sum = square root of (100*100 + 100*100) = 141.4 psi
Scalar sum = 100 + 100 = 200 psi
Scalar is typically used to sum (SUS + OCC) code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method.
Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are
converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS
Indicates a combination of the square root of the sum of the squares of quantities, such as the
displacements of the forces or the stresses. Displacements are the square root of the sum of
the squares of the displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the
square root of the sum of the squares of the forces of all cases included in the combination.
Stresses are the square root of the sum of the squares of the stresses of all cases included in
the combination. This method is typically used to combine seismic directional components.
ABS
Indicates a combination of the absolute values of quantities, such as the displacements, the
forces, or the stresses. Displacements are the sum of the absolute value of the displacements
of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the sum of the absolute value of the
forces of all cases included in the combination. Stresses are the sum of the absolute value of
the stresses of all cases included in the combination. This method is typically used to combine
SUS cases with OCC cases for occasional stress code check.
For flange checks that use the ABS load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
 The axial force and torsion, which is the absolute sum of these values from all load cases
included the combination.
 The bending moment, which is the sum of resultant bending moments from all load cases
included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in the
combination.
MAX
Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force, and the
maximum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the maximum absolute values of all the load

Static Analysis
cases included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the maximum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the
maximum absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination. This method is
typically used to report the greatest restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
For flange checks that use the MAX load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
 The axial force and torsion, which is the maximum magnitude of these values from all load
cases included the combination.
 The bending moment, which is the maximum resultant bending moment from all load
cases included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in the
combination.
MIN
Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and the
minimum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the minimum absolute values of all the load
cases included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the minimum absolute values
of all the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the
minimum absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination.
SIGNMAX
Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force, and the
maximum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the maximum signed values of all the displacements from each case
included in the combination. Forces are the maximum signed values of all the forces from
each case included in the combination. Stresses are the maximum signed values of all the
stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in
conjunction with SignMin to report the envelope of restrain loads from among a selected set
of load cases.
SIGNMIN
Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and the
minimum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the minimum signed values of all the displacements from each case
included in the combination. Forces are the minimum signed values of all the forces from each
case included in the combination. Stresses are the minimum signed values of all the stresses
from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in conjunction with
SignMax to report the envelope of restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
Snubbers Active
Indicates whether snubbers are active. Select the check box to indicate that snubbers are
considered to be rigid restraints for the load case. By default, Occasional (OCC) load cases
activate this option while other types of load cases clear this option.
Hanger Stiffness
Specifies the hanger stiffness for the load case. The three options are: As Designed, Rigid, and
Ignore.

Static Analysis
As Designed
Causes the software to consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses. Use this option for most
real (non-hanger design) load cases.
Rigid
Causes the software to model the spring hangers as rigid restraints. Use this option for
restrained weight cases and hydrotest cases if the spring hangers are pinned.
Ignore
Causes the software to remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model. Use this option
for hanger travel cases, unless you want to include the stiffness of the selected spring in the
operating for hanger travel case and iterate to a solution. In that case, select As Designed.
You must also adjust the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) to match the
reported hanger cold load.
User-defined hangers are not made rigid during restrained weight cases.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli to determine results
on a per-load-case basis.
EC
Cold elastic modulus.
EH1
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1.
EH2 - EH9
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T2 through T9.
Elbow Stiffening Pressure

Specifies the pressure used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors on a
per-load-case basis.
Pmax
Maximum of P1 through P9.
None
No pressure stiffening for the elbow.
P1 - P9
Operating pressures 1 through 9.
Phydro
Hydrostatic pressure.

Static Analysis
Elbow Stiffening Elastic Modulus

Specifies the elastic modulus is used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors on a
per-load-case basis.
EC
Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - EH9
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1 through T9.
SUS Case Sh
Designates the use of a hot allowable stress (Sh) to determine the results on a per-load case
basis. Use this option for sustained (SUS) and occasional (OCC) load cases.
Sh_min
Minimum of Sh1 through Sh9.
Sh1 - Sh9
Hot allowable stresses corresponding to T1 through T9.
The SUS Case Sh option applies only to B31.3 2010 Edition codes and later.
Friction Multiplier
Specifies the multiplier of friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu)
used at each restraint is this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Set this value to zero
to deactivate friction for this load case.
OCC Load Factor

Displays/overrides the Occasional load factor defined in the configuration. The default value
changes according to the piping code and the frequency of occurrence.
ISO-14962
Occasional load factors are defined differently for different load cases (Operating,
Sustained, Occasional, and Hydrotest). The default occasional load factors for these load
cases are:
 1.0
Sustained load cases
 1.25
Operating load cases
 1.33
Occasional and Hydrotest cases
The Occasional load factor and the System design factor from the Allowable Stress dialog
box are multiplied together to generate the Part Factor for Loading (f2) as defined in ISO-14692.

Static Analysis
As an example, using a default system design factor of 0.67 with the above default occasional
load factors results in the following default values for the part factor for loading:
Load Case System Design Occasional Load Part Factor for

Type Factor Factor Loading
Sustained (SUS) 0.67 1.00 0.67
Operating (OPE) 0.67 1.24 0.83
Occasional (OCC) 0.67 1.33 0.89
Hydrotest (HYD) 0.67 1.33 0.89
Flange Analysis Temperature

Specifies the temperature used to determine the flange allowable.
None
No flange analysis.
T1 - T9
Operating temperatures 1 through 9.
Tmax
Maximum of T1 through T9.
TAmb
Ambient temperature.
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wind loads. For more information, see the input descriptions for this tab or
Wind Loads (on page 950).
Editing Wind Case

Specifies the wind case to edit. The first box indicates the active wind case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.
Select Wind Code or Profile

Specifies the wind code or one of the user-defined (velocity or pressure) profiles. The software
updates the dialog box depending on the selection you choose. For more information, see the
specific wind code options or Wind Loads (on page 950).
See Also
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options (on page 573)
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options (on page 575)

Static Analysis
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options (on page 577)

Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options (on page 580)
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options (on page 581)
EN Wind Code Options (on page 581)
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options (on page 582)
IS 875 Wind Code Options (on page 584)
Mexico Wind Code Options (on page 586)
NBC Wind Code Options (on page 589)
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined) (on page 590)
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options
Wind Load Parameters

Basic Wind Speed Specifies the three-second gust speed at 33 ft. (10 m.) above ground for
Exposure C category as determined according to Section 6.5.6.3.
According to ASCE 7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
 California and West Coast Areas -124.6 ft./sec. (85 mph)
 Rocky Mountains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
 Great Plains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
 Non-Coastal Eastern United States -132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
 Gulf Coast - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
 Florida-Carolinas - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
 Miami - 212.6 ft./sec (145 mph)
 New England Coastal Areas - 176.0 ft./sec (120 mph)
Wind Exposure
Specifies the wind exposure. This value is the exposure category that adequately reflects the
characteristics of ground surface irregularities. The ASCE 7 code standard (found in ASCE 7
2005, Section 6.5.6.3 and ASCE 7 2010, Section 26.7.3) defines exposure categories as
follows:
2
Exposure B - Urban, suburban, and wooded areas, prevailing. For upwind distance
requirements, refer to the code standard.
3
Exposure C - All cases where exposures B and D do not apply.
4
Exposure D - Flat coastal areas, prevailing. Urban, suburban, wooded, or open
terrain areas with scattered obstructions. For upwind or downwind requirements,
refer to the code standard.
 Wind Exposure options 2, 3 and 4 correlate to ASCE 7 exposure categories B, C, and D.

 See ASCE 7 2005 (Section 6.5.6.3) and ASCE 7 2010 (Section 26.7.3) for any exceptions
on wind exposures.

Static Analysis
Structural Damping Coef.

Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of critical damping
and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.
Structural Classification
Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the type of occupancy.
ASCE 7-2005 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:
1 - Category I
Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II
All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III
Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV\
Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are
equivalent to categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE 7.
Importance Factor
Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the velocity pressure for
wind load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural classification and
whether or not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown below.
For ASCE 7 2010, CAESAR II sets the importance factor to 1, as the code standard no longer
addresses this factor.
For ASCE 7 2005, set the importance factor as per the code standard in Table 6-1.
Category Non-Hurricane Hurricane Prone
1-I 0.87 0.77
2-II 1.00 1.00
3-III 1.15 1.15
4-IV 1.15 1.15
1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are
equivalent to categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE 7.
Structure Natural Frequency
Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect factor for
dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz.)
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.

Static Analysis
Topographic Factor Parameters

Height of Hill or Escarpment
Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height relative to the upwind
terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures sited on the upper half
of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.
Distance from Crest to Site
Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building site.
Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0
No Hill
1
2D Ridge
2
2D Escarpment
3
3D Axisymmetric Hill
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the AS/NZS 1170.2 wind code.
Design Wind Speed
Design Wind Speed Vr. This is the regional wind speed described in section 3.2 of the code.
Wind Region
Wind region. The wind region is determined from the geographic locations for Australia and
New Zealand. The maps of these locations are in Figure 3.1 of the code.
Terrain Category
Value discussed in section 4.2.1 of the code. These categories are defined as:
 Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and water surfaces at serviceable
wind speeds
 Category 2
Water surfaces, open terrain, grassland with few, well-scattered obstructions having
heights generally from 1.5 m to 10 m.
 Category 3
Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions 3 m to 5 m high such as areas of

Static Analysis
suburban housing
 Category 4
Terrain with numerous large, high (10 m to 30 m high) and closely spaced
obstructions such as large city centers and well-developed industrial complexes
Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions that
constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot be
relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee)
Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0. Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the
issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand, reference is made to the New
Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh)
Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from Table 4.4 of the code.
Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the derivation of the hill shape
factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu) Mh
< 0.05 1.00
0.05 1.8
0.10 1.16
0.20 1.32
0.30 1.48
>= 0.45 1.71
Wind Direction Multiplier (Md)

Specifies the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2. As
the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW, W
and NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. We recommend this value
be used for all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed
In the standard AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp 1:2002 Section C3, there is a discussion regarding the
division of the wind speed given in the standard by the square root of 1.5. Checking the box
converts the wind speed given to a permissible stress basis. Doing this lowers the wind loads
on the vessel.

Static Analysis
Surface Roughness Height (hr)

This value is used to compute the ratio hr/d which is then used to compute the drag force
coefficient (Cd) for rounded cylindrical shapes per Table E3. For pressure vessels, this value
ranges from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for heavily rusted surfaces. Light
rust has a value of 2.5 mm while galvanized steel has a value of 0.15 mm.
The ratio hr/d is taken to be unitless (mm/mm).
Site Elevation (E)
Specify the height of the site above the mean sea level, E.
Average Spacing of Shielding Buildings
Specifies the average spacing of the shielding buildings. This is discussed in paragraph 4.3.3
of the code.
Average Breadth of Shielding Buildings (bs)
Specifies the average breadth of the buildings that shield the piping.
Average Height of Shielding Buildings (hs)
Specifies the average height of the buildings that shield the piping.
Number of Upwind Bldgs at 45 degs
Specifies the number of upwind buildings within a 45 degree arc. The upwind buildings are the
ones shielding the piping.
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the BS-6399-2 British Wind Code.
Design Wind Speed
Specifies the design value of the wind speed. These vary according to geographical location
and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical wind speeds in miles
per hour. Typical wind speeds are shown in Figure 6 of BS-6399-2. The wind speeds are only
relevant to the United Kingdom. The wind speeds vary typically from 20 m/sec to 31 m/sec
(44.7 mph to 69.3 mph).
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the
wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation - delta s
Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the code). Use this value
plus the Base Elevation to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above mean sea
level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft) above sea level, it is
exposed to a higher wind pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho
For buildings in town terrain, type the average height of the building upwind of the piping (as
they tend to shield the piping from the wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so
the piping takes the full force of the wind. Ho is used to modify the effective piping wind height
(He) for any piping element. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS-6399-2.

Static Analysis
Upwind Building Spacing - X

For buildings in town terrain, type the average spacing of the buildings upwind of the piping
(as they tend to shield the piping from the wind). If the buildings are closer together, they
provide greater protection from the wind. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS-6399-2.
Pipe Location
Specifies the location where the system is installed, either in the country, or in a town. The
BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any
element of the piping is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the
country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by
internally.
Distance to Coastline
Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in kilometers. This distance affects
the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity.
The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is determined by the distance
from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the effective height (He). This
table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.
Size Effect Factor - Ca
Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from Figure 4 of BS-6399-2.
This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The size effect factor is a
function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the town or country and
the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb
Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of BS6399. Choose from one of five
values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but any other value may be chosen.
Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel height:
Kb Maximum Vessel Total Height
8 23 m (75.4 ft)
4 75 m (246 ft)
2 240 m (787 ft)
1 300 m (984 ft)
0.5 300 m (984 ft)
Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many other
things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
8 Welded Steel unclad frames
4 Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames
2 Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls

Static Analysis
1 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)
0.5 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing
Annual Probability Factor - Q

Calculates the final probability factor (Sp) associated with the likelihood of high velocity gusts
occurring over certain periods such as 50 years. The default value is Q = 0.02. The code sets
0.02 as a standard value for a mean recurrence value of 50 years. Annex D of BS-6399-2
should be consulted for a fuller explanation.
Q Explanation
0.632 NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual maximum
value. (Sp = 0.749)
0.227 NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp =
Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
0.02 NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)
0.0083 NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence
interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
0.00574 NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is
back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f = 1.4
and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))
0.001 NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean
recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)
Seasonal Factor - Ss
BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "...For permanent buildings and buildings exposed for
continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used for Ss..." PV Elite
uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is not
recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd
Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about its central axis, the
default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be reduced other
than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The values in
that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Pipe Surface Type
Specifies the pipe surface condition. The three options are: 1 Smooth, 2 Rough, and 3 Very
Rough.

Static Analysis
Total Wind Height

Specifies the total height of the building or structure, which CAESAR II uses in wind force
equations. For piping systems, consider using the maximum height of the piping system.
Refer to the particular wind code standard for more information on this value.
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the Brazil NBR 6123 wind code.
Basic Wind Velocity (Vo)
Velocity from a three second gust, exceeded only once in 50 years. It is measured at 10
meters over smooth open ground and depends on the plant location. As a general rule, the
wind may blow in any horizontal direction. This velocity is taken from Figure 1, and item 8
which shows the iso-velocities over Brazil. The referred to Figures and Tables are found in the
Petrobras document BPE-500-P4-19i and the Brazilian Wind Code NBR 6123.
Topographical Factor (S1)
Accounts for the variations and profile of the land. For plain or slightly uneven ground, use a
value of 1. The larger this value is, the greater the final computed wind pressure is. If the
vessel is on a hill top, this value should be computed according to section 5.2 of NBR 6123.
Roughness Category (S2)
Category Description
1 Plain ground with large dimensions (more than 5 km of extension)
2 Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles
3 Plain or uneven ground obstructed by obstacles (walls or separated low

buildings)
4 Ground with many grouped obstacles in industrial or urban areas
5 Ground with many grouped and tall obstacles (such as developed industrial
areas)
Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.
Dimension Class
Class Description
A Greatest dimension is less than or equal to 20 meters
B Greatest dimension is greater than 20m and less than 50 meters
C Greatest dimension is greater than or equal to 50 meters
Statistical Factor (S3)

Accounts for security and the expected life of the equipment. For industrial plants S3 is
generally taken to be 1.0.

Static Analysis
Pipe Surface Condition

Vessel surface condition can be classified as smooth or rough. A selection of rough results in
an increased value of the shape coefficient. Using a rough classification generates a higher
wind load on the vessel as there is more drag. The shape coefficient is computed based on
the height to diameter ratio of the vessel.
Frequency
dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
Total Wind Height
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options

For details on the China GB 5009 wind code parameters used in CAESAR II, refer to the China GB
5009 wind code standard.
EN Wind Code Options

Ref. Wind Velocity [Vb,0]
Specifies the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity of the area where the equipment is
situated. Vb,0 is used along with C Dir and C Season to compute Vb.
Terrain Category
Select the appropriate terrain category from the table below. Category 0 generates the
highest wind loads while category 4 produces the lowest wind loads.
Terrain Category Description
0 Sea or Coastal area exposed to the open sea
1 Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles
2 Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights
3 Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles

with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages,
suburban terrain, permanent forest)
4 Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their
average height exceeds 15 m
Directionality Factor [C Dir]

Value of the directional factor, C Dir, found in the National Annex. The recommended value is
1.0.

Static Analysis
Season Factor [C Season]

Value of the season factor, C Season, found in the National Annex. The recommended value
is 1.0.
Structural Factor [CsCd]
Structural factor used to determine the force on the vessel. This value is defined in Section of
the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) Wind load specification in Annex D. This value normally ranges
between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the structural factor value, the higher the element load.
Force Coefficient [Cf]
Force coefficient which accounts for the fact that the vessel is circular in cross section. This
value modifies the area of the vessel that the wind is blowing against. This value is often
specified in the design specifications or can be computed based on the methodology given in
Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value for Cf would be between 0.7 and 0.8.
Structure Damping Coefficient
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the UBC and IBC wind codes.
Design Wind Speed
Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to geographical location
and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in miles per hour are
85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following
because the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Exposure Constant
Specifies the exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312 or the IBC Exposure
Constant:
 Exposure B
Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height covering
at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.
 Exposure C
Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from the site
in any full quadrant.
 Exposure D
The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more. Terrain which
is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width
relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the
shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the
Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.

Static Analysis
Importance Factor (IBC)

This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in
Table 1604.5. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to
generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the
structure.
Importance Factor (UBC)
Specifies the importance factor. The software uses this value directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard. Followings are the context of Table
23-L:
Category Value
I - Essential facilities 1.15
II - Hazardous facilities 1.15
III - Special occupancy structures 1.00
IV - Standard occupancy structures 1.00
Height of Hill (IBC)

Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height relative to the upwind
terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures sited on the upper half
of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Distance to Site (IBC)
Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building site.
Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.
Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0
No Hill
1
2D Ridge
2
2D Escarpment
3
3D Axisymmetric Hill
Structure Damping Coeff. (IBC)/Beta (UBC)
Specifies the structural damping coefficient. Type the value of structural damping coefficient
(percentage of critical damping) beta. The default value is 0.01.
This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the commentary

Static Analysis
section 6.6 page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8 pages 29-30 of the 98 standard. If your
design Code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient in accordance with
that particular wind design code.
If your design specification does not call out for a specific value of beta, then leave the value of
0.01 in this cell. Please note that other values of beta can be specified for the filled case and
the empty case. Again if the specifications do not supply these values for empty and filled
leave these cells blank.
Natural Frequency (IBC)
IS 875 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the Indian Standard, IS-875 (Part 3), wind code. IS-875 is the standard in
India for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures.
Basic Wind Speed
Basic wind speed as applicable to 10 m height above mean ground level for different zones in
the country can be directly calculated if the proper value is defined in the Wind Zone Number
box. Alternatively, wind speed can be defined here. Basic wind speed should be based on
peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about 3 seconds and correspond to
mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This box is optional.
Wind Zone Number
Figure 1 of IS-875 shows different Wind Zones of the country. Various zone numbers and
corresponding Basic Wind Speed values are:
Zone 1 33 m/sec 73.82 miles/hour
Zone 4 47 m/sec 105.15

miles/hour
Zone 5 50 m/sec 111.86

miles/hour
Zone 6 55 m/sec 123.04

miles/hour
The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined from
a map of India showing the various wind zones.
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If the
wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the table
above.
Risk Factor (K1)

Static Analysis
Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the corresponding risk coefficient
values for various wind zones are:
Zone K1
Zone 1 1.05
Zone 2 1.06
Zone 3 1.07
Zone 4 1.07
Zone 5 1.08
Zone 6 1.08
Terrain Category
Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the following categories:
 Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average height of
any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes open
sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.
 Category 2
Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between 1.5 to
10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.
 Category 3
Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings and
structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and
industrial areas full or partially developed.
 Category 4
Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large city
centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
Equipment Class
Equipment and structures are classified into following classes depending upon their size.
 Class A
Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) less than 20 m.
 Class B
vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
 Class C

Static Analysis

vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.
Topography Factor
The topography factor ranges between 1.0 and 1.36. This factor takes care of local
topographic features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, ridges and so on, which can significantly
affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind near summits
of hills or crests of cliffs and decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs. Effect of
topography is significant if upwind slope is greater than about 3 degrees. Below 3 degrees,
the value of K3 can be taken as 1.0. For slopes above 3 degrees, the value of K3 ranges
between 1.0 and 1.36.
Use Gust Response Factor
If this box is checked, the software calculates the gust response factor per IS-875 and uses it
in the appropriate equations. Experience has shown that these gust response factors are very
conservative. Select this box only if the design specifications and the customer or owner
explicitly require you to do so.
Mexico Wind Code Options

Specifies the options available for the Mexico wind code.
Design Wind Speed
According to Paragraph 4.6.2, Isotach Maps. Regional Velocity (VR), the velocity of the wind,
VR, is the maximum mean velocity likely to occur within a certain recurrence period in a
determined zone or region of the country.
The Isotach maps that are included in this clause with the different periods of return, such
velocities refer to homogenous conditions that correspond to a height of 10 meters over the
surface of the floor in the flat terrain (Category 2 per Table I.1). It does not consider the local
terrain roughness characteristics or the specific topography of the site. Therefore, such
velocity is associated with three-second wind gusts and it takes into account the possibility
that there might be hurricane winds present in the coastal zones.
The regional velocity, VR, is determined by taking into account the geographic location of the
site of the building's uproot and its destination.
In Figures I.1 through I.4, the Isotach regional maps are shown, corresponding to the periods
of recurrence for 200, 50, and 10 years.
The importance of the structures (Paragraph 4.3) dictates the periods of recurrence which
should be considered for the wind design. From this, the groups A, B and C associate
themselves with the periods of return of 200, 50 and 10 years, respectively. The uproot site is
located in the map with the recurrence period which corresponds to the group to which the
building belongs to, in order to obtain the regional velocity. In the Tomo III from Ayudas de
Dise O a table is shown with the main cities in the country and their corresponding regional
velocities for the different periods of return.

Static Analysis
Structural Classification
Specifies the structural classification.
Class Description
A Every remote structural element exposed directly to the wind

action. Horizontal or vertical structures that measure less than 20
meters of length.
B Horizontal or vertical structures that measure between 20 and 50

meters of length.
C Horizontal or vertical structures that measure more than 50 meters

of length.
Terrain Category
Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.
Category Description
1 Open terrain, practically smooth, without obstructions.
2 Flat or undulating soil, with few obstructions.
3 Terrain covered by many obstructions narrowly spaced.
4 Terrain with many big, tall, narrowly spaced obstructions.
Topographic Factor (Ft) (Paragraph 4.5.4)

This factor takes into account the local topographic effect from the place in which the structure
uproots. For example, if the building is found on the hillsides, on top of hills or on mountains at
important heights with respect to the general level of the terrain of its outskirts, it is probable
that wind accelerations generates and the regional velocity should be increased.
Damping Factor (Zeta)
Typically, this value is 0.01.
Drag Coefficient (Ca)
(Table 1.28), as shown below.
Cross Section Type of Surface H/b
1 7 25 ò 40
Circular Smooth or little rough 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7

(bVD ≥ 6 m2/s) (d'/b ÷ 0.0)
Rough (d'/b ÷ 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.2
Very rough (d'/b ÷ 0.08) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2

Static Analysis
Circular Any 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.2

(bVD ≥6 m /s)
2
Hexagonal or octagonal Any 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.4
Square (wind normal to Any 1.3 1.4 2.0 2.2

a face)
Square (wind on a Any 1.0 1.1 1.5 1.6

corner)
where:
 b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of
the wall; to determine the product bVD, this diameter is the one that is located at two thirds
of the total height, from the level of the land, in m
 d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m
 VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of the
total height
For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.
Strouhal Number (St)
The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for rectangular sections.
Barometric Height (Omega)
Indicates the barometric pressure in mm Hg, as shown below:
Height Barometric Pressure (mm Hg)
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 565
3000 530
3500 495
Ambient Temperature
Indicates the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius.

Static Analysis
Frequency
Specifies the fundamental frequency time interval, in Hz.
NBC Wind Code Options

Reference Wind Pressure or Design Wind Speed
Specifies the NBC Reference Wind Pressure. The reference velocity pressure q is the
appropriate value determined in conformance with Subsection 1.1.3 (based on probability) or
Table C-1.
Design Wind Speed
Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to geographical location
and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in miles per hour are
85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following
because the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Importance Factor (Iw)
Specifies the NBC importance factor. This value is the importance factor for wind taken from
the table below. This is table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of Division B of NBC 2005.
Importance Category Importance Factor, Iw
ULS SLS
Low 0.8 0.75
Normal 1.0 0.75
High 1.15 0.75
Post Disaster 1.25 0.75
Exposure Constant
Based on the profile of mean wind speed, the Exposure Constant varies considerably with
the general roughness of the terrain over which the wind has been blowing before it reaches
the building. These exposures are applicable only under the dynamic (detailed) method,
whereas the terms open and rough were used for the static (simplified) method.
Exposure A - (Open or Standard Exposure)
Indicates open-level terrain with only scattered buildings, trees, or other obstructions,
open water or shorelines. Reference wind speeds are based on Exposure A.
Exposure B - (Rough Exposure)
Indicates rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense high-rise
buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 20 times the building
height. Prior to NBC 2010, referred to winds that persist in the upward direction for 1.0
km or 10 times the building height, whichever is larger.
Exposure C - (NBC 2005 only)

Static Analysis
Rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense high-rise buildings, which
persists in the upwind direction for at least 1.0 km or 10 times the building height,
whichever is larger.
Roughness Factor
Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1
Round, moderately smooth
2
Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3
Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Height of the Windward Face
Specifies the height of a piping section that is exposed to wind blow.
Structural Damping Coefficient
Natural Frequency
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined)

Allows you to indicate your own wind profiles, based on one of two options:
 Wind Pressure vs. Elevation
 Wind Velocity vs. Elevation
When you select a user-defined wind code (Wind Pressure vs. Elevation or Wind Velocity vs.
Elevation), enter the corresponding pressure or velocity values. Enter a single entry in the table if
a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the pressure
or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
The software acquires the pressure/velocity and elevation values from the piping input.
They do not necessarily match the current setting in the configuration file.
Copy Wind Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box, which is used to copy the wind data
from any defined wind case to any remaining wind case. This is especially useful for large wind
pressure or Velocity versus Elevation tables.

Static Analysis
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining wind
or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity versus
Elevation tables.
Wind Direction Specification

Specifies the direction vector (cosine) which defines the direction of the wind. The magnitude of
the vector is not significant. For example:
 Wind in X direction, vector is 1, 0, 0
 Wind in Z direction, vector is 0, 0, 1
 Wind at 45 degrees, vector is .707, 0, .707
You only need to specify the method and the wind direction if you are using a pressure or velocity
versus elevation table. After clicking User Wind Profile, a dialog box prompts you for the
corresponding pressure or velocity table. You only need to make a single entry in the table if a
uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the pressure or
velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wave loads.
Editing Wave Case

Specifies the wave case to edit. The first box indicates the active wave case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.
Copy Wave Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box.
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining wind
or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity versus
Elevation tables.
Current Profile Type

Specifies the means of modeling the current speed against the depth profile. Available current
profiles are:
 Power Law
Current speed decays with depth to the 1/7 power.

Static Analysis
 Linear Table
Define the depth versus. speed table.
 Linear
Current speed decays linearly with depth becoming zero at the sea bottom.
Surface Velocity
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.
Wave Theory
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:
 Stream Function
Dean's stream function theory.
 Stream Function, Modified
Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear current. This shear current
is assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom speed. Therefore,
this option only works with the Linear current profile.
 STOKE'S 5th
Stoke's 5th order wave theory.
 STOKE'S 5th, Modified
Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean sea
level.
 AIRY
Basic linear wave theory.
 AIRY, Modified
Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean sea level.
Stream Function Order

Specifies the order of the stream function when using the stream function wave theory. Typical
values are from 5-21.
Water Depth
Specifies the water depth at this location.

Static Analysis
Wave Height
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).
Wave Period
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed reference
point.
Wave Kinematics Factor

Specifies the wave kinematics factor. According to Section 2.3.1b of API RP 2A-WSD
"Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms --
Working Stress Design", the horizontal wave velocities calculated by the Stream Function or
Stokes 5th wave theories may be multiplied by this factor in order to fit them to the wave spreading
and other irregularities associated with real world wave characteristics.
Typical ranges for this factor are 0.85 to 0.95 for tropical storms and 0.95 to 1.0 for extra-tropical
storms. For particular recommendations for Gulf of Mexico and other U.S. waters, refer to
Sections 2.3.4d.1 and 2.3.4f.1 of API RP 2A-WSD.
Wave Direction Cosines

Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the wave. The wave direction may differ
from the direction of any accompanying current.
Wave Phase Option

Indicates whether all elements of the model should be simultaneously loaded with the same
phase of the wave (typically the phase of maximum loading) or whether each element experiences
a different loading phase, based upon its location relative to the model origin.
Phase Angle
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:
 every element
 model origin.
Free Surface Elevation

Specifies the elevation of mean sea level, in terms of model elevation. This submerges the
elements of the model to the appropriate level.

Static Analysis
Kinematic Viscosity
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Temp (F) v(in-in/sec) Temp (C) v(mm-mm/sec)
60 1.81e-3 15.556 1.171
50 2.10e-3 10.000 1.356
40 2.23e-3 4.444 1.440
30 2.88e-3 -1.111 1.858
Density
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb/cu.in.) or 0.00103
(kg/cu.cm.)
Current Table Depth

Displays the depth values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to 10 depths. A value
of 0.0 indicates the surface. Positive numbers indicate distance downward from the surface.
Current Table Velocity

Displays the velocity values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to the current
speeds corresponding to the specified depths. Current speed typed in this table overrides the
Surface Velocity value.

SECTION 8
Static Output Processor
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static

Main window menu: Analysis > Static
Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open job. The Static Output
Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a static analysis. You can also
select Output > Static from the main CAESAR II menu to open the window any time after an
analysis has been completed.
The Static Output Processor window displays analysis results in a tabular form, in a graphical
animated form, or a combination of the two. Use commands in the Static Output Processor
window to:
 Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.
 Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
 Add title lines to output reports.
 Select extended or summarized versions of most standard reports.
Load Cases Analyzed
Lists all of the load cases which have been analyzed for the current job. The cases are
numbered, and labeled with the type (load category) addressed by the case. Load types are:
 OPE - operating, not a stress compliance case for B31.1/B31.3 and similar codes.
 SUS - sustained, stress compliance for primary loads.
 EXP - expansion, stress compliance for secondary loads.
 OCC - occasional, stress compliance for occasional loads.
 FAT - fatigue, stress compliance for cumulative damage.
 HAR - harmonic case for dynamic evaluation of harmonic loads.
 HGR - construction case used for spring hanger design - results are not available for
these load cases.
 K1P - Primary level 1 seismic longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
 K1SR - Secondary level 1 seismic cyclic stress for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
 K2P - Primary level 2 seismic longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
 K2SA - Secondary level 2 seismic cyclic stress amplitude for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
 K2SR - Secondary level 2 seismic cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
 K2L - Level 2 seismic liquefaction for the HPGSL and JPI codes
The load case description also includes the individual load components that contributed to the
load case.

The results for a load case can be viewed by selecting the load case. Multiple load cases can
be selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse. Load cases
can be cleared by using the <Ctrl> key in combination with the mouse.
Standard Reports
Lists the available reports associated with those load cases. For more information, see Work
with Reports (on page 596) and Standard Reports (on page 604).
General Computed Results
Lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports, that are not associated with
load cases. For more information, see General Computed Results (on page 619).
Custom Reports
Lists generated or imported custom reports. For more information, see Work with Reports (on
page 596) and Report Template Editor (on page 624).
Output Viewer Wizard
Selects specific reports and reviews their order before sending the output to the selected
device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard, click Less <<. For more information, see Output
Viewer Wizard (on page 623).
Work with Reports

When generated, a report displays in a tabbed Reports Viewer window. You can detach
individual reports from the tabbed view, and position them around the screen. Additionally, you
can dock a report next to other opened reports for a comparison view. Select the tab at the bottom
of the report, and while holding down the mouse, move the report. The outline shadow shows the
new location of the report. Release the mouse button to place the report in the new location.

When a report is open, you can double-click the column headings to sort the report by ascending
or descending value order. Column order can be re-arranged by dragging columns to another
location. You can also adjust the column size or hide the column altogether. All changes are for
the current report in the current viewing session. To make permanent changes to the report, use
the Report Template Editor (on page 624).
You can print or save individual reports to a text file, to Microsoft Word, or to Microsoft Excel by
selecting Send Report To or Send All To from the right-click menu.
While the report is active, you can adjust the display properties available from the View menu,
change the background color, and turn on horizontal and vertical grid lines. Grid lines can help in
generating better print results.
Click View > Change Page Break to adjust the page configuration for an active report. You can
also scale the report to fit on one page, or adjust it to fit on a specified number of pages by using
the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.
Filter Reports
One of the most powerful features of the Static Output Processor is the ability to filter your
output reports. Filtering lets you customize output to just the information you want to see.
Select Filters from the Static Output Processor menu to set filters on your output reports.
Certain filters can apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you generate from
the Output Processor) or specific to a report type (such as only to restraint reports).
1 Report-Specific Filters
2 Global Filters

Report-Specific Filters
Apply report-specific filters when you want the software to filter only reports that are related to the
filter setting. For example, if you wanted to generate a report to see all the allowable stresses in a
piping system that are greater than 80 percent, set the Percent box on the Stresses tab to >80.
Then, when you generate any of the stress-related reports in the Output Processor, the software
filters the data to show only those stresses greater than 80 percent.
Global Filters
Apply global filters to node number or line number ranges for the software to filter all reports that
include the node or line numbers specified. For example, if you filter on node numbers from 10 to
100, then for any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and shows
only the data that is applicable to nodes 10 to 100.
 Filters do not apply to the summary information that appears at the top of a report.
 The software shows the filters applied near the top of the output report, as shown below.
1 Output Reports Show Filters Used
To filter reports
1. Select Filters on the Output Processor menu.
2. Choose any global filter options. Global filters apply to all reports generated in the Output
Processor. For more information on the global filters, see Filter Options Tab (on page 600)
and Filters Dialog Box (on page 599).
a. To apply a global filter based on node numbers, type the From node and To node
numbers.
b. To select other global options for filters, click the Filter Options tab.
3. Choose report-specific filter details on each of the class tabs. Each tab contains related fields
with a drop box and an edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value in which to
compare.

Each of the drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator Description
> Greater than
>= Greater or Equal
< Less than
<= Less or Equal
== Equal
\= Not Equal
1. Click Apply to define the filter.
See Also
Filter Options Tab (on page 600)
Restraints Tab (on page 601)
Forces Tab (on page 601)
Stresses Tab (on page 601)
Line Numbers Tab (on page 602)
Flange Peq Tab (on page 602)
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab (on page 602)
Filters Dialog Box

Allows you to put specifications on report results so that you can see just the information that you
need. Certain filters apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you generate from
the Output Processor) while others apply to a specific report type (such as only to restraint
reports). For more information on filtering, see Filter Reports (on page 597).
See Also
Filter Options Tab (on page 600)
Displacements Tab (on page 600)
Restraints Tab (on page 601)
Forces Tab (on page 601)
Stresses Tab (on page 601)
Line Numbers Tab (on page 602)
Flange Peq Tab (on page 602)
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab (on page 602)

Filter Options Tab

Select filter options that the software applies to all reports generated in the Output Processor.
You set filter options from the Filter Options tab on the Filters dialog box, which you can access
by selecting Filters in the Output Processor menu. You can specify filter settings, such as setting
the signed value or the combination of fields filtered, which the software applies globally to all
reports you generate.
From Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. In other words, only one of the node pair has to fall within the
specified range. If you enter just a From node number, then the software displays the From
node and all nodes greater than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that have
at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
To Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. If you enter just a To node number, then the software displays the To
node and all nodes less than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that have at
least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
Filter Options
Select the appropriate filter option for values: Absolute Value or Signed Value. The software
defaults to filtering by the magnitude, regardless of the sign or direction. You can filter by a
specific direction of load or displacement. This feature is particularly useful when looking for
lifting off the supports in directional restraints (such as +Y).
Combinations (Fields or Classes)
Select the appropriate filter option for field or class combinations. Fields refer to the particular
data inputs (boxes) in each tab class. Classes refers to the major types of output, for example
Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses. Classes have separate tabs in the Filters
dialog box. For example, DX and RZ are fields in the Displacements class, FX and MZ are
fields in the Restraints class, and Code Stress and Bending Stress are fields in the
Stresses class.
Reset Filter
Select to reset the filter settings for the currently-active tab.
Reset All Filters
Select to reset all the filter settings for all of the filters, including the options and the
report-specific filter classes.
Displacements Tab
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to displacements. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, to look at any place in the model where the pipe is lifting off of the support, set the
Displacements filter class to a positive value of greater than one inch in the Y-axis direction (DY)
to show which pipes have lifted off of the support vertically by more than an inch.

When you run the Displacements output report, the software shows only those pipes in your
model that have been displaced by more than an inch. You can also set the Filter Options
Classes to AND, and then generate the Restraints Summary Extended report to show all
restraints with a displacement off of the pipe of one inch or more.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page 599) and Filter
Reports (on page 597).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.
Restraints Tab
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to restraints. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Restraints filter class to show all restraints with forces greater than
10,000 lbs on the y-axis (FY), then the software shows only restraints that have FY values greater
than 10,0000 lbs on the Restraints, Local Restraints, or Restraints Summary output reports.
You can also select one of the Include radio buttons to filter and include all restraints in your
results, include all restraints that do not have CNodes (None with CNodes), or include all
restraints with only CNodes (Only with CNodes).
For example, you can select to include None with CNodes, if you want to filter out internal load on
a CNoded restraint. This lets you see the total dead weight of a pipe model.
Select Bi-Linear for buried pipe models that also go above ground. In most cases, you do not
need to select this filter option.
Forces Tab
Specifies filter criteria that the software applies to all reports relating to force. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Forces filter class to all forces in the Y-axis direction greater than
10,000 pounds, the software shows only y-axis forces (FY) greater than 10,000 pounds on the
Local Element Forces and Global Element Forces output reports.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on page
597).
combination classes. This filter applies only to internal forces and moments.
Stresses Tab
Specifies filter criteria for the various stress output reports (Stresses, Stresses Extended, and
Stress Summary). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial, Bending, Torsion, Hoop, Max 3D,
Code and Allowable stress factors in combination with the magnitude. In addition, you can filter

stress data on the reports based on SIFs (in- and out-of-plane), and based on a percentage of
stress. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Stresses filter class Percent box to >70, the software filters the
stress-related reports to show only elements having greater than a 70 percent stress.
Line Numbers Tab

Assigns filter criteria based on line numbers that the software applies globally for all output
reports. If the model has assigned line numbers, you can set up filter criteria based on those
numbers to look at output results for only certain parts of the model.
For example, apply line number ranges for the software to filter reports to only include elements
that belong to a particular line number. For example, if you filter based upon line numbers, then for
any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and shows only the data
that includes information on systems with the specified line numbers. When the software shows
the Line Number box as Unassigned, it means the model did not have any line numbers
assigned and cannot be filtered based on that information.
Flange Peq Tab

Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to the Kellog Equivalent Pressure Method
(Peq). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial Force, Bending Moment, Gasket Diameter,
PEquivalent, Rating Temperature, Allowable Pressure, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you specify the Flange Peq filter class to filter based on a Ratio of 20 percent, then
the software filters output reports to only show equivalent pressures for flanges that are 20 percent
of the maximum rated pressure. This information indicates how close you are to the edge of the
flange.
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab

Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection
NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3). You can set up filter criteria for all NC-3658.3 reports based on
Torsion Moment, Bending Moment, Bolt Circle Diameter, Bolt Area, Flange Stress,
Allowable Stress, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators
for the filter values.

For example, if you specify for the Flange NC-3658.3 filter class to with a Ratio of 30 percent or
greater, then the software reports on only flanges of the NC method that are 30 percent of the
maximum rated equivalent pressure for the flange.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on page
597).
Print or Save Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different combinations
of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print command, to
create a single report.
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select File-Save As.
Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:
Load Case Report Purpose
SUSTAINED STRESS Code compliance
EXPANSION STRESS Code compliance
OPERATING DISPLACEMENTS Interference checks
OPERATING RESTRAINTS Hot restraint, equipment loads
SUSTAINED RESTRAINTS As-installed restraint, equipment loads
Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and
hanger table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case
may be highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
 The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON" something.
The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each
element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment report
shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.
 When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address details

and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you can set up
in "header.doc".
Standard Reports
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended.
The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a landscape option
when printed.
Displacements
Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These values represent the
solution vector for each load case. For more information, see Displacements Report (on page
605).
Restraints
Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more information,
see Restraints Report (on page 605).
Restraint Summary
Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load cases. This provides a
concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases. For more information, see
Restraint Summary (on page 608).
Global Element Forces
Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element. These forces and
moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and represent the element free-body
diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces (on page 611).
Global Element Forces Extended
Shows element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element, including shear
forces, bending moments, and torsional moments. These forces and moments are aligned
with the global coordinate system, and represent the element free-body diagram. For more
information, see Global Element Forces Extended (on page 612).
Local Element Forces
Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element. These forces and
moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system, and represent the element
free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element Forces (on page 613).
Stresses
Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report also includes
codes SIFs, code allowables, and the code stress when applicable. For more information,
Stresses (on page 613).
Stresses Extended
Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. Also reports axial, bending,
torsional, and hoop stresses. The report also includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the
code stress when applicable. For more information, Stresses Extended (on page 614).

Cumulative Damage
Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load cases and compares it to the
corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note that this report is only available
for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more information, see Cumulative Usage Report
(on page 617).
Bend KHK2 Evaluation
Reports bending on elements due to KHK Level 2 stresses. For more information, see Bend
KHK2 Evaluation Report (on page 619).
Displacements Report
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 597).
Restraints Report

Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report
generated for each load case selected.
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates

It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the local
element coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles, where
the axial, longitudinal and circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider the small
system shown below:

This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of each
line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial restraint, as
illustrated in the following figure:
The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are the
global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint load,
acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component loads, which
yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads – Global Coordinate System
NODE FX lb. FY lb. FZ lb. MX ft.lb. MY ft.lb. MZ ft.lb.
100 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC
119 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
140 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
200 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC
219 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
240 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the element
coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where all of the
loads are aligned wih the associated element coordinate system. The report for the same small
job displays in the table below.
Operating Case Restraint Loads – Local Element Coordinate System
NODE fx lb. fy lb. fz lb. mx ft.lb. my ft.lb. mz ft.lb.
100 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC
119 0 -24528 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
140 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
200 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC

NODE fx lb. fy lb. fz lb. mx ft.lb. my ft.lb. mz ft.lb.
219 -17344 -17344 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
240 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 929). (These two
values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system loads
reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads reports only the
resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in bold.)
Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected load
cases together on one report.

Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.
Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the nozzle
for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then the entire
line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in black and
white.)
The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.
Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There are
two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).

The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.

Global Element Forces

Reports forces and moments on the piping for each node in the model. The report also displays
element names.

Global Element Forces Extended

Reports forces and moments, including shear forces, bending moments, and torsional moments,
on the piping for each node in the model. The report also displays element names.

Local Element Forces

Reports forces and moments translated into the CAESAR II local coordinate system. The report
also displays element names. For more information, see Local Coordinates (on page 1052) in the
Technical Discussions section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.

Stresses
Reports stress intensification factors and code stresses for each node in the model. The report
displays the code stresses as a percentage when compared to the allowable stress at each node.
Stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements. The report
also displays element names.

Stresses Extended
Reports stress intensification factors and code stresses for each node in the model. The report
displays the code stresses as a percentage when compared to the allowable stress at each node.
Stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements. The report
also displays axial stresses, bending stresses, torsional stresses, hoop stresses, and element
names.

Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented in summary format for all selected load cases.

Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases can be included in a single report using the Code
Compliance report. The report shows the stress calculation for all selected load cases together,
on an element-by-element basis.

Cumulative Usage Report

The Cumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load
cases present. After the Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of load
cases selected, the report shows the combined impact of simulating selected fatigue loadings.

Bend KHK2 Evaluation Report

Reports bend behavior due to KHK Level 2 loading conditions. The software generates a separate
report for each selected load case. When theta (θ) bend values exceed the allowable theta, the
check fails, and the failing bends display in red.
 Only bends are included in this report.

 Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For more
information, see Filter Reports (on page 597).
General Computed Results

General Computed Results lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports, which
are not associated with load cases.
Topics
Load Case Report ....................................................................... 620
Hanger Table with Text ............................................................... 620
Input Echo .................................................................................. 621
Miscellaneous Data..................................................................... 622
Warnings .................................................................................... 623

Load Case Report

The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder),
User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Cases (Output Status,
Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load
cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results column of the Static Output
Processor.
Hanger Table with Text

The Hanger Table report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by
CAESAR II or by you:
 Node number
 Number of springs required
 Hanger table figure number and size
 Hot load
 Theoretical installed load (the hanger setting in the field prior to pulling the pins)
 Actual installed load (the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty)

 Spring rate from the catalog

 Horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II output.
 Hanger constant effort force (provided when constant effort supports are selected)
The Hanger Table with Text report displays more descriptive text and includes additional
information:
 Variable support spring designed
 Maximum and minimum allowed single spring load
 Recommended installation clearance as read from the catalogs
Input Echo
Displays the Input Listing Options dialog box and allows you to select which portions of the input
are reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions,
material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:

 Uniform Loads
 Wind/Wave
 SIF's and TEE's
 Bends
 Rigids
 Reducers
 Flanges
 Equipment Check
 Restraints
 Displacements
 Hanger
Select the options you want to print or view, and then click OK.

Miscellaneous Data
Displays the Miscellaneous Data Options dialog box and allows you to select which portions of
the input are reported in this output format. Select the options you want to print or view, and then
click OK.
The following report options are available:
Bends SIF
SIF and flexibility data for bends
Allowables
Allowable stress summary
Tees SIF
SIF and flexibility data for tees
Reducers
Reducers report
Nozzles
Nozzle flexibility data
Pipe Prop #1
Pipe properties report with weights and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element
Pipe Prop #2
Pipe properties report with weights and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element
C.G.
Center-of-gravity report
B.O.M.
Bill of materials
Wind
Wind input data
Wave
Wave input data
Seismic
Seismic input and calculated g factors (magnifiers of gravitational loading).

Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, the Output
Viewer Wizard dialog box displays. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking
Less <<.
The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational
buttons. You can add any report to the view by clicking Add. You can delete any report by clicking
Remove. You can arrange the order of the reports by highlighting the report and then moving it up
or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
You can send a report to the screen or to a printer by selecting the appropriate radio button in the
upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog box. After clicking Finish, the reports are
automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.

To generate a table of contents, select Generate Table of Contents (TOC).

The Table of Contents does not display if Send to Screen is selected, regardless if the
Generate Table of Contents (TOC) check box was selected or cleared.
Report Template Editor

You can create your own reports or edit existing reports using the Report Template Editor. To
create a new report, select one or more load cases, and then click Add New Custom Report
Template (Options > Custom Reports > New on the menu). You can also customize an
existing report by selecting the load case, a standard or custom report name, and then clicking
Edit an Existing Custom Report Template (Options > Custom Reports > Edit on the
menu).
The Report Template Editor dialog box consists of two sections: the template editor to the left
and the preview grid to the right.
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorer’s folder view. There
are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general report
editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment Nozzle
Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows you to specify the report name, enter a brief description of
the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description
displays on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template
Settings category.

There are three report types available:

 Individual
Generates output reports, one per selected load case, in a format similar to the standard
Displacements or Restraints reports.
 Summary
Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in a format
similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.
 Code Compliance
Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report, similar
to the standard Code Compliance report.
Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body text,
formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and the
report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job Title or
Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding item.
Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line check box
(used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with MAX values
for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used with
Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear this
option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These two
options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the Displacements
category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational (RX, RY, and RZ)
fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other stress related fields. A
number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will be placed in. When
nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Field Name Description
Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Precision Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Sort Order Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending,

descending, or in no order. This gives you flexibility of reviewing
reports for maximum (or minimum) values.
Font Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.
Align Values Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the column.

Field Name Description
Field Caption Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This
may be useful to customize the display of the output
displacements in the report to reflect the plant
North/South/East/West directions or vertical and horizontal
notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.
Column Width Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of displayed
characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in the
Preview Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to close
the column and remove it from the report. Type -1 to size the
column to the predefined default size.
Units Based Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed
Precision number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units
Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this
case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this
field displays in the Help box at the bottom of the editor window.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. You
can drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports.
Double-clicking the column header sorts that column’s values in ascending or descending order.
The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column
Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Click the column header once to
highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines. The entire report is available after you
select the appropriate load cases and custom report name on the Static Output Processor
dialog box and click View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom
report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As...
dialog box prompts you to enter the new template name, a brief description, and the report type.
Click Preview Report to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Click the same button
again to add the grid lines for editing.

Available Commands
The Static Output Processor window menus and toolbars provide commands to review, create,
and modify reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars navigate and display report information in
graphics mode.
Topics
View Menu .................................................................................. 627
Options Menu ............................................................................. 631
Plot Options Menu ...................................................................... 640
Plot View Menu ........................................................................... 654
Element Viewer Dialog Box ......................................................... 656
View Menu
Activates and disables toolbars.
Topics
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................ 627
Displacements Toolbar ............................................................... 628
Grow Toolbar .............................................................................. 628
Restraints Toolbar ...................................................................... 629
Stresses Toolbar......................................................................... 629
Reports Navigation Toolbar......................................................... 630
Custom Reports Toolbar ............................................................. 631
Standard Toolbar
Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save
Saves the selected reports to a text file. You are prompted for the file name. A table of
contents for all currently selected reports is added to the end of the text file.
Load Case Name
Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list
box in the Static Output Processor window. You enter user-defined load case names in the
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see Load
Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 559).
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. For more information, see Title Lines (on page 639).

Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 111).
View Animation
Shows animation of the displacement solution. For more information, see View Animations
(on page 636).
Graphical Output
Superimposes analytical results onto a plot of the system model. For more information, see
Graphical Output (on page 636).
Print
Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed.
Using Microsoft Word
Send the report directly to Microsoft Word. For more information, see Using Microsoft Word
(on page 632).
Using Microsoft Excel
Sends output reports directly to Excel. For more information, see Using Microsoft Excel (on
page 633).
On Screen
Displays the selected reports in a window on the computer screen. For more information, see
On Screen (on page 632).
Displacements Toolbar
Maximum Displacements
Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently displayed model.
The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera
viewpoint is repositioned preserving the optical distance to the model. This brings the
displaced node to the center of the view.
a. The software starts with the highest value for the given direction. After you press Enter,
the remaining values are placed in a similar manner until all values become zero.
b. Click Maximum Displacements again to clear the view of the displayed values and
highlighting.
Click Show > Displacement > Maximum Displacement >X, Y, or Z to access this
command from the menu. If Show Element Viewer Grid is selected, then the viewer displays
the Displacements report for the selected load case and highlights the column and row to
represent the displacement direction and current node.

Grow Toolbar
Deflected Shape
Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the selected load
case. Click the down arrow to display an additional menu with the selected feature checked
and the Adjust Deflection Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale
Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor. You may not be able to see the deflected
shape if the value is too small. If you enter a scale value that is too large, the model may be
discontinued. Select Show > Displacement > Scale to access this command from the menu.
Grow
Displays the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.
Restraints Toolbar
Output Restraints Symbols
Adds restraint symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of
the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping geometry.
Maximum Restraint Loads

Places the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads for a selected load case on the
currently displayed geometry. Maximum Restraints Loads displays the load magnitude
value next to the node, highlights the element containing the node, and is brought to the
center of the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options
are still available. After pressing Enter, any remaining values are placed in a similar manner.
Stresses Toolbar
Overstress
Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with a calculated
code stress to allowable stress ratio of 100% or more display in red. The remaining nodes
or elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to
quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.
Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check
was done (such as where there are allowable stresses available).
Overstressed nodes display in red in the Event Viewer dialog box (if it is enabled).
The model is still fully functional. You can zoom, pan, or rotate it.
Maximum Code Stress
Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order.
Maximum Code Stress operation is similar to Maximum Displacements. The
stress value is displayed next to the node, and the element containing the node is highlighted
and moved to the center of the view.
If needed, use the Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options. Press Enter

and the next highest value is placed with corresponding element highlighting.
In addition to the numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this command
provides a graphical representation and distribution of large, calculated code stresses
throughout the system.
Code Stress Colors by Value
Displays the piping system in a range of colors where the color corresponds to a certain
boundary value of the code stress. Use this feature to see the distribution of the code stresses
in the model for a particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key
legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can
be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the Configuration/Environment.
For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Code Stress Colors by Percent
Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain
percentage ratio of code stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for load cases
where a code compliance check was done such as where there are allowable stresses.
Use Code Stress Colors by Percent to see the distribution of the code stress to allowable
ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with the corresponding color
key also displays in the upper-left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be
resized and moved.
Clicking the arrow to the right of the button displays an additional menu with two options:
Display and Adjust Settings. Selecting the Display option displays the color distribution.
Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress Settings dialog box where values
and corresponding colors can be set or adjusted. These settings are related to the particular
job for which they are set, and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the
current job data directory see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 400).
Reports Navigation Toolbar

Navigation commands in this toolbar become enabled by selecting at least one report.
/ View Previous Report / View Next Report
Navigates through the report tabs.
Go To
Displays the list of currently-opened reports in alphabetical order so that you can quickly and
conveniently display the required report.
Find in Report
Provides search capabilities for a specific node number, maximum values of any of the report
fields, of for any text or number.
Zoom In / Zoom Out
Zooms the view in or out without affecting the actual report font or formatting. The zoom level
can also be controlled from the right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to
the current report and is temporal until the report is closed.

Save Current Custom Report Template

Saves the changes to the custom report when the Report Template Editor is opened.
Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name
Enables keeping the original report and saving the changes to another report when the
Report Template Editor is launched.
Preview Report
Removes the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Clicking the button again adds the grid lines.
Custom Reports Toolbar

Commands in the Custom Reports toolbar enable you to manipulate the generated reports.
Add New Custom Report Template
Creates a new custom report. For more information, see New Custom Report Template (on
page 633).
Edit Existing Custom Report Template
Modifies an existing custom report. For more information, see Edit Custom Report Template
(on page 634).
Delete Custom Report Template
Deletes a custom report. For more information, see Delete Custom Report Template (on page
634).
Reset Default Custom Report Templates
Replaces the current custom report templates with the default templates. For more
information, see Reset Default Custom Report Templates (on page 635).
Import Custom Report
Imports a custom report template. For more information, see Import Custom Report (on page
635).
Export Custom Report
Saves any custom generated report to a text file. For more information, see Export Custom
Report (on page 635).

Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.
Topics
On Screen .................................................................................. 632
Set Report Font .......................................................................... 632
Using Microsoft Word.................................................................. 632
Using Microsoft Excel ................................................................. 633
New Custom Report Template .................................................... 633
Edit Custom Report Template ..................................................... 634
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................. 634
Reset Default Custom Report Templates .................................... 635
Import Custom Report................................................................. 635
Export Custom Report ................................................................ 635
View Animations ......................................................................... 636
Graphical Output......................................................................... 636
Title Lines ................................................................................... 639
Load Case Name ........................................................................ 639
Node Name ................................................................................ 639
Return to Input ............................................................................ 640
On Screen
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen on the toolbar.
Set Report Font

Activates the Font dialog box used to define the text font, font style, and font size. You can select
this command from Options > View Reports > Set Report Font on the Static Output
Processor window menus, or by clicking the small down arrow next to On Screen on the
standard toolbar. Some fonts that you can display reports in to the screen may not be available on
your printer. If the font is not available for your printer, the closest matching font on your printer is
used.
Using Microsoft Word

Send output reports directly to Microsoft Word, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Word
formatting features (font selection, margin control, and so forth) and printer support from
CAESAR II. Select Options > View Reports > Using Microsoft Word or click on the toolbar.
Word is available as an output device to the Static Output Processor and the Dynamic Output
windows. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.

2. Click View Reports Using Microsoft Word .

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.
A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, displays on the first page of the
Microsoft Word document.
Using Microsoft Excel

Sends output reports directly to Excel, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Excel’s
features and printer support from CAESAR II. Excel is available as an output device to the Static
Output Processor window. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports using Microsoft Excel .
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.
Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with the corresponding report name. There is no
generated table of contents.
New Custom Report Template

Creates a new custom report using the Report Template Editor dialog box. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 624). You must select at least one load case
from the Load Cases Analyzed list before you can create a new report template.
1. From the Load Cases Analyzed list, select the load case for the custom report template.
2. Click Options > Custom Reports > New .
3. In the Template Name box, enter a name for your custom report.
4. In the Template Description box, enter a description.
5. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, create your custom report.
6. Click Save Current Custom Report Template on the Reports Navigation toolbar.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.

Edit Custom Report Template

Modifies and saves existing custom reports using the Report Template Editor. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 624).
1. Select one or more load cases from the list.
2. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to edit.
3. Select Options > Custom Reports > Edit .
4. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, edit your custom report.
5. Click Save Current Custom Report Template on the Reports Navigation toolbar.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR -
Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name to save your edit to a
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.
Delete Custom Report Template

Deletes a custom report template. You cannot delete a standard delivered report using this
command.
You cannot undo the deletion of a custom report template.
1. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to delete.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Delete .
3. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the report.

Reset Default Custom Report Templates

Replaces the current report templates, both CAESAR II delivered and custom defined reports,
with the default report templates delivered with CAESAR II. Use this command if you received a
new version or a patch of CAESAR II and want to use the new reports.
Make sure that you export any custom reports that you want to keep before
using this command. This command affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone. For
more information about exporting custom reports, see Export Custom Report (on page 635).
Import Custom Report

Imports a custom report template that was exported earlier using Options > Custom Reports
> Export .
The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can be read from any network location. After the
report template file is imported, it becomes a part of the current configuration. The new report is
appended to the Custom Reports list of the Static Output Processor window. The default name
of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can also access this feature by
selecting Options > Custom Reports > Import.
Export Custom Report

Saves any custom generated report to a text file, which you can then share with others. The
report template file name extension is *.C2RPT and can be saved to any accessible location. The
default file name is the custom report name. Use Options > Custom Reports > Import to
import these saved custom reports.
1. In the Custom Reports list, select the report to export.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Export .
3. Select a folder and enter a file name.
4. Click Save.

View Animations
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen appears:
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop-down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.hsf must be transferred along
with the HTML file for proper display.
Graphical Output
To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability to
switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes, highlighting
and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model. Another
advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of stresses by value
and by percentage use color.

A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars or
the Show menu, are broken into submenus:
 Displacements
 Restraints
 Forces/Moments
 Stresses
Selection Options Toolbar

Show Event Viewer Grid
Shows or hides the Event Viewer on the plot. See Element Viewer Dialog Box (on page 656).
Zoom to Selection
Fits the selected element in the view.
Organization Tools Toolbar

Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box, which allows graphical editing of line numbers. You
can do the following from this pane.
 Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the 3D
graphical display.
 Remove an existing line number.
 Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
 Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line number,
simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in the Line
Numbers dialog box.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number dialog box, the corresponding
elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform block (global) operations.
For more information, see Line Numbers Dialog Box (on page 637).
Line Numbers Dialog Box

Controls options of the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe
elements. You can set options for line numbers on the Classic Piping Input and the Static
Output Processor.
Create (Create from Selection)

Creates a pipe run from the selected elements. You can select elements from the 3D model or
the Line Numbers dialog box. The line number is given the default name Line Number <x>,
where <x> is a sequential number. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
Remove (Remove Line Number)

Deletes the selected pipe run line numbers. Elements in the pipeline move to the next line
number up in the sequence. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number.
Reset (Reset Settings)

Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or
Reset All to only reset the selected line number.
Line Number Views

Line number and element rows display in a tree view. Elements are named by their beginning and
ending node numbers. You can create a view using the following methods:
 Select a row to change the visibility to 100%. Clear a row to change the visibility to 0%.
 When you select or clear a line number, the software also selects or clears all of line number's
elements. You can then select or clear individual elements.
 Select or clear Main to change the selection of all line numbers and elements. You can then
select or clear individual line numbers and elements.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers or multiple elements.
Previous (Previous View)

Saves the current view and returns to the previous view. If no view is saved, all rows are
selected.
Invert (Invert Selection)

Reverses the line number selection to clear the selection of previously-selected rows and to
select the rows not previously selected.

<type here to search>

Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to pipe run line numbers or
elements that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all line numbers and
elements in the tree view. You can search for a name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers and elements on or off. Clear a line number to reduce
visibility to 0% for the line number and its elements. Clear an element to reduce visibility to 0%
for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, node numbers do not display when the element
opacity is 0%. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 360).
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of line numbers and elements. 100% indicates that the element is
opaque. 0% indicates that the element is invisible. Specify the value of a line number to
change opacity for the line number and its elements. Specify the value of an element to
change opacity for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, the node number opacity matches the element
opacity. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on page
360).
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. You can enter a two-line title or description for a
report. The title can be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive; or
the title can be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
The title line allows for 28 characters per line.
Load Case Name

Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list box
in the Static Output Processor window. You enter user-defined load case names in the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see Load Cases Tab
(Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 559).
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.

Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 111).
Plot Options Menu

Performs actions associated with the display of the model. You must select Options > Graphical
Output before these commands are available.
Topics
Range......................................................................................... 640
Restraints ................................................................................... 641
Anchors ...................................................................................... 642
Displacements ............................................................................ 642
Hangers ...................................................................................... 645
Nozzle Flexibility ......................................................................... 646
Flange Check ............................................................................. 646
Nozzle Check ............................................................................. 646
Forces ........................................................................................ 647
Uniform Loads ............................................................................ 647
Wind/Wave ................................................................................. 648
Axis ............................................................................................ 648
Node Numbers ........................................................................... 649
Length ........................................................................................ 650
Tees ........................................................................................... 650
Expansion Joints & Rigids........................................................... 650
Diameters ................................................................................... 651
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 651
Corrosion .................................................................................... 652
Piping Codes .............................................................................. 652
Material ...................................................................................... 652
Pipe Density ............................................................................... 652
Fluid Density............................................................................... 652
Refractory Thickness .................................................................. 653
Refractory Density ...................................................................... 653
Insulation Thickness ................................................................... 653
Insulation Density ....................................................................... 653
Cladding Thickness..................................................................... 653
Cladding Density......................................................................... 653
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt ................................................................ 654
Temperatures ............................................................................. 654
Pressures ................................................................................... 654
Range
Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Plot Tools toolbar: Range

Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need to
locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays the
Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
 Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics highlighting
options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range
command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are visible. Also, if
using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined displacements, the
Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight correctly.
 Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Range Dialog Box

Controls options for manipulating ranges.
Show only
Specifies the items to show.
From
Specifies the node number for the start of the range.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the range.
At These Elements
All elements that exist in the model are displayed. This list indicates which elements are
included in the range. Clear the check box for elements that you do not want to include.
Add
Adds an item to the At These Elements list.
Reverse Selection
Clears all check boxes that were selected in the At These Elements list and selects all check
boxes that were cleared.
Select All
Selects all the check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Clear All
Clears all of the check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Restraints
Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints
Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the restraints and whether
or not the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).

When Restraints is turned on the software displays:

 A directional arrow for a restraint.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for rotational restraints,
such as RX, RY, or RZ.
Anchors
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors
Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model, as
well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).

Displacements
Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements
Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of displacements
on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:
 A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant rotational
displacement vector.
 A pair of shorter directional arrows for Fixed linear displacement. (Disp. Value = 0)

 A pair of shorter directional arrows with curved arrows for Fixed rotational displacement.
 A directional arrow with a sphere at the top for non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden
fixed vectors.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) with a sphere at the top for
the resultant rotational non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden fixed vectors.
On the toolbar, you can also specify:

 Whether to hide or show fixed displacements - Show Fixed.

Hover the cursor over displacement arrows to see the displacement values for the displayed
vector:
Where a restraint has a CNode with displacement, the displacements are displayed with values
displayed with the Node number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the Configuration
Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements (Component
Color) (on page 80) and Display Options Toolbar (on page 369).
Hangers
Piping Input menu: Options > Hangers
Plot Tools toolbar: Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the hangers and whether
or not the software displays hangers with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Hangers is turned on, the software displays:

 A single hanger at the location of the hanger.
 Multiple hangers at a single location as separate symbols with leaders to the location.
This is a graphical representation of the number of hangers at the location, not of

the hanger installation.
Nozzle Flexibility
Piping Input menu: Options > NozzleFlexibility
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Displays the nozzles for which you want to specify stiffnesses.
Flange Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Displays the flange nodes that the software evaluates.
Nozzle Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Displays the nozzles in which you want to set a check.

Forces
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces
Legends toolbar: Forces
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:
 A directional arrow for a force.
 A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
You can also specify:

You can change the default arrow colors in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color) (on
page 81) and Forces/Moments 2 (Component Color) (on page 81).
Uniform Loads
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads
Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.

The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave
Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see the
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined display
in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Axis
Piping Input menu: Options > Axis
Plot Tools toolbar: Axis

Turns the display of the coordinate system on or off. You can select the following options (in
Classic Piping Input and Static Output Processor):
Axis Planes
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes.
Axis
Displays the coordinate system axes.
Off
Turns off axis display.
The software sets the default value from the value of Axis Mode (on page 89) in
the Configuration Editor.

North Arrow
Displays a north arrow with the coordinate system. The North arrow indicates the North
orientation of the plant.
The software sets the default value from the value of North Direction (on page 90)
in the Configuration Editor.
Node Numbers
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers
Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N.
When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the pipe:
You can also control the node number display using the following options:
All
Displays all node numbers or names.
Anchors
Displays anchor node numbers or names.
Hangers
Displays hanger node numbers or names.
Restraints
Displays restraint node numbers or names.
Names Only
Displays node names if they are assigned. Node numbers do not display. You must select
Names Only in combination with All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints.

Show Tags
Displays support tags, hanger tags, and element names. You must select Show Tags in
combination with All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints.
You can customize node number, node name, and tag display by combining options, such as:
 All + Show Tags displays all node numbers, names, and tags.
 Anchors + Show Tags displays anchor node numbers, names, and tags.
 All + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not display.
 Hangers + Names Only displays hanger node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
 All + Show Tags + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
In cases where a node contains multiple values, a tag overrides a node name, and a
node name overrides a node number.
Length
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Plot Tools toolbar: Lengths

Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Piping Input menu: Options > Tees
Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Displays where you have specified tees or SIFs on the model.

Expansion Joints & Rigids

Piping Input menu: Options > Expansion Joints & Rigids
Plot Tools toolbar: Expansion Joints & Rigids
Emphasizes the display of elements such as restraints, anchors, displacements, and expansion
joints by changing pipe element display to lines.
Diameters
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Legends toolbar: Diameters

Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the diameter
variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.
Wall Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Legends toolbar: Wall Thicknesses
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the wall
thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change

Corrosion
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Legends toolbar: Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to see
the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes
Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the piping
code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Piping Input menu: Options > Material
Legends toolbar: Materials
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the material
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Pipe Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density
Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your
needs.
Fluid Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Legends toolbar: Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the fluid
displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your
needs.

Refractory Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
meet your needs.
Refractory Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Insulation Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness
Legends toolbar: Insulation
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change
Insulation Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Legends toolbar: Insulation Density

Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see the
insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Cladding Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
meet your needs.

Cladding Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change the
Temperatures
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures
Legends toolbar: Show Temps

Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
Legends toolbar: Show Pressures

Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
Plot View Menu

Performs actions associated with viewing the model. You must select Options > Graphical
Output before these commands are available.
Topics
Reset .......................................................................................... 655
Front View .................................................................................. 655
Back View................................................................................... 655
Top View .................................................................................... 655
Bottom View ............................................................................... 655
Left-side View ............................................................................. 655
Right-side View........................................................................... 655
Southeast ISO View.................................................................... 656
Southwest ISO View ................................................................... 656
Northeast ISO View .................................................................... 656
Northwest ISO View.................................................................... 656
4 View ........................................................................................ 656

Reset
Piping Input menu: View > Reset
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Resets the view to the default settings.
Front View
Piping Input menu: View > Front View
Standard Views toolbar: Front
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Piping Input menu: View > Back View
Standard Views toolbar: Back
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Piping Input menu: View > Top View
Standard Views toolbar: Top
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View
Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Left
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Right
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.

Southeast ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Southeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southeast Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Southwest ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Southwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southwest Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.
Northeast ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Northeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northeast Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Northwest ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Northwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northwest Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
4 View
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View
Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by moving
the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.

Element Viewer Dialog Box

Use options in the Element Viewer dialog box to navigate among the elements, navigate to
various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load cases. This is done in the
Report Selection pane on the left in the dialog box.
The dialog box has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer.
 Click the + sign for a particular load case expands the tree to show reports.
 Select the report to display the data in the grid view to the right.
 Select a node or an element in the grid view when Select Elements is enabled to highlight the
corresponding element on the graphics view.
 Zoom to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly,
click an element on the graphics view to highlight the corresponding data row in the report
view. This is a bi-directional connection.
 Change the load case within the Element Viewer dialog box to update the graphics view (if
applicable), and the Load Case Selection box on the Load Case toolbar.

SECTION 9
Dynamic Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Dynamic Analysis

Main window menu: Analysis > Dynamics
Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. This section introduces dynamic analysis concepts
and describes data input for each of the options available.
In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems .............................................. 658
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................... 664
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ........................................................ 665
The Dynamic Analysis Window ................................................... 666
Excitation Frequencies Tab ......................................................... 669
Harmonic Forces Tab ................................................................. 671
Harmonic Displacements Tab ..................................................... 674
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ....................................... 677
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ..................................... 682
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab............................................... 697
Lumped Masses Tab .................................................................. 704
Snubbers Tab ............................................................................. 705
Control Parameters Tab .............................................................. 707
Advanced Tab ............................................................................ 739
Directive Builder.......................................................................... 742
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data ........................................................... 743
DLF/Spectrum Generator ............................................................ 744
Relief Load Synthesis ................................................................. 754
Analysis Results ......................................................................... 765
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems

A piping system can respond far differently to a dynamic load than it would to a static load of the
same magnitude. Static loads are those which are applied slowly enough that the system has time
to react and internally distribute the loads, thus remaining in equilibrium. In equilibrium, all forces
and moments are resolved (that is, the sum of the forces and moments are zero) and the pipe
does not move.
A dynamic load changes quickly with time. The piping system does not have time to internally
distribute the loads. Forces and moments are not always resolved, resulting in unbalanced loads
and pipe movement. Because the sum of forces and moments are not in equilibrium, the
internally-induced loads can be different—either higher or lower—than the applied loads.
The software provides several methods for analyzing different types of system response under
dynamic loads. Each method provides a trade-off of accuracy versus computing requirements.

Dynamic Analysis
The methods include modal natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis.
Modal natural frequency analysis measures the tendency of a piping system to respond to
dynamic loads. The modal natural frequencies of a system typically should not be too close to
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause less
trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural frequencies
and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have the
same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments, restraint
loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a node, then
the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that node. The
stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to one
response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the total
system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses, are
compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis can
be used in a wide variety of applications. For example, in uniform inertial loading, ground motion
associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration response
spectra. The assumption is that all supports move with the defined ground motion and the piping
system “catches up” to the supports. It is this inertial effect which loads the system. The shock
spectra, which define the ground motion, can vary between the three global directions and can
even change for different groups of supports (such as independent or uniform support motion).
Another example is based on single point loading. CAESAR II uses this technique to analyze a
wide variety of impulse-type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water hammer loads, slug flow
loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse dynamic loads at various points
in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can be predicted using the force
spectrum method.
Time history analysis is one of the most accurate methods, because it uses numeric integration
of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load duration.
This method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution, requires more
resources (such as computer memory, calculation speed and time) than other methods. Time
history analysis is not appropriate when, for example, the spectrum method offers sufficient
accuracy.
Force versus time profiles for piping are usually one of three types: Random (on page 660),
Harmonic (see Newsletter Index -
http://www.coade.com/Mechanical%20Engineering%20News%20Index.shtml), or Impulse (on
page 662). Each profile has a preferred solution method. These profiles and the load types
identified with them are described below.

Dynamic Analysis
Random
With this type of profile, the load unpredictably changes direction or magnitude with time. Even
with the unpredictability, some load characteristics can predominate. Loads with random
force/time profiles are best solved using a spectrum method or a static equivalent.
The major types of loads with random time profiles are wind and earthquake.
Wind
Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe
creating an equivalent pressure on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they can have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, such as
sudden changes in direction and velocity. As the time period lengthens, the number of wind
changes also increases in an unpredictable manner, eventually encompassing nearly all
directions and a wide range of velocities.
Earthquake
Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random ground motion, such as
accelerations, velocities, and displacements and corresponding inertia loads (the mass of the
system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage.
Random ground motion is the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic) ground
motions. Two earthquakes can be similar in terms of predominant direction (for example, along a
fault), predominant harmonic frequencies (if some underlying cyclic motions tend to dominate),
and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time can be quite different and
unpredictable.
Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic profile,
ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load can be
described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos(ω t + φ)
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
ω = angular frequency (radian/sec)
φ = phase angle (radians)
t = time (sec)
Loads with harmonic force/time profiles are best solved using a harmonic method. The major
types of loads with harmonic time profiles are equipment vibration, acoustic vibration, and
pulsation.

Dynamic Analysis
Equipment Vibration
If rotating equipment attached to a pipe is slightly out-of-tolerance (for example, when a drive shaft
is out-of-round), it can impose a small cyclic displacement onto the pipe at the point of attachment.
This is the location where the displacement cycle most likely corresponds to the operating cycle of
the equipment. The displacement at the pipe connection can be imperceptibly small, but could
cause significant dynamic-loading problems. Loading versus time is easily predicted after the
operating cycle and variation from tolerance is known.
Acoustic Vibration
If fluid flow characteristics are changed within a pipe (for example, when flow conditions change
from laminar to turbulent as the fluid passes through an orifice), slight lateral vibrations may be set
up within the pipe. These vibrations often fit harmonic patterns, with predominant frequencies
somewhat predictable based upon the flow conditions. For example, Strouhal’s equation predicts
that the developed frequency (Hz) of vibration caused by flow through an orifice will be
somewhere between 0.2 V/D and 0.3 V/D, where V is the fluid velocity (ft./sec) and D is the
diameter of the orifice (ft). Wind flow around a pipe sets up lateral displacements as well (a
phenomenon known as vortex shedding), with an exciting frequency of approximately 0.18 V/D,
where V is the wind velocity and D is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Pulsation
During the operation of a reciprocating pump or a compressor, the fluid is compressed by pistons
driven by a rotating shaft. This causes a cyclic change over time in the fluid pressure at any
specified location in the system. Unequal fluid pressures at opposing elbow pairs or closures
create an unbalanced pressure load in the system. Because the pressure balance changes with
the cycle of the compressor, the unbalanced force also changes. The frequency of the force cycle
is likely to be some multiple of that of the equipment operating cycle, because multiple pistons
cause a corresponding number of force variations during each shaft rotation. The pressure
variations continue to move along through the fluid. In a steady state flow condition, unbalanced
forces may be present simultaneously at any number of elbow pairs in the system. Load
magnitudes can vary. Load cycles may or may not be in phase with each other, depending upon
the pulse velocity, the distance of each elbow pair from the compressor, and the length of the
piping legs between the elbow pairs.
For example, if the pressure at elbow a is Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow b is Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force acting along the pipe between the two elbows is:
F(t) = (Pa(t) - Pb(t)) A
Where:
A = internal area of the pipe
Assuming that the pressure peak hits the elbow "a" at time t = 0, Pa(t) is:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos ω t
Where:
Pavg = average pressure in the line
dP = alternating component of the pressure
ω = driving angular frequency of pulse
If the length of the pipe between the elbows is L, then the pressure pulse reaches elbow bts after
it has passed elbow a:

Dynamic Analysis
ts = L / c
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid
Therefore, the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos (ω t - Q)
Where:
Q = phase shift between the pressure peaks at a and b
= ω ts
Combining these equations, the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair is:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos ω t - cos ω (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation exists at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.
Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains relatively
constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this type of
profile resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved using time
history or force spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are relief valve,
fluid hammer, and slug flow.
Relief Valve
When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to vent
fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system. This force ramps up from zero to its full value over the opening time of the valve.
The relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid is
vented to relieve the over-pressure condition. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet force
over the closing time of the valve.
Fluid Hammer
When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted through valve closure or a pump trip,
the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped instantaneously. As fluid continues to
flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or pump), the fluid compresses causing a
high-pressure situation. On the other side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the
stoppage point, creating a low pressure (vacuum) situation. Fluid at the next elbow or closure
along the pipeline is still at the original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure
force acting on the valve seat or the elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of
flow stoppage, causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the
pulse moves past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run,
leading to a balanced (that is, zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. The unbalanced pressure,
by passing the elbow, has now shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure load continues

Dynamic Analysis
to rise and fall in sequential legs as the pressure pulse travels back to the source, or forward to the
sink.
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow,
such as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Because the leading edge of the
pressure pulse is not expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the ramp-down
time is the same. The duration of the load from initiation through the beginning of the down ramp is
equal to the time required for the pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe leg.
Slug Flow
Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (that is, fluids that are uniformly
liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, the fluid may have multiple phases. For example,
slurry systems transport solid materials in liquids and gases may condense, creating pockets of
liquid in otherwise gaseous media. Systems carrying multi-phase fluids are susceptible to slug
flow.
In general, fluid changes direction in a piping system through the application of forces at elbows.
This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = ρ v A [2(1 - cos θ)]
2 1/2
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
ρ = fluid density
v = fluid velocity
A = internal area of pipe
θ = inclusion angle at elbow
With constant fluid density, this force is normally constant and is small enough that it can be easily
absorbed through tension in the pipe wall. The force is then passed on to adjacent elbows with
equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net load on the system. Therefore, these types of
momentum loads are usually ignored in analysis. If the fluid velocity or density changes with time,
this momentum load will also change with time, leading to a dynamic load which may not be
canceled by the load at other elbows.

Dynamic Analysis
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is
insignificant because the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. The liquid suddenly slug hits the
elbow, increasing the momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long as it
takes for the slug to traverse the elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again with the exact
profile of the slug load depending upon the shape of the slug. The time duration of the load
depends upon the length of the slug divided by the velocity of the fluid.
Where:
F1 = ρv A(1 - cos θ)
2
Fr = ρv A [2(1 - cos θ)]

2 ½
F2 = ρv2 A sin θ
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked. The
model is also usually run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins, but this is not
required unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If nonlinear
supports are present, the static analysis must be run and the results made available before the
dynamic analysis can be performed.
The dynamic analysis techniques used by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and
structural systems. Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An
example of a nonlinear effect is slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment and
impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model, the pipe must be either held down or allowed to
move freely. Nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to active or inactive for the
dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows you to set the nonlinear restraints to any configuration found
in the static results by specifying the value of Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status (on
page 720) on the Control Parameters tab. You usually select the operating case to set the
nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active in the static operating case
and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear supports for dynamics, CAESAR
II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the dynamic analysis. The pipe does not
move up or down at that point regardless of the dynamic load.
Another nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic
analysis. By default, CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If
requested, CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic model
by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with friction, the
friction stiffness is added in the X and Z directions. You define the stiffness of these springs as a

Dynamic Analysis
function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II calculates the friction
stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static case results, the
friction coefficient, and the Stiffness Factor for Friction defined on the Control Parameters tab.
For example, if a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis is 1000 lb and the friction
coefficient (mu) is 0.3, then the total friction load is 300 lb. If Stiffness Factor for Friction is 500,
then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(1000^2 + 300^2)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into
the dynamic model in the two directions perpendicular to the line of action of the friction restraint.
Converting friction damping into stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but serves as a good
engineering approximation for dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.
Dynamic Analysis Workflow

Before starting and error checking a dynamic analysis, develop dynamic analysis data using the
following steps. The steps can occur in any order.
Specify the loads

You do not need to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or
calculated. Harmonic analysis requires the driving frequencies and forces or displacements to
define and locate the sinusoidally varying point loads.
Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention. The
response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets are built for
force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra/time history and force sets
are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load cases
may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code compliance on
occasional stresses. The software provides methods to simplify many of these tasks.
Modify the mass and stiffness model

For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam element
between two nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at the node
points to model anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis model. The
masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses framing into the node.
These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of inertia are ignored in
the dynamic mass model. Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a large increase in solution
time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of the analysis.
In many instances, the mass and stiffness established in the static model is used without
modification in the dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the deletion
of mass points or degrees of freedom. This usually occurs in models with unnecessary masses far
from the area of interest or unnecessary degrees of freedom that do not act in the direction of
interest. Some piping systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration and do not
affect the static analysis. If these shock absorbers or snubbers were not part of the static model,
they can be added to the dynamic model as additional stiffness.
Set the parameters that control the analysis

Options on the Control Parameters tab set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of
natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history.
General settings for the analysis are also defined, such as maximum frequency cutoff, mode
summation methods, static configuration for nonlinear restraints, and the friction factor for
including friction in the dynamic analysis. The Advanced tab allows you to change the parameters

Dynamic Analysis
governing the eigensolution which does the modal extraction. These parameters should only be
altered under special circumstances.
For more information, see Control Parameters Tab (on page 707) and Advanced Tab (on page
739).
The Dynamic Analysis Window

After the basic model has been constructed, click Analysis > Dynamics or Dynamic Analysis
to perform a dynamic analysis. The Dynamic Analysis window opens.
Toolbar Commands
Analysi Specifies the type of analysis. Select Modal, Harmonic, Earthquake (spectrum),
s Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), or Time History.
Type The window tabs change for each analysis.
Save Input and File > Save Input - Saves entered values to the CAESAR II file.
Check Input and File > Check Input - Opens the Dynamic Syntax Check dialog box to
check entered values for errors.
Run the Analysis and File > Run Analysis - Performs the error check and, if no errors
are found, performs the analysis the dynamic analysis for the selected Analysis Type
and the entered values. Analysis results are then available for review. For more
information, see Analysis Results (on page 765).
Add Entry and Edit > Add Entry - Adds a row to the table.
Delete Entry and Edit > Delete Entry - Deletes a row from the table.

Dynamic Analysis
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points - Specifies spectrum
data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions. For more
information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 743).
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator - Converts

spectrum time waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor
(DLF) curve or other response spectrum. For more information, see DLF/Spectrum
Generator (on page 744).
Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis - Calculates the
magnitudes of relieving thrust forces. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis
(on page 754).
Cmt Changes the selected row in the table to a comment line. You can add comment lines
anywhere in the table.
Modal Analysis (on page 667)

Harmonic Analysis (on page 668)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis (on page 668)
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 668)
Time History Analysis (on page 669)
Dynamic analysis uses the units from the piping input file or from the configuration file of a
structural-only analysis. For more information on dynamic load cases, data, and procedures, see
External Interfaces (on page 1093).
If the model contains spring hangers selected by the software or nonlinear boundary
conditions (such as single directional supports, gaps, rods, or friction), then a static analysis must
be performed before the dynamic analysis to determine how the nonlinear supports are acting.
Modal Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Modal is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 704)
Snubbers Tab (on page 705)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 707)
Advanced Tab (on page 739)
Modal analysis extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the modes of vibration of the pipe
system. No loads are specified.

Dynamic Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Excitation Frequencies Tab (on page 669)
Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 671)
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 674)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type in
the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 677)
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 682)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 697)
For earthquake loads, you define one or more response spectra and apply them in a specified
direction over part or all of the piping system.
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Relief Loads (spectrum) or Water Hammer/Slug Flow
(spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Force Sets Tab (on page 687)
Relief Loads
This method solves relief valve loading on a piping system through force spectrum analysis. The
force-time profile is estimated using relief load synthesis and then converted to a force multiplier
(dynamic load factor, or DLF) spectrum. The force is then applied in conjunction with this
spectrum.
Water Hammer/Slug Flow

This method solves water hammer or slug problems. It is similar to the force spectrum analysis
used for relief valve loadings, except that relief load synthesis is not required. The force-time

Dynamic Analysis
profile is estimated and then converted to a force multiplier spectrum. This is linked to force sets in
the load cases.
Force-time profile estimation methods are shown in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Steps proceed as described for relief loads.
Time History Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Time History is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Force Sets Tab (on page 687)
Time history analysis solves the dynamic equation of motion for extracted nodes of vibration. The
results are then summed to find the system results. Loadings are specified in terms of force-time
profiles and force sets. The force-time profile defines the load timing. The force set defines the
load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define the magnitude.
Excitation Frequencies Tab

This tab is available when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
One or more individual frequencies or frequency ranges can be specified, one to a row. CAESAR
II performs a separate analysis for each frequency.
A frequency range has values for Starting Frequency, Ending Frequency, and Increment. You
can enter the number of anticipated load cycles for each frequency range. Load cases are then
calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are calculated with an occasional
stress type.
Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 671) or the
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 674).
Topics
Starting Frequency ..................................................................... 670
Ending Frequency....................................................................... 670
Increment ................................................................................... 670
Load Cycles ................................................................................ 671

Dynamic Analysis
Starting Frequency
Specifies the starting frequency for the analysis in Hertz (Hz). This is the frequency at which the
harmonic forces or displacements are applied.
Harmonic displacements and forces have the form:
A*cosine(ωt+ φ)
where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, φ is the phase angle, and ω is the frequency
of the loading.
Real and imaginary solutions are developed for each frequency in the defined range, from which
any phased solution can be calculated. There must be a starting frequency for a frequency range
to be valid.
Ending Frequency
Specifies the ending frequency for a range of frequencies. Enter the frequency in Hertz (Hz). The
harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each frequency between the Starting
Frequency (on page 670) and Ending Frequency according to the value specified for Increment
(on page 670). This is an optional value.
Increment
Specifies the frequency increment used to step from Starting Frequency (on page 670) to
Ending Frequency (on page 670). The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each
frequency along the specified increment. This is an optional value. If no value is entered, the
software uses a default increment of 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each defined frequency range. Individual
frequencies for excitation are calculated using a "do loop" type of logic to determine the
frequencies in a specified frequency range:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5 CONTINUE
COMPUTE SOLUTION FOR FREQUENCY "X"
X = X + INCREMENT
IF( X .LT. ENDING FREQUENCY+0.001) GO TO 5
The sign of the frequency increment may be modified by the software to properly step from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The starting frequency, the ending frequency, or the
increment may be given as a fraction.
Example
Find harmonic solutions for the following group of turbine equipment speeds:
 Warm up speed: 100 rpm
 Speed increments to bring turbine online: 400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200 rpm.
Speeds are passed through very slowly while coming up to operating speed.
 Operating speed: 3600 rpm

Dynamic Analysis
Convert rotations per minute to cycles per second (Hertz) by dividing by 60:
 Warm up speed: 100/60
 Speed increments: 400/60 to 3200/60 by increments of 400/60
 Operating speed: 3600/60
A low frequency field vibration exists in the piping system at about 3 Hertz:
 Approximate field-observed excitation frequency: 3 Hz
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load is applied at 3 Hz is almost zero. This is
true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load. The maximum varying pressure load was
applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation frequency
was 3 Hz. Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and see if any
dynamic response can be observed.
 Group of field-observed frequencies: "Guessed"
 Excitation frequency: 3 Hz
 Defined by the input below are:
(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) Hz.
2.5 3.5 0.1
Load Cycles
Specifies the number of load cycles. If the harmonic load case is also subjected to fatigue loading,
enter the number of expected cycles. This is an optional value.
The load cycle value is the anticipated number of applications of the load on the system. This
value is used to determine the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material.
For static cases, the full range of calculated stresses is considered. For dynamic cases,
half the range (that is, the amplitude) of calculated stresses is considered.
Harmonic Forces Tab

window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered
in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if two
harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed towards
each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the system.
The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together), producing
a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase angle
determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase loading of
1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0º phase at nodes 10 and 105:

Dynamic Analysis
Force Direction Phase Start Node
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each bend
in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the first
elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows, from
the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the first
elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360º
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each
elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.
Topics
Force .......................................................................................... 673
Direction ..................................................................................... 673
Phase ......................................................................................... 673
Start Node .................................................................................. 673
Stop Node .................................................................................. 673
Increment ................................................................................... 673

Dynamic Analysis
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the harmonic force to be applied.
The form of the harmonic forcing function is:
F(t) = A*cosine(ωt-φ)
where "F(t)" is the force as a function of time. "A" is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic force.
"ω" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "φ" is the phase angle (in
radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the force. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction vectors.
The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction
vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the force in degrees.
Harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to zero, or the harmonic load can
start with its maximum at any time between zero and 2*π/ω seconds. The phase angle f is the
method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase angle is
calculated from the time shift using the equation:
φ(degrees) = 180tω/π
where t is given in seconds and ω is given in radians per second.
The phase angle is usually entered as either zero or 90. Use the phase specification when
defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.
Start Node
Specifies the starting node number in the model at which the force is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the ending node number in the model through which the force is applied. Used as a part
of a "range of nodes" force loading with Start Node and Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
that is incremented between the start and stop nodes is loaded with the value of Force. This value
is optional.

Dynamic Analysis
Example 1
A pressure pulse traveling in the line causes the line to shake at about 2 hertz. The magnitude of
the pressure loading is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to 100.
The harmonic force to model this load is shown as follows. The magnitude is divided by 2 because
the total variation in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1 to 1. To find
the true response magnitudes from a positive-only harmonic load pulse, a static solution with
460/2 lb. acting in the +X direction is superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution to provide the
constant shifting of the load axis. There is a negative load at node 95 due to the negative sign on
the cosine. The pressure pulse is always positive and a negative load never exists. The
superposition of the 460/2 static solution assures that the dynamic load (and probably the
resulting displacements) is always positive.
460 LB pressure load at 2 Hertz
460/2 X 0 95
Example 2
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of
the dynamic load is calculated to be 750 lb. from the manufacturer-provided masses and
eccentricities. Apply this rotating equipment load on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y
loads are 90 degrees out of phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y load
is zero, and when the Y load is at its maximum the X load is zero.
Estimated eccentric load on inline pump DOH-V33203001
750 X 0 350
750 Y 90 350
Harmonic Displacements Tab

window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered
in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if two
harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed towards
each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the system.
The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together), producing
a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase angle
determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase loading of
1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0º phase at nodes 10 and 105:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105

Dynamic Analysis
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each bend
in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the first
elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows, from
the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the first
elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360º
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each
elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.
Topics
Displacement .............................................................................. 675
Direction ..................................................................................... 676
Phase ......................................................................................... 676
Start Node .................................................................................. 676
Stop Node .................................................................................. 676
Increment ................................................................................... 677

Dynamic Analysis
Displacement
Specifies the magnitude of the displacement to be applied.
The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine(ωt-φ)
where "D(t)" is the displacement as a function of time, "A" is the maximum amplitude of the
dynamic displacement. "ω" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "φ" is the
phase angle (in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the displacement. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction
vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for
direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the displacement in degrees.
Harmonic displacement can start with its maximum displacement at time equal to zero, or the
harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time between zero and
t + 2 π/ω seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic
load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the equation:
φ (degrees) = 180tω /π
where t is given in seconds and ω is given in radians per second.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.0.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node in the model at which the displacement is applied.
If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to act at the support
point. If the node is not supported, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to describe the
exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation only becomes important when the node is
supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is supported in the Y direction by a
restraint having a stiffness of 5,000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is also specified at node 55 in
the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the displacement that is
attached to 55. Instead, the displacement creates a load in the Y direction at 55 equal to the
harmonic displacement times 5,000 lb./in.
If Start Node has a value but Stop Node and Increment do not, then the start node must exist in
the piping system. If all three have values, then the range of nodes identified in the range must
include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model through which the displacement is applied.
Used as a part of a "range of nodes" displacement loading with Start Node and Increment. This
value is optional.

Dynamic Analysis
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
incremented between the start and stop nodes is displaced with the value of Displacement. This
value is optional.
Example 1
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange a field-measured 8
mils in the Y direction, and 3 mils in the Z direction. The dynamic displacements are assumed to
be simultaneous with no phase shift. This is because the load causing the displacements is
believed to be from the compressor plunger moving in the X, or axial, direction. The displacements
are skewed because the piping configuration entering the compressor is itself skewed.
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
0.008 Y 0.0 330
0.003 Z 0.0 330
Example 2
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the Increment (on page 673) did not
produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field personnel have measured the dynamic
displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z) directions at the pump piping connections.
The centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the horizontal suction and vertical discharge is
node 15. The magnitude of the Z displacement is measured at 12 mil. The magnitude of the Y
displacement is measured at 3 mils. It is assumed that the vibration is due to the rotation of the
pump shaft, and so the Z and Y loads will be taken to be 90 degrees out of phase.
Harmonic displacements modeling pump vibration on the inline pump DOH-V33203001:
Z magnitude of the load - zero deg. phase shift
0.012 Z 0 15
Y magnitude of the load - 90 deg. phase shift
0.003 Y 90 15
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab

The Spectrum Definitions tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
The Time History Definitions tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis Type
in the Dynamic Analysis window.

Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum Definitions
One analysis may have multiple spectrum types and definitions. Predefined spectra are included
in the spectrum definition list. Any combination of these predefined spectra can be used as is,
deleted, or used with any other defined spectra.
You can include the basic spectrum data definitions in the comments for each ASCII spectrum file.
Select Cmt to create a comment line. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on
page 743) and Examples (on page 681).
Spectrum Data Files

Special force spectrum data files are created by the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on page 744). The
response spectrum table values are entered directly or saved as a file. Data stored in a file can be
used by any analysis.
When using a file created by DLF/Spectrum Generator , you must specify the type of data
which contained in the file, because the file only contains a table of data points. This data is always
frequency versus force-multiplier with linear interpolation. A typical definition is in this format:
Ordinate Range Ordinate

Name Range Type Type Interpol Interpol
#TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN
The data in this file may also be read in directly using Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .
In this case, omit the "#" from the spectrum declaration. For more information, see Enter/Edit
Spectrum Data (on page 743).
Time History Definitions
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra. The profile
must be given a name, time versus force data definitions, and interpolation methods. Response

Dynamic Analysis
spectra data must also be defined directly or from a file. The profile data may be entered with
actual forces or normalized to 1.0, depending on how the force sets are defined.
One force-time profile should be defined for each independent point load on the piping system.
The load case consists of one or more force profiles. Multiple force profiles can create a staggered
loading on the system.
Topics
Name.......................................................................................... 679
Range Type ................................................................................ 680
Ordinate Type ............................................................................. 680
Range Interpol ............................................................................ 680
Ordinate Interpol ......................................................................... 680
Examples.................................................................................... 681
Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum. Names should reflect the spectrum and its intended use. This
name is used when defining the load cases. The name can be any 24-character identifier and is
associated with a particular spectrum or load profile.
Do not include spaces in the name.
The following predefined spectra are delivered with the software. No additional definitions are
required when using these spectra.
El Centro
The El Centro California N-S component, taken from Biggs, "Introduction to Structural Dynamics,"
applies to systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.
REG. GUIDE 1.60

1.60H.5 and 1.60V.5
1.60H2 and 1.60V2
1.60H5 and 1.60V5
1.60H7 and 1.60V7
1.60H1.0 and 1.60V10
Each of these spectra defines the horizontal and vertical components for 0.5, 2, 5, 7, and 10
percent critically damped systems. Associated with each of these spectra is a value for ZPA. (Zero
Period Acceleration), the maximum ground acceleration at the site. This value defaults to 0.5 g
and can be changed on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 707).
Uniform Building Code

UBCSOIL1
UBCSOIL2
UBCSOIL3

Dynamic Analysis
These spectra represent the normalized (horizontal) response spectra for three soil types
provided in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code, (1991 Edition).
 The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum with
no extension. Several jobs in the current folder can then access this shock data.
 If data is to be entered manually, click Enter/Edit Spectrum Data , then create new rows
and enter the appropriate Range Type and Ordinate Type values. For more information, see
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 743).
 The complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range
interpolation method, ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table.
Everything but the shock data point table can be entered on the
Range Type
Specifies the type of values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY or PERIOD.
If the value is PERIOD, then the spectrum table data is in seconds. If the value is FREQUENCY,
then the data is in Hertz (cycles per second).
For Time History analysis only, select TIME. The spectrum table data is in milliseconds (ms).
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.
Ordinate Type
Specifies the type of values on the ordinate (vertical) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY, VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, G-ACCELERATION, or FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
If the value is FREQUENCY, then the spectrum table data is in Hertz (cycles per second). If the
value is VELOCITY, then the data is in length per second. If the value is ACCELERATION, then
the data is in length per second squared. If the value is G-ACCELERATION, then the data are in
g's.
For Time History analysis only, select FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.
Range Interpol
Specifies how the values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 681) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Ordinate Interpol
Specifies how the values on the ordinate (vertical) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.

Dynamic Analysis
See Examples (on page 681) for additional discussion.

The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Examples
Example 1
The analysis requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a factor
of 1.0, and in the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
No spectrum definition is required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its
shock data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.
Example 2
The analysis requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum
acceleration value of 0.25 g’s, analysis is to be performed using 1.0 times the horizontal and
vertical components of the shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.
There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide 1.60
shock spectra are predefined. You must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of 0.25 g’s
on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 707), and must use the Reg. Guide spectra
corresponding to the anticipated system damping. Lower damping values mean more
conservative results.
Example 3
The analysis requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A
plot of the spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is
acceleration. Because of the variation of the numbers along each axis, a logarithmic interpolation
for each axis is used. Because the shock name is not preceded by a (#) sign, the spectrum is not
predefined, and you must manually enter the points for this spectrum. The spectrum definition
input for pointing to this file is:
Name Range Type Ordinate Type Range Interpol Ordinate Interpol
BENCHNO4 PERIOD ACCELERATION LOG LOG
Example 4
All analysis on a particular project requires the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. The
data points of the spectrum are entered into an ASCII file named BENCH1 in the current folder.
The file can be created using any standard editor. The spectrum definition input for pointing to this
file is:
Name Range Type Ordinate Type Range Interpol Ordinate Interpol
#BENCH1 PERIOD ACCELERATION LOG LOG
Listing of ASCII file "BENCH1":

* SPECTRUM FOR NUCLEAR BENCHMARK NO.1. THIS SPECTRUM IS
* TO BE USED FOR ALL LINES ON PROJECT 1-130023-A03.

Dynamic Analysis
* FILENAME = "BENCH1"
* RANGE TYPE = PERIOD (SECONDS)
* ORDINATE TYPE = ACCELERATION (IN./SEC./SEC.)
* INTERPOLATION FOR BOTH AXES = LOGARITHMIC.
PERIOD(SEC) ACCELERATION(IN/SEC/SEC)
0.1698E-02 0.1450E+03
0.2800E-01 0.3800E+03
0.5800E-01 0.7750E+03
0.7100E-01 0.7750E+03
0.9100E-01 0.4400E+03
0.1140E+00 0.1188E+04
0.1410E+00 0.1188E+04
0.1720E+00 0.7000E+03
0.2000E+00 0.8710E+03
0.8710E+03 0.2500E+00
0.3230E+00 0.4000E+03
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab

The Spectrum Load Cases tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
The Time History Load Cases tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis Type
in the Dynamic Analysis window. A time history analysis has only one load case.
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the case is assigned a
direction and factor.
Additional Spectrum Options

The following options are only available for the Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) analysis types.

Dynamic Analysis
Editing Load Case

Specifies a load case to edit.
Stress Types
Specifies the stress type for the load case:
 OPE
Stress from operating loads.
 OCC
Stress from occasional short-term loads.
 SUS
Stress from primary sustained loads.
 EXP
Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
 FAT
Stress from fatigue loads.
Fatigue Cycles
Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT is selected for
Stress Types.
Directives
Displays the Directive Builder (on page 742) dialog box.
Add New Load Case
Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case
Deletes the current load case.
Load Cases for Force Spectrum

Spectrum load cases for force spectrum analyses are set up differently than spectrum load cases
for earthquake analyses. Force spectrum analyses must link a force multiplier spectrum to a force
set.
A load case definition consists of one or more lines, as shown below. The direction specified on
this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This
direction is used for labeling and designation of independent versus dependent loadings.
Spectrum Factor Dir. Force Set #
TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
Complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond one,
and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading. For
more information, see Examples (on page 693).

Dynamic Analysis
Load Cases for Earthquakes

For earthquakes, the direction defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading. Earthquakes
typically have X, Y, and Z components. The factor is used to modify the magnitude of the shock.
For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system includes two load cases:
 1.0 times (100% of) the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 times (67% of) the El
Centro spectrum in the Y direction
 1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.
CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes, where parts of the
system are exposed to different shocks. For example, a piping system is supported from both
ground and building supports. Because the building filters the earthquake, supports attached to
the building are not exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to the ground. Two
different shock inputs are required: one for the ground supports and one for the building supports.
To specify an independent support motion shock, the node range that defines a particular group of
supports is required. The maximum displacement (seismic anchor movements) of the support
attachment point must also be specified.
The example below shows a typical uniform support earthquake specification and a typical
independent support motion earthquake:
* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO .667 Y
* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
HGROUND 1 X 1 100 1 0.25
HGROUND 1 Z 1 100 1 0.25
VGROUND 1 Y 1 100 1 0.167
HBUILDING 1 X 101 300 1 0.36
HBUILDING 1 Z 101 300 1 0.36
VBUILDING 1 Y 101 300 1 0.24
The uniform support motion earthquake contains only components of the El Centro earthquake
acting uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquake’s
magnitude in the Y direction.
The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: 1-100 and
101-300. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a
building spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components are used for the ground and the
building spectra. The last values specified are the seismic support movements (that is the Anchor
Movement).
Stress Types can be assigned to the spectrum load cases. If FAT is selected, you
must also enter a value for Fatigue Cycles, the number of anticipated load cycles.
Load Case for Time History

Only a single load case is defined for time history analysis. The direction entry (Dir.) is used only
for labeling, not as an analytic input value.

Dynamic Analysis
Topics
Spectrum/Time History Profile ..................................................... 685
Factor ......................................................................................... 685
Dir. ............................................................................................. 685
Start Node .................................................................................. 686
Stop Node .................................................................................. 686
Increment ................................................................................... 687
Anchor Movement....................................................................... 687
Force Set # ................................................................................. 687
Force Sets Tab ........................................................................... 687
Examples.................................................................................... 693
Spectrum/Time History Profile

Specifies the name of a spectrum or time history pulse/shock definition applied to the load case,
as defined on the Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 677). More than one definition
can be listed, with one on each row. Each spectrum or time history pulse specified is applied to the
model in this load case.
Factor
Specifies a value for the spectrum shock table multiplier. This value is usually 1.0.
Dir.
Specifies the applied direction of the spectrum/DLF shock load. Select X, Y, or Z. You can also
enter direction cosines, such as (.707, 0, .707), or direction vectors, such as (1,0,1).
This value is used as follows, depending on the analysis type:
For earthquake analysis:
 Direction specifies the loading direction.
 Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads. When modal combinations
precede spatial combinations, loads with the same direction are summed at the modal level
before any spatial combination.
 Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1), where the first
profile in direction X is reported as X(1). 3X(1) indicates that the largest contributor to the total
response is from the third mode of vibration and due to the first spectrum/shock defined as X.
For force spectrum analysis, the force vector (direction) is already established:
 Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads as discussed above.
 Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, as discussed above for
earthquake analysis.
For time history analysis, time history combinations are algebraic (in-phase):
 Direction acts only as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1).
To define an earthquake type of loading, CAESAR II must know what how the earthquake shock
acts from the shock spectrum table. CAESAR II must also know the direction of the shock. A
shock load case is typically comprised of three shock components in the X, Y, and Z directions.

Dynamic Analysis
The combination of each of these components shock loads defines the earthquakes dynamic
loading of the piping system.
Skewed directions can be entered by giving a direction cosine or direction vector. Skewed shock
contributions are entered when the piping or structural system appears particularly sensitive to a
shock along a skewed line. This most often occurs when a majority of the piping system does not
lay along the X and Z axes.
Any number of shock components can act in the same direction. For example, there can be two X
direction components. This usually occurs with independent support shock contributions where
one X direction component applies to one support group and another X direction component
applies to a different support group. There can also be two shock components in the same
direction without having independent support contributions, by defining two shock contributions in
the same direction without start, stop, or increment node entries.
In the simplest form of force spectrum loading, there is only a single shock component in the load
case. For that situation, there is only a single line of input on the Load Cases tab. When there are
multiple lines of input on the load case screen, such as in analyzing a traveling pressure wave that
impacts different elbow-elbow pairs, there can be many components to the shock load case. The
combination of responses from each of these shock loading components can be established in
one of two ways. If the value of Direction is the same for each load component, then the
directional combination method is used to combine the responses from each load component. If
the value of Direction is different for each load component, then the spatial combination method
is used to combine the responses from each load component. Directional combinations are
always made before modal combinations, while spatial combinations can be made before or after
modal combinations. The default is to perform the modal combinations before spatial
combinations. Either spatial or directional combinations can be made using the ABS or SRSS
method.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system.
The component of an independent support shock applies only to a group of support points. For
example, different shock spectra are generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping.
The rack supports are subject to one shock excitation, influenced by the rack’s response to the
earthquake. The ground level supports are subject to a different shock excitation, not influenced
by the rack. One node range is used to define the rack support shock contributions and another is
used to define the ground support shock contributions.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no value is entered, the load is
applied at the start node.

Dynamic Analysis
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node for in a group of
restraints that is loaded by this spectrum for Independent Support Motion analysis (ISM). The
spectrum is applied to all restraint nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in
steps of Increment. The range of nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no
value is entered, the load is applied at the start node.
Anchor Movement
Specifies the absolute displacement of the restraints included in this spectrum shock case for
independent support motion analysis (ISM). This displacement is applied to all restrained nodes in
the node group, and is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components representing the
relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If no value is entered, and if the defined shock
for this row does not encompass the entire system, this value is calculated by the software. The
value is taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: the specified
2
displacement, velocity/frequency (for velocity spectra), or acceleration/frequency (for
acceleration spectra). Frequency is angular frequency.
Force Set #
Specifies the force set number corresponding to a set entered in the Force Sets tab if the
spectrum/load profile name describes a force-type spectrum (instead of displacement, velocity, or
acceleration). For more information, see Force Sets Tab (on page 687). If no value is entered,
Factor and Dir. must also have no values.
This option is not available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Force Sets Tab

The Force Sets tab is available when Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow
(spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
Spectrum or time history analysis can have multiple force sets.
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses because
there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, the loading for earthquakes is
uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe mass. For relief valves and other
point loadings, the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to the mass. A water

Dynamic Analysis
hammer load is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of the fluid. Its point of
application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses require more
information than the more common earthquake simulations: the load magnitude, direction, and
location. Forces that occur together are grouped into like-numbered force sets and are
manipulated in the analysis together. For example, the following shows two different loading
levels of the same type of load:
Force Direction Node Force Set #
-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2
For a skewed load, force components belong to the same force set, because the components
always occur together:
-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1
Force Spectrum Workflow

The general procedure for applying a force spectrum load is as follows:
1. Determine the pulse time history acting at a single node or over a group of nodes. The pulse
waveform must be the same for all nodes in a group, but the maximum pulse amplitude may
vary.
2. To convert a time history to a response spectrum, use the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on page
744) to build a DLF versus frequency file for the time-pulse waveform. This is a standard
shock table file. This step is not needed for a time history analysis. The data is automatically
added to the dynamic input and can be saved to a separate file.
3. On the Spectrum Definitions tab or Time History Definitions tab, define the DLF versus
frequency file just created as a force spectrum data file with linear interpolation along the
frequency axis and linear interpolation along the ordinate axis. Begin the shock name with a #.
The software then reads the shock table from the data file.
4. Determine the maximum force magnitude that acts on each node subject to the pulse load.
5. On the Force Sets tab, specify the maximum amplitude of the dynamic load, the direction,
and the nodes.
If the force-time profiles are normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitudes of the
loads are entered here. If the profiles are entered using their actual values, the force set
values are entered as 1.0.
6. On the Spectrum Load Cases tab or Time History Load Cases tab, enter the force
spectrum name (defined in the Spectrum Definitions tab), the table multiplication factor
(usually 1.0), a direction, and the Force Set # (defined on the Force Sets tab). This step
defines the link between the force spectrum and the force loading pattern.

Dynamic Analysis
7. Set up any other parameters needed to run the spectrum analysis. Perform error checking,
and after there are no fatal errors, run the analysis.
 You can include any number of user comment lines by clicking Cmt. There can be any number
of line entries in the Force spectrum data.
 If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, carefully select
the combination method. The same rules that cover earthquake shocks and components
apply to force spectrum shocks and components
Topics
Force .......................................................................................... 689
Direction ..................................................................................... 689
Node........................................................................................... 689
Force Set # ................................................................................. 689
Examples .................................................................................... 690
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the impulse force (dynamic load) at the node. The sign of this value is
according to the CAESAR II global coordinate system
The total applied force is the product of this value, the selected force value from the
spectrum or load profile, and the factor entered for the load case.
Direction
Specifies the direction of the impulse force (dynamic load). Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node at which the impulse force (dynamic load) is applied. The node must exist in
the model.
Force Set #
Specifies the numeric value associated with this row (force set). Force sets are used to construct
the dynamic load cases. Values are arbitrary, but usually start at 1 and increment by one.
Each impulse can be assigned to a different force set, which provides the most capability when
constructing load cases. Multiple rows with the same value form a single force set.

Dynamic Analysis
Examples
Example 1
Nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform. The
dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same for all
three nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370 lb., and
on node 15 is 30,537 lb. Three force sets are built for this problem. One has the dynamic loads
acting in the X direction. The second has the dynamic loads acting in the Z direction. The third has
the dynamic loads acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The force spectrum input data is:
X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 1
10370 X 10 1
30537 X 15 1
Z DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 Z 5 2
10370 Z 10 2
30537 Z 15 2
X AND Z DIRECTION WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 3
5030 Z 5 3
10370 X 10 3
10370 Z 10 3
30537 X 15 3
30537 Z 15 3
Example 2
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for different reactor decompression conditions. The
maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. The maximum load for the

Dynamic Analysis
second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction. The third decompression condition
maximum load is 50 kips. Three different maximum force sets are defined:
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
320000 X 565 1
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 2
150000 X 565 2
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 3 (MOST FREQUENT)
50000 X 565 3
Example 3
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5, 10,
and 15 as shown:

Dynamic Analysis
As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5.
When the shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 elements balance the initial
imbalance at node 5, and there become an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock load
is modeled as two completely separate impacts on the piping system. The first is the dynamic
anchor load at 5. If 5 is a flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic displacements of the
piping system and 5 will just be subject to the dynamic time history pulse due to the shock.
Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel nozzle. The second shock load is the unbalanced
dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists until the shock reaches the node 15.
Friction losses in the line reduce the shock magnitude as it travels down the line. In the time the
wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10, there is a 50% drop in the pulse
strength as shown:
This pressure drop was calculated using a transient fluid simulator. Between nodes 10 and 15 the
pulse strength drops even further as shown:
The force spectrum loads are:

Dynamic Analysis
X DIRECTION LOAD ON FLEXIBLE ANCHOR AT 5
-5600 X 5 1
Z DIRECTION LOAD ON ELBOW AT 10
2800 Z 10 2
Examples
Example 1
Define a shock load case that excites the entire piping system with a vibration of one times the El
Centro earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667 times
the El Centro earthquake in the Y direction.
Spectrum Factor Dir.
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO 0.667 Y
Example 2
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical
components of the Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The
maximum ground acceleration is 0.22 g’s.
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the Control Parameters tab and has no effect on the
shock load case definitions.
1.60H2 1 X
1.60V2 1 Y
1.60H2 1 Z
Example 3
Define a shock load case that is comprised of custom shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1
acts in the X and Z directions, and BENCH2 acts in the Y direction. The scale factor for all shocks
is 1.0.

Dynamic Analysis
BENCH1 1 X
BENCH2 1 Y
BENCH1 1 Z
One of the shock load cases excites the piping system along a line that is 45 degrees off of the
global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation yields the worst
possible results. Apply the custom shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and BENCH2 in the
vertical direction.
BENCH1 1 (1,0,1)
BENCH1 1 (-1,0,1
)
BENCH2 1 Y
Example 4
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El Centro
earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases. The first should
use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous summation.
The load cases are defined as shown. Remember that independent summation means MODAL
then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.
There are several ways to accomplish the same objective using parameters on other
tabs, such as the Control Parameters tab. Only the method using the explicit definition of the
load case combination method is shown in this example.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
LOAD CASE 2 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS

SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL COMBINATIONS FIRST

Dynamic Analysis
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
Example 5
Define a shock case that has the custom spectrum 1DIR acting only in the Z direction. Set the
stress type for the case to be operating and use modal summations before spatial summations.
Modal or spatial summations are not shown below because modal summation is the CAESAR II
default and is controlled by Spatial or Modal Combination First (on page 730) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Stress Types: OPE
1DIR 1 Z
Example 6
The support nodes 5, 25, 35, 45, and 56 are pipe shoes sitting on concrete foundations. The
support nodes 140, 145, 157, 160, and 180 are second level rack supports, that is, pipe shoes
sitting on structural steel beams in the second level of the rack. The ground level shock spectrum
name is GROUND04, and the second level rack spectrum name is RACKLEVEL2-04. Set up the
shock load case to define these independent support excitations and omit any relative support
movement.
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

Spectrum Factor Dir. Node Node Increment Movement
GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1 0
RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

RACKLEVEL2-04 1 X 140 180 1 0
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Y 140 180 1 0

Dynamic Analysis
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Z 140 180 1 0
Next, set up a shock load case, and define all combinations options explicitly. Use the same shock
components as defined above, except assume that the pseudostatic component is added using
the SRSS combination method. Also change the modal summation method to SRSS. This is the
recommended method. When the modal summation method is SRSS it does not matter whether
modal or spatial combinations are performed first. The order is only a factor when closely spaced
modes are considered in the grouping, 10 percent, and DSRSS methods.
MODAL(SRSS),PSEUDOSTATIC(SRSS),SPATIAL(SRSS)
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1
RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

RACKLEVEL2-04 1 X 140 180 1
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Y 140 180 1
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Z 140 180 1
Example 7
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: BLAST contains the
DLF response spectrum for relief valve firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1
contains the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that provides
the most conservative combination of modal results. Because there is only a single loading, no
consideration is given to spatial or directional combinations.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Click Directives to open the Directive Builder dialog box and select these values. For
more information, see Directive Builder (on page 742).

Dynamic Analysis
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will
produce the most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)
Example 8 (Force Response Spectrum)

There are two elbow-to-elbow pairs that are of significance in this job. Water hammer loads act on
the elbow at 40 in the X direction and on the elbow at 135 in the Y-direction. In the
SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET input, force set #1 is defined as the load at 40 and
force set #2 is defined as the load at 135. Add the response quantities from each load component
first, using an ABS summation, and then the resulting modal response quantities, using the
grouping summation method. Two identical methods for achieving the same results are shown.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force set #
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS THE SAME, THAT IS "X", FOR BOTH,
LOAD CONTRIBUTIONS, THE DIRECTIONAL COMBINATION METHOD
WILL GOVERN HOW THE HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES
ARE COMBINED.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, X, 2
DIRECTIONAL (ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
or
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS DIFFERENT, THAT IS "X" AND "Y,"
THE SPATIAL COMBINATION METHOD WILL GOVERN HOW THE
HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES ARE COMBINED. NOTE THAT
ON THE DIRECTIVE LINE THE "SPATIAL" DIRECTIVE COMES BEFORE
THE "MODAL" DIRECTIVE.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, Y, 2
SPATIAL(ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab

The Static/Dynamic Combinations tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief
Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for
Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Each analysis can have multiple load case combinations. Multiple static and dynamic cases can
exist:
 Each static or dynamic case must be on a separate line.
 The order of the load cases is not important, and has no effect on the results.

Dynamic Analysis
 Comment lines may be included.

 Static cases alone can be combined without dynamic cases.
 Dynamic cases alone can be combined without static cases.
 Most piping codes combine occasional dynamic stresses with sustained static stresses. This
combination is compared to the occasional allowable stress.
Each combination references static load case and dynamic load case numbers to be combined.
Any number of static or dynamic loads can be combined in a single combination load case. Each
combination is on a separate row.
Additional Options
The following options are also available:
Editing Load Case
Select a load case to edit.
Stress Types
Select the stress type for the load case:
 OPE
Stress from operating loads.
 OCC
Stress from occasional short-term loads.
 SUS
Stress from primary sustained loads.
 EXP
Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
 FAT
Stress from fatigue loads.
This option is not available for time history analysis.
Fatigue Cycles
Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT is selected for
Stress Types and is s not available for time history analysis.
Directives
Opens the Directive Builder (on page 742) dialog box, where you can control the combination
method parameters, using methods such as ABS and SRSS (square root of the sum of the
squares).
Add New Load Case
Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case
Deletes the current load case.

Dynamic Analysis
Topics
Load Case ...................................................................................699
Factor ..........................................................................................700
Examples ....................................................................................700

Dynamic Analysis
Load Case
Specifies the static or dynamic load case to be included in the combination case. Select a load
case from the list. Static load cases start with S, and dynamic load cases are start with D. Each is
then followed by a load case number of a static or shock analysis defined on the Load Cases tab.
For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 682).
The following examples are valid values: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1, and
D#1. Use any length up to 24 characters. For static load case definitions, the static case must exist
and have already been run (also, the S can’t refer to a spring hanger design case). For dynamic
load case definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case.
Factor
Specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the results of the load case. The resulting product
is then used in the combination case. The default is 1.0.
Examples
Example 1
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)
The dynamic load cases are:
1 = Operating Basis Earthquake
2 = 1/2 the Operating Basis Earthquake
Combine the operating basis earthquake stresses with the sustained static stresses:
Load Case Factor
STATIC2 1.0
DYNAMIC1 1.0
or
Load Case Factor
S2 1
D1 1

Dynamic Analysis
Example 2
1 = W + P1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 (For hanger design)
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + H (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + H (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There is one dynamic load case. Create an occasional case that is the sum of the sustained and
the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination method.
Additionally, combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the SRSS
combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. The first two static hanger
design load cases cannot be used in a combination case.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (ABS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* SRSSCOMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC5 1
DYNAMIC1 1
Stress type and combination are defined on the Directive Builder dialog box. For more
information, see Directive Builder (on page 742).

Dynamic Analysis
Example 3
1 = W+T1+P+D1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P+H (SUS)
3 = U1 (OCC) Static seismic simulation
4 = L1-L2 (EXP)
5 = L2+L3 (OCC) (SCALAR)
Create an SRSS combination of the static seismic case and both the sustained and operating
static cases:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case Factor
STATIC2 1
STATIC3 1
* COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case Factor
STATIC1 1
STATIC3 1
Example 4
1 = W+P1 (Hanger design restrained weight case)
2 = W+T1+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #1)
3 = W+T2+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #2)
4 = WNC+P1 (Hanger design actual cold loads)
5 = W+T1+H+P1+D1 (OPE)
6 = W+P1+H (SUS)
7 = L5-L6 (EXP)
Combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 1 results, 1/2 the shock case 2
results, and 1.333 times the shock case 3 results. The combination method is SRSS. For a second
combination case, combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 4 results, 1/2 the
shock case 5 results, and 1.333 times the shock case 6 results.

Dynamic Analysis
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC1 1/2
DYNAMIC2 1/2
DYNAMIC3 1.333
or
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
S6 1
D1 0.5
D2 0.5
D3 1.333
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC4 0.5
DYNAMIC5 0.5
DYNAMIC6 1.333

Dynamic Analysis
Lumped Masses Tab

This tab displays for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Adds or deletes mass from the model.
You can add extra mass, which is not considered significant in the static model (such as a flange
pair) here. You can also add weights modeled as downward-acting concentrated forces here,
because CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces are system weights (that is, forces
due to gravity acting on a mass).
You can also delete masses from the static mass model to economize the analysis, which is the
same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated to
specific sections of the piping system, you can remove other sections of the system from the
dynamic model by removing their mass. Also, you can delete mass selectively for any of the three
global coordinate directions when you want to delete directional degrees-of-freedom.
For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame where the piping rests on the structure
and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction, these two systems are independent of
each other in the X and Z directions. You can remove the X and Z mass of the structure without
affecting the analysis results. With the X and Z masses removed, calculations proceed much
faster.
Topics
Mass........................................................................................... 704
Direction ..................................................................................... 704
Start Node .................................................................................. 704
Stop Node .................................................................................. 705
Increments.................................................................................. 705
Mass
Specifies the magnitude of the concentrated mass (in current units) to be applied to the specified
node. A positive value is added to the calculated mass assigned to the node, a negative value is
subtracted from the calculated mass, and a zero value eliminates the mass.
Direction
Specifies the direction in which the mass acts. The values for translated mass are X, Y, Z, and ALL
(where ALL represents X, Y, and Z). The values for rotated mass are RX, RY, RZ, and RALL
(where RALL represents RX, RY, and RZ).
Rotational masses only apply when the consistent mass model is used. For more
information, see Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) (on page 738) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node at which this mass is applied.

Dynamic Analysis
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model to which the mass is applied. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command with Start Node and Increment. This value is
optional.
Increments
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command. This value is optional and defaults to 1 if no value is
entered.
There can be any number of line entries on the Lumped Masses tab.
The zero-mass capability is particularly useful when you are not interested in the modes for part of
the system. That part of the system is usually modeled only for its stiffness effect.
Example 1
450 is added to the assigned mass at node 40 in the X, Y, and Z directions.
450 ALL 40
Example 2
All nodes from 12 to 25 have all assigned mass removed in the X, Y, and Z directions. Some
nodes may not exist in this range but this is acceptable as long as at least one node in the range
exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1
Example 3
375 is added in the X, Y, and Z directions for nodes 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50, if they exist. All
assigned mass is removed for all nodes from 1 and 600 in the X and Y directions.
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1
Snubbers Tab
This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add snubbers to the model. Snubbers are supports that only resist dynamic loading while allowing
static displacement, such as displacement from thermal growth. Snubbers must have their
stiffness defined. Snubbers are not rigid by default because they are typically not as stiff as other
types of restraints.

Dynamic Analysis
Snubbers may also be added in Input > Piping as part of the static model. In either the
static or dynamic analysis, a snubber is idealized as a stiffness rather than damping at a point.
Topics
Stiffness ..................................................................................... 706
Direction ..................................................................................... 706
Node........................................................................................... 706
CNode ........................................................................................ 706
Stiffness
Specifies the stiffness of the snubber. The value must be positive. If the snubber is rigid enter a
value of 1.0E12.
Direction
Specifies the direction for the line of action of the snubber. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node number where the snubber acts.
Connecting nodes for snubbers work in the same way as for restraints.
CNode
Specifies the second node number to which the other end of the snubber is connected. This value
is optional. If the snubber acts between the piping system and a fixed point in space, then do not
enter a value for CNode.
Connecting nodes for snubbers works in the same way as for restraints.
Example 1
Add a rigid snubber at node 150 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 150
Example 2
Add rigid snubbers at nodes 160, 165, and 170 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 160
1E12 Z 165
1E12 Z 170
Example 3
Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z
direction.

Dynamic Analysis
1E12 Z 405 1005
Example 4
Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber
connects to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber connects to the overhead line at
node 743.
* HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL
5000 X 500 1050.
* VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE
5000 Y 500 743
Control Parameters Tab

This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
The type of analysis determines the parameters available on the Control Parameters tab. The
software displays the list of applicable parameters. The control parameters available for each
analysis are shown below:

Dynamic Analysis

Dynamic Analysis
Table Notes:
X Required.
1 Required if system has nonlinear restraints or hanger design.
2 Used only where friction is defined.
3 Max. No. of Eigenvalues and Frequency Cutoff work as a pair in terminating the eigen extraction.
4 Used if modal combination method is GROUP.
5 Used if modal combination method is DSRSS.
6 Used if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are specified in the shock
definition.
7 Used if independent support movement (USM) loads are present or if defined shock does not include all
supports in the system.
8 Used if pseudo-static components are included.
9 Used if missing mass components are included.
10 Used if more than one spectrum load is applied in the same direction.
For modal analysis, set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a
maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both.
Topics
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ...... 710
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status.......................... 720
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated ............................................ 721
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ................................................................ 723
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms)........ 724
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ..................................................... 725
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) ............................................. 725
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases
................................................................................................... 726
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes)....... 730
Spatial or Modal Combination First.............................................. 730
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)................................... 731
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) .... 731
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)...... 734
Include Missing Mass Components ............................................. 735
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ... 737
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ........................ 737
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)............................. 737
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) ....................................... 738
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues .................... 738

Dynamic Analysis
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist)

Displays the dynamic analysis type selected for Analysis Type. For more information, see The
Dynamic Analysis Window (on page 666). Displays M (Modal), H (Harmonic), S1 (Earthquake
spectrum), S2 (Relief Loads spectrum), S3 (Water Hammer/Slug Flow spectrum), or T (Time
History).
Harmonic Analysis (on page 710)
Spectrum Analysis (on page 713)
Time History (on page 717)
Harmonic Analysis
The response of a system to a dynamically applied load is generally expressed through the
dynamic equation of motion:
Where:
M = system mass matrix
= acceleration vector, as a function of time
C = system damping matrix
= velocity vector, as a function of time
K = system stiffness matrix
x(t) = displacement vector, as a function of time
F(t) = applied load vector, as a function of time
The harmonic solver is most commonly used to analyze low frequency field vibrations due to fluid
pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. This differential equation cannot be
solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases. Harmonic analysis looks at one of these
cases—the set of dynamic problems where the forces or displacements (such as pulsation or
vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. When damping is zero under
harmonic loading, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos (w t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
w = angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation is solved directly for the nodal displacements at any time. From there the
system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses are calculated.
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos (w t + Q)

Dynamic Analysis
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Because acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A w2 cos w t
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic
equation of motion yields,
-M A ω2 cos (ω t + Q) + K A cos (ω t + Q) = Fo cos (ω t + Q)
Dividing both sides of this equation by cos (ω t + Q),
-M A ω2 + K A = Fo
Reordering this equation,
(K - M ω ) A = Fo
2
This is exactly the same form of the equation as is solved for all linear (static) piping problems. The
solution time for each excitation frequency takes only as long as a single static solution, and, when
there is no phase relationship to the loading, the results directly give the maximum dynamic
responses. Due to the speed of the analysis, and because the solutions are so directly applicable,
you should make as much use of this capability as possible. Keep two considerations in mind:
 When damping is not zero, the harmonic equation can only be solved if the damping matrix is
defined as the sum of multiples of the mass and stiffness matrix (Rayleigh damping), that is
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the constants
a and b is
Where:
ω = Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, a is extremely small, and can be ignored. The definition of b reduces
to
β = 2 Cc/ω
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, but two problems
exist. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there must
be only a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second problem is
that the modal frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping matrix.
Therefore, the w used in the calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load, instead of the
natural frequency of a mode. When the forcing frequency of the load is in the vicinity of a
modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the true damping.
 If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously and are not in phase, system response is the
sum of the responses due to the individual loads
x(t) = S Ai cos (ω t + Qi)
Where:

Dynamic Analysis
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i

Qi = phase angle of load i
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Solutions for each load, and the
sum of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations are then
reviewed in order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively,
CAESAR II can select the frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.
Damped harmonics always cause a phased response.
The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations
resulting from either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The
approach typically used is described briefly below:
1. A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field. Large cyclic vibrations or high
stresses (fatigue failure) are present in an existing piping system, raising questions of whether
this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (such as
quantifiable displacements or overstress points) are identified as possible for future use in
refining the dynamic model.
2. A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately as
possible, because system and load characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed
response. In the area where the vibration occurs, you should accurately represent valve
operators, flange pairs, orifice plates, and other in-line equipment. You may also want to add
additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3. Assume the cause of the load, and estimate the frequency, magnitude, point, and direction of
the load. This is difficult because dynamic loads can come from many sources. Dynamic loads
may be due to factors such as internal pressure pulses, external vibration, flow shedding at
intersections, and two-phase flow. In almost all cases, there is some frequency content of the
excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical natural frequency.
If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably some multiple of the
operating frequency. If the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then the forcing frequency
can be estimated through the use of Strouhal’s equations (from fluid dynamics). Use the best
assumptions available to estimate the magnitudes and points of application of the dynamic
load.
4. Model the loading using harmonic forces or displacements, normally depending upon whether
the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration. Perform several harmonic analyses,
sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency to account for
uncertainty. Examine the results of each of the analyses for signs of large displacements,
indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, compare the results of the
analysis to the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar, or if there is no
resonance, this indicates that the dynamic model is not a good one. It must then be improved,
either in terms of a more accurate system (static) model, a better estimate of the load, or a
finer sweep through the frequency range. After the model has been refined, repeat this step
until the mathematical model behaves just like the actual piping system in the field.
5. At this point, the model is a good representation of the piping system, the loads and the
relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics.
6. Evaluate the results of this run, in order to determine whether they indicate a problem.
Because harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit
of the piping material. Displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or
esthetic guidelines.

Dynamic Analysis
7. If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified. The cause is normally
the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor for a single
damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is
Where:
DLF = dynamic loading factor
Cc = ratio of system damping to "critical damping,"
where "critical damping" =
ωf = forcing frequency of applied harmonic load
ωn = natural frequency of mode of vibration
A modal extraction of the system is done; one or more of these modes should have a natural
frequency close to the forcing frequency of the applied load. The problem mode can be further
identified as having a shape very similar to the shape of the total system vibration. This mode
shape has been dynamically magnified far beyond the other modes and predominates in the
final vibrated shape.
8. The problem mode must be eliminated. You typically want to add a restraint at a high point
and in the direction of the mode shape. If this cannot be done, the mode may also be altered
by changing the mass distribution of the system. If no modification of the system is possible, it
may be possible to alter the forcing frequency of the load. If the dynamic load was assumed to
be due to internal acoustics, you should reroute the pipe to change the internal flow
conditions. This may resolve or amplify the problem, but in either case avoids CAESAR II’s
"good model" of the system. After modifying the system, the harmonic problem is re-run using
the single forcing frequency determined as a "good model." The stresses and displacements
are then re-evaluated.
9. If the dynamic problem has been adequately solved, the system is now re-analyzed statically
to determine the effects of any modifications on the static loading cases.
Adding restraint normally increases expansion stresses, while adding mass
increases sustained stresses.
Process output from a harmonic analysis in two ways:
 Use the output processor to review displacement, restraint, force, or stress data either
graphically or in report form.
 Animate the displacement pattern for each of the frequency load cases.
The results of harmonic dynamic loads cannot be combined using the Static/Dynamic
Combination option.
Spectrum Analysis
Spectrum analysis attempts to estimate the maximum response developed in a system during a
transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maximum displacements, forces,
reactions, and stresses. The individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading

Dynamic Analysis
case because the maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially
useful when the loading profile is random, or not exactly known, such as with seismic loads.
CAESAR II provides the ability to perform two types of spectrum analyses which may be
combined: seismic and force spectra. Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over
the entire system, or applied through individual support groups with corresponding anchor
movements. Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze impulse loadings, such as those due
to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow.
Seismic Spectrum Analysis

Seismic loads cannot be solved through time history analyses, because earthquakes cause
random motion which may be different for each earthquake, even those occurring at the same
site. To simplify the analytical definition of the earthquake, it is necessary to get the expected
random waveform of acceleration (or velocity or displacement) versus time into a simple
frequency-content plot. The most predominantly used frequency-content plot is the response
spectrum. A response spectrum for an earthquake load can be developed by placing a series of
single degree-of-freedom oscillators on a mechanical shake table and feeding a typical (for a
specific site) earthquake time history through it, measuring the maximum response (displacement,
velocity, or acceleration) of each oscillator.
The expectation is that even though all earthquakes are different, similar ones should produce the
same maximum responses, even though the time at which they occur differs with each individual
occurrence. Responses are based on the maximum ground displacement and acceleration, the
dynamic load factors determined by the ratios of the predominant harmonic frequencies of the
earthquake to the natural frequencies of the oscillators, and system damping. Response spectra
for a number of damping values can be generated by plotting the maximum response for each
oscillator. A plot of a set of typical response spectra is shown below:
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, because seismic
loads indicate strong harmonic tendencies. As the damping value increases, the system response
approaches ground motion. Seismic spectra also usually show strong evidence of flexible,
resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the building and/or

Dynamic Analysis
piping system. Multiple peaks are usually enveloped in order to account for uncertainties in the
analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are typically spread to account for inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that the modes of vibration of a system
respond to the load in the exact same manner as a single degree-of-freedom oscillator. System
response may be plotted in terms of displacement, velocity, or acceleration, because these terms
of the spectra are all related by the frequency:
d =v/ω =a/ω
2
Where:
d = displacement from response spectrum at frequency
v = velocity from response spectrum at frequency
ω = angular frequency at which response spectrum parameters are taken
a = acceleration from response spectrum at frequency
Response Spectrum analysis proceeds according to the following steps:
Modes of vibration are extracted from the system using an Eigensolver algorithm. Each mode has
a characteristic frequency and mode shape.
1. The maximum response of each mode under the applied load is determined from the
spectrum value corresponding to the natural frequency of the mode.
2. The total system response is determined by summing the individual modal responses, using
methods that reflect the time independence of the responses and the portion of system mass
allocated to each mode.
There are four major sources of earthquake spectra available in CAESAR II:
El Centro
This predefined data is taken from J. Biggs’ Introduction to Structural Dynamics and is based on
the north-south component of the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake. The recorded
maximum acceleration was 0.33 g. The spectrum provided here is intended to apply to elastic
systems having 5 to 10 percent critical damping.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60
The predefined spectrum names are:
1.60H.5 1.60V.5 - Horizontal/vertical, 0.5% damping
1.60H2 1.60V2 - Horizontal/vertical, 2.0% damping
1.60H7 1.60V7 - Horizontal/vertical ,7.0% damping
These spectra are constructed according to the instructions given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 for
seismic design of nuclear plants. They must also be scaled up or down by the maximum ground
acceleration (ZPA—zero period acceleration), specified in the CAESAR II control parameter
spreadsheet.
Uniform Building Code
The pre-defined spectrum names are:

Dynamic Analysis
UBCSOIL1 Spectrum for rock and stiff soils

UBCSOIL2 Spectrum for deep cohesionless or stiff clay soils
UBCSOIL3 Spectrum for soft to medium clays and sands
These spectra represent the normalized response spectra shapes for three soil types provided in
Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). When used, they must be scaled by the
ZPA, which is the product of Z and I, where Z is the seismic zone coefficient and I is the
earthquake importance factor, from UBC Tables 23-I and 23-L. The ZPA can be specific using the
CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.
User defined spectra
User defined spectra may be entered with period or frequency as the range, and displacement,
velocity, or acceleration as the ordinate. These spectra may be read in from a text file or entered
directly into a spectrum table during dynamic input processing.
Independent Support Motion Applications

Earthquake ground motions are caused by the passing of acoustic shock waves through the soil.
These waves are usually hundreds of feet long. If supports having foundations in the soil are
grouped together within a several hundred-foot radius, they typically see exactly the same
excitation from the earthquake. If all of the supports for a particular piping system are attached
directly to ground type supports, each support is excited by an essentially identical time waveform.
This type of excitation is known as uniform support excitation. Often pipe is supported from rack,
building, or vessel structures as well as from ground type supports. These intermediate structures
sometimes filter or accentuate the effect of the earthquake. In this situation, the supports attached
to the intermediate structure are not exposed to the same excitation as those that are attached
directly to ground foundations. To accurately model these systems, different shocks must be
applied to different parts of the piping system. This type of excitation is known as independent
support motion (ISM) excitation. While the different support groups are exposed to different
shocks, there are also relative movements between support groups that don’t exist for uniform
support excitation. The movement of one support group relative to another is termed pseudostatic
displacement, or seismic anchor movements. For uniform support excitation, there are spatial and
modal response components available for combination. For independent support excitation, there
are spatial and modal response components available for each different support group, plus
pseudostatic components of the earthquake that must also be added into the dynamic response.
The major difference when running ISM type earthquake loads comes while building the shock
load cases. In the uniform excitation case, the shock acts implicitly over all of the supports in the
system. In the ISM case, different shocks act on different groups of supports. The Spectrum
Load Cases tab appears, with the following parameters:
 Spectrum (name)
 Factor
 Dir (direction)
 Start Node
 Stop Node
 Increment
 Anchor Movement
Name, Factor, and Dir are all that is required for uniform support excitations. For ISM type
shocks, the group of nodes over which the shock acts must be specified as well, using Start

Dynamic Analysis
Node, Stop Node, and Increment. Anchor Movement is used to explicitly define the seismic
displacement of the restraint set. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load
components. If omitted, the software defaults to the displacement derived from the response
spectrum entry corresponding to the lowest frequency.
Force Spectrum Analysis

A similar method can be followed for non-random loads, such as an impulse load for which the
force versus time profile is known. A look at the equation for the earthquake problem explains why
the force spectrum solution is very similar to the earthquake solution:
The term on the right-hand side is a dynamic force acting on the piping system, such as F = Ma, so
the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a
Dynamic Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the
ratio of the maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. The
earthquake response spectrum analysis method starts with the time history of an earthquake
excitation. The force spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way, except that the
analysis starts with the force versus time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history
loading is applied to a shake table of single degree-of-freedom bodies. A response spectrum (DLF
versus natural frequency) is generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements by the
static displacements expected under the same load. An alternate means of generating a response
spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically integrate the dynamic equation of motion for
oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load. Use Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator.
Process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
 Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report form.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and shock load
responsible for that contribution.
 Animate the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.

Dynamic Analysis
Time History
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than
response spectrum analysis. It is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings where
the profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic equation
of motion throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration, providing
a true simulation of the system response.
As noted in Harmonic Analysis (on page 710), the dynamic equation of motion for a system is
This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric
techniques by slicing the duration of the load into many small time-steps. Assuming that the
change in acceleration between time slices is linear, the system accelerations, velocities,
displacements, and corresponding reactions, internal forces, and stresses are calculated at
successive time steps.
Because the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its individual
modes of vibration, the above equation can be simplified assuming that the damping matrix C is
orthogonal. Use the transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:
Where:
= acceleration vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
C´ = diagonal damping matrix, where entry C´i = wi ci
ωi = angular frequency of mode i
ci = ratio of damping to critical damping for mode i
(t) = velocity vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
x(t) = displacement vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
Ω = diagonal stiffness matrix, where entry Ω i = ωi
2
This transformation represents N uncoupled second order differential equations, where N is the
number of modes of vibration extracted. N can then be integrated and summed, using the
in-phase, algebraic summation method to give the total system response. CAESAR II uses the
Wilson θ method (an extension of the Newmark method) to integrate the equations of motion,
providing an unconditionally stable algorithm regardless of time step size chosen.
Only one dynamic load can be defined for a time history analysis. This dynamic load case can be
used in as many static/dynamic combination load cases as necessary. The single load case may
consist of multiple force profiles applied to the system simultaneously or sequentially. Each force
versus time profile is entered as a spectrum with an ordinate of Force (in current units) and a
range of Time (in milliseconds). The profiles are defined by entering the time and force
coordinates of the corner points defining the profile.
A time can only be entered once. A time with zero force outside of the defined profile
need not be entered explicitly.
For example, the profiles shown in the following figure are entered as:

Dynamic Analysis
Time (MS) Force Time (MS) Force
0.0 0.0 20.0 1000.0
10.0 300.0 60.0 1000.0
20.0 1000.0 30.0 0.0
The load profiles are linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product of
the profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
You can enter only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, in the time history load profile.
Model moments using force couples, and simulate restraint displacements by entering forces
equal to the displacement multiplied by the restraint stiffness in the direction of the displacement.
Process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
 Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, and restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. CAESAR II’s implementation of time history analysis provides two types of results. One
results case contains the maximum individual components (such as axial stress,
X-displacement, and MZ reaction) of the system response, along with the time at which it
occurred. Several results cases represent the actual system response at specific times.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient
load responsible for that contribution.
 Animate the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual elements
are displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the
static/dynamic combinations.
 Animate the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.

Dynamic Analysis
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the static load case as described below. Select a load case from the list.
CAESAR II cannot perform a dynamic analysis on nonlinear systems. For dynamic analyses, a
one-directional restraint must be modeled as either seated (active) or lifted off (inactive), and a
gap must be either open (inactive) or closed (active). This process is automated when the static
load case is selected. CAESAR II automatically sets the linear condition at the non-linear
restraints in the system to correspond to their status in the selected load case. Think of this as
being the loading condition of the system (such as operating load) at the time at which the
dynamic load occurs. This automated linearization does not always provide an appropriate
dynamic model, and you may need to select other static load cases or manually alter the restraint
condition in order to simulate the correct dynamic response.
A static load case must precede the dynamics job whenever:
 There are spring hangers to be designed in the job. The static runs must be made in order to
determine the spring rate to be used in the dynamic model.
 There are non-linear restraints in the system, such as one-directional restraints, large-rotation
rods, bi-linear restraints, or gaps. The static analysis must be made in order to determine the
active status of each of the restraints for linearization of the dynamic model.
 There are frictional restraints in the job, such as any restraints with a nonzero µ (mu) value.
The most common static load cases during a typical CAESAR II analysis are:
Example 1: Analyses containing no hanger design

1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1-L2 (EXP)
If the operating condition is likely to exist throughout the duration of the dynamic transient, use
parameter 1. If the installed condition is more likely to exist during the transient, use parameter 2.
It is extremely unlikely that expansion case 3 is correct, because it does not represent the system
status at any given time, but represents the difference between the first two cases.
Example 2: Analyses containing hanger design

1 = W+P1(For hanger design)
2 = W+P1+D1+T1(For hanger design)
3 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
4 = W+P1+H (SUS)
5 = L3-L4 (EXP)
The correct static load cases to use are those in which the selected spring hangers have been
included. If the operating condition is the correct load case, use parameter 3. For the installed
condition, use parameter 4.

Dynamic Analysis
Stiffness Factor for Friction

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the friction stiffness factor as described below. Enter a value greater than zero to
consider friction stiffness in the analysis. Enter 0.0 to ignore friction in the analysis.
Dynamic analyses in CAESAR II act only on linear systems, so any non-linearities must be
linearized prior to analysis. Modeling of friction in dynamic models presents a special case,
because friction actually impacts the dynamic response in two ways. Static friction (before
breakaway) affects the stiffness of the system by providing additional restraint. Kinetic friction
(after breakaway) affects the damping component of dynamic response. Due to mathematical
constraints, damping is ignored for all analyses except time history and harmonics, for which it is
only considered on a system-wide basis.
CAESAR II allows friction to be taken into account through the use of this friction stiffness factor.
The software approximates the restraining effect of friction on the pipe by including stiffnesses
transverse to the direction of the restraint at which friction was specified. The stiffness of these
"frictional" restraints is calculated as:
Kfriction = (F) (µ) (Fact)
Where:
Kfriction = Stiffness of frictional restraint inserted by CAESAR II.
F = The load at the restraint taken from the selected static solution.
µ = Friction coefficient at restraint, as defined in the static model.
Fact = Friction stiffness factor entered here.
This factor should be adjusted as necessary in order to make the dynamic model simulate the
actual dynamic response of the system. The factor does not correspond to any actual dynamic
parameter, but is actually an adjustment factor to modify system stiffness. Entering a friction factor
greater than zero causes these friction stiffnesses to be inserted into the dynamic analysis.
Increasing this factor correspondingly increases the effect of the friction. Values such as 1000 are
typical. Entering a friction factor equal to zero ignores any frictional effect in the dynamic analysis.
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies the number of modal responses to be included in the system results through a mode
number cutoff. Enter a value for Setting. Enter 0 to limit modes extracted to the value of
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 723). Enter higher values as described below.
The first stage of the spectrum and time history analyses (and the only step for modal analysis) is
the use of the Eigensolver algorithm to extract piping system natural frequencies and mode
shapes. For the spectrum and time history analyses, the response under loading is calculated for
each of the modes, with the system response being the sum of the individual modal responses.
The more modes that are extracted, the more the sum of those modal responses resembles the
actual system response. This algorithm uses an iterative method for finding successive modes, so
extraction of a large number of modes usually requires much more time than does a static solution
of the same piping system. The object is to extract sufficient modes to get a suitable solution,
without straining computational resources.

Dynamic Analysis
This parameter is used, in combination with Frequency Cutoff (HZ), to limit the maximum
number of modes of vibration to be extracted during the dynamic analysis. If this parameter is
entered as 0, the number of modes extracted is limited only by the frequency cutoff and the
number of degrees-of-freedom in the system model.
Example
A system has the following natural frequencies:
Mode Number Frequency (Hz)
1 0.6
2 3.0
3 6.1
4 10.7
5 20.3
6 29.0
7 35.4
8 40.7
9 55.6
The modes extracted for different values of Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated and
Frequency Cutoff are:
Max. No. of Number of

Eigenvalues Frequency Modes
Calculated Cutoff extracted
0 33 7
0 50 9
3 33 3
9 60 9
If you are more interested in providing an accurate representation of the system displacements,
request the extraction of a few modes, allowing a rapid calculation time. However, if an accurate
estimate of the forces and stresses in the system is the objective, calculation time grows as it
becomes necessary to extract far more modes. This is particularly true when solving a fluid
hammer problem in the presence of axial restraints. Often modes with natural frequencies of up to
300 Hz are large contributors to the solution.
To determine how many modes are sufficient, extract a certain number of modes and review the
results. Repeat the analysis by extracting five to ten additional modes and comparing the new
results to the old. If there are significant changes between the results, repeat the analysis again,

Dynamic Analysis
adding five to ten more modes. This iterative process continues until the results taper off,
becoming asymptotic.
This procedure has two drawbacks. First is the time involved in making the multiple analyses and
the time involved in extracting the potentially large number of modes. The second drawback,
occurring with spectrum analysis, is less obvious. A degree of conservatism is introduced when
combining the contributions of the higher order modes. Possible spectral mode summation
methods include methods that combine modal results as same-sign (positive) values: SRSS,
ABSOLUTE, and GROUP. Theory states that the rigid modes act in phase with each other, and
should be combined algebraically, permitting the response of some rigid modes to cancel the
effect of other rigid modes. This is what occurs in a time history analysis. Because of this
conservatism, it is possible to get results which exceed twice the applied load, despite the fact that
the Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) of an impulse load cannot be greater than 2.0.
Frequency Cutoff (HZ)

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a frequency cutoff point in Hertz as described below.
When extracting modes to be used in dynamic analysis, you can specify a value for either Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 721) or a frequency cutoff. Modal extraction ceases when
the Eigensolver extracts either the number of modes requested, or extracts a mode with a
frequency above the cutoff, whichever comes first.
You can select a frequency cutoff point for modes up to, but not far beyond, a recognized "rigid"
frequency, and then include the missing mass correction. For more information, see Include
Missing Mass Components (on page 735). Choosing a cutoff frequency to the left of the resonant
peak of the response spectrum provides a non-conservative result, because resonant responses
may be missed. During spectrum analysis, using a cutoff frequency to the right of the peak, but still
in the resonant range, yields either over- or under-conservative results, depending upon the
method used to extract the ZPA from the response spectrum. For time history analysis, selecting a
cutoff frequency to the right of the peak, but still in the resonant range, usually yields
non-conservative results. The missing mass force is applied with a dynamic load factor of 1.0.
Extracting a large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be
conservative in the case of spectrum analysis, because all spectral modal combination methods
(such as SRSS, GROUP, and ABS) give conservative results versus the algebraic combination
method used during time history analysis. This gives a more realistic representation of the net
response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum shown below, an appropriate
cutoff point for the modal extraction is about 33 Hz.
1. Non-conservative cutoff (Misses amplification of any modes in resonant range)
2. Conservative cutoff (Multiplies missing mass contribution by excessive DLF—1.6)
3. Optimal cutoff (Includes all modes in resonant range, uses low DLF—1.05—for missing mass
contribution, minimizes combination of rigid modes)

Dynamic Analysis
4. Conservative Cutoff (Too many rigid modes combined using non-conservative summation
methods)
When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or Max. No.
of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 721) must have a value.
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms)

(Available for: Spectrum/GROUP and Time History)
Specifies a frequency or time-slice spacing as described below. The usage of this parameter
varies with the analysis type.
Spectrum Analysis
For a spectrum analysis with the GROUP Modal Combination Method (as defined by USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the frequency spacing defining each modal group,
that is, the percentage of the base frequency between the lowest and highest frequency of the
group. Regulatory Guide 1.92 specifies the group spacing criteria as 10%, or 0.1. This is the
default value in CAESAR II. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 731).

For a time history analysis, this value is the length of the time slice, in milliseconds. The software
uses the value during its step-by-step integration of the equations of motion for each of the
extracted modes. CAESAR II uses the unconditionally stable Wilson q integration method where
any size time step provides a solution. A smaller step provides greater accuracy but more strain
on computational resources. The time step should be sufficiently small that it can accurately map
the force versus time load profile (that is, the time step should be smaller than typical force ramp
times). Additionally, the time step must be small enough that the contribution of the higher order
modes is not filtered from the response. For this reason, the time step should be selected so that
time step (in seconds) times maximum modal frequency (in Hz) is less than 0.1. For example, if
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 723) is 50 Hz, this value should be set to a maximum of 2
milliseconds:
0.002 sec x 50 Hz = 0.1

Dynamic Analysis
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS and Time History)
Specifies the duration of the applied dynamic load, as described below.
Spectrum Analysis
For a time history analysis, this parameter specifies the total length of time over which the dynamic
response is simulated. The load duration divided by the time step size from Closely Spaced Mode
Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 724) gives the total number of integration steps
making up the solution. CAESAR II limits the number of time steps to 5000 or as permitted by
available memory and system size. The duration should be at least equal to the maximum
duration of the applied load plus the period of the first extracted mode. This allows simulation of
the system response throughout the imposition of the external load, plus one full cycle of the
resulting free vibration. After this point, the response dies out according to the damping value
used. For example, if the applied load is expected to last 150 milliseconds and the lowest
extracted frequency is 3 Hz, set the load duration to a minimum of 0.150 plus 1/3, or 0.483
seconds.

For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the duration of the earthquake. This
duration is used to calculate the modal correlation coefficients based on empirical data. For more
information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 731).
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS, Harmonics, and Time History)
Specifies the ratio of critical damping as described below. Typical values for piping systems, as
recommended in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.61 and ASME Code Case N-411, range from 0.01
to 0.05, based upon pipe size, earthquake severity, and the natural frequencies of the system.
Damping is not generally considered in the mathematical solutions required for spectrum or
harmonic analysis. It is ignored or solved as specialized cases in most analyses, and must be
instead considered through adjustment of the applied loads (by generation of the response
spectrum) and/or system stiffness.
For a time history analysis, damping is used explicitly, because this method uses a numeric
solution to integrate the dynamic equations of motion.
For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), the damping value is used in the calculation of the modal
correlation coefficients. CAESAR II does not permit the specification of damping values for
individual modes. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 731).
For a harmonic analysis, this ratio is converted to Rayleigh Damping, where the damping matrix
can be expressed as multiples of the mass and stiffness matrices:
[C] = a [M] + b [K]

Dynamic Analysis
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the constants α
and β are given as:
Where:
ω = undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, α is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the
relationships to:
α=0
β = 2 Cc / ω
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception that
a single β is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the ω used is that of the load
forcing frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives an
accurate estimate of the true damping value.
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output

Cases
(Available for: Spectrum/1.60/UBC and Time History)
Specifies an acceleration factor or distinct times as described below. The usage of this parameter
varies with the analysis type.

Dynamic Analysis
Normalized Response Spectra

For specific pre-defined normalized response spectra, this value is the acceleration factor (in g's)
by which the spectrum is scaled. For example, when a spectrum analysis uses one of the
pre-defined spectra names beginning with "1.60" (such as 1.60H.5 or 1.60V7), CAESAR II
constructs an earthquake spectrum according to the instructions given in USNRC (formerly
USAEC) Regulatory Guide 1.60. This guide requires that the shape of the response spectrum be
chosen from the curves shown in the following figures, based upon the system damping value.
The last number in the default CAESAR II spectrum name indicates the percent critical damping.
For example, 1.60H.5 indicates 0.5% critical damping, while 1.60V7 indicates 7%. If the analysis
uses one of the pre-defined spectra names beginning with "UBC" (such as UBCSOIL1),
CAESAR II uses the normalized seismic response spectra for the corresponding soil type from
Table 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). Reg Guide 1.60 and the UBC curves are
normalized to represent a ground acceleration (ZPA or zero period acceleration) of 1g. The true
value is actually site dependent. Therefore, using the ZPA value appropriately scales any
Regulatory Guide 1.60 or the Uniform Building Code response spectra.

Dynamic Analysis

Dynamic Analysis

For a time history analysis, this value is the number of distinct times at which the results of the load
cases (the dynamic load as well as all static/dynamic combinations) are generated. In addition,
CAESAR II generates one set of results for each load case containing the maximum of each
output value (such as displacement, force, or stress) along with the time at which it occurred. The
times for which results are generated are determined by dividing as evenly as possible the load
duration by the number of output times. For example, if the load duration is one second and five
output cases are requested, results are available at 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 milliseconds, in
addition to the maximum case. The total number of results cases generated for an analysis is the
product of the number of load cases (one dynamic case plus the number of static/dynamic
combination cases) times the number of results cases per load (one maxima case plus the
requested number of output cases). The total number of results cases is limited to 999:
(1 + # Static/Dynamic Combinations) x (1 + # Output Cases) ≤ 999

Dynamic Analysis
At least one output case, in addition to the automatically generated maxima case, must be
requested. More than one is not necessary, because the worst case results are reflected in the
maxima case and individual results at every time step are available through the ELEMENT
command when animating time history results.
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes)

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the handling of the previous eignesolution when repeating a dynamic analysis. Select N
(for no) to perform a new eigensolution. Select Y (for yes) to skip the eigensolution and reuse the
results of the earlier analysis, and only perform calculations for displacements, reactions, forces,
and stresses. This option is only valid after an initial eigensolution is performed and is still
available. The mass and stiffness parameters of the model must be unchanged or the previous
eigensolution is invalid.
Spatial or Modal Combination First

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining load case results as described below. Select Spatial to first
combine spatial components of the load case. Select Modal to first combine modal components of
the load case.
In a spectrum analysis, each of the modal responses must be summed. In addition, if multiple
shocks have been applied to the structure in multiple directions, the results must be combined,
such as spatially combining the X-direction, Y-direction, and Z-direction results. A difference in the
final results (spatial first versus modal first) arises whenever different methods are used for the
spatial and modal combinations. The combination of spatial components first implies that the
shock loads are dependent, while the combination of modal components first implies that the
shock loads are independent.
Dependent and independent refer to the time relationship between the X, Y, and Z components of
the earthquake. With a dependent shock case, the X, Y, and Z components of the earthquake
have a direct relationship. A change in the shock along one direction produces a corresponding
change in the other directions. For example, an earthquake acts along a specific direction, having
components in more than one axis with a fault at a 30° angle between the X- and Z-axes. The
Z-direction load is scaled by a factor of tan 30°, but the identical version of the X-direction load is
used. In this example, spatial combinations should be made first.
An independent shock has X, Y, and Z time histories producing related frequency spectra but
completely unrelated time histories. The Independent type of earthquake is far more common, so
in most cases the modal components should be combined first.
For example, IEEE 344-1975 (IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class
1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations) states:
"Earthquakes produce random ground motions which are characterized by simultaneous but
statistically INDEPENDENT horizontal and vertical components."
This is usually less of an issue for force spectrum combinations. Normally there are no separate
spatial components to combine because X- Y- and Z-shocks are not acting simultaneously. When
there is more than one potential force load, the spatial combination method may be used to
indicate the independence of the loadings. For example, select Modal if two independent relief
valves may or may not fire simultaneously and the two shocks are defined as being in different
directions (such as X and Y). If the two valves are dependent and will definitely open

Dynamic Analysis
simultaneously, select Spatial. Otherwise, the direction defined for a force spectrum loading has
no particular meaning.
 Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) describes the requirements for
combining spatial components when performing seismic response spectra analysis for
nuclear power plants.
 Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this option has no
effect on time history results.
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining the spatial contributions of the shocks in a single spectrum
load case. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select
ABS for an absolute combination method.
This option is only used for spectrum runs with more than a single excitation direction. Because
directional forces are usually combined vectorially, SRSS is usually the best selection. ABS is
provided for additional conservatism.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this option has
no effect on time history results.
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS)

Specifies the method for combining individual modes into the total system response.
 GROUP - Grouping Method (on page 731)
 10% - Ten Percent Method (on page 732)
 DSRSS - Double Sum Method (on page 733)
 SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method (on page 733)
 ABS - Absolute Method (on page 734)
The response spectrum yields the maximum response at any time during the course of the applied
load, and each of the modes of vibration usually have different frequencies. As a result, the peak
responses of all modes do not occur simultaneously and an appropriate means of summing the
modal responses must be considered.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) defines the requirements for
combining modal responses when performing seismic response spectra analysis for nuclear
power plants. The four options presented there are available, along with one other, for modal
combinations under non-nuclear seismic and force spectrum analyses.
Grouping Method
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method attempts to
eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods. It assumes that modes are
completely correlated with any modes with similar closely spaced frequencies, and are completely

Dynamic Analysis
uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies. The total system response is
calculated as
Where:
R = total system response of the element
N = number of significant modes considered in the modal response combination
Rk = the peak value of the response of the element due to the kth mode
P = number of groups of closely-spaced modes (where modes are considered to be
closely-spaced if their frequencies are within 10% of the base mode in the group), excluding
individual separated modes. No mode can be in more than one group.
i = number of first mode in group q
j = number of last mode in group q
Rlq = response of mode l in group q
Rmq = response of mode m in group q
The responses of any modes which have frequencies within 10% of each other are added
together absolutely, and the results of each of these groups are combined with the remaining
individual modal results using the SRSS method.
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed
by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 724)
parameter.
Ten Percent Method

This method is defined in the USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The ten percent method is similar to
the grouping method. It assumes that modes are completely correlated with any modes with
similar closely spaced frequencies, and are completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely
different frequencies. The grouping method assumes that modes are only correlated with those
that fall within the group (within a 10% band). This method assumes that modes are correlated
with those that fall within 10% of the subject model, effectively creating a 20% band (10% up and
approximately 10% down). The total system response is calculated as
Where:
th th
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the i and j mode, respectively,
where mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed
by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 724)
parameter.

Dynamic Analysis
Double Sum Method

This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. This combination method is the most
technically correct for earthquake loads, because it attempts to estimate the actual intermodal
correlation coefficient based upon empirical data. The total system response is calculated as:
Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient = [ 1 + {( ωk' - ωs') /(ßk' ωk + ßs' ωs)} ]
2 -1
ωk' = ωk [ 1 - ßk2 ]1/2

ωs' = ωs [ 1 - ßs ]
2 1/2
ßk' = ßk + 2 / ( td ωk )
ßs' = ßs + 2 / ( td ωs )
ωk = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
ωs = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
ßk = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
ßs = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
The load duration (td) and the damping ratio (ß) can be specified by using the Load
Duration (DSRSS) (sec) (on page 725) and Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) (on page 725)
parameters.
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method

This method defines the total system response as the square root of the sum of the squares of the
individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with all
correlation coefficients equal to 0.0, or the grouping method with none of the modes being closely
spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely
independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration of
the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very
close frequencies, because those modes will usually experience their maximum DLF at
approximately the same time during the load profile.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this modal
combination method has no effect on time history results.

Dynamic Analysis
Absolute Method
This method defines the total system response as the sum of the absolute values of the individual
modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with all correlation
coefficients equal to 1.0, or the grouping method, with all modes being closely spaced. The total
system response is calculated as:
This method gives the most conservative result, because it assumes that the all maximum modal
responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is usually
overly-conservative, because modes with different natural frequencies will probably experience
their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)

(Available for: Spectrum with ISM included)
Specifies the inclusion of independent support motion (anchor movement) components as part of
a shock load case and independent support spectral loadings, as described below. Select Y (for
yes) to include the components or N (for no) to ignore them.
The excitation of a group of supports produces both a dynamic response and a static response.
The static response is due to the movement of one group of supports or anchors relative to
another group of supports or anchors. These static components of the dynamic shock loads are
called pseudostatic components. USNRC recommendations (August 1985) suggest the following
procedure for pseudostatic components:
1. For each support group, calculate the maximum absolute response for each input direction.
2. Combine same direction responses using the absolute sum method.
3. Combine directional responses using the SRSS method.
4. Obtain the total response by combining the dynamic and pseudostatic responses, using the
SRSS method.

Dynamic Analysis
Include Missing Mass Components

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the inclusion of a correction representing the contribution of higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, providing greater accuracy without additional
calculation time. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
During spectrum (either seismic or force spectrum) or time history analyses, the response of a
system under a dynamic load is determined by superposition of modal results. One of the
advantages of this type of modal analysis is that only a limited number of modes are excited and
need to be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes (possibly far into the rigid
range) before acceptable accuracy is attained.
This option automatically calculates the net (in-phase) contribution of all non-extracted modes and
combines it with the modal contributions, avoiding the long calculation time and excessively
conservative summation methods. For more information, see Inclusion of Missing Mass
Correction (on page 972).
Use Included Missing Mass Components on the Control Parameters tab as an alternative
method of ensuring that sufficient modes are considered in the dynamic model. This report is
compiled for all spectrum and time history shock cases, whether missing mass is to be included or
not. It displays the percentage of system mass along each of the three global axes and the
percentage of total force which has been captured by the extracted modes. For more information,
see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 735).
The percentage of system mass active along each of the three global axes (X-, Y-, and Z-) is
calculated by summing the modal mass (corresponding to the appropriate directional
degree-of-freedom) attributed to the extracted modes and dividing that sum by the sum of the
system mass acting in the same direction:
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active Massx
Summed over 1 = 2 to n, by 6 (Y-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active MassY
Summed over 1 = 3 to n, by 6(Z-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active Massz
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix

Dynamic Analysis
The maximum possible percentage of active mass that is theoretically possible is 100%, with
90-95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a
good dynamic model.
The percentage of active force is calculated by the following factors:
 Separately summing the components of the effective force acting along each of the three
directional degrees-of-freedom
 Combining them algebraically
 Doing the same for the applied load
 Taking the ratio of the effective load divided by the applied load
Examples
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fe = ΣFe
x [i]
Fx = ΣF[i]
Summed over i = 2 to n, by 6 (Y - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fe = ΣFe
y [i]
Fy = ΣF[i]
Summed over i = 3 to n, by 6 (Z - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fe = ΣFe
z [i]
Fz = ΣF[i]
Where:
FeX, FeY, FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX, FY, FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively
F = vector of total system forces
The maximum possible percentage which is theoretically possible for this value is also 100%. In
practice it may be higher, indicating an uneven distribution of the load and mass in the system
model. There is nothing inherently wrong with an analysis where the included force exceeds
100%. If the missing mass correction is included, the modal loadings are adjusted to automatically
conform to the applied loading. The percentage of included force can often be brought under
100% by extracting a few more modes. At other times, the situation can be remedied by improving
the dynamic model through a finer element mesh, or, more importantly, equalizing the mass point
spacing in the vicinity of the load.

Dynamic Analysis
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method

(SRSS/ABS)
Specifies the method for combining pseudostatic responses with dynamic (inertial) responses.
Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for an
absolute combination method.
This option is applicable only when there is at least one independent support motion excitation
component in a shock load case. Pseudostatic combinations are performed after all directional,
spatial, and modal combinations. Select SRSS for pseudostatic combinations, as recommended
by USNRC. ABS gives conservative results. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic
(Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) (on page 734).
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining the missing mass/force correction components with the modal
(dynamic) results. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method.
Select ABS for an absolute combination method.
Research suggests that the modal and rigid portions of the response are statistically independent,
so SRSS is usually most accurate. ABS provides a more conservative result, based upon the
assumption that the modal maxima occur simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration.
Missing mass components are combined following the modal combination. For more information,
see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 735).
Even though missing mass components may be included during time history analyses,
all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), so this parameter has no effect on
time history results.
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining shock components acting in the same direction. Select SRSS
for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for an absolute
combination method.
This option is typically used with independent support motion load cases, where responses from
different support groups caused by excitation in the same direction are combined. It also
combines the rare case of multiple uniform shock spectra acting in the same direction. Select ABS
for directional combinations of pseudostatic responses, as recommended by USNRC. Select
SRSS for force spectrum loads when several loads are all defined with the same shock direction.
The loads are then modeled as independent loads. ABS always models as dependent loads. For
more information, see Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) (on page
734).
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this parameter
has no effect on time history results.

Dynamic Analysis
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a mass model type. Select CONSISTENT or LUMPED.
A lumped mass model makes very coarse simplifications that often result in correspondingly
coarse results. The benefit is that it does not require a lot of memory for data storage.
The consistent mass model is well documented. Most texts on the subject, such as Structural
Dynamics - Theory and Computation by Mario Paz, describe how to build the mass matrix. The
consistent mass matrix takes into consideration the effects of bending and other rotational effects
of the beam on its mass distribution, gives a more realistic result, but requires much more data
storage.
 If mass is added at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that it is a concentrated mass,

and puts it on the on-diagonal term, effectively treating it as a lumped mass.
 If mass is zeroed at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that you want to eliminate
consideration of that DOF and zero out all elements on that row/column.
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues

(Available for: Spectrum, Modal, and Time History)
Specifies usage of the Sturm sequence calculation as described below. Select Y (for yes) or N (for
no). Y is the default value.
In most cases, the eigensolver detects modal frequencies from the lowest to the highest
frequency. When there is a strong directional dependency in the system, the modes may
converge in the wrong order. This could cause a problem if the eigensolver reaches the cutoff
number of modes, but has not found the modes with the lowest frequency.
This procedure determines the number of modes that should have been found between the
highest and lowest frequencies, and compares that against the actual number of modes
extracted. If those numbers are different, a warning appears. For example, if 22 natural
frequencies are extracted for a system, and if the highest natural frequency is 33.5 Hz, the Sturm
sequence checks that there are exactly 22 natural frequencies in the model between zero and
33.5+p Hz, where p is a numerical tolerance found from:
The Sturm sequence check fails where there are two identical frequencies at the last frequency
extracted. For example, consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
0.6637 1.2355 1.5988 4.5667 4.5667
If you only ask for the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm sequence failure occurs because
there are five frequencies that exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p is 0.0041).
To correct this problem, you can:
 Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is
reported by the Sturm sequence check.)

Dynamic Analysis
 Increase the value of Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 723) by some small amount, if the
frequency cutoff terminated the eigensolution. This usually allows the lost modes to fall into
the solution frequency range.
 Fix the subspace size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation vectors
improves the possibility that at least one of them contains some component of the missing
modes, allowing the vector to properly converge.
Advanced Tab
This tab is available when Modal, Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads (spectrum), Water
Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the
The values on this tab rarely need to be changed.
Topics
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues ............. 739
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ............................................................. 739
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance .......................................... 740
Subspace Size (0-Not Used)....................................................... 740
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used)................... 740
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ............................ 741
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ....................... 741
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ....................... 741
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) ............................................. 741
Frequency Array Spaces............................................................. 742
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues

Specifies the approximate number of significant figures in the calculated eigenvalues (ω2, where ω
is the angular frequency in rad/sec). The default value is 6. For example, if a calculated eigenvalue
is 44032.32383 using the default value of 6, then the first digit to the right of the decimal is usually
the last accurately computed figure.
The eigenvectors, or mode shapes, are calculated to half as many significant figures as are the
eigenvalues. If the eigenvalues have six significant figures of accuracy, then the eigenvectors
have three.
This number should not be decreased. Increases to 8 or 10 are not unusual but result in slower
solutions with little change in response results.
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance

Specifies the Jacobi sweep tolerance in scientific notation. The default value is 1.0E-12.
Eigen analyses use an NxN subspace to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes for a
reduced problem. The first step is to perform a Jacobi denationalization of the subspace. Iterations
are performed until the off-diagonal terms of the matrix are approximately zero. Off-diagonal terms
are considered to be close enough to zero when their ratio to the on-diagonal term in the row is
smaller the Jacobi sweep tolerance.

Dynamic Analysis
Do not change the default value unless you understand the IEEE-488 double precision
word (of approximately 14 significant figures) on the IBM PC and the approximate size of the
on-diagonal coefficients in the stiffness matrix for the problem to be solved (which may be
estimated from simple beam expressions).
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Specifies the decomposition singularity tolerance for the eigensolver in scientific notation. The
default value is 1E10.
During the decomposition of what may be a shifted stiffness matrix, the eigensolver performs a
singularity check to make sure that the shift is not too close to an eigenvalue that is to be
calculated. If a singular condition is detected, a new shift, not quite as aggressive as the last one,
is calculated and a new decomposition is attempted. If the new composition fails, a fatal error is
reported. Increasing the singularity tolerance may eliminate this fatal error, but do not enter a
value greater than 1E13. Singularity problems may also exist when very light, small diameter
piping is attached to very heavy, large diameter piping, or when very short lengths of pipe are
adjacent to very long lengths of pipe.
Subspace Size (0-Not Used)

Specifies the subspace size as described below. The default value is 0 and usually does not need
to be changed. The software then selects an expected optimal subspace size.
The eigensolution reduces the NDOFxNDOF problem to an NxN problem during each subspace
iteration, where N is the subspace size.
For the default value of 0, CAESAR II uses the square root of the bandwidth as the subspace size,
with a minimum of 4, resulting in sizes of 4 to 8 for typical piping configurations. Increasing the
subspace size slows the eigensolution but increases the numerical stability. Values in the range
between 12 and 15 are appropriate when unusual geometries or dynamic properties are
encountered, or when a job is large (having 100 elements or more, and/or requires that 25 or more
frequencies be extracted).
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used)

Specifies the shifting strategy for the eigen problem to be solved as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II selects an estimated optimal shifting strategy. Improving the
convergence characteristics increases the speed of the eigensolution. The convergence rate for
the lowest eigenpair in the subspace is inversely proportional to ω1/ω2, where ω1 is the lowest
eigenvalue in the current subspace and ω2 is the next lowest eigenvalue in the current subspace.
A slow convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of one, and a fast convergence
rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of zero. The shift is employed to get the convergence
rate as close to zero as possible. The cost of each shift is one decomposition of the system set of
equations. The typical shift value is equal to the last computed eigenvalue plus 90 percent of the
difference between this value and the lowest estimated nonconverged eigenvalue in the
subspace. As ω1 shifts closer to zero, the ratio ω1/ω2 becomes increasingly smaller and the
convergence rate increases. When eigenvalues are very closely spaced, shifting can result in
eigenvalues being lost (as checked by the Sturm sequence check).
A large value entered for this parameter effectively disables shifting so that no eigenvalues are
missed, but the solution takes longer to run. When the system to be analyzed is very large, shifting
the set of equations can be very time consuming. In these cases, set the value between 4 and 8.

Dynamic Analysis
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed)

Specifies the number of subspace iterations per shift as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates an estimated optimal number of iterations. This parameter
and % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page 741) control solution shifting by
limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt orthogonalizations. Trying to limit this number is very
dangerous for small subspace problems, but less dangerous when the subspace size is large, at
around 10-20 percent of the total number of eigenpairs required.
Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is by default performed once during each subspace iteration.
The orthogonalization assures that the eigenvector subspace does not converge to an already
found eigenpair. A large number of repeated eigenpairs calculations can appreciably slow down
the extraction of the highest eigenpairs. Proper setting of these two parameters limits the
orthogonalization in the eigensolution, such as to every second, third, or fourth iteration, and
increases the solution speed. The subspace may still converge to earlier eigenpairs during
subsequent non-orthogonalized subspace iteration passes.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 741) if the frequency of orthogonalization is
slowed.
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization

Specifies the decimal equivalent of the needed percentage, as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates a number of iterations per shift to be performed. A
maximum of N eigenpairs can conceivably converge per subspace pass, where N is the subspace
size (although this is highly unlikely). By default, a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed
for each subspace pass. This parameter and No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) (on
page 741) control solution shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt orthogonalizations. For
example, if 12 is the number of iterations, and this parameter is 50 percent (entered as 0.50), the
Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed every six iterations.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 741) if the frequency of orthogonalization is
slowed.
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N)

Specifies whether CAESAR II forces orthogonalization after eigenpair convergence. Select Y (for
yes) or N (for no).
Select Y for eigensolutions when % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page 741)
is set to a non-zero value. When a subspace pass completes and sees at least one eigenpair
convergence, a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed even if the specified percentage of
iterations has not been completed.

Dynamic Analysis
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N)

Specifies use of the out-of-core eigensolver. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
This out-of-core eigensolver is used primarily as a benchmarking and debugging aid. Select Y to
automatically run the out-of-core eigensolver on any problem size. Using this solver can take
considerably more time than the in-core solver, but always produce exactly the same results.
A problem may be too big to fit into the in-core solver because the capacity is based
upon the amount of available extended memory. The out-of-core solver then runs automatically.
This parameter does not need to be changed to Y to have this automatic switch occur.
Frequency Array Spaces

Specifies the maximum number of eigenpairs that can be extracted for the problem. The default
value of 100 is arbitrary. Increase the value as needed.
Directive Builder
Click Directives on the Spectrum Load Cases or Static/Dynamic Combinations tabs to open
the Directive Builder dialog box and select parameters for the current load case. These
parameters are load-case-specific changes to the global parameters set for all dynamic analysis
load cases. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 682) and
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 697).
For most analyses, the global parameters apply and you do not need to specify the
parameters on this dialog box.
Directional Combination Method

Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing Mass Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) (on page 737).

Dynamic Analysis
Modal Combination Method

Select GROUP, 10%, DSRSS, SRSS, or ABS. For more information, see Modal Combination
Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 731).
Spatial Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)
(on page 731).
Spatial or Modal Combination First
Select SPATIAL or MODAL. For more information, see Re-use Last Eigensolution
(Frequencies and Mode Shapes) (on page 730).
Pseudostatic Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb.
Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 737).
Missing Mass Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing Mass Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) (on page 737).
Static/Dynamic Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS to define how the load case is combined. The ABS method takes the
absolute value of all displacement, force, and stress data for each load case and adds them.
The SRSS method sums the square of all displacement, force, and stress data for each load
case and then takes the square root of the result. This is the only parameter available on the
Static/Dynamic Combinations tab.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data

Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points allow you to view and edit
spectrum data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions.
The command is available when entering values on the Spectrum Definitions tab or the Time
History Definitions tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on
page 677).
Click the command, make a selection in the Select a Spectrum Name dialog box, and click OK.
The spectrum name dialog box appears. You can add, edit, or delete rows, or add ASCII data.
Enter a sufficient number of data points to fully describe the spectrum.

Dynamic Analysis
Add Row
Adds a new row after the selected row.
Delete Row
Deletes the selected row.
Read From File
Reads data from an ASCII text file.
Range
Specifies a spectrum range value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Ordinate
Specifies a spectrum ordinate value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Valid formats are:
 Exponents, such as 0.3003E+03, 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3.
 Explicit multiplication or division, such as 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12.
DLF/Spectrum Generator
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator converts spectrum time
waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor (DLF) curve. DLF data is
automatically referenced in the Spectrum Definitions tab. For more information, see
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 677).
The DLF curve can also be saved to a file and later referenced by CAESAR II as a FORCE
response spectrum curve.

Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum Name
Displays the name of the selected value of Spectrum Type. You can type a different name.
For UBC, ASCE7, IBC, and CFE Diseno por Sismo:
 This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that is generated here. A suffix of
H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. After it has
been properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be
used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
For B31.1 Relief & User Defined Time History Waveform:
 This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load
defined here. After it has been properly entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum
Definitions tab and can be used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
Spectrum Type
Specifies the name of the spectrum. The data from this spectrum is used to generate the DLF
curve.
UBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform
Building Code.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on UBC Figure 16-3 shown below.

Dynamic Analysis
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is to 50% of I•Ca across the entire period range.

Dynamic Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the seismic importance factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum
accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum. Values range
from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
For this code, the vertical shock spectrum is also multiplied by the importance factor.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Specifies the zero-period acceleration, Ca, for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. The value is
based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Specifies the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies), Cv, for the site as defined
in Table 16-R. The value is based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from
0.06 to 1.92.
ASCE7
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE 7 standard.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on ASCE 7. Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (ASCE 7-2010) is
shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5.
Above a period of four seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes.
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 9.5.2.7.1) across the entire period range. Neither
I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.

Dynamic Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the occupancy importance factor, based on the function of the structure. The calculated
spectrum accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum.
 ASCE 7
The occupancy importance factor is I, as defined in Table 11.5. Values range from 1.0 to
1.5 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
 IBC
The occupancy importance factor is IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table
1604.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5.
Site Coefficient Fa
Specifies the acceleration-based site coefficient Fa. This value adjusts the mapped short period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (Ss). Values range from 0.8 to 2.5.
 ASCE 7
Fa is listed in Table 11.4-1.
 IBC
Fa is listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1).
Site Coefficient Fv
Specifies the velocity-based site coefficient Fv. This value adjusts the mapped one-second period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped one-second period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Values range from 0.8 to 3.5.
 ASCE 7
Fv is listed in Table 11.4-2.
 IBC
Fv is listed in Table 1615.1.2(2).
Mapped MCESRA at Short Periods (Ss)

Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short
periods, Ss. This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a structure having
a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping.
 ASCE 7
Ss values are mapped in Chapter 22.
 IBC
Ss values are mapped in Section 1615.1.

Dynamic Analysis
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at a
period of one second, S1. This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a
structure having a period of one second and 5% critical damping.
 ASCE 7
S1 values are mapped in Chapter 22.
 IBC
S1 values are mapped in Section 1615.1.
Response Modification R
Specifies the response modification coefficient, R. This coefficient reflects system ductility. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are divided by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures. A value of 3.5 for piping is
common.
 ASCE 7
R is defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
 IBC
R is defined in Table 1617.6 and used according to equation 16-53.
Long-Period Transition Period TL

Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7
Spectrum Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from new maps, which are similar to
zone maps, for all 50 states. The ASCE standard provides these maps in Figures 22-12
through 22-16 (ASCE 7-2010). In addition, Section 11.4.5 of ASCE 7-2010, discussions the
constant-displacement branch of the code.

Dynamic Analysis
IBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International
Building Code, 2000.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on IBC 2000, Fig. 1615.1.4 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
IBC generally uses the same spectrum data parameters as ASCE7 (on page 747).
CFE Diseno por Sismo

Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the Mexico's
Earthquake Resistant Design code.
As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to calculate the shear force at the
center of mass of each vessel element. After the shear force at each elevation is known, the
moments are accumulated to the base, leg or lug support.
You should begin the analysis by calculating the weights and centroidal distances of all of the
vessel elements. It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in
length. For cylinders, this value is about 10 or 12 feet (3 m). This ensures that the software has
enough information to calculate the natural period of vibration with sufficient accuracy.
Using the input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, CAESAR II
determines the values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.

Dynamic Analysis
The values are:
ao Spectral coordinate used in computing a
c Spectral coordinate used in computing a
Ta(s) Period value used in computing a
Tb(s) Period value used in computing a
r Exponent used in computing a
For group A structures, the values of the spectral ordinates ao and c are multiplied by
1.5.
Seismic Zone
Specifies the seismic zone. Select A, B, C, or D. The zones are described in Manual de Diseno
por Sismo for Mexico. The map on page 1.3.29 shows the seismic zones.
Soil Type
Specifies the soil type.
 I - Hard Soil
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b0 = 700 m/s or
modulus of rigidity ≥ 85000.
 II - Medium Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of propagation
which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc > Bc Tc.
 III - Soft Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of propagation
which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc < Bc Tc.
Structural Group
Specifies the structural group based on the degree of safety. Select A - High Safety, B -
Intermediate Safety, or C - Low Safety.
Towers and tanks are examples of group A structures requiring a high degree of safety
in their design
Increase Factor
Specifies a value for the increased factor of safety, as required by some facilities. The default
value is 1.0. This value directly multiplies the spectrum values. This value is traditionally 1.118 and
should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.

Dynamic Analysis
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum

Selecting to create a normalized force response spectrum for loads from a safety valve discharge
into an open system according to the nonmandatory rules of B31.1, Appendix II - Rules for the
Design of Safety Valve Installations.
The spectrum is based on B31.1 Appendix II, Fig. II-3-2.
Opening Time
Specifies the opening time of the relief value in milliseconds.
User Defined Time History Waveform

Select to create a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor or DLF) spectrum based on
manually entered load versus time history.
Maximum Table Frequency

Specifies the maximum frequency in the table to be used to generate the DLF curve. This value is
usually no more than 100 Hz and is commonly 40 to 60 Hz for relief valves. For other types of
impulse loadings, a larger maximum may be needed.
If piping frequencies greater than this value are found in the system and included in the spectrum
analysis, then the spectrum value at the maximum table frequency is used. You can decide which
frequencies are important and how high the frequency must go by looking at the solution
participation factors and the animated mode shapes. Only the lower frequencies typically
contribute to the system displacements, forces, and stresses.
Number of Points
Specifies the number of points to be generated for the spectrum table. Fifteen to twenty points are
usually sufficient. These points are distributed in a cubic relationship starting at zero hertz.

Dynamic Analysis
Enter Pulse Data

Specifies time and force pulse data for the waveform. Click Enter Pulse Data to enter the Time
and Force values as shown below. This command is available only for User Defined Time
History Waveform.
Figure 2: Input Table Dialog
Save/Continue - Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file.
Time
Specifies time waveform values in milliseconds for the points to be modeled.
Force
Specifies forces corresponding to the points on the force/time curve.
The absolute magnitude of the force is not important, but the form of the time history
loading is important. The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force
pattern defined on the Force Sets Tab (on page 687). There can be any number of line entries in
the excitation frequency data.

Dynamic Analysis
Generate Spectrum
Displays the Spectrum Table Values dialog box with the force spectrum values based on entered
spectrum data.
This command is available for all values of Spectrum Type except User Defined Time History
Waveform.
Save To File
Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file. For seismic spectra, two files are saved:
horizontal (with H appended to the file name) and vertical (with V appended to the file
name). Use this command if you want to reuse the spectrum values in other analyses.
Click OK if you only want to use the values in the current analysis.
OK
Loads the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Cancel
Closes the window without loading the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Relief Load Synthesis

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Dynamic forces associated with relieving devices can cause considerable
mechanical damage to equipment and supports. There are two types of destructive dynamic
forces associated with relief devices that must be evaluated:
 Thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface.
 Acoustic shock due to the sudden change in fluid momentum and the associated traveling
pressure waves.
The first step in performing a relief load analysis is to compute the magnitudes of the relieving
thrust forces. For open-type vent systems, use Relief Load Synthesis . Results are calculated
for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig.

Dynamic Analysis
This command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected
as Analysis Type.
The discussion here concerns only the thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface.
Acoustic traveling pressure waves can be addressed similar to water hammer. For more
information, see Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 668).
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig

Click Gas to enter gas properties. CAESAR II assumes that a successful vent stack/relief system
design maintains the following gas properties:
Line Temperature
Specifies the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas
temperature upstream of the relief valve.
Pressure (abs)
Specifies the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas pressure
upstream of the relief valve. This value is the absolute pressure.
Stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow velocity
in the line is high.
ID of Relief Valve Orifice

Specifies the flow passage inside diameter for the smallest diameter in the relief valve throat. This
information is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.

Dynamic Analysis
ID of Relief Valve Piping

Specifies the flow passage inside diameter of the relief valve piping.
ID of Vent Stack Piping

Specifies the inside diameter of the vent stack piping. If CAESAR II is sizing the vent stack, or if
the vent stack piping is the same size as the relief valve piping, then do not enter a value.
Length of the Vent Stack

Specifies the length of the vent stack. Add double the lengths of fittings and elbows or calculate
the appropriate equivalent lengths for non-pipe fittings and add the lengths. Typical values for
these constants are shown below:
Ratio of Gas-Specific (k) Gas Constant (R) (ft. lbf./lbm./deg. R

Heats
Superheated Steam 1.300 Nitrogen 55.16
Saturated Steam 1.100 Carbon Dioxide 35.11
Nitrogen 1.399 Acetylene 59.35
Carbon Dioxide 1.288 Ammonia 90.73
Acetylene 1.232 n-Butane 26.59
Ammonia 1.304 Ethane 51.39
n-Butane 1.093 Ethylene 55.09
Ethane 1.187 Methane 96.33
Ethylene 1.240 Propane 35.05
Methane 1.226
Propane 1.127
This value is a required.
Ratio of Gas Specific Heats (k)

Specifies the ratio of gas specific heats, k. The value for air is 1.4.
Gas Constant (R)

Specifies the gas constant, R. The value for air is 53.0.

Dynamic Analysis
Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella Fitting (Y/N)

Specifies whether or not the vent pipe has an umbrella fitting. Select Y (for yes) if the vent stack
slips inside of the piping system, or N (for no) if the vent stack is connected to the piping system.
Umbrella Fitting Example

The vent stack pipe is not hard-piped to the relief valve pipe. The relief valve pipe slips inside of
the vent pipe.
Non-Umbrella Fitting Example

The vent stack pipe is hard-piped to the relief valve pipe.
Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack (Y/N)

Specifies whether or not the software sizes the vent stack. Select Y (for yes) for CAESAR II to
calculate the length and diameter of the vent stack. The software sizing algorithm searches
through a table of available inside pipe diameters starting at the smallest diameter until a vent
stack ID is found that satisfies the thermodynamic criteria. The calculated inside diameter is
automatically inserted into the input.

Dynamic Analysis
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids

Click Liquid to enter liquid properties. CAESAR II assumes that a liquid vent system has one of
the following configurations:
Relief Valve or Rupture Disk

Specifies whether a relief valve or rupture disk is used. Select RV for a relief valve. The software
sets the nozzle coefficient, k, to 0.80. Select RD for a rupture disk. The software sets the nozzle
coefficient, k, to 0.67. You can also enter the relieving device nozzle coefficient k if it is known.
Supply Press. (abs)

Specifies the stagnation, or zero velocity, pressure of the supply line.
ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk Opening

Specifies the inside diameter of the contracted opening in the relieving device. This information is
typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.
For special purpose calculations, this ID may be equal to the ID of the relief exit piping.
ID Relief Exit Piping

Specifies the inside diameter of the piping connected to the downstream side of the relief valve.
ID Manifold Piping
Specifies the insider diameter of the manifold if the relief exit piping runs into a manifold. Do not
enter a value if there is not a manifold.
ID Supply Header
Specifies the inside diameter of the supply header.

Dynamic Analysis
Fluid Density (Specific Gravity)

Specifies the specific gravity of the fluid being relieved.
Length of Relief Exit Piping

Specifies the equivalent length of the relief exit piping. Add twice the piping length for fittings and
elbows, or the calculated fitting equivalent length.
Length of Manifold Piping

Specifies the equivalent length of the manifold piping, if any. Add twice the piping length for fitting
and elbows. Enter 0 or do not enter a value if there is not a manifold system or if the manifold is not
filled by the relieving fluid.
Fluid Bulk Modulus

Specifies the bulk modulus of the fluid. If no value is entered, a default valve of 250,000 psi is
used. See Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 763) for typical values. These
are the values for an isothermal compression as taken from Marks Standard Handbook for
Engineers, p. 3-35, 8th edition.
Supply Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the supply header.
 The error message "NUMERICAL ERROR OR NO FLOW CONDITION DETECTED," means

that a physically impossible configuration was described.
 Flashing of volatile relief liquids is not considered in this analysis. If the relieving liquid flashes
in the exhaust piping as its pressure drops to atmospheric, then use another method to
calculate the resulting gas properties and thrust loads.

Dynamic Analysis
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis
Figure 3: Relief Load Synthesis Output (Gas)
Topics
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas).......................................... 760
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface ..................................... 760
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit......................................................... 761
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening ................................. 761
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing................................... 761
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit .............. 762
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas Conditions/Subsonic
Velocity Gas Conditions .............................................................. 762
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas)

The calculated gas mass flow rate, based on choked conditions at the relief orifice. If greater mass
flow rates are expected, then investigate the error in either the approach used by CAESAR II or in
the expected mass flow rate.
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface

The thrust load acting back on the relief valve piping if there is an umbrella fitting between the vent
stack and the relief valve piping.

Dynamic Analysis
If the vent stack is hard piped to the relief valve piping, then this intermediate thrust is balanced by
tensile loads in the pipe and can be ignored.
Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack
interface thrust acts in this
configuration.
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit

The thrust load acting on the elbow just before the pipe opens into the atmosphere when there is
an elbow in the vent stack piping.
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening

The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line pressure
when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the relief
system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer type
system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the stagnation
pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header piping.
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing

The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line pressure
when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through the relief
system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer type
system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c is the
speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.

Dynamic Analysis
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit

The thermodynamic entropy limit or subsonic vent exit limit. These values should always be
greater than one. If either value falls below 1.0, then the thermodynamic assumptions made
regarding the gas properties are incorrect and the calculated thrust values should be disregarded.
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas

Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas Conditions
The thermodynamic properties of the gas at three critical points in the relief system.
The entire formulation for the thrust gas properties is based on an ideal gas equation of state. If
the pressures and temperatures displayed above for the gas being vented are outside of the
range where the ideal gas laws apply, then some alternate source should be sought for the
calculation of the thrust loads of the system. In addition, all three of these points should be
sufficiently clear of the gas saturation line. When the exit gas conditions become saturated, the
magnitude of the thrust load can be reduced significantly. In this case, consult the manufacturer.

Dynamic Analysis
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis

Computed Mass Flow Rate
The calculated exhaust mass flow rate in U.S. gallons per minute. CAESAR II makes the
necessary pressure drop calculations between the stagnation pressure upstream of the relief
device and atmospheric conditions at the exit of the manifold.
Thrust at the End of the Exit Piping

The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the exit piping. If there is no manifold, then
this is the external thrust load acting on the piping system. If there is a manifold, then this thrust is
opposed by tension in the pipe wall at the junction of the exit piping and manifold. For more
information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold
Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 764).
Thrust at the End of the Manifold Piping

The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the manifold piping. If there is no manifold
system, then this thrust is equal to the thrust at the end of the exit piping. See the figures that
follow for clarification. For more information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe
End Flow Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 764).
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening

The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line pressure
when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the relief
system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer type
system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the stagnation
pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header piping.
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing

The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line pressure
when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through the relief
system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer type
system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c is the
speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.

Dynamic Analysis
Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold

Pipe End Flow Conditions
The calculated fluid properties at the three critical cross-sections in the relief piping. If pressures or
velocities here do not seem reasonable, then some characteristic of the relief model is in error.
If the L dimensions are significant (by several feet), then unbalanced thrust loads acting
between the elbow-elbow pairs are very similar to a water hammer load. Water hammer pulses
travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface pulses travel at the
velocity of the flowing fluid. These unbalanced loads can cause significant piping displacements in
much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the calculated thrust and
the duration may be found from the calculated fluid velocity and distance between each
elbow-elbow pair.

Dynamic Analysis
Analysis Results
Each type of dynamic analysis has its own procedure for producing results, but all start in the
same way:
1. Save and check the dynamic input.
2. Run the analysis.
3. The account number is requested (if accounting is active).
4. The ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented).
5. The element and system stiffness matrices are assembled.
6. Load vectors are created where appropriate.
7. The system mass matrix is generated.
From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Processing (on page 768).
Topics
Modal ......................................................................................... 765
Harmonic .................................................................................... 766
Spectrum .................................................................................... 767
Time History ............................................................................... 767
Modal
After dynamic initialization and basic equation assembly are completed, CAESAR II opens the
Dynamic Eigensolver, which calculates natural frequencies and modes of vibration.
Each natural frequency appears as it is calculated, along with the lapsed time of the analysis. The
processor searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until the

Dynamic Analysis
frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff and
mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The amount of time to calculate or find
these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the cutoff
settings.
Eigensolution may be canceled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes
calculated up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, the software uses the Sturm
Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you can return to the
dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually
satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can
review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node shapes
in and animated format.
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis.
These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At
the completion of each solution, the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the
phase angle associated with it are listed. The root results for each frequency, and the system
deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond this
point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, the software presents the
frequencies. You can then select the frequencies and phase angles needed for further analysis.
This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those frequencies.
Selecting Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when you enter phase angles in
the dynamic input.
For all phased harmonic analyses, you can select separate phase angle solutions, including the
cycle maxima and minima, for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution
represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the system response. For a solution
without phase angles, you know when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements occur.
When phase angles are entered, you do not know when the maximum stresses, forces, and
displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and
stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency.
You must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends.
There is a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase
selected for output. You have the option of letting the software select the frequency/phase pairs
offering the largest displacements on a system basis. The largest displacement solution usually
represents the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The displaced shapes for
the remaining frequencies are processed like static cases, with local force, moment, and stress
calculations. Control then shifts to the Dynamic Output Processor, which provides an animated
display of the harmonic results.
All harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15,200 psi,
then the stress due to the dynamic load, which is superimposed onto any steady state component
of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15,200 psi and -15,200 psi. The total stress range
due to this particular dynamic loading is 30,400 psi.

Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into:
 Calculating the system’s natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors
 Pulling the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculating the
system response for each mode of vibration
 Combining the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as in modal analysis.
After natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses
are calculated and combined on the modal level. After all the results are collected, the Dynamic
Output Processor appears. You can review spectral results, natural frequencies, and animated
mode shapes.
Time History
Modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration of
the system are calculated. The dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric integration
techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps. The modal results are then
summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The Dynamic Output Processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination)
with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. You can also request
snap-shot cases at different load levels.

SECTION 10
Dynamic Output Processing
In This Section
Dynamic Output Window............................................................. 768
Dynamic Output Animation Window ............................................ 785
Relief Load Synthesis Results..................................................... 789
Dynamic Output Window

Shows the load case analysis and results of a dynamic analysis operation. The Dynamic Output
window is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it can be accessed
anytime subsequently from the following commands in the Output menu:
Spectrum/Modal
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Spectrum/Modal

Main window menu: Analysis > Spectrum/Modal
Displays results from a modal-only solution or from earthquake, water-hammer, and relief
valve solutions. This command is also enabled if a spectrum solution was run.
Harmonic
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Harmonic
Displays the results from a harmonic analysis.
Time History
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Time History

Displays time history results.
Window Commands
Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file. Modal/Spectrum results
are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.
Save
Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.
Print
Prints the selected reports. To print a hard copy of the reports click File > Print. To send
reports to a file rather than the printer, click File > Save, and then type in or select the name of
the file. To change the file name for a new report, select File > Save As.
View Animation
Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of the
mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system
response to the force-time profile.
Input
Displays the Piping Input window.

View Load Cases

Provides a summary of each dynamic load case including the spectrum name, scale factor,
direction cosines, and node range.
Word
Sends reports to Microsoft Word.
View Reports
Displays the selected reports in the Dynamic Output window.
Dynamic Output Window Display Lists

Load Cases Analyzed
Shows the load cases that were analyzed. For spectrum analysis, the load cases listed
constitute all of the spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic combinations. For
time history analysis, the listed loads are the results maxima case containing each of the
snap-shot cases for the single time history load case, and each of the static/dynamic
combinations.
Report Options
Shows the reports available for the analyzed load cases.
General Results
Lists reports that are not associated with load cases.
For a description of the options, see Report Types (on page 773).
You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by Use CTRL+ or SHIFT+ and
select one or more load cases and reports. You can send the reports to a printer, print to a file,
save to a file or set to display.
The General Results Reports that display in the right-hand column do not require that a
Report Option be selected highlight to print.
Open a Job
Opens a different job for output review.
To review an output from a different job, click Open and browse for the output file.
Modal and Spectrum results are stored in *._s files. Time History results are stored in
*._t files.

Enter a Report Title

To include a report title at the top of each page of the report, click Enter Report Titles . There
are two options for report titles: Edit 2-line Report Title and Edit Load Case Labels.
Click Edit 2-line Report Title and the following dialog box appears.
These two lines will be added to the top of each report page. Enter the report title, and click OK.
Now click Edit Load Case Labels and the following dialog box appears.
Here you can change the names of the load cases as they appear in the reports. Click OK to
close, and then click Done.

View Load Cases

To review the dynamic load cases including spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and
node range, click View Load Cases .
Here you can scroll through the various load cases. Click OK to close.
Send Reports to Microsoft Word

This feature is activated when producing a report and enables the use of all of MS Word
formatting, such as font selection and margin control, and printing features. You can append
multiple reports to form a final report.
All reports that are to be saved in the Word output file need not be declared at one time.
Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the
session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.)
After closing the report, a table of contents is added.
1. To send a report to Microsoft Word, select the reports and click View Reports using
Microsoft Word .
Microsoft Word automatically opens, and the report is generated.
Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple report at once.
View Reports
Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Scroll through the reports where
necessary. See Report Types (on page 773) for a list of available reports.
View Reports Commands

The following toolbar displays at the top of the report when you click View Reports.
< Previous
Takes you back to the previous report.

> Next
Takes you to the next report.
Find
Enables you to locate and highlight text in the report such as node numbers.
Print
Prints the selected report(s).
Report Types
Two types of reports are available from the Dynamic Output window: reports that are associated
with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column), and reports that are
not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right column).
For modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank.
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history
displacement solution. The report options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments, and
stresses.
Displacements
Provides the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. The summing methodology for
Spectral analysis results in all positive displacements. For time history analysis, the results include
the applicable sign.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated because the
application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values
are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate. For example, there is a tendency
for the system to oscillate because of the potential energy stored after undergoing some maximum
dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of the earth.
Restraints
Provides the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown below.
NODE FX
5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the
dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the
load. The third line for each node tells the mode and loading that was responsible for the
maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.

The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2 X (1)
mode load direction (load component)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal
component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction component
(either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis, or the first force
set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report enables you to know
if there is a problem. If there is a problem, it enables you to identify which mode of vibration and
load component is the major contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudo-static (seismic anchor movement)
contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the component
shows up as an (M), it indicates a missing mass contribution. A typical restraint report is shown
below.

Local Forces
Provides elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined below.
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
 a is along the element axis (for example, perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
 b is a XY, unless a is vertical and then b is along the X axis
 c is a Xb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
 a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
 b is to the plane of the bend
 c is a Xb.
For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
 a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
 b is to the plane of the intersection
 c is a Xb.
The X indicates the vector cross product.
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum
response, followed by:
1. Modal maximum
2. Modal maximum load identifier.
All force/moment reports are set up to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of the
element to keep the element in equilibrium.

Global Forces
Contains information identical to information provided for Local Forces (on page 774), except that
it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report is shown below.

Stresses
Contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses, as well as in-plane and
out-of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode and modal maximum data.
A typical report is shown below.

Forces/Stresses
Summarizes the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses, the calculated stress, and the calculated stress allowable.

Cumulative Usage
Shows on an element-by-element basis the impact of each load case on the total fatigue allowable
and the cumulative impact of all simultaneously-selected load cases. This report is available only
for one or more fatigue stress types. Only one report is generated, regardless of the number of
selected fatigue load cases. If the total usage factor exceeds 1.0; it implies fatigue failure under
that loading condition.

Mass Participation Factors

Provides one number for each mode and load direction for a dynamic load case. This value
provides you with an understanding of the effect that the dynamic loading and the mass had on the
particular mode. The absolute magnitude has no significance; only the relationship between
values for a single load case is important.

Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second. The period is
reported in seconds.
Modes Mass Normalized

Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to the largest mass in the model.
Modes Unity Normalized

Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and
rotations scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get an understanding of the
mode shape.
The example below shows two mode shapes from a small job. In the first mode, the largest single
component is in the Y direction. In the second mode, the largest single component is in the Z
direction.

Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to
1.0, and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
Included Mass Data

Displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the
percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the
individual shocks of the dynamic load cases. The value gives an indication of the accuracy of the
total system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the ideal.
% Mass Included
Shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions.
% Force Active
Shows the value that is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the global directions,
and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. The sums of the three
directions are added vectorally.
% Force Added
Shows the value obtained by subtracting % Force Active from 100.

Dynamic Input
Lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
Mass Model
Shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values must be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long,
straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report, shown below is very uniform in distribution, and should produce a good
dynamic solution. CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.

Active Boundary Conditions

Shows how CAESAR II deals with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It shows which directional
supports are included, which gaps are assumed closed, and how friction resistance is modeled.

Input Echo
Displays the Input Listing Options dialog box and allows you to select which portions of the input
are reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions,
material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:

 Uniform Loads
 Wind/Wave
 SIF's and TEE's
 Bends
 Rigids
 Reducers
 Flanges
 Equipment Check
 Restraints
 Displacements
 Hanger
Select the options you want to print or view, and then click OK.
Dynamic Output Animation Window

Mode Shape
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Mode Shapes

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Mode Shapes
Harmonic
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Harmonic

Time History
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Time History
The Dynamic Output Animation window enables you to review analytic results in graphic mode.
This window has the same general capabilities as the Classic Piping Input dialog box. It uses the
3D/HOOPS graphic standard toolbar, which provides zoom, orbit, pan, and several other
navigation options. From this window, you can also switch views and modes.
Activate the Dynamic Output Animation window from the Dynamic Output window by
clicking View Animation .
The animation commands enable you to view animated motion of the system for static
displacements or various dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example,
allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation
of the system response to the force-time profile.
A piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic
projection). If necessary, you can display the model using an isometric view, or by any of the
defined orthographic views: Front/Back, Top/Bottom, or Left/Right by clicking the corresponding
toolbar buttons. You can interactively rotate, zoom, or pan the model. Zoom to Window and
Zoom to Selection options are also available.
You can also set perspective or orthographic projections. Click Nodes to display node numbers
to display node numbers. Select the load case or mode shape you want from the corresponding
drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the animation is shown at the top of
the view plot whenever you select Action > Titles.
The Animated Plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion activate
the animation. The Motion command uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion
produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor
to animate the current plot. If Node Numbers is clicked, the node number text is moved together
with the corresponding node. When the plot is animated in the window, it may be sped up, slowed
down, or stopped using appropriate the toolbar command. After selecting a different load case or
mode shape from the drop-down list, the motion automatically stops. Select one of the motion
commands again to activate the model movement.
The File > Print Motion command prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is not
available for time history animation. For clarity purposes, we recommend you use the single line
(Motion) option to generate the printouts.
Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking Create an Animation File. Alternatively,
you can access this command from the Dynamic Plot File > Save as Animation. After activating
this command, the standard MS Windows Save As dialog box displays and prompts you to enter
the file name and directory to save the files. By default, the current file name and current data
directory is used. There are two file types that are created: an HTML file and an HSF file. To view
the saved animation, find the corresponding HTML file and double-click it. The corresponding HSF
file containing the animation routines is displayed. The HTML file contains buttons to play or pause
the animation. The model can also be viewed at different orthogonal planes, or returned to the
isometric view.
The HTML is an interactive file.

The first time a CAESAR II file is created, the HTML file is opened with your default internet
browser. The software displays a message requesting permission to download a control from
Tech Soft 3D. Click Yes to allow the download, after which the image displays. After the model
appears, right-click the model to view the available options such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or
different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Animation of Static Results -Displacements

You can view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, click Static Output > Options > View Animation.
You can click View Animation to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.
Static animation graphics has all the standard model projection and motion toolbar commands.
The load case can be selected from the drop-down list. The title consists of the load case name
followed by the file name, and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls the
speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
We recommend you use the Deflected Shape command button on the 3D/HOOPS
Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to 3D/HOOPS
Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
Animation of Dynamic Results –Modal/Spectrum

You can view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies of
the system. This feature is available from the Dynamic Output Animation window after running the
modal analysis.
After invoking the modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. Natural
frequencies can be selected from the drop-down list to animate the corresponding mode shape.
The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date.
Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or
volume mode motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic

You can calculate the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be
animated.
The Harmonics animation module can be launched from the animation Harmonic Output window
by clicking View Animation . The system displays in its default isometric state. The
animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line and
volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases corresponding to
the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop-down list. The title shows the currently
selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each analyzed load case can be saved to an HTML file for later
presentation.

Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History

The Time History animation window can be launched from the Dynamic Output Animation window
by clicking View Animation . The system displays in the centerline isometric mode. The model
can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic projections. The
current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the top of the graphics
view. Due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the animation time, the
animation is only available in centerline mode.
Save Animation to File is not available in the time history animation for the same
reason.
An additional feature of the Time History animation module is the Element Viewer. The Element
Viewer displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking Element Viewer,
the Element Info dialog box displays the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code stress, and
SIF information provided for the current element at a current time step. Clicking Next >> or
Previous << changes the information to correspond to the next or previous element in the system
for the same time step.
When you click Motion to start the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title
line, and the task bar at the bottom of the window shows the progress.
There are several ways to move the model:
 You can increase , decrease , or stop the animation speed.
 Click Next >> or Previous << while the Element Info dialog box is active to update the
information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is
stopped, it advances or moves back one step. Click View Animation again after you stop the
animation to continue the time history motion from the location (the time step) where the
animation was stopped.
 Click Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step to bring the animation to the
beginning or the end, correspondingly.
 Drag the time slider to the appropriate time step. The position of the bar adjusts automatically
as the animation progresses. You can click on the slider and then drag it along the time-line to
find the time step you want, or to see the displaced shape of the model.
 If the Element Info dialog box is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
 You can enable the node numbers; however, we recommend node numbering be disabled
when using animation. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system. This creates a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the
animation.

Relief Load Synthesis Results

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Results are calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig. This
command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected as
Analysis Type. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis (on page 754).
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis (on page 760)
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 763)

SECTION 11
Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window menu: Tools > ISOGEN Isometrics
Creates stress isometric drawings and opens the Stress Isometric Annotation dialog box in the
CAESAR II Isogen window. You can include the piping model data created by CAESAR II in the
display area of the Isogen window and then generate a stress isometric drawing. The data you
enter to define a piping model is the input data, and the data generated by CAESAR II after
analyzing a model is the output data.
Stress Isometric Tutorials (on page 800)
What do you want to do?

 Add input feature information (on page 791)
 Add output feature information (on page 791)
 Add custom annotations for nodal features (on page 792)
 Add custom annotations for elemental features (on page 792)
 Set project information (on page 793)
 Configure annotation preferences (on page 793)
 Configure isometric drawing split points (on page 794)
 Create a drawing using the default style (on page 796)
 Create a drawing using an existing style (on page 797)
 Create a drawing using a new style (on page 798)
 Create and save an annotation template (on page 799)
 Apply a template (on page 799)

Add input feature information

The Input tab of the Stress Isometrics Annotations panel lists input features. You can select a
category from the Feature list to view data related to a feature.
1. On the Home ribbon of the main CAESAR II window, select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home ribbon, click Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics .
The model displays in the C2Isogen window.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
The Stress Isometric Annotations panel displays on the right
4. Select the Input tab.
5. Click the Feature list and select a feature category.
At the appropriate node, the software displays an annotation containing the data associated
with the selected category.
6. Select a row in the Select column to view the feature information on the associated node of
the 3D model in the graphic view. Clear the row to remove the feature information in the
model.
7. If you want to view information from multiple Feature categories, select the categories and the
required rows.
8. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected input information.
 When you select Restraint/Hanger Types in the Feature list, select Tag and GUID to display
Tag and GUID columns at the end of each row. When you select a row, the annotation in the
graphic view includes tag (support ID) and GUID data.
 The software displays the model parameters, such as Diameter, Insulation Thickness, and
Wall Thickness, in the drawing only when there is a change in these parameters.
 To select multiple nodes in the list, select the first row (in the Select column), press SHIFT,
and then select the last row.
 To remove an annotation, right-click the annotation tag in the graphic view, area and click
Delete Note.
Add output feature information

The Output tab defines what post-analysis results of a model that the software includes in the
drawing. Select Load Cases on the Output tab to see the load cases the software uses to
analyze the model. The analysis results are categorized as Displacement, Restraint, and Stress
in the Results box. Select Hanger Data on the Output tab to see generate hanger information not
specific to a load case.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.

3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used to analyze the model. Output
features are available for selection only if you have analyzed the piping model. If you have not
analyzed the model, click Generate Output from the Output tab.
5. Click Load Cases to select a load case.
The results generated for the load case are listed in the Results box.
6. Select the result type you want, and then select the nodes to include the information for
annotation.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected output information.
 The Node number, Node Name, and Description columns display information entered in
CAESAR II and cannot be edited.
 The Load Cases list displays load cases created for static analysis only.
 To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display
area, and then press DELETE.
Add custom annotations for nodal features

The Nodal Annotations tab adds your custom notes for each node in the drawing that you select.
The Node # and Node Name columns display the node information you enter all in CAESAR II
and are not editable. You can type your comments for the available nodes in the User
Annotations column.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
module.
4. Select the Nodal Annotations tab to view a list of all the nodes in the model.
5. To add a note for a node, click the associated cell in the User Annotation column and then
type your note.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
Add custom annotations for elemental features

The Elemental Annotations tab of the Stress Isometric Annotation panel lists all model
element. You can add custom remarks for each element in the User Annotation column on this
tab. The From, From Name, To, and To Name columns display the information you enter for
each node in CAESAR II.
1. On the Home ribbon of the main CAESAR II window, select File > Open to open a model.

2. On the Home ribbon, click Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics .

The model displays in the C2Isogen window.
The Stress Isometric Annotations panel displays on the right
4. Select the Elemental Annotations tab to view a list of model elements.
5. To add a comment for an element, type the comment in the User Annotations column.
6. To display the element names at the middle of the elements on the drawing, click Export
element name.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
 The comments you add in the User Annotations column on the Stress Isometric
Annotations panel can be viewed only in the drawing. Tags for user annotations are not
visible in the model.
 Values in the Element Name column are read-only.
Set project information

The Project Attributes tab defines general information about your project, such as the project
name, number, client name, and more.
module.
4. Select the Project Attributes tab.
5. Type values for each attribute in the Attribute Value column.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.
Configure annotation preferences

The Settings tab on the Stress Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output
features available for annotation. You select a text box shape for each feature allowing you to
represent information in different text box shapes on the drawing. The software then displays the
feature information in the drawing according to the shape you select.
module.
4. Select the Settings tab to view the list of features.

5. Click TextBox Shape list associated to a feature, and then select a text box shape for the
feature.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotation preferences.
The text box shapes you select for different features are visible only in the drawing.
Configure isometric drawing split points

The Split tab defines the split points for new isometric drawings. For example, your model
contains nodes 10 through 250. If you select nodes 90 and 170, the first isometric drawing will
have nodes 10 through 80. The second isometric drawing will have nodes 90 through 160, and the
third isometric drawing will have nodes 170 through 250.
module.
4. Select the Split tab.
5. In the Split column, select the nodes at which to start new isometric drawings.

6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.

Create a drawing using the default style

You can use different drawing styles 1 to create a drawing. Using the Isometric Drawing
Generation dialog box, you can select a style or create a new style. Selecting the default style to
create a drawing applies a predefined set of styles and rules to the drawing. Use this option if you
are not familiar with the drawing styles or if you do not want to create a custom drawing style.
To create a drawing using the default style:
module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box.
4. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to create drawings.
The Drawings dialog box displays a list of drawings created for the piping model.
5. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default viewer.
 The drawings created using the default style are saved in the same folder as the piping model.
 The unit system used in creating the pipe model is used in the drawing, by default.
 You cannot make any changes to the default drawing style.
 The Status Message dialog box shows the number of files and drawings created for the model,
and reports the errors generated during creation of the drawing.
1
A drawing style is a set a parameters that you define to represent your piping system drawing.
These parameters typically include drawing format, drawing size, drawing frame, units, and
options to display other information like materials list, weld list, and so on.

Create a drawing using an existing style

Using this option you can apply an existing drawing style and create a drawing. You must have an
existing style to use this option. You can create a new style using C2Isogen, or some other
application like Alias I-Configure.
To create a drawing using an existing style:
module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing on the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
4. Select Use Existing Style, and then click OK to open the Select Existing Style dialog box.
2
5. To select an isometric directory for your project, click Browse, and then select the root
directory.
3
6. To select an isometric project , click Browse, and then select a project.
7. To select an isometric style, click Browse, and then select the style you want to apply.
When you select the directory, project, and style, the software activates the Create Drawing
option.
8. Click Create Drawing to open the Drawings dialog box.
9. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default viewer.
You must follow the standard folder structure to save the project file and the styles.
2
An isometric directory is the root folder for files associated to a style. An isometric directory can
contain many projects.
3
You create isometric projects in an isometric directory. Isometric projects contain different
drawing styles.

Create a drawing using a new style

Using this feature, you can customize various parameters associated to a drawing such as the
drawing frame, units, drawing size, and so on. To create a new style, you must first create an
isometric directory. The style you create is saved in a project that is created when you create an
isometric directory for a new style. To define and create a new style:
module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
4. Select Create New Style, and then click OK to open the Isometric Style Configuration
dialog box.
5. To the right of Create New Isometric Directory, click Browse to select an empty folder, or
create a new folder.
6. Under Create New Isometric Directory, click Create to generate the required folder
structure and files.
4
7. To select a drawing frame , click Browse and select a drawing frame in the Open Drawing
Frame Template dialog box.
8. Similarly, to specify a folder to save your drawings in Drawing Path, click Browse and select
a folder.
9. Select Units to select a unit system for your drawing.
10. Select Drawing Size to select a size for the drawing.
11. Click Create Drawing to save the style you created and generate drawing files.
12. On the Drawings dialog box, select the files you want to view, and then click View to open the
drawings in your default viewer.
 You must choose an empty folder to create an isometric directory.

 If you want to delete an existing style, you must use to delete the style.
4
Drawing frames are the backing sheets used to create your drawing. By default, different types
of drawing frames are generated when you create a new style.

Create and save an annotation template

You can create a standard template and apply this template to different piping models. The
software applies the selections that you make while creating a template to the new model. To
include nodes or elements associated to an input feature, you must select all the nodes or
elements of that feature.
You can only select input features to save as a template.
To create and save a template:
module.
3. Select Edit Stress Annotations in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress Isometric
Annotations pane.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. From the Feature list, select an input feature that you want to include in your template.
6. To select all the nodes or elements, press SHIFT, and then select the first and the last check
box of the list.
7. Similarly, select all the nodes and elements of other input features that you want to include in
your template.
8. To define annotation preferences for your template, click the Settings tab and select text box
shapes for the input features.
9. Select StressIso > Save Template to open the Save Annotation Template dialog box.
10. On the Save Annotation Template dialog box, type a file name and then click Save to save
the template.
Apply a template
You can apply an existing template to a new piping model. All the selections made while creating
a template are applied to the new model along with the annotation preferences. You can apply a
template to a piping model only if a stress Iso file associated to the model does not already exist.
To apply an annotation template to a new model.
module.
3. Select StressIso > Apply Template to open the Open Annotation Template dialog box.
4. Select the template file to use, and then click Open to apply the template.
5. To clear all annotations, select StressIso > Reset Annotation.
6. To save the applied annotations, select StressIso > Save Annotation.

Stress Isometric Tutorials

The tutorials familiarize you with the stress isometric interface and procedures. You should read
the tutorials and follow the instructions if you have not previously created a stress isometric
drawing.

Topics
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style
................................................................................................... 801
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features .......... 803
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences
................................................................................................... 806
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template .................... 810
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the

default drawing style
Using stress isometric annotations, you can annotate the input and output features from CAESAR
II and generate a drawing in different formats. Stress isometric annotations provide you the
flexibility to define different drawing styles to create a drawing. This tutorial shows you how to
open a file and create a drawing using the default drawing style.
Topics
Open an existing CAESAR II file ................................................. 801
Create a drawing using the default style ...................................... 802
Open an existing CAESAR II file

1. Open CAESAR II.
2. Select File > Open.
3. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select RELIEF.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.

5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the file in the C2Isogen
module.
Create a drawing using the default style

To create a drawing using the default drawing style:
1. Select Create Isometric Drawing from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box. You can select an existing drawing style, create new style,
or use the default drawing style to create a drawing.
2. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to generate the drawing files.
The drawing files you create using default style are saved in the model folder.
3. Select the drawing from the list, and then click View to open the drawing in your default viewer
or select an application in the Open With dialog box.

The drawing displays without any annotations.
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features

This tutorial shows you how to annotate input and output features of a model. The Stress
Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output features used in the CAESAR II file.
Topics
Add annotations for input features ............................................... 804
Add annotations for output features............................................. 805

Add annotations for input features

In Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style (on page 801), we
learned to open a CAESAR II file and create a drawing without any annotations. The software
saves all information associated to input features in the CAESAR II file when you define specific
inputs for a model. You can make the drawing more detailed by adding this information to the
drawing. In this part of the tutorial, we add annotations for input features to the RELIEF.C2 file.
2. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
3. Select RELIEF.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
module.
5. Select Edit Stress Annotations from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane. By default, the pane opens the Input tab.
6. The Feature list displays all the input features available in CAESAR II. Depending on the
feature you select, the software displays a list of nodes associated to the feature.

Click the check boxes in the Select column if you want to include the information associated
to the node or element in your drawing. For example, select Node Numbers in the Feature
list, and then select nodes 110 and 115. Annotations for the selected node numbers are
added to the model and are visible in the display area.
Add annotations for output features

As with the input features, CAESAR II saves the result data after you analyze a model. The
Output tab lists the load cases that the software uses for the stress analysis and classifies them
as Displacement, Restraint, and Stress. You can make the result data available in the drawing
by selecting nodes and elements displayed for the result type.
To add annotations for output features:
1. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used for stress analysis.
2. The Load Cases list displays a list of load cases used in the analysis. The Results box lists
results generated for each load case. You can view a list of nodes or elements for each result
set, and then select nodes and elements that you want to annotate. Let us consider Load

Case 3, and then select elements 75-80 and 110-115 for Stress. You can now view the
annotations for the selected elements in the display area.

Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure

annotations preferences
Along with annotating input and output features, you can also add custom notes to the nodes and
elements of a model. The annotations you add can be represented in different formats to improve
drawing readability. In this tutorial, we learn to add custom notes to nodes and elements and you
choose representation formats for the features.
Topics
Adding custom annotations ......................................................... 807
Configuring annotation preferences............................................. 808
Adding custom annotations

In the earlier tutorial, we learned to add annotations for input and output features. In this tutorial,
we continue adding annotations to Relief.c2 file we opened in Open an existing CAESAR II file (on
page 801).
To add custom annotations:
Select Nodal Annotations tab to view the list of nodes defined in the model. You can now add
your remarks in the User Annotations cell associated to each node. For example, click the cell
associated to node 80 and type This is a user annotation for node 80.
1. Similarly, select Elemental Annotations tab to view the list of elements in the model and add
your remarks in the User Annotation cell associated to the element you want to annotate.
Here we add a note for element 75-80.
2. Click the User Annotations cell associated to element 75-80 and type This is a custom
annotation for element 75-80.
The custom annotations you add are not shown in the display area and can be viewed only in

the drawing.
Configuring annotation preferences

All the information that you annotate in your drawing can be represented in different formats,
selecting different textbox shapes to display different feature can make the drawing easier to
understand. In this part of the tutorial we learn to configure annotation preferences for the drawing.
It is evident in the drawing illustrated in the first part of this tutorial that all the annotations you
made are displayed in a rectangular box. This makes it difficult to differentiate between the input,
output, and custom annotations added to the drawing. To choose different formats to represent
your annotations:
1. Select the Settings tab to view the list of input, output, and custom annotation features. You
can select different box shapes for the features you annotate.

2. Let us select Circle for Node Numbers, No Box for Output Stress Data, and Filleted
Rectangle for Nodal Annotations and Elemental Annotations.
You cannot view these changes in the display area, the changes you made are updated when
you create a drawing.

Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template

This tutorial shows you how to create a template for stress ISO annotations. You can apply this
template to your piping models and ensure consistency in representation of the input features in
the drawing. Only input features of a model can be included in a template. Therefore, you should
open a piping model that has all the input features you want to include in your template.
Topics
Create a template ....................................................................... 810
Apply a template ......................................................................... 812
Create a template
This tutorial shows you how to create and save a stress Iso annotation template. For this tutorial,
open RELIEF.C2 from the CAESAR II Examples folder.
To create a template:
1. Select Edit Stress Annotations on the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
You can only include the input features in a template. Select all the nodes listed for
that feature to include an input feature in a template.

2. Click the Feature list. Select a feature, and then select all the nodes listed for the feature. For
example, select all the nodes listed for the Restraint/Hanger Types feature.
3. Similarly, select all the nodes or elements of other input features that you want to include.
4. Select Settings tab to specify a text box shape for the input feature you selected in the earlier
part of this tutorial. Let us select Filleted Rectangle for the Restraint/hanger types feature.
5. Select StressIso > Save Template to save your selections as a template. A template file with
the .ist extension is saved in the model folder.

Apply a template
After you create and save a template, you can apply this template to your piping models. When
you select all the nodes of a feature to create a template, that input feature gets selected when you
apply the template to a new piping model. You can clear the selections if you do not want to
display all the nodes or elements of the input feature included in a template.
This part of the tutorial shows you how to apply a saved template to a piping model. You can apply
a template to a piping model only if the model is not already annotated and the stress Iso file (.iso)
associated to the model does not exist.
To apply a template to a new model:
1. Open CAESAR II.
3. In the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select JACKET.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
module.
6. Select StressIso > Apply Annotation, and then select a template file.
7. Select StressIso > Annotation to view the selections you made while creating the template
in the display area.
The previous figure shows that all the nodes listed under Restraint/Hanger types are selected in
the new model.

SECTION 12
Equipment Component and Compliance
You can use the CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analysis modules to enter
data and check vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers for
excessive piping loads according to appropriate standards. Output reports can be sent to the
printer, the terminal, or saved as a file.
Suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in
separate runs of pipe stress software. After all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment
are calculated, you can run an analysis to determine if these loads are acceptable according to the
governing code.
A convenient feature of the analysis modules is the ability to separately analyze the nozzles on
equipment separately. You often only have suction side loads, and the dimensions of the pump
are unknown. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts a zero or a blank entry for the unknown data
and generates a single-nozzle equipment check report. Although overall compliance is not being
evaluated, you can still check individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool, especially if you are
more interested in load guidance, rather than some fixed or precise limit on allowables.
The analysis modules are available on the CAESAR II Analysis menu and share the same
interface for easy transition between the modules.
SIFs @ Intersections
Calculates stress intensification factors at intersections. For more information, see
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 815).
SIFs @ Bends
Calculates stress intensification factors at bends. For more information, see Bend Stress
Intensification Factors (on page 820).
WRC 107/207
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see WRC 107
(537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses (on page 827).
Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 857).
B31.G
Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining Strength
Calculations (B31G) (on page 877).
Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more information, see Expansion Joint
Rating (on page 881).
AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see Structural
Steel Checks - AISC (on page 886).

NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, NEMA SM23 (Steam
Turbines) (on page 893).
API 610
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610 (Centrifugal
Pumps) (on page 900).
API 617
Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617 (Centrifugal
Compressors) (on page 911).
API 661
Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API 661 (Air
Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 918).
HEI Standard
Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see HEI Standard (on
page 923).
API 560
Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Fired Heaters for
General Refinery Services) (on page 925).
In This Section
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ....................................815
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ..............................................820
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses ..................827
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ............................................857
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G)........................877
Expansion Joint Rating ................................................................881
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ....................................................886
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)....................................................893
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) .......................................................900
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)..............................................911
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ........................................918
HEI Standard...............................................................................923
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ................925

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Intersections
Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Intersections
Computes intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) for any of the three-pipe type
intersections available in CAESAR II. To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name
Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you create
or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
The software opens the Intersection Stress Intensification Factors window.

Enter the necessary problem-specific data in the input fields, and then click Run Analysis to
run the analysis. After processing is complete, stress intensification factors are reported for a
range of different configuration values on the Output tab, as shown below.
Topics
Intersection Type ........................................................................ 817
Piping Code ID ........................................................................... 817
Header Pipe Outside Diameter.................................................... 818
Header Pipe Wall Thickness ....................................................... 818
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter .................................................... 818
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness........................................................ 818
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ..................................... 819
Pad Thickness ............................................................................ 819
Intersection Crotch Radius .......................................................... 819
Intersection Crotch Thickness ..................................................... 819
Extrusion Crotch Radius ............................................................. 819
Weld Type .................................................................................. 820
Ferritic Material ........................................................................... 820
Use Notes 6, 9, 10 ...................................................................... 820
Meets 3673.2b Notes 10, 11 ....................................................... 820
Design Temperature ................................................................... 820

Intersection Type
Specifies the intersection type to be reviewed. After you click Run Analysis , the software
generates tables that show the relationship between the SIFs for the entered piping code, WRC
329, ASME III (NC and ND), and Schneider recommendations. You can choose from the
following:
 Reinforced Fabricated Tee
 Unreinforced Fabricated Tee
 Welding Tee
 Sweepolet
 Weldolet
 Extruded Welding Tee
 Bonney Forge Sweepolet
 Bonney Forge Latrolet
 Bonney Forge Insert Weldolet
Piping Code ID
Specifies the piping code ID. The following piping codes are allowed:
 1 - B31.1
 3 - B31.3
 4 - B31.4
 5 - B31.5
 8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
 10 - B31.9
 11 - B31.4 Chapter XI
 12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
 14 - Navy 505 (1984)
 15 - CAN/CSA Z662
 16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
 17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
 18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
 20 - B31.1 (1967)
 21 - Stoomwezen
 22 - RCC-M C

 23 - RCC-M D
 24 - CODETI
 25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
 26 - FDBR
 27 - BS 7159
 28 - UKOOA
 29 - IGE/TD/12
 30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
 31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
 32 - EN-13480
 33 - GPTC/Z380
 34 - PD-8010, Part 1
 35 - PD-8010, Part 2
 36 - ISO-14692
 37 - HPGSL
 38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Header Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting diameter.
Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting thickness.
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the diameter of the fitting.
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the wall thickness of the fitting.

Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection

Specifies the largest diameter for the branch pipe fitting at the intersection. See the figures in the
piping code appendices for a more detailed description of this dimension.
This is the largest diameter of any thickened nozzle neck or transition that exists at the
intersection.
Defaults to the matching pipe diameter if omitted.
Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad on the reinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the thickness of a pad is limited to a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z6662,
and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
This option displays only for reinforced fabricated tees.
Intersection Crotch Radius

Specifies the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329. Specifying this value can result in a
50% reduction in the stress intensification at the intersection when WRC 329 intersection options
are selected.
When you specify this value, you are assuring that there no significant stress riser at the
intersection weld.
To be effective in reducing the stress intensification, this value must be bigger than Tb/2 and Th/2.
You must also check the value (Tb'+y)/2 in the code, where y is the largest thickness at the
intersection. The crotch radius must also be larger than this value.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the
geometric criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Thickness are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.
Intersection Crotch Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the fitting in the crotch.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the geometric
criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Radius are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.
Extrusion Crotch Radius

Specifies the crotch radius for extruded welding tees. This option displays only for extruded
welding tees.

Weld Type
Specifies the weld type.
 As Welded
This is an unfinished weld.
 Finished/Ground Flush
The weld is ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF is 1.0.
Ferritic Material
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on the
highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC and
ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Use Notes 6, 9, 10
Meets 3673.2b Notes 10, 11
Design Temperature
Specifies the system highest temperature. This value is required for piping codes ASME NC and
ASME ND to calculate material properties.
Bend Stress Intensification Factors

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Bends
Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Bends
Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend
configurations under different codes. You can access this scratchpad by selecting Analysis >
SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad option on the Classic Piping input or on the
3D model.
You can compute bend stress intensification factors for the following:
 Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done according to the
piping code being used.
 Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done according to the piping code being used.
 Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper “Stress
Indices for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads,” by
Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.

The Bend Stress Intensification Factors window consists of two input tabs: the Bend tab (on
page 821) and the Trunnion tab (on page 825).
In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for
a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for the trunnion-related input fields on
the Trunnion tab.
Bend Tab
Topics
Piping Code ID ............................................................................ 821
Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................ 823
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe.................................................. 823
Wall Thickness of Bend ............................................................... 823
Bend Radius ............................................................................... 823
Bend Angle (Degrees) ................................................................. 823
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA) ........ 823
Number of Cuts ........................................................................... 824
Seam Welded.............................................................................. 824
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA) ......................... 824
Elastic Modulus ........................................................................... 824
Pressure Stiffening ...................................................................... 824

Piping Code ID
Identifies the piping code. The following piping codes are allowed:
 1 - B31.1
 3 - B31.3
 4 - B31.4
 5 - B31.5
 8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
 10 - B31.9
 11 - B31.4 Chapter XI
 14 - Navy 505 (1984)
 15 - CAN/CSA Z662
 16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
 17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
 20 - B31.1 (1967)
 21 - Stoomwezen
 22 - RCC-M C
 23 - RCC-M D
 24 - CODETI
 25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
 26 - FDBR
 27 - BS 7159
 28 - UKOOA
 29 - IGE/TD/12
 30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
 31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
 32 - EN-13480
 33 - GPTC/Z380
 34 - PD-8010, Part 1
 35 - PD-8010, Part 2
 36 - ISO-14692

 37 - HPGSL
 38 - JPI
 For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Pipe Outside Diameter

Defines the pipe outside diameter in the units shown.
Used in the average cross-sectional radius calculation:
 r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
 OD = Outside Diameter as entered
 WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 code defines r2 as the "mean radius of matching pipe".
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe

Specifies the matching pipe nominal wall thickness. Do not subtract out any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion.
This wall thickness is used in the (r2), mean radius calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Wall Thickness of Bend

Specifies the thickness of the bend fitting if it is different than the thickness of the matching pipe.
This is the thickness used in the flexibility characteristic equation for (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (ry)
r = Mean cross sectional radius of matching pipe
Bend Radius
Specify the radius of the bend. The distance from the arc center to the centerline of the bend
curvature.
Bend Angle (Degrees)

Specifies the angle between the downstream leg of the bend and a straight line extending along
the upstream leg of the bend. If no value is entered, the software uses the default value of 90º.
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA)

Sets the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the ovalization
of the bend. Ovalization provides for a large amount of the flexibility of the bend.

BS-806 (the British Power Piping Code) recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid
cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the ending weld point of the bend be
considered as attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.
Attachments to the end of the bend are considered to affect about 30º of the arc of the bend. For
the BS 7159 code, this entry refers to the material laminate type and must be of the following
values:
 1
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
 2
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
 3
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
Laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification
factors for the BS 7159 code only.
Number of Cuts
Specifies the number of cuts in the miter bend.
If only a single cut is entered, then the bend is always considered to be a widely spaced mitered
bend. For multi-cut miters, CASEAR II uses the radius and the number of cuts to determine if the
miter is closely or widely spaced.
Seam Welded
Indicates when straight pipes are seam welded and affects the SIF calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication. This option is only available when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA)

Specifies the pressure design strain. This is an optional entry, used with the pressure stiffening
calculation.
For the BS 7159 Code, this entry is the material Design Strain, îd.
Elastic Modulus
Identifies the cold modulus of elasticity. Used with the pressure stiffening calculation. This is an
optional entry.
Pressure Stiffening
Controls the pressure stiffening effects on elbows. Pressure stiffening has its most significant
effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including pressure

stiffening where it is not included by default draws more of the system moment to the nozzle
adjacent to the bend.
This option is controlled using the CAESAR II setup file but is most commonly left to the default
condition. The default is different for each piping code because some codes mention pressure
stiffening explicitly, while others do not. Available options are:
 Yes
Include pressure stiffening.
 No
Remove pressure stiffening.
 Default
Follow the piping code default.
Trunnion Tab
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits
come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano.
t/T ≥ 0.2 and t/T ≤ 2.0
D/T ≥ 20 and D/T ≤ 60
d/D ≥ 0.3 and d/D ≤ 0.8
Where:
t = Wall thickness of the trunnion
T = Wall thickness of the bend
d = Outside diameter of the trunnion
D = Outside diameter of the bend
To review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values
for the trunnion-related input fields on the Trunnion tab.
Topics
Outside Diameter ........................................................................ 825
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 826
Stress Concentration Factor........................................................ 826
Stress Concentrations and Intensification .................................... 826
Outside Diameter
Specifies the staunchion outside diameter. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend. If you define Staunchion OD, you must also
define Wall Thickness.

The stress intensification factors for dummy legs is from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2)is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
Wall Thickness
Designates the staunchion wall thickness. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs are from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults to
2.0.
Stress Concentration Factor

The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults to
2.0.
Stress Concentrations and Intensification

Designates the stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions. It is based on the
relationship between the ASME NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code i factor or stress
intensification factor. That relationship has long been taken to be
(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)
Where:
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index
K2 = ASME NB peak stress index
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the “stress concentration factor.” This factor is
the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (or an elbow) and the nominal local
computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of
material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or other
anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius is
provided which is at least t/2, and where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak
stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition radius
is provided, the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow),
and you do not enter a stress concentration factor, CAESAR II assumes a stress concentration
factor of 2.0.

WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Main window menu: Analysis > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. The software opens the WRC 107/297
window.
The module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer lists
each analysis contained in the job, sorted by analysis type: WRC-107 (537) or WRC-297/PD5500.
The items in the list are created by combining the item description and the item number, which can
be subsequently changed in the data input window. The Loads pane, which contains a data input
grid, displays the selected analysis type.

The following commands are available on the WRC 107/297 toolbar.
Defines a data set as a WRC-107 (537) analysis.
Defines a data set as a WRC-297/PD5500 analysis.
Starts the analysis and displays the results in the WRC 107/297 window.
Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to
Microsoft®™ Word.
Removes an analysis from the job.
To add a new analysis to the job, click the corresponding analysis type, WRC 107 (537) or WRC
297 (PD5500), on the toolbar. You can remove an analysis from the job by selecting it in the Job
Explorer, and then clicking Delete Selected Items on the toolbar. To display an analysis in
the Loads pane, select it from the list in the Job Explorer.
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs
on the right side of the Loads pane. The data that displays on both of these tabs automatically
updates after each change in the Loads pane, even if they are hidden.
The following example shows a sample analysis report.
Nozzle curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or
piping. If any of the interpolation parameters fall outside the limits of the available curves,
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
Topics
WRC Bulletin 107(537) ............................................................... 829
WRC Bulletin 297 ....................................................................... 848

WRC Bulletin 107(537)

The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965 to
estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are three editions of the WRC 107
bulletin available in the software. You can set the default using Tools > Configure/Setup. For
more information about the options available in the editor, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
WRC Bulletin 107 provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the immediate
vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the stresses at both the inner and outer
surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and circumferential axes of
the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to define the applicable
orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and cylindrical vessels are shown
below.
WRC 107 Module Geometry for a Sphere WRC 107 Axis Convention for a Cylinder
Spherical Shells Cylindrical Shells
Defining WRC Axes: Defining WRC Axes:

P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive
entering vessel. entering vessel.
M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive
along convenient global axis. to correspond with any parallel global axis.
M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the result M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and
is M2-axis. result is ML-axis.

Defining WRC Stress Points: Defining WRC Stress Points:

u: Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at u: Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at
junction. junction.
l: Lower, stress on inside of vessel at junction. l: Lower, stress on inside of vessel at junction.
A: Position on vessel at junction along negative A: Position on vessel at junction along
M1 axis. negative MC axis.
B: Position on vessel at junction along positive B: Position on vessel at junction, along
M2 axis. positive MC axis.
C: Position on vessel at junction along positive C: Position on vessel at junction, along
M2 axis. positive ML axis.
D: Position on vessel at junction along negative D: Position on vessel at junction, along
M2 axis. negative ML axis.
Shear axis VC is parallel and in the
same direction as the bending axis ML. Shear
axis VL is parallel and in the opposite direction
as the bending axis MC.
The WRC 107/537 convention system has the benefit of being independent of the orientation
of the vessel. All loads and moments are defined locally with respect to the vessel and the
nozzle.
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:
P - Radial load
VC - Circumferential shear load
VL - Longitudinal shear load
MC - Circumferential moment
ML - Longitudinal moment
MT - Torsional moment
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:

P - Radial load
V1 - Shear load from points B to A
V2 - Shear load from points D to C
M1 - Moment from points A to B
M2 - Moment from points D to C
WRC 107 is commonly used to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the reinforcing
pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle-vessel
junction, always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. Refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.
Using WRC 107 is not recommended when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in the
WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the figure
numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. Check these
outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to become familiar with the accuracy of the stresses
calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past the end of
the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately
under the B31 code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. However, Appendix 4-1 of ASME Section
VIII, Division 2 “Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis” does provide a detailed approach
for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the aforementioned code
is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate the stresses through an
elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
 Pm
 Pm + Pl + Pb
 Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
P is the design pressure of the system. Pm is the general membrane stress due to internal
pressure removed from discontinuities and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the
expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component. The
allowable for Pm is kSmh, where S mh is the allowable stress intensity. The value of k can be taken
from Table AD-150.1 of the code, which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for sustained
plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads. Pl is the local membrane stress at the junction
due to the sustained piping loads. Pb is the local bending stress (and is zero at the nozzle to vessel
connections according to Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code). Q is the secondary stress due to
thermal expansion piping loads or the bending stress due to internal pressure thrust and

sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress combination is
1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code. Smh is the hot stress intensity allowable at
the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q are calculated by WRC 107. The third combination
defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to 1.5(Smc+Smh).
A summation is provided automatically following the WRC 107 analysis and displays on the
Drawing window within the main WRC 107/297 window. The calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding Pass/Fail ruling.
Failed items display in red.
Home/Nozzle Tab
Topics
Item Number............................................................................... 833
Description ................................................................................. 833
Analysis Type ............................................................................. 833
Nozzle Node ............................................................................... 833
Attachment Type......................................................................... 833
Fill Type ...................................................................................... 834
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 834
Corrosion Allowance ................................................................... 834
Nozzle Material ........................................................................... 834
Nozzle SCF Option ..................................................................... 834
Reinforcing Pad .......................................................................... 835

Item Number
Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at one and increase sequentially.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up to
15 characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays.
Analysis Type
Select WRC 107/537 to indicate the nozzle-vessel junction analysis type.
Design Temperature
Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the
allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed, the
allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly.
Nozzle Node
Enter the nozzle node number used in your piping model. This entry is required to access
calculated loads from the static output.
Attachment Type
Select the type of attachment. Select Round for a typical pipe nozzle. Select Square for an
attachment such as square vessel support lug. Select Rectangle for an attachment such as
rectangular vessel support lug. See WRC Bulletin 107 for examples. Each selection displays
additional fields below it that are specific to the attachment type.
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select Round. WRC 107 also analyzes
other load bearing attachments such as a square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular
attachment is a vessel support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in WRC
Bulletin 107.
Diameter Basis
Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select OD
for the outside diameter.
Diameter
Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent
with the selection in Diameter Basis (on page 833).
Full Length in Circumferential Direction, C11

For square or rectangular attachments, enter the value of C1 multiplied by two. WRC 107/537
defines C1 as one-half of the full length of the attachment in the circumferential direction of the
vessel. Therefore, enter the full length of the attachment in the circumferential direction.

Full Length in Circumferential Direction, C22

For square or rectangular attachments, enter the value of C2 multiplied by two. WRC 107/537
defines C2 as one-half of the full length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction of the
vessel. Therefore, enter the full length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction.
Fill Type
Select Hollow for a hollow attachment and select Solid for a solid attachment. Round-hollow
attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder-to-cylinder analysis.
Round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels. Rectangular attachments on
spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this method.
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units.
Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply the
nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value. WRC 107/537 analysis uses the wall
thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside
diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Nozzle Material
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
a. Click to open the Material Database dialog box.

The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only
information about the selected material.
b. Select the material that you want to use from the list.
The software displays the material properties.
c. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material.
Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material
specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the
material database with a matching name.
Nozzle SCF Option

Select one of the following methods to calculate the nozzle stress concentration factors.
 None - Stress concentration factors are not calculated.
 Fillet Radius - The software uses the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell
to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb according to Appendix B of the
WRC 107 bulletin. Enter the fillet radius value in Fillet Radius Between Vessel and
Nozzle. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.

 Kn/Kb - The software uses the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb in a fatigue
analysis. Enter the Kn and Kb values in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
Reinforcing Pad
Select True when the nozzle has a pad. Select False if there is no pad.
For WRC 107/537, the software performs two separate analyses:

 Using the nozzle OD and the vessel wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness.
 Taking the pad into account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad
diameter and assuming a sold attachment.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. For WRC 107/537 analysis, the vessel thickness
includes the pad thickness.
Full Length in Circumferential Direction (C11P)

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C11P. In WRC 107, C11
is defined as one-half of the full length of the reinforcing pad in the circumferential direction of
the vessel.
Full Length of Pad in Longitudinal Direction (C22P)

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C22. In WRC 107, C22 is
defined as one-half of the full length of the reinforcing pad in the longitudinal direction of the
vessel.
Pad SCF Option

Select one of the following methods to calculate the reinforcing pad stress concentration
factors.
 None - Stress concentration factors are not calculated.
 Fillet Radius - The software uses the fillet radius between the reinforcing pad and the
vessel shell to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb according to Appendix
B of the WRC 107 bulletin. Enter the fillet radius value in Fillet Radius Between Vessel
and Pad. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.
 Kn/Kb - The software uses the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb in a fatigue
analysis. Enter the Kn and Kb values in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.

Vessel Tab
Topics
Vessel Node ............................................................................... 836
Vessel Type ................................................................................ 836
Diameter Basis ........................................................................... 836
Diameter ..................................................................................... 836
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 836
Vessel Material ........................................................................... 836
Vessel Node
Enter the node number that corresponds to the vessel node in your model. Since the vessel(s)
may or may not be modeled in the analysis, this value is optional and is recorded for your
reference only.
Vessel Type
Select the type of vessel, either Cylindrical or Spherical.
Diameter Basis
Select the type of diameter to use for the vessel. Select ID for the inside diameter and OD for
the outside diameter.
Diameter
Enter the diameter of the pressure vessel in the displayed units. The diameter should be
consistent with the selection in Diameter Basis (on page 836).
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is
measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
 You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For example,
if the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type "<vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875".
 The software modifies this value if a value for Corrosion Allowance is defined.
Corrosion Allowance
Vessel Material


Loads Tab
Topics
Internal Pressure ........................................................................ 837
Occasional Pressure ................................................................... 837
Include Pressure Thrust .............................................................. 837
Convention System ..................................................................... 838
Loads ......................................................................................... 840
Z-Axis Vertical ............................................................................ 844
Internal Pressure
Enter the system internal design pressure (P). WRC 107/537 only analyzes internal pressure
and the value must be positive. The pressure stress equations used are:
2 2 2
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * ri / (ro - ri )
Hoop Stress = 2.0 * Longitudinal Stress
For the spherical case, the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lamé equation
to calculate the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the edge of the
attachment.
Occasional Pressure
Enter the difference between the peak pressure of the system and Internal Pressure (on
page 837) (the system design pressure). The value must be positive. The value is added to
the system design pressure to calculate the primary membrane stress due to occasional
loads.
Include Pressure Thrust

Select to include the pressure thrust force (P*A) in the nozzle radial load. Pressure thrust is
added to Internal Pressure and Occasional Pressure.
 This value is only available when WRC 107/537 is selected for Analysis Type on the
Home/Nozzle tab.

 For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
http://www.coade.com/Uploads/mechanical-engineering-news/jul01.pdf.
Convention System
Select WRC 107 to define local forces and moments according to WRC 107 conventions. Select
Global to define local forces and moments in global coordinates. The selected convention is
applied to the vessel, the nozzle, and the loads.
For both conventions, enter values for Sustained Loads, Expansion Loads, and Occasional
Loads. The software compares stress intensities to allowable stresses based on the value for
Vessel Material selected on the Vessel tab. When you switch convention systems, the software
converts loads from one system to the other.
WRC 107/537 Load Conventions
Global Load and Direction Conventions
WRC 107/537 Load Conventions

The WRC 107/537 convention system has the benefit of being independent of the orientation
of the vessel. All loads and moments are defined locally with respect to the vessel and the
nozzle.
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:
P - Radial load
VC - Circumferential shear load
VL - Longitudinal shear load
MC - Circumferential moment
ML - Longitudinal moment
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:

P - Radial load
V1 - Shear load from points B to A
V2 - Shear load from points D to C
M1 - Moment from points A to B
M2 - Moment from points D to C
Global Load and Direction Conventions

The global convention system has the benefit of using the global coordinate system also used
by other analyses, such as pipe stress analysis. As a result, nozzle or attachment loads from
another analysis can be used directly in the WRC 107/537 or FEA analysis.
The following global convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:
The vessel direction is +Y

direction
The nozzle direction is +X
direction (towards the vessel)
Direction cosines of the vessel
are:
 VX - 0
 VY - 1
 VZ - 0
Direction cosines of the nozzle
are:
 NX - 1
 NY - 0
 NZ - 0

The following global convention system is used for a spherical vessel:
The direction of a spherical

vessel is from points B to A
The software uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments from the
global convention into the traditional WRC107 convention.
Import Loads from Job

Click to import nozzle or attachment load data from a CAESAR II .C2 or ._P file.
Loads
Enter the forces and moments acting on the nozzle or attachment. A stress summation is
performed and stress intensities are checked based on the different load cases.
The type of loads and the available load sets depend on the Convention System selection
(WRC 107 or Global).
Load Sets
When WRC 107 is selected for Analysis Type, you can enter values in the following load
sets:
 Sustained Loads - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.
 Expansion Loads - (EXP) Secondary thermal expansion loads.
 Occasional Loads - (OCC) Irregularly occurring loads such as wind loads, seismic loads,
and water hammer.
The software plots one set of loads at a time and only that set can have values. For
example, to calculate Expansion Loads, values for Sustained Loads and Occasional
Loads must be cleared.
Types of Loads
When WRC 107 is selected for Convention System, the following forces and moments are
entered:
Radial Load P (on page 841)
Longitudinal Shear VL (on page 841)
Circumferential Shear VC (on page 842)
Torsional Moment MT (on page 843)
Circumferential Moment MC (on page 843)

Longitudinal Moment ML (on page 844)

When Global is selected for Convention System, forces and moments are entered as X, Y,
and Z vector components with respect to the global coordinate system: Global Force Fx,
Global Force Fy, Global Force Fz, Global Moment Mx, Global Moment My, and Global
Moment Mz.
Radial Load P
Enter the radial load P on the nozzle or attachment. Positive load tries to "push" the nozzle
while a negative load tries to "pull" the nozzle. The software does not account for the effect of
pressure thrust when loads are entered in the WRC convention, so add the appropriate
portion of thrust load with the radial load. Use the conventions below.
Longitudinal Shear VL
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load V1
from B to A. Use the conventions below.

Circumferential Shear VC
Enter the circumferential shear load VC. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load V2
from D to C. Use the conventions below.

Torsional Moment MT
Enter the torsional moment MT. Use the conventions below.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC. If the vessel is spherical then enter the moment M1
about the B-axis. Use the conventions below.

Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML. If the vessel is spherical then enter the moment M2 about
the C-axis. Use the conventions below.
Z-Axis Vertical
Select True if the Z-axis is vertical for the Global convention system.
Options Tab
Topics
WRC-107 Version ....................................................................... 844
Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2 .................................. 845
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368 (No Ext Loads)............. 845
Base Hoop Stress On ................................................................. 845
WRC-107 Version
Select a version of the WRC 107/537 bulletin. Select August 1965, March 1979, or March
1979 Use B1 and B2.
March 1979 Use B1 and B2 is likely to be the most accurate option. It typically
produces slightly higher stresses than the other versions. These stresses more closely match
theoretical results. The stress computation method was also adjusted to compute B1 and B2
maximum stresses that do not lie on the stress points A, B, C, or D. This is referred to as
calculation of the off-angle maximums.

Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2

Enter True to include the ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 Table AD-560.7 pressure stress indices in a
fatigue analysis. This option should only be used if you are performing a fatigue analysis.
Check ASME VIII Div.2 paragraph AD-160 to see if the fatigue effect needs to be considered.
The pressure stress indices are used for estimating the peak stress intensity due to internal
pressure.
 Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis when values are
entered in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
 For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or enter values in Nozzle Kn and
Nozzle Kb.
 The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2
Appendix 4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for fatigue
effect comparison. For more information, see the June 2000 COADE newsletter
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368 (No Ext Loads)

Enter True to compute pressure stresses in the shell and nozzle according to WRC 368. WRC
368 provides a method for calculating stresses in a cylinder-to-cylinder intersection (such as
cylinder-to-nozzle) due to internal pressure and pressure thrust loading.
 Using WRC 368 with WRC 107/297 is not accurate for calculating the combined stress
from pressure and external loads. So, this option is only available when the attachment
type is round and when no external loads are specified.
 For more information on WRC 368 and pressure thrust, see Modeling of Internal Pressure
and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368 in the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
Base Hoop Stress On

Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated.
Available options are:
ID
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter of the
pipe.
Lamé
Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lamé's solution: s = P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).

Material Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for the selected material. You can modify some properties. Doing so only
changes the properties locally. It does not modify the database.
Properties available in this dialog box vary depending on the command used.
ASME Properties
Listing #
Indicates a unique identification number for the material.
Material Name
Displays the ASME code material specification for the selected item.
Yield Stress, Design <or> Yield Stress, Operating

Enter the yield stress for the material at the operating temperature. You can find these values
in the ASME Code, Section 2 Part D; they are not stored in the material database. If the yield
stress at operating temperature is significantly different than the yield stress at ambient
temperature, and if some of the items in the model make use of yield stress, such as vessel
legs, then you should carefully check and enter this value.
When you select a material from the material database, the software looks up the material's
operating yield stress in the yield stress database and automatically fills in this value. If there
are duplicate entries in the yield stress database, then the software displays a message. You
can then select from among the duplicates.
Allowable Stress, Design <or> Allowable Stress, Operating

Enter the allowable stress for the element material at operating temperature. The operating
temperature for most vessels is defined to be the same as the design metal temperature for
the internal pressure. You can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A,
1B, and 3.
If you enter a valid material name in Material Input, the software searches its database and
determines the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, and populates this
field.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material
name from the Material Selection window.
Allowable Stress, Ambient

Enter the allowable stress for the element material at ambient temperature. The ambient
temperature for most vessels will be 70° F, 100° F, or 30° C. You can find this value in the
ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material
name from the Material Selection window.

Nominal Material Density

Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this value to calculate
3
component weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in .
Nominal Thickness for this P Number <or> P Number Thickness

Enter the thickness for the P number.
Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness above
which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is based on the P number
for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code.
If a seam is partially radiographed and the required thickness exceeds the P
number thickness, CAESAR II automatically changes the joint efficiency to 1.0 as stated in
the Code.
External Pressure Curve Name <or> External Pressure Chart Name

Enter the external pressure curve or chart name to calculate the B value for all external
pressure and buckling calculations. It is important that you enter the name correctly. If you
enter a valid material name in the Material Input field, the software searches its database and
determines the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature.
UCS-66 Curve
Select one of the following:
 Curve A - D - UCS-66 curves
 Not a Carbon Steel
By default, the material database selects the non-normalized curve. Select Is the
Material Normalized? or click Normalized to use the normalized curve for ASME material.
Adjust the curve if you are using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.
Elastic Module Reference #

The elastic modulus reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of data
set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TM-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many materials
have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is supplied in the
ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If this happens,
you will need to enter in an appropriate value.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ID <or> Expansion Coefficient Reference #

The thermal expansion reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of
data set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TE-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many
materials have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is
supplied in the ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero.
If this happens, you will need to enter in an appropriate value. Thermal expansion coefficients
are important especially if you are analyzing a heat exchanger.
Yield Stress
Opens the Yield Stress Record dialog box, which displays yield stress details of the selected
material.

Is the Material Normalized? <or> Obtain Curve

Click to use the ASME normalized curve for the material. For more information, see UCS-66
Curve.
PD:5500 Properties
Maximum Thickness
Enter the thickness limit for which the stresses apply.
Minimum Tensile Strength

Enter the tensile strength designated as Rm in the material specification.
Minimum Yield Strength

Enter the minimum yield strength of the material. The minimum yield strength is equal to 0.2%
or 1.0% proof stress at operating temperature.
Material Density
Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this value to calculate component
weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in3.
Material Factor
Enter the S value per PD:5500 to determine whether the material is carbon or stainless steel.
WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the
existing analysis tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC 297
differs from the widely-used WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D ratios
(up to 0.5). WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel, whereas WRC 107
only computes stresses in the vessel.
The CAESAR II WRC 297 module provides input tabs for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed
loads. WRC 297 supports one set of loads. You can enter the loads in either global CAESAR II
convention or in the local WRC 297 coordinate system. If the global CAESAR II convention is
selected, vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into
the local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.
The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 adds the pressure component of the stress using Lame’s
equations, multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, Table
AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin but is added here
for your convenience.
CAESAR II also uses, through Input > Piping, the nozzle flexibility calculations
described in WRC 297. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page 111).
After you provide the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four
locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle.
Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress
components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. For
more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output processing, see WRC
Bulletin 107(537) (on page 829).

Home Tab
Topics
Item Number ............................................................................... 849
Description .................................................................................. 849
PD5500 Annex G ........................................................................ 849
Design Temperature.................................................................... 851
Design Pressure.......................................................................... 851
Item Number
Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at one and increase sequentially.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up to
15 characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays.
PD5500 Annex G
Enter True to perform analysis according to British Standard Published Document 5500
Annex G instead of Welding Research Council Bulletin 297. The software computes stresses
in cylindrical or spherical vessels with or without reinforcing pads. Only round hollow nozzle
geometries are computed.
When PD5500 Annex G is True, the program automatically converts loads into the
coordinate systems used by each method.
 When PD5500 Annex G is True, you can modify values such as:
 Stress concentration factor at the attachment edge
 Stress concentration factor at the pad edge
 Nozzle projection
Factor for Membrane + Bending

Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for combined membrane and bending stress at the
attachment edge or pad edge. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain a
maximum allowable stress for the membrane stress plus bending stress. These stresses are
in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex G.
At the attachment edge (nozzle neck), this factor normally has a maximum value of 2.25.
At the edge of the pad, this factor is normally 2.0.

Print the Membrane Stress

Enter True to compute membrane stress at the attachment edge and enter the allowable
stress intensity factor for it. Also enter a value for Factor for Membrane.
 The example in Annex W does not compute the membrane stress at the attachment edge.
You must check the membrane stress before entering a value for Vessel Wall
Thickness.
 According to Annex G, the membrane stress at the attachment edge contains intensified
stresses due to the presence of the hole.
Factor for Membrane (Attachment Edge)

Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for the membrane at the attachment edge. This
factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain maximum allowable stress for the
membrane. These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500
Annex W.
At the attachment edge, this factor normally has a value higher than Factor for Membrane
(Pad Edge).
 This value is only available when Print the Membrane Stress (on page 850) is True.
Thickness.
Factor for Membrane (Pad Edge)

Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for the membrane at the pad edge. This factor is
multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain maximum allowable stress for the membrane.
These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W.
At the edge of the reinforcement pad, this factor normally has a maximum value of 1.2.
Thickness.
 If you would like to check the membrane stress at the attachment edge, see Print the
Membrane Stress and Factor for Membrane (Attachment Edge).
Factor for Membrane + Bending

Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for combined membrane and bending stress at the
attachment edge or pad edge. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain a
maximum allowable stress for the membrane stress plus bending stress. These stresses are

in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex G.

At the attachment edge (nozzle neck), this factor normally has a maximum value of 2.25.
At the edge of the pad, this factor is normally 2.0.
Nozzle Inside Projection

If the nozzle has a projection inside of the vessel, enter that length. This value is used to
determine the pressure stress intensification factor from the Cers/eps graphs in Section 3 of
the PD 5500 Code. All of the curves for protruding and flush nozzles are included for analysis.
The software uses the smaller of the inside projection and the thickness limit with no pad to
calculate the area available in the inward nozzle. You can safely enter a large number such as
six or twelve inches if the nozzle continues into the vessel a long distance.
Stiffened Length of Vessel Section

Enter the length of the vessel on which the nozzle lies. For vessels without stiffeners or cones,
use the entire vessel length including the heads. This value is used along with Offset from
Left Tangent Line to compute the equivalent length for off-center loading.
Offset from Left Tangent Line

Enter in the distance between the centerline of the nozzles and the left tangent line or
appropriate line of support. This value is used in conjunction with Stiffened Length of Vessel
Section to compute the equivalent length for off-center loading.
Attachment on Sphere
Enter True if the nozzle is located within the spherical portion of an elliptical or torispherical
head or is in a spherical head. The software accesses the Annex G curves used to calculate
factors for nozzles connected to spheres.
If you enter this data manually, enter the spherical diameter. This is especially
important for nozzles located in elliptical heads.
Design Temperature
Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the
allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed, the
allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the pressure vessel, in the displayed units. Use a design
pressure applicable to the following pressure stress equations:
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * Inside Radius2/(Outside Radius2 - Inside
Radius2)
Hoop Stress = 2.0 * Longitudinal Stress
 The design pressure is used to calculate membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel
wall and axial pressure thrust.

 For a spherical vessel, the same longitudinal stress equation is used for membrane stress
due to internal pressure.
Vessel Tab
Topics
Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297).............................................. 852
Vessel Diameter (WRC 297) ....................................................... 852
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 852
Vessel Material ........................................................................... 852
Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297)

Select the type of diameter to use for the pressure vessel. Select ID for the inside diameter
and OD for the outside diameter.
The software uses Vessel Diameter Basis, Wall Thickness, and Corrosion
Allowance to determine the mean radius.
Vessel Diameter (WRC 297)

Enter the diameter of the pressure vessel, in the displayed units. The diameter should be
consistent with the selection in Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297) (on page 852).
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is
measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
 You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For example,
if the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type "<vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875".
 The software modifies this value if there is a defined value for Corrosion Allowance.
Corrosion Allowance
Vessel Material


Nozzle/Attachment Tab
Topics
Reinforcing Pad .......................................................................... 853
Pad Material ............................................................................... 853
Attachment Type......................................................................... 854
Wall Thickness (WRC 297 Nozzle).............................................. 855
Corrosion Allowance (WRC 297 Nozzle) ..................................... 855
Nozzle Material ........................................................................... 855
Reinforcing Pad
Enter True if there is a reinforcing pad between the vessel and the nozzle, and then enter the
pad values in Thickness and Diameter.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. WRC 297 does not directly analyze the reinforcing
pad. Instead, the vessel thickness includes the pad thickness. This is analyzed in a consistent
manner with the WRC 107 pad method.
Diameter
Enter the reinforcing pad diameter along the surface of the vessel. This value is used when
the software calculates stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
Full Length in Circumferential Direction (2*Cyp)

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cyp, the full width of the
square or rectangular reinforcing pad in the circumferential direction of the vessel. At the
junction of the attachment with the vessel, the pad is converted to an equivalent round pad
with the following outside radius:
ro = Sqrt(Cxp * Cyp)
This value is only used when PD5500 Annex G is True on the Home tab.
Full Length in Longitudinal Direction (2*Cxp)

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cxp, the full length of the
square or rectangular reinforcing pad in the longitudinal direction of the vessel. At the junction
of the attachment with the vessel, the pad is converted to an equivalent round pad with the
following outside radius:
ro = Sqrt(Cxp * Cyp)

Pad Material

Attachment Type
Select the type of attachment. For WRC 297 analysis, Round is the only option. For PD 5500
Annex G analysis, select Round, Square, or Rectangular.
Nozzle Diameter Basis

Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select OD
for the outside diameter.
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent
with the selection in Diameter Basis for Nozzle.
Attachment Cuts a Hole in Shell

Select if the attachment makes a hole in the pressure vessel. The software then applies a
stress concentration factor. Not all attachments cut a hole. For example, a nozzle cuts a hole,
but a trunnion does not.
This value is only used for ASME analysis, when PD5500 Annex G (on page 849)
is False on the Home tab.
Full Length in Longitudinal Dir (2*Cx)

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cx, the full length of the
attachment in the longitudinal direction of the vessel. At the junction of the attachment with the
vessel, the attachment is converted to an equivalent round attachment with the following
outside radius:
ro = Sqrt(Cx * Cy)
Full Length in Circumferential Dir (2*Cy)

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cy, the full length of the
attachment in the circumferential direction of the vessel. At the junction of the attachment with
the vessel, the attachment is converted to an equivalent round attachment with the following

outside radius:
ro = Sqrt(Cx * Cy)
Wall Thickness (WRC 297 Nozzle)

Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units.
Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply the
nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value.
Corrosion Allowance (WRC 297 Nozzle)

Enter the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 1/4"
depending on the service and design specifications.
Nozzle Material

Loads Tab
Topics
Include Pressure Thrust .............................................................. 855
Use Pressure Stress Indices (Div. 2 AD 560.7) ........................... 856
Radial Load (P)........................................................................... 856
Circumferential Shear (VC) ......................................................... 856
Longitudinal Shear (VL) .............................................................. 856
Torsional Moment (MT) ............................................................... 856
Circumferential Moment (MC) ..................................................... 857
Longitudinal Moment (ML) .......................................................... 857

Include Pressure Thrust

Select to add the force due to pressure times internal pipe area to the Radial Load (P) (on
page 856).
 This option is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G (on page 849) on
the Home tab is False.
 A negative axial pressure thrust is subtracted from P.
 For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
Use Pressure Stress Indices (Div. 2 AD 560.7)

Select to multiply the nominal pressure stress by the stress indices of paragraph AD 560.7 of
ASME Code Section VIII, Division 2. This calculates the surface stress intensity.
 This option is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G on the Home tab
is False.
 The calculation of the pressure stress on the nozzle does not use these indices. The
software multiplies the pressure stress on the nozzle by a factor of 1.2.
Radial Load (P)

Enter the axial load P that is trying to push the nozzle into the vessel or pull the nozzle out of
the vessel. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500 conventions below.
 In WRC 107, positive loads try to "push" the nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the
nozzle.
 In PD 5500, positive loads try to "pull" the nozzle while negative loads try to "push" the
nozzle.
 Axial force does not include the effect of pressure thrust.
Circumferential Shear (VC)

Enter the circumferential shear load VC (for WRC 107) or FC (for PD 5500). Enter this value
according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500 conventions below.
Longitudinal Shear (VL)

Enter the longitudinal shear load VL (for WRC 107) or FL (for PD 5500). Enter this value
according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500 conventions below.
Torsional Moment (MT)

Enter the torsional moment MT. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500
conventions below.

Circumferential Moment (MC)

Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and
PD 5500 conventions below.
Longitudinal Moment (ML)

Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD
5500 conventions below.
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Flanges
Main window menu: Analysis > Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. There are two generally accepted ways to
calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges. The stress calculation methods are
from the following sources:
 ASME Section VIII
 ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations are also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a function
of the relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated stress
calculations to predict leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange, or the
stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak proportional
to the allowable stress in the flange. A flange with a higher allowable is able to resist higher
moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all.
Flanges attempts to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations model
the flexibility of the annular flange plate and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force, and
pressure. The results compare favorably with three-dimensional finite element analysis of the
flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of the
flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance between
the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter. In other words, that (G-ID) <
(BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of the flange,
and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.
The following trends apply:
 Thinner flanges have a greater the tendency to leak.
 Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
 Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
 Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
To begin working with the flange stress and leakage calculations, specify a new job name in the
New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.

The software opens the Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations window.
Input for the flange stress and leakage calculations is divided into four input tabs:
 Flange Tab (on page 858) - Describes flange geometry.
 Bolts and Gasket Tab (on page 862) - Defines data for the bolts and gasket.
 Material Data Tab (on page 871) - Defines material and stress-related data.
 Loads Tab (on page 873) - Describes the imposed loads.

Flange Tab
The following options are used to describe flange geometry.
Topics
Flange Type................................................................................ 859
Flange Class............................................................................... 859
Flange Grade.............................................................................. 859
Flange Outside Diameter (A)....................................................... 859
Flange Inside Diameter (B) ......................................................... 860
Flange Thickness (t) ................................................................... 861
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt ...................................................... 861
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID.................................................... 861
Small End Hub Thickness ........................................................... 861
Large End Hub Thickness ........................................................... 862
Hub Length ................................................................................. 862
Flange Type
Specifies the flange type. Selecting a flange type is required only if an ASME stress calculation for
the flange is needed. If you are performing only a leakage check, you can omit this entry.
Flange Class
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).
 B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
 API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, and 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
Use the flange rating entry to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table. The
software includes minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in
the tables. You can see minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures and
safety factors in this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum and
maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.
Flange Grade
Specifies the grade of the attached flange. The grade of the attached flange is a value such as 1.1,
1.2, or 2.1. It can be found in the ANSI Standard B16.5 code for flanges and fittings. The flange
grade is used in conjunction with the flange class and design temperature to look up the allowable
pressure rating for the ANSI flange.
If the grade is 1.10, then type 1.101. If you are designing a custom flange and do not want the
printout for the allowable pressure, then type 0.
Flange Outside Diameter (A)

Defines the flange outside diameter if an ASME stress calculation for the flange is needed. You
can omit this entry if only a leakage check is to be performed.

This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange
ANSI B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by
pressing Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.
Flange Inside Diameter (B)

Specifies the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the inner
pipe diameter. This value is referred to as "B" in the ASME code.
The flange inside diameter is contained in the flange database. The software looks up
this value whenever you press Ctrl+ F in the Flange tab. The flange database contains properties
of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
For inside diameters not specified in B16.5, the matching ID of standard wall pipe is used. Verify
this dimension based on the actual application and use of the flange. The following table shows
pipe inside diameters for various nominal sizes. All sizes are shown in inches.
Nominal Size Matching Inside Pipe Diameter
STD Sch 40 Sch 60 Sch 80
1 1.049 1.049 - 0.957
2 2.067 2.067 - 1.939
3 3.068 3.068 - 2.900
4 4.026 4.046 - 3.826
5 5.047 5.047 - 4.813
6 6.065 6.065 - 5.671
8 7.981 7.981 7.813 7.625
10 10.020 10.020 9.750 9.564
12 12.000 11.938 11.626 11.376
14 13.250 13.126 12.814 12.500
16 15.250 15.000 14.688 14.314
18 17.250 16.876 16.500 16.126
20 19.250 18.814 18.376 17.938
24 23.250 22.626 22.064 21.564

Flange Thickness (t)

Specifies the thickness of the flange.
The flange thickness is contained in the flange database. The software looks up this value
whenever you press CTRL+F while working in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt

Indicates one of the following:
 For all except lap joints
The outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point
but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the
bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face
ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. This value is
required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter, G.
 For lap joints
The lap joint contact outer diameter. This is usually the flange face outer diameter. For
additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4, Sketches 1
and 1A.
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID

Indicates one of the following:
 For all except lap joints
The inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the maximum of the flange face
ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. This value is
required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter, G.
 For lap joints
The lap joint contact inner diameter. This is usually the flange inner diameter. For
additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4, Sketches 1
and 1A.
Small End Hub Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as g0 in the ASME
code.
For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on
flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries without
hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or omitted.

Large End Hub Thickness

Specify the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as g1 in the ASME code.
It can be the same as Small Hub Thickness.
For flange geometries without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or left blank.
pressing Ctrl+F from any data cell in the Flange tab.
Hub Length
Defines the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. For flange geometries
without hubs, this length can be entered as zero, or left blank.
When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, enter the hub length as the
leg of the weld, and include the thickness of the weld in the large end.
When analyzing a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, enter a zero or
leave the field blank for the Hub Length, Small End Hub Thickness, and Large End Hub
Thickness. When designing a loose, ring-type flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub.
Bolts and Gasket Tab

The following options are used to define data for the bolts and gasket.
Topics
Bolt Circle Diameter .................................................................... 862
Number of Bolts .......................................................................... 863
Bolt Diameter .............................................................................. 863
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress ........................................................ 863
Gasket Outer Diameter ............................................................... 864
Gasket Inner Diameter ................................................................ 864
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness ............................................... 864
Effective Gasket Modulus ........................................................... 864
Leak Pressure Ratio ................................................................... 864
Gasket Seating Stress ................................................................ 866
Nubbin Width or Ring .................................................................. 868
Facing Sketch ............................................................................. 868
Facing Column ........................................................................... 869
Bolt Circle Diameter

Specifies the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through the
bolt center.

Number of Bolts
Specifies the number of bolts.
The number of bolts in standard ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges is contained in the
flange database and is accessed by the software whenever you press Ctrl+F.
Bolt Diameter
Specifies the nominal diameter of the bolts. Standard bolt diameters for ANSI B16.5 and API 605
flanges are contained in the flange database and are accessed by the software whenever you
press Ctrl+F.
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress

Specifies the stress induced in the bolt during tightening after the flange has been seated. This is
the stress in the bolt when the system is about to be pressurized and thermally loaded.
If this value is omitted, the software uses the following bolt tightening rule to compute the
tightening stress in the bolt. (In English units: Initial Stress = 45,000/(nominal bolt diameter)1/2).
This entry is used only in the flexibility model of the flange to estimate the initial compression of the
gasket.
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The
ASME Code bases its stress calculations on a predetermined, specified, fixed equation for the bolt
stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the actual tightening stress that appears
in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, Bolt Initial Tightening Stress, is used
only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening stress used in the
ASME Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint
If Bolt Initial Tightening Stress is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value
Where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt.
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening
the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the Flanges output. Compare this
value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). The “rule-of-thumb”
tightening stress is frequently larger than the ASME required stress. When the ASME required
stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field, a comparison of the leakage safety
factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can be determined. You
are strongly encouraged to adjust these numbers to get a feel for the relationship between all of
the factors involved.

Gasket Outer Diameter

Specifies the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but
uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not
interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID
to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.
Gasket Inner Diameter

Specifies the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID
and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
G.
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness

Specifies the uncompressed thickness of the gasket. The software uses this value to construct an
elastic compression model of the gasket reaction at the effective gasket diameter.
Effective Gasket Modulus

Specifies the modulus of elasticity of the gasket material that occurs during loading and unloading
of the gasket. Several sources have shown this modulus to be somewhat higher than the initial
tightening modulus for spiral wound metal gaskets. Typical values used for spiral wound metal
gaskets are:
 High End: 437500.0
 Low End: 347000.0
Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The
higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the software to predict leakage. Errors on the high
side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.
Leak Pressure Ratio

Specifies the ratio of gasket pressure to internal pressure at the instant when leakage starts
multiplied by a factor of safety. This is termed the "Gasket Factor" in ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types of
gaskets.

Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes

Table 2-5.1
Gasket Material Gasket Factor Seating Stress

m y (^06)
Self-energizing types (O rings,

metallic elastomer, and other 0. 0.
self-sealing types)
Elastomers without fabric or a

high percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer .50 0.
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00 200.
Asbestos with Suitable Binder

1/8" thick 2.00 600.
1/16" thick 2.75 3700.
1/32" thick 3.50 6500.
Elastomers with cotton fabric 1.25 400.
Elastomers with Asbestos fabric

3 ply 2.25 2200.
2 ply 2.50 2900.
1 ply 2.75 3700.
Vegetable fiber 1.75 1100.
Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

Carbon 2.50 10000.
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 3.00 10000.
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos

or corrugated metal, jacketed
2.50 2900.
with:
2.75 3700.
soft aluminum 3.00 4500.
soft copper or brass 3.25 5500.
iron or soft steel 3.50 6500.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel
alloys


m y (^06)
Corrugated Metal:
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.50 6500.
Stainless steels and nickel 3.75 7600.
alloys
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos

filled
3.25 5500.
Monel 3.75 9000.
4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
alloys
Grooved Metal
alloys
Solid flat metal

Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.
alloys
Gasket Seating Stress

Specifies the initial seating stress required for the gasket being used. This entry is required only if
ASME stress calculations are to be performed.
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types of
gaskets.

Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes

Table 2-5.1

m y (^06)
Self-energizing types (O rings,

metallic elastomer, and other 0. 0.
self-sealing types)
Elastomers without fabric or a

high percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer .50 0.
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00 200.

1/8" thick 2.00 600.
1/16" thick 2.75 3700.
1/32" thick 3.50 6500.
Elastomers with cotton fabric 1.25 400.

3 ply 2.25 2200.
2 ply 2.50 2900.
1 ply 2.75 3700.
Vegetable fiber 1.75 1100.

Carbon 2.50 10000.
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 3.00 10000.
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos

or corrugated metal, jacketed
2.50 2900.
with:
2.75 3700.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
alloys


m y (^06)
Corrugated Metal:
alloys
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos

filled
3.25 5500.
Monel 3.75 9000.
4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
alloys
Grooved Metal
alloys
Solid flat metal

Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.
alloys
Nubbin Width or Ring

Specifies the nubbin width, if applicable. This value is required only for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2
and 6 (FLANGE) equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). For sketch 9, this is not a nubbin width but the contact
width of the metallic ring.

Facing Sketch
Specifies the facing sketch number according to the following correlations, according to Table
2-5-2 of the ASME code.
Facing Sketch CAESAR II Equivalent Description
1a 1 flat finish faces
1b 2 serrated finish faces
1c 3 raised nubbin-flat finish
1d 4 raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 5 1/64 inch nubbin
3 6 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 7 large serrations, one side
5 8 large serrations, both sides
6 9 metallic O-ring type gasket
G.

Facing Column
Specifies the facing column number according to the following correlations:
Gasket Material Facing Column
Self-energizing types (O rings, metallic elastomer, and other

self-sealing types) 2
Elastomers without fabric or a high percent of asbestos fiber:

Below 75A Shore Durometer
75A or higher Shore Durometer 2
2

1/8" thick 2
1/16" thick 2
1/32" thick 2
Elastomers with cotton fabric 2

3 ply 2
2 ply 2
1 ply 2
Vegetable fiber 2

Carbon 2
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 2
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos or corrugated metal, jacketed with:

soft aluminum 2
soft copper or brass 2
iron or soft steel 2
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 3.50
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 2

Gasket Material Facing Column
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled

soft aluminum 2
Monel 2
4%-6% chrome 2
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 2
Solid flat metal

soft aluminum 2
Material Data Tab

The following options are used to define material and stress-related data.
Topics
Flange Material ........................................................................... 871
Bolt Material................................................................................ 872
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature ................................... 872
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ................................. 872
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design ....................................... 872
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient ..................................... 872
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature ........................................ 872
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ...................................... 873
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier .......................................... 873
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier ................................................... 873
Flange Material
Displays the material database for flanges, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.

Bolt Material
Displays the material database for bolting, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Design Temperature
Specifies the flange design temperature. This value is required for ASME stress calculations, and
for ANSI B16.5/API rating table look-ups.
The design temperature is not used in the flexibility model of the flange.
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the design temperature. This value is
required only if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the software.
You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or by clicking
Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
When you select a material in the database, fill in the spaces for any material values where the
defaults are not sufficient. Press F1 for guidance on the material values.
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the ambient temperature. This value is
only required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design

Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the DESIGN case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient

Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the SEATING case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature

Indicates the allowable stress for the bolt material at the design temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.

Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature

Specify the allowable stress for the bolt material at the ambient temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier

Applies the increased allowable (1.5) for the radial and tangential operating ASME flange
allowables. This increase is implied in B31.1 Appendix II Section 4.2.3 when it states that the
longitudinal hub, tangential and radial stress allowables are equal to the yield stress at design
temperature, which is essentially 1.5(S).
Prior to the 1992 edition of the ASME NC code, NC paragraph 3658.1(d) also stated
that the tangential and radial stress allowables could be increased by 50%. The 1992 edition of
NC eliminated this increase on these allowables.
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier

Designates a factor by which to increase the operating bolt allowables.
Section VIII Division 2, Article 4-141 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code allows for
operating loads on bolts to equal two times the standard table allowables. In some cases, this
increase can be by as much as three times the table allowables.
Loads Tab
The following options are used to describe the imposed loads.
Topics
Design Pressure ......................................................................... 874
Axial Force ................................................................................. 874
Bending Moment......................................................................... 874
Disable Leakage Calculations ..................................................... 874
Disable Stress Calculations......................................................... 874
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check ......................................................... 874

Design Pressure
Indicates the internal line pressure (lbs./sq.in.) in gage. This pressure is used in the flexibility
model of the flange in the ASME stress calculations and is the B16.5/API rating.
Axial Force
Defines the externally applied axial force applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. The
software does not include the effect of shear forces in the flexibility model.
Bending Moment
Specifies the external moment applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. If you have two
bending moments, SRSS them and enter the result here.
Disable Leakage Calculations

Turns off the leakage calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a flange
report, which only contains ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2 results.
Disable Stress Calculations

Turns off the flange stress calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a
flange report, which only contains leakage calculations and omits ASME Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix 2 results.
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check

Turns off the report for the ANSI B16.5 Equivalent Pressure check. This check compares the
equivalent pressure to the MAWP (as listed in ANSI B16.5) for the flange class and material. The
ANSI MAWP does not consider bolting or gasket properties, and it is not a good indicator of the
leakage characteristics of the flange.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input. It has been a common practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5 and
API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating tables
are based on allowable stresses and are not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage
predictions that resulted are a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, not the
flexibility, or modulus of elasticity, of the flange. To give you a comparison to the old practice, the
minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API are stored and are used to print
minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that are predicted from this method. An example of
the output that you get upon entering the flange rating is shown below:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL ————————-
Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00

According to the older method, this shows that leakage occurred if a carbon steel flange is used,
and leakage does not occur if an alloy flange is used. Both flanges have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress
calculations:
 Flange Type
 Flange Outside Diameter
 Design Temperature
 Small End Hub Thickness
 Large End Hub Thickness
 Hub Length
 Flange Allowables
 Bolt Allowables
 Gasket Seating Stress
 Optional Allowable Multipliers
 Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
Specify the Flange Type (on page 859) on the Flange Tab (on page 858) tab. To acquire material
allowables from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library, use the Flange Material (on page
871) list on the Material Data Tab (on page 871) tab.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000
Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)
Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000
Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000
The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs
as per Sect VIII Div. 1
Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design Temperature°F 650.000
Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620
Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000

Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000
Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Dimension Lookup

Topics
Nominal Diameter........................................................................ 876
Flange Class ............................................................................... 876
Series ......................................................................................... 876
Attached Pipe ID ......................................................................... 877
Attached Pipe Thickness ............................................................. 877
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the nominal diameter of the flange.
Flange Class
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).
 B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
 API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, and 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
Use the flange rating entry to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table. The
software includes minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in
the tables. You can see minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures and
safety factors in this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum and
maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.
Series
Specifies the ANSI flange series. Select Series A for general-use flanges. Select Series B for
compact flanges.

Attached Pipe ID
Specifies the inside diameter of the attached pipe.
Attached Pipe Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the attached pipe.
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G)

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > B31.G
Main window menu: Analysis > B31.G
Evaluates corroded pipelines to determine when specific pipe segments must be replaced. The
original B31G document is conservative. CAESAR II performs additional calculations to modify
the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc.
The details of the original B31G criteria, as well as the modified methods, are discussed in detail in
this report.
CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four
modified methods. The values are
 The hoop stress to cause failure
 The maximum allowed operating pressure
 The maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. The
methods are:
 .85dL
Approximates the corroded area as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw
length.
 Exact
Determines the corroded area numerically using the trapezoid method.
 Equivalent
Determines the corroded area by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw length.
Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit
depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.
 Effective
Uses a numerical trapezoid summation; however, various sub-lengths of the total flaw
length are used to arrive at a worst-case condition. If the sub-length that produces the
worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the same
result.

The software opens the Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) window. The
window consists of two input tabs: Data Tab (on page 879) and Measurements Tab (on page 880).
After the data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. A typical output
report is shown below:

 For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation file

is generated.
 For more information on the analysis methods used by this command, see the B31G
document or the Battelle project report PR-3-805.
Data Tab
Most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.
Topics
Pipe Nominal Diameter ............................................................... 879
Pipe Wall Thickness.................................................................... 879
Design Pressure ......................................................................... 879
Material Yield Strength................................................................ 879
Material Specified Minimum Yield ............................................... 879
Flaw Length ................................................................................ 879
Measurement Increment ............................................................. 880
Factor of Safety (FS)................................................................... 880
Design Factor (S)........................................................................ 880
Pipe Nominal Diameter

Specifies the pipe diameter.
Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the un-corroded pipe wall thickness.
Design Pressure
Specifies the design pressure. This value is the maximum pressure reported in the output section,
although the maximum allowed pressure may be less than the input design pressure.
Material Yield Strength

Defines the material yield strength. If this value is unknown, enter the specified minimum yield
strength in this cell.
Material Specified Minimum Yield

Defines the minimum yield strength.
Flaw Length
Indicates the length of flaw or anomaly. This value is a measured quantity, usually taken in a
straight line.

Measurement Increment
Specify the measurement increment in this cell. This value defines how often along the flaw
length depth or thickness measurements are made.
The number of measurements should be calculated by (flaw length/measurement increment) + 1.
Factor of Safety (FS)

Defines the factor of safety. For those pipelines in which the maximum operating stress level does
not exceed 72% of the specified minimum yield strength, the safety factor is 100/72 = 1.39. The
safety factor cannot be less than 1.0.
Design Factor (S)

Specifies the design factor from the applicable piping code.
Measurements Tab
You can enter a maximum of twenty pit measurements on the Measurements input screen.
First, you must define the measurements. Select Pits if the measurements are in pit depths.
Select Thicknesses if the measurements are remaining wall thicknesses.
Pit depths are required for the computations. If remaining thicknesses are specified, the
pit depths are computed from wall thickness - remaining thickness.
In the individual cells, enter the measurement obtained along the flaw length. The values are
based on the selection of Pits or Thicknesses.


Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Expansion Joint Rating
Main window menu: Analysis > Expansion Joint Rating
Computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation of an expansion joint. According to
EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted amount of axial
movement per corrugation is defined as erated where
ex + ey + eq < erated
The terms in the above equation are defined as:

 ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
 ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
 eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, that is,
bending.
 erated = The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. You can find this
value in the expansion joint manufacturer’s catalog.
In addition, EJMA states, “Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should be
noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger projected area than the opposite side. Under the
action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to distort the expansion
joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is established by the
manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection which may be imposed
upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated movement. Therefore, in the
selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid exceeding either of these
manufacturer’s limits.”
This module is intended to assist you in satisfying these limitations. This module computes the
terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other.
These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global
coordinate system.

The software opens the EJMA Expansion Joint window. The window consists of three input
screens: Geometry (on page 884), Displacements and Rotations (on page 885), and Allowables
(on page 885).
After the necessary data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. After
processing completes, a report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are
shown on a new tab called Output.

The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined
in the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.
C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING
Node Number for “FROM” end 120.000
Node Number for “TO” end 125.000
Number of Convolutions 4.000
Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447
Effective Diameter(in.)4.996
X Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000
Y Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000
Z Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000
X Coordinate of “to” end (in.)4.447
X Displacement of “from” end (in.).300
Y Displacement of “from” end (in.).250
Z Displacement of “from” end (in.).000
X Rotation of “from” end (deg).000
Y Rotation of “from” end (deg)1.222
Z Rotation of “from” end (deg).030
X Displacement of “to” end (in.)-.100
Y Displacement of “to” end (in.).120
Z Displacement of “to” end (in.).000
X Rotation of “to” end (deg).000
Y Rotation of “to” end (deg)-.020
Z Rotation of “to” end (deg).890
OUTPUT:
AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION

Axial Displacement.100
Axial Displacement due to Lateral .133
Axial Displacement due to Rotation.016
Axial Displacement TOTAL.250
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”
(Local Joint Coordinate System)
Relative Axial Displacement, “x”.401
Relative Lateral Displacement, “y”.158
Relative Bending, “theta” (deg)1.511
Relative Torsion (deg) .019
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”
(Global Piping Coordinate System)
Relative X Displacement-.399
Relative Y Displacement-.132
Relative Z Displacement.095
Relative Rotation about X (deg).000
Relative Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242
Relative Rotation about Z (deg).860
In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement per
corrugation due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends. This is
the value that is compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e(total) is greater than
the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility of premature bellows
failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a per corrugation basis. If
it is not, multiply the axial displacement total by the number of corrugations and compare this
value to the manufacturer’s allowable axial displacement. Most manufacturers allowed rating is for
some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual number of cycles is less, then the allowed
movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual number of cycles is greater than 10,000,
then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special situations, contact the manufacturers
because many factors can affect allowed bellows movement.
The y in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with respect
to the other, and theta is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with respect to
the other. CAESAR II does not include x in the denominator for the lateral displacement
calculations as outlined in EJMA.
Geometry
Topics
Node Number for "From" End ...................................................... 884
Node Number for "To" End .......................................................... 885
Number of Convolutions .............................................................. 885
Flexible Joint Length ................................................................... 885
Effective Diameter ....................................................................... 885
Z Axis Up .................................................................................... 885
Coordinates................................................................................. 885
Node Number for "From" End

Identifies the node number that represents the From end of the expansion joint. This value is used
for labeling purposes.

Node Number for "To" End

Identifies the node number that represents the To end of the expansion joint. This value is used
for labeling purposes.
Number of Convolutions
Defines the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.
Flexible Joint Length

Specifies the flexible length of the bellows.
Effective Diameter
Specifies the diameter of the circle whose area is equal to the effective area of the expansion joint.
The effective ID can be estimated using the following equation:
1.13 * sqrt (Effective Area)
You can find the effective area of the joint in the manufacturer's catalog.
Z Axis Up
Indicates that the z-axis is upward in your CAESAR II input file.
Coordinates
Defines the spatial coordinate at the appropriate end of the expansion joint
Displacements and Rotations

Defines the displacements and rotations at the appropriate end of the expansion joint. These
values typically come from the displacement report of a CAESAR II run.
Allowables
Specifies the allowed expansion joint movement (translation or rotation) on a per convolution
basis and for the entire bellows. Enter values using the following units of measure:
Axial inches
Lateral inches
Bending inches or degrees
Torsional inches or degrees
You can acquire this data using the vendor catalog.

Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > AISC
Main window menu: Analysis > AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. Compliance is evaluated according to the
AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) code. This code check uses the forces and
moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses, and allowables, and
determines a unity check value. If the unity check value is less than 1.0, the member is acceptable
for the given loading conditions. CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check according to either the
1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the
actual and allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check
equations. The database must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN and is set using Tools >
Configuration/Setup. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity
check computation. The most noticeable difference is that the 1989 code provides a method for
computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure, which was not addressed in the 1977
code, can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps necessary to
compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the message file
(generated upon request).
The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression.
Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor kc” has been added. “kc” is a
compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code.
Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the input
file for the AISC module when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases or
compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code generates error messages and processing
terminates. You are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when using this command.
To begin the unity check calculations, specify a new job name in the New Job Name

The software displays the AISC window, which consists of two input screens: Global Input (on
page 888) and Local Member Data Tab (on page 891).
Output Reports
You can direct the output reports to the screen or to a printer. The output report begins with a one
page summary describing the current global data and units, as shown below.

The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last
column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the
governing AISC equation. A sample member output reports are shown below. The report is
applicable to jobs where side sway is allowed.
Global Input
The following options are used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated.
Topics
Structural Code........................................................................... 888
Allowable Stress Increase Factor ................................................ 889
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ..................................... 889
Young’s Modulus ........................................................................ 889
Bending Coefficient ..................................................................... 889
Form Factor Qa .......................................................................... 890
Allow Sidesway ........................................................................... 890
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ...................... 890
Minimum Desired Unity Check .................................................... 890
Maximum Desired Unity Check ................................................... 890
Structural Code
Identifies the code and year, typically matching the database in use. Slight variations in the
computations depend on which code year is selected. Single angles can only be checked if AISC
1989 is selected.

Allowable Stress Increase Factor

Designates the multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending
allowable stresses. Typically, this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events, such as earthquakes
and 100-year storms, the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to be increased by a factor.
Usually, a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the allowable stress
increase factor equal to 1.33. For more details see the AISC code, section 1.5.6.
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Specifies the interaction formula coefficients (Cmy and Cmz) for the strong and weak axis of the
elements (in-plane and out-of-plane). Values include the following:
 0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (side sway).
 For restrained compression members in frames braced against side sway and not subject to
transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending:
0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)
but not less than 0.4, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends,
of that portion of the member un-braced in the plane of bending under consideration.
 For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading
and subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy can be determined by
rational analysis. Alternatively, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
 0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
 1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
Young’s Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel, this value
is usually 29,000,000 psi.

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point).
Bending Coefficient
Specifies the bending coefficient (Cb). Use 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in
Formula 1.6-1a or when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than the
moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2
but not more than 2.3, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.

Form Factor Qa
Defines the allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the actual
area.
Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the
effective area.
Allow Sidesway
Controls the ability of a frame or structure to experience side sway (joint translation). This affects
the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for
frames braced against side sway, moments at each end of the member are required. Side sway is
allowed.
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

Determines whether the AISC module attempts to resize specific members as a result of the unity
check computations. This option is most often used for an initial pass at optimization.
Selecting this option requires that you specify a minimum unity check and a maximum unity check.
If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the module resizes the member appropriately.
The final member size is shown in the output report.
A resized member overwrites the initial input member size in the input file (input and output share
a common file). If member resizing occurs, check the final member size to ensure the following:
1. The selected member is commonly available.
2. The selected member is optimal in its group.
3. The selected member does not violate fabrication requirements for flange or web size.
Minimum Desired Unity Check

Defines the minimum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and 1.0.
Members whose computed unity check value is less than this minimum are resized to a smaller
shape.
The Minimum Desired Unity Check value must be less than the Maximum Desired
Unity Check value. The recommended value for the minimum desired unity check is 0.7, which
allows lightly loaded members to be reduced in size.
Maximum Desired Unity Check

Defines the maximum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and 1.0.
Members whose computed unity check value is greater than this maximum are resized to a larger
shape.
The Maximum Desired Unity Check value must be greater than the Minimum
Desired Unity Check value. The recommended value for the maximum desired unity check is
0.9, which leaves a margin for loading inaccuracies.

Local Member Data Tab

The following options are used to enter local member data for each member being evaluated.
Topics
Member Start Node..................................................................... 891
Member End Node...................................................................... 891
Member Type ............................................................................. 891
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz ...................... 891
Unsupported Axial Length ........................................................... 892
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ..................................... 892
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) .............................. 892
Double Angle Spacing ................................................................ 892
Young's Modulus ........................................................................ 892
Axial Member Force .................................................................... 893
In-Plane Bending Moment........................................................... 893
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment .................................................... 893
In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment............................................... 893
In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment............................................... 893
Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment ........................................ 893
Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment ........................................ 893
Member Start Node

Identifies the start node, or “i” end, of a structural element. This option is required. Enter an integer
value between 1 and 32,000.
Member End Node

Identifies the member end node, or the “j” end, of a structural element. This option is required.
Enter an integer value between 1 and 32,000.
Member Type
Specifies the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire the
member geometric properties from the database. For properties to be obtained, the label you
enter must match exactly the label in the database.
Because many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long legs
back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell them
apart. Enter a D double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to back.
Enter a B for double angles with short legs back to back.
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

Specifies the coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios.
Recommended values are listed in the following table:

End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K
fixed-fixed 0.5 0.65
fixed-pinned 0.7 0.8
fixed-sliding 1.0 1.2
pinned-pinned 1.0 1.0
fixed-free 2.0 2.1
pinned-sliding 2.0 2.0
Unsupported Axial Length

Defines the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the
total length of the member.
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
strong axis of the member.
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
weak axis of the member.
Double Angle Spacing

Indicates the gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing, as defined in the AISC
manual, must be 0.0, .375, or .75-inches.
Young's Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel, this value
is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Young’s modulus overrides the Young’s Modulus (on page
889) value specified on the Global Input tab.

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point). This value of the material yield strength overrides the
Material Yield Strength (on page 889) value specified on the Global Input tab.

Axial Member Force

Specifies the force (tension or compression) that acts along the axis of the member. The sign of
the number is not significant because a worst-case load condition is assumed, that is, all positive
loads.
In-Plane Bending Moment

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when side sway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not significant
because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed.
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when side sway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant
because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed.
In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the smaller of
the two in-plane bending moments that cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the larger of the
two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the smaller of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.
Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the larger of the
two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.

NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > NEMA SM23
Main window menu: Analysis > 1 - NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. There are two types of force/moment allowables
computed during a NEMA run:
 Individual nozzle allowables.
 Cumulative equipment allowables.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De
Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.
M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.
De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.
A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown below

For cumulative equipment allowables, NEMA SM23 states that "the combined resultants of the
forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline of
the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc, where Dc is the diameter of an opening
whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment connections. A
typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown below:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved at
the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the
respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. Dc
is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
The software opens the NEMA SM23 window. Aside from the description, there is only one input
tab for the NEMA turbine. The Nema Input tab enables iterative addition of an arbitrary number of
nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.
NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet
nozzle. The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and
moments acting on the pipe elements that attach to the turbine:
NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
30 -108 -49 -93 73 188 603
35 108 67 93 162 -47 -481
50 -192 7 -11 369 -522 39
55 192 -63 11 78 117 -56
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50, reverse the sign of the forces that act
on the piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39

Output Reports
The first page of the output is the input echo. The second page, as well as some of the remaining
pages, display the individual nozzle calculations. The last page displays the summation
calculations. The example below shows a sample input echo report.
The actual number of output pages varies and depends on the number of nozzles
defined in the input.

The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The
highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, **FAILED** would
have displayed, in red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was
excessive. The following two examples show sample NEMA output nozzle calculations and NEMA
output summation calculations, respectively.

NEMA Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads for steam turbine
nozzles.
Topics
Z-Axis Vertical ............................................................................ 898
Cos X & Y................................................................................... 898
Nozzle Number ........................................................................... 898
Nozzle Type................................................................................ 898
Nozzle Diameter ......................................................................... 898
DX .............................................................................................. 899
DY .............................................................................................. 899
DZ .............................................................................................. 899
Global Force FX.......................................................................... 899
Global Force FY.......................................................................... 899
Global Force FZ .......................................................................... 900
Global Moment MX ..................................................................... 900
Global Moment MY ..................................................................... 900
Global Moment MZ ..................................................................... 900
Select Load Jobs and Load Case................................................ 900
Z-Axis Vertical
Controls the plane in which the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane. If you select this option, the software places the
Z-axis in the vertical plane, and the X- and Y-axes are in the horizontal plane.
Cos X & Y
Specifies the direction cosines (X, Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL is
along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are as follows:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Nozzle Number
Identifies the node number that describes the nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive number
only.
Nozzle Type
Identifies the nozzle type. This is used only for informational purposes in the output report.
Nozzle Diameter
Specifies the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.

DX
Specifies the X-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the X-distance
from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust nozzle is
0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust nozzle and
the shaft centerlines, enter the X-distance from the intersection point to each connection.
DY
Specifies the Y-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the Y-distance
the shaft centerlines, enter the Y-distance from the intersection point to each connection.
DZ
Specifies the Z-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the Z-distance
the shaft centerlines, enter the Z-distance from the intersection point to each connection.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Select Load Jobs and Load Case

Opens up a dialog box that you can use to navigate to the appropriate loads job or load case.
Errors/Warnings Tab
The software displays the Errors/Warnings tab when the equipment jobs that you are analyzing
have issues. The software prompts you to the warnings found and asks you if you want to continue
the analysis. In some cases, no action is needed. In other situations, you can review the error
messages and correct issues in the input before re-analyzing the job.
Equipment Report Tab

Displays the equipment analysis results in a report format. The software displays results on this
tab only after you enter and analyze equipment. You can save, print, cut text, copy and paste text,
and export the entire report into a Microsoft Word document.
If there are issues during the equipment analysis the software displays an
Errors/Warnings tab with details on the issues.
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

Opens the API-610 dialog box, in which you define properties and evaluate piping loads on
centrifugal pumps for general refinery service.
The software uses the API-610 load satisfaction criteria defined in clause Section 6.5 and Annex
F.
 Clause F.1.2a - The individual component nozzle loads must fall below two times the
allowables listed in the nozzle loadings table (Table 5).

 Clause F.1.2b - The resultant applied forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange
shall satisfy the equations F.1 and F.2 of the code. You can determine whether F.1.2b is
satisfied by comparing the force and moment resultants. If either resultant exceeds two, the
nozzle status fails.
 Clause F.1.2c - Provides equations translating the applied component forces and moments to
the center of the pump. The requirements of these equations, and whether they have satisfied
API-610, are shown on the bottom of the report.
API-610 allows one suction nozzle and one discharge nozzle.
API-610 Dialog Box (on page 903)

 Analyze custom piping load cases on a centrifugal pump (on page 901)
 Analyze load cases imported from a model on a centrifugal pump (on page 902)
Analyze custom piping load cases on a centrifugal pump

This procedure analyzes a centrifugal pump with a manually-defined load case.
1. In the main window ribbon, click Analysis > Equipment > API 610 .
The API-610 dialog box displays. Pump1, with a default Suction nozzle, a default
Discharge nozzle, and Load Case Sets, displays in the Equipment pane.
2. Select Pump1 in the Equipment pane, and specify properties on the Pump Input tab.
3. Select Suction in the Equipment pane, and specify properties on the Nozzle Input tab.
4. Select Discharge in the Equipment pane, and specify properties on the Nozzle Input
tab.
5. Select Load Case Sets. For the Load Cases: <pump name> - Suction grid at the top of
the Load Case Sets tab, click Add Case > Add Custom.
A blank row displays in the grid.
6. On the blank row, specify the required load case name, forces, and moments.
7. Repeat the previous two steps for the Load Cases: <pump name> - Discharge grid at the
top of the Load Case Sets tab, and for any additional required load cases.
8. To create a load case set, select one suction load case and one discharge load case.
9. At the bottom of the Load Case Sets tab, click Create a Set from Selected Load Cases
.
A load case set displays in the Load Case Sets grid.
10. Repeat the previous step for each required load case set.

11. Click Save .
12. Select Pump1 in the Equipment pane, and click Analyze .

The software analyzes the pump and nozzles. After analysis completes, the software displays
a report on the Output tab.
 Some properties are not required. For more information, see Pump Input Tab (on page 905)
and Nozzle Input Tab (on page 906).
 As an alternative to define all load cases and load case sets with Load Case Sets, you
can define load cases on individual Load Cases tabs. Expand Suction or Discharge
in the Equipment pane, and click Load Cases.
 The software limits analysis to the selected item in the Equipment pane. For example, select
Pump1 to analyze all pumps or select Suction to analyze only that nozzle.
 You can use custom and imported load cases in your load case sets. For more information,
see Analyze load cases imported from a model on a centrifugal pump (on page 902).
Analyze load cases imported from a model on a centrifugal

pump
This procedure analyzes a centrifugal pump that is part of a .c2 model file.
1. In the main window ribbon, click Analysis > Equipment > API 610 .
The API-610 dialog box displays. Pump1, with a default Suction nozzle, a default
Discharge nozzle, and Load Case Sets, displays in the Equipment pane.
2. Select Pump1 in the Equipment pane, and specify the required properties on the Pump
Input tab.
3. Select Suction in the Equipment pane, and specify properties on the Nozzle Input tab,
including:
 The .c2 model file containing the pump in CAESAR II Output File.
 The value for CAESAR II Node Number which matches the suction nozzle node in the
.c2 model file.
4. Repeat the previous step for Discharge.
5. Select Load Case Sets. For the Load Cases: <pump name> - Suction grid at the top of
the Load Case Sets tab, click Add Case > Import Load Cases.
The Select Load Cases dialog box displays.
6. Select the required load cases, and click Accept.
The load cases display in the grid.
7. Repeat the previous two steps for the Load Cases: <pump name> - Discharge grid at the
top of the Load Case Sets tab.

8. To create a load case set, select one suction load case and one discharge load case.
9. At the bottom of the Load Case Sets tab, click Create a Set from Selected Load Cases
.
A load case set displays in the Load Case Set grid.
10. Repeat the previous step for each required load case set.
11. Click Save .
12. Select Pump1 in the Equipment pane, and click Analyze .

The software analyzes the pump and nozzles. After analysis completes, the software displays
a report on the Output tab.
 Some properties are not required. For more information, see Pump Input Tab (on page 905)
and Nozzle Input Tab (on page 906).
 As an alternative to define all load cases and load case sets with Load Case Sets, you
can define load cases on individual Load Cases tabs. Expand Suction or Discharge
in the Equipment pane, and click Load Cases.
 The software limits analysis to the selected item in the Equipment pane. For example, select
Pump1 to analyze all pumps or select Suction to analyze only that nozzle.
 You can use custom and imported load cases in your load case sets. For more information,
see Analyze custom piping load cases on a centrifugal pump (on page 901).
API-610 Dialog Box

The first time you run API 610 , the software automatically creates a new file
containing a pump with one suction nozzle and one discharge nozzle. After saving a file, the
software opens that file by default the next time you run API 610 .
Toolbar
New
Creates a new .C2Edb equipment file.
Open
Opens an existing equipment file.
Save
Saves an equipment file.
Save As is also available from the menu.
Import Legacy
Imports a legacy equipment file.

Print
Prints the report for the selected item in the Equipment pane.
 Select a nozzle to print only the nozzle report.
 Select a pump to print the pump and the pump nozzle report.
 Select a pump type to print reports for all pumps defined for the type.
If you have analyzed the pump, the software prints an input and output report. If you have not
analyzed the pump, the software prints an input report.
Add
Adds a pump to the selected pump type or adds a nozzle to the selected pump. For example:
 Select API-610 in the Equipment pane to add a pump .
 Select <Pump name> in the Equipment pane to add a nozzle .
You can also right-click > Add Pump / Add Nozzle.
Delete
Deletes the selected pump or nozzle.
You can also right-click > Delete Pump / Delete Nozzle.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected pump or nozzle.
Analyze
Analyzes the selected item in the Equipment pane.
 Select a nozzle to analyze only the nozzle.
 Select a pump to analyze the pump and the pump nozzles.
 Select a pump type to analyze all pumps defined for the type.
 You can also right-click > Analyze.

 Any change to input data automatically deletes an existing analysis.

Equipment (left pane)

The following icons display in the Equipment pane:
- API-610 pump
- API-610 nozzle. A nozzle is the child of a pump in the hierarchy.
- API-610 load cases and load case sets. You define load cases for each nozzle and load case
sets for each pump.
Tabbed View (right pane)

Tabs display on the right side of the dialog box. Contents of each tab are specific to the selected
item in the Equipment pane.
Event Log (right pane)

Displays status, warnings, and errors occurring during analysis.
The log clears when you click Clear Events, and each time you close the .C2Edb file.
Topics
Pump Input Tab .......................................................................... 905
Nozzle Input Tab......................................................................... 906
Load Cases Tab ......................................................................... 908
Load Case Sets Tab ................................................................... 910
Output Tab ................................................................................. 911
Pump Input Tab

Specifies the pump properties.
You must also define nozzle properties for each nozzle. For more information, see
Nozzle Input Tab (on page 906).
Equipment Type
Displays the equipment type. This is a read-only field.
Equipment Name
Defines the name of the equipment. This is an optional property.
Description
Specifies a description for the pump. This is an optional property.
Z-Axis Vertical
When selected, defines the Z-axis as the vertical axis.

Vertical In-line Pump

When selected, specifies a centrifugal pump with the suction and discharge nozzles in line with
each other.
Allowable Load Multiplier

Defines the factor by which all API-610 Table 5 allowables are multiplied. Specify a value between
1.0 and 2.0. Values less than 1.0 are replaced by a default factor of 1.0, while values greater than
2.0 are replaced by a default factor of 2.0. If left blank, a default value of 1.0 is used.
Typically, you use a value of 1.0 when evaluating individual nozzle loads. When checking vertical
in-line pumps, this value can be 2.0. The value of 2.0 is also valid when suction and discharge
nozzle loads are evaluated together as defined in Appendix F of API-610.
Centerline Direction Cosine X & Centerline Direction Cosine Z

Indicate the direction cosines, depending on the type of pump.
Vertical In-Line Pump (option is selected)
Specifies the orientation of the nozzles as the global coordinate direction cosines in the
horizontal plane for the nozzles. The positive direction is from the discharge nozzle to the
suction nozzle. For example, if the nozzles are along the X-axis:
Centerline Direction Cosine X = 1.0
Centerline Direction Cosine Z = 0.0
Horizontal Pump (Vertical In-Line Pump option is cleared)
Specifies the orientation of the pump shaft centerline as the global coordinate direction
cosines in the horizontal plane for the centerline. For example, if the pump is along the Z-axis:
Centerline Direction Cosine X = 0.0
Centerline Direction Cosine Z = 1.0
Nozzle Input Tab

Specifies the suction or discharge nozzle properties.
Define nozzle properties for each nozzle on a pump. Each nozzle has a separate
Nozzle Input tab.
Control-click an undisplayed nozzle in the left pane to display input for both nozzles in
one Nozzle Input tab.
Label
Defines a label for the nozzle. This is an optional property.
Type
Specifies the nozzle type. Select Suction or Discharge.
API-610 allows one suction nozzle and one discharge nozzle.

Orientation
Specifies the location of the nozzle. Select Top, Side, or End.
 For a pump with a centerline along the Y-axis (vertical), select Side.
 Each position has different allowables.
Nominal Diameter
Defines the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Location from Pump Center, DX

Specifies the distance between the nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a positive value
if the nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if the nozzle is farther out
on the positive X-axis.
 API 610 defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the pump is defined as
the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing through the center of
the two pedestals.
 When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the software disables DX, DY, and DZ because the
coordinates are not used.
Location from Pump Center, DY

Specifies the distance between the nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a positive value
if the nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if the nozzle is farther out
on the positive Y-axis.
the two pedestals.
Location from Pump Center, DZ

Specifies the distance between the nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a positive value
if the nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if the nozzle is farther out
on the positive Z-axis.
the two pedestals.

CAESAR II Node Number

Specifies the node number assigned to the nozzle flange connection in the .c2 model file defined
for the CAESAR II Output File (on page 908). Type the required node number.
CAESAR II Output File

Specifies the location of a CAESAR II .c2 model file containing the pump and load cases that you
want to analyze. Select a file in the Open dialog box.
Load Cases Tab

Specifies the suction or discharge nozzle load cases.
Control-click an undisplayed nozzle load cases item in the left pane to display load
cases for both nozzles in one Load Cases tab.
Add Case
Adds a load case. Select one of the following:
Import Load Cases - Displays the Select Load Cases dialog box, where you select one or
more load cases defined in the .c2 model file defined for the CAESAR II Output File (on page
908) at the node defined for the CAESAR II Node Number (on page 908). Each load case
displays on a row of the grid. The load cases remain linked to the model and display in the
Link column.
Add Custom - Adds a blank row. You then manually add load case values.
Delete Case
Deletes the load case on the selected row.
Copy
Copies one or more selected rows.
Paste
Pastes one or more copied rows.
A copied imported load case converts to a custom load case when pasted.
Refresh Linked Cases
Updates linked load cases (displaying in the Link column) to the latest values in the .c2
model file defined for the CAESAR II Output File (on page 908).
Use this option when you change your CAESAR II file and you want to refresh the linked
equipment load cases.
In the Equipment pane, you can also right-click > Refresh Linked Cases.

Order
Displays the order in which the load cases were added. You can change the order by clicking the
order column of a row and dragging the row to the required location.
Link
When displays, indicates that the load case is linked to the .c2 model file defined for CAESAR
II Output File (on page 908).
Click Refresh Linked Cases to update a linked load case when the CAESAR II
model file changes.
Name
Specifies the load case name. When the load case is linked (displaying in the Link column),
displays the name from of the imported load case.
Number
Displays the sequence number for the load case:
 For imported load cases, the value matches the load case number from the CAESAR II output
file (such as 1 for Case 1 and 2 for Case 2).
 For custom load cases, the value matches the order of creation, and is appended with "u"
(such as, 1u, 2u).
To change the order of a load case in the grid, click the Number field of a row, and drag the row to
the required location. The value of Number does not change.
This is a read-only field.
FX
Identifies the X component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
orientation to specify the force.
For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle
is in tension or compression. Positive direction is from the discharge to suction nozzle.

FY
Identifies the Y component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
FZ
Identifies the Z component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
MX
Identifies the X component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
orientation to specify the moment.
MY
Identifies the Y component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
MZ
Identifies the Z component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
Load Case Sets Tab

Specifies the suction and discharge nozzle load cases and the pump load case sets.
Load Cases
For load case commands and properties, see Load Cases Tab (on page 908).
You can define load cases for each nozzle on this tab without using the individual Load
Cases tabs. Updates you make on the Load Cases tabs automatically appear in the Load Case
Sets tab.
Load Case Sets

Create a Set from Selected Load Cases
Defines a set of load cases to be analyzed. To create a set, select one suction load case and
one discharge load case, and then click . The set displays on a row of the Load Case Sets
grid.
Delete Load Case Set
Deletes the selected load case set.

Output Tab
Displays input and output reports for the equipment, equipment component, load cases, or load
case sets selected in the Equipment pane.
First Page, Previous Page, Current Page, Next Page, Last Page
Controls navigation through the pages of the report.
Print
Displays the Print dialog box, where you can select a printer and printer options.
Print Layout
Reformats the report to display as it would print as a .pdf. Click to toggle this option on and off.
Page Setup
Displays the Page Setup dialog box, where you can set paper size, orientation, and margin
size.
Export
Creates a file of the report in your selected format. Select Excel, PDF, or Word.
Zoom
Controls the size of the report display. Select Page Width, Whole Page, or a percentage.
Find Text in Report
Searches for every occurrence of a word or phrase. Use the Find and Next options to locate
the word or phrase, and then move to the next instance in the report.
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

Evaluates piping loads on compressors. The requirements of this standard are similar to those of
NEMA SM-23 (1991). The allowable load values for API-617 are approximately 85% higher than
the NEMA allowables.
The software opens the API 617 dialog box, which consists of the following five input tabs:
 API 617 Input Tab (on page 912)
 Suction Nozzle Tab (on page 913)
 Discharge Nozzle Tab (on page 915)
 Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab (on page 916)

 Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab (on page 917)
After you input all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 900). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Errors/Warnings Tab (on page 900).
API 617 Input Tab

Topics
Node Number.............................................................................. 912
Node Number.............................................................................. 913
Node Number.............................................................................. 913
Node Number.............................................................................. 913
Equipment Centerline .................................................................. 913
Factor for Allowables ................................................................... 913
Node Number (Suction Nozzle)

Indicates the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive
number.

Nominal Diameter (Suction Nozzle)

Specifies the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number (Extraction Nozzle #1)

Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #1 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter (Extraction Nozzle #1)

Specifies the extraction nozzle #1 pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number (Discharge Nozzle)

Indicates the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive
number.
Nominal Diameter (Discharge Nozzle)

Specifies the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number (Extraction Nozzle #2)

Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #2 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter (Extraction Nozzle #2)

Specifies the extraction nozzle #2 pipe nominal diameter.
Equipment Centerline
Indicates the direction cosines (X,Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL is
along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Factor for Allowables

Designates the multiplication factor by which all allowables are multiplied, if necessary
API 617 does not recommend the use of a multiplier. The code specifically states what
the allowables are.
Suction Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for suction nozzles.

Topics
X Distance to Suction.................................................................. 914
Y Distance to Suction.................................................................. 914
Z Distance to Suction .................................................................. 914
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................... 914
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................... 914
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................... 914
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ........................................... 914
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle ............................................ 914
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle............................................ 914
X Distance to Suction
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Y Distance to Suction
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Z Distance to Suction
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

Discharge Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for discharge nozzles.
Topics
X Distance to Discharge.............................................................. 915
Y Distance to Discharge.............................................................. 915
Z Distance to Discharge.............................................................. 915
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 915
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 915
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 915
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ....................................... 915
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ....................................... 915
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 916
X Distance to Discharge
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Y Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Z Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.

Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the extraction nozzle #1.
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................. 916
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................. 916
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1.............................................. 916
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ..................................... 916
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ..................................... 916
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle...................................... 916
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 916
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 917
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 917
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle #1.
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle #1.
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle #1.
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the extraction nozzle #2.
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................. 917
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................. 917
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2.............................................. 917
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ..................................... 917
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle........................................ 917
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle...................................... 918
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 918
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 918
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 918
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle #1.
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on |the extraction nozzle
#2.

Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle #1.
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. These calculations cover the allowed loads
on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure below) found on most single or multi-bundled
air-cooled heat exchangers. The following figures from API 661 illustrate the type of open
exchanger body analyzed by this standard.

There are two requirements that must be met for API 661 compliance:
 7.1.10.1 - Each nozzle, in its design corroded condition, must be capable of withstanding the
simultaneous application of the moments and forces defined in the Typical Construction of a
Tube Bundle with Plug Headers figure in the API 661 code standard.
 7.1.10.2 - The design of each fixed or floating header, the design of the connections of fixed
headers to side frames, and the design of other support members should ensure that the
simultaneous application (sum) of all nozzle loadings on a single header does not cause any
damage. The components of the nozzle loadings on a single header should not exceed the
following values:
 Mx 6100 N•m (4500 ft•lbf)
 My 8130 N•m (6000 ft•lbf)
 Mz 4070 N•m (3000 ft•lbf)
 Fx 10,010 N (2250 lbf)
 Fy 20,020 (4500 lbf)
 Fz `6,680 (3750 lbf)
The software opens the API 661 dialog box, which allows you to specify project-specific
information, such as a description of the equipment, and details about the Input Data Tab (on page
920), Inlet Nozzle Tab (on page 921), and Outlet Nozzle Tab (on page 922).

After you input all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads on air-cooled heat
exchangers.
Topics
Inlet Nozzle Node Number .......................................................... 920
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter .................................................... 920
Outlet Nozzle Node Number ....................................................... 920
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................. 920
Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier ......................................... 920
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier ....................................... 920
Tube Bundle Direction ................................................................ 921
Z-Axis Vertical ............................................................................ 921
Inlet Nozzle Node Number

Indicates the inlet nozzle node number that is the connecting point between piping and the
exchanger. This entry is optional. If defined, enter a positive number.
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal diameter of the exchanger inlet connection.
Outlet Nozzle Node Number

Indicates the outlet nozzle node number that is the connecting point between piping and the
exchanger. This entry is optional. If defined, enter a positive number.
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal diameter of the exchanger outlet connection.
Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier

Defines the Force and Moment multiplier as referenced in Figure 6, Nozzle Loads, in the API 661
code standard. The software bases the pass or fail status on this value. If you leave this option
blank, the software uses a default value of 1.0.
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier

Indicates the resultant force and moment multiplier. The computed force and moment ratios are
compared to this value. If you leave this option blank, the software uses a default value of 1.0.

Tube Bundle Direction

Specifies the CAESAR II global tube direction. If the X-direction is defined, the force and moment
allowables for the X- and Z-directions are flipped. The same applies to the Resultant Force and
Moment Multiplier allowables.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that this equipment uses the Z-axis as the vertical reference for the model.
Inlet Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the inlet nozzle.
Topics
DY (Nozzle Orientation) .............................................................. 921
Global Force FX.......................................................................... 921
Global Force FY.......................................................................... 921
Global Force FZ .......................................................................... 921
Global Moment MX ..................................................................... 921
Global Moment MY ..................................................................... 922
Global Moment MZ ..................................................................... 922
DY (Nozzle Orientation)
Designates the Y-dimension of the suction nozzle to the header center. This dimension must be
positive. Refer to Figure 5 in API 661. In the figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the
approximate center of the header location.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle. This component can be
considered a radial load.
Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.

Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-moment that the piping system exerts on the Inlet nozzle.
Outlet Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the outlet nozzle.
Topics
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face ......................... 922
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................ 922
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................ 922
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle................................................. 922
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................. 922
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................. 922
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle........................................... 923
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face

Indicates the Y-dimension of the header center to the discharge nozzle. Refer to Figure 5 in API
661. In this figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the approximate center of the header
location.
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Indicates the X-force which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle. This can be considered a
radial load.
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-moment which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.

Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-moment which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
HEI Standard
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > HEI Standard
Main window menu: Analysis > 5 - HEI Standard
Evaluates the allowable loads on shell type Heat Exchange Institute (HEI) standard nozzles. To
begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to
navigate to an existing job file.
The software opens the HEI STD dialog box, in which you can enter the necessary input data. The
following example shows sample input for the HEI module:
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force.
Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these
allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method, where

the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum
permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted
(using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn
between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a
triangle with the axes. For any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the location
of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the loads falls
outside the triangle.
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the location
of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal pressure has
been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the nozzle thrust
has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II automatically computes
the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if Add Pressure Thrust is selected on the HEI
Nozzle (on page 924) tab.
After you enter all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
HEI Nozzle
The following options are used to enter input data for shell type heat exchanger nozzles.
Topics
Design Pressure ......................................................................... 924
Nozzle Outside Diameter ............................................................ 924
Shell Outside Diameter ............................................................... 924
Shell Thickness........................................................................... 924
Material Allowable Stress ............................................................ 925
Maximum Radial Force ............................................................... 925
Maximum Longitudinal Moment................................................... 925
Add Pressure Thrust Force ......................................................... 925
Design Pressure
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Nozzle Outside Diameter

Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Shell Outside Diameter

Indicates the outside diameter of the pressure vessel.
Shell Thickness
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.


Specifies the yield strength (Sy) of the shell material at the operating temperature. Refer to ASME
Section VIII Division 1 for this information. Enter a positive value. The yield strength is greater than
the allowable stress.
Material Allowable Stress

Indicates the allowable stress of the shell material at the operating temperature, according to
ASME Section VIII Division 1. Enter a positive value.
Maximum Radial Force

Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.
Maximum Longitudinal Moment

Specifies the moment about the transverse axis of the vessel which the piping exerts on the
nozzle. Enter a non-negative value.
Add Pressure Thrust Force

Controls whether the thrust force generated by the internal pressure is included or ignored. Select
this option to include the pressure thrust force. To ignore this force, do not select this option.
All versions prior to CAESAR II 3.21a always included the pressure thrust force in
analysis.
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name

The software opens the API 560 dialog box. You can enter data for the nozzle tube nominal
diameter and the forces and moments acting on the nozzle tube.
After you input all the equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
When you run the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the allowables
as published in API 560.
API 560 Input Data Tab

Use the following options to enter input data for the nozzle tube nominal diameter and the forces
and moments acting on the nozzle tube.
Topics
Nozzle Type................................................................................ 927
Node Number ............................................................................. 927
Nominal Diameter ....................................................................... 927
Axial Force ................................................................................. 927
Horizontal Shear Force ............................................................... 927
Vertical Shear Force ................................................................... 928
Torsional Moment ....................................................................... 928
Horizontal Moment ...................................................................... 928
Vertical Moment .......................................................................... 928

Nozzle Type
Specifies the type of nozzle you are analyzing. Options include a straight tube nozzle or a nozzle
designed for a manifold.
Node Number
Identifies the node number for the nozzle tube that is being analyzed. Because there are many
tubes in a fired heater, analyze the most highly-loaded tubes.
Nominal Diameter
Indicates the nominal diameter of the nozzle tube. You must select a Nozzle Type before
selecting a Nominal Diameter value.
Axial Force
Specifies the axial force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube direction
is X, then enter the FX value from the appropriate load case.
Horizontal Shear Force

Specifies the horizontal force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the FZ value from the appropriate load case.

Vertical Shear Force

Specifies the vertical force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the FY value from the appropriate load case.
Torsional Moment
Indicates the torsional moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MX value from the appropriate load case.
Horizontal Moment
Indicates the horizontal moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MZ value from the appropriate load case.
Vertical Moment
Indicates the vertical moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MY value from the appropriate load case.

SECTION 13
Technical Discussions
In This Section
Rigid Element Application ........................................................... 929
In-Line Flange Evaluation ........................................................... 931
Cold Spring................................................................................. 932
Expansion Joints......................................................................... 935
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ............................................................. 937
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ......................................................... 941
Modeling Friction Effects ............................................................. 944
Nonlinear Code Compliance ....................................................... 945
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints .............................. 945
Static Seismic Inertial Loads ....................................................... 949
Wind Loads ................................................................................ 950
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................ 952
Creep Loading ............................................................................ 965
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ......................................................... 967
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction .......................................... 972
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ............................................. 976
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ............................................. 989
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions .................................. 1009
Code Compliance Considerations ............................................... 1013
Local Coordinates ....................................................................... 1052
Rigid Element Application

A piping element that is stiffer or heavier than pipe of the same size (for example, a flanged valve)
can be modeled as a rigid element in CAESAR II. CAESAR II sets the stiffness of a rigid element
based on the inside diameter defined for the pipe but with a wall thickness set to ten times the
entered value. Note that long “rigid” elements may bend.
Rigid elements in CAESAR II are rigid relative to the pipe around it. For example, if a 6-inch line
ties into a 72-inch heat exchanger and rigid elements are used to model the heat exchanger, those
exchanger elements are better represented by 72-inch pipe rather than 6-inch pipe.
Rigid Weight
Specifies a value for the weight of the rigid element. The rigid material weight is the weight of the
rigid excluding insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid. If left blank, then the weight of the rigid
defaults to 0. A rigid element with zero weight is often used as a construction element, used to
move a centerline load to the shell wall, or used to model the effective stiffness and thermal growth
of a piece of equipment.
If left blank or 0, then the software does not add the additional weight due either to
insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid.

Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements

The fluid weight in a rigid element is assumed to be equal to the fluid weight in an equivalent
straight pipe of similar length and inside diameter.
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements

The insulation weight for the rigid is assumed to be equal to 1.75 times the insulation for an
equivalent length of straight pipe of the entered outside diameter.
Total Weight on Rigid Elements

The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is zero will be zero.
The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is not zero is calculated as follows:
Weight = Wu + Wf + Wr +1.75(W i+Wc)
Where:
Wu = User-defined rigid weight (the Thermal Expansion/Pipe Weight report will show
user-defined weight divided by entered length)
Wf = Calculated fluid weight for equivalent straight pipe (this is reduced by refractory lining)
Wr = Calculated refractory weight for equivalent straight pipe
Wi = Calculated insulation cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
Wc = Calculated cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
CAESAR II does not calculate stress on rigid elements. Forces and moments are not normally
printed for rigid elements however, you can select the appropriate check box found in
Environment>Special Execution Parameters from the Piping Input spreadsheet to print these
loads.
Modeling using Rigids

Zero-weight rigid elements are useful where modeling non-pipe components where thermal
growth or load transfer is important.
Use zero-weight rigids to model piping hardware such as expansion joint tie rods, base plates, and
trunnions.
You can also use these dummy rigids to provide connectivity between the centerline of an element
and the outside edge of the element. The most common example of this is when you need to add
a dummy rigid that runs from the node at the centerline of the vessel to the outside wall where you
want to connect the nozzle.
You can also model equipment using a series of rigid elements, joining nozzles to a body and
perhaps to a support point. This approach will properly distribute thermal strain through the
component based on this geometry and the entered element temperatures. For more information
on the use of these construction rigids, see the CAESAR II Applications Guide in various sections
as appropriate to a particular modeling technique.

In-Line Flange Evaluation

Allows you to choose the method to use for evaluating flanges under load:
 The Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
 The ASME NC-365.8 Calculation for B16.5 Flanged Joints
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method

Converts piping axial forces and bending moments into an equivalent pressure on the flange.
After the conversion is complete, the software adds this equivalent pressure to the pressure
defined in the load case. It then compares this sum to the allowable pressure rating for the flange
at the appropriate temperature. (The pressure-temperature table is defined in the model input and
the temperature is specified on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.)
The formula for the total equivalent pressure displays below:
3 2
Peq = 16M/(π)G + 4F/ (π)G + PD
Where:
Peq = total equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = calculated bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = absolute value of the calculated axial force on flange
PD = pressure specified in the load case (for example, P1 for W+T1+P1)
The allowable pressure rating will be multiplied by the occasional load factor specified on
the Load Cases tab.
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged

Joints with High Strength Bolting
Restricted to joints using flanges, bolting, and gaskets as specified in ANSI B16.5 that use bolting
materials having an S value at 100°F (38°C) greater than or equal to 20,000 psi (138 MPa).
CAESAR II uses the analysis method for Service Level A as stated in NC-3658.3(a)(2):
Mfs ≤ 3125(Sy/36,000)CAb
or
Mfd ≤ 6250(Sy/36,000)CAb
Where:
Mfs = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, and due to
weight, thermal expansion, sustained anchor movements, relief valve steady state thrust, and
other sustained mechanical loads. CAESAR II considers any moments developed during a
non-Occasional Load Case to be Mfs.
Mfd = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, as defined for
Mfs and but also including any dynamic loadings. CAESAR II considers any moments

developed during an Occasional Load Case to be Mfd, effectively the doubling flange capacity
for Occasional loadings.
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature. CAESAR II allows evaluation to
be done using as many as 10 different temperatures; Sy/36,000; where Sy, is given in psi,
cannot be greater than 36,000 psi
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross-sectional area of bolts
PD = Design pressure
CAESAR II calculates an Equivalent Stress S in the flange and compares it to Sy (or 2*Sy for
occasional load cases), in the following manner:
S = 36,000* Mfs / (CAb * 3125) ≤ Min(Sy, 36000) (non-Occ)
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) ≤ 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) (Occ)
For systems of units that do not express stress in psi, the software converts the 36,000 values in
the above equations to the appropriate set of units.
You can do flange evaluations in Static Analysis only.

Cold Spring
Cold spring is a method where you introduce pipe strain in the installed state to modify the
resulting strain in the operating state. Adding this preload is commonly used to adjust (reduce)
equipment load in the operating state. In CAESAR II, you can indicate a cold spring into your static
load cases by using the CS variable in the load case definition.
A cut short (also called a cold pull) describes an intentional gap in the pipe assembly requiring an
initial tensile load to close the final joint. A cut long (also called a cold push) describes an
intentional overlap in the pipe assembly requiring an initial compressive load to close the final
joint. This initial gap or overlap is modeled as a cut short material or a cut long material,
respectively. CAESAR II reduces the cut short to zero length and doubles the cut long in any load
case that includes the CS load in the load case definition.
This initial cold pull is difficult to implement with any accuracy—certainly in systems operating in
the creep range where long term effect is difficult to control or even predict. Due to the difficulty of
properly installing a cold spring system, most piping codes recommend that, when evaluating
equipment loads, you model only two-thirds of the design cold spring for equipment load
calculations. B31.3 also places an upper bound of four-thirds of the design cold spring for
equipment load evaluation.
In simple, linear systems without intermediate restraints, you can calculate the cold spring
element length (ignoring equipment growth) by using the following equation:
Ci = xLi α dT
Where:
Ci = length of cold spring in direction i; where i is X, Y, or Z (inches)
Li = total length of pipe subject to expansion in direction i (inches)
α = mean thermal expansion coefficient of material between ambient and operating
temperature (in/in/°F)
dT = change in temperature (°F)
x = percent cold spring
When x = 0%, there is no cold spring and there will be no reduction in the thermal strain found in
the operating load. When x = 100%, the operating load will have no thermal strain as all the
expected pipe strain will be realized in the installed state of the piping system. If x = 50%, the pipe
strain will be shared equally by both the installed load and operating load. This percent cold spring
(x) is not the same term as the two-thirds check mentioned above.
No credit can be taken for cold spring in the stress calculations, because the expansion
stress provisions of the piping codes require the evaluation of the stress range, which is
unaffected by cold spring, except perhaps in the presence of non-linear boundary conditions, as
discussed below. The cold spring adjusts installed and operating loads and the stress mean, but
not the stress range used in most expansion stress calculations.
Cold Spring Considerations

You must consider several factors when using cold spring:
 Verify that the cold reactions on equipment nozzles due to cold spring do not exceed nozzle
allowables.

 Verify that the expansion stress range does not include the direct effect of the cold spring (in
other words, do not calculate the expansion stress range as the difference between the
operating state with cold spring and the installed state without cold spring).
 Verify that the cold spring value/tolerance is much greater than fabrication tolerances. This is
related to the two-third and four-third checks mentioned previously.
 For elevated temperature cases, where cold spring is used to reduce operating equipment
load, using the hot modulus of analysis may also have a significant effect on the load
magnitude.
Remember, however, that the software does not consider the hot modulus in the
stress calculations for expansion stress ranges. These additional load cases, which you can
use to evaluate equipment load (not system stress), can include the modulus of elasticity for
the temperature under consideration.
Modeling design cold springs

Specify the cold gaps or overlaps as elements defined as cut short or cut long materials (CAESAR
II materials 18 and 19, respectively). There are two approaches for this:
1. Model the whole length of the design cold spring.
a. Reset the material property on the element following the cold spring element.
b. Model the whole length of the design cold spring length for the cold spring element.
c. Analyze the cold spring system by running the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
Load Case4 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
d. To check equipment operating loads considering actual cold spring variation (both
two-thirds and four-thirds checks here), use the following load cases. You can define
additional load cases for installed load variations.
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case4 (EXP) W+T1+P1+0.66 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 5 (OPE) W+T1+P1+1.33 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 6 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.

2. Model 2/3 of the design cold spring.

As a change from the previous design, model two-thirds of the design cold spring length, and use
the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring
W+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring, but not the
Load Case 2 (OPE)
temperature.
Load Case4 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 5 (OPE) W+T1+P1+2 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 6 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
Other Applications for Cold Spring

While often used to reduce the magnitude of loads on equipment and restraints (see above), you
can also use cold spring to accelerate the thermal shakedown of the system in fewer operating
cycles.
Expansion Joints
Checking the expansion joint box on the element enables definition of an expansion joint for that
element. Expansion joints can be modeled as a single element across the flexible length of the
joint or as a zero-length element at the midpoint of the expansion joint. Expansion joints elements
have a zero length if the Delta fields on the Pipe Element spreadsheet are left blank or zero.
When an expansion joint has a defined length, CAESAR II builds the expansion joint as a beam
element using the element length with the entered expansion joint stiffnesses.

Four stiffness values define the expansion joint:

 Axial
 Transverse
 Torsion
 Bending
Examples of the Stiffnesses
Define Finite Length Joints

For expansion joints where flexible length is defined, the bending stiffness is defined by the
entered, flexible, length and the transverse stiffness of the joint. Some expansion joint catalogs list
what would be called bending flexibility rather than the required bending stiffness used in
CAESAR II. This bending flexibility is adequate for an expansion joint modeled by two rigid
elements that are pinned at the joint midpoint (a zero-length expansion joint) but it is the wrong
value for a flexible beam element. To address this ambiguity, CAESAR II calculates and applies a
bending stiffness based on the entered expansion joint length and transverse stiffness. We
suggest that you only enter the bending term from manufacturers' catalogs when using the
zero-length expansion joint model or for rubber joint which do not follow beam bending definitions.
Typically, expansion joint manufacturers do not supply torsional stiffness data. If the manufacturer
does not supply the data, enter a large torsional stiffness value, and verify that the resulting load
on the bellows is not excessive. When the piping system is tight, and the diameter large, the
magnitude of the large torsional stiffness can significantly affect the magnitude of the torsion
carried by the joints. For example, a stiffness of 100,000 in.lb./deg. and 1E12 in.lb./deg. can
produce considerably different torsional load results. Conservatively speaking, the tendency is to
use the larger stiffness except that the torsional stiffness value is probably closer to the 100,000
in.lb./deg. In instances where a large torsional stiffness value is important, you can get a stiffness
estimate from the manufacturer, or use the equation below to derive an estimate. Use this
equation to conservatively estimate torsional loads on the bellows and surrounding equipment.
Where

π = 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness
E = Elastic Modulus
ν = Poisson’s Ratio
L = Flexible bellows length
When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses are
related. You must be sure that you enter a value in all of the Stiffness fields.
Calculate the Pressure Thrust

CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust on the expansion joint if you type a value for the bellows
Effective ID on the Expansion Joint auxiliary dialog box. If there is no Effective ID specified,
then there is no pressure thrust calculated.
The mathematical model for pressure thrust indicates to apply a force equal to the pressure
multiplied by the effective area of the bellows at the two nodes that define the expansion joint. The
force can open the bellows if the pressure is positive, and close the bellows if the pressure is
negative.
This model does not correctly locate pressure load components in the vicinity of the
expansion joint. In most cases, the misapplied load does not affect the solution.
There are two components of the pressure thrust to apply in practice rather than the one
component applied in the model. The first component is equal to the pressure times the inside
area of the pipe and acts at the first change in direction of the pipe on either side of the expansion
joint. This load will tend to put the pipe wall between the change in direction and the expansion
joint in tension. The second component is equal to the pressure times the difference between the
bellows effective area and inside pipe area. This load acts at the end of the expansion joint and
tends to open the bellows up putting the pipe between the expansion joint and the change in
direction in compression.
In the mathematical model, the full component of the pressure thrust force is placed on the ends of
the bellows instead of having a portion shifted out on either side of the expansion joint.
Effective ID
The pressure area used to set the pressure thrust force on an expansion joint is provided by the
expansion joint manufacturer either as an effective area or effective inside diameter (ID). If the
pressure thrust load is to be included in the analysis, the Effective ID must be provided in the
expansion joint model definition. Any load case that includes a pressure term (for example,
…+P1…) will include a thrust force on either end of the expansion joint based on this effective ID.

Hanger Sizing Algorithm

At locations that you define, CAESAR II will select a rigid, variable or constant effort support using
the automated procedure defined here. Attention here is focused on selecting a variable (spring)
support from a manufacturer’s catalog. Be sure to review and verify all supports sized by CAESAR
II.
Spring Design Requirements

A rigid rod is selected if the vertical thermal growth at the location is less than the value entered as
“Rigid Support Displacement Criteria” and a constant support is selected if the vertical thermal
growth at the location is greater than the value entered as “Max. Allowed Travel Limit”. Otherwise,
CAESAR II selects the smallest single spring that satisfies all design requirements provided in the
hanger design data.
The spring design requirements are:
1. Both the operating (typically hot) and the installed (typically cold) loads must be within the
allowed working range of the spring.
2. The absolute value of the change in the load (the product of the travel and the selected spring
rate) divided by the design load must be less than the specified "Allowable Load Variation"
value. The default variation is 25%.
MSS SP-69 defines load variation as the ratio of the change in load and the
operating load. CAESAR II, in using the design load, will use the theoretical cold load
(discussed below), instead of the operating load, if the user selects "Cold Load" design.
3. If you specify "Available Space", then this space must be greater than the basic height of the
spring selected. Positive values are compared with hanger height and negative values are
compared with spring can height.
If the software cannot find a single spring that satisfies the design requirements, it
searches for two identical springs that will each carry half the load. If the software cannot find any
springs that satisfies the design requirements, it recommends a constant effort support for the
location.
Restrained Weight Case

If you need to design a hanger, the first analysis case that you must run is the restrained weight
case. This case usually includes weight, pressure, and concentrated loads. Hanger hot loads are
calculated in the restrained weight case.
Run the restrained weight case

1. Place rigid Y-restraints at each hanger location.
2. Determine any anchors you want to designate as freed.
3. Verify the freed anchors are properly released.
Loads on the Y-restraints at hangers, calculated from the restrained weight case, are
designated as the hanger hot design loads.

Pre-Selection Load Case 2 – Setting Hanger Deflection

through the Operating Case
After the restrained weight case, you must run an operating analysis. The operating case must
always be the second load case in the set of defined analysis cases. You can define the operating
load cases for hanger design any way you see fit. CAESAR II recommends the load cases it
thinks you should run whenever it detects the first attempt to analyze a particular system. You can
accept or reject the recommendations. If you define your own hanger design load cases, you must
understand exactly what is done in the "restrained weight" and operating passes of the hanger
design algorithm.
Run an operating case

1. Remove the Y-restraints.
2. Insert the hot loads calculated from the hanger locations in the restrained weight analysis.
3. Change any freed anchors from the restrained weight analysis to fixed.
The vertical displacement of the operating case at each hanger location defines the travel of that
particular hanger. If there are single directional restraints or gaps in the system and a changed
status in the operating case, then the hanger loads are redistributed.
When CAESAR II detects a nonlinear status change, it reruns the restrained weight
case with the restraints left as they were at the end of the operating case. To determine the
updated travel, you must calculate the new restraint loads and run another operating case.
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) – Setting the Actual

Installed (Cold) Load
If you need to calculate the actual hanger installed loads, the third analysis level combination case
must define the weight configuration that exists in the field when a spring is installed. Typically,
this case includes weight without fluid contents and other live loads. The theoretical cold, or
installed load, is the load on the spring when the "unbalanced" installed load is applied and the
pipe is not allowed to displace vertically (the load will be "balanced" when the pipe is in the
operating or design position). The actual installed load may differ from the theoretical installed
load by (K)(d), where (K) is the spring stiffness and (d) is the displacement of the pipe in the
installed condition.
Calculate the actual installed load

1. Install the hangers.
2. Apply the theoretical cold load and all other loads (for example, empty weight) that will be
present when the springs are set.
3. Calculate the position of all springs (d).
4. Set the actual installed spring load based on this installed position (installed load = Theoretical
Cold Load - (K)(d)).

Create Spring Load Cases

Up to three load cases are needed for spring sizing:
 "Restrained" Weight (required)
 Operating (required)
 Installed Weight (optional)
After the Hanger Algorithm runs the hanger load cases, the software selects the hangers. The
software inserts the newly-selected springs into the piping system and includes them and their
preload (the Theoretical Cold Load) in the analysis of all remaining load cases.
Hanger installed loads are concentrated forces and are only included in subsequent load cases
that contain the hanger preload force set (+H).
You can specify any number of user-defined load cases after setting up the required spring load
cases.
Spring hanger design does not affect the ability of CAESAR II to check code compliance. In load
cases recommended by CAESAR II, the normal code compliance cases always follow the set of
load cases required for hanger design.
Multiple operating case spring hanger design implies that hanger loads and travels from more
than one operating case are included in the spring hanger selection algorithm.
Each spring in a multiple operating case hanger design has a Multiple Load Case Design option.
This design option tells CAESAR II how multiple loads and travels for a single hanger are
combined to get a single design load and travel. The set-up of the analysis cases is slightly
different for multiple operating case hanger design in that now there is more than one operating
case. You can use the Hanger Design Control dialog to specify the actual number of operating
cases.
The load cases that you analyze for multiple load case hanger design operating cases are:
 Restrained Weight (this does not change)
 Operating case #1
 Operating case #9
 Installed Weight (if requested)
Constant Effort Support

Enables you to specify the support load for a constant effort hanger and define the hanger
location. This value is also included in all hanger design runs and all analysis cases following the
hanger cases that include the hanger preload force set in their formulation.
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design

Algorithm
The operating cases for hanger travel are normally analyzed with no stiffness included at the
hanger locations. This is why these cases are traditionally referred to as "free thermal" cases.

However, when the piping system is very flexible, or the selected springs are very stiff, the actual
resulting spring loads in the installed condition can vary significantly from the theoretically
calculated results. With such a load change, perhaps this shorter, more accurate spring deflection
may allow a smaller spring selection. In that case, CAESAR II enables you to include, using an
iterative process, the stiffness of the selected springs in the operating cases for hanger travel.
You can activate this trait for all new models through the Configure\Setup by setting the option to
Include Travel to As Designed. You can also activate this option for individual models on the
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 559) tab by changing
the Hanger Stiffness option to As Designed.
Selecting this option could lead to convergence problems. If you use this option, be sure to check
the hanger load in the cold case in the field so that it matches the reported hanger Cold Load.
You must always include the hanger preload force set H (the Theoretical Cold Load) in
subsequent load cases.
Applying thermal and displacement effects to the live loaded system should make an
installed hanger move to the hot, or balanced, load in this operating case.
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing

At times, CAESAR II indicates that certain hanger locations carry no load and selects “zero load”
constant effort supports at these locations. Typically, zero load constant effort supports indicate
poor hanger locations. It is important to not simply ignore these selections as and other hangers
selected in the vicinity of these “zero load” hangers have improper operating loads assigned.
Relocate or remove these “zero load” selections.
Unless you specifically designate your hanger design load cases with a KEEP status, they display
in the output reports as NOT ACTIVE.
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities

This analytical option was added to CAESAR II for the following reasons:
 Automatic local flexibilities at intersections help you bound the true solution. Because the
computer time to do an analysis is less expensive, more frequently you can run several
solutions of the same model using slightly different input techniques to determine the effect of
the modeling difference on the results. This gives you a degree of confidence in the numbers
you get. For example, structural steel supporting structures can be modeled to see the effect
of their stiffnesses, nozzle flexibilities can be added at vessel connections to see how these
features redistribute load throughout the model, friction is added to watch its effect on
displacements and equipment loads, and with CAESAR II you can include Class 1
intersection flexibilities. The characteristic that makes this option convenient to use is that you
can enable or disable the Class 1 flexibilities using a single option in the setup file. No other
modification to the input required.
 In WRC 329, there are a number of suggestions made to improve the stress calculations at
intersections. These suggestions are fairly substantial and are given in order of importance.
The most important item, as felt by E. Rodabaugh, in improving the stress calculations at
intersections is given, in part, as follows:
"In piping system analyses, it may be assumed that the flexibility is represented by a rigid joint
at the branch-to-run centerlines juncture. However, you should be aware that this assumption

can be inaccurate and should consider the use of a more appropriate flexibility
representation."
 Use of the Class 1 Branch Flexibility feature may be summarized as follows: Include the
Class 1 Branch Flex option in the setup file.
 Where reduced branch geometry requirements are satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a rigid
offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface, and then adds the local flexibility of
the header pipe, between the end of the offset, at the header, and the start of the branch.
Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its connection with the header.
 Where reduced branch geometry requirements are not satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a rigid
offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface. The branch piping starts at the end
of this rigid offset. There is NO local flexibility due to the header added. (It is deemed to be
insignificant.) Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its connection with the
header.
The reduced branch geometry requirements that CAESAR II checks are
d/D ≤ 0.5 and D/T ≤ 100.0
Where:
d = Diameter of Branch
D = Diameter of Header
T = Wall thickness of Header
If you use the Class 1 branch flexibilities, intersection models in the analysis become stiffer when
the reduced geometry requirements do not apply, and become more flexible when the reduced
geometry requirements do apply. Stiffer intersections typically carry more loads and thus have
higher stresses lowering the stress in other parts of the system that have been unloaded. More
flexible intersections typically carry less load and thus have lower stresses. This causes higher
stresses in other parts of the system that have "picked up" the extra load.
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class 1),
1992 Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, use the following equations for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = RIGID
LONGITUDINAL = RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = (kx)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL = (kz)d/EI
Where:
RIGID = 1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
d = Branch Diameter
E = Young’s Modulus

I = Cross Section Moment of Inertia

D = Header Diameter
T = Header Thickness
Tb = Branch Fitting Thickness
kx = 0.1(D/T)1.5[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
kz = 0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
For more information, see WRC 329 Section 4.9 Flexibility Factors. A brief quote from this section
follows:
"The significance of "k" depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if "k" is
small compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their
k-factors, then the inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have only minor effects on the
calculated moments. Conversely, if "k" is large compared to the piping system length, then the
inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to greatly
reduce the magnitude of the calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To illustrate
the potential significance of "k’s" for branch connections, we use the equation [above] to calculate
"k" for a branch connection with D=30 in., d=12.75 in., and T=t=0.375 in.:
1.5 0.5
k = 0.1(80) (0.425) * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !".
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating
the stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing "mistakenly" that the stress at the
intersection is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.
Branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, that is has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will be
no "offset" equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A "partial
intersection" is one where either the header pipe is not modeled, is modeled with a single element,
or is part of a geometric intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the case where
there is no header pipe going to the intersection, there will be no modification to the model for the
class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a single header pipe is recognized, the local flexibility
directions are defined by the branch alone and in accordance with the CAESAR II defaults for
circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and header. You must build full
intersection models at all times, not only when employing the class 1 branch flexibility. In most
cases, building full intersection models eliminates problems caused by the assumptions
necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes are
colinear, the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential
directions that are tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated by
CAESAR II. There is no extra input required by you to have CAESAR II build these intersections.
If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from the
header centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch is added to the already entered
user offset.

Automatic offsets are generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the
header surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight
length.
When an element with a bend designation is part of an intersection model, the offset and flexibility
calculations are not performed.
Modeling Friction Effects

There are two methods to solving friction problems:
 Insert a force at the node which must be overcome for motion to occur.
 Insert a stiffness which applies an increasing force up to the value of Mu * Normal Force.
CAESAR II uses the stiffness method.
If there is motion at the node under evaluation then the friction force is equal to Mu * Normal force.
However, because there is a non-rigid stiffness placed at that location to resist the initial motion;
the node could experience some displacement. The force at the node is the product of the
displacement and the stiffness. If the resultant force is less than the maximum friction force (Mu *
Normal Force) the node is assumed to be not sliding. As a result, you might see displacements at
nodes that have not achieved the "sliding" friction force in the output report.
The maximum value of the force at the node is the friction force (Mu * Normal force). After the
system reaches this value, the reaction at the node stops increasing. This constant force value is
then applied to the global load vector during the next iteration to determine the nodal
displacements. The example below explains what happens in a "friction" problem.
1. The default friction stiffness is 1,000,000 lb./in. To solve convergence problems, consider
decreasing this value.
2. Until the calculated load at the node equals (Mu * Normal force), the restraint load is the
product of the displacement multiplied by the friction stiffness.
3. Should the calculated load exceed the maximum value of the friction force, the friction force
stops increasing because a constant effort force opposite the sliding direction is inserted in
the model in place of the friction stiffness.
If you increase the friction stiffness in the setup file, the displacements at the node may decrease
slightly. Usually, this causes a re-distribution of the loads throughout the system that could have
an adverse effect on the solution convergence.
If problems arise during the solution of a job with friction at supports, reducing the friction stiffness
typically improves convergence. You must do several runs with varying values of the friction
stiffness to ensure the behavior of the system is consistent.

For more information on this subject, see "Inclusion of a Support Friction into a Computerized
Solution of a Self-Compensating Pipeline" by J. Sobieszczanski, published in the Transactions of
the ASME, Journal of Engineering for Industry, August 1972. A summary of the major points of this
paper is below.
Summary of J. Sobieszczanski’s ASME Paper

 For dry friction, the friction force magnitude is a step function of displacement. This
discontinuity means the problem as intrinsically nonlinear and eliminates the possibility of
using the superposition principle.
 The friction loading on the pipe can be represented by an ordinary differential equation of the
fourth order with a variable coefficient that is a nonlinear function of both dependent and
independent variables. No solution in closed form is known for an equation of this type.
The solution has to be sought by means of numerical integration to be carried out specifically
for a particular pipeline configuration.
 Dry friction can be idealized by a fictitious elastic foundation, discretized to a set of elastic
spring supports.
 A well-known property of an elastic system with dry friction constraints is that it may attain
several static equilibrium positions within limits determined by the friction forces.
 The whole problem then has clearly not a deterministic, but a stochastic character.
Nonlinear Code Compliance

You can adhere to nonlinear piping code compliance requirements by doing the following:
1. Performing an operating and sustained analysis of the system and including with each case
the effect of nonlinear restraints.
2. Subtracting the sustained case displacements from the operating case displacements to find
the displacement range.
3. Calculating the expansion stresses from the displacement range solved for in step 2.
CAESAR II uses this method for calculating the expansion stress range. In addition, CAESAR II
scans your input and recommends load cases and combinations for performing the operating,
sustained, and expansion stress calculations. This recommendation is useful when performing
spring hanger analysis of a multiple operating case system.
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints

The proper computation of sustained stresses has been an issue since the late 1970s, when pipe
stress analysis software first attempted to address the problem of non-linear restraints. The
existing piping codes offered little guidance on the subject, because their criteria were developed
during the era when all analyses were simplified to behave in a strictly linear fashion.
Problems arose because the codes require that a piping system be analyzed separately for
sustained loadings. You must determine which loadings are causing which stresses. Sustained
loads are force loadings that are assumed not to change, while expansion loadings are
displacement loadings that vary with the system operating conditions. Determination of the
sustained loads is the simple part—most everybody agrees that those forces consist of weight,

pressure, and spring pre-loads. These forces remain relatively constant as the piping system goes
through its thermal growth.
However, confusion occurs when the status of nonlinear restraints changes (pipe lift-off of
supports, gaps close, and so forth) as the pipe goes from installed to operating state. In this case,
you must determine which boundary conditions to use when evaluating the applied forces. In
other words, what portion of the stress in the operating case is caused by weight loads, and what
portion is caused by expansion effects?
There is no corresponding confusion on the question of calculating expansion stresses,
because the codes are explicit in their instructions that the expansion stress range is the
difference between the operating and cold stress positions (both of which are known).
The obvious answer to this question by the developers of some pipe stress software was that the
sustained stress calculation should be done using the operating, or hot boundary condition. This
compounded the problem in that the laws of superposition no longer held. In other words, the
results of sustained (W+P) and thermal (T) cases, when added together, did not equal the results
of the operating (W+P+T) case. One industry pioneer, DYNAFLEX, attempted to resolve this by
introducing the concept of the "thermal component of weight," which was an oxymoron, in our
opinion.
Other software, notably those applications which came from the mainframe/linear analysis world,
had to approximate the behavior of these non-linear restraints. Their approach to the problem is to
run an operating case, obtain the restraint status, and modify the model according to these results.
All subsequent load cases analyzed use this restraint configuration. The fact that the laws of static
superposition did not hold was hopefully not noticed by the user. CAESAR II, on the other hand,
represents technology developed expressly for operation on the personal computer, and therefore
incorporates directly the effects of non-linear restraints. This is done by considering each load
case independently. The restraint configuration is determined for each load case by the program
as it runs, based upon the actual loads that are considered present.
Some users have asserted that there are actually two sustained load cases. In fact, there has
been a B31.3 code interpretation that indicates that the sustained stress may also be checked with
the operating restraint configuration. Calculating the sustained stresses using the operating
restraint status raises several other issues; what modulus of elasticity should be used, and which
sustained stresses should be used for occasional cases.
It is our assertion that there is only one sustained case (otherwise, it is not "sustained"). There can
be, however, multiple sustained stress distributions. The two most obvious are those associated
with the cold (installed) and hot (operating) configurations. However, there are also numerous
in-betweens, as the piping system load steps from cold to hot. Whether the "true" sustained load
case occurs during the installed or operating case is a matter of the frame of reference. If an
engineer first sees a system in its cold condition, and watches it expand to its operating condition,
it appears that the first case (because weight and pressure — primary loads — are present) is the
sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal effects (due to heat up) — secondary
loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same system in the operating case
and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the first case he saw (the operating
case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot to cold are the thermal expansion
effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both cases). Consider the further implications of
cryogenic systems where changes from installed to operating are the same as those experienced
by hot systems when going from operating to installed. After elastic shakedown has occurred, the
question becomes clouded even further due to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in
the pipe during both the cold and hot conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or
some other one in-between) could justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as
long as the program is consistent.

We selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained case,
because thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the code).
This best represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially applied. If the
pipe lifts off of a support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a thermal effect
which is consistent with the piping codes’ view of thermal effects as the variation of stress
distribution as the piping system goes from cold to hot, and is explicitly corroborated by one code,
an earlier edition of the French petrochemical code, which states that weight stress distributions
due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion stresses). For example, we
feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero should be treated no differently
than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to 4,000 lbs (or another rigid support
load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe became "overstressed", it would yield,
and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This process is identical to the way that all other
expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may not
always agree with us — that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor the
analysis to your individual specifications. If you want, you can analyze a hot sustained case by
adding two load cases to those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This is done by assuming
that the pipe expands first, and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course an idealized
concept, but the stresses can only be segregated by segregating the applied loads, so the
sustained loads can only be applied either before, or after, the expansion loads). Following are the
default load cases, as well as those required for a "hot sustained."
Default New
L1: W+P1+T1(OPE) L1: W+P1+T1(OPE)
L2: W+P1(SUS) L2: W+P1(SUS)
L3: L1-L2(EXP) L3: T1(EXP)
L4: L1-L2(EXP)
L5: L1-L3(SUS)
In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth case
represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with non-linear
effects taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the weightless,
non-pressurized pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and
pressure to that expanded case, or the "hot sustained" case. Note that when the piping system is
analyzed as above, the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not
arbitrarily removed from the model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if: (1) the sustained,
primary loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any supports
that lift off (or otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An analysis
such as this is achievable by setting the Keep/Discard status of the Restrained Weight case (the
first hanger design load case) to Keep, thus permitting the results of that case to be viewable as
for any other load case. The Restrained Weight case automatically removes restraints that
become non-active during the designated operating case, and apply the Hot Load at each of the
hanger locations.

Notes on Occasional Load Cases

Several piping codes require that you add the stresses from occasional loads (such as wind or
earthquake) to the sustained stresses (due to weight, pressure, and other constant loads) before
comparing them to their allowables. You can recreate this combination in CAESAR II using the
following load cases:
CASE #
1 W+P+H (SUS): Sustained stresses
2 WIND (OCC): Wind load set
3 U1 (OCC): Uniform g load set for earthquake
4 L1+L2 (OCC): Code stresses for wind
5 L1+L3 (OCC): Code stresses for earthquake*
* Scalar Summation Method required

If you must model nonlinear effects in the system, the load case combinations are not so straight
forward. Friction, one-direction restraints, and double-acting restraints with gaps are the nonlinear
items which complicate modeling. For this example, we will use wind loading on a long vertical run
of pipe with a guide. Assume there is a 1-inch gap between the pipe and guide. Under normal
operation, the pipe moves ¾-inch towards the stop leaving a gap of 1-¾-inch on either side of the
pipe and a ¼-inch gap on the other side. If you analyze the wind loads alone, the pipe is allowed to
move 1-inch from its center point in the guide to the guide stop. Because occasional loads are
usually analyzed with the system in operation, the pipe may be limited to a ¼-inch motion as the
gap is closed in one direction, and 1-¾-inch if the gap is closed in the opposite direction. With
nonlinear effects modeled in the system, the occasional deflections (and stresses) are influenced
by the operating position of the piping.
The following list of CAESAR II load cases takes this point into consideration. The load cases
displayed below are only for wind acting in one direction, that is, +X. Depending on the system, the
most critical loads could occur in any direction +/-X, +/-Z, or skewed in XZ. The intention of the
load case construction is to find the effect of the occasional load on the piping system in the
operating condition. The stress due to the moment change from the operating to the operating
plus wind case is added to the stress from the sustained case.
CASE #
1 W+T1+P1 (OPE): Operation analysis
2 W+P1 (SUS): Sustained stresses
3 W+T1+P1+WIN (OPE): Operating analysis with wind

D1
4 L1-L2 (EXP): Expansion stresses (Algebraic summation)

CASE #
5 L3-L1 (OCC): Net deflection of wind (Algebraic summation)
6 L2+L5 (OCC): Code stresses for wind (Scalar summation)
Case 5 computes the isolated wind effect on the piping system in the operating condition. Case 6
adds the stresses from Case 5 to the sustained stresses from Case 2.
Static Seismic Inertial Loads

Static earthquake loads are applied in a manner very similar to static wind loads. The static
loading magnitude is considered to be in direct proportion to the weight of the element. Express
earthquake load magnitudes in terms of the gravitational acceleration constant g. If you model an
earthquake with a 0.5-g load in the X direction, then half of the systems weight is turned into a
uniform load and applied in the X direction.
You create earthquake static load cases the same way you create wind occasional load cases.
Use the same load case, nonlinearity, and directional sensitivity logic. In some cases, the client
specifies the magnitude of the earthquake loading in g's and the direction(s). In other cases,
analysis is left to the discretion of the analyst. It is not unusual to see only X-Y or Z-Y components
of an earthquake. It is also not uncommon to see X, Y, and Z simultaneous components.
Dynamic (response spectrum) evaluation of earthquake loads are discussed later in this section,
in the dynamic analysis and output sections, and in the screen reference section.
The ASCE #7 method for determining earthquake coefficients is described below. After you
calculate the earthquake coefficients, enter the g-factors as uniform loads on the piping
spreadsheet.
Calculate the horizontal seismic design force using equation 13.3-1 from ASCE 7 (10):
Fp = [(0.4 ap SDS W p) / (Rp / Ip)] (1 + 2 z / h)
But, because Wp is "component operating weight", Fp/W p = calculated (horizontal)
acceleration, aH, so;
aH = [(0.4 ap SDS) / ( Rp / Ip )] (1 + 2 z / h),
additionally;
aH ≤ 1.6 SDS Ip
and:
aH ≥ 0.3 SDS Ip
Where:
ap = Component amplification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 2.5 for "Piping"
SDS = Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4
Rp = Component response modification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 12.0 for "Piping in accordance with ASME B31... with joints made by welding or
brazing"; values range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.

Ip = Component importance factor, from Section 13.1.3

= 1.5 for life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or
components that are required for continuous operation; 1.0 for all others
z = Height in structure at point of attachment
h = Average roof height of structure
Wind Loads
You can define your own wind pressure profile (Wind Pressure vs Elevation) or wind speed
(Wind Velocity vs Elevation) profile, or you can access wind load data from the following wind
codes:
 ASCE 7  IBC
 AS/NZS 1170  IS 875
 Brazil NBR 6123  Mexico
 BS 6399-2  NBC
 China GB 50009  UBC
 EN 1991-1-4
Generate Wind Loads

By defining a wind shape factor in the model input, CAESAR II allows you to define up to four wind
vectors in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Multiply the pipe exposed area by the
equivalent wind pressure and the pipe shape factor.
CAESAR II includes insulation thickness in the cladding. You must also consider the
angle to the wind with your calculations.
Determine the Equivalent Wind Pressure

There are three ways to determine the equivalent wind pressure:
 Selecting a regional wind specification (by building code)
 Use the Wind Pressure vs Elevation user-defined method
 Use the Wind Velocity vs Elevation user-defined method
Calculate the Total Wind Force on the Element

Calculate the total wind force on the element by using the following equation:
F = PeqSA

Where:
F = the total wind force on the element

Apply the wind force in the three global
directions as a function of the element direction
cosines.
Peq = the equivalent wind pressure (dynamic

pressure)
Calculate Peq for each end of the element and
then take the average.
The average applies uniformly over the whole
length of the element.
S = the pipe element wind shape factor
A = the pipe element exposed area as shown

in the figure to the right.
If you enter velocity versus elevation table data, then the program converts the velocity to a
dynamic pressure using the following equation:
P = 1/2 ρV2
Where V is the wind velocity and ρ is the air density.
Enter the Wind Shape Factor on the piping input. For cylindrical elements, a value between 0.5
and 0.7 is used. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is distributive. This
means that the shape factor entered in piping input is carried forward and applies for all following
elements until zeroed or changed.
There is no need to enter the same shape factor on each piping input segment. Zero or
disable the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of a building or similarly protective
structure.
Enter wind load parameters on the tab Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
Dialog Box) (on page 572) of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. You can enter up to four
different wind loads per analysis. These typically might be setup to model wind loads in the +X, -X,
+Z, and -Z directions.
Elevation
It is important to set the proper elevation of the piping system (height above ground) when running
a wind analysis. When a wind shape factor is specified in the input, CAESAR II prompts you for the
elevation (and horizontal coordinates) of this first node. By default, CAESAR II assigns the "From"
node of the first element an elevation of 0.0. You can also use the procedure below to set the
reference wind elevation of the piping system.
Set the true elevation

1. Click EDIT > GLOBAL.
A dialog appears.

2. Enter the global coordinates of the first node in the system.

3. Repeat step 2 for each (if any) disconnected section until you are finished.
You can specify and save the coordinates for up to 100 node points from the model.
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading

Ocean waves are generated by wind and propagate out of the generating area. Ocean wave
generation is dependent on the wind speed, the duration of the wind, the water depth, and the
distance over which the wind blows the fetch length. There are several two-dimensional wave
theories, but the three most widely used are the Airy (linear) wave theory, Stokes 5th Order wave
theory, and Dean's Stream Function wave theory. The latter two theories are non-linear wave
theories and provide a better description of the near surface effects of the wave.
Of course, wave motion is a three-dimensional action but it can be adequately
represented by two dimensions. One dimension is the direction the wave travels, and the other
dimension is vertical through the water column. Two dimensional waves are not found in the
marine environment, but are somewhat easy to define and determine properties for. In actuality,
waves undergo spreading, in the third dimension. To understand this concept, think about a stone
dropped in a pond. As the wave spreads, the diameter of the circle increases. In addition to wave
spreading, a real sea state includes waves of various periods, heights, and lengths. To address
these actual conditions, you must use a sea spectrum that includes a spreading function.
Airy (linear) wave theory assumes the free surface is symmetric about the mean water level.
Additionally, water particle motion is in a closed circular orbit, the diameter of which decays with
depth. You should take the term circular loosely because, the orbit varies from circular to elliptical
based on whether the wave is in shallow or deep water.
Additionally, for shallow water waves, the wave height to depth ratio (H/D) is limited to 0.78 to
avoid breaking.
None of the wave theories address breaking waves.
The figure below shows a typical wave and associated hydrodynamic parameters.
 SWL
The still water level.
 L
The wave length or horizontal distance between successive crests or troughs.
 H
The wave height or vertical distance between the crest and trough.
 D

The water depth or vertical distance from the bottom to the still water level.
 η
The surface elevation measured from the still water level.
Ocean Wave Particulars

The Airy Wave Theory Implementation (on page 956) theory provides a good first approximation
to the water particle behavior. The nonlinear theories provide a better description of particle
tH
motion, over a wider range depths and wave heights. Stokes 5 Wave theory is based on a power
series. This wave theory does not apply the symmetric free surface restriction. Additionally, the
particle paths are no longer closed orbits, which mean there is a gradual drift of the fluid particles,
that is, a mass transport.
tH
Stokes 5 Order Wave theory however, does not adequately address steeper waves over a
complete range of depths. Dean’s Stream Function wave theory attempts to address this
deficiency. This wave theory employs an iterative numerical technique to solve the stream
function equation. The stream function describes not only the geometry of a two-dimensional flow,
but also the components of the velocity vector at any point, and the flow rate between any two
streamlines.
The most suitable wave theory is dependent on the wave height, the wave period, and the water
depth. Based on these parameters, the applicable wave theory can be determined from the figure
below (from API-RP2A, American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A).

Applicable Wave Theory Determination

The limiting wave steepness for most deep-water waves is usually determined by the Miche Limit:
H / L = 0.142 tanh( kd )
Where:
H is the wave height
L is the wave length
k is the wave number (2π)/L
d is the water depth

Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading

You can model individual pipe elements that experience loading due to hydrodynamic effects.
Fluid effects can impose a substantial load on the piping elements in a manner similar to,
but more complex than wind loading.
Use wave theories and profiles to compute the water particle velocities and accelerations at the
node points. Then use, Morrison’s equation, F = ½ * ρ * Cd * D * U * |U| + π/4 * ρ* Cm * D2* A to
compute the force on the element.
Where:
ρ - is the fluid density
Cd- is the drag coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
Cm - is the inertial coefficient
A - is the particle acceleration
The particle velocities and accelerations are vector quantities that include the effects of any
applied waves or currents. In addition to the force imposed by Morrison’s equation, piping
elements are also subjected to a lift force and a buoyancy force. The lift force is defined as the
force acting normal to the plane formed by the velocity vector and the axis of the element. The lift
force is defined as:
Fl = ½ *ρ * Cl * D * U2
Where:
ρ - is the fluid density
Cl - is the lift coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
The buoyancy force acts upward and is equal to the weight of the fluid volume displaced by the
element.
A piping system can be described by using the standard finite element equation:
[K] {x} = {f}
Where:
[K] - is the global stiffness matrix for the entire system
{x} - is the displacement / rotation vector to solve for
{f} - is global load vector
Calculate pseudo-static hydrodynamic loading

1. Place the element loads generated by the hydrodynamic effects in their proper locations in {f},
similar to weight, pressure, and temperature.

2. Perform a standard finite element solution on the system of equations to finalize [K] and {f}.
3. Use the resulting displacement vector {x} to compute element forces.
4. Use the computed element forces to compute the element stresses.
Except for the buoyancy force, all other hydrodynamic forces acting on the element are
a function of the particle velocities and accelerations.
Airy Wave Theory Implementation

Airy Wave theory is also known as Linear Wave theory due to the assumption that the wave profile
is symmetric about the mean water level. Standard Airy Wave theory allows for the computation of
the water particle velocities and accelerations between the mean surface elevation and the
bottom. The Modified Airy Wave theory allows for the consideration of the actual free surface
elevation in the computation of the particle data. CAESAR II includes both the standard and
modified forms of the Airy wave theory.
To apply the Airy Wave theory, you must enter several descriptive parameters about the wave.
The software uses these parameters along with the Newton-Raphston iteration to determine the
wave length. Each wave has its own unique wave length that the software determines solving the
dispersion relation, shown below:
2
L = (gT / 2π) * tanh(2πD / L)
Where:
g - is the acceleration of gravity
T - is the wave period
D - is the mean water depth
L - is the wave length to solve for
After determining the wave length (L), you can determine any other wave parameters you want.
The parameters determined and used by CAESAR II are: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above (or below) the mean water level (ETA). For more information on the
equations for these parameters, refer to any text which discusses ocean wave theories.
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation

The Stokes Wave is a 5th order gravity non-linear wave. CAESAR II uses the solution technique
described in a paper published in 1960 by Skjelbreia and Hendrickson of the National Engineering
Science Company. The standard formulation as well as a modified formulation, to the free surface,
is available in CAESAR II Stokes 5th Order Wave Theory.
The solution follows a procedure very similar to that used in the Airy Wave Theory Implementation
(on page 956). You can determine the characteristic parameters of the wave by using
Newton-Raphston iteration, after finding the water particle values of interest.
The Newton-Raphston iteration procedure solves two non-linear equations for constants beta and
lambda. After you determine these values, you can compute the other constants. After computing
all of the constants, use CAESAR II to compute: the horizontal and vertical particle velocities (UX
and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the surface elevation
above the mean water level (ETA).

Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation

The solution to Dean's Stream Function Wave Theory used by CAESAR II is described in the text
by Sarpkaya and Issacson. As previously mentioned, this is a numerical technique to solve the
stream function. The solution subsequently obtained, provides the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).
Ocean Currents
In addition to the forces imposed by ocean waves, piping elements can also be subjected to forces
imposed by ocean currents. There are three different ocean current models in CAESAR II: linear
current, piece-wise, and power law profile.
 The linear current profile assumes that the current velocity through the water column varies
linearly from the specified surface velocity (at the surface) to zero (at the bottom).
 The piece-wise linear profile employs linear interpolation between specific user-defined
depth/velocity points.
 The power law profile decays the surface velocity to the 1/7 power.
While waves produce unsteady flow where the particle velocities and accelerations at a point
constantly change, currents produce a steady, non-varying flow.

Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading

The input parameters necessary to define the fluid loading are described in detail in the next
section. The basic parameters describe the wave height and period, and the current velocity. The
most difficult to obtain, and also the most important parameters, are the drag, inertia, and lift
coefficients: Cd, Cm, and Cl. Based on the recommendations of API RP2A and DNV (Det Norske
Veritas), values for Cd range from 0.6 to 1.2, values for Cm range from 1.5 to 2.0. Values for Cl
show a wide range of scatter, but the approximate mean value is 0.7.
The inertia coefficient Cm is equal to one plus the added mass coefficient Ca. This added mass
value accounts for the mass of the fluid assumed to be entrained with the piping element.
In actuality, these coefficients are a function of the fluid particle velocity, which varies over the
water column. In general practice, two dimensionless parameters are computed that are used to
obtain the Cd, Cm, and Cl values from published charts. The first dimensionless parameter is the
Keulegan-Carpenter Number, K. K is defined as:
K = Um * T / D
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
T = Wave Period
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
The second dimensionless parameter is the Reynolds number, Re. Re is defined as
Re = Um * D / ν
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
ν = Kinematic Viscosity of the Fluid 1.26e-5 ft2/sec for Sea Water

After you calculate K and Re use the charts to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. For more information, see
Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya. Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25
are example charts, which display below.

In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest) must
be determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are readily
obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification
of the depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz) /
sinh(kd),
Where:
k - is the wave number, 2π /L
L - is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function.
The modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh(dα) / sinh(kd),
Where:
α - is equal to z / (d + h)
The term dα represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and
acceleration are to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still
water level. This means that the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual
heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and
the diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both depth
and position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore, these
coefficients are in fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view, varying
these coefficients as a function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented. This
practice can be justified when one considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the
instantaneous wave height and period. According to Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to
accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous fluid particle history is necessary.
In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are recommended by API and
many other references.

The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects on
the system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the
increased roughness causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the
increase in mass and added mass cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic
amplification factor; it causes an increase in the structural weight; and possibly causes
hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
Finally, Morrison’s force equation is based the "small body" assumption. The term "small" refers to
the "diameter to wave length" ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in phase
with the acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In such
cases, the fluid loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references
at the end of this article.
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II

The hydrodynamic load analysis requires the specification of several measurable parameters that
quantify the physical aspects of the environmental phenomenon in question.
You can enter four different wave loads here. Use the Editing Load Case buttons to
move up or down between the Wave Load Input Spreadsheets.
The necessary hydrodynamic parameters are discussed in the following paragraphs and a
CAESAR II hydrodynamic loading dialog is shown in the figure below.

Current Data
Profile Type
Defines the interpolation method you want CAESAR II to use to determine the current velocity
as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are:
 Power Law Profile
Determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
p
Vd = Vs * [di / D]
Where:
Vd - is the velocity at depth di
Vs - is the specified velocity at the surface
D - is the water depth
p - is the power, set to 1/7
 Piece-wise Linear Profile
Performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table that you must provide, to
determine the current velocity at depth di. The table should start at the surface (a depth of
zero) and progress in increasing depth to the sea bed.
 Linear Profile
Performs a linear interpolation to determine the current velocity at depth di. However, this
method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified surface velocity to
zero at the sea bed.
 Current Speed
Defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are (length/time) as
defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always be a positive
entry.
 Current Direction Cosines
Defines the direction of fluid transport due to the current. These fields are unit-less and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator
Specifies which wave theory to use to compute the water particle velocities and accelerations.
The wave theories available are:
Standard Airy Wave
This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can be found in the
previously mentioned references.

Modified Airy Wave

This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free surface effects due to
the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor equal to the depth
divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor varies as a function
of the location in the wave train.
 Standard Stokes 5th Wave
This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the previously mentioned references.
 Modified Stokes 5th Wave
This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The modification is the same as
applied to the Airy theory.
 Stream Function Wave
This is Dean’s Stream Function theory, also discussed in the previously mentioned
references.
 Modified Stream Function Wave
This is Dean’s Stream Function theory, modified to directly consider current in the wave
solution.
Stream Function Order
When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order must be defined. Typical
values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13, and must be an odd value (see
API-RP2A figure).
Water Depth
Defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level the surface to the sea
bed.
Wave Height
Defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance in units of length
from the wave crest to the wave trough.
Wave Period
Defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor
Because the two-dimensional wave theories do not account for spreading, a reduction factor
is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration. Wave kinematic
measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the applicable offshore
codes before using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines
Define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unit-less and follow the standard software
global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle
Defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the piping system. The phase
angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0 is the wave crest, 180 is
the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Because the wave propagates over the piping
structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave phase angles. One

analysis technique specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then the phase at each
node point in the model is determined. From these exact phase locations, the water particle
data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle usually
zero for all points in the model. This technique produces higher loads; however, the extra
conservatism is warranted when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.
Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation
Defines the height of the free surface from the global system origin. If the system origin is at
the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system origin is at the sea
bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a CAESAR II model
is at an elevation of zero. You can change the elevation by pressing [Alt-+G].
Kinematic Viscosity
Defines the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to determine the Reynolds
number, which is subsequently used to determine the hydrodynamic coefficients Cd, Cm, and
Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water display below.
Temp Deg (F) n(ft2/sec) Temp (C) n(m2/sec)
60 1.26e-5 15.556 1.17058e-6
50 1.46e-5 10.000 1.35639e-6
40 1.55e-5 4.444 1.44000e-6
30 2.00e-5 -1.111 1.85807e-6
Fluid Weight Density

Defines the weight density of the fluid. For sea water, this value is approximately .037037
pounds per cubic inch (.001025 kg/cm3, 1.0256SG).
Piping Element Data

Element Exposure
In implementing hydrodynamic loading in your software, you must be able to indicate that
elements are either exposed to the fluid or not exposed to the fluid. In CAESAR II, this is
accomplished by a set of options, which indicate that the particular element is exposed to
hydrodynamic loads, wind loads, or not exposed. This specification carries forward for all
subsequent elements until changed.
Hydrodynamic Coefficients
Piping elements that are subjected to hydrodynamic loading must have drag (Cd), inertia (Cm),
and a lift (Cl) coefficient defined. The specification of these items is optional. Alternatively, you
can specify these values as constants to be applied to all subsequent exposed elements,
regardless of depth or phase position in the wave. Alternatively, you can leave these values
blank, which causes CAESAR II to interpolate their values from the charts previously
discussed.

Marine Growth
Defines the amount of marine growth on the piping elements. This value is used to increase
the diameter of the piping elements. The units for this field are the units of the current
diameter. The diameter used in the computation of the hydrodynamic forces is equal to the
pipe diameter plus twice the marine growth entry.
References
1. Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson,
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister, McGraw-Hill
Book Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3. Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National
Engineering Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4. Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5. Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and
Laboratory Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
6. A Finite Amplitude Wave on a Linear Shear Current, R. A. Dalrymple, Journal of Geophysical
Research, Vol 79, No 30, 1974.
7. Application of Stream Function Wave Theory to Offshore Design Problems, R. G. Dean, OTC
#1613, 1972.
8. Stream Function Representation of Nonlinear Ocean Waves, R. G. Dean, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 70, No 18, 1965.
9. American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A (API-RP2A), American Petroleum
Institute, July 1993.
10. Improved Algorithm for Stream Function Wave Theory, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January 1989.
11. Stream Function Wave Theory with Profile Constraints, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January/February 1993.
Creep Loading
Creep is the slow, permanent deformation of a solid material under mechanical stresses. Creep
occurs at elevated temperatures during long-term exposure to high levels of constant stress below
the yield strength of the material. Power boiler piping is an example of the type of piping subjected
to creep loading.
Materials
At elevated temperatures, creep governs the allowable stress properties for a material. Allowable
values controlled by creep, also called time-dependent allowables, are a function of duration of
loads.
Default material allowables for ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1 are based on 100,000 hours.

Creep life varies for EN-13480 materials, as shown in the following examples. CAESAR II includes
creep life in the material name.
For material 1.0345S-16-100 (material number 406 in CAESAR II):
 16 - Indicates a maximum thickness of 16 mm.
 100 - Indicates the allowable is for a load duration of 100,000 hours, which is the default value
for CAESAR II.
For material 1.0345S-16-200 (material number 468 in CAESAR II):
 16 - Indicates a maximum thickness of 16 mm.
 The allowable is for a load duration of 200,000 hours.
If the material allowable corresponding to the load duration you need is not
available, then you can create a new custom material with the required data.
Calculations
The software calculates creep stresses according to EN-13480 equation 12.3.5-1:
σ5 = Pcdo/4en + 0.75iMA/Z + 0.75iMC/3Z ≤ fCR
where:
Pc = Calculation pressure (SUS)
MA = Resultant moment from weight and other sustained mechanical loadings (SUS)
MC = Resultant moment from thermal expansion and alternating loadings (EXP)
fCR = Hot allowable stress
In CAESAR II, creep stress (CRP) is a scalar combination of one sustained case (SUS) and one
expansion case (EXP). The first two terms of the equation are the sustained stress components
and the third term is the expansion stress component.
You do not need to specify additional load multipliers to implement creep according to the
equation, as shown in the following Load Case Editor example. If you specify additional load
multipliers, the software applies these as additional scale factors.
The software implements EN-13480 creep methodology for many of the other
supported piping codes.
SIF Methodology
CAESAR II considers the single-SIF and double-SIF methodologies for EN-13480 creep. For the
double-SIF method:
SbA = [(iiMi)2+(ioMo)2]1/2/Z. (due to primary loads from the sustained load case)
SbC is defined as SbA, except that it uses the range of resultant moments from the thermal
expansion load case.
σ5 = Pcdo/4en + SbA + SbC/3 < fCR
Load Case Editor

CAESAR II does not recommend creep load cases, so you must manually create a creep load
case using the CRP stress type. You can define a creep stress range for each strain range as
needed.

The following load set example contains two pressures (P1 and P2) and two temperatures (T1 and
T2). T2 is in the creep range.
 Two creep load cases (L9 and L10) correspond to P1 and P2 operating conditions at T2.
 The final load case (L11) is the maximum combination case from all the CRP cases to obtain
maximum stress or loads in all the creep cases.
Load Stress Combination

Case Definition Name Type Method
L1 W+T1+P1 OPERATING CASE CONDITION 1 OPE UNDEFINED
L4 W+P1 SUSTAINED CASE CONDITION 1 SUS UNDEFINED
L5 W+P2 SUSTAINED CASE CONDITION 2 SUS UNDEFINED
L6 L1-L4 EXPANSION CASE CONDITION 1 EXP Algebraic
L9 L5+L7 Creep case between SUS L5, EXP CRP Scalar

range from L5 to L2
L10 L4+L8 Creep case between SUS L4, EXP CRP Scalar
range from L4 to L3
L11 L9, L10 Max creep case CRP Max
Evaluating Vessel Stresses

ASME Section VIII Division 2 — CAESAR II applies rules prior to the 2007 Edition — provides a
procedure to analyze the local stresses in vessels and nozzles. For this example, we will only
discuss the nozzle analysis approach.
Always refer to the applicable design code if any of the limits described in this section
are approached, or if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation exists, or there are non-linear
concerns such as the operation of material within creep range.
The first step is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. To summarize, Section AD-160
states that if the model meets all of the following conditions, then a fatigue analysis is not required:
1. The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the number of
allowed cycles corresponding to a Sa value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-integral attachments) on the
material fatigue curve. Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at the operating
temperature.

2. The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must be less
than ⅓ (¼ for non-integral attachments) the design pressure times (Sa/Sm), where Sa is the
value from the material fatigue curve for the specified number of significant pressure
fluctuations.
3. The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating.
4. The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads including piping reactions does not
exceed Sa, from the fatigue curve, for the expected number of load fluctuations.
After deciding if an elastic analysis is satisfactory, you must determine whether to take either a
simplified or a comprehensive approach to do the vessel stress analysis. For more information on
the simplified or the comprehensive approach, see ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Simplified Analysis pre-2007 (on page 971) or ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) (on page 968). For more information on Section VIII Division
2 requirements, refer to the latest version of the ASME code.
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive

Analysis (pre-2007)
To address the local allowable stress problem, you should have the endurance curve for the
material of construction and complete design pressure/temperature loading information. Carefully
consult the code before performing the local stress analysis if:
 any elastic limit is approached
 there is anything unusual in the nozzle/vessel connection design
The material Sm table and the endurance curve for carbon steels used in this
section are for illustration purposes. You should only use values taken directly from the code in
your design.
There are three criteria you must satisfy before considering stresses in the vessel wall due to
nozzle loads within the allowables. The three criteria are summarized as:
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane
stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus
bending), respectively; and k, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material
allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (Smh + Smc) / 2.
The stress classification defined by the Section VIII Division 2 code in the vicinity of nozzles,
classifies the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, as secondary stress Q, regardless of whether they
were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This definition causes Pb to disappear and leads to
a more detailed classification:
 Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure)
 Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include the following:
 Membrane stress due to internal pressure
 Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments

 Q - Secondary stresses, which may include the following:

 Bending stress due to internal pressure
 Bending stress due to applied sustained loads
 Membrane stress due to applied expansion loads
 Bending stress due to applied expansion loads
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contains three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses,
the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, that is, Pm, Pl,
and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the
resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. Determine if there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types can be
repeated using a value of 1.2 for k.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 2004 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is not
applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division 2
requirements. Using the same analogy, write the peak stress limit as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met
based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for cyclic
operation is required and it can be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135 has been
satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design, fabrication, testing
and inspection of this division."
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107

Check vessel stresses in shells using WRC 107
1. Check the geometric limitation to see whether WRC 107 is applicable.
2. If yes, determine whether the elastic approach as outlined in Section VIII Division 2 AD-160 is
applicable.
3. Compute the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads in the vessel shell due to the
applied nozzle loads.
4. Consider the local restraint configuration to determine whether some or all the axial pressure
thrust load P * Ain should be added to the sustained and occasional loads. If you choose, the
software can automatically calculate the thrust load and add it to the applied loads.
5. Calculate the pressure stresses, Pm, on the vessel shell wall in both the longitudinal and
circumferential hoop directions for both sustained and occasional load cases.

Notice that two different pressure terms are required in carrying out the pressure
stress calculations. P is the design pressure of the system (sustained), while Pvar is the
difference between the peak pressure and the design pressure of the system, which is used to
qualify the vessel membrane stress under the occasional load case.
If you enter the pressure value, the software automatically calculates the Pm
stresses.
6. The processor will calculate the Pl, and Q stresses as defined earlier.
If needed, you can simultaneously compute the local stresses due to sustained,
expansion, and occasional loads.
7. Obtain the various stress components by combining the stress intensities computed from
applying the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads, if applicable.
8. Then use stress intensities to carry out the stress summations.
If needed, use the results to determine the acceptability of the local stresses in the
vessel shell. Notice how CAESAR II provides the WRC 107 Stress Summation module in
line with the stress calculation routines.
The equations used in CAESAR II to qualify the various stress components can be summarized
as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh)
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII

Division 2 Elastic Nozzle Analysis pre-2007
The most difficult problem associated with the comprehensive ASME Section VIII Division 2
nozzle/vessel analysis involves the pressure calculation. Hoop and longitudinal pressure hand
calculations are not considered reliable, and axial pressure loading on the junction is often
miscalculated or omitted. Another issue with the comprehensive calculation is the amount of time
it takes to organize and manipulate the stress data. For these reasons, an alternate simplified
approach was developed using three checks.
The first check, Pm due to pressure, must be ≤ 1.0 Smh. To eliminate the concern for pressure, both
the loading pressure term on the left side of the inequality and the allowable pressure term on the
right side of the inequality cancel out.
This assumes that the area of reinforcement around the nozzle satisfies the pressure
requirements. Also, let Pm equal the maximum value.
The second check, Pm + Pl + Pb, must be ≤ 1.5 Smh. Subtract the stress due to pressure, Pm, from
both sides of the inequality and assuming Pm equals Smh. This reduces the check to: Pl + Pb ≤ 0.5
Smh (due to external sustained forces without pressure).
The third check, Pm + Pl + Q, is the root of the application controversy. There are three schools of
thought:

 Pm+Pl+Q is an operating loading condition, and as such, includes the loads due to pressure
and weight.
 Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads or the expansion loading condition, and as such, excludes the
effects of sustained, or primary loads. Also, exclude the primary sustained loads like weight
and pressure.
 Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads and excludes the primary load weight, but includes the varying
pressure load at least in those thermal load cases where the system goes from a startup
ambient temperature and pressure condition to operating condition.
To simplify the calculation, assume that Pm, due to pressure, is included on both sides of the
Pm+Pl+Pb+Q < 3Sm inequality. Also, assume that the area reinforcement requirements are exactly
satisfied. Again, let Pm = Sm and subtract this term from the expansion allowable (P m + Pl + Q <
3Sm) to provide a simplified allowable limit.
The expansion, operating, or both loads from the Restraints Report (on page 605)
must satisfy the computed stress requirement:
Pl + Pb + Q (operating or expansion excluding pressure) < 2Sm.
To summarize:
1. Ensure proper nozzle reinforcement for pressure and assume pressure stresses are at their
maximum.
2. Compare primary stresses without pressure to ½Smh.
3. Compare stresses due to the sum of primary and secondary loads to 2Sm(avg); where Sm(avg) is
the average of the hot and cold allowable stress intensities Smh and Smc.
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified

Analysis pre-2007
1. Perform a CAESAR II analysis of the piping loads on the vessel/nozzle junction. Use WRC
297 flexibilities to compute loads more accurately, but less conservatively or do two analyses,
one with flexibilities and one without.
From this analysis you should have sustained, operating, and expansion loads on the
vessel/nozzle junction.
2. Find Smh and Smc from the Sect. VIII allowable stress tables.
Smh is the vessel material hot allowable, and Smc is the vessel material cold allowable.
3. Run WRC 107 with the sustained loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < 0.5 Smh.
This operation helps in conservatively considering bending stresses from internal
pressure and sustained moments and also lets you categorize the stresses and moment as a
primary classification. If the operation fails, review the stresses in more detail.
4. Run WRC 107 with the operating loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < Smh + Smc.
5. Run WRC 107 with the expansion loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < Smh + Smc.

Should any of the checks described fail, then perform the more comprehensive analysis of the
junction described earlier. For more information, see ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) (on page 968).
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction

The response of a system under a dynamic load is often determined by superposition of modal
results, with CAESAR II specifically providing the Spectral Analysis method for use. One of the
advantages of modal analysis is that usually only a limited number of modes are excited and need
be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements may be
obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force, reaction,
and stress results may require extraction of far more modes, possibly far into the rigid range,
before acceptable accuracy is attained. The Missing Mass option offers the ability to include a
correction which represents the quasi-static contribution of the higher order modes not explicitly
extracted for the modal/dynamic response, thus providing greater accuracy with reduced
calculation time.
The dynamic response of a linear multi-degree-of-freedom system is described by the following
equation:
Ma(t) + Cv(t) + Kx(t) = F(t)
Where:
M = n x n mass matrix of system
C = n x n damping matrix of system
K = n x n stiffness matrix of system
a(t) = n x 1, time-dependent acceleration vector
v(t) = n x 1, time-dependent velocity vector
x(t) = n x 1, time-dependent displacement vector
F(t) = n x 1, time-dependent applied force vector
Assuming harmonic motion and neglecting damping, the free vibration eigenvalue problem for this
system is
KΦ - MΦ ω = 0
2
Where:
Φ = n x n mode shape matrix
ω = n x n matrix where each diagonal entry is the angular frequency squared of the
2
corresponding mode
The modal matrix Φ can be normalized such that Φ M Φ = I (where I is the n x n identity matrix)
T
and Φ Κ Φ = ω .
T 2
Partition the modal matrix Φ into two sub-matrices:

Φ = [ Φe Φr ]

Where:
Φe = mode shapes extracted for dynamic analysis (that is., lowest frequency modes)
Φr = residual (non-extracted) mode shapes (corresponding to rigid response, or the "missing
mass" contribution)
The extracted mode shapes are orthogonal to the residual mode shapes, or:
Φe x Φr = 0
T
The displacement components can be expressed as linear combinations of the mode shapes:
x = ΦY = Φe Ye + Φr Yr = xe + xr
Where:
x = Total System Displacements
xe = System Displacements Due to Extracted Modes
xr = System Displacements Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
The dynamic load vector can be expressed in similar terms:
F = K Φ Y = K Φe Ye + K Φr Yr = Fe + Fr
Where:
F = Total System Load Vector
Fe = Load Vector Due to Extracted Modes
Fr = Load Vector Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
Normally, modal superposition analyses completely neglect the rigid response the displacement
Xr caused by the load Fr. This response, of the non-extracted modes, can be obtained from the
system displacement under a static loading Fr. Based upon the relation\-ships stated above, you
can estimate Fr as follows:
F = K Φe Ye + K Φr Yr
Multiplying both sides by ΦeT and considering that ΦeT Φr = 0:
Φe F = Φe K Φe Ye + Φe K Φr Yr = Φe K Φe Ye
T T T T
Substituting ωe2 for ΦeT K Φe and solving for Ye:

ΦeT F = ωe2 Ye
Ye = Φe ωe F
T -2
The residual force can now be stated as

Fr = F - K Φe Ye = F - Φe K Φe ω e F
T -2

As seen earlier
Φ MΦω =Iω =Φ KΦ
T 2 2 T
Substituting Φe MΦe ωe for Φe K Φe:

T 2 T
Fr = F - ΦeT M Φe ωe2 ωe-2 F = F - ΦeT M Φe F

Therefore, CAESAR II calculates the residual response (and includes it as the missing mass
contribution) according to the following procedure:
1. The missing mass load is calculated for each individual shock load as:
Fr = F - Φe M Φe F
T
The load vector F represents the product of:

 the force set vector and the rigid DLF for force spectrum loading;
 the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and directional vector for non-ISM seismic loads;
 and the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and displacement matrix (under unit ISM
support displacement) for seismic anchor movement loads.
Note that the missing mass load will vary, depending upon the number of modes
extracted by the user and the cutoff frequency selected (or more specifically, the DLF or
acceleration corresponding to the cutoff frequency). "Rigid," for the purposes of
determining the rigid DLF, or the ZPA, may be designated by the user, through a setup
parameter, to be either the DLF/acceleration associated with the frequency of the last
extracted mode, or the true spectral DLF/ ZPA that corresponding to the largest entered
frequency of the input spectrum.
2. The missing mass load is applied to the structure as a static load. The static structural
response is then combined (according to the user-specified combination method) with the
dynamically amplified modal responses as if it was a modal response. This static response is
the algebraic sum of the responses of all non-extracted modes—representing in-phase
response, as would be expected from rigid modes.
3. The Missing Mass Data report is compiled for all shock cases, whether missing mass is to be
included or not. The percent of mass active is calculated according to:
% Active Mass = 1 - (∑ Fr[i] / ∑ F [i])
summed over i = 1 to n, where n is the number of modes included
The maximum possible percent that is theoretically possible for this value is of course 100%;
however numerical inaccuracies may occasionally cause the value to be slightly higher. If the
missing mass correction factor is included, the percent of mass included in the correction is shown
in the report as well.
Because the CAESAR II procedure assumes that the missing mass correction represents the
contribution of rigid modes, and that the ZPA is based upon the spectral ordinate value at the
frequency of the last extracted mode, we recommend that you extract modes up to, but not far
beyond, a recognized "rigid" frequency. Choosing a cutoff frequency below the spectrum’s
resonant peak [point (1) below] provides a non-conservative result, because resonant responses
may be missed. Using a cutoff frequency higher than the peak (2), but still in the resonant range,
will yield conservative results, because the ZPA/rigid DLF will be overestimated. Extracting a large
number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be conservative (4), because
all available modal combination methods (SRSS, GROUP, ABS, and so forth) give conservative
results versus the algebraic combination method which gives a more realistic representation of the

net response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum shown below, an appropriate
cutoff point for the modal extraction would be about 33 Hz (3).
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads
CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with modal dynamic
results SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute Combination method provides the more conservative
result and is based upon the assumption that dynamic amplification is going to occur
simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature (References 1, 2)
states that the modal and the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic loads are actually
statistically independent, so that the SRSS Combination method is a more accurate
representation of reality. Because the SRSS Combination method is most closely aligned to
reality, CAESAR II defaults to this missing mass combination method.

References
1. A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures, CRC
Press, 1990
2. K. M. Vashi, "Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes," ASME
80-C2/PVP-50, 1980
3. O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, "On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics," Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley & Sons,
Ltd., 1979
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II

For most piping codes supported by CAESAR II, performing a fatigue analysis is an extension to,
rather than an explicit part of, the code requirements. However, it is an explicit part of the
IGE/TD/12 Pipework Stress Analysis for Gas Industry Plant code.
Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful
service. Research done during the 1940s and 1950s, primarily advanced by A. R. C. Markl’s
"Piping Flexibility Analysis," published in 1955, provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as
well as design criteria aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials
were failing due to fatigue, a process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent
fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal
structures. However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal
homogeneous material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains.
Inside each grain a pattern of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the
molecular pattern is the same, but the orientations differ. As a result, grain boundaries are high
energy borders. Plastic deformation begins within a grain that is subject to both a high stress and
oriented such that the stress causes a slippage between adjacent layers in the same pattern. The
incremental slippages, called dislocations, cause local cold-working. On the first application of the
stress, dislocations can move through many of the grains that are in the local area of high stress.
As the stress is repeated, more dislocations move through their respective grains. Dislocation
movement is impeded by the grain boundaries. After multiple stress applications, the dislocations
tend to accumulate at grain boundaries. Eventually they become so dense that the grains "lock
up" causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further dislocation movement. Subsequent
applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming cracks. Repeated stress applications
cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks propagate with additional stress applications
until sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to cause a catastrophic failure of the material.

You can estimate the fatigue capacity of a material through the application of cyclic
tensile/compressive displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress
capacity of a material is called a fatigue or endurance curve. These curves are generated through
multiple cyclic tests at different stress levels. The number of cycles to failure usually increases as
the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a threshold stress, known as the endurance limit, is
reached below which no fatigue failure occurs, regardless of the number of applied cycles. An
endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken from the ASME Section VIII Division 2
Pressure Vessel Code displays below:
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems

IGE/TD/12 does present specific requirements for true fatigue evaluation of systems subject to a
cyclic loading threshold. Furthermore, ASME Section III, Subsection NB and ASME Section VIII
Division 2 provide guidelines by which fatigue evaluation rules can be applied to piping and other
pressure retaining equipment. These procedures have been adapted, where possible, to the
methodology used by CAESAR II.
Perform fatigue analysis

1. From the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, enter fatigue data or import it in from a text file. You
can also define your own fatigue curves as discussed later in this section. By doing this, you
assign the fatigue curve data to the piping material.
To help with your fatigue analysis, CAESAR II provides a number of commonly
used curves.

2. From either the Static or Dynamic Load Case Builders you must define, for every fatigue
load case, the number of anticipated cycles.
A FAT stress type is also available.
3. Unless explicitly defined in the applicable code, CAESAR II calculates the fatigue stress the
same way it calculates the stress intensity.
IGE/TD/12 is the only piping code supported by CAESAR II that has explicit
instructions for calculating fatigue stresses. For more information on IGE/TD/12, refer to
IGE/TD/12 (on page 1048).
4. Allowable fatigue stresses are interpolated logarithmically from the fatigue curve based upon
the number of cycles designated for the load case. For static load cases, the calculated stress
is assumed to be a peak-to-peak cyclic value (for example, thermal expansion, settlement,
pressure, and so forth), so the allowable stress is extracted directly from the fatigue curve. For
harmonic and dynamic load cases, the calculated stress is assumed to be a zero-to-peak
cyclic value (for example, vibration, earthquake, and so forth), so the extracted allowable is
divided by two prior to use in the comparison.
5. The flip side of calculating the allowable fatigue stress for the designated number of cycles is
the calculation of the allowable number of cycles for the calculated stress level. You can do
this by logarithmically interpolating the "Cycles" axis of the fatigue curve based upon the
calculated stress value. Because static stresses are assumed to be peak-to-peak cyclic
values, the allowable number of cycles is interpolated directly from the fatigue curve. Because
harmonic and dynamic stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak cyclic values, the allowable
number of cycles is interpolated using twice the calculated stress value.
6. CAESAR II provides two reports for viewing the results of load cases for the FAT stress type.
The first of these is the standard Stress report that shows the calculated fatigue stress and
fatigue allowable at each node.
You can generate individual stress reports for each load case to show whether any of
the individual load cases in isolation fail the system.
However, in those instances where there is more than one cyclic load case potentially contributing
to a fatigue failure, the Cumulative Usage report is appropriate. To generate this report, select all
the FAT load cases that contribute to the overall system degradation. The Cumulative Usage
report lists for each node point the usage ratio actual cycle divided by allowable cycles, and then
sums these to obtain the total cumulative usage. A total greater than 1.0 indicates a potential
fatigue failure.
Static Analysis Fatigue Example

Consider a sample job that potentially has several different cyclic load variations:
 Operating cycle from ambient 70°F to 500°F, 12,000 cycles anticipated
 Shut down external temperature variation from ambient 70°F to -20°F, 200 cycles anticipated
 Pressurization to 1800 psig, 12,000 cycles anticipated
 Pressure fluctuations of +/- 30 psi from the 1800 psig, 200,000 cycles anticipated
To do a proper fatigue analysis, you must group the load pairs that represent the worst-case
combination of stress ranges between extreme states. These load variations can be laid out in
graphical form. The figure below shows a sketch of the various operating ranges this system
experiences. Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the end of each horizontal

line, the temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of each horizontal
line, the number of cycles for each range is defined.
Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. Case 1:
Cover the absolute extreme, from -20°F and 0 psi to 500°F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200 times.
As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The first range
(-20, 0 to 70, 0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases. The second
range (70, 0 to 500, 1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges are similarly
reduced to 199,800 cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of considered
cycles at each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment -20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500, 500, 1800 to 500, 1830
1800
Case
Initial 200 12,000 200,000 200,000
After 1 0 11,800 200,000 199,800
After 2 0 0 200,000 188,000
After 3 0 0 12,000 0
After 4 0 0 0 0
This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
 Between -20°F, 0 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
 Between 70°F, 0 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)

These temperatures and pressures are entered as operating conditions accordingly:
Next enter the fatigue curve data for the material. This is done by clicking Fatigue Curves to
activate the Material Fatigue Curve dialog box. This dialog box can be used to enter the fatigue
curve for the materials.
For IGE/ TD/12, you only need to enter five sets of fatigue curves for fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W.
1. Enter up to eight Cycle versus Stress data points to define the curve. Interpolations are
made logarithmically.
2. Enter Cycle/Stress pairs in ascending cycle order.

3. Enter stress values as the allowable stress range, rather than the allowable Stress Amplitude.
You can enter fatigue curve data from a text file, by clicking Read from file. This displays
a list of all \CAESAR\SYSTEM\*.FAT files.
The following fatigue curve files are delivered with CAESAR II. You can also construct additional
fatigue curve files. For more information on fatigue curve files, see Appendix A below:
 5-110-1A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS < 80 ksi
 5-110-1B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS = 115-130 ksi
 5-110-2A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve A
 5-110-2B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve B
 5-110-2C.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve C

In this case for A106B low carbon steel operating at 500°F, 5-110-1A.FAT is the appropriate
selection. This populates the fatigue curve data boxes in the dialog box:
Error check the job, and set up your load cases.

The static load case builder offers a new stress type, FAT (fatigue). Selecting this stress type does
the following:
1. Enables you to define the number of cycles for the load case. Dragging the FAT stress type
into the load case or clicking the Load Cycles button opens the Load Cycles field.
2. Calculates the stress range as per the Fatigue Stress method of the applicable code. This is
the stress intensity for all codes except IGE/TD/12.
3. Compares the calculated stress range to the full value extracted from the fatigue curve.
Indicates that the load case may be included in the Cumulative Usage report.

The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.
After you run the job the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage
report to the list of available reports.

You can check the fatigue stress range against the fatigue curve allowable for each load case by
selecting it along with the Stresses report. A review of each load case confirms that all stress
levels passed.

However, this is not a true evaluation of the situation because it is not a case of either-or. The
piping system is subjected to all of these load cases throughout its expected design life, not just
one of them. Therefore, we must also review the Cumulative Usage Report (on page 617)
report, which shows the total effect of all fatigue load cases, or any user-selected combination, on
the design life of the system. This report lists for each load case the expected number of cycles,
the allowable number of cycles (based upon the calculated stress), and the Usage Ratio (actual
cycles divided by allowable cycles). The Usage Ratios are then summed for all selected load
cases. If this sum exceeds 1.0, the system has exceeded its fatigue capabilities. In this case, it is
apparent that with the maximum cumulative usage ratio of 0.87 at node 115, this system is not
predicted to fail due to fatigue:
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis

Fatigue analysis capability is also available for harmonic and dynamic analyses. Harmonic load
cases are entered as they always have been. They can be designated as being stress type FAT
by entering the number of expected load cycles on the harmonic input dialog box:

This produces the same types of reports as are available for the static analysis. They can be
processed as discussed earlier.
The only difference between the harmonic and static fatigue analyses is that for harmonic jobs the
calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared to
only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the
Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated
stress.
For other dynamic applications (response spectrum and time history), the stress type can be
identified as fatigue by selecting the stress type from the drop list for the Load Case or
Static/Dynamic Combination, and by entering the number of expected cycles in the provided field.
Note that as with the harmonic analyses, the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak
calculations so that they are compared to only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue
curve. Likewise, when creating the Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is
based upon twice the calculated stress.
Creating the .FAT Files

The .FAT file is a text file, containing the data points necessary to describe the fatigue curve for
the material, for both butt welded and fillet welded fittings. A sample FAT file is shown below.
* ASME SECTION VIII DIVISION 2 FATIGUE CURVE
* FIGURE 5-110.1
* DESIGN FATIGUE CURVES FOR CARBON, LOW ALLOY, SERIES 4XX,
* HIGH ALLOY AND HIGH TENSILE STEELS FOR TEMPERATURES NOT
* EXCEEDING 700 F
* FOR UTS ≤ 80 KSI
*
0.5000000 - STRESS MULTIPLIER (PSI); ALSO CONVERTS AMPLITUDE TO FULL RANGE
*
10 580000.0
100 205000.0
1000 83000.0
10000 38000.0
100000 20000.0

500000 13500.0
1000000 12500.0
0 0.0
*
You can create this text file by using any text editor. Lines beginning with an * are treated as
comment lines. It is good practice to use comment lines so that the data can be tied to a specific
material curve.
The first data line in the file the stress multiplier. This value is used to adjust the data values from
"zero to peak" to "peak to peak" or to convert the stress levels to psi. The entered values are
divided by this number. For example, if the stress values in the file represent the stress amplitude,
in psi, rather than a range, this "stress multiplier" should be 0.5. Following the stress multiplier is
the Fatigue Curve Data table. This table consists of eight lines, of two columns. The first column
is the Cycle column, and the second is the Stress column. For each value in the cycle column, a
corresponding stress value from the material fatigue curve is listed in the stress column.
Fatigue curves intended for use with IGE/TD/12 are built slightly different. The first data line
contains three values: the stress multiplier, a modulus of elasticity correction, and a modulus of
elasticity multiplier (the correction factor is divided by this to convert to psi). After the files are read
in, the modulus of elasticity correction is inserted into the appropriate field on the Fatigue Curve
dialog. IGE/TD/12 fatigue files also include five sequential fatigue curves, Fatigue Class D, E, F,
G, and W, rather than one. You can use optional comment lines to separate the tables. The
comments help with the readability of the data file. You can best determine the format of the
IGE/TD/12 fatigue files by reviewing the contents of the TD12ST.FAT file.
In all tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If you do not have
enough data to use all eight lines, fill the unused lines with zeroes.
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses

For IGE/TD/12 the computation of fatigue stresses is detailed in Section 5.4.4 of that code. This
section of the code states: "The principal stress in any plane can be calculated for any set of
conditions from the following formula:"
Where:
Sh = Hoop stress
Sa = Axial stress
Sq = Shear stress
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction
and sign." For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress
intensity, as follows:
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (Default)
SI = Maximum of:
 S1OT - S3OT
 S1OB - S3OB
 Max(S1IT,RPS) - Min(S3IT,RPS)

 Max(S1IB,RPS) - Min(S3IB,RPS)
Where:
S1OT=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
= (SLOT+HPSO)/2.0+(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2)1/2
S3OT=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Top

=(SLOT+HPSO)/2.0-(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S1IT=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Top

=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0+(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S3IT=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Top

=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0-(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S1OB=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top

=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0+ (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S3OB=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Bottom

=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0- (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S1IB=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom

=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0+ (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S3IB=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom

=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0- (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
RPS=Radial Pressure Stress, Inside

HPSI=Hoop Pressure Stress (Inside, from Lame's Equation)
HPSO=Hoop Pressure Stress (Outside, from Lame's Equation)
SLOT=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Top
SLIT=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Top
SLOB=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Bottom
SLIB=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Bottom
TSI=Torsional Stress, Inside
TSO=Torsional Stress, Outside

Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping

Underlying Theory
The behavior of steel and other homogeneous materials has been long understood, permitting
their widespread use as construction materials. The development of the piping and pressure
vessel codes (Reference 1) in the early part of this century led to the confidence in their use in
piping applications. The work of Markl and others in the 1940’s and 1950’s was responsible for the
formalization of today’s pipe stress methods, leading to an ensuing diversification of piping codes
on an industry by industry basis. The advent of the digital computer, and with it the appearance of
the first pipe stress analysis software (Reference 2), further increased the confidence with which
steel pipe could be used in critical applications. The 1980’s saw the wide spread proliferation of
the microcomputer, with associated pipe stress analysis software, which in conjunction with
training, technical support, and available literature, has brought stress analysis capability to
almost all engineers. In short, an accumulated experience of close to 100 years, in conjunction
with ever improving technology has led to the utmost confidence on the part of today’s engineers
when specifying, designing, and analyzing steel, or other metallic, pipe.
For fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) and other composite piping materials, the situation is not
the same. Fiberglass reinforced plastic was developed only as recently as the 1950’s, and did not
come into wide spread use until a decade later (Reference 3). There is not a large base of stress
analysis experience, although not from a lack of commitment on the part of FRP vendors. Most
vendors conduct extensive stress testing on their components, including hydrostatic and cyclic
pressure, uni-axial tensile and compressive, bending, and combined loading tests. The problem is
due to the traditional difficulty associated with, and lack of understanding of, stress analysis of
heterogeneous materials. First, the behavior and failure modes of these materials are highly
complex and not fully understood, leading to inexact analytical methods and a general lack of
agreement on the best course of action to follow. This lack of agreement has slowed the
simplification and standardization of the analytical methods into universally recognized codes BS
7159 Code Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping (GRP) Systems for
Individual Plants or Sites and UKOOA Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore being notable exceptions. Second, the heterogeneous, orthotropic behavior
of FRP and other composite materials has hindered the use of the pipe stress analysis algorithms
developed for homogeneous, isotropic materials associated with crystalline structures. A lack of
generally accepted analytical procedures has contributed to a general reluctance to use FRP
piping for critical applications.
Stress analysis of FRP components must be viewed on many levels. These levels, or scales, have
been called Micro-Mini-Macro levels, with analysis proceeding along the levels according to the
"MMM" principle (Reference 4).
Micro-Level Analysis
Stress analysis on the "Micro" level refers to the detailed evaluation of the individual materials and
boundary mechanisms comprising the composite material. In general, FRP pipe is manufactured
from laminates, which are constructed from elongated fibers of a commercial grade of glass,
E-glass, which are coated with a coupling agent or sizing prior to being embedded in a
thermosetting plastic material, typically epoxy or polyester resin.
This means, on the micro scale, that an analytical model must be created which simulates the
interface between these elements. Because the number and orientation of fibers is unknown at

any given location in a FRP sample, the simplest representation of the micro-model is that of a
single fiber, extending the length of the sample, embedded in a square profile of matrix.
Micro Level GRP Sample -- Single Fiber Embedded in Square Profile of Matrix
Evaluation of this model requires use of the material parameters of:

1. the glass fiber
2. the coupling agent or sizing layer normally of such microscopic proportion that it may be
ignored
3. the plastic matrix
It must be considered that these material parameters might vary for an individual material based
upon tensile, compressive, or shear applications of the imposed stresses, and typical values vary
significantly between the fiber and matrix (Reference 5):
Young's Modulus Ultimate Strength Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Material tensile (MPa) tensile (MPa) m/m/ºC
Glass Fiber 72.5 x103 1.5 x 103 5.0 x 10-6
Plastic
2.75 x 103 .07 x 103 7.0 x 10-6
Matrix
The following failure modes of the composite must be similarly evaluated to:
 failure of the fiber
 failure of the coupling agent layer
 failure of the matrix
 failure of the fiber-coupling agent bond
 failure of the coupling agent-matrix bond
Because of uncertainties about the degree to which the fiber has been coated with the coupling
agent and about the nature of some of these failure modes, this evaluation is typically reduced to:
 failure of the fiber
 failure of the matrix

 failure of the fiber-matrix interface
You can evaluate stresses in the individual components through finite element analysis of the
strain continuity and equilibrium equations, based upon the assumption that there is a good bond
between the fiber and matrix, resulting in compatible strains between the two. For normal stresses
applied parallel to the glass fiber:
εf = εm = σaf / Ef = σam / Em
σaf = σam Ef / Em
Where:
εf = Strain in the Fiber
ε = Strain in the Matrix
σaf = Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Fiber
Ef = Modulus of Elasticity of the Fiber
σam = Axial Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Matrix
Em = Modulus of Elasticity of the Matrix
Due to the large ratio of the modulus of elasticity of the fiber to that of the matrix, it is apparent that
nearly all of the axial normal stress in the fiber-matrix composite is carried by the fiber. Exact
values are (Reference 6):
σaf = σL / [φ + (1-φ)Em/Ef]
σam = σL / [φEf/Em + (1-φ)]
Where:
σL = nominal longitudinal stress across composite
φ = glass content by volume

The continuity equations for the glass-matrix composite seem less complex for normal stresses
perpendicular to the fibers, because the weak point of the material seems to be limited by the
glass-free cross-section, shown below:
Stress Intensification in Matrix Cross-Section
For this reason, it would appear that the strength of the composite would be equal to that of the
matrix for stresses in this direction. In fact, its strength is less than that of the matrix due to stress
intensification in the matrix caused by the irregular stress distribution in the vicinity of the stiffer
glass. Because the elongation over distance D1 must be equal to that over the longer distance D2,
the strain, and thus the stress at location D1 must exceed that at D2 by the ratio D2/D1. Maximum
intensified transverse normal stresses in the composite are:
Where:
σb = intensified normal stress transverse to the fiber, in the composite
σ = nominal transverse normal stress across composite
νm = Poisson's ratio of the matrix
Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional σ'am equal to the
following:
σ'am = V m σb
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity
equations. It would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses.
However, unless the fibers are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix in
order to get from fiber to fiber. Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as
Where:

τab = intensified shear stress in composite

T = nominal shear stress across composite
Gm = shear modulus of elasticity in matrix
Gf = shear modulus of elasticity in fiber
Determination of the stresses in the fiber-matrix interface is more complex. The bonding agent has
an inappreciable thickness, and thus has an indeterminate stiffness for consideration in the
continuity equations. Also, the interface behaves significantly differently in shear, tension, and
compression, showing virtually no effects from the latter. The state of the stress in the interface is
best solved by omitting its contribution from the continuity equations, and simply considering that it
carries all stresses that must be transferred from fiber to matrix.
After the stresses have been apportioned, they must be evaluated against appropriate failure
criteria. The behavior of homogeneous, isotropic materials such as glass and plastic resin, under
a state of multiple stresses is better understood. Failure criterion for isotropic material reduces the
combined normal and shear stresses (σa, σb, σc, τab, τac, τbc) to a single stress, an equivalent
stress, that can be compared to the tensile stress present at failure in a material under uniaxial
loading, that is, the ultimate tensile stress, Sult.
Different theories, and different equivalent stress functions f(σa, σb, σc, τab, τac, τbc) have been
proposed, with possibly the most widely accepted being the Huber-von Mises-Hencky criterion,
which states that failure will occur when the equivalent stress reaches a critical value the ultimate
strength of the material:
σeq = √{1/2 [(σa - σb) + (σb - σc) + (σc - σa) + 6(τab + τac + τbc )} ≤ Sult
2 2 2 2 2 2
This theory does not fully cover all failure modes of the fiber in that it omits reference to direction of
stress, that is, tensile versus compressive. The fibers, being relatively long and thin,
predominantly demonstrate buckling as their failure mode when loaded in compression.

The equivalent stress failure criterion has been corroborated, with slightly non-conservative
results, by testing. Little is known about the failure mode of the adhesive interface, although
empirical evidence points to a failure criterion which is more of a linear relationship between the
normal and the square of the shear stresses. Failure testing of a composite material loaded only in
transverse normal and shear stresses are shown in the following figure. The kink in the curve
shows the transition from the matrix to the interface as the failure point.
Mini-Level Analysis
Mini-Level Analysis Fiber Distribution Models

Although feasible in concept, micro level analysis is not feasible in practice. This is due to the
uncertainty of the arrangement of the glass in the composite the thousands of fibers that might be
randomly distributed, semi-randomly oriented, although primarily in a parallel pattern, and of
randomly varying lengths. This condition indicates that a sample can truly be evaluated only on a
statistical basis, thus rendering detailed finite element analysis inappropriate.
For mini-level analysis, a laminate layer is considered to act as a continuous hence the common
reference to this method as the "continuum" method, material, with material properties and failure
modes estimated by integrating them over the assumed cross-sectional distribution, which is,
averaging. The assumption regarding the distribution of the fibers can have a marked effect on the
determination of the material parameters. Two of the most commonly postulated distributions are

the square and the hexagonal, with the latter generally considered as being a better
representation of randomly distributed fibers.
The stress-strain relationships, for those sections evaluated as continua, can be written as:
εaa = σaa/EL - (VL/EL)σbb - (VL/EL)σcc
εbb = -(VL/EL)σaa + σbb/ET - (VT/ET )σcc
εcc = -(VL/EL)σaa - (VT /ET )σbb + σcc/ET
εab = τab / 2 GL
εbc = τbc / 2 GT
εac = τac / 2 GL
Where:
εij = strain along direction i on face j
σij, τab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL = Poisson’s ratio of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT = Poisson’s ratio of laminate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
GT = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
These relationships require that four modules of elasticity, EL, ET, GL, and GT, and two Poisson’s
ratios, VL and V, be evaluated for the continuum. Extensive research (References 4 - 10) has been
done to estimate these parameters. There is general consensus that the longitudinal terms can be
explicitly calculated; for cases where the fibers are significantly stiffer than the matrix, they are:
EL = EF φ + EM(1 - φ)
GL = GM + φ/ [ 1 / (GF - GM) + (1 - φ) / (2GM)]
VL = VFφ + VM(1 - φ)
You cannot calculate parameters in the transverse direction. You can only calculate the upper and
lower bounds. Correlations with empirical results have yielded approximations (Reference 5 and
6):
2 2 1.25 2
ET = [EM(1+0.85f ) / {(1-VM )[(1-f) + f(EM/EF)/(1-VM )]}
GT = GM (1 + 0.6√φ) / [(1 - φ) + φ (GM/GF)]
1.25
VT = VL (EL / ET )
Use of these parameters permits the development of the homogeneous material models that
facilitate the calculation of longitudinal and transverse stresses acting on a laminate layer. The
resulting stresses can be allocated to the individual fibers and matrix using relationships
developed during the micro analysis.

Macro-Level Analysis
Macro to Micros Stress Conversion

Where Mini-level analysis provides the means of evaluation of individual laminate layers,
Macro-level analysis provides the means of evaluating components made up of multiple laminate
layers. It is based upon the assumption that not only the composite behaves as a continuum, but
that the series of laminate layers acts as a homogeneous material with properties estimated
based on the properties of the layer and the winding angle, and that finally, failure criteria are
functions of the level of equivalent stress.
Laminate properties may be estimated by summing the layer properties (adjusted for winding
angle) over all layers. For example
Where:
ExLAM = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate
tLAM = thickness of laminate
E⊥k = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate layer k
Cik = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to longitudinal laminate axis
Cjk = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to transverse laminate axis
tk = thickness of laminate layer k
After composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters can be
determined as though it were made of homogeneous material that is, based on component
cross-sectional and composite material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the
cross-sections, and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be
written as:
σaa = Faa / Aaa ± Mba / Sba ± Mca / Sca
σbb = Fbb / Abb ± Mab / Sab ± Mcb / Scb
σcc = Fcc / Acc ± Mac / Sac ± Mbc / Sbc
τab = Fab / Aab ± Mbb / Rab
τac = Fac / Aac ± Mcc / Rac

τba = Fba / Aba ± Maa / Rba

τbc = Fbc / Abc ± Mcc / Rbc
τca = Fca / Aca ± Maa / Rca
τcb = Fcb / Acb ± Mbb / Rcb
Where:
σij = normal stress along axis i on face j
Fij = force acting along axis i on face j
Aij = area resisting force along axis i on face j
Mij = moment acting about axis i on face j
Sij = section modulus about axis i on face j
τij = shear stress along axis i on face j
Rij = torsional resistivity about axis i on face j
Using the relationships developed under macro, mini, and micro analysis, these stresses can be
resolved back into local stresses within the laminate layer, and from there, back into stresses
within the fiber and the matrix. From these, the failure criteria of those microscopic components,
and hence, the component as a whole, can be checked.
Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for Piping Systems

The macro-level analysis described above is the basis for the preeminent FRP piping codes in use
today, including Code BS 7159 (Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping
Systems for Individual Plants or Sites) and the UKOOA Specification and Recommended Practice
for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore.
BS 7159
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order to
calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have material
parameters based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as thermal, weight,
pressure, and axial extension due to pressure need be evaluated simultaneously. Failure is based
on the equivalent stress calculation method. Because one normal stress (radial stress) is
traditionally considered to be negligible in typical piping configurations, this calculation reduces to
the greater of (except when axial stresses are compressive):
(when axial stress is greater than hoop)
(when hoop stress is greater than axial)

A slight difficulty arises when evaluating the calculated stress against an allowable, due to the
orthotropic nature of the FRP piping normally the laminate is designed in such a way to make the
pipe much stronger in the hoop, than in the longitudinal, direction, providing more than one
allowable stress. This difficulty is resolved by defining the allowable in terms of a design strained,
rather than stress, in effect adjusting the stress allowable in proportion to the strength in each
direction. In other words, the allowable stresses for the two equivalent stresses above would be
(ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design strain is selected from
Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature conditions.

Actual stress equations as enumerated by BS 7159 display below:

1. Combined stress straights and bends:
σC = (σf + 4σS ) εd ELAM
2 2
0.5
or
σC = (σX + 4σS εd ELAM
2 2)0.5
Where:
ELAM = modulus of elasticity of the laminate; in CAESAR II, the first equation uses the modulus
for the hoop direction and in the second equation, the modulus for the longitudinal direction is
used.
σC = combined stress
σΦ = circumferential stress
= σΦP + σΦB
σS = torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
σX = longitudinal stress
= σXP + σXB
σΦP = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + td) / 2 td
σΦB = circumferential bending stress
2 2 0.5
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFΦi) + Mo SIFΦo) ] for bends, = 0 for straights
MS = torsional moment on cross-section
Di = internal pipe diameter
td = design thickness of reference laminate
I = moment of inertia of pipe
m = pressure stress multiplier of component
P = internal pressure
Mi = in-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFΦi= circumferential stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
M = out-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFΦo = circumferential stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
σXP = longitudinal pressure stress
= P(Di + td) / 4 td
σXB = longitudinal bending stress
2 2 0.5
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFxi) + Mo SIFxo) ]
SIFxi = longitudinal stress intensification factor for in-plane moment

SIFxo = longitudinal stress intensification factor for out-plane moment

2. Combined stress branch connections:
σCB = ((σΦP + σbB) + 4σSB ) ≤ εd ELAM
2 2
0.5
Where:
σCB = branch combined stress
σΦP = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + tM) / 2 tM
σbB = non-directional bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFBi)2 + Mo SIFBo)2]0.5
σSB = branch torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
tM = thickness of the reference laminate at the main run
SIFBi = branch stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFBo = branch stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
3. When longitudinal stress is negative (net compressive):
σΦ - VΦx σx ≤ εΦ ELAMΦ
Where:
VΦx = Poisson’s ratio giving strain in longitudinal direction caused by stress in circumferential
direction
εΦ = design strain in circumferential direction
ELAMΦ= modulus of elasticity in circumferential direction

BS 7159 also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.

BS 7159 imposes a number of limitations on its use, the most notable being: the limitation of a
system to a design pressure of 10 bar, the restriction to the use of designated design laminates,
and the limited applicability of the k- and i- factor calculations to pipe bends (that is, mean wall
thickness around the intrados must be 1.75 times the nominal thickness or less).
This code appears to be more sophisticated, yet easy to use. We recommend that its calculation
techniques be applied even to FRP systems outside its explicit scope, with the following
recommendations:
 Pressure stiffening of bends should be based on actual design pressure, rather than allowable
design strain.
 Design strain should be based on manufacturer’s test and experience data wherever possible
(with consideration for expected operating conditions).
 Fitting k- and i- factors should be based on manufacturer’s test or analytic data, if available.
UKOOA
The UKOOA Specification is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that it
simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more limitations and more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions.

Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an idealized
envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses that cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(σx / σx-all) + (σhoop / σhoop-all) - [σx σhoop / (σx-all σhoop-all)] ≤ 1.0
2 2
Where:
σx-all = allowable stress, axial
σhoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
σx-all (also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where σhoop is twice sx-(a natural
condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure), as shown in the following figure.
An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of
safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other loads are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes ≤ f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 σa ) / (r f1 LTHS)
b
σa = axial bending stress due to mechanical loads

b
r = σa(0:1)/σa(2:1)
σa(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
σa(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Code Stress Code Allowable
σa (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t) ≤

b
(f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:

P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
K and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to be
used for tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process;
no consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required
calculations are not explicitly detailed.
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II

Practical Applications
CAESAR II has had the ability to model orthotropic materials such as FRP almost from its
inception. It also can specifically handle the requirements of the BS 7159 Code, the UKOOA
Specification, and more recently ISO 14692. FRP material parameters corresponding to those of
many vendors’ lines are provided with CAESAR II. You can pre-select these parameters to be the
default values whenever FRP piping is used. Other options, as to whether the BS 7159 pressure
stiffening requirements should be carried out using design strain or actual strain can be set in
CAESAR II’s configuration module as well.

Selecting material (20) FRP (FIBER REIN PLASTIC) activates the CAESAR II orthotropic
material model and brings in the appropriate material parameters from the pre-selected materials.
When the software uses the orthotropic material model, it changes two fields from their previous
isotropic values: Elastic Modulus (C) changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio
changes to Ea/Eh*Vh/a, as shown below.
These changes are necessary because orthotropic models require more material parameters
than isotropic models. For example, there is no longer a single modulus of elasticity for the
material, but now two: axial and hoop. There is no longer a single Poisson’s ratio, but again two:
Vh/a (Poisson’s ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced strain in the hoop
direction) and Va/h (Poisson’s ratio relating strain in the hoop direction due to stress-induced strain
in the axial direction). Also, unlike isotropic materials, the shear modulus does not follow the
relationship G = 1 / E (1-V), so that value must be explicitly input.

To minimize input, a few of these parameters can be combined due to their use in the software.
Generally, the only time that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction or the Poisson’s ratios
is used during flexibility analysis is when calculating piping elongation due to pressure (note that
the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction is used when determining certain stress allowables
for the BS 7159 code):
dx = (σx / Ea - Va/h * σhoop / Eh) L
Where:
dx = extension of piping element due to pressure
σx = longitudinal pressure stress in the piping element
E = modulus of elasticity in the axial direction
Va/h = Poisson’s ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced strain
in the hoop direction
σhoop = hoop pressure stress in the piping element
Eh = modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction
L = length of piping element
This equation can be rearranged, to require only a single new parameter, as:
dx = (σx - Va/h σhoop * (Ea / Eh )) * L / Ea
In theory, that single parameter, Vh/a is identical to (Ea / Eh * Va/h) giving: dx = (σx -
Vh/aσhoop) * L / Ea
The shear modulus of the material is required in ordered to develop the stiffness matrix. In
CAESAR II, this value, expressed as a ratio of the axial modulus of elasticity, is brought in from the
pre-selected material, or can be changed on a problem-wise basis using the Special Execution
Parameters (on page 316) dialog box accessed by the Environment menu from the piping
spreadsheet (see figure). This dialog box also shows the coefficient of thermal expansion
(extracted from the vendor file or user entered) for the material, as well as the default laminate
type, as defined by the BS 7159 Code:
 Type 1
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
 Type 2
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal and an
 Type 3
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with an internal and an
The latter is used during the calculation of flexibility and stress intensification factors for piping
bends.

You can enter bend and tee information by using the auxiliary spreadsheets.
You can also change bend radius and laminate type data on a bend by bend basis, as
shown in the corresponding figure.
Specify BS 7159 fabricated and molded tee types by defining CAESAR II tee types 1 and 3
respectively at intersection points. CAESAR II automatically calculates the appropriate flexibility
and stress intensification factors for these fittings as per code requirements.
Enter the required code data on the Allowables auxiliary spreadsheet. The software provides
fields for both codes, number 27 – BS 7159 and number 28 – UKOOA. After selecting BS 7159,
CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = Longitudinal Design Stress = εd ELAMX
Kn1 through Kn9 = Cyclic Reduction Factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = Ratio of Hoop Modulus of Elasticity to Axial Modulus of Elasticity

K = Temperature Differential Multiplier (as per BS 7159 paragraph 7.2.1)
After selecting UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = hoop design stress = f1 * LTHS
R1 through R9 = ratio r = (σa(0:1) / σa(2:1))
f2 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)
K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the
system.
Performing the analysis is simpler than the system modeling. <Product> evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases. In this case, three are built:

 Operating includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, and
pressure. This case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational equipment
nozzle and restraint loads, hot displacements, and so forth.
 Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case is
used to determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
 Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to
evaluate fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II displays a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and
results type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From
the stress report, you can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress
criteria.
For UKOOA, the piping is considered to be within allowable limits when the operating stress falls
within the idealized stress envelope this is illustrated by the shaded area in the following figure.
Conclusion
Pipe stress analysis software with worldwide acceptance is now available for evaluation of FRP
piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP piping codes. This means
that access to the same analytical methods and tools enjoyed by engineers using steel pipe is
available to users of FRP piping design.
References
1. Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME,
1990
2. Olson, J. and Cramer, R., "Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Pro\-gram MEC
21, Mare Island Report 277-59," 1959
3. Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Indus\-try, 1989
4. Hashin, Z., "Analysis of Composite Materials a Survey," Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept.
1983
5. Greaves, G., "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design," Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6. Puck, A. and Schneider, W., "On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of Filament-Wound
Glass-Fibre/Resin Composites," Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7. Hashin, Z., "The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials," Journal of Applied Mechanics,
March 1962

8. Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, "The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials," Journal
of Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9. Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., "Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite Materials,"
AIAA Journal, Sept. 1966
10. Walpole, L. J., "Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations," Advances
in Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11. BS 7159: 1989 British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass
Reinforced Plastics GRP Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites.
12. UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore., 1994
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions

KHK is the High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan, an independent organization. KHK
creates and issues technical standards for designing plant infrastructure against seismic loading.
CAESAR II addresses KHK standards within the Seismic Wizard (on page 279) in the piping
input. You can use the Seismic Wizard to calculate a seismic load, which is expressed in units of
acceleration due to gravity (g).
When analyzing seismic conditions, you should calculate the support movement and ground
liquefaction according to KHK seismic standards and the support configuration, and enter those
values into the software.
KHK Level 1
Level 1 assesses conditions in the likelihood of a probable strong earthquake during the life of
equipment. The goal is for the plant or facilities to remain safe without plastic deformation and
without leakage.
KHK Level 1 evaluation requires the following stress types
K1P
The K1P stress type defines the primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
The longitudinal stress is due to pressure, weight, and design seismic force (g-load on piping).
For the equations and allowables for K1P, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
Quick Reference Guide.
CAESAR II treats the K1P stress type as an occasional (OCC) stress type for other
piping codes.
K1SR
The K1SR stress type defines the secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to the design seismic force (g-load on piping) and support
movement.
For the equations and allowables for K1SR, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K1SR stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
piping codes.

KHK Level 1 Example

Load Case Stress Combination Condition
Type Method
L1 W+T1+P1 OPE NA Typical operating load case
L2 W+P1 SUS NA Sustained load case
L3 W+T1+P1+U1 OPE NA Operating condition with inertial seismic

force (g)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1+D1 OPE NA Operating condition with inertial seismic

force (g) + relative support movement
L5 L3-L1 OCC Algebraic Inertial seismic force (g)
L6 L4-L1 OCC Algebraic Inertial seismic force (g) + relative

support displacement
L7 L2+L5 K1P Scalar Sustained condition + inertial seismic

force (g)
L8 2L6 K1SR Algebraic Stress range including inertial seismic

force(g) + relative support movement
Different loading directions may require more elaborate load cases.
KHK Level 2
Level 2 assesses the strongest possible earthquake during the life of that equipment. This
earthquake has an extremely low probability of occurrence. The goal is for the plant or facilities to
remain safe without any leakage, but with plastic deformation of piping allowed. KHK Level 2
requires consideration of ground distortion by possible soil liquefaction, in addition to ground
acceleration and support displacement.
In a piping system under extreme earthquake conditions (such as defined by KHK Level 2), the
pipe bends go into the plastic range before the straight pipe becomes plastic. Level 2 incorporates
the bend plasticity in the solution process by applying equivalent elastic flexibilities. This solution
is performed in an iterative way, with the opening or closing of each bend evaluated at the end of
each iteration. If the bend angle changes more than the prescribed limit, the analysis modifies the
bend stiffness to simulate plasticity and reanalyzes for that particular iteration. This process
continues until the solution converges for that load case. The converged bend angle is then
compared to the allowable bend angle to check failure criteria. The software reports this data in a
special bend report.
Due to the iterative solution required to address bend plasticization, the software limits
the KHK 2 load cases to basic load combinations.
KHK Level 2 evaluation requires the following stress types. You may need to construct multiple
load cases to implement these conditions.
K2P

The K2P stress type defines the primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
The longitudinal stress is due to internal pressure, weight, and seismic force (g-load on piping).
For the equations and allowables for K2P, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2P stress type as an occasional (OCC) stress type for other
piping codes. The software sets the allowable to 0 for other piping codes due to the extreme
nature of the loading.
K2SA
The K2SA stress type defines secondary cyclic stress amplitude for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The stress amplitude is due to seismic force (g-load on piping) and support movement.
You should use K2SA for secondary amplitude load cases.
For the equations and allowables for K2SA, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2SA stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
K2SR
The K2SR stress type defines the secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to seismic force (g-load on piping) and response
displacement. You should use K2SR for secondary range load cases.
For the equations and allowables for K2SR, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2SR stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
K2L
The K2L stress type defines liquefaction for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes. Liquefaction
causes the angular displacement corresponding to a maximum equivalent plastic strain of 5% (in
degrees).
For the equations and allowables for K2L, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2L stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other

Summary of Stresses and Allowables for KHK Level 2

Stress Type OPE Earthquake Allowable
P W T U D
K2P    Bend: θa=1.14/h

0.46
(Inertia)
Others: 2S
K2SA   Amplitude: Plasticity-2%

(Inertia) (Support Structure)
Bend: θa=1.14/h
0.46
Others: 2Sy
K2SR   Range: Plasticity-4%

(Inertia) (Support Structure)
Bend: θa= 2x1.14/h
0.46
Others: 2x2Sy
K2L  Range: Plasticity-5%

(Ground Displacement/
Bend: θa=2.43/h
0.46
Liquefaction)
Others: 4Sy
KHK Level 2 Example

Load Case Stress Condition
Type
L1 W+T1+P1 OPE Typical operating load case
L2 W+P1 SUS Sustained load case
L3 W+T1+P1+U1 K2P Operating condition with inertial seismic force (g)
L4 U1+D1 K2SA Stress amplitude including inertial seismic force (g) + &
relative support displacement
L5 D2 K2L Ground displacement (liquefaction)
You can also construct a range case to use the K2SR stress type, as shown in following example.
In this example, the range is twice the load amplitude. You can add this load case to the load case
set in the previous example.
Load Case Stress Condition

Type
L6 2U1+2D1 K2SR Secondary stress range including inertial seismic force

(g) + & relative support displacement

Different loading directions may require more elaborate load cases.
Code Compliance Considerations

This section comprises general notes that cover code compliance. The first several pages contain
information that applies to all of the codes. The last pages contain code-specific discussions.
Review the general notes, highlighting those that apply to your problem. Also, review the notes for
the piping code that you need.
Configuration Editor (on page 55) gives details about the various parameters that you can use in
the CAESAR II setup file. Many of these parameters are discussed from an "application
point-of-view" in the text that follows. For more information on the CAESAR II setup file, see
Configuration Editor (on page 55).
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on

Piping Code Calculations
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) for all codes
Use the table below to determine which SIF value you need.
If you have... then use an SIF Value of ...
threaded joints 2.3
double welded slip-on flanges 1.2
lap joint flanges with B16.9 stub 1.6

ends
Calculate Bonney Forge sweepolet and insert weldolet fittings

Use the Weld ID on the SIF & TEE Auxiliary dialog box to calculate the sweepolet and insert
weldolet fittings.
If you can verify that the welds for these fittings are finished or dressed, then specifying
the weld ID lowers the SIF.
Bend SIF overrides

User-defined bend SIF overrides affect the entire cross section of the bend, and as such you
cannot use them to specify a single point on the bend curvature. You must specify the SIFs for the
bend TO node. CAESAR II will apply this SIF, in place of the code SIF, over the entire bend
curvature, from weldline to weldline.
The default value for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) bend and intersection SIFs is 2.3. Use
this value for all user-modified bends and intersections. The default flexibility factor value for FRP
bends is 1.0. If you modify these values, and generate the SIFs using the steel fatigue tests you
might not be able to use them as a basis for SIFs with FRP fittings.
CAESAR II does not permit the use of SIF values less than 1.0.

WRC 329
The only piping codes that cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 options, or the option to use
the ASME NC and ND rules for reduced intersections, are BS806 and the Swedish Power Method
1. These codes do not use the effective section modulus, and any extrapolation of the ASME
methods into these codes is unwarranted.
There is a small difference between Use WRC329 and Reduced Intersection = WRC329. Use
Use WRC329 for all full and reduced intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced tees.
Use Reduced Intersection =WRC329 for reduced fittings that are not welding tees or reinforced
fabricated tees. A fitting is reduced when d/D is less than 0.975.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.1 (1967),
HPGSL, or JPI codes
1. Include torsional stresses in all stress calculations (sustained and occasional).
2. Use a torsional SIF of (r/R) io.
3. Compute i(ib) use 0.6(R/T)2/3 [1+0.5(r/R)3](r/rp).
4. For i(ob) use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.5
2/3
when (r/R) < 0.9 use 0.9(R/T) (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
5. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
6. If the radius at the junction provided is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.1, B31.8, ASME III NC, ASME III ND, Navy 505, CAN Z662,
or Swedish Method 2 codes
1. For ib use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9
2/3
use 0.9(R/T) (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
3. If a radius at the provided junction is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for fittings
in the nuclear industry. Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than one
because they are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting SIFs.
CAESAR II does not permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If you generate a Bonney Forge Sweepolet SIF
that is less than 1.0, the default value 1.0 is used.
The Bonney Forge SIF Data came from the technical flyer: "Bonney Forge Stress Intensification
Factors" Bulletin 789/Sl-1, Copyright 1976.
Although CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, you cannot specify two
SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example, you cannot specify a socket weld
SIF and an intersection SIF at the same point.

Stress calculations for under-specified fittings

For two element joints use the largest diameter and the smallest wall thickness, when
discrepancies exist between the two adjoining pipes. For two element fittings modeled as socket
welds use the largest wall thickness. Both of these selections generate the largest SIFs and the
most conservative stress calculations for under-specified fittings.
The mismatch given for girth butt welds is the average mismatch and not the maximum
mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied.
If a fillet leg is given in conjunction with a socket weld SIF definition, then both socket weld types
result in the same SIF.
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index

The B31.3 Sustained case SIF factor in the setup file affects the B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.4,
B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.5, NAVY 505, CAN Z662, B31.1 (1967), GPTC, HPGSL, and JPI codes.
For B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI, the software defaults this configuration
setting to 0.75.
For B31.8, the software sets the SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index configuration setting to
0.75.
Corrosion
Calculate the corroded effective section modulus by using π(r2)te
Where:
r is the average cross-sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe
(te) is the corroded thickness.
Select the thickness (te) based on the non-corroded thicknesses of the branch and
header, in other words, the lesser of Th and iTb. The resulting value has the corrosion subtracted
from it before the effective section modulus calculation is made.
The All Cases Corroded configuration setting applies to all piping codes, with the following
exceptions:
 The software always sets the primary load stress types SUS, OCC, K1P, and K2P to corroded
for B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, HPGSL, and JPI. The software also sets the same primary load
stress types for EN-13480 and CODETI codes, which use the In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF.
 For B31.5, the software sets HYD to corroded in addition to the primary load stress types.
 For Stoomwezen, IGE/TD/12, and DNV, All Cases Corroded applies only to HYD. For all
other load case stress types with these code standards, corrosion is used.
 All Cases Corroded is ignored for BS 7159, UKOOA, and ISO 14692. For these codes, the
software uses corrosion for all load case stress types.
Using more than one Piping Code

If you use different piping codes in one job, the code that displays at the top of the Output Stress
report is the last code used during model input. SIFs, allowables, and code equations are all
computed in accordance with the code that varies with the input.

When there are multiple piping codes in the same piping job, and a piping code change occurs at
an intersection, if the intersection is completely defined with three pipes framing into the
intersection then the piping code used to generate the SIF equations will be that one associated
with the first header pipe framing into the intersection. If the intersection is only partially defined,
then the piping code will be selected from the first pipe framing into the intersection point.
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress

The ASME piping codes primarily combine moments for thermal expansion stresses. When there
is any tendency for large axial forces to exist in the pipe these code equations are not adequate.
An example of this is for buried or partially buried pipe. Here the axial stresses can be very high.
This configuration setting is not applicable to B31.4 and B31.4 XI because the code standard
provides specific equations for the longitudinal stress, including axial stress and equations for
thermal expansion.
Application of Torsion in Stress Calculations

The piping codes that do not, by default, include torsion in the sustained or occasional stress
calculations display below:
B31.3 Navy 505
B31.5 CAN Z662
B31.8 B31.1 (1967)
PD 8010-1 GPTC/Z380
HPGSL JPI
EN 13480 CODETI
(In-Plane/ (In-Plane/
Out-Plane SIF) Out-Plane SIF)
These codes tell you to add the longitudinal stresses due to weight, pressure, and other sustained
loadings so torsion is not added. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal stresses. You can
request that torsion is added into the sustained and occasional stress equations by including the
Add Torsion in SL Stress option in the setup file. The torsion stress is still not intensified as it is
in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered an oversight and is corrected
in WRC 329. You can include this fix by running any of the above codes and including the Use
WRC330 option in the setup file.
Radius Entry for Mitered Joints

The radius given in CAESAR II is always the equivalent closely spaced miter radius. Only use the
radius calculation for widely spaced miters in the piping codes after breaking the widely spaced
miter bend down into individual single cut miters as recommended.

Reduced intersection calculations

Use reduced intersection calculations when d/D < 0.975.
Where:
d = Outside Diameter of the Branch
D = Outside Diameter of the Header
B31.1 and the ASME Section III piping codes provide stress intensification factors for reduced
branch ends. None of the other piping codes provide these SIFs. The Reduced Intersection
option in the setup file enables other piping code users to access improved SIFs for reduced
fittings. You should review the notes associated with the B31.1 and the ASME Section III codes
that follow to verify that any other parameters or input associated with the reduced intersection
calculations are set as necessary.
Pressure Stiffening
If you request pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, CAESAR II
applies pressure stiffening for all bends and for both miter types.
Occasional Load Factor

The defaults occasional load factor from the setup file used in the evaluation of the allowable
stress, display the text that follows for each of the piping codes.
 B31.1: The occasional load factor is 1.15.
 B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
 B31.4: OCC load factor does not affect a B31.4 analysis in CAESAR II.
 B31.4 Chapter XI: OCC load factor does not affect a B31.4 Chapter XI analysis in CAESAR II.
 B31.5: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
 B31.8: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case the
allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
 B31.9: OCC load factor is 1.15.
 ASME Section III NC and ND: The default value of OCC is 1.2, the occasional stress allowable
is 1.8 (1.2 X 1.5)Sh but not greater than 1.5Sy. If OCC is 1.5 or 2.0, the allowable is set to the
minimum of 2.25Sh/1.8Sy (Level C) or 3.0Sh/2.0Sy (Level D). Note in the latter two cases,
enter Sm for Sh.
 Navy 505: Occasional cases are not addressed but defaults to the method used in B31.1, and
an OCC value of 1.15 is the default.
 Z662: The occasional case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable for the case
defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable.
 BS806: The occasional load case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable stress
for the OCC load case is KSh. This is the occasional load factor times the sustained
allow\-able. The default value for k is 1.0.
 Swedish Method 1: OCC is not used. The load cases are not differentiated. The same
allowable Sigma(ber)/1.5 is used for all load cases.
 Swedish Method 2: Uses an OCC default of 1.2 as recommended in the Swedish Piping Code.

 B31.1(1967): OCC default is 1.15.

 Stoomwezen: OCC default is 1.2.
 RCC-M C&D: OCC default is 1.2.
 CODETI: OCC default is 1.15.
 NORWEGIAN: OCC default is 1.2.
 FBDR: OCC default is 1.15
 BS 7159: The occasional load case is not defined.
 UKOOA: The occasional load case is not defined.
 IGE/TD/12: Table 4 of the code addresses occasional stress increases. The occasional factor
in the setup file has no bearing on this code.
 EN-13480: The occasional load factor varies from 1.0 to 1.8, depending on the loading. Refer
to Section 12.3.3 for details.
 GPTC/Z380: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case the
allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
 HPGSL: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
 JPI: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
You can change the occasional load factor from the software defaults by using the setup file. Enter
the value as a percent.
Code-Specific Notes
B31.1
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on bends
in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=No option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using B31.1

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter. CAESAR II does not verify the B31.1 criteria "B" length for closely spaced
miters.
B31.1 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation. F/A and the pressure stresses are
added to the bending stress, whether the tensile or compressive component of bending, to
produce the largest longitudinal stress component. This is true for all codes where the addition of
axial and pressure terms are concerned. You can include the axial force terms into the code stress
by inserting the Add F/A In Stress=Yes option in the setup file.
The F/A forces are structural forces developed in the pipe independent of the pressure
PD/4t forces.
Calculate reduced branch stress intensification factors (SIFs) using B31.1

In 1980, B31.1 added a reduced branch SIF equation to Appendix D. This equation came from
ASME Section III. However, B31.1 continued to use the effective section modulus calculation for

the branch. The ASME Section III rules clearly stated that the branch section modulus, not the
effective section modulus should be used with the new SIF. B31.1 continued use of the effective
section modulus produced unnecessarily high calculated stresses. This error was corrected in the
1989 version of B31.1. Prior to CAESAR II version 3.0, you had two options:
 Use the pre-1980 version of the B31.1 SIF rules
 Use the very conservative post-1980 B31.1 SIF rules
These options also exist in version 3.0 and later except that the section modulus problem is
corrected. If you need to run version 3.0 and later without the section modulus correction, then
include the B31.1 Reduced Z Fix=No option in the setup file.
Calculate reduced intersection branch using B31.1

Reduced intersection branch SIFs were not intended for reinforced or welding tees. Conservative
results are produced, but the original researchers did not intend for SIFs to be used for these
fittings. You can disable the reduced branch fitting calculations for reinforced or welded tees by
including the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT option in the setup file. This produces less
conservative results, but can in some cases be justified.
B31.1 102.3.2 (c) says to divide the allowable stresses coming from the stress tables in Appendix
A by the applicable weld joint factors listed in Paragraph 102.4.3.
Calculate the B31.1 stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * (Occ)
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.15
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using B31.1

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.
B31.1 reducer default values

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
maximum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*Alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End

D2 - Diameter of the Small End

t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - the Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan[ (D1-D2) / (2*length of the sloped portion of the reducer*0.6) ]
Alpha is the slope of the (concentric) reducer transition in degrees. If unspecified,
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60° and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
B31.3
widely-spaced miter.

In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are separate and unique.
B31.3 piping code gives the equation for the expansion stress. Because that equation does not
include the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe, CAESAR II does not include the F/A
component of the stress in the expansion stress equation. The code also says that you can add
the F/A component where it is significant. Change this by including the Add F/A In Stress option
in the setup file. The F/A longitudinal stress components are added by default to the code stress
component for all other stress categories.
B31.3 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
Calculate socket welds using B31.3

B31.3 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3 for all
B31.3 socket welds.
B31.3 2014 uses 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut. The software provides 2.1 as a
legacy value for calculations based on earlier versions.

Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = Sh * (Occ)
Where:


Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
Calculate corroded stress using B31.3

By default, B31.3 applies corrosion to section modulus calculations for sustained and occasional
stress calculation. Specifying All Stress Cases Corroded in the setup file performs the corroded
stress calculations for all stress calculations.
Calculate pressure effects on miters using B31.3

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in the B31.3 piping code.

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Flanged end modifications
widely-spaced miter.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections

B31.3 Chapter IX adds the F/A longitudinal stress components and torsion to the code stress
component for all stress categories.
Girth butt welds default value

Calculate socket welds

B31.3 Chapter IX makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds
without undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3
for all B31.3 Chapter IX socket welds.
B31.3 2014 uses 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut. The software provides 2.1 as a
legacy value for calculations based on earlier versions.

Calculate the stress allowables

Expansion Allowable = 1.25Sc+0.25Sh
Occasional Allowable = Sh * (Occ)
Where:
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
Calculate corroded stress

By default, B31.3 Chapter IX applies corrosion to section modulus calculations for sustained and
occasional stress calculation. Specifying All Stress Cases Corroded in the setup file performs
the corroded stress calculations for all stress calculations.
Reducer default values

B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI

Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on bends
in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends in the setup file.

widely spaced miter.
B31.4 girth butt welds default value



B31.4 uses EFF, (found in the Allowable Stress auxiliary field). B31.4 uses EFF in the Hoop
allowable. For more information, see US Code Stresses in the CAESAR II Quick Reference
Guide.

Calculate effective section modulus using B31.4

B31.4 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default Flexibility Factor value is 1.0.
Calculate Code Stress (B31.4 only)

The B31.4 code standard defines allowable values provided in the table Allowable Values for
Pipeline System Stresses. The table also indicates that the code classifies stresses as restrained,
unrestrained and inland riser and platform. CAESAR II (version 9.0 and beyond) uses this table
and the allowable stresses with the exceptions explained below.
Offshore liquid pipeline, discussed in Chapter IX of the code, has its own stresses and allowable
values. For more information, see B31.4 Chapter IX (on page 1024).
Chapter XI of the code covers slurry pipeline systems and follows the stress calculations of the
main body with some differences in the allowable values. For more information, see B31.4
Chapter XI.
You can select the following options through the Allowable Stress Indicator (on page 226) field
for B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI jobs:
 Restrained Pipeline - The software calculates the stress in that particular element as fully
restrained.
 Unrestrained Pipeline - The software calculates the included elements as unrestrained.
 CAESAR II Determines - The software selects a stress equation based on the calculated
axial load in the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation
when the axial pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load or otherwise applies the
unrestrained stress calculations. The limiting load is the load to fully constrain the pipe axially
against the linear superposition of thermal expansion and pressure elongation (when Bourdon
pressure effect is activated in the special execution options). The restrained/unrestrained
status can change from element to element. This option is most suitable with the
Underground Pipe Modeler or when modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints.
 Inland/Riser Platform - The software calculates the included elements as unrestrained. This
option is not available for B31.4 XI.
Allowable Stress Indicator defines the calculated stresses and the allowable values. For more
information, see US Code Stresses in the Quick Reference Guide. The B31.4 code standard also
provides examples of restrained versus unrestrained conditions.
 The software treats the elements as unrestrained if the indicator field is set to Inland/Riser
Platform.
 When the pipe element is buried in the Underground Pipe Modeler (on page 509) the software
sets Allowable Stress Indicator to CAESAR II Determines.
For the primary load case types (SUS, OCC, OPE and HYD), the software calculates hoop stress,
longitudinal stress, and equivalent combined stress and their respective allowable limits.
CAESAR II reports the stress and allowable limit for the largest (stress/allowable) ratio. If the code
standard does not specify a stress or an allowable, or the allowable is zero, then the software

excludes that stress from the code stress determination. When all allowables are zero, the
software sets the code stress to the largest stress.
The software reports zero equivalent combined stress for unrestrained
elements. It also treats the HYD stress type as unrestrained for any Allowable Stress Indicator
selection.
In accordance with the piping code, the software calculates the longitudinal stress by considering
both positive and negative values of the bending stress in the analysis for both restrained and
unrestrained pipe. CAESAR II uses the largest longitudinal stress in the code stress
determination.
When calculating equivalent stresses or strains, the software considers the most critical
combination of sustained, occasional, construction, and transient loads that can be expected.
The software calculates hoop stress according to the code standard, which indicates it should be
based on the D/t ratio.
The Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé) (on page 103) configuration setting
is not applicable in this situation.
For slurry pipelines (B31.4, Chapter XI), see the C403.2 section of B31.4 2016 for the hoop stress
allowable, which is used for both restrained and unrestrained pipe. For other stresses, the
allowable is according to the table in the design section of the standard.
The code provides the following exceptions to the allowable values:
 For B31.4, CAESAR II calculates the hoop allowable (0.9Sy) for the HYD stress type according
to section 437.4.1 of the B31.4 2016.
 For B31.4 XI, CAESAR II calculates the longitudinal allowable for the OCC stress type
(0.88Sy) according to section C403.3.1 of B31.4 2016 and calculates the Hoop allowable
(0.9Sy) for the HYD stress type according to section C437.4.1 of B31.4 2016.
For more information, see US Code Stresses in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The software calculates code stress for the EXP stress type according to section 402.5.1 of B31.4
2016 for restrained pipe and per section 402.5.2 for unrestrained pipe. The software computes the
allowable expansion stress for unrestrained pipe according to section 403.3.2of B31.4 2016
(Criteria for Allowable Stress Due to Periodic or Cyclic Loading). In this situation, SL (stress due to
sustained loads) used in the allowable calculation is the minimum between the maximum of
sustained stress and the additive longitudinal allowable stress for unrestrained pipe (0.75Sy). Sy is
the minimum yield strength.
The New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable (on page 104) configuration
setting is not applicable in this situation.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of B31.4. For more information, see B31.4 and
B31.4 Chapter XI (on page 1022).
Calculate Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as stated in the standard B31.4
code.

Calculate stress using B31.4 Chapter IX

Use the uncorroded wall thickness to make stress calculations.
Calculate load cases using B31.4 Chapter IX

There is no provision for a code check for the expansion load case, so no expansion cases are
generated under this code. Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically.
Do three stress calculations for these load cases, each with a different allowable limit. The Stress
Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along with its specific
allowable. These three stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh ≤ F1 Sy
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| ≤ 0.8 Sy
Equivalent Stress: Se ≤ 0.9 Sy
Where:
Sh = (Pi – Pe) D / 2t, when D/t >= 20
Sh = (Pi – Pe) (D-t) / 2t, when D/t < 20
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.60 or 0.72, see Table A402.3.5(a) of the B31.4 Code
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SL = Sa + Sb or Sa - Sb, whichever results in greater stress value
Sa = Axial Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Sb = Bending Stress
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + St2]1/2
St = Torsional Stress
B31.5
B31.8
Restrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):
For Straight Pipe:
Both SL and SC < 0.9ST (OPE)
Both SL, and SC < 0.9ST (SUS)

SL < 0.9ST and Sc < ST (OCC)

and
* The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable.
For All Other Components
SL < 0.9ST (OPE, SUS, OCC)
Unrestrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):

SL < 0.75ST (SUS, OCC)
SE < f[1.25(SC + SH) – SL] (EXP)
Where:
SL = SP + SX + SB
SP = 0.3SHoop (for restrained pipe); 0.5SHoop (for unrestrained pipe)
SX = R/A
SB = MB/Z (for straight pipe/bends with SIF = 1.0); MR/Z (for other components)
SC = Max (|SHoop – SL|, sqrt[SL2 – SLSHoop + SHoop2])
MR = sqrt[(0.75iiMi)2 + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt2]
SE = ME/Z
ME = sqrt[(0.75iiMi)2 + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt2]
S = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
T = Temperature Derating Factor
SH = 0.33SUT
SC = 0.33SU
SU = Specified Minimum Ultimate Tensile Stress
B31.8 distinguishes between restrained and unrestrained piping for the purposes of stress
computations. To implement B31.8 you must define which sections of the piping system are
restrained, as per Code Section 833.1. In general, restrained piping is piping in which the soil or
supports prevent axial displacement of flexure at bends. Conversely, unrestrained piping is piping
that is free to displace axially or flex at bends. For more information, see Section 833.1.
Processing a B31.8 model through the Buried Pipe Modeler designates the buried sections as
restrained.
For restrained pipe, B31.8 specifies that the operating case stresses should include the thermal
axial stress component, a constant stress due to linear thermal expansion, but exclude thermal
bending stresses from the SB component. Because CAESAR II cannot go back and segregate
internal thermal forces and moments from those of other loads, the thermal axial stresses are
calculated and included as part of SX (as opposed to added as a constant), and thermal bending
stresses are conservatively included in SB.
Bending stress SB is defined differently for straight pipe or "large-radius" bends than it is for other
components. CAESAR II resolves the ambiguity of exactly what constitutes a "large-radius" bend
by considering any bend having an SIF of 1.0 as being a "large-radius" bend.

Occasional load default values

The occasional load default value for B31.8 is 1.111 (1/0.9) and is only applied to the allowable for
SC combined stress calculated only in straight pipes. The allowable in this case is ST as opposed
to 0.9ST. There is no provision for increasing or decreasing this allowable.
In the case of occasional stresses in straight pipes, there are potentially two stresses (SL and SC)
to be compared against two different allowable limits. CAESAR II only prints the one that provides
the greater ratio of calculated stress versus allowable stress. You can visually determine which
stress prints by examining the magnitude of the allowable.

Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.
Modifications to the flexibility factor and Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) using B31.8
Modifications to the flexibility factor and SIF of bends resulting from flanged ends are permitted by
the code.
Calculate socket welds using B31.8

B31.8 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 2.1 for all
B31.8 socket welds.
Using reducers with B31.8

Use of reducers is subject to the following limitations:
 Alpha the reducer cone angle is limited to 60°
 The larger of D1/SQRT(t1) and D2/SQRT(t2) cannot exceed 100 where D1/t1 and D2/t2 are
the diameters and thicknesses of the large and small ends, respectively.
B31.8 Chapter VIII

Chapter VIII discusses the offshore requirements of B31.8. For more information, see B31.8 (on
page 1025)
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as in the standard B31.8 Code.
Make all stress calculations using the non-corroded wall thickness for the hoop and longitudinal
stresses. Use the corroded thickness for the combined stress.
Calculate the expansion load case using B31.8 Chapter VIII

generated under this code.

Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations, each with specific allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable displays in the stress report along with its specific
allowable. The stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh ≤ F1ST
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| ≤ 0.8S
Equivalent Stress: Se ≤ 0.9S
Where:
Sh = (Pi – Pe) D / 2t
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.50 or 0.72 see Table A842.22 of B31.8
S = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
T = Temperature Derating Factor see Table 841.116A of B31.8
The product of S and T, the yield stress at operating temperature, is required in
the SH field of the CAESAR II Input:
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + Ss ]1/2
2
Ss = Torsional Stress
B31.9 Notes
Paragraph 919.4.1.b states that for analysis methods follow B31.1. For more information, refer to
B31.1.
ASME III Subsections NC and ND

Calculate pressure stiffening using NC and ND
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using NC and ND

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in this code providing the bend is not a
Minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees using NC and ND
The minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees is 2.1.

Calculate B1 and B2 using NC and ND

Calculate B1 and B2 according to the equations in ASME NC and ND.
Calculate liberal allowable using NC and ND

If you are using this piping code and define a dynamic load case as a “Expansion”, a request for
Liberal Allowable is ignored and the (Sh-Sl) term is removed from the allowed limit (see below).
This is a programming decision rather than an interpretation of the piping code or a
recommendation for doing dynamic analysis.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using NC and ND

Using WRC 329 with NC or ND

For all intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced fabricated tees use the equation π*r2*t
to calculate the approximate section modulus for the stress calculations.
This includes all reduced intersections and all d/D ratios.
Determine the branch SIF using NC or ND

If you do not want to use the branch SIF of the Code for welding and reinforced reducing tees,
include the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT flag in the setup file.
Calculate the NC and ND stress allowables

Expansion Allowable = f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl)
Sustained Allowable = 1.5Sh If not at an intersection
Occasional Allowable = 1.8Sh not greater than 1.5Sy, if OCC=1.2;
2.25Sh not greater than 1.8Sy, if OCC=1.5;
3.0Sh not greater than 2.0Sy, if OCC=2.0
Where:
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
Sl = Sustained Stress from PD/4t+0.75iMb
Sy = Material Yield Stress
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
Calculate two pipe intersections using NC and ND

For two pipe intersections, for example butt welds or socket welds, B1 and B2 factors are 1.0. If
the ratio of the average branch to average run radius is less than 0.5, then apply the reduced

intersection rules to the B1 and B2 calculations regardless of the intersection type. If the reduced
intersection rules do not apply then use the following rules for butt welded fittings:
B2b = 0.4 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.5 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
You can modify the values for B1 and B2 for any node in the SIF&TEE auxiliary field. Any changes
you make to B1 and B2 on an auxiliary field only apply for that element, regardless of whether the
node is an intersection or not.
Calculate the ratio of r/R using NC and ND

When r/R < 0.5 use the following equations for B1 and B2:
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/rp), but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)1/4 but not < 1.5
Branch SIFs using NC and ND

WRC 329 produces smaller branch SIFs than ASME NC and ND, and the same run SIFs. The
branch SIFs are smaller by a factor of 2. This is when d/D<0.5 and WRC 329 corrects the Mob (out
of plane bending) inconsistency when d/D is between 0.5 and 1. In the lower ranges of d/D ratios
WRC 329 is less conservative than the present codes and in the higher ranges WRC 329 is more
conservative than the present codes.
Calculate Pvar using NC and ND

Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq 11.
CAESAR II forms occasional stresses by adding the sustained stress including pressure, and the
occasional stress including the stress difference between the operating pressure and the peak
pressure.
Limit for expansion stress range

To satisfy equations 10 or 11, the expansion stress, iMc/Z, must remain below the maximum of
either f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl) where Sl is the sustained stress as
defined by equation 11: Sl= PDo/4tn+0.75iMa/Z.
Calculate moment summations using NC and ND

The approach taken by CAESAR II for moment summations at inter\-sections to satisfy equations
8 and 9 is to use the SRSS of the moments at each end of the pipe framing into the intersection.
You do not have to adhere to the cumulative moment summation rules for a single intersection as
per NB 3683.1. In addition, use the effective section modulus rules of NC and ND for all
intersection stress calculations like equations 8 and 9. Use subsection NB to get the values for B1
and B2 only, and to compute the local flexibility if requested. Because of the use of this approach
in CAESAR II, there is no allowable calculated for intersection points and sustained or occasional
loads.

Determine sustained case SIF using NC and ND

Do not use the SIF in the ASME class 2 or 3 sustained stress calculations.
NC and ND reducer default values

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value: 2.0
max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
Alpha - the reducer cone angle in degrees
Where:
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length. If left blank, the value
is set from an estimated slope equal to the arc tangent times 1/2 the change in diameters times
sixty percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60º. The larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
B1=.5 if alpha ≤ 30º, 1.0 if 30º < alpha ≤ 60º; B2 = 1.0.
There is an error in the code, the code states note 12 however, they meant note 14.
Alpha cannot exceed 60º.
CANADIAN Z662
Calculate pressure stiffening using Z662
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using Z662

Pad thickness using Z662

There is no limit in Z662 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit the
pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For Z662, CAESAR II does not limit the pad
thickness.
Z662 girth butt welds default value

In-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors for intersections are the same.

Calculate socket welds using Z662

Z662 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Calculate effective section modulus using Z662

Z662 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Calculate the CANADIAN Z662 allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(T)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (Occ)(Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = 0.9(T)(Sy), if pipe is buried and axial stress is compressive
Operating Allowable = (T)(Sy), if pipe is not buried and axial stress is compressive
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
Fac = Construction Design Factor
T = Temperature De-rating Factor
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.0)
L = Location Factor
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the
allowable operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the
absence of bending stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress is
compressive in the presence of bending stress.
Section 4.6.2 requires the following:
1. The reduction of the axial expansion stress by the product of Poisson’s Ratio and the pressure
hoop stress.
2. The addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure
thrust loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the
operating load case, in the following manner:
1. If FAC is 1.0, the piping system is fully restrained in the axial direction as described in Section
4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2. If FAC is 0.001, the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are modeled (rather than just
assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure stress from the
equation (as described above), and takes bending stresses into consideration, as required by
Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:

Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3. If FAC is 0.0, the piping system is either not restrained, or is a freely spanning or above
ground portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the
longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial
stress including pressure is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4. CAESAR II does not do an operating code stress check for those elements for which the net
axial stress is longitudinal.
5. CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.
Z662 reducer default values

NAVY 505
Calculate pressure stiffening using Navy 505
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using Navy 505

Navy 505 girth butt welds default value

Calculate effective section modulus using Navy 505

Navy 505 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIF)s for intersections using Navy 505
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are the same.
Calculate liberal allowable using Navy 505

Navy 505 has no provision for a liberal allowable, that is, adding the difference between Sh and Sl
to the allowed expansion stress range. This feature from the control parameter spreadsheet has
no effect on 505 runs.
Calculate cold and the hot allowable using Navy 505

Navy 505 uses longitudinal weld joint efficiency (Eff) to compute the cold and the hot allowable
stress. The use of this parameter is subject to some speculation however.

Calculate the Navy 505 allowable for occasional loads

Navy 505 has no specific allowable for occasional loads. An occasional load factor (k), similar to
the B31.1 code is used, and the occasional allowable calculated from kSh.
Calculate the Navy 505 allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = [f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)]/Eff
Occasional Allowable = k*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Joint Efficiency (Not explicitly in the Code)
k = Occasional Load Factor, Defaults to 1.15
Use the B31.3 SUS Case SIF Factor option to multiply the SIFs for sustained and
occasional loads to be more in line with the current B31.1 practice.
BS806
For BS806, the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating
load case allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the
stress range allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs) using BS806

BS806 SIFs printed are labeled fti and fto for bends, and Bi and Bo for intersections.
Calculate pressure stiffening using BS806

bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
Pad thickness using BS806

There is no limit in BS806 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For BS806, CAESAR II does not limit the pad
thickness.
Flanged end modifications using BS806

The code permits modifications due to flanged ends for all bend types. This includes closely and
widely spaced mitered bends.
BS806 girth butt welds default value


Calculate the BS806 allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = lesser of (H)(Sc)+(H)(Sh) <or> (H)(Sc)+F
Sustained Allowable = Sy
Occasional Allowable = (Sy)(Occ)
Operating Allowable = S avg rupture at design temperature
Where:
H = Multiplication Factor 0.9 or 1.0 from CAESAR II
Sc = 0.2% Proof Stress at Room Temperature
Sh = 0.2% Proof Stress at Design Temperature
F = Mean Stress to Failure in Design Life at Design Temperature
Calculate pressure at intersections using BS806

The pressure calculation at the intersections is made as required in BS806 4.8.5.1 Eq. (17). The
pressure stress as per Eq. (17) is computed and then combined with the bending and torsional
moment at each of the intersection ends 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The m factor is computed as
required with a value of n=1, in other words, for non-interacting intersections. BS806 does not
address reducers for SIF calculations.
Other BS806 Notes

When there is more than one thermal case to evaluate, read the following note carefully
concerning CAESAR II and the application of BS806.
Regarding BS806 4.11.3.1 paragraph 2, for sectionalized systems: CAESAR II only
makes the moment summation on a load case by load case basis, and does not take the largest
moments for an axis for any combination of load cases. The CAESAR II method is designed to
enable you to set up and combine the effects of each of the load transients that the piping system
undergoes. This method, for the most part is used in the B31/ASME piping codes. The BS806
method is conservative in that it uses what is basically a shakedown approach and computes a
single worst case moment difference. The CAESAR II method satisfies the shakedown theory but,
also computes the moment range for each different load traversed. The BS806 method of
combining the maximum moment range is more conservative. The BS806 method also eliminates
the need to know where on the pipe the stress is the highest. Use the moment tables in Appendix
F, to get the moment difference between any two load cases. However, you cannot use the
moment tables to get the maximum moment difference for any of the three moment axes as
requested by the sectionalized piping rules. To satisfying 4.11.3.1(a) CAESAR II uses the
moment difference between the cold and the hot case to compute the stress.
You can only enter a single modulus of elasticity for a single element in each job. Different
elements can have different moduli of elasticity, but you cannot vary that modulus between load
cases in the same run. Also, you cannot use a cold and a hot moduli of elasticity in the same run.
For BS806 in 4.11.5.2 the value of n is 1.0.for all branches of the non-interacting type. See the
fourth paragraph 4.11.4.2 for the definition of n for interacting branches.

The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends displays in the following
plots.
Swedish Method 1 and 2

Calculate pressure stiffening using Swedish Method 1 and 2
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using Swedish Method 1 and 2

WRC329 recommendations
Swedish Method 1 cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 recommendations. WRC 329, if
requested, is ignored.
Calculate effective section modulus using Swedish Method 1

Swedish Method 1 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at
intersections.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using Swedish codes

Swedish Code item 9 is dealt with as a US tapered transition. Also, items 10 and 11 in the Swedish
table 9:2 correspond to items 8 and 9 in the CAESAR II nomenclature.
Calculate the allowable stress limits using Method 1

Sber = lesser of Sh or F
Allowable = (Fac)(Sber) / 1.5
Where:
Sh = Yield Stress at Temperature
F = Creep Rupture Stress at Temperature
Fac = Usually 1.5 for Pre-stressed Pipe Use 1.35.
Calculate the allowable stress limits using Method 2

Expansion Allowable = f ( 1.17S1 + 0.17S2 )
Occasional Allowable = Occ * Sh
Where:
S1 = Lesser of Sc or 0.267Sy
S2 = Lesser of Sh or 0.367Sy
Sc = Allowable Stress at Room Temperature (Stn2)
Sh = Allowable Stress at Design Temperature (Stn1)
Sy = Ultimate Tensile Strength at Room Temperature
Default girth butt welds for Swedish Method codes

If the weld is ground flush inside and out then the default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0.
Pressure Variation in Swedish Codes

Swedish methods 1 and 2 Beta in the code is entered in the Pvar field on the Allowable Stress
Auxiliary dialog box. Enter the value for Pvar in percent, for example 10.0 for ten percent. If left
blank, the default is 10.0 percent.
Limits on the reasonable Betas that you may enter for the Swedish piping code is 10% to 25%.
Anything less than 0.1 is taken to be 10% and anything entered greater than 0.25 is taken to be
25%.
Pressure Stress in Swedish Codes

Include the Use PD/4t option in the setup file to tell CAESAR II to use the thin walled equations for
stress calculations for Swedish Method 1 code compliance.

Default occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2

The default value for the occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2 is 1.2.
Pad thickness using the Swedish Method 1 and 2

The pad thickness on an intersection reduces stresses up to pad thickness of 2.5 times the header
wall thickness.
Calculate reducers using the Swedish Method 1 and 2

The default value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter
and thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
Other Swedish Notes

If you are using Swedish Method 1 to calculate the CAESAR II allowable, assume that the
SIGMA(tn) multiplier is 1.5 for piping that is not pre-stressed. If you use pre-stressed or cold
sprung pipe change Fac on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field to 1.35 as per the Swedish code.
Use the corroded section modulus for all stress calculations as per the definition of Di in the
Swedish code.
B31.1 (1967)
Calculate full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch using B31.1 (1967)
B31.1 (1967) uses ii = io for full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and for
reduced intersections uses ii = 0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1 (1967)

Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using B31.1 (1967)

B31.1 (1967) girth butt welds default value


Calculate socket welds using B31.1 (1967)

B31.1 (1967) makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
Calculate the B31.1 (1967) allowable stress limits

Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * Occ
Where:
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.15)
Stoomwezen
Sc = The yield stress at room temperature is referred to as Re in the code.
Sh1 = The yield stress at design temperature is referred to as Re (um) in the

code.
Sh2 = not used
Sh3 = not used
FN = The average creep stress to produce one percent set is referred to as Rrg
in the code. F2 is the average creep tensile stress to produce rupture and
is referred to as Rmg in the code. F3 is the minimum creep tensile stress
to produce rupture and is referred to as Rmmin in the code.
Eff = The cyclic reduction factor is referred to as Cf in the code.
Sy = The tensile strength at room temperature is referred to as Rm in the code.
Fac = A constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, refer to
Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
Pvar = The Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.

Calculating reducers using Stoomwezen

Stoomwezen does not mention reducers for Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) calculations.
RCC-M Subsection C and D

Calculate pressure stiffening using RCC-M Subsection C and D
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can enable pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
Flanged end modifications using RCC-M

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted providing the bend is not a widely spaced
miter.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using RCC-M

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same for these piping codes.
Calculate SIF for branch connection using RCC-M

If you do not want to use the SIF for branch connections, found in Figure C3680.1 of the code for
welding and reinforced reduced tees, include the No Reduced SIF For RFT and WLT option in
the configuration file.
Calculate the RCC-M allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = F (1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)+(Sh - SSL)
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh

OCC defaults to 1.2 for Level B
OCC defaults to 1.8 for Level C
OCC defaults to 2.4 for Level D
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
SSL = Sustained Stress (PD/4t + 0.75i Mb/Z)
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
Calculate Pvar using RCC-M

Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq 10.
To satisfy equations 7 or 8 use iMc/Z stress as the maximum of either F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or
F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh - Ssl) where Ssl is the sustained stress as defined by equation 6.

Calculate reducers using RCC-M

For reducers RCC-M states that the flexibility factor is 1.0. The code also states that the SIF is:
The minimum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D2 = Diameter of the Small End
t2 = Thickness of the Small End
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
If not specified:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends using CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including widely
spaced miters.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using CODETI

CODETI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
Calculate expansion stress using CODETI

CODETI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by setting Add F/A In Stress to the configuration file. The software adds the F/A
longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all other stress
categories.
Calculate the CODETI allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = F [1.25 (Sc + Sh)] - Sl
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor

OCC = Occasional Load Factor from Configuration - Defaults to 1.15
Pressure stiffening using CODETI

Pressure stiffening of bends is automatically included as directed by the code. You can disable
pressure stiffening on bends in the analysis by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in
the configuration file.
SIFs and flexibility coefficients using CODETI

Flexibility coefficients and SIFs are phased in for bends with an included angle between 15° and
45°. The default value for bends smaller than 15° is 1.0.
SIFs and fabricated tees using CODETI

To determine the SIF of a fabricated tee having an angle of incidence other than 90°divide it by
(sin a)3/2
CODETI recommended occasional load factor values

Recommended occasional load factor values are 1.15, 1.2, and 1.3, as per Code Table C3.3.
CODETI requires that when "the design temperature is such that the creep
characteristics are determinant, and if a section of the piping presents locally weaker
characteristics," the sum of the primary and secondary stresses must not exceed the value
flexibility factor (from Section C1.4.3). CAESAR II does not implement this requirement and is left
for you to verify.
CODETI reducer default values

Norwegian (TBK 5-6)

Calculate pressure stiffening using TBK 5-6
Pressure stiffening of bends is required for flexibility factors only and is done by default. You can
disable pressure stiffening by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file. You
can enable pressure stiffening for stress intensification factors (SIF)s as well by including the Use
Pressure Stiffening option.
Expansion stress in TBK 5-6

Summing the longitudinal component F/A into the stress calculation is not defined by default in the
code. You can enable the axial force term in the code stress by including the Add F/A In Stress
option in the configuration file.
The code uses a circumferential weld strength factor (Z) when calculating longitudinal
pressure stress. Enter this value as Eff.
Calculate cyclic reduction factor using TBK 5-6

You can calculate the cyclic reduction factor using the following equation: F = (7000/Ne)0.2
Where

Ne = Number of Anticipated Cycles

F may be as high as 2.34 but not greater than 1.0 when Rm governs the expansion
stress allowable.
Calculate SIFs for bends and intersections using TBK 5-6

In-plane and out-of-plane SIFs for bends and intersections use the same stress equation.
Calculate the Norwegian allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = Sr + F2 - SSUS
Sustained Allowable = F2
Occasional Allowable = Occ * F2
Where:
Sr = Minimum of 1.25F1 + 0.25F2; Fr * Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) The latter for higher
temperatures; above 425°C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370°C for other
materials.
F2 = Hot Allowable Stress (entered in Sh)
OCC Occasional Load Factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)
SSUS = Sustained Stress
F1 = Allowable Stress at Ambient (entered in Sc)
Fr = Cyclic Reduction Factor
RS = Permissible Extent of Stress for 7000 Cycles (from Code Table 10.2)
R1 = Lesser of F1 and 0.267 RM
R2 = Lesser of F2 and 0.367 RM
Rm = Ultimate Tensile Strength at room temperature
Calculate SIFs using TBK 5-6

SIFs for fitting types 6 (branch with raised edge radius), 7 (branch on locally thickened pipe), 13
(conical reducer with knuckles), and 14 (reducer without knuckles) have not been implemented in
CAESAR II so you must enter them manually. The Norwegian code offers an alternative stress
analysis method in Appendix D. However, CAESAR II does not implement this method.
TBK 5-6 reducer default values

Calculate the SIFs by using the following equation: 2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:


alpha - the slope of the reducer
TBK 5-6 flexibility factor default value

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
FDBR
FDBR is similar to Code-Specific Settings in most requirements. For more information, see
Code-Specific Settings.
Calculate reinforced tees using FDBR

FDBR limits the pad thickness to a maximum equal to the header thickness. If you enter a pad
thickness that is greater than the header thickness, the software overrides it with the header
thickness.
Calculate reduced intersections using FDBR

Treat intersections similar to ASME NC. For more information, see ASME NC.
Calculate butt welds using FDBR

Use either 1.0 or 1.8 depending on the thickness.
Calculate flexibility analysis using FDBR

You must use the Hot Modulus of Elasticity in your flexibility analysis.
Calculate the expansion case allowable stress using FDBR

When computing the expansion case allowable stress, you must include the ratio of Ehot to Ecold.
You can override the software-computed ratio by manually entering a value for Fac.
Calculate reducers using FDBR

The value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D1 - Diameter of the Large End
t1 - Thickness of the Large End
Alpha - Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees
When not entered:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]

BS 7159
BS 7159 for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe requires that you evaluate the operating
load case only. You must verify the following operating load case combined stress requirements
are met:
If Sx is tensile:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
or
if Sx is compressive:
If Fx/A > P(Dm)/(4t) and it is compressive
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
Circumferential Stress
for straight pipes
for bends
for tees
Dm and t are always for the Run Pipe

Calculate the allowable stress limits using BS 7159

BS 7159 allowables are based on material design strain εd. Allowable stresses differ in the axial
and hoop directions by the ratio of the axial and hoop moduli of elasticity:
Sh = εdEx SHOOP = (εdEx) (Eh/Ex)
Enter the ratio Eh/Ex in the allowable stress Eff field. If left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 for
isotropic materials.
Calculate pressure stiffening using BS 7159

Pressure stiffening of bends is done assuming the bends are fully pressurized up to the design
strain of the components. You can exclude pressure stiffening on bends by including the Use
Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
BS 7159 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation (unless this puts an element into
compression as described above). Use the Add F/A in Stress option to tell CAESAR II to include
the axial force term into the code stress.
Calculate the fatigue factor using BS 7159

The fatigue factor Kn is used inversely relative to the cyclic reduction factor in most codes, so its
value should be greater than or equal to 1.0 (allowable stress is divided by this number). Kn is
calculated as:
Kn = 1.0 + 0.25 (As/σn) (Log10(n) - 3.0)
Where:
As = Stress Range During Fatigue Cycle
σn = Maximum Stress During Fatigue Cycle
n = Number of Cycles During Design Life
Enter Kn in the Cyclic Reduction Factor fields.
BS 7159 requires that you consider the thermal strain of the pipe material as being from 80% -
85% below the true material strain due to insulation effects of the pipe wall. Enter this reduction
factor K in the allowable stress FAC field. If left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.
Calculate the stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends using BS 7159
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
 All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
 CSM and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
 CSM and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
You can enter the laminate type in the Bend Type field, or set the type default on the
Special Execution Parameter dialog box.

Calculate SIFs for Reducers using BS 7159

BS 7159 does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.
UKOOA
The United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association (UKOOA) Specification and Recommended
Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the BS 7159, except
that it simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more conservatism on the
piping operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification
defines an idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses which cause the
equivalent stress to reach failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(σx / σ-all) + σhoop / σhoop-all) - [σx σhoop / (σx-all σhoop-all)] ≥ 1.0
2 2
Where:
σx-all = Allowable Stress Axial
σhoop-all = Allowable Stress Hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
σx-all also known as σa(0:1) and the intersection point on the curve where σhoop is twice σx a natural
condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure. An implicit modification to this requirement is the
fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of safety typically equal to 2/3 while other stresses
are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes ≥ f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = Allowable Design Pressure
f1 = Factor of Safety for 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit Usually 0.85
f2 = System Factor of Safety Usually 0.67
f3 = Ratio of Residual Allowable After Mechanical Loads
b
= 1 - (2 sa ) / (r f1 LTHS)
sab = Axial Bending Stress Due to Mechanical Loads
r = σa(0:1) / σa(2:1)
σa(0:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength In Absence Of Pressure Load
σa(2:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength Under Pressure Loading Only
LTHS = Long Term Hydrostatic Strength Hoop Stress Allowable
LTHP = Long Term Hydrostatic Pressure Allowable
This is implemented in the CAESAR II using the following equations:
Code Stress Code Allowable
σab (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t) ≥ (f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:
P = Design Pressure

Dm = Pipe Mean Diameter

t = Pipe Wall Thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2, SH3
fields; r is entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the Eff field; and the temperature
reduction factor K (described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the Fac field if omitted, it defaults to
1.0. K- and i-factors for bends and tees, and bending and pressure stresses are calculated as
described for the BS 7159.
Calculate SIFs using UKOOA

UKOOA refers to BS 7159 for SIF calculations.
IGE/TD/12
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 Edition 2 code requirements. The
complexity of these requirements far exceeds what can be described here. We recommend that
you acquire a copy of this code from the International Institution of Gas Engineers & Managers.
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)

This code is entitled "Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems." The Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
provisions of the code are implemented here, rather than the limit state requirements.
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, or section moduli
using DNV
DNV does not provide any guidance on calculating SIFs, flexibility factors, or section moduli. An
informal poll of DNV experts and users was taken and the decision was made to use the B31.1
Power Code. Make all stress calculations using the corroded wall thickness.
Calculate the expansion load case using DNV

generated under this code.
Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using DNV

Treat the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations with different allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable is reported in the stress report, along with its specific
allowable. These stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh ≤ ns SMYS
Hoop Stress: Sh ≤ nu SMTS
Longitudinal Stress: SL ≤ n SMYS
Equivalent Stress: Se ≤ n SMYS
Where:

Sh = (Pi – Pe) (D – t) / 2t
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
ns = Hoop Stress Yielding Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMYS = Specified Minimum Yield Strength at Operating Temperature
nu = Hoop Stress Bursting Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMTS = Specified Minimum Tensile Strength at Operating Temperature
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress
n = Equivalent Stress Usage Factor; see Table C4 of the DNV Code
Se = [Sh2 + SL2 - ShSL + 3t ]
2 1/2
t = Torsional Stress
Calculate reducers using DNV

DNV does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.
EN-13480
Flexibility calculations using EN-13480
EN-13480 uses the hot modulus of elasticity in the flexibility calculations (Sect 12.1.7.2). The
expansion allowable stress is subsequently modified by the ratio of Eh/Ec.
Calculate the flexibility stresses using EN-13480

EN-13480 provides two methods of determining the flexibility stresses. The CAESAR II default
implementation is to use Sections 12.3.2 through 12.3.6, which perform an SRSS of the bending
moments with a single SIF. As an alternative, the flexibility stresses can be determined by
distinguishing between in and out of plane bending, using distinct SIFs, as discussed in Section
12.3.1. The option to implement this alternative can be found on the "SIF & Stress" tab of the
configuration module.
EN-13480 pressure stiffening

EN-13480 does not consider pressure stiffening effects on bends.
EN-13480 creep
For more information, see Creep Loading (on page 965)

GPTC/Z380
The recommendations of this code apply only to above ground steel piping through 450°F.
GPTC/Z380 and B31.8, prior to 2004, recommendations are similar in many ways. The
differences between GPTC/Z380 and B31.8 display below:
 The longitudinal joint factors vary slightly between B31.8 Table 841.115a and GPTC/Z380
Table 192.113.
 The design factor in B31.8 Table 841.114b provides more detail than GPTC/Z380 Table
192.11.
 The allowable for the combined stress calculation in GPTC/Z380 Section 192.159-1.5e
includes a "0.75" factor, while B31.8 Section 833.4 does not.
 GPTC/Z380 uses a single stress intensification factor (SIF) for both in-plane and out-of-plane
loads, while B31.8 distinguishes between in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs.
ISO-14692
ISO-14692 addresses the analysis of Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. Qualification is based
on the comparison of actual stresses, hoop and axial, to a failure envelope. See BS 7159 (on page
1045) for the CAESAR II approach for FRP pipe analysis.
HPGSL
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using HPGSL
HPGSL provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane stress
intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections.
Calculate expansion stress using HPGSL

HPGSL provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by including the Add F/A In Stress option in the configuration file. The program adds
the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all other stress
categories.
HPGSL girth butt welds default value

Calculate socket welds using HPGSL

HPGSL makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
Calculate the HPGSL stress allowables


Occasional Allowable = (Occ)*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency Minimum Wall Thickness Only
Sc = Ambient (cold) Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Syc or 0.33Suc
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Sy or 0.33Su
SI = Sustained Stress
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
HPGSL reducer default values

HPGSL Pressure effects

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.
Seismic Analysis
HPGSL uses load cases defined by Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions (on page 1009).
JPI
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using JPI
JPI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections.
Calculate expansion stress using JPI

JPI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. However, this equation does not
include calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not
include the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. The
program adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for
all other stress categories.
JPI girth butt welds default value


Calculate socket welds using JPI

JPI makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without undercut.
Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Calculate the JPI Stress allowables

Occasional Allowable = (Occ)*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency minimum wall thickness only
Sc = Ambient (cold) Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Syc or 0.33Suc
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Sy or 0.33Su
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default - 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
JPl reducer default value

Pressure effects and JPl

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.
Seismic Analysis
JPI uses load cases defined by Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions (on page 1009).
Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical object
mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object into a
similar mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either two-dimensional
or three-dimensional. For piping analysis, the three-dimensional space is necessary, because
almost all piping systems are three dimensional in nature.

Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these
systems are "Cartesian Coordinate Systems". Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all
other axes.
Figure 1 – Typical Cartesian Coordinate Systems

In addition, for these Cartesian coordinate systems the "right hand rule" is used to define positive
rotation about each axis and the relationship, or ordering, between the axes. Before illustrating the
"right hand rule", there are several traits of the systems in Figure 1 that should be noted.
 Each axis can be thought of as a "number line", where the zero point is the point where all of
the axes intersect. While only the positive side of each axis is shown in Figure 1, each axis has
a negative side as well.
 The direction of the arrow heads indicates the positive direction of each axis.
 In Figure 1, the X-axis has one arrowhead, the Y-axis has two arrowheads, and the Z-axis has
three arrowheads. The circular arcs labeled RX, RY, and RZ define the direction of positive
rotation about each axis. (This point will be dis\-cussed later.)
 Any point in space can be mapped to these coordinate systems by using its position along the
number lines. For example, a point 5 units down the X-axis would have a coordinate of (5.0,
0.0, 0.0). A point 5 units down the X-axis and 6 units down the Y-axis would have a coordinate
of (5.0, 6.0, 0.0).
 Notice that if the system on the right side of Figure 1 is rotated a positive 90-degrees about the
X-axis, the result is the system on the left side of Figure 1.
The coordinate system on the left side of Figure 1 is the default CAESAR II global coordinate
system. In this system, the X and Z axes define the horizontal plane, and the Y-axis is vertical.
The other coordinate system in Figure 1 can be obtained in CAESAR II by selecting the
Z-axis Vertical option, discussed later in this section.
All further discussion in this section targets this default coordinate system, unless other\-wise
noted.

Other Global Coordinate Systems

There are other types of coordinate systems that can be used to mathematically map a physical
object.
 A Polar coordinate system maps points in a two-dimensional space using a radius and a
rotation angle (r, theta).
 A Cylindrical coordinate system maps points using a radius, a rotation angle, and an elevation
(r, theta, z). The origin in this system could be considered the center of the bottom of a
cylinder. Cylindrical coordinates are convenient to use when there is an axis of symmetry in
the model.
 A Spherical coordinate system maps points using a radius and two rotation angles (r, theta,
phi). The origin in this system could be considered the center of a sphere. Spherical
coordinates are convenient to use when there is a point which is the center of symmetry in the
model.
Typically, none of these coordinate systems are easily used to map piping systems. Most piping
software deals exclusively with the Cartesian coordinate system.
The Right Hand Rule

In the Cartesian coordinate system, each axis has a positive and a negative side, as previously
mentioned. Translations, straight-line movement, can be defined as movement along these axes.
Rotation can also occur around these axes, as illustrated by the arcs in Figure 1.
A standard rule must be applied in order to define the direction of positive rotation about these
axes. The right-hand rule is used as the standard. Put the thumb of your right hand along the axis,
in the positive direction of the axis. The direction your fingers curl is positive rotation about that
axis. This is best illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2 – The Right-Hand Rule

The right-hand rule can also be used to describe the relationship between the three axes.
Mathematically, the relationship between the axes can be defined as:
X cross Y = Z (EQ 1)
Y cross Z = X (EQ 2)
Z cross X = Y (EQ 3)
Where cross indicates the vector cross product.

Physically, using your right hand, what do the above equations mean? This question is best
answered by Figure 3.
Figure 3 – The Right-Hand Rule - Continued

The left pane of Figure 3 corresponds to vector equation 3 above. Similarly, the center pane in
Figure 3 also corresponds to vector equation 3 above. The right pane in Figure 3 corresponds to
vector equation 2 above. All panes of Figure 3 refer to the left-hand image of Figure 1.
Straight-line movement along any axis can be therefore described as positive or negative,
depending on the direction of motion. This straight-line movement accounts for three of the six
degrees of freedom associated with a given node point in a model.
Analysis of a model requires the discretization of the model into a set of nodes and
elements. Depending on the analysis and the element used, the associated nodes have certain
degrees of freedom. For pipe stress analysis, using 3D Beam Elements, each node in the model
has six degrees of freedom.
The other three degrees of freedom are the rotations about each of the axes. In accordance with
the right-hand rule, positive rotation about each axis is defined as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
When modeling a system mathematically, there are two coordinate systems to deal with, a global
or model coordinate system and a local (or elemental) coordinate system. The global or model
coordinate system is fixed, and can be considered a constant characteristic of the analysis at
hand. The local coordinate system is defined on an elemental basis. Each element defines its own
local coordinate system. The orientation of these local systems varies with the orientation of the
elements.
An important concept here is the fact that local coordinate systems are defined by, and
therefore associated with, elements. Local coordinate systems are not defined for, or associated
with, nodes.

Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems

As noted previously, most pipe stress analysis computer programs use the 3D Beam Element.
This element can be described as an infinitely thin stick, spanning between two nodes. Each of
these nodes has six degrees of freedom three translations and three rotations. Piping systems
models are constructed by defining a series of elements, connected by nodes. These pipe
elements are typically defined as vectors, in terms of delta dimensions referenced to a global
coordinate system. Several example pipe elements are shown below in Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Example Pipe Elements

For most pipe stress applications, there are two dominant global coordinate systems to choose
from, either Y-axis or Z-axis up. These two systems are depicted in Figure 1. As previously noted,
the global coordinate system is fixed. All nodal coordinates and element delta dimensions are
referenced to this global coordinate system. For example, in Figure 4 above, the pipe element
spanning from node 10 to node 20 is defined with a DX (delta X) dimension of 5 ft. Additionally,
node 20 has a global X coordinate 5 ft. greater that the global X coordinate of node 10. Similar
statements could be made about the other two elements in Figure 4, only these elements are
aligned with the global Y and global Z axes.
In CAESAR II, you can choose between the two global coordinate systems shown in Figure 1. By
default, the CAESAR II global coordinate system puts the global Y-axis vertical, as shown in the
left half of Figure 1, and in Figure 4. There are two ways to change the CAESAR II global
coordinate system so that the global Z-axis is vertical.

The first method is to modify the configuration file in the current data directory. This can be
accomplished from the Main Menu, by selecting Tools>Configure Setup. After the configuration
dialog appears, select the Geometry tab, as shown in Figure 5. On this tab, click the Z-axis
Vertical check box, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5 - Geometry Configuration

After the Z axis Vertical check box is selected, the CAESAR II global coordinate system is in
accordance with the right half of Figure 1. This configuration affects all new jobs created in this
data directory. Existing jobs with the Y-axis vertical are not affected by this configuration change.
The second method to obtain a global coordinate system with the Z-axis vertical is to switch
coordinate systems from within the input for the specific job at hand. This can be accomplished
from the Special Execution Parameters dialog box of the piping input processor. This dialog box
is shown below in Figure 6.

Figure 6 - Special Execution Parameters Dialog

Checking the Z Axis Vertical check box immediately changes the orientation of the global
coordinate system axis, with corresponding updates to the element delta dimensions. However,
the relative positions and lengths of the elements are not affected by this switch.
Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y-axis vertical), and assuming the system
shown below in Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.
Figure 7 - Sample Piping Model
Figure 8 - Sample Piping Model Element Definitions

For this sample model, most of the element definitions are very simple:
 The first element, 10-20, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global X direction. This element
starts at the model origin.
 The second element, 20-30, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global Y direction. This element
begins at the end of the first element, because both elements share node 20.
 The third element, 30-40, is defined as 5 ft. in the negative global Z direction. Note in Figure 8
that the delta dimension for this element is a negative number. This is necessary to define the
element in a negative direction.
 The fourth element, 40-50, runs in both the positive global X and negative global Y directions.
This element slopes to the right and down, and is defined with delta dimensions in both the DX
and DY fields. These delta dimensions are equal in magnitude; therefore, this element slopes
at 45 degrees.
Continuing the model, from node 50, along the same 45-degree slope can be rather tedious,
because most often only the overall element length is known, not its components in the global
directions. In CAESAR II this can be best accomplished by activating the Edit Deltas dialog box,
shown below in Figure 9. The Edit Deltas dialog box can be activated by clicking the Browse

button next to the DX field. Using this dialog box, you can enter the element length, and
CAESAR II determines the appropriate components in the global directions, based on the current
direction cosines, which default to those of the preceding element.
Figure 9 - Edit Deltas Dialog Box

CAESAR II provides an additional coding tool, for longer runs of pipe with uniform node spacing.
Element Break enables you to break an element into equal length segments, given a node
number increment.
In the preceding example, the model is defined solely using delta dimensions. By constructing the
model in this fashion, it is assumed that the world coordinates of node 10 the first node in the
model are at (0., 0., 0.). This assumption is acceptable in all but one instance, when environmental
loads are applied to the model. In this instance, the elevation of the model is critical to the
determination of the environmental loads, and therefore must be specified. In CAESAR II, the
specification of the starting node of the model can be accomplished using the Alt+G key
combination, and all nodal coordinates are displayed as absolute coordinates. Regardless of
whether or not the global coordinates of the starting node are specified, the relative geometry of
the model will plot the same.
After a model has been defined, there are a number of operations that can be performed on the
entire system, or on any section of the system. These operations include:
 Translating the model: translation can be accomplished by specifying the global coordinates of
the starting node of the model. If the model consists of disconnected segments, CAESAR II
requests the coordinates of the starting node of each segment.
 Rotating the model: by using the List processor or by clicking List Input . The List
processor presents the model in a spreadsheet, format, as shown in Figure 8. Options in this
processor allow you to rotate the model about any of the three global axes, or a specified
amount. For example, if the model shown in Figures 7 and 8 is rotated a negative -90 degrees
about the global Y-axis, the result is as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10 - Example of Model Rotation

 Duplicating the model: duplication can also be accomplished by using the List processor. The
entire model, or any sub-section of the model, can be duplicated.
Using Local Coordinates

When analyzing a piping system, there are a number of items that must be checked and verified.
These items include:
Operating Loads on Restraints & Terminal Points Maximum Operating Displacements
Hanger design results Code stresses for code cases
Equipment Evaluations Vessel Nozzle Evaluation
Expansion joint evaluation
Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is necessary
because restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and stresses are
most often evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating the use of a
local (element) coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments. The forces
and moments in this free body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position of the element
in the global coordinate system. Note however, that each element has its own local coordinate
system. Furthermore, the local coordinate system of one element may be different from the local
coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters X, Y, and Z, local
coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate systems
use lower case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: xyz, abc, and uvw. CAESAR II
uses xyz to denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a
rule. There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II, the
following rules are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a model.
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions

In many cases, CAESAR II shows global coordinates in upper case (e.g., global force in X is listed
as FX) and local coordinates in lower case (e.g., local force in x is listed as fx). For the following
examples the local terms a, b, c are used in place of x, y, z. In other words, global coordinates are
referenced by X, Y, Z and local coordinates are referenced by a, b, c.
Straight Pipe
 a-axis: always points from the From Node to the To Node
 b-axis: b = a x Y (This is a cross-product operation, except when a is Y, and then b is
defined as X.)
 c-axis: c = a x b

The straight elements of the model and their local coordinate systems in Figure 7 are reproduced
below in Figure 11. Notice that each straight element has its own local coordinate system, and
each element is aligned differently in this model.
Figure 11 - Local Coordinate Systems for Straight Elements (1)

In Figure 11, the positive direction of the a-axis (i.e., the local X-axis) for each element is defined
according to the From - To Node definition of the element. For example, the a-axis of element
10-20 is aligned with the positive global X-axis because that is the direction defined in moving from
node 10 to node 20. The a-axis of element 30-40 is aligned with the negative global Z-axis
because that is the direction defined in moving from node 30 to node 40. Review Figure 11
closely, as this figure clearly shows how the local element coordinate system can be defined
based on the definition of the element, especially with regard to the skewed element 40-50.
Bend Elements
Think of the bend as a centerline arc bounded by a near and a far node. The near node is the
tangent point joining the bend with the straight pipe entering the bend (as defined by the sequence
of pipe elements). The far node is the tangent point joining the bend with the straight pipe exiting
the bend. CAESAR II does not require a near node, but creates one by default. Any additional
nodes along the bend arc reference the orientation of the tangent line at the node. This tangent is
a vector pointing toward the far end of the arc.
 a-axis: defined by the tangent vector, where positive is toward the far end of the bend.
This is considered the torsion term.
 b-axis: b is perpendicular to the plane that contains the bend arc. Its direction is set by b
= c x a. Where defined by the piping code, this is the in-plane bending term.
 c-axis: c points to the center of the bend arc (c = a x b). Where defined by the piping code,
this is the out-plane bending term.

The local coordinate systems for the bend end points in Figure 11 are displayed below in Figure
12.
Figure 12 – Local Coordinate Systems for Bend Elements

Tee Elements
Local coordinates are also significant for the three straight pipes that join at a tee or for any other
straight pipe end where a stress intensification factor (SIF) is defined. See Figure 13.
 a-axis: always points from the From Node to the To Node. This is the torsion term.
 b-axis: b is perpendicular to the plane that contains the three elements that form the tee.
Its direction is set by b = a(branch) x a(run). Where no plane is evident (e.g., a SIF
specified at a node where no run or branch exists), b is defined for straight pipe. In those
cases where the two run elements have opposite a-axes, CAESAR II uses the orientation
of the first run pipe entered to set a(run) in the definition of b. Where defined by the piping
code, this is the in-plane bending term.
 c-axis: c = a x b. Where defined by the piping code, this is the out-plane bending term.
Examples of local coordinates for elements framing a branch connection are depicted below in
Figure 14.

Figure 5 - Tees Added
Figure 14 - Local Coordinate Systems for Tee Elements

Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates

Global coordinates are used most often when dealing with piping models. Global coordinates are
used to define the model and review nodal results. Even though element stresses are defined in
terms of axial and bending directions, which are local coordinate system terms, local coordinates
are rarely used. A typical piping analysis scenario is:
 A decision is made as to how the global coordinate system for the piping model will align with
the plant coordinate system. Usually, one of the two horizontal axes is selected to correspond
to the North direction. However, if this results in a majority of the system being skewed with
respect to the global axes, you should consider realigning the model. It is best to have most of
the system aligned with one of the global coordinate axes.
 The piping system is then assigned node points at locations where: there is a change in
direction, a support, a terminal point, a point of cross section change, a point of load
application, or any other point of interest.
After you assign the nodes, define the piping model using the delta dimensions as dictated by the
orientation of the global coordinate system. Use Break, List, Rotate, Duplicate, and the
Direction Cosines to construct the model.
 After verifying the input, confirming the load cases, and analyzing the model, output review
commences.
Output review involves checking various output reports to ensure the system responds within
certain limits. These checks include:
 Checking that operating displacements make sense and are within any operational limits to
avoid ponding. Displacements, being nodal quantities, are reviewed in the global coordinate
system. There is no local coordinate system associated with nodes. For the model defined in
Figures 7 and 8, the operating displacements are shown in Figure 15 below.
Figure 15 - Operating Displacements

This report shows the movements of all of the nodes in the model, in each of the six degrees
of freedom, in the global coordinate system.

 Checking that the restraint loads for the structural load cases are reasonable. This includes
ensuring that the restraints can be designed to carry the computed load. Restraints being
nodal quantities are reviewed in the global coordinate system. There is no local coordinate
system associated with restraints. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, the operating /
sustained restraint summary is shown in Figure 16 below.
Figure 16 - Operating / Sustained Restraint Summary

This report shows the loads on the anchor at 10 and the nozzle at 50, for all six degrees of
freedom, for the two selected structural load cases, in the global coordinate system.

 Checking the code cases for codes stress compliance. Typically, the code stress is compared
to the allowable stress for each node on each element. Occasionally, when there is an
overstress condition, a review of axial, bending, and torsion stresses are necessary. These
stresses axial, bending, and torsion are local coordinate system terms, and therefore relate to
the element’s local coordinate system. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, a portion of
the sustained stress report is shown in Figure 17 below.
Figure 17 - Sustained Stress Report

These reports provide sufficient information to evaluate the pipe elements in the model, to ensure
proper behavior and code compliance. However, the analyst’s job is not complete, loads and
stress must still be evaluated at terminal points, where the piping system connects to equipment
or vessel nozzles. Depending on the type of equipment or nozzle, various procedures and codes
are applied. These include API-610 for pumps and WRC-107 for vessel nozzles, as well as others.
In the case of API-610 and WRC-107, a local coordinate system specific to these codes is
employed. These local coordinate systems are defined in terms of the pump or nozzle/vessel
geometry.

When the equipment coordinate system aligns with the global coordinate system of the piping
model, the nozzle loads from the restraint report (node 50 in Figure 14) can be used in the nozzle
evaluation. However, when the equipment nozzle is skewed as it is in the case of node 50 in
Figure 14, the application of the loads is more difficult. In this case, it is best to use the loads from
the element’s force/moment report, in local coordinates. The only thing to remember here is to flip
the signs on all of the forces and moments, because the element force/moment report shows the
loads on the pipe element, not on the nozzle. For the element FROM node 40 to node 50, the local
element force/moment report is shown in Figure 18 below.
Figure 18 - Local Element Force/Moment Report

Because the correlation between the pipe model’s coordinate systems and those of equipment
codes API and WRC are often times tedious and error prone, CAESAR II provides an option in its
equipment modules to acquire the loads on the nozzle directly from the static output. Select the
node and the load case; CAESAR II acquires the loads and rotates them into the proper
coordinate system as defined by the applicable equipment code. You really do not have to be
concerned with the transformation from global to local coordinates, even for skewed components.
This is illustrated below, in Figure 19. In this figure, the API-610 nozzle loads at node 50 have
been acquired by clicking Select Loads by Job/Load Case.

Notice that the loads shown in Figure 19 are in the CAESAR II global coordinate system. This can
be easily verified by comparing these values to those in the restraint summary for the operating
load case as shown previously in Figure 16.
Figure 19 - API-610 Nozzle Load Acquisition

In the corresponding output report for this API-610 analysis, both the global and API local loads
are reported. This is shown below in Figure 20.

Figure 20 - API-610 Nozzle Output Report Segments

Notice in Figure 20, that each report segment indicates which values are related to the global
coordinate system and which are related to the local API coordinate system.
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates

A new report Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates (on page 606), is available to assist
in dealing with restraint loads on skewed nozzles. This report uses the local coordinate system of
the "defining" element (because restraints do not have a local coordinate system). If the restraint
is defined on the straight element to which the restraint is attached, then the proper orientation of
local loads is reported in the Local Restraint Loads report. However, if the restraint was defined
on some other element, or on the mid-side node of a bend, then the loads reported in the Local
Restraint Loads report are associated with the local coordinate system of that defining element.
Transforming from Global to Local

Converting or transforming values from the CAESAR II Global Coordinate System to a local
coordinate system involves applying a number of rotation matrices to the global values. Matrix
mathematics is not a trivial task, and you must exercise the utmost care to arrive at the correct
result. To complete this task, visit the CAESAR II Downloads page at
http://www.intergraph.com/products/ppm/caesarii/downloads.aspx and click CAESAR II "Global
to Local" to download the GlbtoLocal utility, glbtoLoca. zip. For more information, see the July
2001 issue of our Mechanical Engineering News. For an example on how to use the GlbtoLocal
utility using the nozzle at node 50 see below.
The element 40-50 is defined with the delta coordinates of:
DX = 3 ft. (6.426 in)
DY = -3 ft. (6.426 in)
DZ = 0.0
The global restraint forces at node 50, in global coordinates, for the operating case are:
FX = 323 MX = -953

FY = 4 MY = -9
FZ = -271 MZ = -548
Using this data as input to GlbtoLocal, the utility yields the forces on the restraint in the element’s
local coordinate system. This is shown in Figure 21 below.
Example Global to Local Transformation
Compare the set of values labeled Rotated Displacements / Load Vector with the Local
Element Force / Moment report, as shown above. A change in sign is necessary because the
Restraint report shows loads acting on the restraint, while the Element report shows loads acting
on the element.
Frequently Asked Questions

What are global coordinates?
Global coordinates define the mapping of a physical system into a mathematical system. For a
given model, the global coordinate system is fixed for the entire model. In CAESAR II, there are
two alternative global coordinate systems that you can apply to a model. Both coordinate systems
follow the Right Hand Rule and use X, Y, and Z as mutually perpendicular axes. The first uses
the Y-axis vertical, while the second uses the Z-axis as vertical.
What are local coordinates?
Local coordinates represent the mapping for a single element. Use Local coordinate systems to
define positive and negative directions and loads on elements. Typically, Local Coordinate
systems are aligned with the elements, therefore vary throughout the model.
What coordinates are used to plot and view the model?
Use the global coordinate system of the model to generate plots of the model. This is necessary
because each element has its own local coordinate system, and these local systems vary from
element to element. Local coordinate systems are an element property, not a system property.
How do you obtain nodal displacements in local coordinates?
In general, you do not. Displacements are a nodal property. Nodes do not have local coordinate
systems, elements do. For more information, see Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates.

What do you do with local coordinates?

In most instances, nothing. The local coordinates are only useful in CAESAR II is when dealing
with a skewed nozzle. This coordinate system is used in the Local Restraint Report.

SECTION 14
Miscellaneous Processors
This section discusses the processors that are available in CAESAR II.
In This Section
Material Database ....................................................................... 1072
Accounting.................................................................................. 1081
Units File Operations .................................................................. 1087
Batch Stream Processing............................................................ 1090
CAESAR II Error Processing ....................................................... 1091
Material Database
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials
Main window menu: Tools > Materials
Defines the physical properties and code-dependent allowable stresses for more than 300
materials. You can edit and manage the delivered materials data, as well as create new materials,
using the Material Database Editor. To open the editor, click Tools > Materials or click
Materials on the toolbar.

Material Database Editor Toolbar

The Material Database Editor toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Print - Prints the materials data for every material in the entire material database.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location.
Clear Screen to Add - Saves the current editor window contents, and then clears the screen so you can
add a new material. For more information, see Add a new material to the database (on page 1074).
Edit a Material - Allows you to edit a material item in the database. For more information, see Edit a material
in the database (on page 1075).
Delete a Material - Deletes the material from the database. For more information, see Delete a material
from the database (on page 1075).
Save Material - Saves the changes made to the current material item.
Print the Current Material - Prints only the materials data for the current material item.
 It is your responsibility to check material allowables and other physical property data for the
particular code being used. While Intergraph CAS makes every attempt to keep the material
database up-to-date, the codes are subject to change frequently, and the accuracy of the
database is not guaranteed.
 The Material Database Editor does not modify the data in the material database delivered
with CAESAR II. Any changes that you make are saved to a secondary database, which, by
default, is named umat1.umd and is located in the \System directory. You can specify a
different secondary database using User Material Database Filename (on page 67) in the
Configuration Editor. This setup permits multiple user-supplied database files to be used on
a single system.

 Add a new material to the database (on page 1074)
 Delete a material from the database (on page 1075)
 Edit a material in the database (on page 1075)

Add a new material to the database

When adding a new material to the database, you must add at least two records in the Material
Database Editor. The first record saves the new material for the All Codes option. CAESAR II
uses the All Codes option to populate the Material list in the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Enter all the material information except for the allowable stresses. You can add subsequent
records for the same material to address additional piping codes and identify the allowable
stresses for each piping code.
1. In the Material Database Editor, click Clear Screen to Add .
The software saves any data currently shown in the editor window, and then clears the
window contents.
2. Enter the required data for the new material, except for the allowable stresses. At a minimum,
you must specify the Number and select All Codes in the Applicable Piping Code list.
You must enter a number that is less than 1000. If you enter a number that
currently exists in the database, the software prompts you to enter a different number.
3. Click Save Material to save the new material.
4. After you save the new material, you can add subsequent new material records to modify the
piping code and define the allowable stresses. Select the Applicable Piping Code for the
new material. Then, specify the allowable stresses.
5. Click Save Material to save the new material in the Piping Input processor. Repeat steps
4 and 5 to add new material records for each piping code that you need.
6. Close the Material Database Editor dialog box, and open the Classic Piping Input dialog
box for the current job.
CAESAR II displays the new material as an option in the Material list on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.

Delete a material from the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Delete a Material .
2. Select the material item you want to delete, and then click OK.
The software deletes the material from the database.
You can only delete user-defined materials. Materials that are delivered with the
CAESAR II material database cannot be deleted. If no user-defined materials exist in the
database, the software displays an informational message.
Edit a material in the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Edit a Material .
2. In the Material Selection dialog box, do one of the following to select the material item you
want to modify:
 Scroll through the list and double-click the material name.
 Type all or part of a material name or number in the text box and click Search. The
software searches the database and displays matching materials for selection.
3. Edit the material item as needed, and then click Save Material to save your changes to
the material database.
 The Piping Code ID list corresponds to the piping code ID on the Piping Input dialog box.
 To exit the dialog box without selecting a material press Esc or click Cancel.
Material Number
Enter a number for the material in the CAESAR II Material Database Editor. The Piping Input
module uses this number to reference the material. The number must be between 101 and 1000
inclusive and must not have been used for another material previously.
Material Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.

Applicable Piping Code

Select the CAESAR II piping code number for which this material applies. The software supports
the following piping codes:
 All Codes  B31.8  BS 806  CODETI  DNV
 B31.1  JPI  Swedish 1  Norwegian TBK-6  EN 13480
 B31.3  B31.9  Swedish 2  FDBR  GPTC/Z380
 B31.3  ASME NC  Stoomwezen  BS 7159  PD 8010-1

Chapter IX
 B31.4  ASME ND  RCC-M C  UKOOA  ISO-14692
 B31.4 Ch 11  NAVY 505  RCC-M D  IGE/TD/12  HPGSL
 B31.5  CAN Z662
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
 Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures
lower than room temperature.
 Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
 Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
 Unspecified - This is the default option.
Material Density
Enter the density of the material.
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D)

Specify the curve used to check the material. As defined by B31.3 (Section 323.2.2), some carbon
steels are limited to a “minimum metal” temperature (as shown in Figure 323.2.2 of the B31.3
section). If this code section is applicable, select A, B, C, or D. If this code section is not
applicable, leave this box blank.
CAESAR II does not currently use this information.

Eff, Cf, z
Enter the appropriate factor. This factor is required by the following piping codes:
 Stoomwezen
Enter the cyclic reduction factor. This is referred to in the code as Cf.
 Norwegian TBK-6
Enter the circumferential weld strength factor. This is referred to in the code as z.
 BS 7159
Enter the ratio of the design stress (εd) in the circumferential (hoop) direction to the design
stress in the longitudinal direction. Because design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3 of the
code as:
σdÆ = εd * EIamÆ, sdx = εd * EIamx
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry is also the ratio of the
moduli of elasticity:
EIamÆ (hoop) to EIamÆ (longitudinal)
For Norwegian TBK-6 and BS 7159 piping codes, if the Eff, Cf, z field is left blank, the
software uses a default value of 1.0.
Cold Elastic Modulus

Enter the value of the elastic modulus to be used in code compliance stress cases. The software
uses this value only if no Elastic Modulus (on page 1079) is given for the ambient (70° F)
temperature. This value is used for metal materials only.
Poisson's Ratio
Enter the value to be used for Poisson’s ratio. This input is only required for metals.
FAC
Enter the applicable factor as determined by the following piping codes.
 Stoomwezen
Enter 0.44 or 0.5. This value is used to compute the equilibrium stresses as discussed in
Section 5.2 of the code. You can use 0.5 for steel if the design and fabrication are such
that stress peaks are avoided.
 Norwegian
Enter the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature Rm. If you do not define a
value, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.

Laminate Type
Enter the laminate type (as defined in the BS 7159 code) of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
used. Valid laminate types are:
 CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
 CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
 CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
Eh / Ea
Displays the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If omitted, the software
uses a default value of 2.0.
Temperature
Enter the temperature that corresponds to the database values you will add in the remaining cells
(shown below).
In the database delivered with the software, all temperatures are in 100°F increments.
Some codes list physical property values in 50°F increments; therefore, small
discrepancies may occur between CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of
data.
Exp. Coeff.
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion at the reference Temperature in the indicated units.
6
This value must be multiplied by 10 F prior to being entered. For example, for carbon steel at
400-deg F, B 31.3 Table C-3 gives an expansion coefficient of 6.82 µ in/in/Fº. Thus, you would
enter 6.82 in the database.
Allowable Stress
Enter the code allowable stress corresponding to the reference Temperature. These values
generally correspond to the SC and SH values on the allowable auxiliary screens.

Elastic Modulus
Enter the modulus of elasticity to the reference Temperature. If no entry is given for ambient (70°
F), the software uses the value defined for Cold Elastic Modulus (on page 1077).
Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress that corresponds to the reference Temperature.
Ult Tensile Stress

Enter the temperature dependent stress value (lbs./sq.in.). This value varies by piping code. Valid
entries based on the current piping code are:
 BS 806
Mean stress to failure for design life at temperature.
 Swedish Method 1
Creep rupture stress at temperature.
 Stoomwezen
Rrg average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
 IGE/TD/12
Ultimate tensile strength.
 Norwegian
The material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature is Rm (lbs./sq. in.). If no value
is entered, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W)

The Weld Strength Reduction Factor, W, is a temperature dependent value from B31.3/B31.1.
CAESAR II uses this value as:
Wl
A longitudinal reduction factor used in the determination of the pipe's minimum wall thickness.
Wc
A circumferential reduction factor used in the determination of the allowable stress.
The use of W is optional, and is controlled through a configuration setting in the SIF and Stresses
section of the Configuration Editor.

Temperature Dependent Stress Value

Provides stress value information that is dependent upon the temperature and varies based on
the piping code selected. Currently, the software supports the following values:
Rmmin
The minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at the temperature
(vm) when using the Stoomwezen piping code.
Material Selection Dialog Box

Allows you to search and select a material in the database for viewing or editing.
Scroll through individual materials by using the arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN
keys. Press HOME or END to go to the beginning or end of the materials list.
You can also type all or part of a material name or number and click Search, and the software
searches the database and displays all materials that include your entry.
Press ENTER or double-click on a material to select it. The software returns you to the CAESAR
II Material Database Editor dialog box and populates the fields with the selected material values.
Database Status (Consistency Check) Dialog Box

Scans the material database for any numeric inconsistencies. The Consistency Check Results
list any material values that are numerically out of sequence. You can then use the Material
Database Editor to look up and review or modify these reported values for the materials.

Accounting
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Accounting
Main window menu: Tools > Accounting
Allows you to control all pricing factors for jobs. The total price of any job is computed from:
IF (C4 > 0.0) THEN
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) * C4 * numcases + C5
ELSE
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) + C5
ENDIF
You can enter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and change them only when necessary. Any
of the constants may be zero, but at least one constant must be greater than zero.
CAESAR II Accounting is an optional module. If you do not need to keep
accounting records of your jobs, you can disregard this module.
You can generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on a
per-account basis. This module also lets you:
 Generate reports for any requested combination of account numbers.
 Define account numbers, which may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
 Control account and software access using the optional password protection feature
(accessed by selecting the Type 2 accounting method).
 Identify account numbers for each job using either of the following two methods:
 Select the account number from a table of allowed account numbers. Otherwise, the
system defaults to the last valid account number input. The account manager sets up and
maintains the account number table.
 Enter an account number, which can be any non-blank string, in a text box. There is no
default, but your entry must match one of the allowed account numbers previously input
by the account manager.
 Access to the available account number list is password protected.

 If you do not have a valid account number, the run is not permitted.
For more information on setting up the software to use accounting, see Activating the Accounting
System (on page 1082).
Accounting File Structure

The CAESAR II accounting file (ACCTG.DAT) contains all of the information used by CAESAR II
to produce accounting reports. The file format allows you to create a program to access or
manipulate the file. You can open the accounting file (in FORTRAN) with the following:
OPEN(1,FILE=’ACCTG.DAT’,STATUS=’OLD’,FORM=’BINARY’,
ACCESS=’DIRECT’,RECL=55)
The following information is stored on each record:

Variable Type Definition
JOBNAME CHARACTER*8 Name of the job being run
ICPUTIME INTEGER*4 Analysis CPU time used (Seconds)
NODES INTEGER*2 Number of nodes in the job
NELEMS INTEGER*2 Number of elements in the job
NLOADS INTEGER*2 Number of load cases in the job
MYEAR INTEGER*2 Year the job was run
MMONTH INTEGER*2 Month the job was run
MDAY INTEGER*2 Day of the month the job was run
MHOUR INTEGER*2 Hour of the day the job was run
MMINUTE INTEGER*2 Minutes of the hour when the job was run
MSECOND INTEGER*2 Seconds of the minute when the job was run
ACCOUNTNO CHARACTER*25 Account number to be billed for job
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST), giving the last valid record number in
the accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be read:
READ(1,REC=1) ILAST
Activating the Accounting System

The CAESAR II Accounting module must be activated before you can begin collecting billing and
account information on jobs.

To access the accounting system, click Tools > Accounting on the Main Menu. The CAESAR II
Accounting dialog box displays. You can use the options in this dialog box to specify the
accounting method, set pricing, define account numbers, and generate reports.
For information about the options available on a specific dialog box tab, see:
 Activate Accounting Tab (on page 1084)
 Pricing Factors Tab (on page 1084)
 Account Numbers Tab (on page 1085)
 Reports Tab (on page 1085)
 Status Tab (on page 1087)
After the accounting system is initialized, the pricing factors are set, and account numbers
entered, you can initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number appears
during analysis immediately after you initiate the accounting process.
 The prompt for accounting information requires user-account identification.

 If you selected Type 2 on the Activate Accounting tab (on page 1084), enter a valid account
number, or click OK for the default (last used) account number.

 If you selected Type 1, select the appropriate account number from the list and click OK to
continue.
Activate Accounting Tab

Select the applicable accounting method (Type 1 or Type 2), and then click Activate
Accounting. After the accounting system is activated, click OK in the message box.
If the accounting system becomes unnecessary, deactivate it by clicking Deactivate
Accounting.
Type 1 Accounting Method

Select the Type 1 accounting method for the software to accept valid account numbers, up to 25
characters in length. With this method, the software displays a list of the currently valid accounts
from which to choose.
Select an account number, and then click OK. Click Activate Accounting to enable the CAESAR
II Accounting module. You can then enter other accounting details for the selected account.
Type 2 Accounting Method

Select the Type 2 accounting method for the software to accept valid account numbers, up to 25
characters in length. With this method, you must enter a valid account number. The software does
not display a list of current account numbers.
This method also requires you to set a password to prevent account corruption. Select Type 2,
enter a password, and then click OK. Click Activate Accounting to enable the CAESAR II
Accounting module. You can then enter other accounting details for the selected account.
Pricing Factors Tab

Enter any costs as appropriate; blanks are allowed. Each rate is multiplied by the respective job
quantity, and the sum of these products is equivalent to the job cost. Job costs are calculated on
an integer dollar basis, and are never be less than one dollar. Any of the five rate constants can be
zero, but not all; none of the constants may be negative.
Click Submit to save the pricing factors.

Rate per CPU second

Specifies the cost per second of computer processing time.
Rate per NODE

Specifies the cost per node in the input file.
Rate per ELEMENT

Specifies the cost per element in the input file.
Rate per LOAD CASE

Specifies the cost per load case evaluated during the analysis.
This information also displays on the Status tab in the CAESAR II Accounting module.
Rate per JOB/ANALYSIS

Specifies the cost on a per-job basis.
This information also displays on the Status tab in the CAESAR II Accounting module.
Monetary Label
Specifies the monetary label. For example, type $ for US dollars.
Account Numbers Tab

Enter the required account numbers, and then click Save. These are the numbers that the
software uses to prompt you for an account number during software execution.
Reports Tab
Generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on a
per-account basis. From the Reports tab, you can specify the accounts for which you're
generating reports, the date range of the reports, and whether you're generating a detailed or a
summary report.
All generated reports contain the following items:
 Account number
 Job name
 Time and date of run
 Number of nodes, elements, and load cases
 Calculated job cost

Accounts
Specifies the accounts for which you are generating reports.
 Select Specific Accounts to generate a report for a specific account or set of accounts. Click
Select Accounts, select the accounts from the list, and then click OK.
 Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all accounts.
After you select the account information, you can specify a date range and the type of report you
want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Date Range
Controls the range of dates for the report you are generating.
 Select Specific Date Range to specify a range of dates for which to generate a report.
 Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all dates.
After you select the account information and the date range, you can specify the type of report you
want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Report
Controls the length of the report.
 Select Summary to generate a shorter report. Accounting summary reports include subtotals
on a per-account basis, the number of jobs run for the account, and the time period in which
the account has been active.
 Select Detailed to generate a full report.
The example below shows a sample detailed report.

Status Tab
Summarizes the number of accounts and pricing factors specified for the current accounting
system. The software displays the current accounting method, Type 1 (accounting without a
password required) or Type 2 (accounting with a password required) at the top.
The Status tab displays the total Number of defined account numbers, as well as the number
of account records run (i.e., how many times you've analyzed all of the defined accounts).
Units File Operations

The active units file as specified in the configuration file is used with all new input files and all
existing output files in the given data directory. The units file specified in the configuration file does
not modify the units in an existing CAESAR II input file
Create/Review Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Create/Review Units

Main window menu: Tools > Create/Review Units
Creates a custom units file. Click Tools > Create/Review Units to display the CAESAR II - Units
Maintenance dialog box, which you can use to create a new units file or to review data in an
existing units file.
Existing File to Review

Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you can review an existing units file to
determine if it is the file you want to use. Select the existing file and click View/Edit File. After
reviewing, if you see changes you need to make to the units file, you can Create a New Units File
(on page 1089) based upon the existing file and give the revised file a New Units File Name (on
page 1089).

Review Existing Units File

Enables the Existing Files to Review list, which contains all existing units files located in both the
data folder and the program folder. Select the units file you want to review, and then click
View/Edit File. The software displays the Units File Review window, which contains all CAESAR
II dimensional items, their internal units, the conversion factor between the internal units and the
user-specified units, and the user-defined units.

Create a New Units File

Creates a new units file and activates the Existing File to Start From list and New Units File
Name box. After you have completed both items, click View > Edit File. The software displays the
Units File Maintenance dialog box, in which you can edit your units and conversion factor
entries.
If the user-defined units for a given item exist in the list, then it is not necessary to
specify a conversion factor, as it is updated automatically. If a new set of units is required, such as,
for example, feet (instead of inches) in the Length category, either select the new unit name (ft.)
in the User Units list and select the new conversion factor in the Constant list or type a new factor
in the text box.
Existing File to Start From

Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you create a new units file by using an existing
units file as a template. For ease and simplicity, we recommend that the units contained within the
existing file closely mirror the units contained within the new file to be created.
New Units File Name

Enter a unique file name without the extension.
View/Edit File
Displays one of the following windows, depending on whether you are reviewing an existing units
file or creating a new one.
 User File Review
Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with Review Existing Units File
(on page 1088). The contents of this window are read-only.

 User File Maintenance

Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with Create a New Units File
(on page 1089). The contents of this window are editable.
Change Model Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
Main window menu: Tools > Change Model Units
Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. Click Tools > Change Model Units. The
software opens the CAESAR II Input File Units Conversion dialog box.
Enter the Name of the Input File to Convert

Type the full path name followed by the input file name, including the .c2a extension, to be
converted. Alternatively, you can click Browse and use Windows Explorer to navigate to the
appropriate file.
Enter the Name of the Units File to Use

Select the name of the appropriate units file from the list.
Enter the Name of the Output File (Optional)

Type the full path name followed by the input file name that corresponds to the new input file.
If you select an existing ._a file using Browse, the converted file overwrites the
existing ._a file chosen from the list.
Batch Stream Processing

Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Multi-job Analysis

Main window menu: Tools > Multi-job Analysis

Opens the Batch Stream Processor, which you can use to analyze multiple jobs in batch mode.
You can run up to twelve different jobs completely unattended. Before initiating the batch stream
process, verify that the batch jobs meet the following criteria:
 All jobs are located in the same data folder, and the default data folder is set to this folder.
 All jobs have successfully passed error checking and must have dynamic load cases defined.
If the static load cases have not been defined, CAESAR II uses the standard recommended
cases.
 Accounting is turned off or is set so that a default account number can be assumed by the
software.
The Batch Stream Processor creates a log file, named BATCH.LOG, and saves it in the same
folder as the batch jobs. You can use the log file to review processing times and to help diagnose
any failures in the batch process. The log file is a standard ASCII text file, which can be edited or
printed using a standard text editor, such as Notepad.
Define Jobs to Run

Opens the Batch Stream Data Definition dialog box in which you can define the names and job
types to be executed by the stream. The job names are the usual CAESAR II job names that have
been prepared for analysis.
Analyze Specified Jobs

Analyzes all previously defined jobs. You do not have to analyze the jobs immediately. Job names
and analysis types are stored in a data file, BATCH.STM, which can be invoked at any time.

CAESAR II Error Processing

CAESAR II makes every effort to alert you when it encounters data that is inconsistent or unusual
for the type of analysis that it is performing. Even so, the potential still exists for user-modeling
techniques or hardware/operating system problems that can generate an error condition within
the CAESAR II computation routines. Recognizing this potential, the software performs internal
self-checks to trap abnormal conditions such as full hard disks, invalid or expired ESLs, file
corruption, and insufficient free memory.
Whenever a fatal error condition arises, CAESAR II aborts the current process and uses a
multi-stage approach to provide you with an explanation regarding why the process was aborted.
First, each error trap/condition is assigned a unique number. When an abort condition occurs, this
error number and a short description of the fatal error are displayed in a Help Facility window
similar to the one shown below.
When you click OK, the software closes the Help Facility window and opens the Additional
Error Information dialog box. You can use this dialog box to reference another error number,
which can be useful when one error definition references another. Clicking OK on the Additional
Error Information dialog box returns the software to the main CAESAR II window.
At any time, you can review fatal error information by clicking Diagnostics > Error
Review, entering the appropriate error number, and then clicking OK. The Help Facility window
opens and displays the corresponding fatal error description.

SECTION 15
External Interfaces
External Interfaces allow data transfer between CAESAR II and other software applications. To
view a list of those software applications, click Interfaces on the main window ribbon or Tools >
External Interfaces in the main window menu.
In most cases, data transfer is from a drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. However:
 Most of the interfaces are CAD interfaces. The exceptions are LIQT, AFT IMPULSE™,
®
PIPENET™, Pipeplus, FlowMaster , the CAESAR II Data Matrix, and the CAESAR II Neutral
File.
 CAD interfaces (CADPIPE, Intergraph Smart 3D PCF, Intergraph PDS, and PCF) are
intended to transfer piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting CAESAR II input must be
thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
 CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from CAESAR II.
 Intergraph CADWorx Plant is the Intergraph CAS piping design and drafting software for the
AutoCAD environment. It provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between CADWorx and
CAESAR II without a translation procedure. Data may be completely and seamlessly
transferred between CAESAR II and Intergraph CADWorx Plant, without creating any neutral
files or going through any intermediate steps.
 The CAESAR II Neutral File and the Intergraph CADWorx Plant interfaces are capable of
transferring 100% of the data that comprises the _A (input) file.
 LIQT, AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, PipePlus, and FlowMaster are transient analysis packages
for liquids in piping networks that calculate pressure imbalances as a function of time. The
CAESAR II interface converts this LIQT output from these packages to create force response
spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.
 The interfaces typically prompt you for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for
another file name. This cycle continues either until a blank file name is encountered or you
cancel the process.
 Before beginning an interface to CAESAR II, follow the requirements of the CAESAR II Neutral
File interface. This enables all of the spreadsheet data to be transferred.
CAESAR II Neutral File

Enables access to any particular data item from an _A input file, to enable a complete _A file to be
built from a CAD application. The general neutral file can be used to send data either to or from the
standard CAESAR II binary input file, otherwise known as the _A file. The name of the file used or
generated by this interface is the CAESAR II jobname with the extension .CII. Also, the interface
allows CAESAR II input data to be used for other analysis purposes.
The content and format described in this section is subject to change as a function of
the enhancements made to CAESAR II. Every effort is being made to keep "drastic" changes to a
minimum.

External Interfaces
®’ ®’
Several third-party CAD applications, such as AVEVA s PDMS and Jacobus’ PlantSpace™,
also support this neutral file. If you prefer, instead of launching this interface from Tools >
External Interface, the processor can be run in "batch mode" from either a batch file or the
command line as shown below.
f:\ProgramDirectory\iecho f:\DataDirectory\NeutralFile.cii
where:
f:\ProgramDirectory and f:\DataDirectory must be changed as appropriate.
The CAESAR II neutral file, also referred to as the .CII file, is divided into sections which organize
the piping data in logical groupings. Section divisions are denoted in the neutral file by the ‘#$’
character sequence found in columns 1 and 2. The token following the #$ character sequence is a
section identifier that is used by CAESAR II for data sequencing purposes, and to aid you in
reading the neutral file. For each item listed on the following pages, the necessary FORTRAN
format for the input/output is provided. The variables listed below are used in dimensioning arrays.
 N1—Base memory allocation quantity used to set array sizes. For example, if N1=2,000, your
neutral file can handle up to 2,000 elements.
 N2—1/2 N1
 N3—1/3 N1
 N4—1/4 N1
 N5—1/5 N1
 N6—N1/13.33
Basic Element Data

#$ ELEMENTS - Contains integer and real data for each element in the input file. The data is
organized as shown below.
1. Real values for element "i"
2. Integer values for element "i"
3. Real values for element "i+1"
4. Integer values for element "i+1"
These real and integer values are stored in arrays that are described below.
A 98-member array (REL) contains the real basic-element data. The REL array is dimensioned
(N1,98).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 53 items on the
appropriate nine lines of the neutral file.
1. FROM node number
2. TO node number
3. Delta X
4. Delta Y
5. Delta Z
6. Diameter (value stored here is actual OD)

External Interfaces
7. Wall Thickness (actual)

8. Insulation Thickness
9. Corrosion Allowance
10. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1 (or Temperature #1)
19. Pressure #1
20. Pressure #2
21. Pressure #3
22. Pressure #4
23. Pressure #5
24. Pressure #6
25. Pressure #7
26. Pressure #8
27. Pressure #9
28. Elastic Modulus (cold)
29. Poisson’s Ratio
30. Pipe Density
31. Insulation Density
32. Fluid Density
33. Minus Mill Tolerance
34. Plus Mill Tolerance
35. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
36. Hydro Pressure
37. Elastic Modulus (Hot #1)

External Interfaces

46. "wL" Factor
47. Element Orientation Angle (To End), FEATools Data Only
48. Element Orientation Angle (From End), FEATools Data Only
49. Cladding Thickness
50. Cladding Density
51. Insulation + Cladding Weight/length
52. Refractory Thickness
53. Refractory Density
Non-specified real values are assigned a value of 0.0 by this interface.
If the delta coordinates are not specified, they default to zero. If the To/From fields are not
specified, it is considered an error.
Use the FORTRAN format (7X, I5, 1X, A500) to write the values of the following item on the next
line.
1. Element Name
The value before the string indicates the length of the string.
An 18-member array (IEL) contains the pointers to the auxiliary data arrays. The IEL array is
dimensioned (N1,18).
At this time, only 15 of the members of this array are used.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following 15 items on the next three
lines of the neutral file.
1. Pointer to Bend Auxiliary field. This indicates where in the bend auxiliary array the bend data
for the current element can be found.
2. Pointer to Rigid Element Auxiliary field.
3. Pointer to Expansion Joint Auxiliary field.
4. Pointer to Restraint Auxiliary field.
5. Pointer to Displacement Auxiliary field.
6. Pointer to Force/Moment Auxiliary field.
7. Pointer to Uniform Load Auxiliary field.
8. Pointer to Wind Load Auxiliary field.
9. Pointer to Element Offset Auxiliary field.
10. Pointer to Allowable Stress Auxiliary field.
11. Pointer to Intersection Auxiliary field.

External Interfaces
12. Pointer to Node Name Auxiliary field.

13. Pointer to Reducer Auxiliary field.
14. Pointer to Flange Auxiliary field.
15. Pointer to Nozzle/Equipment Check Auxiliary field.
When there is no auxiliary data of a particular type associated with the current element
use a pointer value of zero.
Auxiliary Element Data

#$ AUX_DATA
Contains the auxiliary data corresponding to the elements. This data is arranged in the same
order as the IAUXAU array described previously. For example, if IAUXAU(1) contains a 3,
then there are three bends in the model, and their data is found next in the neutral file.
Likewise, if IAUXAU(2) contains a 5, then there are five rigid elements in the model and their
data follows the bend data.
Each set of auxiliary data is separated by a sub-section header. If a particular value in IAUXAU is
zero, then only the subsection header is written to the neutral file.
The data storage for these arrays is allocated at runtime based on the available free system
memory. These arrays are allocated proportionally as a percentage of the n-number of elements
allowed. Four proportions are used: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and 1/5. These proportions correspond to the
variables: N2, N3, N4, and N5. Maintain these proportions to ensure that the neutral file reader
can accept the file.
#$ NODENAME
Defines the Node Name data. To maintain downward compatibility, this section is optional.
The data for each element set of node names in the input file is listed here.
A two-member array (NAM) defines each set of node names. The NAM array is dimensioned (N6,
2). Use the FORTRAN format (2X, A10, 16X, A10) to read the character name of the FROM node
and then that of the TO node.
#$ BEND
Defines the bend data. The data for each bend in the input file is listed here.
A 15-member array (BND) defines each bend. The BND array is dimensioned (N3,15).
Only 13 items are currently used. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of
the following 13 items on the next three lines of the neutral file.
1. Bend radius
2. Type: 1 - single flange; 2 - double flange; 0 or blank - welded
3. Angle to node position #1
4. Node number at position #1

External Interfaces
9. Number of miter cuts

10. Fitting thickness of bend if different from the pipe
11. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
12. Bend flexibility (K) factor
13. Weld strength reduction factor WL
#$ RIGID
Defines the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) is used for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1). The
single element of the array represents the rigid weight.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
#$ EXPJT
Defines the expansion joint data. The data for each expansion joint in the input file is listed
here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next line
of the neutral file.
1. Axial stiffness
2. Transverse stiffness
3. Bending stiffness
4. Torsional stiffness
5. Effective inside bellows diameter
#$ RESTRANT
Defines the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array is
dimensioned (N2,36).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the next
two lines of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated six times for the six possible restraints
defined in the auxiliary data block.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification. This means twelve lines
total for each restraint auxiliary.
1. Restraint node number
2. Restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3. Restraint stiffness
4. Restraint gap
5. Restraint friction coefficient
6. Restraint connecting node
7. X direction cosine
8. Y direction cosine

External Interfaces
9. Z direction cosine
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62. The 62 possible restraint
types include:
Use the FORTRAN format (7X, I5, 1X, A100) to write the values of the following two items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These two items follow the restraint specifications above and the
neutral file repeats the lines six times for the six possible restraint degrees of freedom defined in
the Restraints Auxiliary data in the piping input.
1. Support Tag
2. Support GUID
The value at the beginning of each string indicates the length of the string. If the string
is blank, the value is 0.
#$ DISPLMNT
Defines the displacement data. The data for each displacement auxiliary data block in the
input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
lines of the neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).

External Interfaces
This requires 10 lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification. This means 20 lines
total for each displacement auxiliary.
These 55 items are repeated twice for the two possible displacements defined on the auxiliary.
Unspecified displacement values (free-displacement degrees of freedom, for example)
are designated by using a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT
Defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for each force/moment auxiliary data
block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
ten lines of the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This requires ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification. This means 20 lines
total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.

External Interfaces
#$ UNIFORM
Defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each uniform load in the input file is
listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next two
lines of the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,36). Currently three vectors of four
values each (three directions and a G-load flag) are used.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
G-flag is 1 for the input values in G's and 0 for input values in force-per-length notation.
{vector 1 & 2} UX1 UY1 UZ1 G-fla UX2 UY2

g1
{vector 2 & 3} UZ2 G-flag UX3 UY3 UZ3 G-flag

2 3
#$ WIND
Defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each wind/wave specification in the input
file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,6).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the neutral file.
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The data items on each line are as follows:
1. Entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2. Wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3. Wave added mass coefficient
4. Wave lift coefficient

External Interfaces
5. Wave marine growth

6. Marine growth density
#$ OFFSETS
Defines the start of the element offset data. The data for each offset pipe in the input file is
listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following six items on the next line of
the neutral file. The OFF array is dimensioned (N5,6).
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each offset auxiliary.
1. Element FROM node offset in X direction
2. Element FROM node offset in Y direction
3. Element FROM node offset in Z direction
4. Element TO node offset in X direction
5. Element TO node offset in Y direction
6. Element TO node offset in Z direction
#$ ALLOWBLS
Defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for each allowable spec in the input file
is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 153 items on the next 26
lines of the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,153).
1. Cold allowable stress
2. Hot allowable for thermal case #1
5. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
8. Eff.
9. Sy
10. Fac
11. Pmax
12. Piping code id

External Interfaces

Items 25 through 32 represent Cycles, and items 33 through 40 represent Stresses for eight BW
(butt-weld)/Class D Fatigue pairs.
Items 41 through 48 represent Cycles, and items 49 through 56 represent Stresses for eight FW
(fillet-weld)/Class E Fatigue pairs.
Items 57 through 64 represent Cycles, and items 65 through 72 represent Stresses for eight Class
F Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 73 through 80 represent Cycles, and items 81 through 88 represent Stresses for eight Class
G Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 89 through 96 represent Cycles, and items 97 through 104 represent Stresses for eight
Class W Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Item 105 – Elastic Modulus correction
Item 106 – has different meanings based on the active piping code: Allowed Cycles Maximum (per
B31.3); Restrained Piping (per B31.8); Material Composition/Type (per HPGSL and JPI).
Item 107 – UTS ambient
Item 108 – Allowable Sy/St value
Items 109 through 117 represent nine SY values at temperature.
Items 118 through 126 represent nine UTS values at temperature.
Items 127 through 153 are currently unused. Write the value of 0.000000.
 Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active piping
code.
 Piping code ISO-14692 has special mapping for the first 24 items.
#$ SIF&TEES
Defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each SIF/TEE specification in the input file
is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 30 items, for each of the
two tees that can be specified on the dialog box. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,60).
The software requires five lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified. This means you
must specify 10 lines total for each auxiliary element.
The information in parenthesis below gives information about each input value.

External Interfaces
1. Node (the intersection node number)

2. Type (the intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary this is only used to specify SIFs)
3. In-Plane SIF (ii)*
4. Out-Plane SIF (io)*
5. Weld (d) (circumferential weld mismatch, used for butt welds and tapered transitions
6. Fillet (fillet leg length)
7. Pad Thk (thickness of the reinforcing pad)
8. Ftg Ro (fitting outside radius for branch connections)
9. Crotch R (crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee)
10. Weld ID (weld ID value)
11. B1 (code-specific value)
12. B2 (code-specific value)
13. In-Plane Index (Ii)*
14. Out-Plane Index (Io)*
15. Torsion SIF (it)*
16. Axial SIF (ia)*
17. Pressure SIF (ip)*
18. Pressure Index (Ip)*
19-22*
*Values 3, 4, 11, and 13-22 are for the IGE/TD/12 piping code.
23. (code-related "Note" options)
24. (code-related "Note" options)
25. Axial Index (Ia)
26. Torsion Index (It)
Some of these values may have different meanings based on the piping code you have
selected. For more information on piping input specifics, see SIFs & Tees (on page 134).
#$ REDUCERS
This subsection header defines the start of the REDUCER data. The data for each REDUCER
spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next line
of the neutral file. The RED array is dimensioned (N6,5).
This requires one line in the neutral file for each REDUCER specified.
1. Second diameter of the reducer
2. Second thickness of the reducer
3. Alpha angle of the reducer
4. R1 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code

External Interfaces
5. R2 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code

These values are repeated for the second intersection specification.
#$ FLANGES
Defines the FLANGE data. The data for each FLANGE spec in the input file is listed here.
There are 72 data values used to describe a flange.
1. FROM/TO (0 = FROM, 1 = TO, 2= BOTH)
2. METHOD (0 = PEQ, 1 = ASME NC)
3. GASKET OR BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER, DEPENDING ON METHOD
4. BOLT AREA (ASME METHOD ONLY)
5. SYC (ASME METHOD ONLY)
6. SY1 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
15. 15-24 CLASS NAME, (40 CHAR MAX)
16. 25-48 24 TEMPERATURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD
ONLY)
17. 49-72 24 PRESSURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD ONLY)
These values are arranged in the neutral file on 12 lines using a format of (2X, 6G13.6) unless
otherwise specified:
Line 1: Flange items 1-5
Line 4: Class Name, using a format of (2X, A40)

External Interfaces

All 12 lines must be written to the neutral file for each flange. Unused fields/values can be
represented by 0.00.
#$ EQUIPMNT
Defines the Equipment/Nozzle Check data. The data for each EQUIPMNT spec in the input
file is listed here. There are two sets of 17 data values that use a format of (2X, 6G13.6) as
shown below:
1. Node Number
2. Limiting load value FX
3. Limiting load value FY
4. Limiting load value FZ
5. Limiting load value MX
6. Limiting load value MY
7. Limiting load value MZ
8. Reference axis direction cosine CosX
9. Reference axis direction cosine CosY
10. Reference axis direction cosine CosZ
11. Flange rating
12. Interaction method: 0=absolute; 1=SRSS; 2=Unity Check;
Items 13-17 are spares represented by 0.00. These values are arranged in the neutral file on six
lines. All six lines must be written to the neutral file for each Nozzle/Equipment check. Unused
fields/values can be represented by 0.00.
Miscellaneous Data Group #1

#$ MISCEL_1
Contains the material ID (RRMAT) for each element in the input file, the nozzle data (VFLEX),
the hanger data, and the execution options.
Material ID
Contains the material ID number in the first array for each element in the input file. Use the
FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
The RRMAT array is dimensioned (N1). The material IDs range from 1 to 699 (See the User’s
Guide for details).
The number of lines required to write the RRMAT array in the neutral file is determined by the
following FORTRAN routine:
NLINES = NUMELT / 6
IF(MOD(NUMELT,6).NE.0)THEN
NLINES = NLINES + 1
ENDIF
Nozzles

External Interfaces
Describes the flexible WRC-297, PD-5500, API 650, and Custom nozzles in the input file.
The value 9999.99 represents infinity or an undefined term.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). The nozzle (VFLEX) contains 22 values for each nozzle
in the input. This requires four lines in the neutral file.
For WRC-297 nozzles, the items are:
1. Nozzle node number
2. Vessel node number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (0 = WRC-297)
4. Nozzle outside diameter (in.)
5. Nozzle wall thickness (in.)
6. Vessel outside diameter (in.)
7. Vessel wall thickness (in.)
8. Vessel reinforcing pad thickness (in.)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.)
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.)
12. Vessel centerline direction vector X
13. Vessel centerline direction vector Y
14. Vessel centerline direction vector Z
15. Vessel temperature (optional) (°F)
16. Vessel material # (optional)
17. Spare (not used)
For API 650 nozzles, the items are:
2. Tank node number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (1.0 = API-650)
6. Tank outer diameter (in.)
7. Tank wall thickness (in.)

External Interfaces
8. Spare (not used)

9. Reinforcing on shell (1) or nozzle (2)
10. Nozzle height (in.)
11. Fluid height (in.)
12. Displacement vector (integer value between 1 and 9, 0 if unused)
13. Specific gravity of fluid
14. Tank thermal expansion coefficient (in/in/deg)
15. Delta temperature (°F)
16. Elastic modulus (psi)
For PD-5500 nozzles, the items are:
3. Nozzle type indicator (.0 = PD-5500)
5. Vessel type (0-cylinder, 1-sphere)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.)
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.)
15. Vessel Temperature (optional) (°F)
16. Vessel Material # (optional)

External Interfaces

For Custom nozzles, the items are:
3. Nozzle type indicator (3.0 = Custom)
9. Spare (not used)
16. Vessel material # (optional)
19. Axial stiffness (lb.\in.)
20. In-plane stiffness (in.-lb./deg.)
21. Out-of-plane stiffness (in.-lb./deg.)
22. Torsional stiffness (in.-lb./deg.)
Hangers
Describes the spring hangers in the input file. Some of the hanger data listed below
represents uninitialized data. In the instances where this uninitialized data represent infinite
values (such as maximum travel limit and available space), it is reported here as 9999.99.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in FORTRAN format (2X, I13, 5G13.6):
 IDFTABLE is the default hanger table.
 DEFVAR is the default for allowed load variation.
 DEFRIG is the default for rigid support displacement criteria.
 DEFMXTRAVEL is the default for maximum allowed travel.

External Interfaces
 DEFSHTSPR is the default for allowing short range springs (0=no 1=yes).
 DEFMUL is the default multi-load case design option.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in the FORTRAN format (2X, 5I13):
 IDFOPER is the default number of hanger design operating cases (always 1).
 IACTCLD is the default cold load calculation switch (0=no, 1=yes).
 IHGRLDS is the number of hanger operating loads (0 -3).
 IACTUAL is the load case defining actual cold loads.
 IMULTIOPTS is the multi-load case design option (1-7).
An array of hanger node numbers (IHGRNODE) is read and written for each hanger in the input
file and is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers
are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
The neutral file reads and writes an 11-element array (HGRDAT) for each hanger in the input file.
The HGRDAT array is dimensioned (11,N5). Each hanger in the model requires two lines in the
neutral file. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
1. Hanger stiffness
2. Allowable load variation
3. Rigid support displacement criteria
4. Allowed space for hanger
5. Cold load #1 (theoretical)
6. Hot load #1 (initialize to 0.0)
7. User defined operating load f/ variable springs (init to 0.0)
8. Maximum allowed travel limit
9. Multiple load case design option
10. Hanger hardware weight
11. Constant effort support load (CEFF)
Use the FORTRAN format (7X, I5, 1X, A100) to write the values of the following two items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These two items follow the hanger specifications above and the
neutral file repeats the lines for each hanger defined in the Hangers Auxiliary data in the piping
input.
1. Hanger Tag
2. Hanger GUID
The value at the beginning of each string indicates the length of the string. If the string
is blank, the value is 0.
A four-element array (IHGRFREE) is read/written for each hanger in the input file. The IHGRFREE
array is dimensioned ( 4,N5). Each hanger in the file requires one line in the neutral file.

External Interfaces
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).

1. Anchor node to be freed (#1)
2. Anchor node to be freed (#2)
3. d.o.f. type for #1 (1-free Y, 2-free XY, 3-free ZY, 4-free X, Y, Z, 5-free all)
4. d.o.f. type for #2
An array (IHGRNUM) lists the number of hangers at this location for each hanger in the input file.
There is one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRNUM array is dimensioned (N5).
There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use the
FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
An array (IHGRTABLE) lists the hanger table numbers for each hanger in the input file. There is
one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRTABLE is dimensioned (N5). There are seven
lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X,
6I13).
An array of flags (IHGRSHORT) indicates if short range springs can be used at each hanger
location. The IHGRSHORT array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for
this data. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
 0 = cannot use short range springs
 1 = can use short range springs
An array of connecting node numbers (IHGRCN) is available for each hanger. The IHGRCN array
is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are
specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
Execution Options
Defines the execution options used by CAESAR II. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13,
G13.6, I13). This requires three lines in the neutral file. These values are:
 Print forces on rigids and expansion joints 0=no, 1=yes
 Print alphas & pipe props. during error checking 0=no, 1=yes
 Activate Bourdon Pressure Effects 0, 1, or 2
 Activate Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 0=no, 1=yes
 Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature degrees
 Use Liberal Stress Allowable 0=no, 1=yes
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format: (2X, I13, 2G13.6, 3I13):
 Uniform Load Input in g’s 0=no, 1=yes
 Stress Stiffening due to Pressure 0, 1, 2
 Ambient Temperature (If not 70.00 deg F ) degrees
 FRP Expansion * 1,000,000 len/len/deg
 Optimizer 0-Both, 1-CuthillMcKee, 2-Collins
 Next Node Selection 0-Decreasing, 1-Increasing
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13):
 Final Ordering 0-Reversed, 1-Not Reversed

External Interfaces
 Collins Ordering 0-Band, 1-No. of Coefficients

 Degree Determination 0-Connections, 1-Band
 User Control 0-None, 1-Allow User Re-Looping
 FRP Shear ratio
 Laminate type
Units Conversion Data

#$ UNITS
Defines both the conversion constants and the conversion labels. The conversion constants
are all REAL*4 values in FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). This requires four lines in the
neutral file. The character definitions for the labels are listed below.
CNVLEN
Defines the length conversion
CNVFOR
Defines the force conversion
CNVMAS
Defines the mass conversion
CNVMIN
Defines the moment (input) conversion
CNVMOU
Defines the moment (output) conversion
CNVSTR
Defines the stress conversion
CNVTSC
Defines the temperature conversion
CNVTOF
Defines the temperature offset
CNVPRE
Defines the Pressure conversion
CNVYM
Defines the Young’s modulus conversion
CNVPDN
Defines the pipe density conversion
CNVIDN
Defines the insulation density conversion
CNVFDN

External Interfaces
Defines the fluid density conversion

CNVTSF
Defines the translational stiffness conversion
CNVUNI
Defines the uniform load conversion
CNVWND
Defines the wind load conversion
CNVELE
Defines the elevation conversion
CNVCLN
Defines the compound length conversion
CNVDIA
Defines the diameter conversion
CNVTHK
Wall thickness conversion
Next, enter the following labels for units, one per line, in the format given in the label descriptions.
This requires 24 lines in the neutral file.
CCVNAME
Defines the name of the units used, such as English (CHARACTER*15)
CCVNOM
Sets On or Off, and tells PREPIP whether or not nominal diameters are allowed
(CHARACTER* 3)
CCVLEN
Defines the length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVFOR
Defines the force label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMAS
Defines the mass label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMIN
Defines the moment (input) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVMOU
Defines the moment (output) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVSTR
Defines the stress label (CHARACTER*10)

External Interfaces
CCVTSC
Defines the temperature label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVTOF
Defines the temperature offset/label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVPRE
Defines the pressure label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVYM
Defines Young’s modulus label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVPDN
Defines the pipe density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVIDN
Defines the insulation density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVFDN
Defines the fluid density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSF
Defines the translational stiffness label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVRSF
Defines the rotational stiffness label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVUNI
Defines the uniform load label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVGLD
Defines the gravitational load label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVWND
Defines the wind load label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVELE
Defines the elevation label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVCLN
Defines the compound length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVDIA
Defines the diameter label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVTHK
Defines the wall thickness label (CHARACTER* 3)

External Interfaces
Nodal Coordinate Data

#$ COORDS
Specifies the X, Y, Z global coordinates of the starting node point of each discontinuous piping
segment. The data in this section of the neutral file is optional; it may not exist. The existence
of this data depends on user preference and the particular job. The data is defined below.
NXYZ
Defines how many sets of coordinates follow. Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13).
INODE, XCORD, YCORD, ZCORD
Consists of four values in a line and is repeated NXYZ times.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13, 3F13.4) to define a node number and the X, Y, Z global
coordinates.
This section only exists in Versions 3.22 and later.
Version and Job Title Information

#$ VERSION - Provides section header information.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 2G13.6, I8) to write the values of the following variables on the
first line of the neutral file:
 GVERSION is the version of the neutral file interface being used. This corresponds to the
major version number of CAESAR II (4 for 4.x., for example).
 RVERSION is the specific CAESAR II version generating this file, for example 4.50.
 ICODEPAGE is the Windows (ANSI) code page identifier, for example 1252.
The next 60 lines of 75 characters each are reserved for the CAESAR II title-page text. Use
FORTRAN format (2X, A75).
The last line of the job title array, if blank, is set by this transfer interface. The text that is set here
indicates that the file was created by the CAESAR II interface.
Control Information
#$ CONTROL
Provides the section division header. The #$ and space are required, and the word
CONTROL is in all uppercase.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next line
of the neutral file:
NUMELT
Defines the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ
Defines the number of nozzles in the input file.

External Interfaces
NOHGRS
Defines the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM
Defines the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
NORED
Defines the number of reducers in the input file.
NUMFLG
Defines the number of flanges in the input file.
Write 13 items that contain the number of auxiliary data types used in the input file followed by the
vertical axis indicator. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13). These 13 values are:
 The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of displacement auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of force/moment auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of uniform-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of wind-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of element-offset auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of allowable-stress auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
 The number of intersection auxiliary data blocks in the input file. IZUP flag. Equal to zero (0)
for the global -Y axis vertical; equal to 1 for the global -Z axis vertical.
 The number of (nozzle) equipment limits data blocks in the input file.
Neutral File Generator

Generates the CAESAR II neutral file (.cii), which you use to send data to or from the standard
CAESAR II input file to another interface or a third-party application.
Conversion Type
Select the type of file you want to convert using the Neutral File Generator. You can convert a
neutral file (.cii) to an CAESAR II input file (._a) or vice-versa.
Next, browse and select or type the name of the neutral file to be converted and click Convert.
The software prompts you when the conversion completes. Click OK and indicate whether you
want to perform another file conversion. When you are done converting files, click No and the
software exits from the dialog box.

External Interfaces
Neutral File Name to Be Converted

Browse and select or type the name of the file to be converted, based on the Conversion Type
you selected.
CAESAR II indicates the name of the file and the directory. The software defaults this path to the
same location as the file you selected for conversion.
Next, browse and select or type the name of the converted file and click Convert. The software
prompts you when the conversion completes. Click OK and indicate whether you want to perform
another file conversion. When you are done converting files, click No and the software exits from
the dialog box.
File Name to Be Created

Indicates the name of the file the generator creates, which is the same name as the selected file
for conversion, but with an extension that reflects the Conversion Type selected (i.e., ._a for an
CAESAR II input file and .cii for a neutral file).
CAESAR II Data Matrix

The generic CAESAR II data matrix input routine creates a CAESAR II file from a simple neutral
file. The Data Matrix Interface transfers only the piping geometry. This requires you to input
additional data to complete the stress model. It expects to read a file that contains a single line of
data for each pipe in the model. Each line of data contains 12 parameters as listed below.
ELMT
Defines the element number sequential from 1.
N1
Defines the From node number.
N2
Defines the To node number.
DX
Defines the delta dimension in the global "X" direction.
DY
Defines the delta dimension in the global "Y" direction (the "Y" axis is vertical in CAESAR II).
DZ
Defines the delta dimension in the global "Z" direction.
DIAM
Defines the actual pipe diameter.
THK
Defines the actual pipe wall thickness.

External Interfaces
ANCH
Provides a restraint flag. A value of 1 sets the From node to be restrained. A zero (0) value is
otherwise and is currently ignored.
BEND
Defines the bend indicator. A value of 1 sets a bend at the To node. A zero (0) value is no
bend.
BRAD
Defines the bend radius if not a long radius bend.
RIGID
Defines a rigid element flag. A value of 1 sets the element to rigid. A value of zero (0) value
sets the element to nonrigid.
All values in the matrix should be real floating point numbers. The format for each line of data must
be (12E13.6). This generic interface prompts for an arbitrary conversion constant for the delta
dimensions, and the diameter /thickness values to overcome any differences between the
assumed units of the neutral file and the CAESAR II defaults.
If you are developing a completely new interface, use the CAESAR II Neutral File (on page 1093).
Data Export Wizard

Interfaces tab: Generic > Data Export Wizard
Menu: Tools > External Interfaces > Data Export Wizard
Provides export of both the input model and output data.
You can also export output data automatically with each analysis through ODBC
Settings in the configuration file under Database Definitions.
This wizard is compatible with ODBC Microsoft Access and Excel and can also export data in XML
format. The Excel interface produces a semicolon delimited text file that can quickly be imported
into Excel.
Export Data Using the Data Export Wizard

1. If you have another module open, close it to return to the main CAESAR II window.
2. Click Data Export Wizard.
The Data Export Wizard displays.
3. Review the export types described on the page and click Next to proceed.
CAESAR II displays the Input and Output Files page.
4. Browse for the required CAESAR II piping file to export. This file can be the .C2 file or the
specific ._A file). By default, the most recently used CAESAR II file is selected for export.
5. Specify a revision number for the exported data set, if applicable.
6. Select Export Output Data Also if you want to include any output results (if available) in the
exported data set.

External Interfaces
7. Select Use System Units to convert the output data to the set of units currently defined in the
CAESAR II Configure/Setup.
8. Perform one of the following:
a. Click Quick XML Export to transfer the input data to the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and
output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where filename is the name of the file you
selected to export).
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file. Click OK to
open the file or Cancel to exit the wizard.
You must have the appropriate application installed to open the file format or
the exported file does not open.
-OR-
b. Complete steps 9 through 14.
9. Click Browse in the Select the Data Export Output File box and navigate to the location of
the output data.
10. Specify the file name and required data output, and then click Save.
You can export files in the following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office
2001/2002/Access Database), .accdb (Microsoft Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt
(Microsoft Excel compatible text), or .xml (Extensible Markup Language).
CAESAR II returns to the Input and Output Files page.
11. Click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Input Export Options page.
12. Select the input options you want to export and then click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Output Report Options page.
13. Select the static load cases for your results and the output report options that you want to
export.
Several built-in reports, queries, and other helpful options are provided in the
default Access file format, or you can develop custom reports and queries.
14. Click Finish.
CAESAR II prompts you to open the newly exported file.
15. Do one of the following:
a. Click OK to open the exported file.
-OR-
b. Click Cancel to close the wizard.

External Interfaces
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog Box

Select the file that you want to export.
Additionally, you can specify details about the file, such as a revision number, whether or not you
want output results included in the exported data set, and if you want to convert the output data set
into another unit of measure. Also, you specify for CAESAR II to perform a quick export of the job,
where CAESAR II uses a standard naming convention and exports the input and output of the job
into .xml format.
Select CAESAR II File

Browse and select the CAESAR II file that you want to export.
This file can be a CAESAR II (.C2) file or the specific CAESAR II binary input (._A) file. By default,
the current CAESAR II file is selected for export.
Specify Revision Number

Specifies a revision number for the CAESAR II exported file. The revision number is stored as
ISSUE_NO in the exported file.
Export Output Data Also

Indicates whether you want to also export output reports. If you select this check box, CAESAR II
prompts you with the Output Report Options dialog box after you specify input export options.
Use System Units

Indicates that CAESAR II uses the units of measure specified in the CAESAR II configuration file
(Caesar.cfg, which is located in the current input file directory) for the exported output file. When
not selected, CAESAR II uses the units of measure specified in the selected input file.
Quick XML Export

Click Quick Xml Export if you want CAESAR II to export the selected file using all default export
options selected. CAESAR II immediately begins the export, exporting the input data to the
"filename_ INPUT.xml" file and output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where filename is
the name of the file you selected to export).
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box

Select the input options to export. CAESAR II exports the input and results to various formats,
which you can use to interface with other software. The options you select in this dialog box
determine what columns appear in the specified exported format.
Elements Input Export Option

Exports the basic element data including pointers to auxiliary data.

External Interfaces
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA

XML Primary Tag: PIPINGELEMENT.
Data Name Access Column Name XML Tag Name
Element identifier ELEMENTID
Element name ELEMENT_NAME ELEMENT_NAME
From node number FROM_NODE FROM_NODE
To node number TO_NODE TO_NODE
From node name FROM_NODE_NAME
To node name TO_NODE_NAME
Line number LINE_NO
Delta X DELTA_X DELTA_X
Delta Y DELTA_Y DELTA_Y
Delta Z DELTA_Z DELTA_Z
Diameter (actual OD) DIAMETER DIAMETER
Wall thickness (actual) WALL_THICK WALL_THICK
Insulation thickness INSUL_THICK INSUL_THICK
Corrosion allowance CORR_ALLOW CORR_ALLOW
Thermal Expansion Coefficient TEMP_EXP_C1 TEMP_EXP_C1

#1 or Temperature #1






External Interfaces



Pressure #1 PRESSURE1 PRESSURE1
Elastic Modulus MODULUS MODULUS
Hot Elastic Modulus #1 HOT_MOD1

External Interfaces
Poisson's Ratio POISSONS POISSONS
Pipe Density PIPE_DENSITY PIPE_DENSITY
Insulation Density INSUL_DENSITY INSUL_DENSITY
Fluid Density FLUID_DENSITY FLUID_DENSITY
Refractory Thickness REFRACT_THK
Refractory Density REFRACT_DENSITY
Cladding Thickness CLAD_THK
Cladding Density CLAD_DENSITY
Insulation and Cladding Unit INSUL_CLAD_UNIT_WEI

Weight GHT
Material Number MATERIAL_NUM MATERIAL_NUM
Material Name MATERIAL_NAME MATERIAL_NAME
Plus Mill Tolerance MILL_TOL_PLUS MILL_TOL_PLUS
Minus Mill Tolerance MILL_TOL_MINUS MILL_TOL_MINUS
Seam Weld SEAM_WELD SEAM_WELD
See Auxiliary Data Pointers for a list of database pointers to auxiliary data, which
also appear in this input options output table.
Auxiliary Data Pointers

The auxiliary data pointers indicate the location of the details for each piece of auxiliary data. For
example, if Bend Pointer is equal to 1 here, then the details of this bend will be contained in the
Bend table where the bend number is also equal to 1.
Auxiliary pointers are only applicable to data export for Microsoft Access and Microsoft
Excel and not to XML.
Pointer Type Access Column Name XML Tag Name
Bend Array Pointer BEND_PTR BEND
Rigid Array Pointer RIGID_PTR RIGID
Expansion Joint Array EXPJ_PTR EXPANSIONJOINT

Pointer

External Interfaces
Pointer Type Access Column Name XML Tag Name
Restraint Array Pointer REST_PTR RESTRAINT
Displacement Array DISP_PTR DISPLACEMENTS

Pointer
Force/Moment Array FORCMNT_PTR FORCEMOMENTS

Pointer
Uniform Load Array Pointer ULOAD_PTR UNIFORMLOAD
Wind/Wave Load Array WLOAD_PTR WIND OR WAVE

Pointer
Element Offset Array EOFF_PTR OFFSET

Pointer
Allowable Stress Array ALLOW_PTR ALLOWABLESTRESS

Pointer
Intersection Array Pointer INT_PTR SIF
Hangers Array Pointer HGR_PTR HANGER
Nozzles Array Pointer NOZ_PTR NOZZLE
Reducers Array Pointer REDUCER_PTR REDUCER
Flanges Array Pointer FLANGE_PTR FLANGE
Select Data Export Output File

Click Browse to locate and select an existing output file to which you want to export the current
file, or specify a file name and format for the data export.
You can export files in the following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office 2001/2002/Access Database),
.accdb (Microsoft Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt (Microsoft Excel compatible text), or
.xml (Extensible Markup Language).
Bends Input Export Option

Exports all the bend information defined in the job. Below are the details of the bend data available
from CAESAR II along with the respective column names and XML tag names.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BENDS
Microsoft Excel section name: BEND DATA
XML Primary Tag: BEND

External Interfaces
Bend Pointer BEND_PTR
Bend Radius RADIUS RADIUS
Type TYPE TYPE

(1-Single flange,
2- double flange,
0 or blank- welded)
Angle to node position #1 ANGLE1 ANGLE1
Node number at position #1 NODE1 NODE1
Number of miter cuts NUM_MITER NUM_MITER
Fitting thickness of bend if FIT_THICK FITTINGTHICKNESS

different from the pipe
Bend K Factor KFACTOR
Is Seam Welded? SEAM_WELD
WL Factor WI_FACTOR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.BEND_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.BEND_PTR

External Interfaces
Rigids Input Export Option

Exports rigid information of all rigid elements defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_RIGIDS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RIGID DATA
XML Primary Tag: RIGID
Rigid Pointer RIGID_PTR
Rigid Weight RIGID_WGT WEIGHT
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RIGID_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.RIGID_NUM.
Expansion Joints Input Export Option

Export expansion joint information of all expansion joints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_EXPJT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: EXPANSION JOINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: EXPANSIONJOINT
Expansion Joint Pointer EXPJT_PTR
Axial stiffness AXIAL_STIF AXIAL_STIF
Transverse stiffness TRANS_STIF TRANS_STIF
Bending Stiffness BEND_STIF BEND_STIF
Torsional stiffness TORS_STIF TORS_STIF
Effective inside bellows diameter BEL_DIA BEL_DIA
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EXPJT_PTR = INPUT_EXPJT.EXPJT_PTR.
Restraints Input Export Option

Export Restraint information of all restraints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_RESTRAINTS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RESTRAINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: RESTRAINT

External Interfaces
Data Name Column Name XML Tag Name
Restraint pointer REST_PTR
Node number NODE_NUM NODE
Node name NODE_NAME
Restraint Codes (on RES_TYPEID TYPE

page 1127)
Stiffness STIFFNESS STIFFNESS
Gap GAP GAP
Friction coefficient FRIC_COEF FRIC_COEF
Connecting node CNODE CNODE
X direction cosine XCOSINE XCOSINE
Y direction cosine YCOSINE YCOSINE
Z direction cosine ZCOSINE ZCOSINE
Tag RES_TAG TAG
GUID RES_GUID GUID
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.REST_PTR = INPUT_RESTRAINTS.REST_PTR.
Restraint Codes
There are 62 different restraints available in CAESAR II. When the restraint information is
exported to a format such as Microsoft Access, a restraint type code is exported. The following is
the key for those restraint codes.
Code Abbreviation Type
1 ANC Anchor
2 X Translational Double Acting
3 Y Translational Double Acting
4 Z Translational Double Acting
5 RX Rotational Double Acting

External Interfaces
6 RY Rotational Double Acting
7 RZ Rotational Double Acting
8 GUI Guide, Double Acting
9 LIM Double Acting Limit Stop
10 XSNB Translational Double Acting Snubber
11 YSNB Translational Double Acting Snubber
12 ZSNB Translational Double Acting Snubber
13 +X Translational Directional
14 +Y Translational Directional
15 +Z Translational Directional
16 -X Translational Directional
17 -Y Translational Directional
18 -Z Translational Directional
19 +RX Rotational Directional
20 +RY Rotational Directional
21 +RZ Rotational Directional
22 -RX Rotational Directional
23 -RY Rotational Directional
24 -RZ Rotational Directional
25 +LIM Directional Limit Stop
26 -LIM Directional Limit Stop
27 XROD Large Rotation Rod
28 YROD Large Rotation Rod
29 ZROD Large Rotation Rod

External Interfaces
30 +XROD Large Rotation Rod
31 +YROD Large Rotation Rod
32 +ZROD Large Rotation Rod
33 -XROD Large Rotation Rod
34 -YROD Large Rotation Rod
35 -ZROD Large Rotation Rod
36 X2 Translational Double Acting Bilinear
37 Y2 Translational Double Acting Bilinear
38 Z2 Translational Double Acting Bilinear
39 RX2 Rotational Double Acting Bilinear
40 RY2 Rotational Double Acting Bilinear
41 RZ2 Rotational Double Acting Bilinear
42 +X2 Translational Directional Bilinear
43 +Y2 Translational Directional Bilinear
44 +Z2 Translational Directional Bilinear
45 -X2 Translational Directional Bilinear
46 -Y2 Translational Directional Bilinear
47 -Z2 Translational Directional Bilinear
48 +RX2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
49 +RY2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
50 +RZ2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
51 +RX2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
52 +RY2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
53 +RZ2 Rotational Directional Bilinear

External Interfaces
54 -RX2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
55 -RY2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
56 -RZ2 Rotational Directional Bilinear
57 +XSNB Directional Snubber
58 +YSNB Directional Snubber
59 +ZSNB Directional Snubber
60 -XSNB Directional Snubber
61 -YSNB Directional Snubber
62 -ZSNB Directional Snubber
Displacements Input Export Option

Export user specified displacement information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_DISPLMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: DISPLACEMENT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: DISPLACEMENTS
Displacement Pointer DISP_PTR
Displacement Number DISP_NUM DISP_NUM
Node Number NODE_NUM NODE_NUM
Vector Number VECTOR_NUM NUMBER*
X axis displacement DX DX*
Y axis displacement DY DY*
Z axis displacement DZ DZ*
X axis rotation RX RX*
Y axis rotation RY RY*
Z axis rotation RZ RZ*

External Interfaces
*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.

INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.DISP_PTR = INPUT_DISPLMNT.DISP_PTR
Forces Moments Input Export Option
Export user specified forces/moments information defined in the input file.

Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FORCMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: FORCES/MOMENTS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: FORCESMOMENTS
Force/Moment Pointer FORCMNT_PTR
Force/Moment Number FORCMNT_NUM FORCMNT_NUM
Node Number NODE_NUM NODE_NUM
Vector Number VECTOR_NUM NUMBER*
X axis force FX FX*
Y axis force FY FY*
Z axis force FZ FZ*
X axis moment MX MX*
Y axis moment MY MY*
Z axis moment MZ MZ*
*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FORCMNT_PTR = INPUT_FORCMNT.FORCMNT_PTR
Uniform Load Input Export Option

Export user specified uniform load information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_UNIFORM
Microsoft Excel Section Name: UNIFORM LOAD DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: UNIFORMLOAD

External Interfaces
Uniform Load Pointer UNIF_PTR
Uniform Load Number VECTOR_NUM VECTOR_NUM
X axis load UX UX
Y axis load UY UY
Z axis load UZ UZ
Uniform Load Type UTYPE
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ULOAD_PTR = INPUT_UNIFORM.ULOAD_PTR
Wind Wave Input Export Option

Export user specified wind or wave information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_WIND
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WIND/WAVE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WIND or WAVE
Wind Pointer WIND_PTR
Entry Type ENTRY_TYPE Not Applicable
Wind Shape Factor OR Wave WSHAP_WDRC WSHAP_WDRC

Drag Coefficient
Wave added mass coefficient WADD_MASS WADD_MASS
Wave Lift Coefficient WLIFT_COEFF WLIFT_COEFF
Wave Marine Growth WMAR_GROWTH WMAR_GROWTH
Wave Growth Density WMAR_GROWTH

_DENSITY
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.WLOAD_PTR = INPUT_WIND.WIND_PTR

External Interfaces
Offsets Input Export Option

Export user specified offset information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_OFFSETS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: OFFSET DATA
Microsoft XML Primary Tag Name: OFFSET
Offsets Pointer OFFSETS_PTR
From node offset in X direction FROMX FROMX
From node offset in Y direction FROMY FROMY
From node offset in Z direction FROMZ FROMZ
To node offset in X direction TOX TOX
To node offset in Y direction TOY TOY
To node offset in Z direction TOZ TOZ
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.OFFSETS_PTR = INPUT_OFFSETS.OFFSETS_PTR
Allowables Input Export Option

Export user specified allowable stress information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_ALLOWBLES
Microsoft Excel Section Name: ALLOWABLE STRESS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: ALLOWABLESTRESS
Allowables Pointer ALLOWBL_PTR
Allowable Stress Indicator ALLOWBL_STRESS ALLOWBL_STRESS

_INDICATOR _INDICATOR
Text file:
ALLOWBL_STRESS_INDI
Case Number CASE_NUM CASE_NUM
Cold Allowable Stress COLD_ALLOW COLD_ALLOW
Hot Allowable Stress HOT_ALLOW HOT_ALLOW*

External Interfaces
Cyclic Reduction Factor CYC_RED_FACTOR CYC_RED_FACTOR*
Design Factor DESIGN_FACTOR DESIGN_FACTOR
Eff EFF EFF
Sy (yield stress) SY SY
Hoop Stress HOOP_STRESS HOOP_STRESS
Hot Sy HOT_SY
SU (minimum ultimate tensile SU

strength)
Hot SU HOT_SU
FAC FAC FAC
PMax PMAX PMAX
Piping Code PIPING_CODE PIPING_CODE
Cycles for BW (butt-weld) fatigue BUTTWELDCYCLES BUTTWELDCYCLES*

pair
Stress for BW fatigue pair BUTTWELDSTRESS BUTTWELDSTRESS*
Cycles for FW (fillet-weld) fatigue FILLETWELDCYCLES FILLETWELDCYCLES*

pair
Stress for FW fatigue pair FILLETWELDSTRESS FILLETWELDSTRESS*
Appendix P - Operating Allowable APP_P_OPE_ALL

Reduction _REDUCTION
* These tags are child tags of CASE_NUM (can range from 1 through 9)
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ALLOW_PTR = INPUT_ALLOWBLS.ALLOW_PTR

External Interfaces
SIFs Tees Input Export Option

Export user specified SIF information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_SIFTEES
Microsoft Excel Section Name: SIF DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: SIF
SIF Pointer SIF_PTR
SIF Number SIF_NUM SIF_NUM
Node Number NODE NODE
Type TYPE TYPE
SIF In-Plane SIF_IN SIF_IN
SIF Out-Plane SIF_OUT SIF_OUT
SIF Torsion SIF_TORSION SIF_TORSION
SIF Axial SIF_AXIAL SIF_AXIAL
SIF Pressure SIF_PRESSURE SIF_PRESSURE
B31.3 2010 Stress STRESSINDEX_Iin STRESSINDEX_Ii

Index for in-plane, Iin n
B31.3 2010 Stress STRESSINDEX_Iou STRESSINDEX_I

Index for out-plane, t out
Iout
B31.3 2010 Stress STRESSINDEX_It STRESSINDEX_It

Index for torsion
stress, It
B31.3 2010 Stress STRESSINDEX_Ia STRESSINDEX_I

Index for axial stress, a
Ia
B31.3 2010 Stress STRESSINDEX_Ipr STRESSINDEX_I

Index for pressure, Ipr pr
Circumferential Weld WELD_d WELD_D
Fillet FILLET FILLET

External Interfaces
Pad Thickness PAD_THK PAD_THK
FTG Ro FTG_RO FTG_RO
Crotch CROTCH CROTCH
Weld ID WELD_ID WELD_ID
B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.INT_PTR = INPUT_SIFTEES.SIF_PTR
Flexible Nozzles Input Export Options

Export user specified nozzle information defined in the input file.
WRC 297
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WRC297 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WRC297_NOZZLE
Nozzle Pointer NOZ_PTR
Vessel Node Number VESSEL_NODE VESSEL_NODE
Nozzle Node Number NOZZLE_NODE NOZZLE_NODE
Nozzle Outside Diameter NOZ_OD NOZ_OD
Nozzle Wall Thickness NOZ_WT NOZ_WT
Vessel Outside Diameter VES_OD VES_OD
Vessel Wall Thickness VES_WT VES_WT
Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness VES_RPT VES_RPT
Dist. to stiffeners or head DIST_HEAD DIST_HEAD
Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head DIST_OPP_HEAD DIST_OPP_HEAD

External Interfaces
Vessel centerline direction vector X VES_CENT_X VES_CENT_X
Vessel centerline direction vector Y VES_CENT_Y VES_CENT_Y
Vessel centerline direction vector Z VES_CENT_Z VES_CENT_Z
Vessel Temperature VES_TEMP VES_TEMP
Vessel Material # VES_MAT VES_MAT
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297.NOZ_PTR
API 650
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_API650
Microsoft Excel Section Name: API650 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: API650_NOZZLE
Tank Node Number TANK_NODE TANK_NODE
Tank Outside Diameter TANK_OD TANK_OD
Tank Wall Thickness TANK_WT TANK_WT
Reinforcing REINFORCE REINFORCE
Nozzle height NOZ_HEIGHT NOZ_HEIGHT
Fluid height FLUID_HEIGHT FLUID_HEIGHT
Fluid specific gravity FLUID_SG FLUID_SG
Thermal expansion coefficient THERM_EXP_COEFF THERM_EXP_COEFF

External Interfaces
Temperature change DELTAT DELTAT
Elastic modulus EMOD EMOD
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_API650.NOZ_PTR
PD 5500
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500
Microsoft Excel Section Name: BS5500 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: BS5500_NOZZLE
Vessel Type VESSEL_TYPE VESSEL_TYPE
Vessel Outside Diameter VES_OD VES_OD
Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness VES_RPT VES_RPT
Dist. to stiffeners or head DIST_HEAD DIST_HEAD
Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head DIST_OPP_HEAD DIST_OPP_HEAD
Vessel centerline direction vector X VES_CENT_X VES_CENT_X
Vessel centerline direction vector Y VES_CENT_Y VES_CENT_Y
Vessel centerline direction vector Z VES_CENT_Z VES_CENT_Z
Vessel Temperature VES_TEMP VES_TEMP

External Interfaces
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500.NOZ_PTR
Custom
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_USERDEFINED
Microsoft Excel Section Name: USERDEFINED NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: USERDEFINED_NOZZLE
Vessel centerline VES_CENT_X VES_CENT_X

direction vector X
Vessel centerline VES_CENT_Y VES_CENT_Y

direction vector Y
Vessel centerline VES_CENT_Z VES_CENT_Z

direction vector Z
Axial (Nozzle) AXIAL_TRANSLATION AXIAL_TRANSLATION

_STIFFNESS _STIFFNESS
In-Plane Bending IN_PLANE_BENDING IN_PLANE_BENDING

Out-of-Plane Bending OUT_PLANE_BENDING OUT_PLANE_BENDING

Torsional (Nozzle) TORSIONAL_BENDING TORSIONAL_BENDING

Nozzle Outside NOZ_OD NOZ_OD

Diameter
Vessel Outside VES_OD VES_OD

Diameter
Vessel Reinforcing Pad VES_RPT VES_RPT

Thickness

External Interfaces
Material Name USER_DEFINED_MATERIAL USER_DEFINED_MATERIAL

_NAME _NAME
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_USERDEFINED.NOZ_PTR
Hangers Input Export Option

Export user specified hanger information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_HANGERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: HANGER DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: HANGER
Hanger pointer HANGER_PTR
Node number NODE NODE
Connecting node CNODE CNODE
Constant effort support load or stiffness CONST_EFF_LOAD CONST_EFF_LOAD
Load variation LOAD_VAR LOAD_VAR
Rigid support displacement criteria RIGID_SUP RIGID_SUP
Available space for hanger AVAIL_SPACE AVAIL_SPACE
Theoretical cold load COLD_LOAD COLD_LOAD
Operating load HOT_LOAD HOT_LOAD
Maximum travel limit MAX_TRAVEL MAX_TRAVEL
Multiple load case option MULTI_LC MULTI_LC
Anchor to be freed #1 FREEANCHOR1 FREEANCHOR1
Anchor to be freed #2 FREEANCHOR2 FREEANCHOR2
Degree of freedom for #1 DOFTYPE1 DOFTYPE1
Degree of freedom for #2 DOFTYPE2 DOFTYPE2
Number of hangers NUM_HGR NUM_HGR

External Interfaces
Hanger table HGR_TABLE HGR_TABLE
Short range springs SHORT_RANGE SHORT_RANGE
Tag HGR_TAG TAG
GUID HGR_GUID GUID
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.HGR_PTR = INPUT_HANGERS.HGR_PTR
Reducers Input Export Option

Export user specified reducer information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_REDUCERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Reducer pointer RED_PTR
"To" node diameter DIAMETER2 DIAMETERS2
"To" node thickness THICKNESS2 THICKNESS2
Reducer transition slope ALPHA ALPHA
Reducer large end R1 R1

transition radius
Reducer small end R2 R2

transition radius
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RED_PTR = INPUT_REDUCERS.RED_PTR

External Interfaces
Flanges Input Export Option

Export user specified flange information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FLANGES
Flange Pointer FLANGE_PTR
Flange Location FLANGE_LOCATION FLANGE_LOCATION
Flange Evaluation METHOD METHOD

Method
Flange Class and CLASS_GRADE CLASS_GRADE

Material Grade
Gasket Diameter GASKET_DIAMETER GASKET_DIAMETER
Bold Circle Diameter BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA
Bold Area BOLT_AREA BOLT_AREA
Flange Yield Stress - SY_COLD SY_COLD

Cold (Ambient)
Temperature
Flange Yield Stress, SY1 SY1

Operating Temperature
1

2

3

4

5

External Interfaces

6

7

8

9
Flange Temperature TEMPERATURE1 through TEMPERATURE1

TEMPERATURE24 through
TEMPERATURE24
Flange Pressure PRESSURE1 through PRESSURE1 through

PRESSURE24 PRESSURE24
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FLG_PTR = INPUT_FLANGES.FLG_PTR
Title Input Export Option

Export user specified title information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_TITLE
Title TITLE TITLE

External Interfaces
Equipment Input Export Options

Export user specified equipment information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_EQUIPMENT
Equipment Pointer EQP_PTR
NODE1 NODE1
FX1 FX1
FY1 FY1
FZ1 FZ1
MX1 MX1
MY1 MY1
MZ1 MZ1
COSX1 COSX1
COSY1 COSY1
COSZ1 COSZ1
RATING1 RATING1
METHOD1 METHOD1
NODE2 NODE2
FX2 FX2
FY2 FY2
FZ2 FZ2
MX2 MX2
MY2 MY2
MZ2 MZ2

External Interfaces
COSX2 COSX2
COSY2 COSY2
COSZ2 COSZ2
RATING2 RATING2
METHOD2 METHOD2
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EQP_PTR = INPUT_EQUIPMENT.EQP_PTR
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog Box

Select the output reports to export.
Static Load Cases Output Report Options

Displays the list of load cases that are available for exporting. The load cases might not contain
data for all reports. The generation of data for all reports is controlled by Load Cases Tab (Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 559). If Hanger Reports is selected, the load
case selection is not effective because Hanger reports are not tied to any particular load case.
Displacement Reports Output Report Option

Exports the displacement report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_DISPLACEMENTS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
DISPLACEMENT_REPORT.
Node NODE NODE
Load Case Name LCASE_NAME
Load Case Number LCASE_NUM LCASE_NUM
Load Case CASE LOADCASE
Translation X DX DX
Translation Y DY DY
Translation Z DZ DZ
Translation Units DUNITS UNITS

External Interfaces
Rotation X RX RX
Rotation Y RY RY
Rotation Z RZ RZ
Rotation Units RUNITS UNITS
Restraint Reports Output Report Option

Exports the restraint report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in
the table OUTPUT_RESTRAINTS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
RESTRAINT_REPORT.
Node NODE NODE
Node Name NODE_NAME
User-defined Load LCASE_NAME

Case Name
CAESAR II Load CASE LOADCASE

Case Name
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Resultant Force RESULTANTF RESULTANTF
Force Units FUNITS FUNITS
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY
Moment Z MZ MZ
Resultant Moment RESULTANTM RESULTANTM

External Interfaces
Moment Units MUNITS MUNITS
Restraint Type TYPE TYPE
Tag RES_TAG TAG
GUID RES_GUID GUID
Restraints Summary Report Output Report Option

Exports the restraint summary report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_RESTRAINTS_SUMMARY. In XML, these data values appear under
the tag RESTRAINT_SUMMARY_REPORT.
Job Name JOBNAME
Revision Number ISSUE_NO
Update Time UPDATE_TIME
Node NODE NODE
Node Name NODE_NAME

Case Name
CAESAR II Load CASE LOADCASE

Case Name
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Resultant Force RESULTANTF RESULTANTF
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY

External Interfaces
Moment Z MZ MZ
Resultant Moment RESULTANTM RESULTANTM
Restraint Type TYPE TYPE
Tag RES_TAG TAG
GUID RES_GUID GUID
Global Force Reports Output Report Option

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored
in the table OUTPUT_GLOBAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear under
the tag GLOBAL_FORCE_REPORT.
User-defined Load Case LCASE_NAME

Name
CAESAR II Load Case CASE LOADCASE

Name
From Node FROM_NODE FROM_NODE
To Node TO_NODE TO_NODE
Axial Force From Node AXIAL_FORCEF AXIAL_FORCE\FROM
Shear Force From Node SHEAR_FORCEF SHEAR_FORCE\FROM
Bending Moment From BENDING_MOMENTF BENDING_MOMENT\FROM

Node
Torsion Moment From Node TORSION_MOMENTF TORSION_MOMENT\FROM
Axial Force To Node AXIAL_FORCET AXIAL_FORCE\TO
Shear Force To Node SHEAR_FORCET SHEAR_FORCE\TO
Bending Moment To Node BENDING_MOMENTT BENDING_MOMENT\TO

External Interfaces
Torsion Moment To Node TORSION_MOMENTT TORSION_MOMENT\TO
Force X From Node FXF FORCES\FROM\FX
Force Y From Node FYF FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force Z From Node FZF FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force X To Node FXT FORCES\TO\FX
Force Y To Node FYT FORCES\TO\FY
Force Z To Node FZT FORCES\TO\FZ
Force Units FUNITS UNITS\FORCE
Moment X From Node MXF MOMENTS\FROM\FX
Moment Y From Node MYF MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment Z From Node MZF MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment X To Node MXT MOMENTS\TO\FX
Moment Y To Node MYT MOMENTS\TO\FY
Moment Z To Node MZT MOMENTS\TO\FZ
Moment Units MUNITS UNITS\MOMENT
Element Name ELEMENT_NAME ELEMENT\NAME
Local Force Report Output Report Option

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored
in the table OUTPUT_LOCAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear under the
tag LOCAL_FORCE_REPORT.

Case Name
CAESAR II Load Case CASE LOADCASE

Name

External Interfaces
Force X From Node FXF FORCES\FROM\FX
Force Y From Node FYF FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force Z From Node FZF FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force X To Node FXT FORCES\TO\FX
Force Y To Node FYT FORCES\TO\FY
Force Z To Node FZT FORCES\TO\FZ
Force Units FUNITS UNITS\FORCE
Moment X From Node MXF MOMENTS\FROM\FX
Moment Y From Node MYF MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment Z From Node MZF MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment X To Node MXT MOMENTS\TO\FX
Moment Y To Node MYT MOMENTS\TO\FY
Moment Z To Node MZT MOMENTS\TO\FZ
Moment Units MUNITS UNITS\MOMENT
Stress Reports Output Report Option

Exports the stress report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the
table OUTPUT_STRESSES. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
STRESS_REPORT.

External Interfaces
User-defined Load Case LCASE_NAME

Name
CAESAR II Load Case CASE

Name
Piping Code PIPING_CODE
Code Check Status CHECK_STATUS
Axial Stress From Node AXIAL_STRESSF AXIAL_STRESS\FROM
Bending Stress From Node BENDING_STRESSF BENDING_STRESS\FROM
Torsion Stress From Node TORSION_STRESSF TORSION_STRESS\FROM
Axial Stress To Node AXIAL_STRESST AXIAL_STRESS\TO
Bending Stress To Node BENDING_STRESST BENDING_STRESS\TO
Torsion Stress To Node TORSION_STRESST TORSION_STRESS\TO
Hoop Stress From Node HOOP_STRESSF HOOP_STRESS\FROM
Torsion Stress To Node TORSION_STRESST TORSION_STRESS\TO
Code Stress From Node CODE_STRESSF CODE_STRESS\FROM
Code Stress To Node CODE_STRESST CODE_STRESS\TO
Allowable Stress From ALLOW_STRESSF ALLOWABLE_STRESS\FROM

Node
Allowable Stress To Node ALLOW_STRESST ALLOWABLE_STRESS\TO
SIF In SIFINF SIF_IN_PLANE\FROM
SIF In SIFINT SIF_IN_PLANE\TO
SIF Out SIFOUTF SIF_OUT_PLANE\FROM
SIF Out SIFOUTT SIF_OUT_PLANE\TO
Max 3D Stress Intensity 3DMAXF MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\FRO

M

External Interfaces
Max 3D Stress Intensity 3DMAXT MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\TO
Percent Stress From PRCT_STRF PERCENTAGE\FROM
Percent Stress To PRCT_STRT PERCENTAGE\TO
Hanger Reports Output Report Option

Exports the hanger report. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_HANGERS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag HANGER_REPORT.
Number Required NUMREQ HANGER\NUMREQUIRE

D
Hanger Node NODE HANGER\NODE
Figure FIGNUM HANGER\FIGURE
Size SIZE HANGER\SIZE
Vertical Movement VERT_MOVEMENT HANGER\VERT_MOVEM

ENT
Hot Load HOT_LOAD HANGER\HOT_LOAD
Theoretical Installed Load TH_INSTALL_LOAD HANGER\TH_INSTALL_L

OAD
Actual Installed Load AC_INSTALL_LOAD HANGER\AC_INSTALL_L

OAD
Spring Rate SPRING_RATE HANGER\SPRING_RATE
Horizontal Movement HOR_MOVEMENT HANGER\HOR_MOVEME

NT
Load Variation LOAD_VARIATION HANGER\LOAD_VARIATI

ON
Manufacturer MANUF HANGER\MANUFACTUR

ER
Load Units LOAD_UNITS HANGER\LOAD_UNITS

External Interfaces
Movement Units MOVEMENT_UNITS HANGER\MOVEMENT_U

NITS
Spring Units SPRING_UNITS HANGER\SPRING_UNITS
Axial Horizontal HOR_MOVEMENT_AXIAL

Movement
Lateral Horizontal HOR_MOVEMENT_LATE

Movement RAL
Tag HGR_TAG HANGER\TAG
GUID HGR_GUID HANGER\GUID
Equipment Reports Output Report Option

Exports the equipment reports. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_EQUIPMENT. In XML, these data values appear under the tag EQUIPMENT.
User-defined Load Case Name LCASE_NAME
CAESAR II Load Case Name CASE CASE
Node NODE NODE
METHOD METHOD
FX_LIMIT FX_LIMIT
FY_LIMIT FY_LIMIT
FZ_LIMIT FZ_LIMIT
MX_LIMIT MX_LIMIT
MY_LIMIT MY_LIMIT
MZ_LIMIT MZ_LIMIT
FRES_LIMIT FRES_LIMIT
MRES_LIMIT MRES_LIMIT

External Interfaces
PASSFAIL PASSFAIL
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY
Moment Z MZ MZ
FRES FRES
MRES MRES
FX_PER FX_PER
FY_PER FY_PER
FZ_PER FZ_PER
MX_PER MX_PER
MY_PER MY_PER
MZ_PER MZ_PER
FRES_PER FRES_PER
MRES_PER MRES_PER

External Interfaces
AFT IMPULSE
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the AFT Impulse software. CAESAR II reads the
output file generated by AFT Impulse, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > AFT IMPULSE from the Main menu.
The AFT IMPULSE dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the AFT IMPULSE data:
 AFT IMPULSE output file name. (This file is generated by AFT IMPULSE with extension
.FRC.)
 Names of AFT IMPULSE pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
 Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the AFT IMPULSE pipes
 Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve
 Frequency cut-off value
The data transfer begins. During the computation, you can monitor the process status.
3. Click Cancel at any time to stop the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the transfer.
The names of generated force spectrum files have the following format:
P*.DLF where "*" is your CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to the
equivalent AFT IMPULSE pipe name.
The AFT IMPULSE interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
When all computations have completed, the CAESAR II Main menu displays.

External Interfaces
Filename
Specifies the name of the file for which you want to generate a dynamic load factor (DLF) file (.frc).
These .frc files contain the force data required to do a CAESAR II dynamic analysis (Spectrum).
Browse and select or type the full path and file name.
For more information, refer to your specific external interface.
 AFT IMPULSE (on page 1155)
 PIPENET (on page 1157)
 LIQT (on page 1159)
 Pipeplus (on page 1165)
 FlowMaster (on page 1168)
Component List
The software creates this list from the .frc file and it contains all the components (such as bends,
tees, reducers, closed valves, etc.) for a given model. Click on each component to select it. When
you select a component, the software displays on the left, along with an empty edit field where you
can type the CAESAR II node number that corresponds to the component.
Click a second time on the component in the list to unselect it.
If you specify one or more components and corresponding node numbers, when you click OK the
software generates DLF tables (in text file format). These DLF files have a naming convention,
such as: P####.DLF, where P signifies PipeNet and #### are the node number specified by the
user.
After the software creates the appropriate DLF files, you can generate the CAESAR II Dynamic
Input file (._7) automatically. Browse for the appropriate static input file and click OK to generate
the Dynamic Input file.
Maximum Points on Each DLF Curve

Indicates the number of data points used on each Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) curve for each
component and corresponding node number specified. The software generates the DLF file,
which consists of frequency values and the associated Dynamic Load Factor. The software
defaults this point value to 20.
Frequency Cut-Off
Indicates the maximum frequency that the software considers in dynamic analysis (and DLF
generation). The software defaults this value to 100 Hz.

External Interfaces
PIPENET
determined from pressure transient loading by the Sunrise System's PIPENET package. The
PIPENET interface reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information needed,
and generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve closure,
and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow conditions. A
piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to prevent
devastating results.
PIPENET performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a particular
liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure transient of this
particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The CAESAR II PIPENET Transfer Interface
bridges the gap between PIPENET and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by PIPENET, the CAESAR II PIPENET Interface
extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the PIPENET generated file, and computes the response
spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear, one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is the
frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response, such as dynamic load factor (DLF).
The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection that would have
resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not constant, the
maximum load, which occurs at any time during the period of interest, is taken.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load.
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PIPENET from the Main menu.
The PIPENET dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the PIPENET data:
 PIPENET output file name. (This file is generated by Sunrise System's PIPENET package
with extension .FRC.)
 Names of PIPENET pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
 Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the PIPENET pipes

External Interfaces

equivalent PIPENET pipe name.
The PIPENET interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including spectrum
definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input file is ready
to be run, or you can further modify it.
Filename
Component List
user.

External Interfaces

Frequency Cut-Off
LIQT
Reads the output file generated by LIQT, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The LIQT interface generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing
response spectra for input files. The spectra input files contain the dynamic pipe forces. These
time history loads are determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT package from
pressure transient loading. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve closure,
and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow conditions. A
piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to prevent
devastating results.
The SAI LIQT package performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a
particular liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure
transient of this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis for you to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The LIQT interface bridges the gap
between the SAI LIQT package and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by the SAI LIQT package, the CAESAR II LIQT
Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the LIQT generated file, and computes the
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear one-degree of
freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is the
frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response such as the dynamic load factor (DLF).
The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection which would have
resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not constant, the
maximum load that occurs at any time during the period of interest is taken.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load. The
following examples illustrate the characteristics of the DLF curve in terms of the magnitude and
the duration of the load.

External Interfaces
How to Use the LIQT Interface

When you reach the LIQT interface, enter the following input to process the LIQT data:
 LIQT output file name. (This file is generated by SAI’s LIQT package with extension .FRC)
 Names of LIQT nodes identifying pipes for which response spectra are to be generated.
 Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the LIQT pipes.
 Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve.
 Frequency cut-off value.
After the proper input data is acquired, the LIQT interface module starts the data transfer. During
the computation, you can monitor the process status. Click Cancel at any time to stop the
computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory during
the computation phase of the software. The names of generated force spectrum files have the
following format:
L*.DLF where "*" is the user CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to the
equivalent LIQT pipe name.
When all computations have completed, you are returned to the CAESAR II Main menu.
Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.

External Interfaces
Solution: The response spectra generated from all four pulse loads are identical, as displayed
below.
The result shows that the DLF curve is independent of the magnitude of the pulse load.

External Interfaces
Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
Solution: The plotted results displayed below shows that the longer the duration of the force, the
higher the DLF. The triangular pulse, which has a duration of zero, generates the lowest DLF
curve.
Filename
Component List

External Interfaces
user.

Frequency Cut-Off
Pipeplus
Reads a Pipeplus neutral file (.pnf suffix), and translates it into a CAESAR II model.
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface

1. Click Tools > Eternal Interfaces > Pipeplus.
The Pipeplus Interface dialog box displays.

External Interfaces
2. Enter the name of the target neutral file.

If needed, use the Browse button to locate the neutral file on your hard disk.
3. Enter the CAESAR II Starting Node Number.
The default value is 10.
4. Enter the CAESAR II Node Number Increment.
The default value is 10.
5. Select the Model Orientation by clicking either the Y axis or Z axis radio button.
CAESAR II assumes the units of the data in the neutral file match the units
designated in the CAESAR II configuration file.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
6. Click OK to begin translation of the data.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
7. Review the Pipeplus Interface dialog box with the updated information:
 Log File Warnings: Number of warnings/problems encountered.
 Current Units File: Units file that was used for translation and stored in the CAESAR II
input file.
 The name and location of the CAESAR II input file.
The log file name is the name of the neutral file with .LOG suffix. This file contains general
information about the translation process, including:

External Interfaces
 The number of lines in the neutral file

 The number of CAESAR II elements that were created
 Any warning or error messages
 Node Association table that relates the Pipeplus node names to the corresponding
CAESAR II node numbers.
8. Compare the CAESAR II input model with the Pipeplus model.
a. View the CAESAR II model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box or in the 3D Graphics
pane.

External Interfaces
b. View the Pipeplus view of this same model in the Pipeplus software.
An example of the Pipeplus model is shown below.
FlowMaster
determined from pressure transient loading by the FlowMaster package. The FlowMaster
interface reads the output file generated by FlowMaster, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the
How to Use the Flowmaster Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Flowmaster from the Main menu.
The Flowmaster dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the Flowmaster data:
 Flowmaster output file name. (This file is generated by Flowmaster with extension .FRC.)
 Names of Flowmaster pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
 Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the Flowmaster pipes

External Interfaces

equivalent Flowmaster pipe name.
The Flowmaster interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
Filename
Component List
user.

External Interfaces

Frequency Cut-Off
Intergraph CADWorx Plant

Provides a bi-directional data transfer link to CAESAR II. Intergraph CADWorx Plant is an
AutoCAD-based design/drafting product that allows you to create models in ortho, iso, 2D, or 3D
modes. You can transfer these models into CAESAR II; likewise, models built in CAESAR II can
be sent into Intergraph CADWorx Plant. Modifications made in either product are retained for
future transfers.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant also allows CAESAR II output data to be imported and placed on the
drawing. This provides the ability to generate stress and restraint isometrics.
Because the external interface operates seamlessly, no action is required in
CAESAR II. Intergraph CADWorx Plant reads CAESAR II _A (input) and _P (output) files without
modification, and creates CAESAR II _A files directly. The Intergraph CADWorx Plant command
that appears on the Tools menu serves only as a reminder that the external interface exists. For
more information about importing and exporting data between these two products, refer to
documentation delivered with lntergraph CADWorx Plant.
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF

Processes a Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs generated from Intergraph
SmartPlant® 3D, and then generates a CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion
information.
Both the Intergraph Smart 3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External
Interfaces menu operate the same.
See Import PCF (on page 1205) for detailed information about how this command works.
Intergraph PDS
Transfers piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file to a standard CAESAR II _A
binary input file. The geometry data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities, such as loads, displacements, and
so forth, must be manually added to the CAESAR II input file.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph
neutral file:

External Interfaces
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph PDS to create an Intergraph neutral file.
2. Transfer this ASCII file to the CAESAR folder.

You can create and transfer as many Intergraph neutral files as necessary. During
data transfer, the interface continues to prompt you for neutral file names until you cancel the
session.
3. Verify the proper units file is active in the folder in which the neutral file is located. This is
necessary for the proper conversion of the data.
File Name
Specifies the full path and filename of the neutral file. When you open the software, this field
displays the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or click
Browse to search for a neutral file.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the appropriate neutral
file. You can use the options at the bottom of the dialog box to switch between the neutral file suffix
types, such as .N or .NEU.

External Interfaces
Minimum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the minimum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.
Maximum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the maximum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire model
is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must set this
option and Increment (on page 342) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering of
the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 341) to
zero.
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than

Defines the minimum allowed pipe size. Any elements less than this minimum diameter are
ignored. This option is used to keep drain lines and taps out of the stress model.
Remove HA Elements
Controls whether HA elements are removed. Typically, HA (hanger-support direction) elements
should be removed. The support is placed on the pipe where the HA element joins it. Clear this
check box to keep HA elements in the stress model.
Force Consistent Bend Materials

Allows the interface to ensure that all bend elements, incoming and outgoing, have the same
material name and properties. Often, bends are given a material specification that is different from
that of the attached piping, even though the properties are the same. Select this option to change
the material information on the bend elements to that of the attached piping.
Include Additional Bend Nodes

Allows the interface to add a mid-point node and a near-point node on bends. Clear this box to
cause bends to have only the far-point node.

External Interfaces
Enable Advanced Element Sort

Allows a second, more thorough sorting of the elements. This sort considers the length of the runs,
the diameter, and the elevation in determining where to begin the node numbering sequence. By
default, this option is turned on. Turning off this option uses only the first sort where the elements
are sorted starting with the largest (diameter) anchor nodes and proceeds to the smallest.
Model TEES as 3 Elements

Instructs the software to treat tees as three elements, instead of condensing them down to a point.
In either case, the SIF is applied at the tee node. Using three elements allows pipe properties of
the tee to differ from those of the attached piping.
Initialize Global Coordinates

Initializes the coordinates of the first node in the model to (0, 0, 0).
Condenses Flanges/Valves
Allows you to turn on or off the condensation of flange-valve-flange elements. By default, the
software condenses the sequence of elements into a single rigid element. If you deselect this
check box, the software does not condense the sequence of elements when using the standard
sort. If you specify to use the advanced sort, the software always condenses the elements.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis away
from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation. Select
+90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Neutral File Weight Units

Defines the value for the neutral file weight units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the weight values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because the neutral file
does not indicate the units for the weight values. The value you select should match the
corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.
Neutral File Insulation Units

Specifies the value for the neutral file insulation units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the insulation thickness values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because
the neutral file does not indicate the units for insulation thickness values. The value you select
should match the corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.

External Interfaces
Data Modification and Details

After the Intergraph PDS data transfer is complete, you can open the CAESAR II input files. You
must make the following modifications and additions:
 Specification of material properties. Material 1 is assumed, unless a material mapping file is
provided.
 Specification of temperatures and pressures. The temperature/pressure pairs are assigned to
T1, T2, T3 and P1, and P2 in order.
 Specification of intersection types. Unreinforced is assumed.
 Specification of restraints details. By default, only anchors and double acting supports are
detected by the interface. If the exact type of restraint is to be transferred, PDS must be
configured to generate the CAESAR II restraint type indicators. These restraint type indicators
are shown in the Additional Notes section of the complete Neutral File interface, discussed
later in this chapter. These restraint type values must be placed in HA Field 7 of the neutral file.
 The fluid density can be transferred into CAESAR II also. Place this density value in Field 7 of
the neutral file. The density value should be defined according to the density unit used in the
CAESAR II units file, not in terms of specific gravity.
 Specification of other loads. The weight of rigid elements can be transferred into CAESAR II
for 3W, 4W, AV, RB, and VA type elements. For the weight of these elements to transfer, the
weight value must be placed in Field 8.
 Insulation thickness and density can also be transferred into CAESAR II. The thickness and
density values should be placed in Fields 9 and 10, respectively.
In addition, review the log file generated by the interface for any anomalies. The interface sorts the
elements and then ensures that diameters and wall thicknesses are defined for each element.
Depending on how disorganized the Intergraph neutral file is, some assumptions made by the
interface may not be correct and may require you to modify the resulting CAESAR II input file.
If the interface encounters any major problems, the process aborts and no CAESAR II input is
generated. In these instances, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
If necessary, you can define a material mapping file to relate the material designations in the
Intergraph neutral file to the standard CAESAR II materials. You must name this file
PDS_MAT.MAP, and place it beneath the application's \SYSTEM subfolder. This mapping file
contains two fields of data per line. Field 1 is 5 characters wide, and contains the CAESAR II
material number that corresponds to the PDS material name. Field 2 is held in columns 7 through
21 and contains the PDS material name as it appears in the neutral file. Neither of these values
should contain a decimal point.
Example Neutral File from PDS

The following is an example neutral file from PDS.
! Model Design file(s) : ZG2:[006,006]MDLTEST.DGN
! : ZG2:[006,006]EQPTEST.DGN
! Line name(s) : P-1002
! Date : 26-JUL-89 13:58:12
DRAW ,P-1002,P-1002
LOAD, 202000E, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00

External Interfaces
LOAD, 202000E, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,

0.00
LSET, 202000E,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 202000F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001A, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001A, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001A,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001D, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001D, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001D,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020020, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020020, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020020,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020023, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020023, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020023,3,6,5,3
CODE,CODE23,ASME2,1982,D
TF, 3020009,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 25, 24
PROP,TF, 3020009, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TF, 3020009, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TF, 3020009, 3,16.,16,BE,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,TF, 3020009, 4,10.,10.75,BE,0.365,, 102001F
RB, 302000B,16"STDCB30255,,CODE23, 901, 26
PROP,RB, 302000B, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,RB, 302000B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,RB, 302000B, 4,0.,0,BW,0.,, 202000E
PI, 5020013,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 26, 25
PROP,PI, 5020013, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020013, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,PI, 5020013, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
RB, 302000A,16"STDCB30255,,CODE23, 902, 12
PROP,RB, 302000A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,RB, 302000A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,RB, 302000A, 4,0.,0,BW,0.,, 202000F
TF, 302000C,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 15, 14
PROP,TF, 302000C, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.

External Interfaces
PROP,TF, 302000C, 2,0,0.0,90

PROP,TF, 302000C, 3,16.,16,BE,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,TF, 302000C, 4,10.,10.75,BE,0.365,, 102001A
PI, 5020014,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 17, 15
PROP,PI, 5020014, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020014, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
PROP,PI, 5020014, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
FL, 3020042,10"STDCB20015,,CODE23, 27, 13
PROP,FL, 3020042, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,FL, 3020042, 3,10.,16,WN,0.,CL150, 102001A
PROP,FL, 3020042, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,CL150, 102001A
PI, 5020015,10"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 14, 13
PROP,PI, 5020015, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020015, 3,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001A
PROP,PI, 5020015, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001A
TE, 3020008,16"STDCB30245,,CODE23, 22, 17, 20, 951
PROP,TE, 3020008, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TE, 3020008, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TE, 3020008, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PROP,TE, 3020008, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
PROP,TE, 3020008, 5,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
FL, 3020041,10"STDCB20015,,CODE23, 28, 23
PROP,FL, 3020041, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,FL, 3020041, 3,10.,16,WN,0.,CL150, 102001F
PROP,FL, 3020041, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,CL150, 102001F
PI, 5020012,10"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 23, 24
PROP,PI, 5020012, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020012, 3,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001F
PROP,PI, 5020012, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001F
EL, 3020040,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 903, 1, 952
PROP,EL, 3020040, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020040, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020040, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020040, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 3020023,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 18, 16, 953
PROP,EL, 3020023, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020023, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020023, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020023, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 3020024,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 16, 10, 954
PROP,EL, 3020024, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020024, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020024, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020024, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302002A,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 11, 9, 955
PROP,EL, 302002A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002A, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302002A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302002B,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 8, 6, 956
PROP,EL, 302002B, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002B, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023

External Interfaces
PROP,EL, 302002B, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023

EL, 302003C,16"STDCB30235,,CODE23, 5, 3, 957
PROP,EL, 302003C, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003C, 2,24.1421,45,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003C, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003C, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003D,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 4, 2, 958
PROP,EL, 302003D, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003D, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003D, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003D, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020016,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 19, 18
PROP,PI, 5020016, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020016, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020016, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020018,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 10, 11
PROP,PI, 5020018, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020018, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020018, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020019,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 9, 8
PROP,PI, 5020019, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020019, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020019, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001A,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 6, 7
PROP,PI, 502001A, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001B,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 3, 4
PROP,PI, 502001B, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001B, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001C,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 2, 1
PROP,PI, 502001C, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001C, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001C, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003E,16"STDCB30235,,CODE23, 5, 7, 959
PROP,EL, 302003E, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003E, 2,24.1421,45,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003E, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003E, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302005A,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 19, 21, 960
PROP,EL, 302005A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302005A, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302005A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302005A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502005E,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 21, 20
PROP,PI, 502005E, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502005E, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502005E, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5027531,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 25, 22
PROP,PI, 5027531, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5027531, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PROP,PI, 5027531, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020

External Interfaces
PI, 5027532,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 15, 12

PROP,PI, 5027532, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5027532, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,PI, 5027532, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
LNOD, 27,RE, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
LNOD, 28,RE, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
NODE, 1, 12024.00, 12000.00, 3011.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 2, 12044.50, 12000.00, 3011.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 3, 12068.50, 12000.00, 2470.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 4, 12068.50, 12000.00, 2987.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 5, 12075.57, 12000.00, 2452.93, 2, 0.00
NODE, 6, 12082.64, 12000.00, 1764.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 7, 12082.64, 12000.00, 2435.86, 2, 0.00
NODE, 8, 12106.64, 12000.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 9, 12168.00, 12000.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 10, 12192.00, 11815.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 11, 12192.00, 11976.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 12, 12198.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 13, 12210.00, 11911.00, 1594.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 14, 12210.00, 11911.00, 1632.94, 2, 0.00
NODE, 15, 12210.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 16, 12216.00, 11791.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 17, 12228.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 18, 12240.00, 11815.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 19, 12240.00, 11887.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 20, 12240.00, 11911.00, 1656.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 21, 12240.00, 11911.00, 1716.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 22, 12252.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 23, 12270.00, 11911.00, 1594.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 24, 12270.00, 11911.00, 1632.94, 2, 0.00
NODE, 25, 12270.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 26, 12282.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 27, 12210.00, 11911.00, 1590.05, 2, 0.00
NODE, 28, 12270.00, 11911.00, 1590.05, 2, 0.00
NODE, 901, 12285.50, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 902, 12194.50, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 903, 12000.00, 12000.00, 2987.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 904, 12210.00, 11911.00, 1577.18, 2, 0.00
NODE, 905, 12270.00, 11911.00, 1577.18, 2, 0.00
NODE, 951, 12240.00, 11911.00, 1644.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 952, 12000.00, 12000.00, 3011.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 953, 12240.00, 11791.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 954, 12192.00, 11791.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 955, 12192.00, 12000.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 956, 12082.64, 12000.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 957, 12068.50, 12000.00, 2460.00, 2, 0.00
NODE, 958, 12068.50, 12000.00, 3011.12, 2, 0.00
NODE, 959, 12082.64, 12000.00, 2445.86, 2, 0.00
NODE, 960, 12240.00, 11911.00, 1740.00, 2, 0.00
The .LOG file produced by the CAESAR II translator is shown below, followed
by a plot of the job from the CAESAR II input module.

External Interfaces
*** CAESAR II / Intergraph Geometry Translator ***

INTERGRAPH DATA AS READ IN FOR FILE: P-1002.NEU
Maximum Temperature and Pressure encountered: 300.0 500.0

Looking for node: 901
Have sorted element: 1, its location pointer is: 2
Number of "resume" nodes is: 0
Element type is: 10

Element type is: 9

Element type is: 14

Element type is: 9

Element type is: 7

Element type is: 10
Element type is: 9

Element type is: 14

Element type is: 9


External Interfaces
Element type is: 7

Element type is: 5
Looking for node: 1
Element type is: 9
Looking for node: 2

Element type is: 5
Looking for node: 4

Element type is: 9
Looking for node: 3

Element type is: 5
Looking for node: 5

Element type is: 5
Looking for node: 7

Element type is: 9
Looking for node: 6

Element type is: 5
Looking for node: 8

Element type is: 9
Looking for node: 9

Element type is: 5

External Interfaces

Element type is: 9

Element type is: 5

Element type is: 5

Element type is: 9

Element type is: 5

Element type is: 9

Element type is: 13

Element type is: 9

Element type is: 9

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Element Sort

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also
performed on 3 & 4 way valves.)

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications
(Flange lengths added to valve lengths.)

** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 11 NODES: 1 903
BEND ELEMENT : 11 NODES: 903 1
EXITING ELEMENT : 12 NODES: 1 2
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 11
NODE: 1 X, Y, Z = 12024.00 3011.12 -12000.00
NODE: 903 X, Y, Z = 12000.00 2987.12 -12000.00
NODE: 1 X, Y, Z = 12024.00 3011.12 -12000.00
NODE: 2 X, Y, Z = 12044.50 3011.12 -12000.00
— COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT —
NODE: 1 X, Y, Z = 12000.00 3011.12 -12000.00

External Interfaces

NODE: 4 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 2987.12 -12000.00
NODE: 2 X, Y, Z = 12044.50 3011.12 -12000.00
NODE: 4 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 2987.12 -12000.00
NODE: 3 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 2470.00 -12000.00
NODE: 4 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 3011.12 -12000.00
NODE: 5 X, Y, Z = 12075.57 2452.93 -12000.00
NODE: 3 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 2470.00 -12000.00
NODE: 5 X, Y, Z = 12075.57 2452.93 -12000.00
NODE: 7 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 2435.86 -12000.00
NODE: 5 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 2460.00 -12000.00
NODE: 7 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 2435.86 -12000.00
NODE: 5 X, Y, Z = 12068.50 2460.00 -12000.00
NODE: 7 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 2435.86 -12000.00
NODE: 6 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 1764.00 -12000.00
NODE: 7 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 2445.86 -12000.00
NODE: 8 X, Y, Z = 12106.64 1740.00 -12000.00
NODE: 6 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 1764.00 -12000.00
NODE: 8 X, Y, Z = 12106.64 1740.00 -12000.00
NODE: 9 X, Y, Z = 12168.00 1740.00 -12000.00
NODE: 8 X, Y, Z = 12082.64 1740.00 -12000.00
NODE: 11 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -11976.00

External Interfaces
NODE: 9 X, Y, Z = 12168.00 1740.00 -12000.00

NODE: 11 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -11976.00
NODE: 10 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -11815.00
NODE: 11 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -12000.00
NODE: 16 X, Y, Z = 12216.00 1740.00 -11791.00
NODE: 10 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -11815.00
NODE: 16 X, Y, Z = 12216.00 1740.00 -11791.00
NODE: 18 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11815.00

NODE: 16 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -11791.00
CURRENT COORDINATES FOR ELEMENT: 23
NODE: 18 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11815.00
NODE: 16 X, Y, Z = 12192.00 1740.00 -11791.00
NODE: 18 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11815.00
NODE: 19 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11887.00
NODE: 18 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11791.00
NODE: 21 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1716.00 -11911.00
NODE: 19 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11887.00
NODE: 21 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1716.00 -11911.00
NODE: 951 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1644.00 -11911.00
NODE: 21 X, Y, Z = 12240.00 1740.00 -11911.00

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications

External Interfaces
(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
DATA FOR PROPERTY ARRAY WITH # ENTRIES = 5
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
The CAESAR II job file name is P-1002_A Y

Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
 28 elements
 9 Bends
 2 Rigids
 2 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

External Interfaces
CADPIPE
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal
specific quantities, such as restraints, loads, and displacements, must be manually added to the
CAESAR II input file.
The CADPIPE external interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single
session. During data transfer, the interface first prompts you for the name of the CADPIPE
connectivity (.UDE ) neutral file. After you specify the file name, the data transfer process begins.
When that transfer is complete, the interface prompts you for another neutral file name. This cycle
continues until you cancel the data transfer process.
 The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the CADPIPE software. For more
information, refer to the CADPIPE product documentation.
 The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred to the current CAESAR II folder so that it is
available to the external interface.
The interface reads the CADPIPE neutral file, and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the data transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file for
consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral file
and how it is arranged for storage in the interface. The data storage is maintained in two arrays.
The first array contains geometry data for each pipe element; the second array contains additional
load and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. "Pipe" refers to an entity
between two nodes, which can be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry, and all
values must be specified.
Field 1- ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which can correspond to an entry in the
second array. This is also the pipe or element number in the model.
Values must be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1 Enter the From node number, which is the starting node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2 Enter the To node number, which is the ending node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX Enter the delta X dimension for the element. This is the distance between
N1 and N2 in the X direction.
Field 5 - DY Enter the delta Y dimension for the element. This is the distance between
N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR II, Y is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ Enter the delta Z dimension for the element. This is the distance between
N1 and N2 in the Z direction.
Field 7 - DIAM Enter the pipe outer diameter.

External Interfaces
Field 8 - THK Enter the pipe wall thickness.
Field 9 - ANCH Specify the location of the restraint (support). If there is a restraint on N1,
ANCH is 1. If there is a restraint on N2, then ANCH is 2. The type of
restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND Specify whether there is a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is 1,
there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. This value is
the required bend radius.
Field 12 - RIGD Indicate whether the current element is a rigid element.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means
there is always a record in the first array for pipe element #1, which could be the only entry in the
array. Any additional entries contain some type of change to data normally duplicated forward by
CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first
array. This is also a pipe or element number in the model. Values are
sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1 Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1 Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if you set the
RIGID flag in the first array.
Field 5 - TEEFLG Specify the TEE type. Acceptable values are:

 1 - reinforced
 2 - unreinforced
 3 - welding tee
 4 - sweepolet
 5 - weldolet
 6 - extruded welding tee

External Interfaces
Field 6 - RESTYP Specify the restraint (support) type indicator. Acceptable values are:
 0 - anchor
 1 - double acting X
 2 - double acting Y
 3 - double acting Z
 4 - double acting RX
 5 - double acting RY
 6 - double acting RZ
Field 7 - RINFO1 Enter the restraint stiffness for the support.
Field 8 - RINFO2 Enter the restraint gap for the support.
Field 9 - RINFO3 Enter the restraint friction coefficient for the support.
Field 10 - MATID Enter the CAESAR II material ID value.

If the coefficient of expansion is to be changed, it should be
entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).
Field 11 - EMOD Enter the value of Young’s modulus.
Field 12 - POIS Enter the value of Poisson’s ratio.
Field 13 - GAMMA Enter the weight density of the material.
Field 14 - INSTHK Enter the insulation thickness.
Field 15 - INSWGT Enter the weight density of the insulation material.
Field 16 - FLDWGT Enter the weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).
Field 17 - TEENOD Enter the element node number where there is a tee.
Field 18 Placeholder for future development.
CADPIPE Example Transfer

The following is an example connectivity file produced by the CADPIPE interface. Examination of
this file reveals two distinct regions. The first region defines the entities which make up the piping
system; the second region connects the entities. Both regions are required for the interface to
work properly. The first line of each entity definition contains various codes that define: the
element type, the element diameter, and the element thickness.
BEGIN_ENTITY

External Interfaces
ENTITY_NUMBER 1
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OBB—1dLATL
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.35999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 2
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OPP—ATLATL 134.50
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.35999997e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.35999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000033e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 3
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-3O1B—ATLATL
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.89000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000033e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 4
INSERTION 2.41687500e+002 3.35999959e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.89000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 5
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0O2H—ATLATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 6
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 7
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 3.90000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 8
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

External Interfaces
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 9
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OBB—1dLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 10
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 4.43999981e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 11
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 12
INSERTION 3.00000025e+002 2.77687500e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 13
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0OPP—ATLZTL 69.00
INSERTION 3.43500000e+002 2.16000017e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.78000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 14
INSERTION 3.49312500e+002 3.36000008e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR AAA1
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.00000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.00000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 1

External Interfaces
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 1
ENTITY 2
ENTITY 3
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 3
ENTITY 4
ENTITY 5
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
BEGIN_RUN
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 3.78000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 5
ENTITY 12
ENTITY 11
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 3.78000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 11
ENTITY 13
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
BEGIN_RUN
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 4.44000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 5
ENTITY 14
ENTITY 6
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 6
ENTITY 7
ENTITY 8
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT

External Interfaces
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

END_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 8
ENTITY 10
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD 4.44000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
As the interface runs, status messages display for information purposes. After the transfer is
complete, review the log file to ensure that there are no unexplained errors or warnings.
The log file generated for the above .UDE file is listed as follows.
*** CAESAR II / CADPIPE Geometry Translator ***
CADPIPE data as read in for NEUTRAL file: NRGTST1.UDE
General Notes
This file contains the status of the data conversion from the CADPIPE ISO system to the
CAESAR II stress analysis package. The data contained in this file is grouped into three sections:
1. Entity information
2. Segment connectivity information
3. Final interpreted CAESAR II data.
Anomalies with final CAESAR II model geometry should be traced through this file, possibly back
to the CADPIPE connectivity file. Notes and warning messages are shown below as necessary.
Because all required CAESAR II data is not available in the CADPIPE environment, CAESAR II
must make certain modeling assumptions. As such, it is important that you verify the following
assumptions:
1. Thicknesses of .05 are generated by the software because no match could be found in the
standard CAESAR II diameter/thickness tables. This value must be corrected after it is in
CAESAR II.
2. Rigid elements are assumed to have a weight of 1.0. This value should be corrected after it is
in CAESAR II.
3. Temperatures, pressures, and other loading items are not available for transfer by the
interface.
4. Restraint information is not available for transfer by the interface.
5. Material #1 (low carbon steel) is assumed by the interface.
Error Code Statements

1. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a custom bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius must take
place in CAESAR II.

External Interfaces
2. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a mitered bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius and number of
cuts must take place in CAESAR II.
3. The item code for this entity indicates that it is some type of OLET fitting. Because there is
only a single reference to this entity in the CADPIPE neutral file, this segment is not
contiguous with the rest of the model in CAESAR II. The interface attempts to connect the
OLET as it sees fit. The final geometry should be checked.
4. The item code for this entity is unknown to the current version of the interface. The entity is set
to a 2 node, zero length rigid element. You must modify the CAESAR II data to correct this
anomaly.
5. The segment being processed referenced an ENTITY that was not defined in the ENTITY
Information section of the .UDE file. This indicates some type of error during the generation
of the neutral file. Regenerate the neutral file before using the interface again.
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion

The log file is useful in identifying problems that may have been encountered by the interface
during the data transfer. The log file is divided into the following sections:
 Introduction
Lists general notes about the interface and defines the error code. Typically, this is a
one-page summary.
 Section 1
Lists the entity information as read from the CADPIPE connectivity file. Each entity is
grouped into one of four possible element types, node numbers are assigned, and the
coordinate system is rotated to conform to the standard pipe stress coordinate system (Y
vertical).
 Section 2
Details the interpretation and model building process.
 Section 3
Lists the final transformed data which the interface system wrote as the CAESAR II input
file.

External Interfaces
The following is a sample log file:

Section 1-Entity Information
---------------------------------------------------------
Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.
Section 1 - Entity Information

Section 1-Entity Information
---------------------------------------------------------
Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.

External Interfaces
Section 2-Segment Information

Processing LINE_NUMBER:
CAESAR AAA1
Entity 1 Original nodes: 10. 20.
STARTING new segment with new Entity # 1, "FROM" node is 10.
CAESAR II type is PIPE
Final nodes: 10. 20.
Finished processing segment with entities: 1
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 1, "FROM" node is 20.
CAESAR II type is 1.
Entity 1 PIPE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Finished processing segment with entities: 1 2 3
Entity 3 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Resetting element 4 "TO" node from 80. to 100. and adjusting deltas.
Processing LINE_NUMBER: CAESAR AAA1
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Finished processing segment with entities: 11 13
Processing LINE_NUMBER: CAESAR AAA1
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 9 PIPE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Finished processing segment with entities: 9

External Interfaces
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data

*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data transferred to CAESAR II array structures.
The CAESAR II job file name is: NRGTST._A
Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
 13 Elements
 4 Bends
 0 Rigids
 0 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

External Interfaces
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer

It is important to verify the resulting CAESAR II input file. Begin by reviewing the log file to see if
any errors or warnings were generated.
The log file is a standard ASCII text file that can be output to a printer or viewed with a
text editor, such Notepad.
Next, enter the input mode of CAESAR II and plot the model. The CAESAR II plot for the
CADPIPE data transfer example is shown in the following figure.
If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, use the log file to
identify the problem:
1. Identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the log file.
2. Find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the log file and verify that it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file.
3. Verify that the information in Section 1 of the log file matches the interpreted data in Section 3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the following
causes:
 An unexpected geometry condition was handed to the CAESAR II interface. The solution is to
update the interface for the current condition. Forward the .UDE file to Intergraph CAS Support
for analysis and subsequent interface modification.
 An unknown item code was encountered during the data transfer, indicating that the CADPIPE
software has been updated and new item codes added. Because the interface does not
recognize the new items, it must be modified. Contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
 OLET entities in the CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping
element they intersect. As a result, the interface attempts to determine the associated pipe
using coordinate computation and 3D intersection calculations. Potentially, the procedure can
pass over the intersection point, and the branch containing the OLET plots at the origin of the
CAESAR II model. You can correct this in the CAESAR II input by breaking the intersected
pipe and assigning the OLET node number to the break point.

External Interfaces
 Some CADPIPE connectivity files that have been submitted to Intergraph CAS for analysis
have been found to contain errors consisting of either pipe doubling back on itself or piping
elements indicated as bends where there was no change in direction. Errors such as these
can be detected by the CAESAR II error checker when it is run prior to attempting the data
transfer.
Import PCF
Processes a single Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs, and then generates a
CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion information.
The goal of the conversion process is:
 To create a CAESAR II model that is complete, ready to run, and contains no errors.
 To provide a method for stress engineers to quickly and accurately collect data.
After the PCF is created from external software, it can be converted to a CAESAR II piping input
model file.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External Interfaces
menu operate the same.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. The PCF is a
flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The information
is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities can be
obtained from Alias.
A valid PCF has a .pcf file extension name.
PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive unit
label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can be
specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not one of

External Interfaces
the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units on the
CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in the
CAESAR II System folder.
 The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute.
It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
 One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping files
that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Topics
PCF Unit Mapping ...................................................................... 1206
PCF Material Mapping ................................................................ 1207
PCF Restraint Mapping............................................................... 1208
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping .................................. 1217
PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
 CAESAR II Unit - Displays the internal unit used by the software
 PCF Unit - Displays the user-supplied unit label
 Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF - Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by spaces
and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any unit
specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit as
defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs to
be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C° to F° will also add the 32 °).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.

External Interfaces
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II material
number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number. The match
in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches the CAESAR
II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an intelligent
match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard CAESAR
II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit… menu must be
mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.

External Interfaces
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping

The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
CAESAR II uses the SUPPORT mapping component to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. If the software is unable to match a SUPPORT with a <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file, only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute is interpreted by the
software. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST,
NORTH, or SOUTH.
Support configurations can vary from project-to-project. In order to fine-tune the configuration
CAESAR II uses with an imported model for a given SUPPORT component, you need to map an
attribute to the <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The following example displays a typical SUPPORT component. The attribute definition (VG100)
for the NAME attribute is highlighted and should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
Remember that, as your support configuration changes, you can customize this mapping file to
ensure proper import into the software.

External Interfaces
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the attribute customization options or restraint definitions.
Defining PCF Keywords

In the Keyword Mapping Section, define an attribute from your PCF file to associate with the
following CAESAR II keywords:
 <SUPPORT_NAME>
 <SUPPORT_TAG>
 <SUPPORT_GUID>
The CAESAR II keywords located within "<>" are used in the PCF import process. The
<SUPPORT_NAME> keyword is used by CAESAR II to map the supports. The
<SUPPORT_TAG> and <SUPPORT_GUID> keywords are support properties that are imported
into CAESAR II.
Defining Support Mapping

In the Support Mapping Section, define the support mapping.
In the following example file, VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
 +Vertical support (weight support)
 Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).

External Interfaces
The syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name> <N>
<Restraint Function> <MU=> <GAP=>
<Support Name>
CAESAR II attempts to match the <Support Name> with the attribute definition from your PCF
mapping file. Any attribute definition in the PCF file that contains the <Support Name> is
considered a match (it does not have to be an exact match). For example, if the <Support
Name> is VG1, an attribute definition such as VG100 would be considered a match.
For optimal results, list the <Support Names> in the order from longest name to
shortest name. Otherwise, if you have both VG1 and VG100 as <Support Names>, the
software reads VG1 as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N>
Specifies the number of CAESAR II restraints to be placed in the corresponding Restraint
auxiliary panel in the Piping Input. CAESAR II allows up to six restraints on any element.
<Restraint Function>
Specifies the purpose/type of restraint (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and so forth.), Global Axes (VERT,
NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (a, b, c, and so forth):
 ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR
Creates a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Variable Hanger, or Constant
Hanger, respectively. The variable and constant attributes create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
 VERT, EW, NS
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the compass points of the global axes
(Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up setting). See the
figure below. Create one-way restraints by prefixing the attribute with "+" or "-".
 A, B, C
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the "direction"
attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and B axes. As with

External Interfaces
the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with + or -. See the figure
below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint. (This
<GAP=>
Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (This
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger

External Interfaces
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.

External Interfaces
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement.
In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports is
eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If the
restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the

External Interfaces
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards the
pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above), then
the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint may
be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of the
attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the direction
lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
 +VERTical
 GUIde

External Interfaces
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
 up/down restraint
 side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible that
the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the second
definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral to the
support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3

External Interfaces
A MU=0.3
 +VERT support
 An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds to
restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC

External Interfaces
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is to
the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model the
restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE
or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress Intensification Factor settings of
imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
 SKEYS - PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within the
general component group.
 CAESAR II SIF TYPE - Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown in
the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
 PAD=X.X UNITS - (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the applicable
unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
 Ii=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component. This is a multiplier,
and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)

External Interfaces
 Io=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component. This is
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component identifier
listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 328) (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are
typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The PCF menu
command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in this
file, you should add it.

External Interfaces
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.
1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

How to Use the PCF Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PCF or Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph
Smart3D PCF from the Main menu.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF options are identical.

External Interfaces
The PCF Interface dialog box displays.
2. Click Add PCF Files to Conversion List on the toolbar.
 A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.

 You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
 You can remove PCF(s) from the list by clicking Remove PCF Files from the
Conversion List .
The selected file(s) displays in the PCF Files section of the dialog box.
The default corresponding CAESAR II input file that will be built from the conversion process
displays in the CAESAR II Files section of the dialog box. You can change the path by
clicking the "..." ellipsis button and selecting another path.
3. Change any of the options listed under Conversion Options, as needed.
 Condense Rigids (on page 342)
 Condense Tees (on page 342)
 Condense Elbows (on page 342)
 Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 342)
 Model Rotation (on page 1173)

External Interfaces
 Combine PCF Files (on page 343)

 Diameter Limit (on page 343)
 Length for Nodal Increment (on page 343)
 Material Number (on page 345)
 Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 345)
4. Click Convert selected PCF files into CAESAR II to initiate the conversion process.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the Message Area, which is
located in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.

External Interfaces
5. View your new CAESAR II input model.

For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P-Input.PCF:
 Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

 The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
 Materials
 Diameter and Wall Thickness
 Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
 Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
 The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
 Restraints
 The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
 Tees convert with the correct SIFs – in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections are also
transferred. (In this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). You can easily change
these to thermal displacements.
 Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
 Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.

External Interfaces
Phantom components (PCF items marked as CONTINUATION or STATUS DOTTED or

MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE) are ignored during the conversion process.
 Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
 Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Add PCF Files to Conversion List

Select PCF(s) for conversion. You can also select a text file (*.txt) that contains a list of PCFs.
Remove PCF Files from Conversion List

Remove selected PCF(s) from the Conversion List pane.
Convert selected files into CAESAR II format
Initiates the conversion process to convert a PCF(s) to a standard CAESAR II piping input file.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change of
cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the three
elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE, this
directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it is
condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.

External Interfaces
Use Pipe Materials Only

Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the available
data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material substitution is
made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the diameter, a match is
made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the Pipe Spec, the
component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied but A234 Grade
WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis away
from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation. Select
+90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Combine PCF Files

Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are prompted
for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the size
(nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to include all
pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Length for Nodal Increment

Increases node increments for pipe lengths greater than the specified value. This option allows
you to set the nodal increment for imported PCF files based on pipe length, which means you can
specify a larger buffer of node numbers for longer pipe lengths. This feature is helpful when
creating intermediate nodes and elements to place supports.
Enter a value to activate this option. The software divides the length of each piping element by the
value entered in Length for Nodal Increment (The answer is rounded to the next whole number).

External Interfaces
The software multiplies that quotient by the value in the Increment field for the specified PCF file.
The result is the node increment for that element.
For example, if you do not enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment the software numbers all
the nodes according to the value in the Increment column.
If you enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment, the software performs the procedure listed
above to determine the nodal increment for each element. In the following example, if you enter 15
in Length for Nodal Increment and a piping element is 7.875 feet (94.5 inches), the software
divides 94.5 by 15 and gets 6.3. Because the software rounds the quotient to the next whole
number, 6.3 is rounded to 7. So, if the value in the Increment column is 10, the software multiplies
10 by 7, which results in a nodal increment of 70, as shown below.

External Interfaces
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot be
determined from the PCF.
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases

CAESAR II permits the export of the analysis results to ODBC-compliant databases. ODBC is a
programming interface that enables applications to access data in database management
systems that use Structured Query Language (SQL) as a data access standard. CAESAR II uses
two drivers supplied by Microsoft to communicate with the Access database or Excel spreadsheet.
These drivers are installed by default when either of the two products is set up on a system.
DSN Setup
To use the CAESAR II data export facility, you need to set up a Data Source Name (DSN) on the
system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the computer and
how to communicate with it (for example, what driver to use). CAESAR II has capabilities to export
data to either an Access database or an Excel spreadsheet, though you only need to set up a DSN
for an Access database to allow use of this feature. The name of a DSN is fixed (read-only) by
ICAS.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set up DSNs automatically. However, in the
event that the DSNs are not set up, follow the procedure below.
Setting Up the Data Source Name:

1. From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
2. Double-click ODBC Data Sources, and click User DSN.
3. Click Add.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the figure below.

External Interfaces
Follow steps 4 through 7 for Microsoft Access DSN Setup ONLY.

4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb), and click Finish.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the one below. You are prompted to select your
database.
The data source name must be the C2_OUT_ACCESS. The description is an

optional field, and can hold any description information.
5. Enter the Data Source Name and the Description. Click Select to select the CAESAR II
template database.
CAESAR II is supplied with a template database that contains the structure to hold
data exported from the software. This file is named caesarII.mdb and is present in the system
directory of your CAESAR II installation directory.
6. Select the file, and click OK.

External Interfaces
The system returns you to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK.
The C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSNs.
You have now successfully completed the Access DSN setup.

This above process needs to be performed only once per computer.

External Interfaces
Controlling the Data Export

The CAESAR II data export is controlled using the Setup/Configuration module. By default, data
export is disabled. You must run Configure/Setup to enable ODBC data export.
Setting Up the ODBC Data Export

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays.
2. Click Database Definitions.
3. Set Enable Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases to True.
4. On ODBC Database File Name, click Browse and then type the name of your database.
CAESAR II copies the template database to the specified directory and names the database
as specified.
5. The Append re-runs to existing data configuration setting is optional. If set as False (the
default setting), re-runs of the same job overwrite any existing data for the same job in the
database/spreadsheet. If you set this option to True, then re-runs add or append data from
the new runs to the database/spreadsheet.
Click Save and Exit to save changes to the configuration.
As in previous versions of CAESAR II, the configuration file applies to all CAESAR II
jobs present in that directory. Similarly, the external database/spreadsheet specified in one
configuration file applies to all jobs present in that directory.

CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data
SECTION 16

During the input/analysis/output phases of operation, CAESAR II creates a number of job-specific
data files. Some of these data files are used solely by CAESAR II, while others contain either input
or output data. This section defines the files that you will most likely encounter, their purpose, and
whether they are important for archiving purposes. In most cases, the job files listed below are
only exposed, or visible, on the machine when a job is active. When a job is not active, all of its
files are compressed into either a .C2 archive (for piping) or a .C2S archive (for structural).
 In the following list, an asterisk (*) after the file extension indicates that it should be saved to
archive input data. A double asterisk (**) indicates the file should be saved to archive output
data.
 Not every file listed may be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent upon
what analysis has been run.
Static Input Files

._A * User-defined spreadsheet input data.
._J * Load case data.
.C2DB * Contains additional user-defined input data.
Dynamic Input File

._7 * User-defined dynamic input data.
Structural Input File

.STR * User-defined structural input data.
Soil Input File

.SOI * User-defined soil property data.
Scratch Files
._B - Nodal boundary condition file created by the piping error checker and used by the
analysis modules.
._C Element properties file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.

._E Element connectivity file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._N Nodal coordinate file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._R Job control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
.BND Bend control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._G Structural geometry file used with piping preprocessor.
._1 Scratch file.
._2 Scratch file.
._5 Scratch file with intermediate hanger data.
._6 Scratch file.
.HAR Harmonic components for animation.
.FRQ Harmonic solution frequency and phase data.
.XYT Animation output data file from time history analysis.
Output Files
._M ** Intermediate output file that contains data generated by the piping error checker and load
case setup modules.
._P ** Static output data file.
._Q ** Actual harmonic displacement data.
._S ** Dynamic output data file.
._T ** Time history output data file.
.VAL Intermediate eigenvalue output file.
.VEC Intermediate eigenvector output file.
.OTL ** Input/Output QA sequencing data file.
.WRN Model warning messages from the error checker.

Additional Files
.XML Plot control data.
.NTXT Text input data for user verification.
.MIM Intermediate calculation file generated by the software's FEA translator.
.OUT User-generated text output data file.
.CFG Configuration options file. Applies to all jobs in the same directory as the .CFG file.
.FIL User-generated custom units file.

APPENDIX A
Update History
The lists on the following pages detail the functional updates made to CAESAR II by version
number. These lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items such
as minor releases (such as Service Packs or Hot Fixes); re-publication of the User Guide, or
additional new modules released to aid customers between updates.
In This Appendix
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84).......................................... 1234
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) .................................... 1234
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) .................................. 1235
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) .................................... 1236
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) .................................... 1236
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ...................................... 1237
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) .................................... 1238
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91)................................... 1240
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93)................................... 1243
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ..... 1244
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ......... 1246
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) .................................... 1247
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ......... 1248
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) ... 1253
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07) .... 1254

Update History
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84)

 Input data spreadsheets featuring data duplication to the next pipe element
 Vessel local Flexibility Calculations
 Multiple load case spring hanger design
 Algebraic load case combinations
 Nonlinear restraints with gaps, friction, 2-node, and skewed options
 Zero or finite length expansion joints with “Tension Only” tie-bars
 Built-in database of pipe materials and properties
 B31 code compliance reports
 Static and dynamic capabilities, including animated mode shape plots
 Extensive input/output graphics
 Pressure effects on bends, including consideration of circular or slightly oval cross-sections
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86)

 Help Windows
 AutoCAD Interface
 HP Plotter Interface
 Batch Execution Opinion
 Accounting System
 File Handler
 Spooled Input Listings
 Uniform Load in G’s
 Liberal Code Stress Allowable
 Cursor Pad and Function Key Implementation in Input Spreadsheets
 Plot Menu Single Keystroke Access
 Stainless Steel Pipe Schedules
 Direct Input of Specific Gravity
 Bourdon Pressure Options
 Hanger Control Spreadsheet Updates

Update History
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86)

 AISC Structural Steel Database with over 800 different structural steel cross-sections.
 Keyword/Batch Structural Steel Preprocessor - Provides the same quality CAESAR II
graphics with structural steel volume plots, interactive error checking, extensive interactive
help, and is fully compatible with CAESAR II piping models.
 High Resolution Graphics - EGA support for monochrome and 640x350, 16 color mode.
Tecmar Graphics Master support for monochrome and 640x200, 16 color mode. Hercules
support for monochrome 720x348 mode.
 Graphics - Added Pan and Range options. Improved zooming, stresses and displaced shapes
in color, hidden lines removed from volume plots, and pipe and structure plotted together.
 3D-Graph - Added an option to plot stresses for all nodes for all load cases on the same plot.
 Simultaneous Use Of Two Screens - Supports one monochrome screen and another for
graphics.
 WRC 107 Stress Calculations.
 Units - Use English and SI standard options, or define your own set of unit constants and
labels. Output may be generated in multiple unit sets, and input files may be converted from
one unit set to another.
 Wind Load Calculations - According to ANSI A58.1-1982, or you can input your own velocity or
pressure versus elevation tables.
 Pipe/structure “include” Option - Piping input from one file may be included in another with a
given node and rotational offset.
 Quick Natural Frequency Range Calculations - Computes the number of natural frequencies
in any user given range in the amount of time needed to do a single static solution.
 High Resolution Hardcopy Printer Plots.
 Setup file options - You can set the following CAESAR II execution parameters:
 Graphics hardware configurations.
 Colors for over 27 different plotted items.
 B3.1 reduced intersection options.
 Plot/Geometry connection through CNodes options.
 Corroded cross section stress calculation options.
 Minimum and Maximum allowed bend angle options.
 Occasional load factors.
 Loop closure tolerance.

Update History
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87)

 Uniform and Independent support shock spectrum capability.
 Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Fluid Waterhammer.
 Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Relief Loads.
 Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Wind Gust Loads.
 Fluid Mechanics Analysis of Gas or Liquid open vent relief system. Includes vent stack sizing,
thrust, and pressure rise computations.
 NRC Dynamics Benchmarks for: NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. I, 1980; and
NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. II, 1985.
 Dynamic Friction modeling based on static load case results.
 Eleven pre-defined shock spectra including all Reg. Guide 1.60 spectra and the El Centro
North-South component spectra.
 Improved Harmonic Analysis including the effect of phased loading relationships. This
analysis allows the modeling of eccentrically loaded rotating equipment.
 Improved dynamic output processor, includes user-defined headings and comments.
 Animated static and dynamic solutions with structural members and hidden line volume plots.
 Improved EIGENSOLVER many times faster than earlier algorithms, with automatic
out-of-core solution mode.
 Updated Static Analysis Load Case Processor.
 New Friction Algorithm with interactive control during solution of nonlinear restraints.
 Improved Output file handling of various solution methods.
 Ability to abort any function at any time during a session using the <ESC> key.
 New keydisk memory protection scheme.
 Hardware/Software QA capability for analysis verification.
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88)

 Large Rotation Supports - Allows large rotation supports to be handled properly, by computing
the support forces in all three global directions. Rod and Chain hanger supports can now be
modeled.
 Nonlinear Out-of-Core Solver - This new solver increases the range of problems CAESAR II
can solve by allowing nonlinear solutions to be performed on the hard disk. This capability is
necessary when a job is too large to be solved in memory.
 Friction Report - Friction is a non-conservative force, and CAESAR II treats it as such. The
restraint reports now show restraint loads due to friction for each load case.
 New External Interface Hooks - A new interface module allows smooth interface to data
conversion modules between CAESAR II and other programs such as AutoCAD. A new
AutoCAD DXF interface is provided, and two thirds of the part vendors have completed
interfaces from their AutoCAD ISO packages to CAESAR II.

Update History
 ASCII Editor - Due to an overwhelming need and subsequent lack of easy to use system
editors, a stand alone ASCII editor is provided. This editor easily modifies files such as
AUTOEXE.BAT, CONFIG.SYS, and SETUP.CII.
 2D XY Engineering Plotting Program - Stand alone plotting software that allows you to plot
engineering data such as CAESAR II spectrum files. This software plots any real data
arranged in columns.
 Valve & Flange Database - The addition of a valve and flange database enables you to define
or select the specific rigid element to insert into the piping system. The database is
constructed to allow you to add or modify entries.
 Dynamic Restart - The most time consuming part of a dynamic analysis is the Eigensolution.
This feature allows a job to be restarted and use a previous Eigensolution.
 WRC Updates - The latest edition (1979) of the WRC107 bulletin has been incorporated.
 Input Title Page - An optional title page has been added to the input module. You can now
define a title page of up to 19 lines which is stored with the input.
 Expansion Joint Rating Program - This stand alone software allows you to compute the
compression of each expansion joint corrugation and the compression of the joint as a whole.
These values can then be compared to manufacturer’s recommendations for joint acceptance.
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90)

 VGA Graphics support on input.
 Interactive (immediate) rotation of the input graphics image.
 Updated graphics user interface.
 Optional WRC 329 implementation of new stress intensification factors for intersections.
 Optional ASME Class 1 flexibility calculations for reduced intersections.
 Optional WRC 329 fixed to B31.1 and B31.3 piping code equations.
 Piping codes - B31.4, B31.8, ASME Sect III Class NC and ND, CAN Z184 and Z183, Swedish
Power Methods 1 and 2, BS806.
 Updated SIF library to include welded joints and Bonney Forge fittings.
 New scrolling help screens.
 Editing list features, including rotate and duplicate of total or partial models
 Updated WRC 107 table limit check.
 AISC member check.
 Wind load calculations on structural members.
 Additional stress equation control using the SETUP file.
 Numerical sensitivity checks in both the in-core and out-of-core solvers.
 Automatic expansion joint modeler using manufacturers database.
 Additional restraint types including bottomed-out spring hangers and bi-linear soil springs.

Update History

Graphical Updates
 Instantaneous center-of-rotation calculation.
 Element Highlight.
 Element Range.
Rotating Equipment Report Updates

 API 610 7th Edition Addition.
 SI/User Units.
 HEI Additions.
WRC 107 Updates

 Simplified input.
 WRC 297 stress calculations.
Miscellaneous Modifications
 Screen data presentation changes.
 Direct control jumping between executables.
 Increased number of allowed software designed hangers.
 Additional spring hanger design options.
 Database updates include additional spring hanger tables.
 Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe.

The installation software uses the file compression routines from PKWARE. This significantly
reduces the number of diskettes distributed and the time needed to install the CAESAR II
package.

Update History
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations

Elastic models of the annular plate, gasket and bolts predict the relative degrees of gasket
deformation leading to a leaking joint. Stress calculations in accordance with ASME Sect. VIII Div.
1 are also provided for comparison.
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations

This bulletin supplements WRC 107, addition to computing stresses in the nozzle as well as the
vessel.
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad

The new module shows the effects of the various code options available in CAESAR II, and
illustrates the relationship between the various interpretations. WRC 329 SIF options are
included. SIFs for stanchions on elbows are also computed.
Miscellaneous
 A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on the
screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
 The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide screen
dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
 Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
 Updated PLTS now allow you to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
 Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the
HEI bulletin.
 The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and
to provide a local element report.
 As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II uses ESL devices to authorize access to the software. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client
information to the software. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update
pages for the User Manual.
The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for
the keydisks (both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly activate
the ESL.
 A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page for
dot matrix printers, useful for page lengths longer than 11 inches.

Update History

 The internal file maintenance utility has been completely rewritten. The new file handler
provides the same capabilities as the previous file handler but with faster response times.
Additionally, the new file handler is compatible with disk partitions larger than 32 Mbytes, and
manipulates the data files created by Versions 3.xx of CAESAR II.
 A configuration program has been added to CAESAR II to allow you to modify the SETUP.CII
file from spreadsheets. The configuration program also includes the standard COADE help
interface to facilitate setting the directives.
 The structural programs (C2S and AISC) have been revised to access either the 1977 AISC
database or the 1989 AISC database. Additionally, the AISC program has been updated to
perform the unity checks (code compliance) using the 1989 code which includes the
methodology for checking single angles.
 The equipment module (ROT) has been enhanced to handle vertical in-line pumps for
API-610, 7th Edition.
 The Stoomwezen 1989 (Dutch) piping code has been added.
 Three additional spring hanger tables have been added (Basic Engineering, Capitol Pipe
Supports, Piping Services Company).
 The editors found in the structural preprocessor, the ASCII file editor, and the piping
preprocessor title page have been modified to allow the insertion and deletion of single
characters. Appropriate screen instructions are provided where necessary.
 An automatic loop closure command has been added to the piping preprocessor.
 A jacketed pipe example has been included in the documentation. The input file for this
example is included in the EXAMPLES set on the distribution diskettes.
 Updated moduli of elasticity for default CAESAR II materials based on 1990 code revisions.

 Support of DOS environments now available in CAESAR II. This allows you to run the
software from various subdirectories on the hard disk other than the installation directory.
 Facilities have been provided to enable you to modify the default colors used throughout
CAESAR II. Four predefined sets of text colors are provided as well as the ability to modify
whichever set is currently selected.
 The Utilities menu has been expanded to include all of the secondary CAESAR II processors.
 Help has been added for the Input graphics, the Pen Plot graphics, and WRC 107.
 A new online error processor has been incorporated. This enables the software to provide an
explanation of the cause of many fatal error messages, as opposed to the display of only the
error number.
 The file handler has been modified to allow the manual entry of a new job name.
 The input piping preprocessor now includes a material number (21) for User Defined
Materials.

Update History
 The Static and Dynamic Output menus have been modified to allow you to return directly to
the input, or in the case of the dynamics output, to invoke the animation module directly.
 Graphics for flange selection and output have been added to the ASME Flange modules.
 Input and output file sequencing are checked to aid in Quality Assurance, insuring that the
current input file produced the current output file. Input Echo reports are also possible from the
static output processor.

Codes and Databases
 The Canadian codes Z183 and Z184 have been revised according to the 1990/1992
publications.
 The Italian spring hanger manufacturer INOFLEX has been added.
 The Database option of the configuration program now allows you to set the Valve and Flange
database. Additionally a database excluding flanges (NOFLANGE) is included.
 The Material Database used for the Flange Stress/Leakage module has been updated. The
new database includes all changes from the ASME Sect VIII, Division 1, A91 Addenda, the
materials are listed in code order, and the number of materials has increased from 450 to
1100.
 The structural modules C2S and AISC have been updated to work with the German structural
steel library.
Interfaces Added
 A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
 An interface is provided between Stoner’s LIQT program and the dynamic modules of
CAESAR II. This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be
used in the generation of a force spectrum.
Miscellaneous Changes
 The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress percent
is reported, not the maximum code stress.
 A miscellaneous option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows
various options, including the specification of the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
 Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
 Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure
prompts.
 Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output reports
by load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.

Update History
 Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal
sorting of the static displacement report.
 The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging.
You also have control of the initial display of the file names. This allows you to set the sort
order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
 A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This aids in
detecting software corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
 A new report has been added to the static output menu. This enables you to obtain a “local
force/moment” report for the elements in the system.
 A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis. This
module requires at least a 386 processor.
 The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.

 Batch Stream Processor - A new processor has been included which allows multiple jobs (up
to 12) to be run in series, without intervention. The jobs can be static analysis, dynamic
analysis, or both.
 Expansion Joint Database - The Pathway Bellows expansion joint database has been
updated. The new database includes two additional pressure classes and diameters out to
144 inches.
 A new expansion joint database from RM Engineered Products has been added for this
release.
 Input Echo - The input echo processor has been modified so that the input echo precedes the
output data. Additionally, the intermediate data generated by the error checker now appears in
this listing.
 B31G - The B31G criteria for the remaining strength of corroded pipelines has been
incorporated. This module includes the original B31G criteria as well as several of the modified
methods discussed in the Battelle project.
 Output Processor - A new report has been added to the output processor which generates a
Restraint Summary report. This summary details all the loads for all selected load cases for
each restraint in the model.
 Thermal Bowing - The effects of thermal bowing on horizontal pipes can be analyzed. By
specifying the thermal gradient between the bottom and the top of the pipe, CAESAR II
computes the loads induced and include them with the thermal loads.
 32 Bit Modules - All of the dynamic modules have been moved from the 16 bit mode to the 32
bit mode. Additionally, the animation program now supports EGA and VGA display modes.
 Title Page Template - A user-configurable ASCII text file can now be used as a title page
template.
 Interface Updates - The CAESAR II data matrix interface and the Autoplant interface have
both been updated to use the currently active units file. The ComputerVision interface has
been updated to handle “tube” type piping.
 Expansion Joint Rating - The expansion joint rating module, ERATE, has been moved into the
“Miscellaneous Module”, facilitating input through the standard spreadsheets.

Update History
 Refractory Lining - The computation modules of CAESAR II have been modified to accept a
negative value of insulation thickness. If a negative thickness is encountered, the software
assumes the insulation is refractory lining (inside the pipe).
 Minimum Required Thickness - The piping error checker now makes the “minimum required
thickness” computation according to B31.1, 104.1. This information is reported for each pipe in
the listing of intermediate data (See item 3 above).
 Spring Hanger Tables - The E. Myatt & Co. spring hanger table has been added.
 ESL Updates - All of the code used to access the ESLs has been updated to allow access to
the 50 and 66 Mhz CPUs.
 Missing Mass - The dynamics modules can consider missing mass effects in the spectrum
solutions.
 Seismic Anchor Movements - The dynamics modules allows the specification of seismic
anchor movements for independent support motion analysis.
 RCC-M - The French piping code RCC-M, Section C has been incorporated.
 Languages - The input and dynamic output supports English, French, and Spanish language
headings. Language dependent files can be activated with the appropriate command line
switch on the INSTALL directive. For example, INSTALL /S installs any Spanish specific files.
 PCX Files - All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved to
disk files in PCX format. This enables these images to be brought into word processing and
desktop publishing systems.

 A completely new documentation set accompanies this release. This documentation consists
of: a User Guide, an Applications Guide, and a Technical Reference Guide.
 The static in-core and out-of-core solvers have been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode
utilizing extended memory. Solution times for large jobs have been cut by an order of
magnitude.
 The Static Output processor has been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode utilizing
extended memory.
 Both the Static and Dynamic Output processors now have the capability to generate ASCII
disk files on any drive or directory (using the COADE file manager) on the computer.
Additionally, a table of contents summarizing the output is generated for printer and disk
devices.
 The Dynamic Output processor now includes titles and page numbers (similar to statics), and
provides input echo (both system and dynamic) abilities.
 Modal time history analysis has been added. This includes output report review and animated
response review.
 Standard spectrum analysis now includes modal components for displacements. Additionally
displacement information is now available for static-dynamic combinations.
 The Included Mass Report has been clarified and modified to include the active mass in each
of the global directions. The percent of the force included/added is now based on a vector sum
rather than an absolute sum.

Update History
 The ZPA used in the missing force correction can now be controlled via the configuration file.
You can specify that the ZPA be based on the last extracted mode or the last spectrum value.
 The static load case array space has been increased by a factor of 5, allowing more flexibility
in static load case setup.
 API 650 nozzle flexibilities, according to the ninth edition, July 1993.
 Checks for allowable loads on Fired Heater Tubes according to API-560 have been added.
 As an option, you can consider the effects of pressure stiffening on straight pipes.
 Three additional spring hanger tables: Sinopec (China), BHEL (India), and Flexider (Italy).
 The Australian structural steel shape database has been added.
 The ASME material database has been updated to reflect the 1992 Code addendum.
 The printer testing routines have been completely rewritten. Additionally, output can be
directed to any LPT port.
 The ability to configure the printer, either dot matrix or laser jet. This is implemented through a
text file containing the printer formatting codes which you can modify.
 Password protection for input data files, to prevent modification of completed projects.
 All of the screens in the piping preprocessor (except for the main spreadsheet) are now
supported in Spanish and French.
 Input/Output file time/date sequencing checks have been added to the dynamics modules.
 The Break command in the piping input processor has been modified to accept input in
feet-inch units instead of only feet. This should allow compound entries in any units system.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements

(7/94)
Most of the CAESAR II executable modules have been converted from Microsoft 16 bit FORTRAN
to WATCOM 32 bit FORTRAN. This has reduced the low DOS RAM requirements of the software
from 577k to 475k.
The modules converted to 32 bit operation for Version 3.21 are summarized below:
 Static Stress Computation Module (1)
 Piping, Buried & Structural Steel Input Modules (3)
 Piping Error Checker (1)
 Load Case & Dynamic Input Module (1)
 All CAD interfaces (8)
 Neutral File interfaces (2)
The software now supports an ESL from a new vendor. This provides CAESAR II with full
networking abilities. The software first checks for a local ESL (from either vendor), then for a
network ESL.
Toward the support for network operations, the data files which are not job specific are now
assumed to be located in a SYSTEM subdirectory underneath the CAESAR II installation

Update History
directory. These data files include: the input listing formatting files (*.INP), the accounting data
files, the printer formatting file, the file handler template file, and the various header files.
The common factor among all of these files is that they are specific to a company installation, not
a particular data directory. Up until Version 3.21, these data files were manipulated by the
software (or sometimes directly by you) in the installation directory. However, many network
installations “write protect” their installation directories, making modifications to these files
impossible. These files are placed in a SYSTEM subdirectory to which you should be given
complete access.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 is capable of running on a local machine (with either vendor’s
local ESL) or on a network (with the network ESL). The changes made to the software enable the
same version to be run under these various configurations.
 Added additional spring hanger manufacturer has been added, Carpenter & Paterson, UK.
 The UBC (Uniform Building Code) earthquake spectra have been added.
 The B31.5 piping code has been added.
 The piping code addenda have been reviewed and any necessary changes made to the
software. The addenda include revisions for: ASCE #7, B31.1, B31.8, ASME NC, and ASME
ND.
 The SIF scratch-pad from the Miscellaneous processor (Option C of the Main Menu) has been
incorporated into the piping preprocessor. This processor includes all of the supported piping
codes (not just B31.1 and B31.3 as before) and all of the fittings. Additionally, any changes
made to the scratch-pad data can optionally be transferred directly to the main CAESAR II
data spreadsheets.
 Additional changes to the input piping preprocessor include the following:
problem size is now dependent on the amount of free extended memory - the old limit of 400
elements is now upwards of 8,000 elements
graphics menus automatically turned off for hard copies
optional node number display for supports, anchors, hangers, and nozzles
function key map shown on main spreadsheet
auxiliary input spreadsheets support help
 The accounting system has been completely rewritten. This provides a more streamlined
interface. Additionally, accounting statistics are now recorded from the stress computation
modules (previous versions only recorded the actual matrix decomposition times).
 The API-617 and NEMA-SM23 reports have been overhauled so that the code compliance
when using non-English units systems is consistent.
 The new Flange Rigidity factor from ASME Section VIII has been added.
 A new loader (C2.EXE) has replaced the original one (C2.COM). This new loader performs
initial startup checks, with diagnostic reporting if necessary, and enables error processing
from the Main Menu.
 The configuration program has been modified to track changes. If you attempt to [Esc] out
after making changes, you are warned that the changes will not be saved.
 A graphics viewer has been added to the file manager. This enables rapid model plotting
directly from the file manager of the Main Menu.

Update History
 Additional directives are available to disable the generation of the Table of Contents page, and
disable the display of the spreadsheet function key mapping.
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements

(4/95)
 The Harmonic solver has been updated to provide damping. Harmonic analysis can now
include or exclude damping as you deem necessary.
 The following codes have been reviewed (and any necessary changes made) for compliance
to the latest editions: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, NC, ND, and BS-806.
 The following additional piping codes have been added: RCCM-D, CODETI, and TBK 5-6.
 Center of Gravity calculations have been added with results displayed in the error checker.
 A Bill of Materials report has been added.
 Yield criterion stresses can be computed as either Von Mises or as 3D Maximum Shear Stress
intensity.
 Hoop Stress can be computed based on Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter, Mean Diameter, or
Lame’s equation.
 The spring hanger design spreadsheet has been modified to default to a 25% load variation. In
addition, the actual hanger load variation now appears in the hanger output reports.
 A new command (WIND) has been added to the structural steel preprocessor. This allows
selective wind loading on an element by element basis.
 A new key-combination Alt-D is available in the input processor to compute the distance
between two nodes.
 User-specified coordinates for up to 30 nodes are saved in the input file.
 The input title page has been expanded from 19 to 60 lines.
 Automatic node numbering abilities have been added to the spreadsheets of the main piping
input module
 Expansion Joint databases from IWK (Germany) are provided.
 Expansion Joint database from Senior Flexonics is provided.
 MISC converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the SIF, Flange, WRC297, B31G,
and expansion joint rating computations.
 ROT converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the equipment calculations for
NEMA, API, and HEI. General revisions made for more consistent input screens and help
messages.
 A new report option (in static output) is available to review the miscellaneous computations
made by the error checker. This report includes: SIFs and flexibility factors, pipe properties,
nozzle flexibility data, wind data, CG data, and the bill of materials report.
 The Intergraph Interface has been improved. The interface now transfers the
temperature/pressure pairs. Additionally, if a material mapping file is present, material data
can be set correctly by CAESAR II.
 The CADPIPE Interface has been updated in accordance with CADPIPE Version 4.0.

Update History
 The Restraint Summary in the static output processor has been modified to include the
translational displacements of the restrained nodes.
 The output processors (static and dynamic) have been modified to allow you to change the
name of the disk output file if necessary. Additionally, modifications have been made so that
only a single output device can be enabled.
 All language files have been translated into German. Use “INSTALL /G” to acquire the
German files.
 A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the Main
menu.
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96)

The following items have been completed for the 3.23 release:
 Mouse support has been added to most modules.
 The German piping code, FBDR, has been added.
 Major improvements to FRP (fiber reinforced plastic) stress calculations. This includes the BS
7159 code and guidelines set forth by FRP manufacturers.
 A bi-directional link to CADWorx/Plant (COADE’s Piping CAD system) has been added.
 The WRC107 module has been redesigned to incorporate multiple load cases and perform the
ASME Division 2 Stress Intensity Summation, all in one step.
 An interface to Sunrise System’s PIPENET program has been developed.
 The South African structural steel tables are being added.
 Two new spring hanger manufacturer’s tables have been added; Comet (UK), and
Witzenmann (Germany).
 Two new commands have been added to the structural preprocessor: UNIT, and GLOAD.
 The CADPIPE interface has been updated to comply with the new release (Version 4.1) of
CADPIPE.
 Additional modifications have been made to the Intergraph interface.
 The low DOS RAM requirement has been reduced to 420 Kbytes.
 The equipment module has been updated to reflect the 1995 edition of API-617.
 The following U.S. piping codes have been updated according to recent editions: B31.3 (1995)

Update History
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements

(3/97)
 Multiple (3) displacement/force/uniform load vectors have been added. These load cases,
called D1/D2/D3 and F1/F2/F3, may be toggled on the input plot by continuing to press F3 and
F5 (displacements cycle through D1, D2, D3, and then off). The naming of these load cases
has also required the renaming of the CAESAR II load combination terms – D1, F1, S1, etc.
must now be called DS1, FR1, and ST1. All hanger loads and cold spring forces (from
materials 18 and 19) are still combined into load case F1 for consistency with previous
versions of CAESAR II.
 A material database for piping properties and allowable stresses for many of the piping codes
supported by CAESAR II has been implemented. This is invoked by pressing [ALT M] on the
main CAESAR II input spreadsheet (also at the list option and on the WRC 297 nozzle
flexibility spreadsheet). After bringing up the list of materials, a material name can be typed in;
matching records are then displayed for selection. Allowable stresses are updated
automatically whenever temperatures, materials, and/or piping codes change.
 Database management is provided from the Utilities option of the main menu. You can edit
COADE provided materials or add your own. Material parameters can be provided for code 0
(represents generic values for any non-specified code) or for specific codes. It is
recommended, due to future implementation plans, that metals be assigned identification
numbers between 100 and 699. FRP materials receive numbers between 700 and 999.
Selection of FRP materials from the material database does not currently activate the
orthotropic material model in CAESAR II. This must still be done through the use of material 20
(see item 6 concerning this below).
 Eight-character job names are now supported. Input files are identified by extension ._A,
output files by extension ._P, ._S, and so on. Existing files are automatically recognized and
converted to their new format. (See related item 16 below.)
 Modifications have been made to allow multiple users working from the same network data
directory through the environment variable COADE_USER. This environment variable should
be set to a unique 3 character combination, such as the initials, for each user working in the
common directory. Implementation can be done by adding to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file a line
such as: SET COADE_USER=TVL
 CAESAR II’s Valve and Flange database now incorporates data files from CADWorx/Plant.
This change provides four advantages:
 Component weights and lengths are more accurate, as well as traceable to specific
catalogs, standards, and so on.
 Weights and lengths are provided for more components than were previously available in
the CRANE or GENERIC databases.
 Because CADWorx/Plant data files are text files, you can easily edit or add components.
 If you also have CADWorx/Plant on your computer, the two programs share the same
data files and project specs, enhancing the performance of the bi-directional interface.
Gaskets are included for flanged items, so a better fit is provided between the
CADWorx/Plant and CAESAR II models.
 You can now set default values for FRP (material 20) parameters through the
configuration/setup. These default parameters can be read automatically from manufacturers

Update History
data files by toggling through the list of available files, and then pressing [ALT-U] (for Update)
on the selected vendor file. Vendor files are recognized by their .FRP extensions; because
these are text files, you can create them easily yourself, or vendors may distribute them to
their customers.
 The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping
has been added.
 The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been
expanded to consider calculation of stresses in restrained piping.
 The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
 The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
 ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been
incorporated into the WRC-107 module.
 The Relief Load Synthesis dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
 A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve
calculational results or software performance:
Changed From To
BEND_LENGTH_ATTACHMENT= 5.0 1.0
BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE = NO YES
FRICT_STIFF = 50000 1.0E6
FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR = 25 15
FRICT_ANGLE_VAR = 30 15
VALVE_&_FLANGE = GENERIC CADWORX
 Four new directives added to the configuration file.

SYSTEM_DIRECTORY_NAME—User defined, defaults to SYSTEM. You vsn now maintain
multiple system directories for different projects)
UNITS_FILE_NAME—User-selected from list. Current units are now set through the
configuration/setup, not through the units option of the main menu.
BS_7159_PRESSURE_STIFFENING—Design strain or Actual Pressure.
FRP_PROPERTY_DATA_FILE—User-selected from list.
 The configuration file can also be password protected in the Installation Directory. This
prevents modification of all Computation and Stress Control directives. Subsequent use of the
configuration module prevents modification of these directives, unless the password is known.
Colors, printer settings, and so on can still be changed without the password.
 CAESAR II has been modified to accept an optional job name (including full drive and path
data) as an argument. The software switches to the appropriate drive and directory, opens the
specified job, and goes into input bypassing the Main Menu. This allows the definition of ._A
files as CAESAR II input files under Windows 95 and subsequent double clicking on the file

Update History
name in a Windows/95 explorer window to start the input processor on the picked job file. This
also allows CAESAR II to be spawned from other programs, right into a job.
 Modifications to CAD interfaces: Intergraph and CADPIPE.
 All necessary routines have been checked and modified where appropriate to address the
Year 2000 issue.
 A Korean structural steel shape library has been added.
 A new spring hanger table has been added (SARAFTHI).
 PD-5500 nozzle flexibilities have been incorporated to complement the WRC-297 and API 650
nozzle connections.

(1/98)
The CAESAR II Version 4.00 release is a major program rewrite making it compatible with
Windows 95/NT (version 4.0) operating systems. Minimal functionality enhancements were
included in order to make CAESAR II input files interchangeable between Version 4.00 and
CAESAR II Version 3.24, the last DOS-based version. Specific new features include:
 Simultaneous review of graphics and spreadsheet.
 Addition of rendering and wireframe graphics in plot mode.
 The ability to turn off subsequent occurrences of an error type in the piping error checker.
 The ability to extract loads directly from a piping output file for inclusion in the WRC 107 and
rotating equipment modules.
 Addition of bend mid-point modes (indicated by angle “M”) which allow you to designate the
mid-point of the bend without knowing the included angle.
 Ability to review 132-column reports on screen.

(1/99)
 9 temperatures, 9 pressures, 9 displacement sets, and 9 force/moment sets.
 Finalization of TD/12 piping code.
 Fatigue capabilities including cumulative damage.
 Increase in number of load cases to 99.
 Reactivation of the input LIST facilities.
 Printing capabilities for graphical renderings.
 Saving graphics images to BMP files.
 Online User and Quick Reference Guide in PDF format.
 Update of piping codes (CODETI, NC, ND, B31.1, B31.3).
 Addition of results filters to output reports.

Update History
 Update of the Technical Reference Manual to reflect Windows version of CAESAR II.
 Variability of mill tolerance on an element-by-element basis.

(2/00)
 New Input Graphics - utilizes a true 3D library, enabling graphic element selection.
 New local coordinate element input and specification.
 Completely revised material database, including Code updates.
 Optional static output in ODBC compliant database format.
 Hydrodynamic loading for offshore applications. This includes the Airy, Stokes 5th, and
Stream Function wave theories, as well as Linear and Power Law current profiles.
 Wind analysis expanded to handle up to 4 wind load cases.
 New piping codes: B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DNV (ASD).
 A wave scratchpad - see the recommended theory graphically, or plot the particle data for the
specified wave.
 Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
 Automatic Dynamic DLF Plotting.
 Witzenmann expansion joint databases.
 As a result of the merger between Senior Flexonics and Pathway Bellows, a new expansion
joint database replaces the two previous individual databases.
 A new spring hanger vendor (Myricks) is provided.
 PCF Interface.

(3/01)
 New Static Load Case Builder / Editor. Allows multiplication factors on load components plus
additional combination methods (SRSS, Algebraic, ABS, Min, Max, Signed Min, Signed Max,
and Scalar).
 Z-Up - Build or review models with Z as the vertical axis instead of Y. Switch between Y and Z
up automatically.
 New undo/redo ability in the piping input module.
 Piping input can be sent to ODBC database.
 A new data export wizard is provided to selectively target input or output data for ODBC
export.
 All modules support optional output directly to MS-Word.
 Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.

Update History
 User control over the auto-save feature implemented.

 Improvements to the 3D graphics (job specific configuration, additional data display).
 Added graphics to the WRC 107 Module to show loads and orientation.
 Added a new Code Compliance report to the static output processor.
 Spring hanger design expanded from 3 to 9 operating cases.

(5/02)
 Revised piping codes: B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, ASME NC, ASME ND.
 Added the B31.11 piping code.
 Added an alpha-numeric node label option to the piping input module.
 Expanded Static Load case options: (1) added load components H, CS, HP, and WW (hanger
loads, cold spring, hydro pressure, and weight filled with water, respectively), (2) added
HYDRO stress type, (3) added option to set snubber and hanger status on a load case basis,
(4) provided ability to scale friction factor on a load case basis.
 Added automatic generation of a hydrotest load case (WW+HP, HYD stress type, and spring
hangers locked), triggered by the presence of a non-zero HP.
 Updated the 3D input graphics as well as partial implementation in the static output processor,
including the Element Viewer.
 Updated the spring hanger design algorithm to provide the option to iterate the Operating for
Hanger Travel load case to include the stiffness of the selected hanger.
 Added new configuration options for the following:
 Ambient temperature.
 Default friction coefficient. If this value is nonzero, it automatically gets applied to new
translational restraints.
 Liberal stress allowable.
 Stress stiffening.
 Bourdon settings.
 How to handle B16.9 welding tee and sweepolet SIFs in B31.3.
 Added two new spring manufacturers' tables Pipe Supports USA and Quality Pipe Supports.
 Added the ability to define the flexibility factor on bends.
 Piping and structural files now support long file names. These files may be located in any
directory path. The number of included structural files has been expanded from 10 to 20.
 Results of the Hanger Design Cases are now optionally viewable in the Static Output
Processor. To use this option, set status to KEEP in the Load Case Options.
 Added the ability to filter static Restraint reports by CNODE status.
 Added a new warning report to the static output.

Update History
 Added a dirty flag to the piping input preprocessor and the configuration modules. Attempting
to exit these processors without saving changes produces a warning message.
 Added the ability to detect the differences between material data in the input file and that in the
material database (including missing user-materials). This feature offers you the opportunity to
use the original data.
 Reviewed/updated the minimum wall computation for all piping codes for straight pipe.
 Added a field for specifying Marine Growth Density to the Wind/Wave dialog box.
 Updated API-661 to 4th Edition.
 Added the ability to save static load case data without running the job.

(11/03)
 Revised material database for B31.1 A2001 changes.
 Added Reducer element.
 Improved interaction and error reporting in static load case editor.
 Improved graphics changes include:
 A walk-through option is available.
 The static output processor can now produce colored stress plots of the piping system.
 A graphical find (zoom to) option has been added.
 Instant use of graphics, even before drawing is completed.
 Recitable restraint/hanger symbols.
 Added Spectrum wizard for the generation of earthquake and relief valve spectra.
 Revised codes: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610.
 Included additional FRP data files.
 The static output processor remembers all user settings, such as filters, labels, and report
size.
 Added dynamic help system for piping & structural input and configuration.
 Added automatic acquisition of website software updates.
 Combined WRC-107/297 module for local stress calculations.
 Redesigned the structural steel interface for easier operation.
 Implemented a new job wizard for the creation of structural steel input models.
 Modified to allow multiple instances of CAESAR II to run.
 Implemented Load Case Template for recommending static load cases.
 Modified to allow access to the output for expired date or run limited ESL.

Update History

(11/05)
 Added the following new piping codes: EN-13480, GPTC/192, Z662 Ch 11.
 Revised, due to code changes, the following piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.5, B31.8,
B31.11, ASME NC, ASME ND, CODETI, TBK 5-6.
 Updated API-610 codes and standards.
 Added Ameron Bondstrand, and Conely FRP Pipe Specification files.
 Added Binder (UK) and PiHASA (Spain) Spring Hanger tables.
 Added Structural Steel databases from India and Japan.
 Renamed all references to “Grinnell” to “Anvil”.
 Added the capability to perform dynamic analysis optionally using a consistent mass matrix.
This obviates the need to re-mesh the model for better mass distribution.
 Added the capability to perform an analysis using the hot material elastic modulus.
 Enhanced the static output processor to provide you with the ability to create custom, reusable
reports.
 Revised the piping input processor to provide a combined view showing both the graphics and
the spreadsheet. The new piping input processor has integrated the Piping Error Checker, and
access to the configuration module has been provided. For debugging and problem solving,
relevant sections of the spreadsheet can be torn off and placed on the graphics pane, allowing
the spreadsheet to be hidden for larger graphics display. Additionally, sections of the model
can be graphically selected and then modified.
 Updated the Intergraph and PCF interfaces.
 Added an Isogen export facility allowing the creation of Isogen stress isometrics.
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements (

9/07)
 Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.
 Graphics Improvements:
 Improved graphics rendering speed proved by 20% to 50% depending on the job.
 Added additional controls to view corrosion and densities.
 Added the ability to import an Autocad (CADWorx) model directly into the piping input, to
provide visualization of supporting steel, vessels and other equipment.
 Static Output Processor Improvements:
 Reduced report generation times by 70% or better.
 Added Presentation in tabbed window to allow viewing multiple reports, and immediate
switching between reports.

Update History
 Added ability to select Individual items from the Miscellaneous Report.

 Added ability to zoom reports and individually direct to an output device using a context
menu.
 Added ability to import and export custom report templates.
 Static Load Case Editor Enhancements
 Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.
 Added the ability to alter the occasional load multiplier on a per load case basis.
 Added the ability to import static load case data from different jobs.
 Added the ability to copy wind and wave vectors.
 Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
 Added PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2 piping code.
 Revised the following piping codes due to code changes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662,
EN-13480.
 Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the
Expansion Code Stress.
 Revised API-661 to 6th Edition.
 Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
 Added a number of European materials to the material database.
 Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
 Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of DIN-2458
(welded).
 Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.
 Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
 Updated the flange material database per ASME Sect VIII Div 1, 2007 Edition.
 Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.

(4/09)
 Added ISO-14692 Code for FRP systems.
 Added a Loop Optimization Wizard to assist in expansion loop design.
 Added the American LifeLines Alliance as a second soil stiffness method to the Buried Pipe
Modeler.
 Added the Mexican Seismic Code to the Dynamic Input module for the automatic generation
of response spectra.
 Added a static seismic wizard to assist in computing G factors for ASCE, NBC, and CFE.
 Added additional wind codes (10)to the Static Load setup.

Update History
 Raised the permitted number of static load cases from 99 to 999.

 Modified the valve/flange insertion routine to cut back the straight pipe length if necessary.
 Added a number of lists to the Piping Input Spreadsheet to assist with input specification.
These lists appear on the bend radius and insulation density fields.
 Streamlined Spring Hanger Table definition through the addition of three checkboxes for cold
load design, extended range springs, and centered hot load.
 Flange Symbols are now drawn on the piping elements if flange ratings have been requested.
 Revised the following piping codes have been revised due to code changes: B31.1, B31.8,
GPTC/Z380, ASME NC, ASME ND.
 Moved user-writeable subdirectories from below \caesarii to the %allusersprofile” area.
 Added automatic e-mail generation for technical support issues.
 Improved the File Open dialog box to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping)
input.
 Added a new exportto MS Excel option for Static Output data. This is raw data only to improve
export speed.

(11/10)
 Added the B31.9 piping.
 Updated the following piping codes: RCCM-C, RCCM-D, ASME-NC, ASME-ND, GPTC/Z380,
Z662, B31.1, B31.3, EN-13480 (2010 Draft).
 Added the ability to visually show on the Static Output menu which load cases have passed or
failed.
 Added the spring hanger databases for PSS (Germany) and Seonghwa (Korea).
 Added structural tubing shapes to the AISC Structural database.
 Added a new restraint report showing reactions in local element coordinates.
 Added additional flexibility with user material databases through user named files.
 Added the ability to have user configurable nozzle limits.
 Added insulation, cladding & refractory specifications
 Improved the uniform load to display G’s or force/length in same job
 Improved the displacement import/export facility.
 Improved the PCF interface.
 Improved the WRC module.
 Added graphics/modeling/Interfacing improvements:
 Improved the Valve/Flange database option to keep 3 elements
 Added the ability to automatically generate Flange “G” values
 Added the ability to specify optional “spring hanger hardware weight”.

Update History
 Added the ability to automatically included API-650 nozzle displacement values in the
model.
 Added the ability to plot Spectra and Time Histories in dynamics.
 Added line number specification and manipulation.
 Added the ability to add or reassign key strokes.
 Improved the CAESAR II documentation search capabilities by adding a combined PDF
Search.

(5/12)
 Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF).
 Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced PCF
(APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor.
 Enhanced the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
 Added new element order commands for block operations: Invert and Change Sequence.
 Added usability improvements to reduce user input and editing time, including the use of line
numbers to block select elements.
 Improved many Isogen-related issues.

(10/13)
 Updated piping code information for ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.8, B31.9, and Z662 codes.
 Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF). (This is also available in
Version 5.31.)
 Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced PCF
(APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor. From the APCF Import dialog box, you can
quickly import the model from design software, such as Intergraph's SmartPlant 3D, saving
time while reducing errors. (APCF Import is also available in Version 5.31.)
 Added the import of the SmartPlant 3D (S3D)/SmartPlant Review (SPR) graphic environment
(VUE file), along with filtering capabilities within CAESAR II input to provide context to the pipe
stress analyst. You can also generate this VUE file from SmartPlant Review.
 Updated the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
 Added an option to store a revision number and line numbers.

Update History
 Added a new Restraint Summary output report.

 Included new functionality so you can send a user Load Case name, if specified.
 Implemented other enhancements to simplify the process for generating the database.
 Added new element order commands for block operations: invert and change sequence.
 Invert _ reverses the order of one or more elements in a selected group, as well as the
node numbering.
 Change Sequence _ moves (or rearranges) the sequence of one or more blocks of
elements to another location in the CAESAR II model.
 Added usability improvements to reduce the input and editing time.

 Enhanced line numbers with a Renumber _ operation that lets you select a group of
nodes on which to perform block operations.
 Added functionality that lets you renumber when you select elements on the graphical
model.
 Added functionality that lets you renumber boundary nodes after using the Renumber
operation.
 Enhanced the graphical model with an option to retain the colors for line numbers across
user sessions on a per-job basis.
 Included the ability to clear a window by using the SHIFT + CLICK window selection.
 Added ability to edit or delete annotations on the input and output graphics.
 Increased performance and functionality with enhancements.

 Updated the personal Isogen module to Personal ISOGEN 2012 R1 (8.1).
 Updated the CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine.
 Continued standardization for development using ASME NQA-1.
 Implemented Japanese localization in the following areas:

 Translated the user interface (Static Analysis module) and selected documentation in
Japanese.
 Added Japanese seismic code, KHK Level 1.
 Added spring hanger databases for Mitsubishi, Yamashita, Sanwa Tekki, and Techno.
 Updated and enhanced documentation to include more context-sensitive (F1) help and
additional task-oriented information.
 Updated the CAESAR II main menu to use the Office 2010 ribbon interface.

Update History
 Rewrote the methodology used by the Piping Error checker (PIERCK.EXE) in determining
duplicated allowable stress data for the elements. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version
5.30.02, 110830 build.)
 Corrected the calculation of the bending stress at the From end of elements for PD 8010-2 (to
use the SIF for the From end instead of the To end). (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
 Corrected the usage of the in-plane/out-of-plane SIF configuration setting for CODETI bends.
(Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)
 Corrected the PD 8010-2 equivalent stress calculation to consider both positive and negative
bending effects. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)
 Implemented additional changes to how the software duplicates the Wc and Sy material
values to succeeding elements.
 Corrected the calculation of the NC/ND branch stress index for reduced intersections of
reinforced tees.
 Corrected the calculation of the (dynamic) mass matrix for elements with refractory lining.
 Added corrosion consideration in the SIF computation for the CODETI piping code.
 Implemented the piping code updates for B31.9 2011 Edition.
 Implemented the piping code updates for B31.8 2010 Edition, including the hoops stress
change for Chapter VIII.
 Implemented the piping code updates for B31.3 2010 Edition, including the following revisions:
 Modified the calculation of longitudinal stress for Sustained loads (SUS). This previously
optional calculation was referred to as ASME Code Case 178.
 Added input values for two new stress indexes (It, Ia). The software uses the index values
in the new computation of Sustained and Occasional stresses.
 Added the ability to calculate the allowable stress for Sustained and Occasional cases at
the temperature of the corresponding operating case. The software defaults the value to
the minimum Sh value; however, you can select a corresponding Sh.
 Revised the allowable that CAESAR II uses for Appendix P Operating range cases to
include a new reduction option based on the ratio of yield versus tensile strength (Sy/St).
 Updated the material properties in accordance with Appendix A.
 Updated the SIF determination of Fillet or Socket welds.
 Modified how the software determines the Sc value to use with range load cases.

Update History

(10/14)
CAESAR II 2014, Version 7.00
 Updated to support the following piping code and material database updates:
 ASME B31.1 code, 2012 Edition. This work included material property updates.
 ASME B31.3 code, 2012 Edition. This work included a new equation for calculating
expansion stress cases with new SIF and index values. Extended the content for the
ASME B31.3 code update and B163 to 1400F.
 ASME B31.8 code, 2012 Edition. Updated the code interpretation to use either of the two
combined biaxial stress equations for restrained pipe, as referred to in Paragraph 833.4,
instead of using the maximum of the two. You can specify this using the Yield Stress
Criterion configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses section of the Configuration
Editor.
 ASME B31.5 code, 2013 Edition.
 EN 13480 code, 2012 Edition. This work included addressing bend pressure stiffening
and changes to the longitudinal pressure stress equation, among other revisions.
 ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, 2013 Edition. Added fatigue curves as per this edition.
 Updated the Material database, as required for piping code updates.
 Updated the flange rating for in-line flange checks per EN 1092-1:2013 and ANSI B16.5
2009.
 Added support for ANSI 16.5 2009 metric flange ratings.
 Addressed modeling and user interface issues, including:
 Enabled quick global property changes (such as for temperature and pressure) from the
Legend dialog box in the 3D model.
 Enhanced the Distance command to measure between two points in the 3D model
without requiring the input of node numbers.
 Added a new Global menu in piping input, which includes the Block commands. These
commands are also accessible through the Block Operations toolbar and the right-click
context menu from the List>Elements dialog box.
 Addressed graphics issues and other minor usability enhancements based on customer
feedback.
 Enhanced the Structural Steel Wizard to display units for various input fields, added
more tool bar icons and enhanced input grid usability.
 Improved static and dynamic analysis in the following areas:
 Revised the Static Analysis (Load Case Editor) to automatically recommend Expansion
(EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating conditions.
 Provided an option for users to select the allowable corresponding to temperature for that
particular Occasional (OCC) load case for B31.3 jobs.

Update History
 Added support for in-line flange check evaluations for MAX and ABS load case
combinations.
 Added improvements to functions that work with other interfaces, including:
 Added the ability to import multiple supports at the same location from the Import PCF or
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF interfaces.
 Enhanced the hanger table for support design with LISEGA’s LICAD software in the Data
Export Wizard (Export to MS Access)
 Improved several areas in output/post-processing, including:
 Added output filters for flanges so that you can identify the most overstressed flanges.
 Updated the software to show the actual Stress Indices (I) that are used for sustained and
occasional static load cases for ASME B31.3 code.
 Updated the Generate Stress Isometrics (CAESAR II Isogen module) with I-Configure
2014 (5.0).
 Updated the user documentation in the following areas:
 Updated the Quick Reference Guide with dates and information for all piping code
updates made in CAESAR II 2014.
 Updated the F1 help in the Static Output Processor.

(10/15)
CAESAR II 2016, Version 8.00.00
 Added Support for the Latest Code Standards
 ASME B31.1, 2014 Edition
 ASME B31.3 2014 Edition, including:
 Addressed the code standard requirement to consider sustained (and occasional)
stress in all support conditions. New static load cases, called alternate sustained or
alternate occasional cases, depend upon the support configuration of a converged
operating condition. This condition addresses systems where non-linear supports are
active in some operating conditions and inactive in others. The alternate support
condition is indicated using the new Alternate SUS/OCC check box in the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor
 Added two new load case templates (.tpl files) for use when recommending load
cases, which include support for the alternate SUS/OCC load cases
 Updated materials to support the latest code edition
 Moved the B31.3 Implement Appendix P configuration setting to SIFs and Stresses >
Legacy Settings as the B31.3 code standard no longer refers to Appendix P
 Added appropriate warnings and notes to the error checking module and the output
reports to account for the code updates

Update History
 ASME B31.8, 2014 Edition, including a small revision to the biaxial state of stress formula
(Sc), according to code Paragraph 833.4. You can find this formula in the CAESAR II
 ASME B31.9, 2014 Edition
 Wind and Seismic Codes
 National Building Code of Canada (NBC) Seismic and Wind Codes, 2010 Edition
 ASCE 7 2010 Edition and IBC 2012 Edition wind code standards, including a change in
the wind load reduction factor
 Equipment Codes
 API 560, 4th Edition
 Streamlined Load Case Editing/Creation
 Redesigned the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to improve the user's experience
and add more robust functionality when creating and revising load cases for analysis.
Includes the following improvements:
 Group Edit view - select and change values on multiple load cases all at once.
 Enhanced List view – Easier scrolling and viewing options, as well as filtering on columns,
drag-and-drop capabilities, and easier manipulation of load cases
 Updated user documentation
 Expedited Access to Finite Element Analysis Tools
 Added easier access to third-party tools for better modeling and evaluation from the
CAESAR II main menu, to generate more accurate SIFs and K factors. Compare multiple
file results, assess the sensitivity of your model elements, and evaluate nozzle/branch
connections with NozzlePRO.
 Expanded Hanger Data
 Added hanger data for the following hanger manufacturers: Hesterberg, Unison, Spring
Supports Mfg. Co., Senior, and Wookwang
 Revised the listing of the manufacturer, Flexider, to its new name, CASTIM 2000
 Enhanced Piping Input Usability
 Improved the Classic Piping Input to display a Pressure 3 value on the interface. This
allows you to input three sets of temperature and pressure values without having to open
a separate dialog box.
 New single and multiple element-level right-click graphics menus containing many
frequently-used element commands and block (group) operations
 Improved Distance Measuring
 Minimize mode for measuring lets you perform multiple measurements without the
Distance dialog box blocking any of the model

Update History
 Measure multiple distances (using CTRL+click) and see all of your measurements at
once.
 Redesigned and more user-friendly dialog box
 Better snapping in the Line Drawing (single line) mode and ability to snap from piping
elements to imported DWG pipe objects
 Larger default font size setting on distance measurements for ease of reading
 Enhanced S3D/SPR (VUE) Model Imports
 Improved rotation capabilities for imports with a more user-friendly interface
 Added functionality to include zipped VUE (ZVF) or stitched VUE (SVF) files in a CAESAR
II model
 Added Filter/View Capabilities on 3D Models
 Filter by Line Numbers in the Static Output Processor 3D model
 View only node names on the 3D model by selecting a new Names Only option in Piping
Input, C2Isogen, and the Static Output Processor modules
 Upgraded User Documentation
 Added edition dates and information for piping, equipment, and wind/seismic code
editions supported (Quick Reference Guide)
 More white space and indentation for field property formats
 New glossary of industry/software terms (User’s Guide)
 Updated the software to display the .chm-based help when you press F1 in the Material
Database Editor, Accounting, Change Model Units, and Create/Review Units modules.
Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based help dialog box
 Moved the help for the Stress Isometrics module into the main help file for CAESAR II

(10/16)
Technical Changes
Disabled the Search tab in the Online Help, due to an issue when your CAESAR II installation
uses OpenGL drivers. You can change the Graphics Settings > Miscellaneous Options >
Video Driver to Direct 3D in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor. If you use Direct 3D drivers,
you can download a copy of the Help with the Search tab enabled from Smart Support.
Piping and Equipment Code Updates

1. Updated the software to the latest ASME B31.4 code standards, which included the ASME
B31.4 2009, B31.4 2012, and B31.4 2016 code. The update included the following changes
and improvements:
 Updated materials applicable to the B31.4 code in the Material Database Editor.

Update History
 Updated the Allowable Stress tab in the Piping Input module by including an Allowable
Stress Indicator option for B31.4 and B31.4 Ch XI, and Design Factor and Hoop Stress
options for B31.4 Ch IX.
 Deprecated the B31.11 piping code, which is now included in the B31.4 main code
standard.
 Provided options for CAESAR II to automatically determine the restrained/unrestrained
state of the pipe elements, or for the user to specify the state. The software defaults to
automatically determining the state.
2. Added the evaluation of the creep condition using EN-13480 creep code standards. The
update included the following improvements:
 Expanded the Material Database Editor to support EN-13480 creep by adding material
properties for 200k hours, in addition to existing properties for 100k hours. Refer to the
Technical Discussion on evaluating creep conditions in the User’s Guide for more
information.
 Added a new Creep (CRP) stress type in the Static Analysis – Load Case Editor. The
software does not include the CRP stress type when it recommends load cases.
3. Updated the software to support the June 2015 edition of Canadian Z662 and Z662 Chapter
11, the Canadian code for oil and gas pipelines.
4. Enhanced the software to support the 5th Edition of API-560, February 2016, the equipment
code for fired heaters.
Piping Input
1. Added an option to select a new user-defined Custom type for nozzle flexibilities, in addition
to the existing Nozzle Flex types of WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500. The Custom nozzle
type includes user-defined nozzle stiffness values for Axial (radial force), In-Plane Bending,
Out-of-Plane Bending, and Torsional (moment). Many improvements have also been made
to the Nozzles auxiliary panel layouts to improve usability.
2. Enhanced the existing right-click context menu options for restraints from within the graphics
view. The Restraint > Insert Restraint option lets you right-click an element to break and
insert restraints in one action, or you can insert restraints at existing nodes. From the new
Insert Restraint dialog you can also define restraint options, such as distance from nodes.
3. Improved the Break at Element dialog box (accessed by selecting Model > Break or
right-clicking and selecting Element > Break Element). The software now automatically
populates the Insert Single Node option to the halfway-point node number and distance. If
there is not an available halfway-point node number, the software defaults to the next
available node number.
4. The Displacements grid displays free and fixed designations to eliminate confusion. The Fix
DOFs option applies the fixed value of 0.0 to any undefined (free) degree of freedom.
5. Enhanced the Distance dialog box for better usability. When you choose Origin and
Selected Element as your Measure Method, the Distance dialog box retains the selected
Measure Method option for the duration of your use of the Distance dialog box.
Load Case Editor

1. Updated the Static Analysis – Load Case Editor by adding the ability to copy and paste
complete load cases.

Update History
2. Enhanced the editor to allow the selection of multiple load cases in the List view and retain
the selection when you switch to Group Edit view.
3. Added a new Creep (CRP) stress type in the Static Analysis – Load Case Editor.
3D Model/Graphics
1. Node numbers display in front of piping elements when you use Options > Node Numbers
and rotate the graphics. Previously, the node numbers rotated with the elements and were
sometimes obscured by piping elements.
2. Symbols for LIM restraints (axial limit stops) display on the outside of the pipe and remain
visible when you use Options > Restraints.
3. Added a symbol for zero-length expansion joints on the model.
4. Displacements, rotations, forces, and moments display graphically as arrows (vectors) when
you select Options > Displacements or Options > Forces. You can also change the default
colors and arrow sizes in the Graphics Settings of the Configuration Editor or by using Plot
Properties.
5. Displacements on CNodes display graphically as arrows with Options > Displacements.
User Interface
Added a news channel on the CAESAR II main window, where you can find out product version
information, upcoming events, product training opportunities, and future webinars.
Integration
1. Combined the individual flexible nozzle input export options into a single Flexible Nozzles
option on the Data Export Wizard to improve usability.
2. Improved integration with Smart 3D by adding a new LCASE_NAME column to files exported
to Microsoft Access through the Data Export Wizard (ODBC). When you export to .mdb
format, you can now see the Load Case Name (LCASE_NAME column) in applicable
exported files for quick identification of your load cases.
Documentation/Help
1. Updated Restraints in the Piping Input Reference section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.
Each restraint type includes a graphic example to assist identification.
2. Improved the Global Coordinates section of the CAESAR II User's Guide. The user's guide
now references local coordinates as a, b, c to reduce confusion between local and global
coordinates.
3. Added navigation information, such as the location on ribbons and menus, to command topics
to aid discovery when browsing the help.
4. Updated the Hinged Joint section of the CAESAR II Application Guide. Updated the Hinged
Joint Model graphic to include all of the necessary components to model a hinged joint.
5. Updated portions of the user documentation to the latest Intergraph PP&M standards for
formats, which included adding more white space and indentation for field property formats.
6. Converted the CAESAR II 2017 readme document to .pdf format to comply with the latest
Intergraph PP&M standards.

Update History
7. Updated the software to call the main CAESAR II Help file (C2ug.chm) when you press F1 in
Equipment and Auxiliary modules. Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based
help dialog box.

Glossary
anchor
A stationary support used to restrict the movement of a pipe, sometimes caused by vibration,
expansion, or other external forces.
bend/elbow, long radius
A 90-degree bend or elbow with a radius that is equal to one and one-half times the nominal size
of the pipe.
bend/elbow, short radius
A 90-degree bend or elbow having a radius that is equal to the nominal size of the pipe.
branch
A connection for the same or a smaller pipe size.
butt-weld
A weld made when two beveled ends are butted together end-to-end and welded.
codes
A collection of regulations and guidelines for the design, construction, or operation of a facility or a
piping model. Code standards in CAESAR II include piping based on the region or the type of
piping, wind and seismic guidelines, and nozzle and flexibility standards.
coefficient of expansion
The numeric factor of expansion or contraction of a substance, due to a change in temperature.
coordinates
Intersecting north-south or east-west lines used to position foundations, equipment, supports,
buildings, models and so forth on a piping or structural model.
corrosion
A dissolving of a surface material made by a chemical reaction within a pipe.
corrosion allowance
The amount of surface material allowed to be eroded by the chemical reactions within a pipe,
while still permitting the pipe to be in service.
coupling
A fitting used to join two lengths of screwed pipe together. Couplings are also used as branch
connections on pipes or a nozzle connections on equipment.
diameter, inside (ID)
The circumference measured around the interior wall of a pipe.

Glossary
diameter, nominal
A name given to represent a particular size of pipe.
diameter, outside (OD)
The circumference measured around the outer wall of a pipe.
fitting
A generic term describing components that are used to make turns, branches, or reductions in a
run of pipe.
flange
A ring-shaped piece that is welded or screwed on to the end of a pipe, which permits the pipe to
attach to other piping components.
gasket
A material that is put between two meeting surfaces to prevent leaks.
gate valve
A valve designed for the on or off control of a substance flowing through a pipe.
hanger
A pipe support used on horizontal piping that suspends the piping using a stationary object from
above.
insulation
An exterior covering on pipe or equipment that maintains a constant temperature.
nozzle
A connecting point of the piping system to a vessel or equipment. Nozzles are used in locations
where fluids are introduced or removed from a vessel or a piece of equipment.
nozzle orientation
A drawing depicting the location of nozzles around the perimeter of vessels or a piping system. A
nozzle orientation plan shows angular measurements from 0 degrees.
o-lets
Any of several fittings used to make branch connections for piping. O-let connections can include
weldolets (for welds), sockolet (for socket-welds), sweepolet (for contoured connections with low
SIFs) and latrolets (for lateral connections).
pipe rack
A structural framework that consists of a series of vertical columns that connect with horizontal
components. Pipe racks are generally used to support pipes traveling in a process facility or plant.
pipe size, nominal
A descriptive name given to a pipe with reference to its size in diameter.

Glossary
pipe support
A structural component that carries the weight of a piping system configuration.
pump
A mechanical devise used to move fluids under pressure from one location to another.
reducer
A pipe fitting with one end larger than the other that reduces the diameter of a run of pipe.
reinforcing pad
A plate contoured to the shape of a the element it lines that is positioned around a nozzle to
provide additional strength in the connection area.
seamless
A manufactured pipe made without any welding connections.
slip-on flange
A flange with a low hub where a pipe can be inserted prior to welding.
spring hanger
A pipe hanger that uses a coil spring to absorb pipe movement.
tee
A three-way fitting used for branch connections on a run of pipe. Tee types include welded and
extruded (or drawn).
tee, extruded (drawn)
A tee fitting designed with a smoothly contoured intersection that does not include welds. This tee
design reduces fabrication stress, withstands greater external loading, and eliminates the need for
external reinforcement.
thermal expansion
An increase in pipe dimension due to the application of heat.
valve
A device used to control the flow of a fluid through a pipe.
weld neck flange
A flange with a tapered neck that you can butt-weld to another beveled-ended piping component.

Glossary

Index
AFT IMPULSE • 1151
% After the Current Element • 452
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Airy Wave Theory Implementation • 952
Orthogonalization • 737 AISC 1977 Database • 490
AISC 1989 Database • 497
1 al(0
1) • 229
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature
al(1
(A1) • 232
1) • 229
al(2
3 1) • 230
3D Modeler • 392 all • 456
All Cases Corroded • 103
4 all stiffness • 456
Allow Short Range Springs • 173, 275
4 View • 384, 655 Allow Sidesway • 886
Allow User's SIF at Bend • 103
A Allowable Load Multiplier • 902
About the CAESAR II Documentation • 24 Allowable Load Variation (%) • 172, 275
Absolute Method • 730 Allowable Stress • 210, 1074
Access Protected Data • 110 Allowable Stress (ISO 14692) • 229
Account Numbers Tab • 1081 Allowable Stress Increase Factor • 885
Accounting • 1077 Allowable Stress Indicator • 226
Accounts • 1082 Allowables • 881
Activate Accounting Tab • 1080 Allowables Input Export Option • 1129
Activate Bourdon Effects • 316 Alpha • 133
Activating the Accounting System • 1078 ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR • 523
Active Boundary Conditions • 780 Alpha [x] • 475
Actual Stress Settings • 87 Alpha Tolerance • 60
Add a new material to the database • 1070 Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path •
Add annotations for input features • 800 64
Add annotations for output features • 801 Alternate SUS/OCC • 564
Add custom annotations for elemental Always Use System Colors • 89
features • 788 Always Use System Fonts • 89
Add custom annotations for nodal features • Ambient Temperature • 318
788 American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model • 518
Add F/A in Stresses • 102 Analysis Menu • 39
Add input feature information • 787 Analysis Results • 761
Add output feature information • 787 Analysis Type • 829
Add PCF Files to Conversion List • 1219 Analysis Type
Add Pressure Thrust Force • 922 (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/Time
Add Torsion in SL Stress • 102 Hist) • 707
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca • 208 Analyze custom piping load cases on a
Adding custom annotations • 803 centrifugal pump • 897
Advanced Options • 77 Analyze load cases imported from a model
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) • 322 on a centrifugal pump • 898
Advanced Settings • 97 Analyze Specified Jobs • 1087
Advanced Tab • 735 ANC • 164
anchor • 1263

Index
Anchor CNode • 80 Attachment Cuts a Hole in Shell • 850

Anchor Movement • 686 Attachment on Sphere • 847
Anchors • 80, 353, 641 Attachment Type • 829, 850
angle • 467, 469 Australian 1990 Database • 503
Angle • 127, 465 Auto Node Number Increment • 75
Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic • Autosave Time Interval • 92
783 Aux Tools Toolbar • 376
Animation of Dynamic Results – Time Auxiliary Element Data • 1093
History • 784 Available Commands • 240, 626
Animation of Dynamic Results – Available Expansion Joint End-Types • 272
Modal/Spectrum • 783 Available Space • 272
Animation of Static Results -Displacements • Available Space (neg. for can) • 171
783 Axial (Nozzle) • 192
Annotation Text • 88 Axial Force • 870, 923
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Axial Index (Ia) • 139
Services) • 922 Axial Member Force • 889
API 560 Input Data Tab • 923 Axial Modulus of Elasticity • 70
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) • 896 Axial SIF (ia) • 139
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) • 907 Axial Strain
API 617 Input Tab • 908 Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) • 70
API 650 • 184 Axis • 359, 647
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) • 914 Axis Mode • 90
API-610 Dialog Box • 899
Append Reruns to Existing Data • 69 B
Appendix P - OPE Allowable Reduction •
226 B2 • 142
Applicable Piping Code • 1072 B31.1 • 1014
Applicable Wave Theory Determination • B31.1 (1967) • 1034
950 B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force
Applications Using Global and Local Response Spectrum • 748
Coordinates • 1060 B31.1 Reduced Z Fix • 99
Apply a template • 795, 808 B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour
Archive • 244 Tees • 99
Archive Dialog Box • 244 B31.3 • 1016
area • 476 B31.3 Chapter IX • 1017
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options • 574 B31.3 Implement Appendix P • 107
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options • 572 B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) •
ASCE Example • 281 107
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard • 280 B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI • 1018
ASCE7 • 743 B31.4 Chapter IX • 1020
ASME III Subsections NC and ND • 1024 B31.5 • 1021
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3 • 143 B31.8 • 1021
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B31.8 Chapter VIII • 1023
B16.5 Flanged Joints with High Strength B31.9 Notes • 1024
Bolting • 927 Back View • 382, 654
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Background Colors • 78
Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) • 964 Backplane Culling • 77
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Bandwidth Optimizer Options • 320
Simplified Analysis pre-2007 • 967 Base Hoop Stress On • 841
At End of Model • 452 Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé) •
At Node • 300 103
Attached Pipe ID • 873 Basic Element Data • 1090
Attached Pipe Thickness • 873 Basic Operation • 30

Index
Basic Operation - Build load cases • 34 Branch Pipe Outside Diameter • 814
Basic Operation - Check for errors in the Branch Pipe Wall Thickness • 814
model • 33 Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options • 579
Basic Operation - Generate piping input • 31 Break • 257
Basic Operation - Review static output • 35 Browse • 1167
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box • 522 BS 7159 • 1041
Batch Run • 244 BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening • 72
Batch Stream Processing • 1086 BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options • 576
Beams • 479 BS806 • 1030
Before Current Element • 452 Build Version • 48
Bellows Application Notes • 272 Building Models Quickly • 395
Bellows Stiffness Properties • 131 Building Static Load Cases • 543
Bend • 126 Buried Pipe Example • 530
Bend Angle (Degrees) • 819 Buried Pipe Modeler Window • 511
Bend Axial Shape • 62 butt-weld • 1263
Bend Cost Factor • 301 by • 453, 456, 471
Bend KHK2 Evaluation Report • 618
Bend Length Attachment Percent • 74 C
Bend Radius • 819
Bend Stress Intensification Factors • 816 C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL • 523
Bend Tab • 817 CADPIPE • 1189
bend/elbow, long radius • 1263 CADPIPE Example Transfer • 1191
bend/elbow, short radius • 1263 CADPIPE LOG File Discussion • 1196
Bending Coefficient • 885 CADWorx Options • 78
Bending Moment • 870 CAESAR II Basic Model • 517
Bends • 73 CAESAR II Configuration • 345
Bends Input Export Option • 1120 CAESAR II Data Matrix • 1113
Block Operations Toolbar • 376 CAESAR II Error Processing • 1088
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature • CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) • 1230
869 CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature • 868 Box • 1116
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier • 869 CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box
Bolt Area (Ab) • 201 • 1116
Bolt Circle Diameter • 858 CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions •
Bolt Diameter • 859 1056
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress • 859 CAESAR II Neutral File • 1089
Bolt Material • 868 CAESAR II Node Number • 904
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes • 859 CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data • 1226
Bolts and Gasket Tab • 858 CAESAR II Output File • 904
Bottom • 78 CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog
Bottom View • 383, 654 Box • 1141
Boundary Conditions • 158 CAESAR II Structural Input • 423
Bounding Box from Selection • 413 CAESAR II Tools Toolbar • 373
Bounding Volume - Depth • 413 CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) •
Bounding Volume - Height • 413 1230
Bounding Volume - Width • 413 CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) •
boxH • 476 1231
boxW • 476 CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) •
Braces • 482 1232
branch • 1263 CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) •
Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts • 317 1232
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection • CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) •
815 1233

Index
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) • Calculation of Fatigue Stresses • 983

1234 CANADIAN Z662 • 1027
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91) • Centerline Direction Cosine X & Centerline
1234 Direction Cosine Z • 902
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) • CFE Diseno por Sismo • 746
1236 CFE Sismo Example • 282
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92) • CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard • 282
1236 Change Model Units • 1086
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92) • Change Password • 110
1237 Change Sequence • 350
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93) • Changing the Model Display • 402
1238 Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) • Transfer • 1200
1239 Chemical Resistance (A2) • 232
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and China GB 50009 Wind Code Options • 580
Enhancements (7/94) • 1240 Circumferential Moment (MC) • 853
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Circumferential Moment MC • 839
Enhancements (4/95) • 1242 Circumferential Shear (VC) • 852
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) • Circumferential Shear VC • 838
1243 Clad Thk • 238
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Cladding Density • 239, 365, 653
Enhancements (3/97) • 1244 Cladding Thickness • 365, 652
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Class 1 Branch Flexibilities • 937
Enhancements (1/98) • 1246 Class 1 Branch Flexibility • 98
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Classic Piping Input Dialog Box • 112
Enhancements (1/99) • 1246 Close Loop • 250
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History
Enhancements (2/00) • 1247 Time Step (ms) • 721
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and CNode • 159, 168, 704
Enhancements (3/01) • 1247 Code • 211
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Code Compliance Considerations • 1009
Enhancements (5/02) • 1248 Code Compliance Report • 616
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8) • 143
Enhancements (11/03) • 1249 codes • 1263
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and Code-Specific Notes • 1014
Enhancements (11/05) • 1250 Code-Specific Settings • 99
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and CODETI • 1037
Enhancements ( 9/07) • 1250 coefficient of expansion • 1263
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Coefficient of Friction (Mu) • 60
Enhancements (4/09) • 1251 Cold Elastic Modulus • 1073
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Cold Spring • 929
Enhancements (11/10) • 1252 Color - Ambient • 78
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Color - Face • 78
Enhancements (5/12) • 1253 Color - Line • 78
CAESAR II Version 6.10 Changes and Color - Specular • 79
Enhancements (10/13) • 1253 Color - Transmission • 79
CAESAR II Version 7.00 Changes and Columns • 484
Enhancements (10/14) • 1256 Combination Method • 566
CAESAR II Version 8.00 Changes and Combine PCF Files • 343, 1220
Enhancements (10/15) • 1257 Comma Separated Value Format • 387
CAESAR II Version 9.00 Changes and Commands Menu • 452
Enhancements (10/16) • 1259 Commands tab (Customize Dialog Box) •
Calculate Actual Cold Loads • 275 380

Index
Comment • 487 corrosion • 1263

Comparison Method • 203 Corrosion • 120, 363, 651
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC) Corrosion Allowance • 830, 833, 848, 1263
• 291 Corrosion Allowance (WRC 297 Nozzle) •
Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE) 851
• 280 Cos X & Y • 894
Component Colors • 80 coupling • 1263
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC) • Covers • 273
291 CRC Check • 47
Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE) • Create a drawing using a new style • 794
280 Create a drawing using an existing style •
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC) • 793
291 Create a drawing using the default style •
Component Information • 125 792, 798
Component List • 1152, 1154, 1160, 1165 Create a model using the Structural Steel
Composition/Type • 229, 1072 Wizard • 424
Compress CAESAR II Files • 95 Create a new job • 30
Computational Control • 57 Create a new job file • 424
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368 (No Create a New Units File • 1084
Ext Loads) • 841 Create a template • 806
Computed Mass Flow Rate • 759 Create and save an annotation template •
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) • 756 795
Conclusion • 1004 Create Loop on Element • 300
Condense Elbows • 342, 1219 Create Spring Load Cases • 936
Condense Rigids • 342, 1219 Create/Review Units • 1083
Condense Tees • 342, 1219 Creating the .FAT Files • 982
Condenses Flanges/Valves • 1169 Creep Loading • 961
Configuration Editor • 55 CROTCH R • 140
Configure annotation preferences • 789 Culling Maximum Extent • 77
Configure isometric drawing split points • Cumulative Usage • 775
790 Cumulative Usage Report • 617
Configuring 3D Graphics • 400 Current Data • 958
Configuring annotation preferences • 804 Current Profile Type • 590
Connect Geometry Through CNodes • 75 Current Table Depth • 593
Constant Effort Support • 936 Current Table Velocity • 593
Constant Effort Support Load • 179 Custom • 190
Continue • 248 Custom Reports Toolbar • 630
Control Information • 1111 Customize Dialog Box • 380
Control Parameters Tab • 705 Cut • 248
Controlling Results • 558 Cutting Planes Toolbar • 370
Controlling the Data Export • 1225 Cycle Stress Table • 228
Convention System • 834 Cyclic Service (A3) • 233
Convergence Tolerances • 57
Conversion Type • 1112 D
Convert selected files into CAESAR II format
• 1219 Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) • 722
coordinates • 1263 Damping Factor (KHK) • 286
Coordinates • 881 Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases
Copy • 248 • 1222
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Data Export Wizard • 1114
Box • 590 Data Modification and Details • 1170
Copy Wave Vector • 590 Data Tab • 875
Copy Wind Vector • 589 Database Definitions • 64

Index
Database Status (Consistency Check) Directional Combination Method

Dialog Box • 1076 (SRSS/ABS) • 733
Databases • 64 Directive Builder • 738
Date Range • 1082 Disable • 93
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance • 58, Disable ANSI B16.5 Check • 870
736 Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble • 84
Default • 487 Disable Leakage Calculations • 870
Default Operator • 83 Disable Stress Calculations • 870
Default Piping Code • 104 Disable Undo/Redo Ability • 93
Default Projection Mode • 83 Discharge Nozzle Tab • 911
Default Render Mode • 83 Displaced Shape • 87
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness • 60 Displacement • 675
Default Spring Hanger Table • 65 Displacement File Formats • 386
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness • 60 Displacement Reports Output Report Option
Default View • 83 • 1141
Define a cross-section • 425 Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes • 94
Define Jobs to Run • 1087 Displacements • 196, 354, 642, 769
Defining a Model • 1054 Displacements (Component Color) • 80
Definition • 562 Displacements and Rotations • 881
Delete • 347 Displacements Input Export Option • 1126
Delete a material from the database • 1071 Displacements Report • 604
Delete Custom Report Template • 633 Displacements Tab • 599
Delete Element • 249 Displacements Toolbar • 627
Deltas • 115 Display Options Toolbar • 369
dens • 474 Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform
Densities • 236 Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads • 406
Density • 593 Distance • 251
Description • 829, 845, 901 Distance to Opposite Stiffener • 183, 189
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Distance to Stiffener or Head • 183, 189
Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle Distance to Tank Base • 186
Analysis pre-2007 • 966 DLF/Spectrum Generator • 740
Design (Button) • 302 Do/r3 • 149
Design Data • 169 Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella Fitting
Design Factor • 227 (Y/N) • 753
Design Factor (S) • 876 Double Angle Spacing • 888
Design Pressure • 847, 870, 875, 921 Double Sum Method • 729
Design Temperature • 816, 829, 847, 868 dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) • 1044 MULTIPLE OF D • 524
DFac • 223 dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN,
Diagnostics Menu • 46 MULTIPLE OF D • 524
Diameter • 119, 830, 832, 849 dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX
Diameter 2 • 133 MULTIPLE OF D • 524
Diameter Basis • 830, 832 dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD,
Diameter Limit • 343, 1220 MULTIPLE of H • 524
diameter, inside (ID) • 1263 Drag Coefficient, Cd • 208
diameter, nominal • 1264 Draw Cube • 302
diameter, outside (OD) • 1264 DSN Setup • 1222
Diameters • 362, 650 dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL • 525
Dim S3D/SPR Model • 414 Duplicate • 346
Dir. • 684 Duplicate Element • 249
Direction • 672, 675, 688, 702, 704 DX • 115, 895
Direction Cosines • 117, 591 dx, dy, dz • 455, 465
DY • 116, 895

Index
DY (Nozzle Orientation) • 918 EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane

Dynamic Analysis • 657 SIF • 99
Dynamic Analysis Workflow • 664 Enable Advanced Element Sort • 1169
Dynamic Example Input Text • 93 Enable Autosave • 93
Dynamic Input • 779 Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems • 657 Databases • 69
Dynamic Output Animation Window • 781 Ending Frequency • 669
Dynamic Output Processing • 764 Enter a Report Title • 767
Dynamic Output Window • 764 Enter Pulse Data • 749
DZ • 116, 895 Enter the Name of the Input File to Convert •
1086
E Enter the Name of the Output File (Optional)
• 1086
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis • Enter the Name of the Units File to Use •
667 1086
EDim • 464 Enter/Edit Spectrum Data • 739
Edit a material in the database • 1071 Environment Menu • 304
Edit Custom Report Template • 633 Equipment Centerline • 909
Edit Dynamic Load Cases • 257 Equipment Component and Compliance •
Edit Menu • 248 809
Edit Mode Toolbar • 373 Equipment Input Export Options • 1140
Edit Static Load Cases • 256 Equipment Name • 901
Edit Tools Toolbar • 378 Equipment Report Tab • 896
Editing Multiple Load Cases • 543 Equipment Reports Output Report Option •
Editing Wave Case • 590 1149
Editing Wind Case • 571 Equipment Type • 901
Eff • 220 Error Check • 244
Eff, Cf, z • 1073 Error Checking • 536
Effective Diameter • 881 Error Code Statements • 1196
Effective Gasket Modulus • 860 Error Review • 48
Effective ID • 132, 933 Errors/Warnings Tab • 896
EFill • 459 ESL Menu • 48
EGen • 461 Estimated Number of Significant Figures in
Eh / Ea • 1074 Eigenvalues • 735
Eh/Ea • 231 Evaluating Vessel Stresses • 963
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Example • 455, 458, 460, 463, 465
Using WRC 107 • 965 Example 1 • 1156
Elastic Module Reference # • 843 Example 2 • 1158
Elastic Modulus • 569, 820, 1075 Example Neutral File from PDS • 1170
Elbow Stiffening Elastic Modulus • 570 Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis
Elbow Stiffening Pressure • 569 • 756
Elem • 458 Example Output - Liquid Relief Load
Element Name • 240 Synthesis • 759
Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC) • Example Problem
291 Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger
Element Viewer Dialog Box • 656 Design • 175
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Examples • 468, 469, 471, 472, 479, 481,
Component • 300 484, 486, 680, 689, 692, 698
Elements Input Export Option • 1116 Excitation Frequencies Tab • 668
Elevation • 947 Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress •
EN Wind Code Options • 580 72
EN-13480 • 1045 Existing File to Review • 1083
Existing File to Start From • 1085

Index
Exit • 248 Ferritic Material • 816

Exp. Coeff. • 1074 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) • 235
Expansion Joint • 265 Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier • 917
Expansion Joint Design Notes • 268 File Menu • 37, 240
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint File Name • 1167
Database • 268 File Name to Be Created • 1113
Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes • Filename • 1152, 1154, 1160, 1165
268 Fill Type • 830
Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis • FILLET • 141
268 Filter Options Tab • 599
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results • Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less
269 Than • 1168
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length • Filter Reports • 596
268 Filters Dialog Box • 598
Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane • Find • 249
268 Finite Length Expansion Joints • 131
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes • 269 First Element • 256
Expansion Joint Rating • 877 First Mode Period (CFE) • 282
Expansion Joint Styles • 270 fitting • 1264
Expansion Joints • 66, 80, 131, 931 Fitting Thickness • 128
Expansion Joints & Rigids • 362, 650 Fix • 455
Expansion Joints Input Export Option • 1122 Fixed Format • 386
Export Custom Report • 634 Fixed Size Restraint Size • 90
Export Output Data Also • 1116 flange • 1264
Exporting Displacements to a File • 389 Flange • 80
External Interfaces • 1089 Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature •
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab • 912 868
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab • 913 Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature •
Extrusion Crotch Radius • 815 868
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier • 869
F Flange Analysis Temperature • 571
Flange Check • 357, 645
F - COATING FACTOR • 526 Flange Checks • 198
F1, F2, ... F9 • 216 Flange Class • 855, 872
Fac • 223, 1073 Flange Class/Grade • 200
Facing Column • 866 Flange Dimension Lookup • 872
Facing Sketch • 865 Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID • 857
Factor • 684, 698 Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt • 857
Factor for Allowables • 909 Flange Grade • 855
Factor for Membrane (Attachment Edge) • Flange Inside Diameter (B) • 856
846 Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations •
Factor for Membrane (Pad Edge) • 846 1235
Factor for Membrane + Bending • 845, 846 Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations • 853
Factor of Safety (FS) • 876 Flange Material • 867
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems • 973 Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient •
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II • 972 868
Fatigue Basics • 972 Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design • 868
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis • Flange NC-3658.3 Tab • 601
981 Flange Outside Diameter (A) • 855
Fatigue Class • 157 Flange Peq Tab • 601
Fatigue Curves • 228 Flange Rating • 870
FDBR • 1040 Flange Reports • 608
FEA Tools Menu • 50 Flange Tab • 855

Index
Flange Thickness (t) • 857 FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x

Flange Type • 855 1,000,000) • 319
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9 • 201 FRP Density • 70
Flanges Input Export Option • 1138 FRP Laminate Type • 70, 319
Flaw Length • 875 FRP Pipe Properties • 69
Flexible Joint Length • 881 FRP Property Data File • 71
Flexible Nozzles Input Export Options • 1132 FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod Axial •
FlowMaster • 1164 319
Fluid Bulk Modulus • 755 Ftg Ro • 140
Fluid Density • 121, 363, 651 Full Length in Circumferential Dir (2*Cy) •
Fluid Density (Specific Gravity) • 755 850
Fluid Height • 187 Full Length in Circumferential Direction
Fluid SG • 187 (2*Cyp) • 849
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements • 926 Full Length in Circumferential Direction
Force • 672, 688, 749 (C11P) • 831
Force Black and White Printing • 84 Full Length in Circumferential Direction, C11
Force Consistent Bend Materials • 1168 • 830
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence Full Length in Circumferential Direction, C22
(Y/N) • 737 • 830
Force Set # • 686, 688 Full Length in Longitudinal Dir (2*Cx) • 850
Force Sets Tab • 686 Full Length in Longitudinal Direction (2*Cxp)
Forces • 358, 646 • 849
Forces - Moments • 204 Full Length of Pad in Longitudinal Direction
Forces Moments Input Export Option • 1127 (C22P) • 831
Forces Tab • 600 Full Load • 412
Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color) • 81 FX • 905
Forces/Moments 2 (Component Color) • 81 fx, fy, fz • 471
Forces/Stresses • 774 FY • 906
Form Factor Qa • 886 FZ • 906
Free Code • 177
Free End Connections - FREE • 477 G
Free Restraint at Node • 177
Free Surface Elevation • 592 g • 474
Frequency Array Spaces • 738 GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY • 525
Frequency Cut-Off • 1152, 1155, 1161, 1166 GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) • 720 DENSITY • 525
Frequently Asked Questions • 1066 Gap • 166
FRICT. ANGLE • 527 Gas Constant (R) • 752
Friction Angle Variation • 58 gasket • 1264
FRICTION COEFFICIENT • 527 Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle • 200
Friction Multiplier • 570 Gasket Inner Diameter • 860
Friction Normal Force Variation • 58 Gasket Outer Diameter • 860
Friction Slide Multiplier • 58 Gasket Seating Stress • 862
Friction Stiffness • 59 gate valve • 1264
from • 453, 454, 456, 458, 459, 461, 464, General Comments on Configuration
467, 469, 470, 472, 478 Settings' Effect on Piping Code
From • 114 Calculations • 1009
From Node • 512 General Computed Results • 618
From, To, Both • 199 General Notes • 1195
From/To End Mesh • 513 General Settings • 102
Front View • 382, 654 Generate Spectrum • 750
FRP Alpha (xe-06) • 70 Generate Stress Isometrics • 786
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II • 999 genInc • 462

Index
genIncTo • 462 Harmonic Displacements Tab • 673

genLast • 462 Harmonic Forces Tab • 670
Geometry • 880 Header Pipe Outside Diameter • 814
Geometry Directives • 73 Header Pipe Wall Thickness • 814
German 1991 Database • 504 HEI Nozzle • 921
Getting Started • 28 HEI Standard • 919
Gimbal • 271 Height at Support Point (KHK) • 289
GLoads • 473 Height of Supporting Structure (KHK) • 289
Global • 250 Help Menu • 51
Global Element Forces • 610 Help Screens and Units • 113
Global Element Forces Extended • 611 Hide Overlapping Text • 90
Global Force FX • 895, 918 Highlighting Graphics • 403
Global Force FY • 896, 918 Hinged • 271
Global Force FZ • 896, 918 hl(1
Global Force Reports Output Report Option 1) • 229
• 1144 hl(2
Global Forces • 772 1) • 230
Global Input • 884 Home Tab • 845
Global Load and Direction Conventions • Home/Nozzle Tab • 829
835 Horizontal Moment • 924
Global Menu • 345 Horizontal Response Magnification Factor
Global Moment MX • 896, 918 (KHK) • 286
Global Moment MY • 896, 918 Horizontal Shear Force • 923
Global Moment MZ • 896, 918 Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance • 75
Gloss Value • 79 How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface •
GPTC/Z380 • 1046 1151
Graphic Settings • 76 How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET
Graphical Output • 635 Interface • 1153
Grouping Method • 728 How to Use The Flowmaster Interface • 1164
Grow Toolbar • 628 How to Use the LIQT Interface • 1156
GUID • 179 How to Use the PCF Interface • 1215
GUID (Unique Component Identifier) • 168 How to Use the Pipeplus Interface • 1161
Guide • 165 HPGSL • 1046
Hub Length • 858
H Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading
• 948
H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF PIPE • 527
Hand Lay • 232
hanger • 1264 I
Hanger CNode • 81 IBC • 746
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness • 60 IBC/UBC Wind Code Options • 581
Hanger Design Control Data • 274 ID Manifold Piping • 754
Hanger Hardware Weight • 174 ID of Relief Valve Orifice • 751
Hanger Reports Output Report Option • ID of Relief Valve Piping • 752
1148 ID of Vent Stack Piping • 752
Hanger Sizing Algorithm • 934 ID Relief Exit Piping • 754
Hanger Stiffness • 569 ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk Opening •
Hanger Table • 169, 277 754
Hanger Table with Text • 619 ID Supply Header • 754
Hangers • 81, 168, 356, 644 Idle Processing Count • 84
Hangers Input Export Option • 1136 IGE/TD/12 • 1044
Harmonic • 659, 762 IGE\TD\12 Reference • 153
Harmonic Analysis • 667, 707 IGE\TD\12 Requirements • 147

Index
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor • 100 Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter • 917

Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness • 62 Inlet Nozzle Tab • 917
Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for In-Line Flange Evaluation • 927
Piping Systems • 993 In-Plane • 889
Import a piping model from a PCF using In-Plane Bending • 193
APCF • 339 In-Plane Bending Moment • 889
Import Custom Report • 634 In-Plane Index (Ii) • 138
Import Load Cases • 562 In-Plane SIF (ii) • 138
Import Loads from Job • 836 Input
Import Model Toolbar • 379 Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in
Import PCF • 1201 CAESAR II • 957
Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box • Input Data Tab • 916
386 Input Echo • 620, 781
Import/Export Displacements from File • 385 Input Items • 74, 92
Importance Class (KHK) • 285 Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Importance Factor • 743, 744 Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)* •
Importance Factor I (ASCE) • 280 135
Importance Factor IE (NBC) • 291 Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Importing Displacements from a File • 389 Calculations For ISO 14692 • 143
Impulse • 661 Input Listing Options Dialog Box • 247
in G's, in F/L • 207 Input Menu • 39
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky Input Spreadsheet Defaults • 59
And Kz • 887 Input Tools Toolbar • 374
inc • 454, 460, 461, 464, 468, 469, 472, 478 insecid • 460
Include Additional Bend Nodes • 1168 inSecId • 462
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress • Insert Element • 249
108 Insert Menu • 452
Include Insulation in Hydrotest • 62 Insert Restraints • 259
Include Missing Mass Components • 731 Insul Thk • 238
Include Piping Input Files • 321 Insul/Cladding Unit Weight • 239
Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2 • Insul/Cladding Unit Wt • 365, 653
841 insulation • 1264
Include Pressure Thrust • 834, 852 Insulation Density • 238, 364, 652
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Insulation Thickness • 364, 652
Components (Y/N) • 730 Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements • 926
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Intergraph CADWorx Plant • 1166
Travel Cases • 62 Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications •
Included Mass Data • 778 1183
Including Structural Input Files • 321 Intergraph Data After Element Sort • 1178
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross
Design Algorithm • 936 Modifications • 1179
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction • 968 Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications •
incmatId • 460, 462, 465 1180
Incore Numerical Check • 62 Intergraph PDS • 1166
Increase Factor • 747 Intergraph Smart 3D PCF • 1166
Increase Factor (CFE) • 282 Internal Pressure • 833
Increment • 251, 342, 669, 672, 676, 686, Intersection Crotch Radius • 815
1168 Intersection Crotch Thickness • 815
Increments • 703 Intersection Stress Intensification Factors •
incSecId • 465 811
incTo • 460, 462, 465, 468, 469, 472, 478 Intersection Type • 813
Initialize Global Coordinates • 1169 Introduction • 23
Inlet Nozzle Node Number • 916 Invert • 349

Index
IS 875 Wind Code Options • 583 List • 253

ISO-14692 • 1046 List Operations Toolbar • 374
Item Number • 829, 845 List Options • 489
Load • 470
J Load an S3D/SPR Model • 410
Load Case • 698
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance • 735 Load Case (for Design) • 299
JPI • 1047 Load Case Name • 563, 638
Load Case Report • 619
K Load Case Sets Tab • 906
K2 • 166 Load Case Template • 66
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method • 927 Load Cases Tab • 904
Keyboard tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 381 Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load
K-Factor • 129 Case Editor Dialog Box) • 559
KHK Example • 289 Load Cases with Hanger Design • 550
KHK Static Seismic Wizard • 283 Load Cases with Pitch and Roll • 551
Kinematic Viscosity • 593 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements •
KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT 552
REST • 528 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements
Korean 1990 Database • 507 and Settlement • 552
Ksd • 222 Load Cycles • 565, 670
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) • 722
Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box • 412
L Loading Conditions • 204
L1/Lb • 152 Loads • 836
Label • 902 Loads Defined in Input • 562
Laminate Type • 1074 Loads Tab • 833, 851, 869
Language Menu • 44 Local Coordinates • 1048
Large End Hub Thickness • 858 Local Element Forces • 612
last • 455, 460, 462, 465, 468, 469, 472, 478 Local Force Report Output Report Option •
Last Element • 256 1145
Leak Pressure Ratio • 860 Local Forces • 771
Left-side View • 383, 654 Local Member Data Tab • 887
Legacy Settings • 107 Location from Pump Center, DX • 903
Legend Text • 88 Location from Pump Center, DY • 903
Legends Toolbar • 371 Location from Pump Center, DZ • 904
Length • 117, 361, 649 Longitudinal Moment (ML) • 853
Length for Nodal Increment • 343, 1220 Longitudinal Moment ML • 840
Length of Manifold Piping • 755 Longitudinal Shear (VL) • 852
Length of Relief Exit Piping • 755 Longitudinal Shear VL • 837
Length of the Vent Stack • 752 Long-Period Transition Period TL • 281, 745
Liberal Stress Allowable • 318 Loop Closure Tolerance • 75
Lift Coefficient, Cl • 208 Loop Optimization Wizard Overview • 299
LIM • 165 Loop Type • 300
Limiting the Display • 398 Lumped Masses Tab • 702
Line Number • 239 lxx • 476
Line Numbers • 302 lyy • 476
Line Numbers Dialog Box • 636
Line Numbers Tab • 601
Line Temperature • 751
M
Liners • 273 Macro-Level Analysis • 992
Link • 905 Main Window • 36
LIQT • 1155 Major Direction • 302

Index
Major Direction Available Space • 302 Menus tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 382
Manipulating the Toolbar • 405 Mexico Wind Code Options • 585
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1) • 745 Micro-Level Analysis • 985
Mapped MCESRA at Short Periods (Ss) • -Mill Tol % • 120
744 -Mill Tolerance (%) • 364
Marine Growth • 208 Mini-Level Analysis • 990
Marine Growth Density • 208 Minimum Allowable Bend Angle • 74
Marker Color • 82 Minimum Anchor Node • 1168
Marker Options • 82 Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend • 74
Marker Size • 82 Minimum Desired Unity Check • 886
Markups Toolbar • 369 Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) • 1072
Mass • 702 Minimum Tensile Strength • 844
Mass Model • 779 Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) • 60
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) • Minimum Yield Strength • 844
734 Mini-windows • 385
Mass Participation Factors • 776 Minor Direction • 302
Material • 209, 363, 651 Minor Direction Available Space • 302
Material Allowable Stress • 921 Miscellaneous • 61, 1235
Material Data Tab • 867 Miscellaneous Data • 621
Material Database • 1068 Miscellaneous Data Group #1 • 1102
Material Density • 1072 Miscellaneous Options • 82, 92
Material Elastic Properties • 234 Miscellaneous Processors • 1068
Material Factor • 844 Missing Mass Combination Method
Material Name • 842, 1071 (SRSS/ABS) • 733
Material Number • 345, 1071, 1222 Missing Mass ZPA • 62
Material Properties • 70, 235 Miter Points • 127
Material Selection Dialog Box • 1076 Modal • 761
Material Specified Minimum Yield • 875 Modal Analysis • 666
Material Yield Strength • 875, 885, 888, 921 Modal Combination Method
Materials • 209, 273 (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) • 727
matId • 459, 460, 462, 465, 473, 474 mode • 480, 483, 485
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE) • 280 Model an underground piping system • 529
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated • 718 Model Menu • 257
Max. Stress • 300 Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis •
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle • 74 663
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit • 173, 276 Model Orientation • 413
Maximum Anchor Node • 1168 Model Rotation • 1169, 1220
Maximum Desired Unity Check • 886 Model TEES as 3 Elements • 1169
Maximum Longitudinal Moment • 922 Modeling Friction Effects • 940
Maximum Points on Each DLF Curve • 1152, Modes Mass Normalized • 777
1155, 1161, 1166 Modes Unity Normalized • 777
Maximum Radial Force • 921 Monetary Label • 1081
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads • Movement Capability • 272
971 Moving Elements • 409
Maximum Table Frequency • 748 Mu • 167
Maximum Thickness • 844 Multiple Load Case Design Option • 174
Measurement Increment • 876 Multiple Load Case Design Options • 279
Measurements Tab • 876 MX • 906
Meets 3673.2b Notes 10, 11 • 816 mx、my、mz • 471
Member End Node • 887 MY • 906
Member Start Node • 887 MZ • 906
Member Type • 887
Memory Allocated (Mb) • 96

Index
N Nominal Diameter • 872, 903, 909, 923

Nonlinear Code Compliance • 941
name • 475
North Direction • 90
Name • 114, 678, 905
Northeast ISO View • 384, 655
Natural Frequencies • 777
Northwest ISO View • 384, 655
Natural Period (KHK) • 286
Norwegian (TBK 5-6) • 1038
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog
Notes on Occasional Load Cases • 944
Box using the Function Keys • 113
nozzle • 1264
Navigation Tools Toolbar • 374
Nozzle Check • 357, 645
NAVY 505 • 1029
Nozzle Check Report • 608
NBC Example • 291
Nozzle Diameter • 850, 894
NBC Static Seismic Wizard • 291
Nozzle Diameter Basis • 850
NBC Wind Code Options • 588
Nozzle Flex • 179
NEMA Input Data Tab • 894
Nozzle Flexibility • 357, 645
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) • 890
Nozzle Input Tab • 902
NEMA Turbine Example • 891
Nozzle Inside Projection • 847
Neutral File Generator • 1112
Nozzle Limit Color 1 • 81
Neutral File Insulation Units • 1169
Nozzle Limit Color 2 • 81
Neutral File Name to Be Converted • 1113
Nozzle Lmt Check • 201
Neutral File Weight Units • 1169
Nozzle Material • 830, 851
New • 37, 240
Nozzle Node • 180, 184, 187, 190, 829
New Custom Report Template • 632
Nozzle Number • 894
New Job Ambient Temperature • 61
nozzle orientation • 1264
New Job Bourdon Pressure • 61
Nozzle Outer Diameter • 182, 186, 188, 195
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable
Nozzle Outside Diameter • 921
• 104
Nozzle SCF Option • 831
New Job Name Specification Dialog Box •
Nozzle Type • 894, 923
241
Nozzle Wall Thickness • 183, 186, 195
New Job Z-Axis Vertical • 75
Nozzle/Attachment Tab • 849
New Password • 110
Nozzles • 81
New Units File Name • 1085
Nubbin Width or Ring • 864
Next Element • 255
Number • 905
NFill • 453
Number of Bolts • 859
NGen • 454
Number of Convolutions • 881
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs • 100
Number of Cuts • 820
No. Hangers at Location • 173
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load
BS7159 & UKOOA) • 819
Cases • 275
Number of Points • 748
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
computed) • 737
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - O
Not Used) • 736 OCC Load Factor • 570
Nodal Coordinate Data • 1111 Occasional Load Factor • 100
Node • 127, 136, 148, 159, 168, 198, 202, Occasional Pressure • 833
205, 452, 688, 704 Ocean Currents • 953
Node Name • 639 Ocean Wave Particulars • 949
node number • 453 ODBC Compliant Database Name • 69
Node Number • 909, 923 ODBC Settings • 69
Node Number for • 880, 881 Off • 209
Node Numbers • 113, 360, 648 Offset from Left Tangent Line • 847
Node Text • 88 Offsets • 116
nodeInc • 455 Offsets Input Export Option • 1129
Nodes • 347 o-lets • 1264

Index
On Element • 300 P
On Screen • 631
Pad Material • 850
Online Documentation • 52
Pad SCF Option • 831
Open • 38, 241
Pad Thickness • 815
Open a Job • 766
Pad Thk • 140
Open an existing CAESAR II file • 797
Parameters for Degrees of Freedom • 478,
Open CADWorx Model • 242
480, 483, 485
Open Dialog Box • 242
Partial Load • 412
Opening Time • 748
Paste • 248
Operating Conditions • 121
PCF Interface Custom Attributes • 326, 1201
Operating Load (Total at Loc.) • 174
PCF Material Mapping • 328, 1203
Optimal Frame Rate • 84
PCF Restraint Mapping • 328, 1204
Optimization Type • 299
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping •
Optimization Wizard • 292
338, 1213
Options Menu • 352, 631
PCF Unit Mapping • 327, 1202
Options Tab • 840
PD 5500 • 187
Options tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 380
PD5500 Annex G • 845
Order • 905
Percent Stress Settings • 87
Ordinate • 740
Performing Block Operations • 396
Ordinate Interpol • 680
Performing Single-Element Operations • 396
Ordinate Type • 679
Phase • 672, 675
Organization Tools Toolbar • 379
Phase Angle • 592
Orient • 468
Pipe Density • 121, 363, 651
Orientation • 903
Pipe Nominal Diameter • 875
Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow
Pipe Outside Diameter • 819
Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow
pipe rack • 1264
Conditions • 760
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness • 345, 1222
Other Global Coordinate Systems • 1050
pipe size, nominal • 1264
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing • 937
Pipe Sizes • 118
Outlet Nozzle Node Number • 917
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems •
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter • 917
1052
Outlet Nozzle Tab • 918
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping • 985
Out-of-Plane • 889
pipe support • 1265
Out-of-Plane Bending • 194
Pipe Wall Thickness • 875
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment • 889
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations
Out-Plane Index (Io) • 138
(B31G) • 873
Out-Plane SIF (io) • 138
PIPENET • 1153
Output Colors • 86
Pipeplus • 1161
Output Items • 94
Pipes • 81
Output Menu • 42
Piping Code ID • 813, 818
Output Reports by Load Case • 94
Piping Codes • 363, 651
Output Status • 565
Piping Element Data • 960
Output Tab • 907
Piping Input Reference • 111
Output Table of Contents • 94
Piping Size Specification • 66
Output Text • 89
Plate • 272
Output Type • 565
Plot Options Menu • 639
Output Viewer Wizard • 622
Plot Tools Toolbar • 370
Outside Diameter • 821
Plot View Menu • 653
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION
pois • 474
MULTIPLIER • 528
Poisson's Ratio • 1073

Index
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) – Radial Load (P) • 852

Setting the Actual Installed (Cold) Load • Radial Load P • 837
935 Radius • 126
Practical Applications • 999 Random • 659
Predefined Hanger Data • 178 Range • 352, 640, 740
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 – Setting Hanger Range Interpol • 679
Deflection through the Operating Case • Range Type • 679
935 Rate per CPU second • 1081
Pressure (abs) • 751 Rate per ELEMENT • 1081
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & Rate per JOB/ANALYSIS • 1081
UKOOA) • 820 Rate per LOAD CASE • 1081
Pressure Index (Ip) • 140 Rate per NODE • 1081
Pressure Rating • 273 Ratio of Gas Specific Heats (k) • 752
Pressure SIF (ip) • 139 Ratio Shear Modulus
Pressure Stiffening • 820 Elastic Modulus • 71
Pressure Variation in EXP Case • 100 RCC-M Subsection C and D • 1036
Pressures • 124, 365, 653 Read from File • 200, 204, 228
Previous Element • 256 Recent Piping Files • 247
Pricing Factors Tab • 1080 Recent Structural Files • 247
Print <filename> • 246 Recommend Load Cases • 561
Print Alphas and Pipe Properties • 316 Recommended Load Cases • 544
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints Recommended Load Cases Dialog Box •
• 316 561
Print or Save Reports to File Notes • 602 Recommended Load Cases for Hanger
Print Preview • 245 Selection • 549
Print Setup • 244 Redo • 256
Print Setup Dialog Box • 245 Reduced Intersection • 101
Print the Membrane Stress • 845 reducer • 1265
Prompted Autosave • 94 Reducer • 132
Propagate Properties • 121, 236, 239 Reducers Input Export Option • 1137
Providing Wave Data • 555 Ref Vector X, Y, Z • 203
Providing Wind Data • 554 Reference CAD Models Toolbar • 378
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. References • 961, 1004
Method (SRSS/ABS) • 733 Refract Density • 237
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading • 951 Refract Thk • 237
pump • 1265 Refractory Density • 364, 652
Pump Input Tab • 901 Refractory Thickness • 364, 652
Pvar • 225 Re-Import • 413
Reinforcing • 186
Q reinforcing pad • 1265
Reinforcing Pad • 831, 849
QA Test • 48 Relief Load Synthesis • 750
Qs • 230 Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater
Quick Access Toolbar • 53 Than 15 psig • 751
Quick XML Export • 1116 Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids • 754
Relief Load Synthesis Results • 785
R Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow
r • 231 Spectra Analysis • 667
R1 • 134 Relief Valve or Rupture Disk • 754
r1/Tc/Lh • 151 Remove HA Elements • 1168
R2 • 134 Remove Password • 110
r2/rc • 151 Remove PCF Files from Conversion List •
1219

Index
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible • 89 Rigid • 130

Report • 1082 Rigid Element Application • 925
Report Template Editor • 623 Rigid Support Displacement Criteria • 173,
Report Types • 769 276
Reports Navigation Toolbar • 629 Rigid Weight • 925
Reports Tab • 1081 Rigids • 82
Reset • 382, 654 Rigids Input Export Option • 1122
Reset Default Custom Report Templates • Rod Increment (Degrees) • 59
634 Rod Tolerance (Degrees) • 59
Reset Toolbar Layout • 385 Rotate • 345
Reset View on Refresh • 345 rp/do • 150
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers Run a static analysis • 35
• 178 Running the Static Analysis • 556
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value rx • 457
Is . . . • 886 RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy,
Response Factor R (ASCE) • 280 vecz) • 165
Response Modification R • 745 rx stiffness • 457
Restore Previous Anchor Size • 85 RX, RY, or RZ • 165
Restore Previous Hanger Size • 85 ry • 457
Restore Previous Operator • 85 ry stiffness • 457
Restore Previous Projection Mode • 85 rz • 457
Restore Previous Render Mode • 86 rz stiffness • 457
Restore Previous Restraint Size • 86
Restore Previous View • 86 S
Restrained Weight Case • 934
Restraint CNode • 82 S3D Graphics Environment Dialog Box • 414
Restraint Codes • 1123 S3D/SPR Model View • 410
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates S3D/SPR Visibility Options • 414
• 1065 Sa(0.2) (NBC) • 291
Restraint Helix is a Line • 91 Save <filename> • 242
Restraint Report - In Local Element Save Animation to File • 782
Coordinates • 605 Save As • 243
Restraint Reports Output Report Option • Save As Dialog Box • 243
1142 Save as Graphics Image • 243
Restraint Summary • 607 Saving an Image for Later Presentation •
Restraints • 82, 158, 353, 641, 769 407
Restraints Input Export Option • 1122 SC • 211
Restraints Report • 604 Seam Welded • 120, 820
Restraints Summary Report Output Report seamless • 1265
Option • 1143 Seam-Welded • 130
Restraints Tab • 600 Seawater Data • 960
Restraints Toolbar • 628 secId • 459, 460, 462
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier • 917 secID • 465
Return to Input • 639 SecId • 475
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Section 1 - Entity Information • 1197
Mode Shapes) • 726 Section 2-Segment Information • 1198
Review Error Report • 384 Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data • 1199
Review Existing Units File • 1084 section Id • 475
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes • 312 Seismic Coefficient Ca • 743
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes • 304 Seismic Coefficient Cv • 743
Review Static Results • 384 Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (mu)
Review Units • 257 (KHK) • 289
Right-side View • 383, 654 Seismic Design Code • 280

Index
Seismic Level (KHK) • 283 Snubbers Tab • 703

Seismic Wizard • 279 Software Revision Procedures • 25
Seismic Zone • 747 Software Support/User Assistance • 24
Seismic Zone (CFE) • 282 SOIL DENSITY • 528
Seismic Zone (KHK) • 284 Soil Model No. • 513
Select a File • 412 Soil Model Type and Classification • 523
Select a units file • 424 Soil Models • 516
Select a vertical axis • 424 Soil Profile (KHK) • 285
Select CAESAR II File • 1116 Soil Type • 747
Select Data Export Output File • 1120 Soil Type (CFE) • 282
Select Load Jobs and Load Case • 896 South African 1992 Database • 506
Select material properties • 425 Southeast ISO View • 383, 655
Select the model definition method • 426 Southwest ISO View • 383, 655
Select Wind Code or Profile • 571 Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) •
Selection • 82 727
Send Reports to Microsoft Word • 768 Spatial or Modal Combination First • 726
Series • 872 Special Execution Parameters • 316
Set Default Data Directory • 37 Specify Revision Number • 1116
Set Displacement Vector • 187 Spectrum • 763
Set North Direction • 320, 343 Spectrum Analysis • 711
Set project information • 789 Spectrum Name • 741
Set Report Font • 631 Spectrum Type • 741
Set/Change Password • 109 Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab • 676
Settings • 72 Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab •
SH1, SH2, ... SH9 • 214 681
Shadow Mode • 91 Spectrum/Time History Profile • 684
shape • 472 Spring Design Requirements • 934
Shell Outside Diameter • 921 Spring Forces • 272
Shell Thickness • 921 spring hanger • 1265
Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack Spring Rate • 178
(Y/N) • 753 Square Root of the Sum of the Squares
Show Bounding Box • 91 Method • 729
Show Informational Messages • 345 Standard Operators Toolbar • 367
Show Lines • 79 Standard Reports • 603
Show Model • 79 Standard Toolbar • 366, 626
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model • 414 Standard Views Toolbar • 368
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index • Start Node • 342, 672, 675, 685, 702, 1168
108 Starting CAESAR II • 29
SIF Scratchpad • 147 Starting Frequency • 669
SIFs & Tees • 134 Starting Point X • 413
SIFs and STRESSES • 97 Starting Point Y • 413
SIFs Tees Input Export Option • 1131 Starting Point Z • 413
SIFs/Tees • 82 Static Analysis • 536
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible • 89 Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog
Site Class (ASCE) • 280 Box • 558
Site Class (NBC) • 291 Static Analysis Fatigue Example • 974
Site Coefficient Fa • 744 Static Analysis Overview • 536
Site Coefficient Fv • 744 Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint
Slipon • 272 Status • 717
slip-on flange • 1265 Static Load Cases Output Report Options •
Small End Hub Thickness • 857 1141
Smooth Transitions • 91 Static Output Processor • 594
Snubbers Active • 568 Static Seismic Inertial Loads • 945

Index
Static Seismic Load Cases • 545 Surface Velocity • 591

Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab • 696 SUS Case Sh • 570
Status Tab • 1083 Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear
Steel • 82 Restraints • 941
Stif • 167 Swedish Method 1 and 2 • 1032
Stiffened Length of Vessel Section • 847 Sy • 221
Stiffness • 704 SY (c) • 222
Stiffness Factor for Friction • 718 SY1, SY2, ... SY9 • 216
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory SYa • 222
Implementation • 952 System Design Factor • 233
Stoomwezen • 1035 System Level Items • 95
Stop Node • 672, 676, 685, 703
Stream Function Order • 591 T
Stream Function Wave Theory
Implementation • 953 T/Th/T'b • 149
Stress Concentration Factor • 822 Tag (Hanger Tag) • 171
Stress Concentration Factors • 157 Tag (Restraint Tag) • 168
Stress Concentrations and Intensification • Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion • 187
822 Tank Modulus of Elasticity • 187
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad • Tank Node (optional) • 185
1235 Tank Outer Diameter • 186
Stress Intensification Factors and Stress Tank Wall Thickness • 186
Indices Details • 144 Target Stress • 299
Stress Isometric Tutorials • 796 TD/12 Modulus Correction • 229
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz • Te/Tb • 150
885 Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface •
Stress Reports Output Report Option • 1146 1155
Stress Summary • 615 Technical Discussion of the PIPENET
Stress Type • 563 Interface • 1153
Stresses • 613, 773 Technical Discussions • 925
Stresses Extended • 614 Technical Notes on CAESAR II
Stresses Tab • 600 Hydrodynamic Loading • 954
Stresses Toolbar • 628 tee • 1265
Structural Code • 884 tee, extruded (drawn) • 1265
Structural Database • 67 Tees • 361, 649
Structural Databases • 490 Temperature • 1074
Structural Group • 747 Temperature Change • 187
Structural Steel Checks - AISC • 882 TEMPERATURE CHANGE • 528
Structural Steel Example #1 • 426 Temperature Dependent Stress Value •
Structural Steel Example #2 • 436 1076
Structural Steel Example #3 • 445 Temperature-Pressure Table • 201
Structural Steel Graphics • 422 Temperatures • 122, 365, 653
Structural Steel Input Examples • 426 Ten Percent Method • 728
Structural Steel Model Basics • 416 Text Options • 88
Structural Steel Modeler • 416 The Dynamic Analysis Window • 665
Structure Group (CFE) • 282 The Right Hand Rule • 1050
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load • 178
Eigenvalues • 734 Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature • 318
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) • 736 thermal expansion • 1265
Suction Nozzle Tab • 910 Thermal Expansion • 124
Summary Report • 388 THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENT •
Supply Header Pipe Wall Thickness • 755 528
Supply Press. (abs) • 754 Thermal Factor (k) • 234

Index
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Type • 127, 137, 149, 159, 903

Vent Exit Limit • 758 Type 1 Accounting Method • 1080
Thickness • 831, 849 Type 2 Accounting Method • 1080
Thickness 2 • 133
Thrust at the End of the Exit Piping • 759 U
Thrust at the End of the Manifold Piping •
759 UBC • 741
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit • 757 UCS-66 Curve • 843
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface • UK 1993 Database • 508
756 UKOOA • 1043
Tied • 270 Ult Tensile Stress • 1075
Time • 749 Ultimate Axial Load • 515
Time History • 715, 763 Ultimate Downward Load • 516
Time History Analysis • 668 Ultimate Lateral Load • 514
Time History Animation • 95 Ultimate Upward Load • 515
Title Input Export Option • 1139 Uncompressed Gasket Thickness • 860
Title Lines • 638 Underground Pipe Modeler • 509
Title Page • 273 Underlying Theory • 985
to • 453, 454, 456, 458, 459, 461, 464, 467, Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS)
469, 470, 472, 478 and Occasional (OCC) Load Cases • 553
To • 114 Understanding Jobs • 29
To Node • 512 Undo • 256
Toggle Graphics Update • 382 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH • 528
Toolbars • 365 Unif • 467
Toolbars tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 380 Uniform Load in G's • 318
Tools Menu • 44, 384 Uniform Load Input Export Option • 1127
Top • 78 Uniform Loads • 205, 358, 646
Top View • 383, 654 Unit • 489
torsion • 476 Units Conversion Data • 1108
Torsion Index (It) • 139 Units File Name • 67
Torsion SIF (it) • 138 Units File Operations • 1083
Torsional (Nozzle) • 195 Unsupported Axial Length • 888
Torsional Moment • 924 Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) •
Torsional Moment (MT) • 852 888
Torsional Moment MT • 839 Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane
Torsional Spring Rates • 268 Bending) • 888
Transforming from Global to Local • 1065 Untied • 270
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing • Update History • 1229
757, 759 Updates and License Types • 27
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening • Updating Properties from the 3D Model • 399
757, 759 Use AutoCAD Colors • 79
Trunnion Tab • 821 Use Culling Frustrum • 77
Tube Bundle Direction • 917 Use Fixed Size Restraints • 91
T-UNIV • 271 Use FRP Flexibilities • 72
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric Use FRP SIF • 73
drawing using the default drawing style • Use Keyboard for Walkthrough • 79
797 Use Model Bounding Box • 413
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Use Notes 6, 9, 10 • 816
Output features • 799 Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) • 738
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and Use PD/4t • 104
configure annotations preferences • 803 Use Pipe Materials Only • 342, 1220
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends • 63
template • 806

Index
Use Pressure Stress Indices (Div. 2 AD Vessel Material (Optional) • 184, 190, 196
560.7) • 852 Vessel Node • 832
Use Schneider • 98 Vessel Node (Optional) • 181, 188, 191
Use System Units • 1116 Vessel Outer Diameter • 183, 189, 196
Use Uniform Background Color • 78 Vessel Pad Thickness • 183, 189, 196
Use WRC 329 • 98 Vessel Tab • 832, 848
User Defined Time History Waveform • 748 Vessel Temperature (Optional) • 184, 189
User ID • 96 Vessel Type • 189, 832
User Material Database Filename • 67 Vessel Wall Thickness • 183, 189, 196
User-Defined • 476 Video Driver • 86
User-Defined Axial Stif • 514 View Animations • 635
User-Defined Downward Stif • 515 View Load Cases • 768
User-Defined Lateral • 514 View Menu • 49, 365, 626
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping View Reports • 768
System • 144 View/Edit File • 1085
User-Defined Upward Stif • 515 Visibility % • 91
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions • Visual Options • 89
1005
Using Legends to Check Your Model • 372 W
Using Local Coordinates • 1056
Using Microsoft Excel • 632 Walking Through the Model • 408
Using Microsoft Word • 631 Wall Thickness • 362, 650, 822, 830, 832,
UTS (c) • 222 848
UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9 • 216 Wall Thickness (WRC 297 Nozzle) • 851
UTSa • 222 Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe • 819
U-UNIV • 271 Wall Thickness of Bend • 819
ux, uy, uz • 468 Warning Messages • 387
Warnings • 622
Water Depth • 591
V Wave Data • 958
valve • 1265 Wave Direction Cosines • 592
Valve • 260 Wave Height • 592
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Wave Kinematics Factor • 592
Gas Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas Wave Loads • 208
Conditions • 758 Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load
Valve/Flange Files Location • 68 Case Editor Dialog Box) • 590
Valves and Flanges • 68 Wave Period • 592
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9 • 198, 205 Wave Phase Option • 592
Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3 • 207 Wave Theory • 591
Version and Job Title Information • 1111 B1 • 141
Vertical • 488 WELD (D) • 140
Vertical In-line Pump • 902 Weld ID • 141, 157
Vertical Moment • 924 weld neck flange • 1265
Vertical Response Magnification Factor Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) • 1075
(KHK) • 286 Weld Type • 816
Vertical Shear Force • 924 Welded • 272
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, What is a Load Case? • 538
VZ • 188 What's New in CAESAR II • 19
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosines VX, VY, WI Factor • 120
VZ • 181, 185, 191 Width to Height Ratio • 301
Vessel Diameter (WRC 297) • 848 Wind / Wave • 207
Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297) • 848 Wind Direction Specification • 590
Vessel Material • 833, 848 Wind Loads • 207, 471, 946

Index
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load XSPR、YSPR、ZSPR • 165

Case Editor Dialog Box) • 571
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation Y
(User-Defined) • 589
Wind Shape Factor • 208 y • 457
Wind Wave Input Export Option • 1128 Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle
Wind/Wave • 359, 647 Face • 919
Wizards Toolbar • 379 Y Distance to Discharge • 911
+Mill Tol % • 120 Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 • 912
Wl for Bends • 130 Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 • 913
WN • 272 Y Distance to Suction • 910
Work with Reports • 595 Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle • 911
Working with Load Cases • 542 Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle • 910
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle •
Stresses • 823 912
WRC 107 Stress Summations • 827 Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle • 919
WRC 107/537 Load Conventions • 834 Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle • 912
WRC 297 • 179 Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle • 914
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations • 1235 Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle • 910
WRC Bulletin 107(537) • 825 Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle •
WRC Bulletin 297 • 844 913, 914
WRC-107 Interpolation Method • 63 Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle • 919
WRC-107 Version • 840 y stiffness • 457
WRC-107(537) Version • 63 YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR • 529
Wt/Sch • 119 Yield Stress • 1075
Yield Stress Criterion • 104
ym • 474
X Young’s Modulus • 885
x • 456 Young's Modulus • 888
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz) • ys • 474
164
X Distance to Discharge • 911 Z
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 • 912
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 • 913 z • 457
X Distance to Suction • 910 Z Axis Up • 881
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle • 911 Z Distance to Discharge • 911
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle • 910 Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 • 912
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle • Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 • 913
912, 914 Z Distance to Suction • 910
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle • 919 Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle • 911,
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle • 911 912
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle • 910 Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle • 910
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle • Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle •
913, 914 913, 914
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle • 919 Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle • 919
x stiffness • 457 Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle • 911
X, Y, or Z • 164 Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle •
x, y, z • 453 913, 914
X2, Y2, Z2 • 165 Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle • 919
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD z stiffness • 457
(VECX, VECY, VECZ) • 165 Z-Axis Vertical • 320, 840, 894, 901, 917
XROD, YROD, ZROD • 165 Zero Length Expansion Joints • 131
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB • 165

Index
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> #

Time History Output Cases • 723
力
力/力矩 • 205

C 2 UG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C 2 UG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAESAR II

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

CAESAR II User's Guide 2

CAESAR II User's Guide 3

Getting Started ..................................................................................................................................... 28

Configuration Editor ............................................................................................................................ 55

CAESAR II User's Guide 4

Piping Input Reference ...................................................................................................................... 111

CAESAR II User's Guide 5

View Menu .............................................................................................................................. 365

Structural Steel Modeler .................................................................................................................... 416

CAESAR II User's Guide 6

Braces ..................................................................................................................................... 482

Underground Pipe Modeler ............................................................................................................... 509

Static Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 536

CAESAR II User's Guide 7

Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box ............................................................................... 558

Static Output Processor .................................................................................................................... 595

Dynamic Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 658

CAESAR II User's Guide 8

Harmonic Analysis ................................................................................................................... 668

CAESAR II User's Guide 9

Snubbers Tab ................................................................................................................................ 705

CAESAR II User's Guide 10

Dynamic Output Processing ............................................................................................................. 768

Generate Stress Isometrics ............................................................................................................... 790

Equipment Component and Compliance .......................................................................................... 813

CAESAR II User's Guide 11

Intersection Crotch Thickness.................................................................................................. 819

CAESAR II User's Guide 12

API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)................................................................... 925

Technical Discussions....................................................................................................................... 929

CAESAR II User's Guide 13

Miscellaneous Processors .............................................................................................................. 1072

CAESAR II User's Guide 14

External Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 1093

CAESAR II User's Guide 15

How to Use the LIQT Interface............................................................................................... 1160

CAESAR II User's Guide 16

PCF Interface Custom Attributes ........................................................................................... 1205

CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data .................................................................................................. 1230

Update History ................................................................................................................................. 1233

CAESAR II User's Guide 17

Glossary ........................................................................................................................................... 1267

Index ................................................................................................................................................. 1271

CAESAR II User's Guide 18

Material and Content

CAESAR II User's Guide 19

Support and Element Identification

CAESAR II User's Guide 20

Load Case Editor

CAESAR II User's Guide 21

CAESAR II User's Guide 22

What are the applications of CAESAR II?

Why is CAESAR II from other pipe stress software?

CAESAR II User's Guide 23

CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis application. It is a widely recognized product

About the CAESAR II Documentation

Software Support/User Assistance

CAESAR II User's Guide 24

Software Revision Procedures

How do I find out about software updates?

Can software updates be applied to any version?